Vericut Help PDF

Back to CGTech Help Library
VERICUT HELP
Version 7.4
VERICUT Help
Getting Started
Introduction
The majority of the features described in the following sections are common to the VERICUT
line of products (Verification, Machine Simulation, OptiPath, etc.), to VERICUT Composite
Simulation, and to VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. Any exceptions will be noted in the
section in which the feature is documented.
Unless stated otherwise, the term VERICUT, for example VERICUT Files, used in the following
sections refers to VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, and VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation.
1
VERICUT Help
Introduction to VERICUT
VERICUT simulates or replaces costly steps of the NC data verification process, plus optimizes
the efficiency of material removal. By simulating NC programs, VERICUT can reduce or eliminate
the time-consuming and expensive steps of the traditional data prove-outs. The program also
optimizes program feed and speeds to increase the efficiency of the machining process. This all
adds up to lower costs and higher profits for your business.
Need training? Visit the CGTech web site at www.cgtech.com and click Training, in the Services
pull-down menu, for training course descriptions, schedules, and online registration.
NC program verification process with VERICUT:
VERICUT interactively simulates the material removal process of NC program data. Instead of
messy wax or foam models, or costly prove-outs that waste valuable production time, a
simulated VERICUT part is graphically produced on your computer screen. VERICUT then
verifies the accuracy of the NC program and makes certain the finished part matches the design
model. Before any machine time is spent, VERICUT catches discrepancies that could corrupt the
cutting process and identifies the responsible NC program records for fast and easy adjustment.
The input into VERICUT is NC program data from almost any source. G and M code data as well
as APT type CL-files are directly processed by VERICUT. Similar to the requirements of
2
VERICUT Help
machining a real part, VERICUT needs the NC program data, a description of the raw stock
material to be machined, and descriptions of the cutting tools used to machine the part. The
result of the verification process is a solid model of the machined part and an error Log file
reporting any machining errors detected during the simulation. The VERICUT model can be
inspected, saved, or used as the stock material for another NC program.
In addition to streamlining the verification process, VERICUT dramatically boosts productivity
on the shop floor. Automated and user-selectable optimization settings in VERICUT let you
maximize the material removal process. The feed rate and cutting speed of each NC program
automatically adjust based on the depth, width, and angle of each cut. In fact, you can even set
VERICUT to compensate for dull or custom cutters or other elements unique to your operation.
VERICUT simulates up to 5-axis milling, drilling and wire EDM operations, as well as turning and
combination mill/turn machining. With a complete line of specialization modules for added
features and functionality, VERICUT is truly the total simulation, verification, and optimization
solution for unleashing NC productivity.
Installing VERICUT
In most cases installing VERICUT is a straight-forward and easy task, requiring only a few
minutes of time. Prior to installing any software, review the system requirements and the
installation procedure for the computer type on which you intend to operate VERICUT.
Detailed step-by-step instructions are provided in the installing_cgtech_products.pdf included
on the VERICUT software CD, and online in the Installing CGTech Products section of the
CGTech Help Library. Follow all applicable steps to ensure smooth VERICUT installation and
successful operation.
3
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Licenses and Options
In the following discussion the term "VERICUT" represents VERICUT, VERICUT Composite
Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. Any exceptions will be noted within the
topic.
VERICUT licenses and capabilities differ, depending on the environment in which VERICUT is
being operated. A modular approach provides the flexibility to purchase only the capabilities
you need. As your needs change, you can add the appropriate licenses to increase VERICUT's
functionality. The terms "licenses" and "options" are synonymous, since each option for
VERICUT is licensed by CGTech. It is not necessary to install any additional software to add an
option. CGTech provides a license that allows immediate access. See Product Line, on the
CGTech website, for complete details on available options.
CGTech software licenses allow you to share VERICUT over a network. Only one user may
access a given license at a time. CGTech's license system supports XP, XP64, Win7, and Win7
(64). See VERICUT System Requirements, on the CGTech website, for more detailed
information. The server and networked workstations can be different computer types.
Licensing for VERICUT

VERICUT 7.4 licensing is required. If you do not have a 7.4 license, obtain licensing from CGTech
as described below.
4
VERICUT Help
7.4 licenses are issued via email only. Your 7.4 license will be emailed to the primary VERICUT
user at your company. If you do not have licensing, submit an application via CGTech website.
NOTE TO NEW CUSTOMERS — You will need to know the computer ID (Ethernet address)
of the computer on which the CGTech Network License Server is to operate. To determine the
computer ID, see the steps described in the Installing CGTech Products section of the CGTech
Help Library. (ref. Determine Your Host ID and Request a License).
5
VERICUT Help
VERICUT with SpaceMouse
VERICUT supports 3Dconnexion 6 axis input devices (SpaceMice) on Windows. Use of these
devices requires a driver known as 3DxWare.
A configuration file (VERICUT.scg) is required and is accessed by the 3DxWare driver on startup.
This file is distributed by 3Dconnexion with the most recent version of their driver.
While beta testing has shown that VERICUT generally works correctly with various older models
and older versions of the device drivers, CGTech recommends using the latest driver version. It
can be downloaded from www.3dconnexion.com. The VERICUT configuration file was added to
3DxWare version 2.3 build 5, September 4, 2002.
NOTE: 3Dconnexion motion control devices currently work with VERICUT on Windows
platforms only.
6
VERICUT Help
Performance Considerations
topic.
This section describes ways to help increase VERICUT productivity.
System considerations
Computer speed — VERICUT runs faster on faster computers. When comparing computers
made by different manufacturers, you can get a general idea how VERICUT will perform by
comparing the processor speed for floating point computations.
Multiple processors — VERICUT runs 10-20% faster on computers with dual processors over a
comparable computer with a single processor.
Memory — The amount of memory available to VERICUT can make a difference. See "VERICUT
System Requirements" for memory recommendations. If you intend to process large tool
paths, complex cutting operations, or use AUTO-DIFF, you may need more memory. VERICUT
uses virtual memory (hard disk) when physical memory (RAM) is exhausted. Best performance
is obtained when sufficient physical memory is available to VERICUT. Excessive memory does
not make VERICUT run faster, however, insufficient memory will slow it down.
Running concurrently with other applications — Even though your system may run VERICUT or
other large applications (e.g. CAD/CAM packages) comfortably, running them concurrently may
cause competition for resources: memory, disk space, etc. Under these conditions the
computer begins "paging" or "swapping" memory (a.k.a. "disk thrashing"), which adversely
affects performance. Symptoms of disk thrashing are: constant hard drive activity or noise,
active applications are slow, "Out of memory" error messages or warnings appear. In the worst
case you can run out of all available memory which can cause your computer to crash or hang.
When determining the amount of memory the system needs to run your applications, be sure
to consider the memory requirements of ALL applications that will be run concurrently.
Graphics cards — VERICUT uses 2-D raster (pixmap) graphics. It does not use triangle shading
(such as with a 3-D API like OpenGL or Direct3D), texture mapping, or much (if any) vector
drawing. All graphics cards (even the cheapest) do pixmap graphics. The card needs enough
display or video memory to drive the display resolution at the desired number of colors. For
example, 8 mb of display memory may be enough to do a 1024 x 768 display at True Color, but
may only be able to do 64k colors at 1600 x 1024 resolution. VERICUT 5.0 or higher performs
7
VERICUT Help
best in a True Color display environment. More expensive does not necessarily mean "better
for VERICUT". Lower cost cards frequently outperform expensive cards when running VERICUT.
Tolerances
Cutting Resolution — The "Cutting Resolution" value (ref. Project menu > Settings > Project
Settings tab) controls the accuracy of cuts applied to the workpiece. This value directly affects
the speed and quality of the results from comparing or exporting models, optimizing tool paths,
checking for holder collisions, "Fast Feed" errors, dynamic rotation speed, and zoom speed. A
larger Cutting Resolution value makes VERICUT go faster, but the resulting cut model and
collision checking will be less accurate. A smaller Cutting Resolution value may slow the
simulation, but provides the high level of accuracy needed to perform detailed model analysis
or export, optimization, etc.
 A larger Cutting Resolution value is probably okay for quick visual checks, or when only
X-Caliper will be used to analyze the model (no AUTO-DIFF).
 Use a smaller Cutting Resolution value if you expect to use AUTO-DIFF, Model Export,
OptiPath, or examine very small model details.
Model file tolerances — Model files, such as Stereo lithography (STL) or VERICUT model files,
exported from CAD systems should be created using tolerances appropriate for how they will
be used in VERICUT. For example, models that will be used as stock workpieces, holding
fixtures, or NC machine components probably do not need to be as accurate as models that will
be used by AUTO-DIFF to check for gouges or excess material. Outputting CAD models with
excessively small tolerance values can result in very large model file sizes that cause VERICUT to
use large amounts of memory. Similar considerations apply to tolerances for converting IGES
model files that will be used in VERICUT. Assuming you have enough memory, model file
size/complexity does not affect cutting speed in VERICUT.
Other tips and tricks

Axes display — Axes displayed in the graphics area (e.g. via View menu > View Axes or right-
click shortcut menu) slow cutting speed. For best performance clear all axes before cutting.
Fixture display — Fixtures displayed in the "Workpiece" view slow cutting speed. For best
performance, set Visibility to Machine View on the Component Attributes tab of the Modeling
window. (e.g. via Project menu > Setup Models > Define: Component Attributes tab or double-
click on the fixture component in the Component Tree)
Skip Motion and Animation Speed control — Features on the Project menu > Processing
Options > Motion window directly affect cutting speed. Skipping cuts can make VERICUT run
faster by updating the display less frequently, especially when multi-axis cuts, large cutters, or
tools with holders are involved. Also, for best performance ensure the Animation Speed slider,
located at the bottom of the VERICUT main window, is positioned as far right as it will go
("Fast").
8
VERICUT Help
No Animation — This feature, on the Project menu > Processing Options > Motion window,
enables you to reduce processing time. When No Animation is toggled "on", the graphics
display is not updated until either processing is complete or you Stop the processing. At that
time the cut model is displayed in it "final" state or the state that it was in when processing was
stopped. You can also toggle No Animation On/Off using the No Animation icon, , in the
VERICUT toolbar.
Tool holders — Using tool holders enables VERICUT to detect when non-cutting portions of the
tool assembly remove material or crash into clamps/fixtures holding the workpiece. You can
minimize this effect by modeling only portions of the tool assembly that can be involved in a
collision. For example, don't bother modeling the taper of a milling tool holder (portion that
seats inside the spindle). If you don't have concerns about tool holder collisions, VERICUT will
run faster if tool holders are not displayed, e.g.: Project menu > Processing Options > Motion:
clear the "Display Holders in Workpiece View" checkbox.
Status and NC Program panels — Opening these panels via the Info menu provides valuable
information about the machining process. However, since VERICUT updates them with each NC
Program record processed, having them open while cutting slows performance. For best
performance, close them before cutting. You can reopen them later, as needed for reference.
Address unsupported codes in G-Code tool paths — When processing G-Code tool paths,
"unsupported" codes cause messages to be written to the VERICUT Log file and the VERICUT
main window message area. Reporting numerous unsupported codes can slow performance
dramatically. Avoid writing "false" errors and the corresponding time loss by addressing
unsupported codes via the NC control configuration. To ignore codes that are unimportant to
the simulation, use Configuration menu > Word/Address to add groups that will have
unsupported codes call the macro, IgnoreMacro.
Faster zooming — Following is a technique to improve the zoom and display speed, and
eliminate the post zoom delay between pressing Play and resuming cutting. Create a second,
smaller view window (View menu > Layout > Add View) and position it to the side. Cut the
part. When you want to see an area in more detail, use the smaller window for zooming. This
protects the refined display in the larger window. Because VERICUT needs only to update the
smaller image, you get zoom images much faster than performing the operation in the larger
window. Also, when you restart the simulation there is virtually no delay before VERICUT starts
cutting again.
9
VERICUT Help
Disable Report — This feature on the Analysis menu > AUTO-DIFF window: Settings tab
enables you to turn off the AUTO-DIFF Report feature to reduce AUTO-DIFF processing time.
For large NC program files, generating the report can take a significant amount of time. When
toggled "off", you will still see the AUTO-DIFF results in the graphics area.
Want more VERICUT tips and tricks from the experts? Visit the CGTech web site at
www.cgtech.com and click "SUPPORT PAGE", then look for "Tips and Tricks".
10
VERICUT Help
Overview of Using VERICUT
VERICUT enables you to simulate the NC machining process with software files, 3-D models,
and functions. Setting up an NC program to be processed by VERICUT is similar to setting up an
NC program to run on an NC machine tool.
Tip: Try using the general purpose startup files in the \library\ folder of your VERICUT
installation to set the simulation environment, and then add your stock models, NC programs,
and cutting tools.
See Library Files, also in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for details.
Requirements for a simulation

VERICUT requires three things to simulate the cutting action of an NC program, the same things
that are required to machine the actual part on an NC machine tool:
Stock — raw material, or "workpiece" to be machined
NC Program — NC data describing cutting tool positions, machine information, and other data
required to operate a machine tool
Cutting tools — shapes and sizes of cutting tools used to machine the workpiece
The items below are optional, however, can aid in the verification effort.
Fixture — hardware used to hold the workpiece for machining
Designed part — the theoretical perfect machined part
Operator instructions — notes about actions required by the machine operator which must
be followed in order to successfully machine the part, such as: part setup, clamp/fixture
changes, tool changes, etc.
The table below shows the requirements for setting up an NC Program to run on an NC
machine tool, and how these requirements are met in VERICUT.
11
VERICUT Help
Requirement NC Machine Tool VERICUT
Workpiece Metal, or other stock material Stock model
NC data NC program file(s) NC program file(s)

(Tool positions and NC G-Code format APT-CLS or G-Code format
machine codes)
Cutting tools Cutting tools Descriptions of cutting tools

shape/size
Holding fixtures Clamp/fixture hardware Clamp/fixture models
Designed part Not available until machined CAD-designed model, or other

design data
Operator instructions Operator instructions Operator instructions
12
VERICUT Help
Basic Steps for Setting up a VERICUT Project
1. In the Project Tree, enter the settings for Setup 1.
2. Save the Project (File menu > Save As)
3. Play Setup 1 (Play/Start – Stop Options)

4. Save Setup1.ip (File menu > In-Process > Save As)
13
VERICUT Help
5. Add or Import Setup 2.

(Project menu > Add New Setup or Project menu > Import Setup
6. Single Step to move the Cut Stock to Setup 2.
(Step/Subroutine Options)
14
VERICUT Help
7. In the Configure Model menu, orient the Cut Stock and then Preserve Stock Transition.
8. In the Project Tree, enter the settings for Setup2.
9. Save/Update the Project (File menu > Save)
10. Play Setup 2 (Play/Start – Stop Options)

11. Save Setup2.ip (File menu > In-Process > Save As)
12. Save the final Project. (File menu > Save)
15
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Axes and Coordinate Systems

VERICUT uses the axes and coordinate systems described below to: define and relate
components and their models, define NC machines, and orient NC programs for proper cutting.
Axes are created by VERICUT and are stored in the Preferences file.
Coordinate Systems (CSYS) are user defined and are stored in the "setup". Using View menu >
View Axes, to display the View Axes window, enables you to display symbols representing
these axes and coordinate systems to see how they relate to each other.
Once displayed, axes and coordinate system symbols remain displayed until turned off via
selecting the item in the View Axes window again. Solid lines indicate that an axis is parallel or
pointing out of the screen. Dashed lines indicate that an axis is pointing into the screen.
See View Axes window, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
AXES
Component axes — (XcYcZc) represent the coordinate system of an individual component. Each
component has its own coordinate system. Components are defined and connected to other
components via the features on the Project Tree, Configure Component menu (ref. Configure
Component menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help). You can display the axes of a
selected component via View menu > View Axes: Component.
Model axes — (XmYmZm) represent the coordinate system of an individual model. Each model
has its own local coordinate system. Models are associated with components to provide 3-D
properties. Models are defined and associated with components via the features on the Project
Tree, Configure Model menu (ref. Configure Model menu in the Project Tree section of
VERICUT Help). You can display the axes of a selected model via View menu > View Axes:
Model.
Machine axes — (XmchYmchZmch) represent VERICUT's "base" or "world" coordinate system.

Applicable mainly to views displaying an NC machine, this coordinate system is referenced
when defining NC machines and tables for use with the machines. X-caliper measurements in a
machine view are relative to this coordinate system. You can display these axes via View menu
> View Axes: Machine Origin.
Workpiece axes — (XwpYwpZwp) represent the coordinate system to which Stock, Fixture, and
Design components are connected. This coordinate system only applies to workpiece views,
and takes on a slightly different meaning, depending on if an NC machine is used in the
simulation.
16
VERICUT Help
 In a simulation where a machine is defined, such as when processing G-Code files, the
workpiece coordinate origin is the origin the machine component responsible for carrying the
Stock, Fixture, and Design components.
 In a simulation where a machine is NOT defined, such as when processing APT-CLS files, the
workpiece coordinate origin is the origin of the non-moving "Base" component to which Stock,
Fixture, and Design components are connected. In previous VERICUT versions, this was known
as the "World coordinate system" (XwYwZw axes).
You can display these axes via View menu > View Axes: Workpiece Origin.
Tool Tip axes — (XtooltipYtooltipZtooltip) The Tool Tip axes represent where the tool tip (the
VERICUT control point) of the "active" tool would be located, relative to the "active" stock, if all
linear axes were positioned at zero. You can display these axes via View menu > View Axes:
Tool Tip.
Driven Point Zero axes — (XdrivenpointYdrivenpointZdrivenpoint) The Driven Point Zero axes
represent where the driven point of the "active" tool would be located, relative to the "active"
stock, if all linear axes were positioned at zero. The display is based on the actual
Machine/Control configuration and therefore may be displayed as a right hand axis, a left hand
axis or possibly even a non-orthogonal axis. The Driven Point Zero axes are displayed in
Workpiece, Machine and Machine/Cut Stock views. You can display these axes via View menu >
View Axes: Driven Point Zero.
COORDINATE SYSTEMS (CSYS)

Coordinate Systems — (Xcsys name Ycsys name Zcsys name) Coordinate systems are defined
by the user via the features on the Project Tree, Configure Coordinate System menu. See
Configure Coordinate System menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Designate the "active" coordinate system by right-clicking on a coordinate system in the Project
Tree and selecting "Active" from the menu that displays. You can also designate the "active"
coordinate system using Project menu > Active Coordinate System and then selecting the
desired coordinate system from the pull-down list.
The "active" coordinate system applies to X-Caliper measurements, Section plane values, and
tool path motions (except when a coordinate system has been associated with an NC program
in the Project Tree (ref. NC Program File under NC Programs Branch in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help)).
17
VERICUT Help
A user-defined coordinate system is typically used to relocate an NC Program for proper

relationship to the workpiece, but you can also activate different coordinate systems for
defining section planes or gathering measurement data.
You can display representations of these coordinate systems via View menu > View Axes:
Coordinate Systems features. Individual coordinate systems can be toggled On/Off and display
colors defined using the features in the View Axes window.
18
VERICUT Help
Using Mathematical Equations/Expressions in VERICUT
Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
Equations/expressions can be used in any data field within VERICUT where a numeric value is
expected. They can be used for "single value" data fields like the Increment value in the Project
Tree Configure Model menu illustration below. The can also be used for "triplet value" data
fields like the Position values shown in the illustration. When using triplet value data fields
separate the equations/values with a blank space.
19
VERICUT Help
EXAMPLES:
Equation / Expression Value as interpreted by VERICUT
sqrt(sqr(4.5) + sqr(2.3) + sqr(6.5)) 8.2334
trunc(543.6544) 543
ec 2.718282
1.256 ** 1.2 1.3145
ec ** (1.2 * log(1.256)) 1.3145
a = acos(3/5) 53.1301
b = asin(4/5) 53.1301
c=2*3*5 30
sqrt(sqr(3) + sqr(5) - c * cos(a)) 4
pi 3.141593
20
VERICUT Help
The following mathematical functions/features are available for use within

equations/expressions in VERICUT:
MATHEMATICAL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION/FEATURE
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
mod Modulus
^ or ** Exponentiation
(, [ or { Left Parenthesis
), ] or } Right Parenthesis
sqr or square Square
sqrt or root Square Root
abs Absolute Value
int or trunc Integer Part
frac Fractional Part
nint Nearest Integer
pi Ratio of circle circumference to diameter
sin Sine (argument in degrees)
cos Cosine (argument in degrees)
tan Tangent (argument in degrees)
21
VERICUT Help
asin Inverse Sine (result in degrees)
acos Inverse Cosine (result in degrees)
atan Inverse Tangent (result in degrees)
atan2(y:x) Inverse Tangent (result in degrees)
sinh Hyperbolic Sine
cosh Hyperbolic Cosine
tanh Hyperbolic Tangent
e or ec Euler's Constant
log Natural Logarithm
analog or exp Natural Anti-Logarithm
log10 Base 10 Logarithm
alog10 Base 10 Anti-Logarithm
fac Factorial
22
VERICUT Help
Working with VERICUT Files
Introduction to Using VERICUT Files
topic.
This section introduces you to files commonly used in VERICUT, and how to work with them.
For a complete list of VERICUT files with detailed descriptions, see VERICUT File Descriptions in
the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Common VERICUT files

The files described below are most commonly used to configure VERICUT, monitor the
verification session, and save session information. Familiarity with these files will enable you to
work more efficiently in VERICUT, and get the most from your verification system.
NC Program files — These files contain data describing cutting tool positions, machine
information, and other information required to operate NC machine tools. VERICUT simulates
and verifies two distinct types of NC program files: ASCII APT-CLS and G-code, or machine code
data. VERICUT must be configured differently, depending on which NC program type you
choose to process.
Project files — These files contain VERICUT session settings, also known as "user configuration
values" or "user values". Virtually everything changeable in the user interface can be saved in a
Project file. Relatively small in size, Project files minimize effort required to configure VERICUT
for processing multiple setup NC jobs.
Tip: Try using the general purpose startup files in the library to set the simulation environment,
and then add your stock models, NC programs, and cutting tools. See "Library Files" in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for details.
In Process files — Also known as "IP files", contain all data necessary to re-establish a VERICUT
session, most importantly, the 3-D VERICUT model with any cuts that were machined into it.
Even the Log file (see below) is restored providing error history of prior NC program files used
to machine the workpiece.
Log files — These files record information about the VERICUT session, such as: error, warning,
and informational messages, machining times, optimization results, and more. Reviewing these
files is an important step in ensuring that simulated tool paths have performed as expected.
23
VERICUT Help
Machine files and Control files — These files contain information required to simulate G-Code
NC program files and machining on an NC machine. Machine files contain such information as:
machine axes, connect order, kinematics, 3-D size/shape, etc. Control files contain the rules for
how machine codes are processed, which word/addresses perform specific functions, order of
processing, etc.
24
VERICUT Help
Configuring VERICUT to start with a custom Project file
By default, VERICUT starts with either the "vericut.VcProject" (inch sessions) or

"vericutm.VcProject" (mm sessions) Library file. You can change the project file VERICUT starts
with by setting the CGTECH_VCPROJECT environment variable in the "vericut" batch file prior
to the entry that executes VERICUT. The command files are located in the
"platform\commands" folder, where "platform" represents the computer type on which
VERICUT is running (e.g. "windows64\commands")
Example edited "vericut" batch file (added the CGTECH_VCPROJECT entry):
set CGTECH_VCPROJECT=C:\myfolder\myproject.vcproject
%start_cmd% "%CGTECH_JRE%\bin\javaw" %ARG_SPLASH% -Dsun.java2d.noddraw=true -
Xms128m -Xmx512m -Xss6m -classpath
"%CGTECH_CLASSES%;%CGTECH_CLASSES%\CGTech.jar;%CGTECH_CLASSES%\iText.jar;%CGTEC
H_CLASSES%\iTextAsian.jar;%CGTECH_CLASSES%\acrobat.jar;%CGTECH_CLASSES%\MRJToolkit
Stubs.zip" Vericut %ARGSTR%
:end_cgtech
endlocal
25
VERICUT Help
Where VERICUT looks for referenced files
VERICUT looks in the places listed below (in listed order) when trying to find files referenced in
VERICUT files. An example follows.
Look in the folder specified by the path stored in the VERICUT file.
1. If not found, look in the current Working Directory.
2. If not found, look in the parent folder (the folder where the file containing the referenced
file came from).
3. If not found, look in the CGTech Library as specified by the CGTECH_LIBRARY environment
variable.
Example
Consider the following:
VERICUT is run from the M:\mydirectory location.
The command file used to run VERICUT defines CGTECH_LIBRARY to point to C:\Program
Files\VERICUT 7.3.1\library.
Using File > Open, you navigate to D:\projectfiles and select a project file that contains a
reference to a VERICUT Tool Library file stored in E:\NCparts.
VERICUT looks in the following locations to find the Tool Library file.
1. E:\NCparts — specified by the path stored in the VERICUT file
2. M:\mydirectory — the current Working Directory
3. D:\projectfiles — parent folder where the Project file came from
4. C:\Program Files\VERICUT 7.3.1\library — specified by the CGTECH_LIBRARY environment
variable
VERICUT quits looking as soon as a file is found. If all locations are checked without findinging
the referenced file, an error is issued.
26
VERICUT Help
Summary of VERICUT File Types
The sections that follow provide information about the files VERICUT uses and typical file
extensions.
Types of VERICUT files

Files provided by CGTech to assist with simulating NC programs and machine tool motions can
be divided into two categories:
Library files — General purpose files for configuring VERICUT to simulate NC programs and
machine motions. Library files are included in every installation, and include:
VERICUT default files — Default files opened by VERICUT. The files are configured to perform a
short simulation when Play is pressed. Two sets of files provide demonstrations for inch
(vericut.VCProject) and metric (vericutm.VCProject) environments.
VERICUT initialization files — Initialization files opened by VERICUT via File menu > New
Project. Two sets of files provide initialization for inch (init.VCProject) and metric
(initm.VCProject) environments.
Machine and Control files — NC machines and controls intended to help you configure
VERICUT for simulating G-Code NC programs that run on popular NC machining centers.
For information about all of these files, see Library Files, also in the Getting Started section of
VERICUT Help.
Sample files — Files used to demonstrate VERICUT capabilities and options. Sample files are
included with CGTech software on the CD, and are available to all users who choose to load
them.
27
VERICUT Help
VERICUT File Descriptions
topic.
The types of files used by VERICUT to load and save various types of data are listed below in
alphabetical order. See the appropriate section for a description of file contents and formats,
and how to open and save them.
28
VERICUT Help
ACIS Model File
Typical file extension: .sat
An ACIS model file is model file created using the 3D ACIS Modeler (ACIS) owned by Spatial
Corporation (formerly Spatial Technology). An ACIS model file is an ASCII text file.
Use of these files in VERICUT requires an ACIS Model Interface license, and the installation of
the CAD Model Interface files (aka the \"Spatial Technologies\" libraries).
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the ACIS Model Interface.
Also see Installing the Model Interface Modules in the Installing CGTech Products section of
the CGTech Help Library.
29
VERICUT Help
APT Output File

Typical file extension: .apt
An ASCII text file containing APT NC program records resulting from reverse post-processing by
VERICUT. By default when sequenced G-Code data is converted, columns 73-80 in the output
file indicate the block numbers of the G-Code data block where the converted records came
from.
Sequence number output is controlled via the Output Block Sequence Numbers feature in the
Messages section of the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab.
Apt Output Files are created and viewed via the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab APT
Output File features (Project menu > Settings).
Click here to see a sample input G-Code NC Program file.
Click here to see a sample of the resulting APT Output file.
30
VERICUT Help
APT Table File
Typical file extension: .tbl
An ASCII text file used by the Binary CL Converter that contains information necessary to
convert binary APT data into ASCII APT NC program records. Such information includes:
blocking factor, major and minor word classes, sub-classes, etc.
APT Table files are loaded into VERICUT via the File menu > Convert > Binary CL function. APT
Table files can also be specified on the command line when the Binary CL Converter is executed,
such as during batch processing to simulate NC programs without user interaction.
Click here to see a sample APT Table File
The sample APT Table file above, "aptwords.tbl", is located in the \vericut\ folder of your
VERICUT installation.
Tips:
1. The default blocking factor for interpreting binary CL data is 3228. If this does not produce
favorable results, use any text editor to change the blocking factor. Other typical blocking
factors you can try are: 512, 4628, 15476.
2. If the ASCII NC program file output by the converter has major or minor words other than
what you expected, try editing the APT Table file to change the "Word" output for a specific
APT class/subclass.
31
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF Report File
Typical file extension: .rpt, .csv
An AUTO-DIFF Report File is an ASCII text file that contains information about an AUTO-DIFF
model comparison operation, such as identification of all detected errors, and the NC program
history related to each error. This information is valuable when determining the correctness of
the VERICUT simulated cut model, and NC program records responsible for discrepancies
detected by AUTO-DIFF.
An AUTO-DIFF Report file is created when an AUTO-DIFF comparison is performed, and can be
viewed via the "Report" feature. (Ref. Analysis menu > AUTO-DIFF)
The AUTO-DIFF Report File can be saved as a plain text file.
Click here to see a sample AUTO-DIFF Report File in plain text format
The AUTO-DIFF Report File can also be saved in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format that
can be opened as a spreadsheet. When saving the report in CSV format, only the lower "table"
portion of the report is saved. The information in the top of the AUTO-DIFF Report window is
not saved.
Click here to see a sample AUTO-DIFF Report File in CSV file format
See AUTO-DIFF window in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
32
VERICUT Help
AVI File
Typical file extension: .avi
Also known as an Audio-Video Interleaved file, this file contains recorded images of VERICUT.
AVI files are saved (recorded) via the File menu > Images > Record Movie function, and
replayed via File menu > Images > Playback AVI Movie.
See AVI Image Record window and Playback AVI Movie in the File menu section of VERICUT
Help for additional information.
33
VERICUT Help
Batch Script Files

Multiple VERICUT batch sessions can be run via a single executable command by including
VERICUT batch commands in an executable script file. The script file is then submitted to the
operating system for processing. After each batch execution terminates, the operating system
then executes the next command in the script file.
Batch files for different operating systems differ slightly in format. Details will follow later in
this document. In general, each batch command in the script file appears as it would when
entered by itself on the command line. Other operating system commands, such as those that
delete or rename files can also be included in the script file.
Tip: VERICUT batch files can be easily created using VERICUT's Batch Wizard.
Windows batch script files

A batch file to be run on Windows is named with a ".bat" extension, for example
"batchfile.bat". Windows NT batch execution lines in the script file are "called" via the "call"
command to return control to the script file after each VERICUT execution. The examples that
follow show two sample script files.
Windows XP batch script file examples:
Example 1 executes two batch sessions, each processing a part unrelated to the other.
call vericut batch "vcp=part1.VcProject"

call vericut batch "vcp=part2.VcProject"
Example 2 represents a part machined in two setups: the first is configured to automatically
save an In-process file named "setup1.ai" via the AutoSave function. The second uses the
ip=<ipfile> option to load the "setup1.ai" In-process file so cutting can be continued with the
session configuration saved in the "setup2.VcProject" project file.
call vericut batch "vcp=setup1.VcProject"

call vericut batch "vcp=setup2.VcProject" "ip=setup1.ai"
34
VERICUT Help
CATIA V5 Model File
Typical file extension: .CATPart
A CATIA V5 file is a binary file created using CATIA V5 (requires CATIA V5 version R19 with
VERICUT 7.1). Use of these files in VERICUT requires a CATIA V5 Model Interface license, and
the installation of the CAD Model Interface files (aka the \"Spatial Technologies\" libraries).
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the CATIA V5 Model Interface.
Also see Installing the Model Interface Modules in the Installing CGTech Products or the
Installing CGTech Composites Applications section of the CGTech Help Library.
35
VERICUT Help
CGTECH Macro Executable File
Typical file extension: .cme
A CGTECH Macro Executable File is a platform-independent binary file also known as a "CME
file", which is created using the C Macro Extension – Application Programming Interface, or
CME–API (ref. CME-API in the VERICUT Development Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library)
and contains custom macros that control processing G-Code data. In addition to macros, this
file can also establish modals which enable you to further customize how machine code data is
interpreted, and provide access to custom tables containing job and machine related data.
The CME file used to perform these tasks is specified via the Advanced Control Option window:
CME/API tab (ref. Advanced Control Option window: CME/API tab, in the Configuration Menu
section of VERICUT Help).
36
VERICUT Help
Control File
Typical file extensions: .ctl, .xctl
A Control File is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file that contains data describing
how the NC control processes G-Codes. Data in this file includes: a list of interpretable machine
codes, machine code format information, rules for grouping machine codes, and rules for
calling macros. This file is required to interpret G-Code data via the G-Code Data NC program
type. When the C Macro Extension – Application Programming Interface or CME–API (ref.
CME-API in the VERICUT Development Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library) is used to
create a custom CME file, the Control file can also specify a custom CME file to assist with the
simulation.
By default, VERICUT is configured with a "Fanuc" control. Many control configurations are
available in the library that is installed with VERICUT software. See Library Control Files, also in
the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for more
information.
A different Control file can be loaded by right clicking on a Control branch in the Project Tree
and selecting Open from the menu that displays. Use the Open Control window (ref. Open
Control window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Help) that displays to select the desired Control file.
NC control configurations are changed via the "Control" options in the Configuration menu in
the VERICUT menu bar. Use Configuration menu > Control > Save As to save the new file.
The following user and version related information is also saved in the project file:
<Information>
<InfoUserName>JJensen</InfoUserName>
<InfoDateTime>Wed May 23 10:44:30 2012</InfoDateTime>
<InfoVericutVersion>7.2 Beta</InfoVericutVersion>
<InfoBuildDate>May 14, 2012</InfoBuildDate>
<InfoLibraryDate>05/14/12</InfoLibraryDate>
<InfoCustomerName>Best Company</InfoCustomerName>
<InfoCustomerID>012345</InfoCustomerID>
<InfoServerID>001</InfoServerID>
<InfoHostID>00B05E456AB5</InfoHostID>
</Information>
37
VERICUT Help
Encrypted Control Files

A "standard" encrypted (X-File) control file:
 has a .xctl extension
 works with a standard VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation license.
 is a compressed binary file.
 contains all files referenced by the Control file (no external subroutines).
 simulates exactly the same as a standard control file (.ctl)
 disables the Configuration menu features when used in a setup.
 can be created by any user.
 can not be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech so retain your original control (.ctl) file
A "limited" encrypted (X-File) control file:

 has a .xctl extension
 works only for a specific customer with a VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Single Platform license.
 can only be created by CGTech.
 cannot be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech.
Click here to see a sample Control File.
The sample control file, "hei530.ctl", is located in the /library/ folder of your VERICUT
installation.
38
VERICUT Help
Control Report File
Typical file extension: .rpt
A Control Report File is an ASCII text file that contains information about how the current NC
control configuration will interpret various codes. Reported information includes:
G-Codes present in the NC program and macros (actions) the control will perform, variables
used (if any), cutting tools used, subroutines defined and referenced, and more.
Control Report files are created via the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab Control Report
features (Project menu > Settings).
Click here to see a sample Control Report File
39
VERICUT Help
CSYS File
A CSYS File is an ASCII text file containing information necessary to create a VERICUT Coordinate
System using the CSYS from File feature in the Configure Coordinate System menu (ref.
Configure Coordinate System menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). The file contains a
collection of APT CL matrices, possibly with different syntaxes in a single file. The CSYS File is
also used by the csys_file command line argument.
The CSYS file may contain one or all combinations of:
CATIA syntax:
$$*CATIA0
$$*AXS1
$$ 1.00000 .00000 .00000 -4.1552195
$$ .00000 .00000 -1.00000 .00000
$$ .00000 1.00000 .00000 -2.3750391
Use "$$*AXS xx" to name the coordinate system, for example "AXS1" in the above snippet.
The CATIA0 matrix is the standard APT format used in the aerospace industry.
X 1.00000 .00000 .00000 -4.1552195

Y .00000 .00000 -1.00000 .00000
Z .00000 1.00000 .00000 -2.3750391
X-axis Direction Y-axis Direction Z-axis Direction Origin
See the comments in the NC program file for vcmatrix_catia.VcProject, located in the
/samples/APT_CL/ folder of your VERICUT installation for additional examples.
NX syntax:
TOOL PATH/P1
.
.
MSYS/-4.1552195,0.0000000,2.3750391,1.0000000,0.0000000,0.0000000,
0.0000000,0.0000000,-1.0000000
Use "TOOL PATH/ xx" to name the coordinate system, for example "P1" in the above snippet.
40
VERICUT Help
The NX MSYS/ statement is defined as follows:
A common way to show a matrix is via a four-by-three matrix layout:
I J K d
X i1 i2 i1 d1
Y j1 j2 j2 d2
Z k1 k2 k3 d3
An NX MSYS statement, as related to a four-by-three matrix layout, would be:
MSYS/d1,d2,d3,i1,j1,k1,i2,j2,k2
The ijk vector values represent the new toolpath co-ordinate system relative to the master co-
ordinate system.
The d1, d2, d3 distance values represent the X, Y, Z translation distance FROM the master co-
ordinate system origin TO the new toolpath co-ordinate system origin.
The NX MSYS/ statement

MSYS/-4.1552195,0.0000000,2.3750391,1.0000000,0.0000000,0.0000000,
0.0000000,0.0000000,-1.0000000
shown in a four-by-three matrix layout would be:
I J K d
X 1.0000000 0.0000000 0.0000000 -4.1552195
Y 0.0000000 0.0000000 1.0000000 0.0000000
Z 0.0000000 -1.0000000 0.0000000 2.3750391
See the comments in the NC program file for vcmatrix_ug.VcProject, located in the
PTC syntax:
$$-> FEATNO / 102

.
.
TRANS / -4.1552195000, 0.0000000000, -2.3750391000
$$-> CSYS / 1.0000000000, 0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, -4.1552195000, $
0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, -1.0000000000, 0.0000000000, $
0.0000000000, 1.0000000000, 0.0000000000, -2.3750391000
41
VERICUT Help
Use "FEATNO / xxx" to name the coordinate system, for example "102" in the above snippet.
The Pro/ENGINEER matrix is the standard APT format..
X 1.0000000000 0.0000000000 0.0000000000 -4.1552195000

Y 0.0000000000 0.0000000000 -1.0000000000 0.0000000000
Z 0.0000000000 1.0000000000 0.0000000000 -2.3750391000
X-axis Direction Y-axis Direction Z-axis Direction Origin
See the comments in the NC program file for vcmatrix_ptc.VcProject, located in the
VERICUT-MATRIX syntax:
APT/CLS format:
PPRINT/VERICUT-MATRIX, 0, -.8660254,.500, 2.9732902, 1,0,0,0, 1,.500,.8660254,-.7926565
G-Code (Fanuc) format:
(VERICUT-MATRIX, 0, -.8660254,.500, 2.9732902, 1,0,0,0, 1,.500,.8660254,-.7926565)
The syntax can be modified to include an optional name parameter.
PPRINT/VERICUT-MATRIX "name" 1,0,0 ...

(VERICUT-MATRIX "name" 1,0,0 ...
TheVERICUT-MATRIX is similar to the standard APT format with an important difference. The I,
J, and K values in the rows and columns are swapped relative to an APT matrix. The distance
values remain the same as an APT matrix. For many rotations this makes no difference, but for
anything other than a 90, or 180, degree rotation you will have problems. The following APT
matrix
42
VERICUT Help
APT Matrix
I J K D
X 0.000 1.000 1.000 2.9732902
Y -0.8660254 0.000 0.500 0.0000000
Z 0.500 0.000 0.8660254 -0.7926565
VERICUT Matrix
X Y Z D
I 0.000 -0.8660254 0.500 2.9732902
J 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.0000000
K 1.000 0.500 0.8660254 -0.7926565
becomes the following VERICUT-MATRIX record
VERICUT-MATRIX, 0, -.8660254,.500, 2.9732902, 1,0,0,0, 1,.500,.8660254,-.7926565
See the comments in the NC program file for vcmatrix_pprint.VcProject, located in the
43
VERICUT Help
Design Points File
Typical file extension: .pts
An ASCII text file, also known as an "inspection point file”, which contains point locations used
to inspect the VERICUT model when performing an AUTO-DIFF Point comparison operation.
Design Point files are loaded into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu: Model tab (ref.
Configure Model menu: Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help). Point record
formats support specifying surface normals, tolerances, and check distances with any or all
inspection points. Example point record formats follow.
Design Points file record formats:

GOTO/X,Y,Z — where "X,Y,Z" represents the design point location, for example: "GOTO/1,2,3".
GOTO/X,Y,Z,I,J,K — as above plus "I,J,K" represents the surface normal vector, for example:
"GOTO/1,2,3,1,0,0".
GOTO/X,Y,Z,I,J,K,intol,outtol — as above plus "intol" and "outtol" override the Gouge

Tolerance and Excess Tolerance values, for example: "GOTO/1,2,3,1,0,0,.0005,.015". The
overrides are only applied to the point where they are listed.
GOTO/X,Y,Z,I,J,K,intol,outtol,incheck,outcheck — as above plus "incheck" and "outcheck"

override the Gouge Check Distance and Excess Check Distance values, for example:
"GOTO/1,2,3,.1,0,0,.015,.015,.300,.300". The overrides are only applied to the point where they
are listed.
Any combination of the above formats can be included in the Design Points file. There is no
limit to number of records that the file can contain. "$$" comment records and spaces are
permitted.
Click here to see a sample Design Points File
44
VERICUT Help
Die Sinking Simulation Report File
Typical file extension: .htm

A Die Sinking Simulation Report is an HTML file that contains data describing a particular die
sinking process. See Die Sinking Simulation in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
additional information.
Click here to see a sample Die Sinking Simulation Report
45
VERICUT Help
G-Code Log File
Typical file extension: .log
A G-Code Log File is an ASCII text file that contains error, warning and informational messages
about G-Code processing. One of the most valuable pieces of information this file provides is a
copy of each input G-Code data block followed by the converted ASCII APT NC program records
indented by 6 spaces. This allows you to see a direct translation of G-Code versus equivalent
ASCII APT output for all NC program records processed.
G-Code LogFiles are created and viewed via the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab G-Code
Log File features (Project menu > Settings).
For help with interpreting error and warning messages in this file, visit the VERICUT Users'
Forum or contact CGTech technical support via our website, just click on the support link.
Click here to see a sample G-Code Log File
46
VERICUT Help
G-Code Report File
Typical file extension: .rpt
A G-Code Report File is an ASCII text file that contains information about how the current NC
control configuration will interpret a G-Code NC program file. Reported information includes: G-
Codes present in the NC program and macros (actions) the control will perform, variables used
(if any), cutting tools used, subroutines defined and referenced, and more. G-Code Report files
are created via the Info menu > G-Code Report function.
Click here to see a sample G-Code Report File
47
VERICUT Help
IGES Model File
Typical file extension: .igs
An IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) model file, also known as an "IGES file", is an
ASCII text file which describes virtually anything that can be modeled in a CAD system. IGES
data is widely accepted as an industry standard for transferring model data. While IGES model
files containing only 2-D data (lines and arcs) are not useful in VERICUT, files containing 3-D
surfaces and solids can be used to describe stock, fixture, or design models, as well as machine
component shapes.
IGES model files are loaded via the Configure Model menu: Model tab (ref. Configure Model
menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) or can be converted into STL or VERICUT
Polygon model files using the IGES converter.
48
VERICUT Help
Image File
Typical file extension: .img
A platform-independent binary file that contains recorded images of a NC program simulation.

Image files can contain any combination of snapshot (single still image) and animation images
(similar to a movie). These files can be recorded and replayed on any supported computer
platform.
Two types of VERICUT images can be recorded. Both types can be recorded into the same file.
Machining status is automatically recorded with either image type.
Snapshot — creates a single-frame image. These images are also used to mark stop points in an
animation.
Animation — multiple images that when replayed, appear like a simulation (like a movie).
Image files are saved (recorded) via the File menu > Images > Record Movie function, and
replayed via File menu > Images > Playback VERICUT Movie.
See VERICUT Inage Record window and Playback VERICUT Movie in the File menu section of
VERICUT Help for additional information.
NOTE: Image files are not intended for printing. Use File menu > Print View or File menu >
Images > View Capture to print VERICUT images.
49
VERICUT Help
Initialization File
An Initialization File is a text, or subroutine, file used to initialize various types of variables used
during simulation processing. An Initialization File is processed at the same time as the "Start of
Processing" event.
VERICUT supports three types of initialization files: Setup Initialization Files, Machine
Initialization Files, and Control Initialization Files. Each of these types is described below.
Setup Initialization Files
Setup Initialization Files are used to initialize variables used in setups. Setup Initialization Files
are specified using the Initialization File feature found in the Project Tree, Configure Setup
menu: G-Code tab. See Configure Setup menu: G-Code tab in the Project Tree section of
VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on using this
feature.
Machine Initialization Files

Machine Initialization Files are used to initialize variables used by the NC machine. Machine
Initialization Files are specified using the Initialization File feature found on the Machine
Settings window. See Machine Settings window in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on using this feature.
Control Initialization Files.

Control Initialization Files are used to initialize variables used in the NC control. Control
Initialization Files are specified using the Initialization File feature found on the Control Settings
window: General tab. See Control Settings window: General tab in the Configuration menu
section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on using
this feature.
The variables initialized using the Initialization Files can be viewed and monitored in the
Variables window. See Variables window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
Using Multiple Initialization Files

VERICUT only supports specifying one Initialization File of each type. Since an Initialization File
works just like a subroutine file, if you want to pass information in multiple Initialization Files of
a particular type through to VERICUT, create a "master" Initialization File that calls the all of the
other Initialization Files that you want to use. Then point the Initialization File feature for the
particular type at the "master" Initialization File.
50
VERICUT Help
Example
The file names used below are arbitrary.
1. Create "Machine_Initialization_ File1" and set it up to initialize the desired variables. Create
"Machine_Initialization_ File2" and set it up to initialize the desired variables. Repeat as
necessary to create all of the Machine Initialization sub-files..
2. Create a "Master_Machine_Initialization_File" and set it up to call Machine_Initialization_
File1, Machine_Initialization_ File2, Machine_Initialization_ File3, ...
3. In the Machine Settings window, point the Initialization File feature at
"Master_Machine_Initialization_File".
Initialization Files and Multiple Channel Sync Jobs

For Sync jobs with multiple channels, the Initialization Files do not get run multiple times. The
Initialization File will set the variables to the sub-system associated with the first channel.
If you want to set variables for more than one channel, create a "master" Initialization File. Set
it up to call the "ChangeSubsystemID" macro with the name of the first sub-system (channel)
name as the argument and then call the initialization sub-file that you want to use to initialize
the variables for the first sub-system (channel). Repeat the macro call/initialization sub-file
sequence for each additional sub-system (channel). Finish with a final call to the
"ChangeSubsystemID" macro with the name of the first sub-system (channel 1) name as the
argument so that simulation will work correctly.
Point the Initialization File feature at the "master" Initialization File.
Using Initialization Files when the same Variable Names, with different values, are used for
different sub-systems
When the same Variable Names, with different values, are used for different sub-systems,
create a "master" Initialization File. Set it up to call the "ChangeSubsystemID" macro with the
name of the first sub-system name as the argument and then call the initialization sub-file that
that contains the values for the first sub-system. Repeat the macro call/initialization sub-file
sequence for each additional sub-system.
Point the Initialization File feature at the "master" Initialization File.
51
VERICUT Help
In-Process File
Typical file extension: .ip
A part ASCII text-part binary file also known as an "IP file" that contains the data necessary to
re-establish a VERICUT session, including the current VERICUT model (with cuts), user interface
settings, and a copy of the Log file. IP files are also used to "backup" the verification session,
safeguarding against lost work if the session is interrupted by computer or power failure.
You can save an In-process file interactively via File menu > In Process > Save As, or
automatically via the File menu > AutoSave function. You can also save an IP file using the
SAVE_IP, VERICUT-COMMAND record (ref. to VERICUT-COMMAND Record in Automating
VERICUT, in the CGTech Help Library). Due to differences in math processing on various
computer types, IP files are usable on computers of the same type on which they were saved.
In-Process (IP) files are by default compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read these
compressed files directly.
To disable writing compressed IP files, set the environment variable CGTECH_COMPRESS=IP
(ref. Environment Variables, also in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional
information).
Load IP files via File menu > In Process > Open to re-establish a VERICUT session or provide a
VERICUT model for additional machining and analysis. IP files can also be specified on the
command line when VERICUT is executed, such as during batch processing to simulate NC
programs without user interaction.
NOTE: Environment variables can be used to affect VERICUT's use of IP files. For more
information, see Environment Variables also in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
52
VERICUT Help
Inspection Sequence Custom Tolerance File
Typical file extension: .txt
A custom inspection tolerance file is an ASCII text file that contains default tolerances that are
automatically used when creating inspection records in an Inspection Sequence data table.
Click here to see a sample Inspection Sequence Custom Tolerance File
See Customizing VERICUT Inspection in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
53
VERICUT Help
Inspection Sequence File
Typical file extension: .VcInspect
An inspection sequence file is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file used to retain all
the information needed to reproduce the Inspection Sequence data table and the
corresponding inspection markers on the workpiece for a single inspection report.
Click here to see a sample Inspection Sequence File
See VERICUT Inspection in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
54
VERICUT Help
Log File
Typical file extension: .log
The VERICUT LOG FILE is an ASCII text file that contains information about a VERICUT session,
such as: names of NC programs processed, errors, warnings, simulated machining times, and
other informational messages.
When VERICUT is run, it must always be able to open a Log file. When an existing Log file of the
same name is found VERICUT responds differently, depending on the run mode:
VERICUT run in interactive mode — Log file is automatically reset, unless the "append log"
command line option is used.
VERICUT run in batch mode — Log file is automatically reset, unless the "reset log" command
line option is used.
For more information on command line options used with VERICUT, see Command line options
for VERICUT in the Automating VERICUT section in the CGTech Help Library.
Using the Info menu > VERICUT Log function, Log file contents can be viewed, edited, or the file
name changed. For help with interpreting error and warning messages in this file, visit the
VERICUT Users’ Forum or contact CGTech technical support via our website, just click on the
support link.
Click here to see a sample VERICUT Log file.
NOTE: In the VERICUT Logfile "Cutter Stick Out" column of the Tool Summary Table, in cases
where no holder has been defined, or in the case of an APT tool, the "Cutter Stick Out" column
will display the length of the cutter instead of the Cutter Stick Out value.
55
VERICUT Help
Machine File
Typical file extensions: .mch, .xmch
A Machine File is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file that contains data describing
the construction, kinematics, and other properties of an NC machine tool. By default, VERICUT
is configured with a 3-axis vertical mill machine. Many machine configurations are available in
the library that is installed with VERICUT software. See Library Machine Files, also in the Getting
Started with VERICUT section, for more information.
A different Machine file can be loaded into VERICUT by right clicking on a Machine branch in
the Project Tree and selecting Open from the menu that displays. Use the Open Machine
window (ref. Open Machine window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) that displays to
select the desired Machine file.
NC machine configurations are changed via the "Machine" options in the Configuration menu
in the VERICUT menu bar. You can save the new file via Configuration menu > Machine> Save
As.
<Information>
</Information>
56
VERICUT Help
Encrypted Machine Files

A "standard" encrypted (X-File) machine file:
 has a .xmch extension
 works with a standard VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation license.
 contains all files referenced by the Machine file (no external models).
 simulates exactly the same as a standard machine file (.mch)
 can be created by any user.
 can not be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech so retain your original machine (.mch)
file
A "limited" encrypted (X-File) machine file:

 has a .xmch extension
 works only for a specific customer with a VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Single Platform license.
 can only be created by CGTech.
 can not be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech.
Click here to see a sample Machine File.
This sample machine file, "dmg_dmu50v.mch", is located in the /library/ folder of your VERICUT
installation.
57
VERICUT Help
NC Program File
Typical file extension: .mcd (G-Code), .tp (APT), many other extensions depending on the CAM
system.
NC programs or "NC program" files are ASCII text files that contain data describing tool
positions, machine information, and other information required to operate NC machine tools.
NC program files to be simulated or optimized are referenced in VERICUT via the NC Program
Type option, on the Configure NC Programs menu, located in the Project Tree. The NC Program
Types available will vary depending on whether you are using VERICUT or VERICUT Composite
Simulation.
VERICUT does not actually keep a copy of the NC program files, but instead stores NC program
file names and keeps track of which record in the file is being processed.
58
VERICUT Help
NC Program Types
NC programs files used by VERICUT can be divided into two general types: APT-CLS NC and G-
Code. A general discussion of each type follows.
APT-CLS NC program files
APT and CLS NC program files are generic file formats output by CAM systems that are intended
to be easily read by the NC programmer. They are intermediate file formats that typically are
not used directly by the NC machine. Before the data can be used by an NC machine these files
must be post-processed to a G-Code NC program file format containing codes specific to that
machine tool (see "G-Code NC program files" below).
VERICUT processes "Simple ASCII APT" NC programs-meaning all macros, motion commands,
and motion copy routines are pre-processed into an ASCII centerline file containing GOTO,
CIRCLE, CYCLE, and miscellaneous machine commands. No geometry definitions, symbolic
substitutions, macros, or complex motions (such as GORGT, GOLFT, etc.) are present.
Common APT-CLS NC program variations that VERICUT can process are listed below.
APT (RevPost)
CADRA APT
CATIA APT
CV APT
NCL APT
Pro/MFG APT
UG CLS
VERICUT APT
To process one of the APT-CLS NC program variations listed above, be sure to specify the
appropriate NC Program Type on the Configure NC Programs menu, located in the Project Tree.
Click here to see a sample APT NC Program File
The sample NC Program file, "vcmill.tp" is located in the /samples/APT_CL/ folder of your
59
VERICUT Help
G-Code NC program files
G-Code NC program files are formatted for use directly by the NC machine. These files typically
originated as APT-CLS NC program files (see "APT-CLS NC program files" above), and have been
post-processed to contain specific codes needed for a specific machine tool.
To process G-Code NC program files, be sure to specify the NC Program Type=G-Code Data on
the Configure NC Programs menu, located in the Project Tree. While VERICUT easily processes
G-Code data that conforms to the EIA Standard RS-274 format, other variations can also be
simulated with a little configuration effort.
Configuration menu functions provide most of the configurability needed to support various NC
machine and control combinations.
Click here to see a sample G-Code NC program file
The sample G-Code NC program file, "5_axis_collision_detection.mcd", is located in the

/samples/ folder of your VERICUT installation.
60
VERICUT Help
NC Subroutine Files
Typical file extensions: .sub
Subroutines, or "subs" for short, contain additional programming or machine commands, and
can exist within a G-Code NC program file or reside in files separate from the main G-Code
program.
Click here to see a sample NC Subroutine File
61
VERICUT Help
NX Model File
Typical file extension: .prt
An NX model file is a binary file created using Siemens NX CAD system (requires NX6, NX7,
NX7.5, NX8 or NX8.5 with VERICUT 7.3). An NX part file can be opened directly in VERICUT if the
following requirements are met.
1. NX6, NX7, NX7.5, NX8 or NX8.5 must be installed on the computer that's running VERICUT.
2. 32 bit NX must be run with 32 bit VERICUT or 64 bit NX with 64 bit VERICUT.
3. An NX license must be available.
4. The following environment variables need to be set in VERICUT's environment:
UGII_BASE_DIR
UGII_BASE_DIR is setup by an NX installation in the system environment space and
typically points to the place where NX is installed, for example C:/Program Files/UGS/NX
6.0/.
UGII_ROOT_DIR
UGII_ROOT_DIR is setup by an NX installation in the system environment space and
typically points to the location of the NX executable files, for example C:/Program
Files/UGS/NX 6.0/UGII/.
Also, UGII_ROOT_DIR must be set in the execution path (the "path" environment variable).
Since a NX part file can contain multiple models, a pop-up window displays with a list of models
contained in the NX part file. If a model was named in NX, it is listed by name in the window. If
the model was not named in NX, it is displayed in the list as "Unnamed" followed by a number
as shown in the picture below.
62
VERICUT Help
Use of these files in VERICUT requires an NX Model Interface license, and the installation of the
CAD Model Interface files (aka the \"Spatial Technologies\" libraries).
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the NX Model Interface.
Also see Installing the Model Interface Modules in the Installing CGTech Products or Installing
CGTech Composite Applications section of the CGTech Help Library.
63
VERICUT Help
Operations File
Typical file extension: .VcTmp
Introduction
An Operations File, or Ops File, can be used to assemble a project with multiple setups from
several VERICUT project files, which typically have the extension ".VcProject". This assembly
process can only be triggered from the command line that invokes VERICUT. The necessary
command line syntax is;
For Windows ... "ops=D:\My\Path\MyOperationsFile.VcTmp" ...
Any extension can be used in the file name, but by convention ".VcTmp" denotes a temporary
file.
An Operations File is a man-readable text file. Each line of the file is independent and
references a VERICUT project file. A line requests that information from its project file should
be transferred to the project being assembled. A line can request that the entire project and all
its setups be transferred, or that information from one setup be transferred, or that all the
setup-independent information, which we will refer to as project information, be transferred. It
is suggested that the first line of the file should always request at least the project information
from a ".VcProject" file that was saved by VERICUT, so that the new project will have a good
foundation.
Syntax
In the following explanation the Windows path delimiter, "\", is used. Names should be
enclosed in double quotation characters ("). Fields are separated by one or more spaces.
To request that the entire project, with all its setups, be transferred to the new project being
assembled, the syntax of the required line is;
ALL FILE="My\Path\MyProjectTemplate.VcProject"
64
VERICUT Help
To request that the project information from a file be transferred to the new project being
assembled, the syntax of the required line is;
PROJECT FILE="My\Path\MyProjectTemplate.VcProject"
Setup independent information in a project file pertains to the following VERICUT menu items;
Model Export
Colors
Image Recording and Playback
View Capture
AutoSave
View Select/Store
Status
Graphs
Cycle Definitions
AUTO-DIFF
To request that setup information from a file be transferred to the new project, the syntax of
the required line is;
SETUP NAME="Setup A" INDEX=1 SETUP=1 MERGE MERGE_TOOLS FILE="\Path\Tmp.VcProject"
The NAME field specifies the name that the setup will have in the new project.
The INDEX field selects which of the setups in the referenced file will be transferred. An index
value of "1" selects the first setup in the file, "2" would use the second setup, etcetera. The
INDEX field is optional and defaults to 1 if not present.
The SETUP=n field specifies the index of the setup in the merged file that this line refers to. It is
optional and is only required if the MERGE_TOOLS field is present.
The MERGE field specifies that all setup data other than the tool library associated with the
setup being imported should be merged with the current setup data rather than overwriting it.
For example, G-Code Tables will be merged, not replaced, if the MERGE option is included.
Another example would be NC Programs which will be merged, not replaced. This field is
optional.
The MERGE_TOOLS field specifies that the tool library associated with the setup being
imported should be merged with the current tool library rather than overwriting it. This field is
optional.
The FILE field references the VERICUT project file that contains the required setup.
65
VERICUT Help
Note that more than one SETUP line in the Operations File can have the same NAME field. The
first such line would cause a new setup to be appended to the project being assembled, and
subsequent lines could adjust the parameters of that same setup. Setup specific information in
a project file pertains to the following VERICUT menu items;
Views
Sections
Components and Models
NC Programs and Filters
Tools and Tool Changes
APT and G-Code Settings
Coordinate Systems
Control
Machine
Inspection
Die Sinking
OptiPath
Project Naming
The name and location of the assembled project file will be derived from the name and location
of the Operations File. The extension ".VcProject" will replace any extension that the
Operations File's name has, and the assembled project will be placed in the same folder. This
assumes that the user saves the project before explicitly renaming it and before exiting
VERICUT. To remind the user that he needs to save the project before exiting, you can include
another keyword on the command line. Thus you may have;
... "ops=D:\My\Path\MyOperationsFile.VcTmp" ...
66
VERICUT Help
Optimized File
Typical file extension: .opti, .mco (G-Code NC program file) or .tpo (APT NC program file
The Optimized NC program file is created by optimizing NC program feed rates via OptiPath.
For information about using OptiPath, see OptiPath window and Using the OptiPath Window
in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help.
For samples set up to run OptiPath, see the VcProject files that begin with "optipath_" in the
/samples/ of your VERICUT installation.
67
VERICUT Help
OptiPath Library File

Typical file extension: .olb
An ASCII text file that contains optimization data for use by VERICUT's OptiPath feed rate
optimization module. Specific optimization data values are defined per tool intended to be used
in specific machining conditions, e.g. workpiece material, NC machine, etc.
NC program optimization can performed in a variety of ways, including: configuring cutting
tools-to-optimization library records, storing optimization information with tools in a VERICUT
Tool Library, or interactive prompting.
Click here to see a sample OptiPath Library File
68
VERICUT Help
Post-Processor File
Typical file extension: .VcPost
A Post-Processor file is an ASCII text file, created using the CGTech Post Processor, containing all
the information required to read machine independent NC Program data and convert it to G-
Code files for a specific machine/control combination.
69
VERICUT Help
Preferences File
Typical file extension: .prefs
Also known as a "Prefs file", this ASCII text file is automatically saved when you exit VERICUT
and stores such user preferences as:
 VERICUT user interface Look & Feel
 size and locations of VERICUT windows
 state of menu toggles in any window that has them, for example: View menu > Toolbar,
View Axes, etc.
 filters for VERICUT file selection windows
 recent User/Project files opened in VERICUT
The Preferences file is unique for each VERICUT version and each user, based on your login. The
file is named "cgtech_version#_user.prefs" where version# is the current VERICUT version
number. For example, a Prefs file for VERICUT 7.3 has the name "cgtech_73_user.prefs". The
Prefs file is automatically stored in your home folder and is updated each time you exit
VERICUT.
When users share a computer (or an account), CGTech recommends that each user set a unique
CGTECH_USERNAME environment variable to prevent overwriting the Preferences file. See
Environment Variables, also in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
To reset Preferences file settings:

Windows — Windows Start > All Programs > CGTech VERICUT x.x.x > Utilities > Reset
Preferences
where x.x.x is the VERICUT release number, for example 7.3.1
Click here to see a sample Preferences file "cgtech_user.prefs".
70
VERICUT Help
Project File
Typical file extension: .VcProject
A VERICUT Project file is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file containing VERICUT
session settings, also known as "user configuration values" or "user values", including:
measurement units, colors, choices, data field values, folder paths and file names, etc. Project
files are used in VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, and VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation. These files are relatively small in size, yet can control the entire cutting, composite
tape laying, or drill and fastener insertion process and minimize the effort required to configure
the system for processing NC program files.
While Project files are used in VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation, and VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation, project files created in one system are not compatible with another. For
example:
A Project file created in VERICUT cannot be used in VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation.
A Project file created in VERICUT Composite Simulation cannot be used in VERICUT or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation.
A Project file created in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation cannot be used in VERICUT or
VERICUT Composites Simulation.
One of the following warning messages is output if you load a Project file that is not compatible
with the current system.
The warning, "You are opening a VCS project file in VERICUT.", is output after a VERICUT
Composite Simulation project file is loaded in VERICUT.
The warning, "You are opening an AutoFastener project file in VERICUT.", is output after a
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation project file is loaded in VERICUT.
The warning, "You are opening a VERICUT project file in VCS.", is output after a VERICUT project
file is loaded in VERICUT Composite Simulation.
The warning, "You are opening an AutoFastener project file in VCS.", is output after a VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation project file is loaded in VERICUT Composite Simulation.
The warning, "You are opening a VERICUT project file in AutoFastener." is output after a
VERICUT project file is loaded in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
The warning, "You are opening a VCS project file in AutoFastener." is output after a VCS project
file is loaded in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
Project files are saved via the File menu > Save Project function, and loaded via File menu >
Open. Project files can also be specified on the command line when VERICUT is executed, such
as during batch processing to simulate NC programs without user interaction.
71
VERICUT Help
<Information>
</Information>
72
VERICUT Help
Report Template File
Typical file extension: .VcTemplate
A Report Template file is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file containing all of the
formatting information required to generate VERICUT reports.
73
VERICUT Help
Review File
Typical file extension: .vcreview
The Review file is a binary file that contains all of the information required to simulate a
VERICUT Project file. It contains the model information required to display machine, cut stock,
tools etc. It also contains the NC program(s) used to cut the part, tool path data, original view
settings and a copy of the Log file.
NOTE: VERICUT Reviewer files are not upward compatible. They are only compatible with
VERICUT and VERICUT Reviewer of the same version that the reviewer file was created in. For
example, a reviewer file created in V7.2 is only compatible with VERICUT and VERICUT Reviewer
versions V7.2 and V7.2.x. They will not work in V7.3.
74
VERICUT Help
Status File
Typical file extension: .txt
An ASCII text file that contains whatever data is sent to the Status window during the
simulation (ref. Status Window in the Info menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). A Status file is created when
the CGTECH_STATUS environment variable is set to a file name before VERICUT is executed.
The file is overwritten when the VERICUT model is reset.
For each NC program record processed, the following status data is written:
REC — Indicates a NC program record processed.
REC fields — NC program Record Line Number, NC program Record
DATA — Specifies most of the status values separated by commas. Fields not displayed in the
Status window are represented by commas.
DATA fields — Mch Axis Loc- X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, Tool Tip Loc- X, Y, Z, I, J, K, Errors,
Warnings, Time, Time%, Dist, - Dist%, Coolant, Feedrate, OP Feedrate, Spindle, OP Spindle
TOOLCHANGEREC — The record which caused the last tool change (present only if the Status
window is configured to show this field).
TOOLDESC — The current tool description (present only if the Status window is configured to
show this field).
TOOLGEOMETRY — The current tool geometry (present only if the Status window is configured
to show this field).
APT example:
REC,12,GOTO/3,2,1
DATA,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,3,,,,0,0,0.5355,,,,ON ,10 IPM,,500,CLW ,
TOOLCHANGEREC,CUTTER/1.125,.25,0,0,0,0,2.1
Click here to see a sample APT Status File
G-Code example:
REC,20,N0130G0X-.2Y-.3Z2.S1200M3
DATA,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,19,,,4,0,0,1.6979,,,,OFF,2 IPM,,1200,
TOOLCHANGEREC,N0120T4M6
75
VERICUT Help
STEP Model File
Typical file extension: .stp or .step
A STEP model file is a 3D model file formatted in STEP (Standard for the Exchange of Product
Data), an ISO standard exchange format; used for representing three-dimensional model data
in a format that can be recognized by multiple programs. A STEP model file is an ASCII text file.
Use of these files in VERICUT requires a STEP Model Interface license, and the installation of the
CAD Model Interface files (aka the \"Spatial Technologies\" libraries).
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the STEP Model Interface.
Also see Installing the Model Interface Modules in the Installing CGTech Products or Installing
CGTech Composite Applications section of the CGTech Help Library.
76
VERICUT Help
Stereolithography (STL) Model File
Typical file extension: .stl
A Stereolithography model file, also known as an "STL" or "SLA" file, is an ASCII text or binary
file which describes virtually any surfaced or solid model shape. The STL data representing the
model shape is composed of three-sided facets with associated surface normals. STL files
typically originate from a CAD system and represent an enclosed model used by an SLA
machine, such as developed by 3D Systems.
Load Stereolithography model files into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu, Model tab
(ref. Configure Model menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). For an STL file to be
used in VERICUT as a solid model, the STL data must represent a fully enclosed (watertight)
model and have normals that point consistently outward. (STL files used as surface models do
not have to be watertight.) If normals are inconsistent, gaps exist between facets, or facets
overlap, solid model display results are unpredictable. When cutting is started or the model is
analyzed, these symptoms indicate problems exist in the model file data:
 model is not displayed at all
 model is displayed with holes, gaps, or seams
 portions of the model are missing
Tip: If any of the above symptoms are experienced, use the PolyFix Converter and/or the Stock
Consistency Check feature (ref.Settings window: Project Settings tab in the Project menu
section of VERICUT Help.) to repair the model before cutting. Similar advice applies for models
added to Design components for use with AUTO-DIFF, except the Design Consistency Check
feature is used (ref. AUTO-DIFF: Options tab in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help).
Click here to see a sample STL Model File
77
VERICUT Help
Tool Library File

Typical file extension: .tls
An ASCII text file that contains descriptions of cutting tools, shanks and holders, as well as other
tool data used by VERICUT. Specific tool data is stored and retrieved via a tool "ID".
This file is created and maintained via the Tool Manager (Project menu > Tools) features. You
can save the new file via File menu > Save As in Tool Manager.
<Information>
</Information>
The Tool Library file to be used by VERICUT is specified via the Configure Tooling menu (ref.
Configure Tooling menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
NOTE: If errors occur when attempting to load the file, visit the VERICUT Users’ Forum or
contact CGTech technical support via our website, just click on the support link for assistance.
Click here to see a sample Tool Library File
78
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager Report File
Typical file extensions: .htm (HTML version), .txt (test version)
An HTML or text file that contains information about tools in a VERICUT Tool Library file, such
as: the Tool Library name, listing of tools, tool images (HTML version only), and optimization
properties, if defined. Tool Manager Report files are created and viewed from the Tool
Manager window via clicking File menu > Create Report features.
Click here to see a sample Tool Manager Report File
79
VERICUT Help
User File
Typical file extension: .usr
An ASCII text file that contains VERICUT session settings, also known as "user configuration
values" or "user values", including: measurement units, colors, choices, data field values, folder
paths and file names, etc. These files are relatively small in size, yet can control the entire
cutting process and minimize the effort required to configure the system for processing a NC
program file.
User files are loaded via File menu > Open. User files can also be specified on the command line
when VERICUT is executed, such as during batch processing to simulate NC programs without
user interaction.
Within the User file, the left column contains descriptive information about user variables, the
center column lists the user variable names, and the right column lists saved values for
corresponding user variables.
Use the user variable names listed in the center column when referencing via command line
options. For more information, see "Command Line Options".
Click here to see a sample User File
NOTES:
1. User files (.usr) were replaced by Project files (.VcProject) in VERICUT 6.0.
2. Environment variables can be used to affect VERICUT's use of User files. For more
information, see "Environment Variables".
80
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Linear Sweep File
Typical file extension: .swp
A VERICUT Linear-sweep file, or "Linear-sweep file" for short, is an ASCII text file that describes
an extruded shape. A 2-D profile is defined in the XY plane, then swept (extruded) along the
model's Z axis.
Linear-sweep files are loaded into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu, Model tab (ref.
Configure Model menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help), and contain
the following data:
File type record — Specifies the type of VERICUT file, for example "VERICUT-model".
Version number record — Software version in which the file is to be used, for example
"version-3.0".
Model file identifier record — Model file type: "2" identifies a Linear-sweep file.
Sweep start value — Z value of the linear sweep start.
Sweep end value — Z value of the linear sweep end.
Polyline data — The remaining records in the file are the XY point pairs which define the
polyline to extrude. Each X and Y value must be on a separate line with a space between values.
There is no limit on the number of point pairs allowed, but there must be at least 3 pairs. The
polyline can be completely enclosed or open ended, but can not cross over itself. Open ended
polylines are automatically closed to the start point.
81
VERICUT Help
Sample Linear-sweep files:
82
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Polygon File
Typical file extensions: design- .dsn, fixture- .fix, stock- .stk, any- .ply
A VERICUT Polygon file, or "Polygon file" for short, is an ASCII text file that describes virtually
any shape open surface or enclosed shape. The polygon (faceted) data is composed of three or
four sided polygons with associated surface normals that represent the true geometric model
shape.
Load Polygon model files into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu, Model tab (ref..
Configure Model menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). For a Polygon file to
be used in VERICUT as a solid model, the polygon data must represent a fully enclosed
(watertight) model and have normals that point consistently outward. (Polygon model files
used as surface models do not have to be watertight.) If normals are inconsistent, gaps exist
between facets, or facets overlap, solid model display results are unpredictable. When cutting
is started or the model is analyzed, these symptoms indicate problems exist in the model file
data:
 model is not displayed at all

 model is displayed with holes, gaps, or seams
 portions of the model are missing
Tip: If any of the above symptoms are experienced, use the PolyFix Converter and/or the
Stock Consistency Check feature (ref. Project menu > Settings > Project Settings tab) to repair
the model before cutting. Similar advice applies for models added to Design components for
use with AUTO-DIFF, except the Design Consistency Check feature is used (ref. Analysis menu >
AUTO-DIFF, Options tab).
Polygon file format:

"version-3.0".
Model file identifier record — Model file type: "1" specifies a Polygon file.
Sweep start value — Z value of the linear sweep start.
Sweep end value — Z value of the linear sweep end.
83
VERICUT Help
Polygon format record — Describes the surface normal data and vertex data formats. This
record contains three integer numbers separated by blanks: n1 n2 n3 (e.g. "0 0 1") where:
n1 (normal vector type) — Specifies the type of surface normal vector information present in
the polygon file.
0 - each polygon has one normal vector
1 - each vertex has a normal vector
n2 (normal vector direction) — Specifies the surface normal vector direction relative to the
model surface.
0 - normal vectors point inward
1 - normal vectors point outward
2 - normal vector directions are inconsistent (should ONLY be used after both the "0" and
"1" values have been attempted with unfavorable results; requires significantly more
processing time and computer resources)
n3 (Polygon format type) — Specifies the polygon data format.

0 - binary data format (recommended- requires less storage space and is processed faster,
however, binary formatted files are computer-specific)
1 - ASCII data format
Polygon data — The remaining records in the file are the polygon data records which define the
model shape. Each model facet (or polygon) is represented by a series of records describing its
number and location of vertices, as well as surface normal vector direction(s). There is no limit
on the amount of data allowed.
Two polygon data formats are supported. The polygon data type must be consistent for the
entire file.
Format 1 - 1 normal per polygon:
vertex count (3 or 4)
X Y Z (vertex 1)
X Y Z (vertex 2)
X Y Z (vertex 3)
I J K (normal)
Format 2 - 1 normal per vertex:

vertex count (3 or 4)
X Y Z (vertex 1)
X Y Z (vertex 2)
X Y Z (vertex 3)
I J K (normal 1)
84
VERICUT Help
I J K (normal 2)
I J K (normal 3)
Sample Polygon file:
85
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Solid File
Typical file extension: .vct
A VERICUT Solid file is a binary file containing data representing a cut stock model. The VERICUT
Solid enables you to use a previously created cut stock model in a new VERICUT session as a
stock, fixture or design model. You can also use a VERICUT Solid as a design model for Constant
Gouge Check.
A cut stock model can be saved as a VERICUT Solid using either File menu > Save Cut Stock >
VERICUT Solid in the VERICUT Menu Bar, or by right clicking on the Cut Stock in the Project Tree
and select Save Cut Stock from the menu that displays, or using the, or automatically via the
File menu > AutoSave function. You can also save a VERICUT Solid file using the SAVE_VCT,
VERICUT-COMMAND record (ref. to VERICUT-COMMAND Record in Automating VERICUT, in the
CGTech Help Library).
VERICUT Solid (.vct) files are by default compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read
these compressed files directly.
To disable writing compressed VERICUT Solid files, set the environment variable
CGTECH_COMPRESS=NO (or IP). (ref. Environment Variables also in the Getting Started section
of VERICUT Help for additional information).
A cut stock model can be saved as a VERICUT Solid file "with features" or "without features".
When the cut stock model is saved "with features", the cut database and the full history
database are stored in the VERICUT Solid file in addition to the geometry data.
Original cut and stock colors are also preserved if the "Save With Features" option is used.
When the file is loaded into VERICUT, the color options in the Model Definition window are
ignored and the colors specified in the Shade Color list (ref. Color window: Define tab, also in
the VERICUT Help section) are used. Only indices into the Shade Color list are stored. The actual
colors displayed after loading the VERICUT Solid file into a new VERICUT session will only be the
same if the Shade Color list is the same. Otherwise, the colors will be re-assigned according to
the colors in the new Shade Color list. Pre-6.0 VERICUT Solid files are compatible and should
correctly reproduce cut colors when the file is loaded into a V6.0, or later, VERICUT session. The
original stock colors were not saved in the pre-6.0 VERICUT Solid files. When such a file is
loaded into V6.0, its uncut stock colors will be assigned according to the Model Definition color
setting for the model.
When the cut stock model is saved "without features", only the geometry data is saved in the
VERICUT Solid file.
Toggle the Save with Features option, on the Save Cut Stock window, On (the default) or Off.
VERICUT Solid files are loaded into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu, Model tab (ref..
Configure Model menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help).
86
VERICUT Help
When a VERICUT Solid file, saved with features, is loaded into a new VERICUT session:
Before cutting:
Configure Model menu: Assemble tab features, Mate and Align, recognize the original features
saved in the VERICUT Solid.
X-Caliper treats the VERICUT Solid in an approximated (triangulated) way, the same as any
other primitive (Swept Solid, Solid of Revolution (SOR), etc.).
When cutting begins:

If the VERICUT Solid model was saved using the "with features" option, then the history
database is used to create the new cut stock from VERICUT Solid model with the new settings.
This is usually is much faster and more accurate than using a VERICUT Solid saved "without
features", and restores all features of the original cut stock saved into the VERICUT Solid file.
X-Caliper:
Once the new cut stock is created, all X-Caliper measurements on a VERICUT Solid model, saved
"with features", are exact.
NOTES:
1. VERICUT Solid models are not recognized in FastMill Cut Mode or when using AUTO-DIFF
Surface.
2. AUTO-DIFF and Die Sinking models are always saved without features (features are
destroyed by the tolerance offsets).
87
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Solid-of-Revolution File
Typical file extension: .sor
A VERICUT Solid-of-revolution file, or "Solid-of-revolution file" for short, is an ASCII text file that
describes a revolved shape. A 2-D profile is defined in the ZX plane, then revolved around the
model's Z axis.
Solid-of-revolution files are loaded into VERICUT via the Configure Model menu, Model tab
(ref.. Configure Model menu, Model tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help), and contain the
following data:
"version-5.0".
Model file identifier record — Model file type: "0" identifies a Solid-of-revolution file.
Tolerance of revolution — Chordal tolerance (intol) of the revolved surface, controls the
S.O.R.'s degree of roundness for the model database.
Polyline data — The remaining records in the file are the XZ point pairs which define the
polyline to revolve. Each X and Z value must be on a separate line with a space between values.
There is no limit on the number of point pairs allowed, but there must be at least 3 pairs. X
values must be greater than or equal to zero. The polyline can be completely enclosed or open
ended, but can not cross over itself. Open ended polylines are automatically closed to the start
point.
88
VERICUT Help
Sample Solid-of-revolution files:
89
VERICUT Help
Library Files
Library File Overview
In the following discussion the term "VERICUT" represents VERICUT or VERICUT Composite
Simulation. Any exceptions will be noted within the topic.
This section provides information about the library files installed with VERICUT ("library" folder
in your VERICUT installation). Library files are included in every installation, and include:
General Purpose Library Files

The following types of General Purpose Library Files are included:
VERICUT default files — Default files opened by VERICUT. The files are configured to perform a
short simulation when Play is pressed. Two sets of files provide demonstrations for inch
(vericut.*) and metric (vericutm.*) environments.
VERICUT initialization files — Initialization files opened by VERICUT via File menu > New
Project. Two sets of files provide initialization for inch (init.*) and metric (initm.*)
environments.
Library Control Files

Library Control Files are example NC machine controls intended to help you configure VERICUT
for simulating G-Code NC Programs that run on popular NC machining centers composite, tape
laying machines or automatic drilling and fastener machines .
Library Machine Files

Library Machine Files are example NC machines intended to help you configure VERICUT for
simulating G-Code NC Programs that run on popular NC machining centers and composite tape
laying machines.
The files available in the above categories will vary depending on whether you are using
VERICUT or VERICUT Composite Simulation.
90
VERICUT Help
General Purpose Library Files

The general purpose library files are listed below in alphabetical order.
Library file name: Usage: Notes:

These files are These files are intended
2_axis_lathe_template_inch.vcproject sample template to be used as a starting
2_axis_lathe_template_metric.vcproject files to be used with point for creating your
the CAM Interfaces own template files.
3_axis_mill_template_inch.vcproject (ref. to the Change the machine
3_axis_mill_template_metric.vcproject Converters and and control files, and
CAD/CAM any settings as
4_axis_mill_b_table_template_inch.vcproject Interfaces section, appropriate for your
4_axis_mill_b_table_template_metric.vcproject in the CGTech Help environment.
Library)
Initialization files for Automatically loaded by
VERICUT- clears VERICUT when File
settings from the menu > Preferences is
prior simulation, set to Start a new
init.VcProject (in), then configures project and you select
initm.VcProject (mm) VERICUT with Cancel in the New
default settings for VERICUT Project
inch (init.*) or window
metric (initm.*) (Inch/Millimeter).
environments.
Default files- files Demonstrates how
configured to VERICUT identifies
perform a short many common NC
vericut.VcProject (in), simulation of a two program problems.
vericutm.VcProject (mm) setup project, using
two different
machines, when
Play is pressed.
91
VERICUT Help
Library Control Files
This section describes Control files available in the CGTech library ("library" folder in your
VERICUT installation). These files enable you to quickly configure VERICUT to simulate how
features of various NC controls affect the machining process. A Control file is loaded into
VERICUT via the Configuration menu > Control > Open function, or by opening a Project file
configured to use the control.
Available NC controls are listed below in alphabetical order, by control manufacturer and
model.
NOTE: Customized machines and controls can be found in the "samples" folder in your
Control Manufacturer Control Model Control File Name
Acramatic (by Cincinnati)
850MC acr850mc.ctl
950MC acr950mc.ctl
2100 acr2100.ctl
CNC PC acrcncpc.ctl
Allen-Bradley
7320 ab_7320.ctl
8200 ab_8200.ctl
8600 ab_8600.ctl
9260 ab_9260m.ctl
Bosch
CC300 bshcc300.ctl
92
VERICUT Help
Boston Digital
BDC 3200 (inch) bdc3200_in.ctl
BDC 3200 (mm) bdc3200_mm.ctl
Charmilles
200 Wire EDM chr200.ctl
Cincinnati - see "Acramatic"
Fadal
CNC 88, Format 1 fad88a.ctl
("Fadal" mode)
CNC 88, Format 2 fad88.ctl

("Fanuc" mode)
Fanuc
Series 0
fan0m.ctl (mill)
fan0t.ctl (turn)
Series 3
fan3t.ctl (turn)
fan3tt.ctl
Series 5 fan5m.ctl (mill)

Series 6
fan6m.ctl (mill)
fan6t.ctl (turn)
Series 9 fan9t.ctl (turn)
Series 10
fan10m.ctl (mill)
fan10t.ctl (turn)
93
VERICUT Help
Series 11
fan11m.ctl (mill)
fan11t.ctl (turn)
Series 12
fan12m.ctl (mill)
fan12t.ctl (turn)
Series 15
fan15im.ctl (model "I" mill)
fan15it.ctl (model "I" turn)
fan15m.ctl (mill)
fan15t.ctl, (turn)
fan15t_t.ctl (turn-turret)
fan15t_t_sync.ctl
Series 16 fan16im.ctl (model "I" mill)

fan16m.ctl (mill)
fan16t.ctl, (turn)
fan16w.ctl (wire EDM)
fan16it_ mt2000.ctl
Mori_seiki_mt2000sz_ fan16it.ctl
Series 18
fan18m.ctl (mill)
fan18t.ctl (turn)
Series 21
fan21m.ctl (mill)
fan21t.ctl (turn)
94
VERICUT Help
Series 150
fan150m.ctl (mill)
fan150t.ctl (turn)
Series 160
fan160m.ctl (mill)
fan160t.ctl (turn)
Series 180
fan180m.ctl (mill)
fan180t.ctl (turn)
Series 210
fan210m.ctl (mill)
fan210t.ctl (turn)

Series 3000 fan3000c.ctl
Fidia
M30 fidia_m30.ctl
GEMINI
(by Kearney & Trecker)
GEMINI-D gemini_d.ctl
GEMINI-E gemini_e.ctl
95
VERICUT Help
General Electric (GE)

1050MC CNC ge_1050mc.ctl
2000MC CNC ge_2000mc.ctl
Generic (Fanuc-like) controls
decimal generic.ctl (in)

genericm.ctl (mm)
leading zeros genlead.ctl (in)

genleadm.ctl (mm)
trailing zeros gentrail.ctl (in)

gentrailm.ctl (mm)
robot generic_robot.ctl
Giddings & Lewis (G&L)

see "NumeriPath"
HAAS
CNC hascnc.ctl
MiniMill haas_minimill.ctl
Heidenhain
Mill Plus heimplus.ctl
TNC 407 hei407.ctl (conversational)

hei407g.ctl (ISO)
TNC 415b hei415b.ctl

(conversational)
hei415bg.ctl (ISO)
96
VERICUT Help
TNC 415c hei415c.ctl

(conversational)
hei415cg.ctl (ISO)
hei425g.ctl (ISO)

hei426g.ctl (ISO)

hei430g.ctl (ISO)
TNC530 hei530.ctl
Huazhong
huazhong_hnc.ctl
Kearney & Trecker

kt_c.ctl
also see "GEMINI"
Lumonics
Laserdyne System 94 laserdyne_94.ctl
Maho - see "Phillips"
Makino
Professional Series 3 makpro3.ctl
Professional Series 5 makpro5.ctl

makino_a51_makpro5.ctl
makpro5_mag3.ctl
97
VERICUT Help
Mazak
Mazatrol maz640m.ctl (mill)
Fusion maz640mpro.ctl (mill)
640 maz640mtpro.ctl
maz640t.ctl (turn)
maz640t_t.ctl
maz640mpro_mazak_e650h_2000u.ctl
maz640m_mazak_nexus410a.ctl
maz640m_variaxis.ctl
mazak_e650h_2000u_640mpro.ctl
mazak_nexus_510c_matrix.ctl
Mazatrol mazatrol_matrix.ctl
Matrix mazatrol_matrix_integrex_e.ctl
mazatrol_matrix_m.ctl
mazatrol_matrix_t.ctl
Mazatrol mazm2.ctl
M-2
Mazatrol mazm3.ctl
M-3
Mazatrol mazm32.ctl
M-32
Mazatrol mazt2.ctl
T-2
Mazatrol mazt3.ctl
T-3
Mazatrol mazt32.ctl
T-32
NUM
1020T num1020t.ctl
1040T num1040t.ctl
1060M num1060m.ctl
1060T num1060t.ctl
98
VERICUT Help
NumeriPath (by G&L)

800M nph800m.ctl
8000L nph8000l.ctl
8000M nph8000m.ctl
Okuma - see "OSP"
Olivetti
MC8600 oli8600.ctl
OSAI
osai_10.ctl
OSP (by Okuma)

OSP700L osp700l.ctl
OSP5000L osp5000l.ctl
OSP5000M osp5000m.ctl
OSP7000L osp7000l.ctl
osp7000l_t.ctl (turret)
osp7000l_t_sync.ctl
OSP7000M osp7000m.ctl
osp_100l.ctl
osp_p200m.ctl
PaR Systems
Cimroc 5000 cimroc_5000.ctl
99
VERICUT Help
Phillips
CNC 432 phi432.ctl
CNC 532 phi532.ctl
Sinumerik (by Siemens)
3T, 3TT sin3t.ctl, sin3tt.ctl
810 sin810d.ctl (810D)
840 sin840c.ctl (840C)

sin840d.ctl (840D)
index_sin840c.ctl (840C)
880M sin880m.ctl (880M)
FM-NC sinfmnc.ctl
Sundstrand
Micro swilm.ctl
SWINC LM
Micro swim200.ctl
SWINC
M200
Thermwood
91000 Super thermwood_91000.ctl
Control
Tosnuc (by Toshiba)

888 tos888.ctl
100
VERICUT Help
Yasnac
i80m yasi80m.ctl
MX-3 yasmx3.ctl
101
VERICUT Help
Library Machine Files
This section describes Machine files available in the CGTech library ("library" folder in your
VERICUT installation) and CGTech sample files ("samples" folder). These files enable you to
quickly configure VERICUT to simulate motions on various NC machines. Note that while library
machines are generally considered ready to use, many of the sample machines have job-related
data that may interfere when configuring for use with new NC programs. A Machine file is
loaded into VERICUT via the Configuration menu > Machine > Open function, or by opening a
Project/User file configured to use the machine.
Available NC machines are listed below in alphabetical order, by manufacturer and model. All
machines reside in the "library" folder of your VERICUT installation unless otherwise noted to
be in "samples" or "showroom".
Machine Manufacturer/ Thumbnail Machine File Name

Machine Model
Aerostar
H2200
aerostar_h2200.mch
5-axis horizontal mill
Bostomatic
samples –
5-axis vertical mill
bostomatic_bdc3200.mch
102
VERICUT Help
Charmille
Robofil 200
charmilles_robofil_200.mch
4-axis wire EDM
Cincinnati
3 spindle 5-axis gantry samples -

mill cincinnati_3_spindle_gantry_5ax.mch
5-axis dual-tilting head samples-

vertical mill cincinnati_5_axis_acr950.mch
T30
cincinnati_t30_toolchanger.mch
5axis horizontal mill
Deckel Maho - see

"DMG"
Dixi
350 TCA50S
dix350m.mch
DPH-80
dixi_dph80.mch
103
VERICUT Help
DMG
DMU 50V
dmg_dmu50v.mch
DMU 60 T
dmg_dmu60t.mch
DMU 125 P
dmg_dmu125p.mch
DMU 200 P
dmg_dmu200p.mch
Fadal
VMC 4020
fadal_vmc4020.mch
VMC 6030
fadal_vmc6030.mch
Fidia
218
fidia_218.mch
104
VERICUT Help
Generic machines
3-axis vertical mill basic_3axes_vmill.mch
3-axis vertical mill basic_3axes_vmill_parametric.mch
3-axis horizontal mill basic_4axes_hmill_table_b.mch
3-axis vertical mill Not 3-D generic_3ax_vmill.mch
3-axis vertical mill generic_vmill_3ax_3d.mch
3-axis vertical mill - samples -

with robot gripper arm bars_robot.mch
samples -
2-axis turret lathe
polar_xy2xc_fanuc_3ht.mch
3-axis vertical mill maxcgt.mch
4-axis vertical mill -

Not 3-D generic_4ax_vmill_table_a.mch
table A

Not 3-D generic_4ax_vmill_table_b.mch
table B
105
VERICUT Help

Not 3-D generic_5ax_hmill_head_a_table_b.mch
head A, table B

Not 3-D generic_5ax_hmill_table_a_table_b.mch
table A on table B

Not 3-D generic_5ax_hmill_table_b_table_a.mch
table B on table A
5-axis vertical mill –

Not 3-D generic_5ax_vmill_head_a_head_b.mch
head A on head B

Not 3-D generic_5ax_vmill_head_a_head_b.mch
table A, head B
samples -
9-axis cutter grinder
9_axis_grinder.mch
Giddings & Lewis

(G&L)
4-axis vertical turret

gl_4axes_vtl.mch
lathe
G60
4-axis horizontal gl_g60.mch
boring mill
HAAS
MiniMill haas_minimill.mch
VB-1 hass_vb1.mch
106
VERICUT Help
VF2
haas_vf2.mch
Hermle
C30 hermle_c30.mch
C800U hermle_c800u.mch
Huron
KX 100
huron_kx100.mch
Index
G200
index_g200.mch
4-axis mill/turn
Kearney & Trecker (K&T)
HB4 kt_hb4.mch
107
VERICUT Help
Kuraki
KBM11
5-axis horizontal boring kurkbm11.mch
mill
Makino
MC1010
mak1010.mch
A51
makino_a51.mch
A55
4-axis horizontal mill makino_a55.mch
A66
makino_a66.mch
A77
makino_a77.mch
MAG3
makino_mag3.mch
Marwin
Advanced Manufacturing samples -

Cell marwin_advanced_manufacturing
5-axis horizontal mill _cell.mch
108
VERICUT Help
Mazak
HTC 4000
mazak_htc_4000.mch
Integrex E650H mazak_integrex_e650h_II_2000u.

4-axis horizontal mill/turn mch
Nexus 410A
mazak_nexus410a.mch
Nexus 510C
mazak_nexus_510c.mch
QTN-250MY
mazak_qtn250my.mch
3-axis mill/turn
QTN-300
mazak_qtn300_650u.mch
2-axis turret lathe
Variaxis 500
mazak_variaxis500.mch
Variaxis 730
mazak_variaxis730.mch
109
VERICUT Help
Mecof
CS500A
mecof_cs500a.mch
Mitsui Seiki
VX550-5X
mitsui_seiki_vertex_550_5x.mch
Mori Seiki
Partner M-400C1 ms_m400.mch

MT 2000 SZ mori_seiki_mt2000sz_alpha1.mch
multi-axis mill/turn
Mori Seiki SV500

mori_seiki_sv500.mch
Motch
135-VNC
motch_135vnc.mch
vertical turning center
110
VERICUT Help
Okuma
LB400 okuma_lb400.mch
2-axis horizontal lathe
MB-46V
okuma_mb46v_osp7000m.mch
Warner & Swasey
Titan
4-axis horizontal dual turret ws_titan.mch
lathe
111
VERICUT Help
Environment Variables
You can set environment variables to help customize the VERICUT user interface, alter VERICUT
performance, and perform other various actions. This section describes environment variable
formats and the available environment variables that can affect the VERICUT simulation.
Environment variables are typically set via CGTech command files located in the CGTech
"commands" folder, under the folder representing your computer type. For example, the
command files for VERICUT 7.1 installed on the "C:" drive of a Windows NT computer are
located in the C:\CGTech71\winnt\commands folder. Environment variables can also be set in
any other system file used to execute VERICUT.
Formats
Formats used to set environment variables differ, based on the computer's operating system.
Consult the operating system documentation, or refer to the CGTech-installed command files
on your computer for specific examples.
Operating Environment Variable Examples of Use

System Format
Windows set ENV_VAR_NAME=value set CGTECH_DEFAULT_UNITS=inch

set CGTECH_LIBRARY=C:\CGTech50\library
112
VERICUT Help
"CGTECH" Environment Variables

Available environment variables that can affect the VERICUT simulation are listed below in
alphabetical order. For simplicity, all examples of use below are in Windows format.
CGTECH_CEILING_IMAGE — Specifies the JPEG file to use as texture for the ceiling in OpenGL
machine views.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_CEILING_IMAGE=C:\path\ceiling.jpg
CGTECH_CODEC_FILTER — Enables you to remove invalid codecs from the Select a CODEC pull-
down list in the Image Record window (File > Images > Record Movie, Output Format set to
AVI)
Example of use:
set CGTECH_CODEC_FILTER=CVID Y411
The above removes the CVID and Y411 options from the list. Use a blank space to separate
options.
CGTECH_COMPRESS — By default, In Process (IP) files and VERICUT Solid (.vct) files are
compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read these compressed files directly.
CGTECH_COMPRESS enables you to disable writing compressed In Process files and/or VERICUT
Solid files.
Valid settings are:
NO = no compression
IP = compress IP files only
VCT = compress VCT files only
ALL = compress both IP and VCT files (Default)
Example of use:
set CGTECH_COMPRESS=ALL
113
VERICUT Help
CGTECH_DEFAULT_UNITS — Sets the default units for VERICUT. Specify either INCH or
MILLIMETER
Example of use:
set CGTECH_DEFAULT_UNITS =MILLIMETER
CGTECH_DISPLAY — Sets the animation display method for tool motion in the Workpiece view.
The display is updated for animation when you start cutting or the refine the display (e.g. press
Refine Display ). Changing the animation display method can affect simulation speed and
display quality, but does not affect model accuracy. Results are different, based on the types of
parts you cut and specified Cutting Resolution.
Options:
REFINE1 — This display method creates the best quality animation image for all-around use,
but may take slightly longer to simulate with than REFINE2 (see below).
REFINE2 — Alternate display method-fastest when a large amount of model detail is visible.
This method is more sensitive to Cutting Resolution than REFINE1, and is typically very good
when the cut tolerance is small enough.
ULTRA — Another alternate display method-this method can be faster than the others, but has
lower display quality when compared to the default method.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_DISPLAY=REFINE2
CGTECH_FLOOR_IMAGE — Specifies the JPEG file to use as texture for the floor in OpenGL
machine views.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_FLOOR_IMAGE=C:\path\floor.jpg
CGTECH_FONT_SIZE — Sets the font size for text appearing in the VERICUT user interface. Size
can be given an absolute point size or incremental value from the default value of "12".
Examples of use:
set CGTECH_FONT_SIZE=14 (sets 14 pt. font)
set CGTECH_FONT_SIZE=+2 (also sets 14 pt. font: default 12 +2= 14)
114
VERICUT Help
CGTECH_FSB_ICONS — Environment variable CGTECH_FSB_ICONS is used to permit

suppression of attempts to get individual icons for each branch of the file system tree. With
"set CGTECH_FSB_ICONS=No" (or Non, Nein, Nyet or anything that starts with an "N") each
branch will use a simple folder icon.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_FSB_ICONS=No
This environment variable was added to resolve a situation where VERICUT hangs when
opening a File Selection Box (FSB) when a Samba drive is mounted on a network.
 If the Samba drive is mounted in Windows via a UNC path, then VERICUT's FSB will always
hang while opening. The hang occurs the second time a VERICUT FSB is opened. Thus you
can successfully browse to set your working dir, but then hang when opening the FSB to get
the next file (IP, project, etc).
 If the Samba drive is mounted in Windows via a drive letter, then the hang is more sporadic.
But it still hangs while the FSB is opening.
It is VERY IMPORTANT to realize that the user does not need to access the Samba drive for the
problem to happen. It simply needs to be mounted on his computer.
Use of this environment variable eliminates going thru Samba to get each folder's "desktop.ini"
file.
CGTECH_FSB_IGNORE — Environment variable CGTECH_FSB_IGNORE is used to suppress

display and access to specific folders. Note that folder names are separated by semi-colons.
Spaces in the names are OK, without enclosing anything in quotes.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_FSB_IGNORE=E:;C:\Windows;\\xserve\fileserver\cgtech
In the above example:
 The first entry, E: is used to hide an entire drive. It could be a mapped drive.
 The second entry, C:\Windows, is used to hide a folder and everything within it.
 The third entry, \\xserve\fileserver\cgtech, is used to hide an unmapped network location,
which would otherwise appear in "My Network Places". Note however that a "network
place" could be a sub-folder within a mapped drive. In this case we suppress the "network
place" but the folder will still appear within the drive's branches.
115
VERICUT Help
CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES — Specify a fully qualified /path/filename of a "custom"

inspection tolerance file" containing default tolerances to be used for Inspection Sequence.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES=C:\mydir\inspect_tolfile.txt
CGTECH_LIBRARY — Specifies the folder location of the CGTech Library of machines and
controls accessed via choosing the "CGTECH_LIBRARY" shortcut option on file selection
windows. Setting this environment variable can be useful for sites that use their own library
VERICUT machines and controls instead of that supplied on CD with VERICUT. The full folder
path can be included.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_LIBRARY=C:\mylibrarydir
See also: "Where VERICUT looks for files" in the Introduction section
CGTECH_MACHINE_CONFIG — Enables you to turn off the display of the Configuration menu,
in the VERICUT menu bar. Set to FALSE to remove the display.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_MACHINE_CONFIG=FALSE
CGTECH_MATRIX_FORMAT — Enables you to view the Matrix Tables in the Coordinate System
window: Matrix tab, the Machine Offsets panel, and the Modeling Window: Position tab:
Matrix tab with the I, J, K values along the vertical axis and the X, Y, Z along the horizontal axis
rather than the "default" horizontal orientation.
Horizontal Orientation (default):
Example of use:
set CGTECH_MATRIX_FORMAT=VERTICAL
116
VERICUT Help
Vertical Orientation:
CGTECH_OLD_FSB — Enables you to use the more common Windows File Selection Box (FSB)
rather than the "standard" VERICUT FSB.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_OLD_FSB=YES
CGTECH_REF_CUTTER_LIB — Enables you to specify an external Tool Library file to be used as a

reference library for the Milling Tool Wizard. All cutters in the specified tool library will be
listed, by Tool ID, in the Milling Tool Wizard's Cutter pull-down list.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_REF_CUTTER_LIB=C:\path\filename.tls
CGTECH_REF_EXTENSION_LIB — Enables you to specify an external Tool Library file to be used

as a reference library for the Milling Tool Wizard. All extensions in the specified tool library will
be listed, by Tool ID, in the Milling Tool Wizard's Extension pull-down list.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_REF_EXTENSION_LIB=C:\path\filename.tls
CGTECH_REF_HOLDER_LIB — Enables you to specify an external Tool Library file to be used as a

reference library for the Milling Tool Wizard. All holders in the specified tool library will be
listed, by Tool ID, in the Milling Tool Wizard's Holder pull-down list.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_REF_HOLDER_LIB=C:\path\filename.tls
CGTECH_SLM_DEBUG — Enables you to write out "client side" license problem debug
information to a file. This must be defined before VERICUT is run.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_SLM_DEBUG=FILE:\path\filename
117
VERICUT Help
CGTECH_STATUS — Creates a Status file, an ASCII text file that contains whatever data is sent
to the Status window during the simulation. The full folder path can be included with the file
name.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_STATUS=C:\mydir\statusfile.txt
CGTECH_TPEDITOR — Causes Edit Toolpath to issue a system command using the string
content of the variable, with the current tool path file as an argument. Thus you can choose to
run an alternate tool path editor, such as any one of the clever NC code editors available today.
When you press Edit > NC Program > 'c:\path\filename.mcd', or Info menu > NC Program
>(list item) > right mouse click > Edit, or the Edit NC Program icon , then VERICUT issues
the system command:
c:\program files\cooltoolpatheditor\editor.exe c:\path\filename.mcd
This will only work with tool path editors that can take the tool path file name as an argument
on the command line that runs the editor. Depending on the editor's command syntax, it may
be necessary to point CGTECH_TPEDITOR at a batch or script file that intercepts the tool path
file name and re-formats the command as necessary.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_TPEDITOR=c:\program files\cooltoolpatheditor\editor.exe
CGTECH_USERNAME — Specifies the user name to include in the name of the Preferences file
that is automatically saved when you exit VERICUT. This environment variable is recommended
to prevent users that share a machine (or an account) from overwriting the Preferences file.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_USERNAME=bob (Preferences file saved => "cgtech_bob.prefs")
CGTECH_VCPROJECT — Specifies the default Project file for VERICUT. The full folder path can
be included.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_VCPROJECT=C:\mydir\myprojectfile.VcProject
118
VERICUT Help
CGTECH_VCUSR — Specifies the default User file for VERICUT. The full folder path can be
included.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_VCUSR=C:\mydir\myuserfile.usr
CGTECH_VIEWER — Enables you to select an external editor/viewer.

Example of use:
set CGTECH_VIEWER=C:\path\editor.exe
CGTECH_X_WALL_IMAGE — Specifies the JPEG file to use as texture for the two walls having
normals along plus or minus X in OpenGL machine views.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_X_WALL_IMAGE=C:\path\x_wall.jpg
CGTECH_Y_WALL_IMAGE — Specifies the JPEG file to use as texture for the two walls having
normals along plus or minus Y in OpenGL machine views.
Example of use:
set CGTECH_Y_WALL_IMAGE=C:\path\y_wall.jpg
Adding custom environment variables for shortcuts

You can add your own environment variables to the beginning section of the VERICUT
command file and have them appear in the shortcut list of file selection windows. VERICUT lists
all custom environment variables that begin with "CGTECH_" in the shortcut list, and have at
least one file in the folder that is recognized as a CGTech file type, for example a file with any of
the following extensions: *.ctl, *.ip, *.job, *.mcd, *.mch, *.olb, *.stl, *.tls, *.tp, *.usr, or
*.VcProject
Note that the contents of the file are not verified unless loaded by VERICUT. Just the existence
of a file with an extension that qualifies as one of the valid CGTech file types (see above) is
enough to make the shortcut appear in the list.
Example 1 — The following environment variable creates a shortcut to a folder containing
VERICUT 7.1 sample files.
119
VERICUT Help
set CGTECH_71SAMPLES=C:\CGTech71\samples\vericut
Example 2 — The following environment variable creates a shortcut to a folder containing a

user's custom VERICUT files. The folder contains a file named "dummy.VcProject".
set CGTECH_MYVERICUTFILES=E:\myvericutfiles
120
VERICUT Help
Interacting with VERICUT software

The following sections will provide an overview of using the features available in the main
window. Many of these features are the same for VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation and
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. Exceptions will be noted in the section in which the
feature is documented.
121
VERICUT Help
Welcome Screen
The Welcome Screen automatically displays when you first start a VERICUT session. The
features on the Welcome Screen provide access to commonly used first actions for a VERICUT
session.
These features include starting a new project file, opening an existing project file, providing
access to recently opened project files and access to saved template files.
The Welcome Screen also provide access to VERICUT Training videos and VERICUT Training
sessions if they have been installed in your VERICUT installation.
The Welcome Screen consists of six main areas (Tool Bar, Start, Recent Files, Templates, Videos
and Training. Each of these areas will be described in the sections that follow.
122
VERICUT Help
Tool Bar
The Tool Bar icons provides quick access to many CGTech sites and information.
(Email CGTech Support) — Opens an Email page addressed to CGTech Support.
(Contact Us) — Opens a window with information to enable you to contach CGTech
(Telephone Number, CGTech Website, the Support page on the CGTech Website).
(Twitter) — Provides one click access to the VERICUT by CGTech Twitter page.
(Facebook) — Provides one click access to the VERICUT Software by CGTech Facebook
page.
(Linkedin) — Provides one click access to the CGTech Linkedin page.
(Google+) — Provides one click access to CGTech VERICUT page on Google+.
(You Tube) — Provides one click access to CGTech VERICUT on You Tube.
(CGTech Website) — Provides one click access to the CGTech Website.
(VERICUT Forum) — Provides one click access to the VERICUT Forum.
(VERICUT Help) — Provides access to the VERICUT Help System.
Start
The features in the Start section of the Welcome Screen provide quick access to starting a new
project file , or open an existing project file.
123
VERICUT Help
New Inch Project — Opens a new inch project file in VERICUT and closes the Welcome Screen.
New Millimeter Project — Opens a new millimeter project file in VERICUT and closes the
Welcome Screen.
Open Project — Opens the Open Project file selection window enabling you to specify the
\path\filename of an existing project file. When you select Open in the file selection window,
the project file will be opened in VERICUT and the Welcome Screen will close.
NOTE: You can re-display the Welcome Screen at any time by selecting Help menu > Welcome
in the VERICUT main menu bar.
Recent
The Recent section of the Welcome Screen provides a list of the recently opened Project files
stored in the preferences file.
124
VERICUT Help
Holding the cursor over any of the project files will display a window containing the
\path\filename of the project file and a thumbnail image as shown in the picture below.
Clicking on a project file in the Recent list will open it in VERICUT and close the Welcome
Screen.
125
VERICUT Help
Templates
The Templates section of the Welcome Screen enables you to easily access custom project
template files.
(Add a Template) — Click on this icon to display the Open Project file selection window
enabling you to specify the \path\filename of the project template file that you want to add to
the Templates list.
Holding the cursor over any of the project template files will display a window containing the
\path\filename of the project template file and a thumbnail image as described in the Recent
topic above.
Clicking on a project template file in the Templates list will open it in VERICUT and close the
Welcome Screen.
Right-click on a template and click on to remove a template from the list.

126
VERICUT Help
Videos
The Videos section of the Welcome Screen provides quick access to the Quick Start training
videos if they have been installed in your VERICUT installation.
Click on one of the video topics to start the video.
NOTE: You can add your other videos to the Welcome Screen by putting them in the \videos\
folder of your VERICUT installation.
Introduction to Quick Start

The Quick Start training tool is designed to quickly teach a new VERICUT user the “basic
requirements” for setting up a VERICUT simulation, using a VERICUT CAM Interface to transfer
the data from their CAM system to VERICUT. It will also teach the new user to monitor a
VERICUT simulation, inspect the cut part, and finally generate and edit a process document.
Quick Start training tools are currently available for CATV5 users, Mastercam users, NX users
and Creo Parametric users, Edgecam users, hyperMILL users, GibbsCAM users, ESPRIT users and
Surfcam users. Quick Start tools for users of other CAM system will be added. Each Quick Start
training tool consists of the following:
Overview Video
This brief video will show the process of transferring CAM system manufacturing data through a
CAM interface to VERICUT for simulation, inspection and generating a shop document.
Each Quick Start has 4 sessions. Each session consists of a video that will and talk you through
and show the interaction with the software for the topic of the session and an exercise that will
127
VERICUT Help
provide “hands on” experience while it guides you through the steps that you just saw in the
video. Each session is a continuation of the session before it.
The CATIA V5 sessions will be used for the following discussion. The concept is the same for all
CAM systems. The following sessions are included in each Quick Start:
Session 201 — Using the CatiaV5-to-VERICUT Interface
This session teaches how to use CATIA V5-to-VERICUT Interface (CATV) to export CATIA
manufacturing data to VERICUT. It also describes the “basic” VERICUT setup requirements
and then launches VERICUT with the simulation ready to play.
Session 202 — Monitoring Your Simulation
This session teaches how to monitor what is happening in the VERICUT simulation by
stopping at certain events and displaying some of VERICUT’s other monitoring tools.
Session 203 — Inspecting Your Cut Stock
In VERICUT, X-Caliper is used to measure the Cut Stock just like in an inspection department.
A wall thickness, a hole diameter, the position and angle of a feature can all be measured.
AUTO-DIFF is used to compare the Cut Stock to the Design model in order to automatically
detect gouges or excess material. In this session you will inspect the cut part with both X-
Caliper and AUTO-DIFF.
Session 204 — Generate a Report of Your Simulation

This session will demonstrate how to generate and edit a VERICUT process document. The
process document will show all the tools required for each stage of machining, cutting times
per tool and NC programs required.
Prerequisites for Using Quick Start Training Tools

CATIA V5
CATIA V5 R21 or higher
CATIA V5-to-VERICUT Interface (CATV5) module
NX
NX8 or higher
NX-to-VERICUT Interface (NXV) module
Mastercam
Mastercam X6 or higher
Mastercam-to-VERICUT Interface (MCAMV) module
128
VERICUT Help
Creo Parametric
Pro/E CREO Elements Pro 5 or higher
Pro/E-to-VERICUT Interface (PROEV) module
Edgecam
Edgecam 2012 R2 or higher
Edgecam-to-VERICUT Interface (ECV) module
GibbsCAM
GibbsCAM +2012 V10.3.15 or higher
GibbsCAM-to-VERICUT Interface (GCV) module
Esprit
Esprit V19.0.7.1578 or higher
Esprit-to-VERICUT Interface (ESV) module
Surfcam
The following Quick Start Training Tools are available for download on the CGTech Website:
CATIA V5
NX
Mastercam
Creo Parametric
Edgecam
hyperMILL
GibbsCAM
ESPRIT
Surfcam
Click on the following link to fill out the request form on the CGTech Web Site to get your copy:
http://www.cgtech.com/solutions/interface-showrooms/
129
VERICUT Help
Training
The Training section of the Welcome Screen provides quick access to the VERICUT training
sessions if they have been installed in your VERICUT installation.
VERICUT training sessions are separated into four different categories (Verification Milling,
Verification Turning, Verification Mill-Turn and Machine and Control). Click on the icon to
the left of each category to display the training sessions that are available in the category.
130
VERICUT Help
Holding the cursor over any of the training sessions I the Training list will display a window
containing the \path\filename of the project file and a thumbnail image as shown in the picture
below.
Clicking on a training session in the Training list will open the Training session PDF file, load the
project file required by the training session in VERICUT, and close the Welcome Screen.
131
VERICUT Help
Other Features
Show this at startup — This feature enables you to choose to display, or not display, the
Welcome Screen each time that you start VERICUT.
When Show this at startup is toggled on (checked), the Welcome Screen will be displayed each
time that you start VERICUT.
When Show this at startup is toggled off (not checked), the Welcome Screen will be displayed
each time that you start VERICUT.
You can still display the Welcome Screen at any time by selecting Help menu > Welcome in the
VERICUT main menu bar.
List of Samples — Clicking on List of Samples will display the VERICUT Samples document
providing information about each of the VERICUT sample files. Each sample file record provides
the name of the project file, keywords indicating what VERICUT features are used in the sample
file and a thumbnail image of the project display.
Release Notes — Clicking on Release Notes will open the release notes for the current version
of VERICUT.
Close — Use to close the Welcome Screen. You can re-display the Welcome Screen at any time
by selecting Help menu > Welcome in the VERICUT main menu bar.
132
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Samples
The VERICUT Samples document provides information about each of the VERICUT sample files
located in the \samples\ folder of your VERICUT installation.. Each sample file record provides
the name of the project file, key words indicating what VERICUT features illustrated in the
sample file and a thumbnail image of the project display.
133
VERICUT Help
Sample File Records

Each Sample file record consists of three columns of information.
VcProject Name — This column shows the name of the VcProject file. Click on the VcProject
file name to see an XML file showing the contents of the project file.
Key word — This column contains a list of key words indicating what VERICUT features are
illustrated in the sample file. For example Haas Minimill, 3 axis vertical mill, Toolchanger,
Movable door, etc.
Thumbnail — This column contains a thumbnail image of the project display. Click on the
image to display a larger image.
Sample Categories
The sample files in the document are sorted into

categories to make it easy to Find the information that
you are looking for. The sample files are categorized by
machining operation type, control, industry, VERICUT
feature, etc. The picture on the previous page shows a
partial listing of the sample files contained in the General
category.
The list of categories on the right side of the document
allows you to easily access the particular category that
you are interested in.
Simply click on the category to get directly to the list of
sample files in that category. Each of the categories
correspond to the sub-folders in the \samples folder of
your VERICUT installation.
Click on Home to return to the top of the document.
134
VERICUT Help
Main Window
The VERICUT main window is composed of distinct areas, each with different user interaction.
The window header displays the last Project file loaded and the current session units (inch or
millimeter). This window can be resized like most other window, via dragging the window
header, sides or corners.
Tip: Press "F1" in any VERICUT window to receive help on that window.
135
VERICUT Help
Main Window Features
Menu Bar
topic.
The menu bar, located across the top of the VERICUT window, provides easy access to VERICUT
functions. Each menu in the menu bar contains groups of related functions. Click with the left
mouse button on any menu name to expose the list of functions available in that menu. If an
arrow appears to the right of a function in a menu, move the mouse over the arrow to expose a
sub-menu of additional functions. Click on the function in the menu you want to use.
136
VERICUT Help
VERICUT menu descriptions
topic.
The menus which provide access to all VERICUT functions are listed below, followed by a brief
description of what the menu's features do. The features contained in each menu's pull-down
list will vary depending on the VERICUT application that you are using.
In VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help, select the desired menu and then select the desired feature for more information about
each feature.
File menu — Features in this menu enable you to open and save the files most commonly used
in VERICUT, access converter products, control properties, export cut model data, and generate
VERICUT reports.
Edit menu — Features in this menu enable you to edit text files, NC programs and control
display colors.
View menu — Features in this menu enable you to set up the number of views, orientation
(angle and distance) for each view, and store or select commonly used views, and set up other
VERICUT display characteristics.
Info menu — Features in this menu enable you to access session information, such as the files
currently being used, machining status, machine offsets, and log files.
Project menu — Features in this menu enable you to specify information required for "job"
setup including the display of the Project Tree. Features include selection of machines, controls,
NC programs, tools, and processing options. Its features also enable the selection and setup of
the output files created by VERICUT during processing and creating customized reports.
Configuration menu — Features in this menu are used to build or configure NC machines and
controls.
Analysis menu — Features in this menu are used to analyze and inspect the VERICUT model.
Optimize menu — Features in this menu provide access to OptiPath and VERICUT Force, the
feed rate and spindle speed optimization tools that enable you to create "optimized" NC
programs that enable you to cut parts in the least amount of time, compare your original NC
program with the "optimized" NC program, and calculate time and money savings available
from using the "optimized" NC program.
137
VERICUT Help
NOTE: This menu is not available in VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation.
Help menu — Features in this menu provide access to the VERICUT online Help System, license
information and current VERICUT release information.
138
VERICUT Help
Customizing the Menu Bar
VERICUT enables you to customize the menu bar to your particular working environment. The
tools, procedures, and examples provided below will enable you to hide individual items from a
menu pull-down list, hide an entire menu from the Menu Bar, or even hide the entire Menu Bar
if you choose.
The following describes the basic steps required for customizing the VERICUT Tool Bar.
1. Using the VERICUT provided menu name tables, create a text file listing the menu items or
menus that you want hidden from the Menu Bar.
2. Set the environment variable "CGTECH_MENU_HIDE".
3. Start VERICUT with the customized Menu Bar.
See the examples provided below in the Create the Hidden Menu Text File and the Hidden
Menu Examples sections below.
139
VERICUT Help
Menu Name Tables

The following tables provide the information that you will need to create the text file for
customizing the main Menu Bar. There is a table provided for each Menu in the Menu Bar.
File menu Table
Edit menu Table
View menu Table
Info menu Table
Project menu Table
Configuration menu Table
Analysis menu Table
OptiPath menu Table
Help menu Table
140
VERICUT Help
File menu
Path Depth 0 Path Depth 1 Path Depth 2 Menu Name

File MenuFile
" New Project ProjectInch
" Open… OpenVc
" Save Project SaveVc
" Save As… SaveAsVc
" Save All SaveAll
" In Process MenuIPro
" " Open… OpenIPro
" " Merge… MergeIPro
" " Save SaveIPro
" " Save As… SaveAsIPro
" Save Cut Stock ExpCutStock
" " Vericut Solid… SaveCutStock3.
" " STL ExpTriangles
" " CAD Model… ExpCadModel
Save Review File... SaveReview
" Working Directory SetWorkDir
" Preferences… Preferences
" Convert MenuConvert
" " CAD Model… CnvAcisConv
" " IGES… CnvIges2v
" " PolyFix… CnvPolyFix
" " Surface to Solid… ConvSur2stk
" " VDAFS… CnvVda
" " Binary CL… CnvBincl2v
" " Post Processor RobotPost
" Custom Interface VeriBook
" Create Report ReportSave
" " Text… ResultsView0
" " HTML… ResultsView1
" " PDF… ResultsView2
141
VERICUT Help
" Print View… PrintView

" Images MenuImages
" " Record Movie… ImRecord
" " Playback VERICUT Movie… ImPlay2
" " Playback AVI Movie… AviPlay
" " View Capture ViewCapture
" AutoSave… AutoSave
" Recent Files MenuRecent
" Exit Exit
Edit menu

Edit MenuEdit
" Text File… EditText
" NC Program EditPath3
" Colors ColorDef
View menu
Path Depth 0 Path Depth 1 Path Depth 2 Path Depth 3 Menu Name
View MenuView
" Layout MenuLayout
" " Standard Standard
" " " ViewOne
" " " View12H
" " " View12V
" " " View1H2
" " " View1V2
" " " View4Sq
142
VERICUT Help
" " Add View AddView

" " Delete View RemoveView
" " Cascade Cascade
" " Tile Horizontally ViewTileH
" " Tile Vertically ViewTileV
" " View To Back ToBack
" " View To Front ToFront
" " View Always In Front AlwaysFront
" Orient… Vorient
" Attributes… Vattribs
" Section… Section
" Select/Store Vselect
" View Axes… ViewAxes
" Toolbar… Toolbar
" Resolution PropertiesDspRes
" " Manual DispRes0
" " Auto DispRes1
" Look & Feel Look & Feel
" Dynamic Controls PZRStyle
" " CATIA PZRCATIA
" " EdgeCAM PZREdgeCAM
" " hyperMILL PZRhyperMILL
" " NX PZRUniGraphics
" " PowerMILL PZRPowerMILL
" " Pro/E PZRPro/E
" " VERICUT PZRVERICUT
" " Wildfire PZRWildfire
" " Reverse mouse wheel RevWheel
" Logger View Options LoggerMenu
" " Error LoggerError
" " Warning LoggerWarning
" " Info LoggerInfo
" " Clear On Reset LoggerClearOnReset
143
VERICUT Help
" " Clear LoggerClear

" " Copy Ctrl+C LoggerCopy
Info menu
Path Depth 0 Path Depth 1 Menu Name

Info MenuInfo
" NC Program… PathView
" Status Status
" Graphs… Graphs
" Machine Offsets… ViewOffset
" Call Stack … CallStack
" File Summary… Summary
" G-Code Report… Detailed
" Control Report… CtrlReport
" VERICUT Log… EditLog
" Clear Log File and Logger ClearLogger
Project Menu
Path Depth Path Depth

0 3
Project MenuProjectSetup
" Project Tree… ProjectTree
" Current Setup CurrentSetup
" Add New Setup AddSetup
" Delete Current Setup DeleteSetup
" Import Setup… ImportSetup
" Stock MenuSetupModels
" " Load Stocks LoadStocks
Delete Detached
" " DeleteDetach
Stock…
" G-Code GcodeMenu
144
VERICUT Help
" " Advanced Settings… Gsettings

" " Variables… Gvariables
" " Output Options… ProcessOpt
" APT Settings… ASettings
" Tools… ToolMan
" Output… Output
" Report MenuReport
" " &Report Template ReportConfig
" " " Edit… ResultsConfg
User-Defined Tag
" " ResultsTag
Values…
" " Setup Plan… SetupPlan
" MDI MDI
Active Coordinate
" MchCsys
System
Configuration menu

Configuration MenuMachConfig
" Machine MenuMachine
" " Open… OpenMach
" " Save SaveMach
" " Save As… SaveAsMach
" " New NewMach
" Machine Settings MchSettings
" Control MenuControl
" " Open… OpenCont
" " Save SaveCont
" " Save As… SaveAsCont
" Word Format… Words
" G-Code Processing… Groups
" Control Settings… Modals
145
VERICUT Help
" Adv. Options… CtlAdvOpts
Analysis menu

Analysis MenuAnalysis
" X-Caliper… Caliper
" AUTO-DIFF… AutoDiff
" Comparator… Comparator
" NC Program Review… TpReview
" Inspection… Inspect
" Die Sinking Simulation… DieSink
OptiPath menu

OptiPath MenuOptiPath
" Control… OptiCon
" Compare Files… OptiCompare
" Savings Calculator… OptiCalc
Help menu

Help MenuHelp
" On Vericut… Help
" License… License
" About Vericut… About
146
VERICUT Help
Create the Hidden Menu Text File
1. Create a plain text file.

2. Create a list of menu items, or menu, names that you want to "hide" in the VERICUT main
Menu Bar. Refer to the Menu Name Tables above when doing this.
If you do not use the File menu > Custom Interface feature, enter VeriBook from the File Menu
names table in the plain text file to hide it from the Info menu pull-down list.
If you do not use any of the VERICUT Converters (CAD Model, IGES, PolyFix, Surface to Solid,
VDAFS, BinaryCL), File menu > Convert, enter MenuConvert from the File Menu names table in
the plain text file to hide Convert and all of its children from the File menu pull-down list.
To hide an entire menu in the Menu Bar, such as the Configuration Menu, enter
MenuMachConfig from the Configuration Menu names table in the plain text file.
Sample "hidden menu" text file
3. Save the text file.
See Hidden Menu Examples below for additional examples and details.
147
VERICUT Help
Set the CGTECH_MENU_HIDE Environment Variable

From the Windows Start Menu:
1. In the Windows Start menu, select Start > Control Panel > System to display the System
Properties window.
2. In the System Properties window, select the Advanced tab.
3. On the Advanced tab select Environment Variables.
4. Create environment variable CGTECH_MENU_HIDE and set the Variable value to the
\path\filename of the text file that you saved above.
The procedure described above may vary depending on the version of Windows that you are
using. You may also need to be an Administrator user to create the environment variable.
From the vericut .bat file that you use to start the VERICUT session:
1. Make a copy of the vericut.bat file, located in the "commands" folder of you VERICUT
installation.
2. Add the following line to the vericut.bat file.
set CGTECH_MENU_HIDE=<\path\filename of "hide menu text file>
3. Start VERICUT using the modified vericut.bat file.
You may need to be an Administrator user to create the modified vericut.bat file.
148
VERICUT Help
Hidden Menu Examples
Hide an individual item from a Menu:
Hide the Inspection feature (Analysis menu > Inspection)
Before:
1. Using the Analysis Menu names table Find the name of the Inspection feature. The name of the
inspection feature is Inspect.
2. Enter the name in a plain text file and save the text file. If needed, refer to the Create Hidden
Menu Text File section above.
149
VERICUT Help
3. Make sure that the CGTECH_MENU_HIDE environment variable points to the \path\filename of
the text file that you just saved. If needed, refer to the Set the CGTECH_MENU_HIDE
Environment Variable section above.
4. Start VERICUT. The Analysis menu should now look like the picture below.
After:
Hide a Menu from the Menu Bar:
Hide the OptiPath menu from the Menu Bar.

Before:
1. Using the OptiPath Menu names table (ref. OptiPath Menu in the Menu Name Tables section
above) Find the name of the OptiPath menu. The name of the OptiPath menu is MenuOptiPath.
150
VERICUT Help
2. Enter the name in a plain text file and save the text file. If needed, refer to the Create Hidden
Menu Text File section above.
4. Start VERICUT. The Menu Bar should now look like the picture below.
After:
Hide all Menus from the Menu Bar:
Before:
151
VERICUT Help
1. Using the File Menu names table (ref. OptiPath Menu in the Menu Name Tables section above)
Find the name of the File menu. The name of the File menu is MenuFile.
2. Enter the name in a plain text file. If needed, refer to the Create Hidden Menu Text File section
above.
3. Repeat Steps 1 & 2 for each of the menus (Edit, View, Info, etc.) in the Menu Bar. When you are
finished the text file should look like the one below.
5. Start VERICUT. The Menu Bar should no longer be displayed as shown in the picture below.
After:
152
VERICUT Help
Tool Bar
Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. The icons available in the Toolbar will
vary depending on the VERICUT application that you are using.
VERICUT's Toolbar provides quick and easy access to the most commonly-used
functions/features.
To see what is associated with a Toolbar icon, simply position the cursor over the icon and a tip
appears, as shown with the Translucent icon in the illustration above. Also notice that the icon
has a red triangle in the lower right corner of the icon when you place the cursor over the icon.
This indicates that the icon has more than one function.
In this case you can toggle between Translucent and Translucent Extended modes by clicking
on the icon with the right mouse button. You can close/open the Toolbar at any time.
The Toolbar is one of the dockable features enabling you to be able to re-position it if you
choose. See Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window, also in the Getting Started section of
VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help, for more information.
To close the Toolbar:
From the Toolbar select (Close).
To open the Toolbar:

Select View menu > Toolbar to display the View Toolbar window.
Select Display Toolbar so that the checkmark displays then click OK.
153
VERICUT Help
Using View menu > Toolbar you can also customize the Toolbar to suit your needs. See View
Toolbar window, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for information on individual icons and
customizing the Toolbar.
Tip:
Use the F1 key for Help on the Toolbar. When the toolbar is undocked, click anywhere in the
Toolbar to give it focus, then press the F1 key. When docked, you can also get to the Help if you
click on one of the "mode" icons (Translucent, Dynamic Rotation, Pan, etc.) to give the Toolbar
focus, then F1.
154
VERICUT Help
Graphics Area
The graphics area is where solid models of the workpiece, fixtures, etc. are displayed, and
where the simulation takes place. By default, two views are displayed: a Workpiece view and a
Machine Cut/Stock view. Using View menu > Layout you can add additional views displaying
the workpiece or NC machine (if a machine is defined). All views are contained within the
VERICUT main window.
Many other VERICUT functions enable user interactions in this area, including: picking models
or surfaces to be measured, determining NC program records responsible for specific cuts, and
more.
155
VERICUT Help
VERICUT View Port Controls (View Cube)
The VERICUT View Port controls, or View Cube, tracks the rotation of the view that is currently
active in the VERICUT Graphics area. Pan and Zoom have no effect on the cube. When you
rotate the view in the graphics area, the cube rotates to the same orientation. Conversely, if
you rotate the cube in the View Port control area, view in the graphics area will rotate to the
same orientation.
The entire cube is a combination 26 buttons that are triggered by a left click. 12 edge views
represented by the cylinders on the edges of the cube, 8 isometric views represented by 8
spheres at the corners of the cube and 6 standard views represented by the labeled sides of the
cube. See the picture below.
Other features in the View Port Controls area enable you to specify view related characteristics.
The (Home) icon in the upper left corner of the View Port Controls area enable you to
specify a view to represent a “home” view orientation that you can return to with a single
mouse pick. It also enables you to specify the planar view that you want to represent the
“Front” view.
The (Rotational Increment) icon in the lower left corner of the View Port Controls area
enables you to specify the rotational increment that you want to use when rotating the cube
and the view.
The (Saved Layouts) icon in the lower right corner of the View Port Controls area enables
you to capture, edit, and remove saved layouts.
156
VERICUT Help
Each of these features is shown in the picture above and is described in detail in the sections
that follow.
Standard View Selection

A standard view is considered to be a planer view of the Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left or
Right. To change to a standard view, click on any visible plane on the cube. At that time the
active View and the cube will rotate to that position and orientation so that the label is
positioned parallel to the screen. The view will also be automatically centered and “Fit” in the
active viewport.
To view the five non-visible sides, click on any standard view so that the arrows shown in the
picture below become visible and then use them to rotate to the desired standard view.
Click on the right facing arrow to rotate the cube and the view to the right. Click on the left
facing arrow to rotate the cube and the view to the left. Similarly, click on the down facing
157
VERICUT Help
arrow to rotate the cube and the view down. Click on the up facing arrow to rotate the cube
and the view up.
Click on the left facing curved arrow in the upper right corner to rotate the current view
counterclockwise. Click on the right facing curved arrow in the upper right corner to rotate the
current view clockwise.
By default, each time that you click on an arrow, the cube and the view will rotate 90 degrees.
You have the ability to change the rotational increment. This will be described in the Changing
the Rotational Increment section below.
Continue clicking on the arrows until you get to the desired standard view on the cube.
Non-standard View Selection

Non-standard views consist of Isometric views and Edge views. Isometric views are selected
using the spherical corners of the cube. Edge views are selected using the cylindrical edges of
the cube as shown in the picture below.
158
VERICUT Help
Isometric View Examples
In the following examples, the X indicates the pick location in the current position to get the
Cube/View to the next rotated orientation. The indicates the pick location at the end of the
rotation.
Pick Location For Next

Cube View
Rotation
Cube
Initial
1st
Rotation
2nd
Rotation
3rd
Rotation
159
VERICUT Help
Edge View Examples

In the following examples, the X indicates the pick location in the current position to get the
Cube/View to the next rotated orientation. The indicates the pick location at the end of the
rotation.
Pick Location For Next

Cube View
Rotation
Cube
Initial
1st
Rotation
2nd
Rotation
3rd
Rotation
160
VERICUT Help
Specifying a “Home” and a “Front” View
The (Home) icon enables you to specify the view that you want to be the “home” view.
The “home” view should be the view that you most frequently display. Specifying a “home”
view enables you to return to that view with a single mouse click.
The (Home) icon also enables you to specify the view that you want to represent the
“Front” view as described in the Standard View Selection section above.
Right-click on the (Home) icon to display the following menu.
Set home — This feature enables you to set the current view as the “home” view. Once
specified, this view is displayed whenever you left-click on the (Home) icon. Do the
following to specify your “home” view.
1. Orient the current view to the view that you want to use as your “home” view.
2. Right-click on the (Home) icon to display the menu above.

3. Left-click on the Set home option in the menu to designate that the current view is to be
used for the “home” view.
Set front — This feature enables you to set the current view as the “Front” view. Once
specified, this view is displayed whenever you Left-click on the “Front” face of the cube. Do the
following to specify your “Front” view.
1. Orient the current view to the view that you want to represent the “Front” view.
2. Right-click on the (Home) icon to display the menu above.

3. Left-click on the Set front option in the menu to designate that the current view is to be
used for the “Front” view.
Reset front — Selecting the Reset front option in the menu caused the Cube/View to align itself
with the Machine Origin coordinate system.
161
VERICUT Help
Changing the Rotational Increment

The box in the lower left corner of the View Port Controls area enables you to specify the
rotational increment that you want to use when rotating the Cube/View.
Right-click on the (Rotational Increment) icon in the lower left corner of the View Port
Controls area to display the following menu.
30 degrees — When selected (checked) the cube and the view will rotate 30 degrees each
time you click on an arrow in the “custom” rotation display in the View Port Controls area.
User input — Left-click on the User input feature in the menu will display the window,
shown in the picture below, enabling you to specify any rotation angel that you choose.
162
VERICUT Help
Enter the angle value in the text field and select OK. The window will close and the User
input feature in the menu will become checked indicating that it is the active rotation value.
The specified angle will be used each time you click on an arrow in the “custom” rotation
display in the View Port Controls area.
Left -click on the (Rotational Increment) icon in the lower left corner of the View Port
Controls area to display the “custom” rotation display in the View Port Controls area as shown
in the picture below.
163
VERICUT Help
Notice that the icon in the lower left corner of the View Port Controls area has changed to
indicating that you are in “non-default” rotation mode. When in this mode, each time you left-
click on an arrow the Cube/View will rotate the number of degrees specified in the menu
described above.
NOTE: “Non-default” rotation mode is only applicable to Standard View Selection. When using
Non-standard View Selection features, the Cube/View will still rotate 90 degrees for each
action.
You can return to “default” mode by left clicking on the icon in the lower left corner of the
View Port Controls area.
Capture, Edit, Activate, and Remove Views
Right-click on the (Saved Layouts) icon in the lower right corner of the View Port Controls
area to display the following menu.
Capture Layout — The Capture Layout feature enables you to capture the layout currently
displayed in the VERICUT Graphics area. Orient the views in the VERICUT Graphics area the way
that you want them and then left-click on Capture Layout to save the layout.
164
VERICUT Help
Edit/Remove — Left-click on Edit/Remove in the menu to display the Edit/Remove Layouts

window enabling you Activate , Re-name, Re-order or Delete layouts in the Saved Layouts list.
Standard Layouts — Sets the views of the VERICUT model to one of the standard view layout
choices.
NOTE: If you currently have a Single View Layout and change to a Two View Layout (either
Horizontal or Vertical) VERICUT will add the view with the type as defined below:
 If the single view is a Workpiece View, the added view will be a Machine/Cut Stock view.
 If the single view is a Machine view or a Machine/Cut Stock view, the added view is a
Workpiece view.
If the default view is not the view type that you want, right mouse click in the added view and
select View Type > desired view type (Workpiece, Machine, Machine/Cut Stock, or Profile) from
the right mouse button shortcut menu.
Saved Layouts — Left-click on the Saved Layouts feature to display all layouts that have been
saved using the Capture feature described above as shown in the picture below.
Left-click on the desired layout to activate it in the VERICUT Graphics area.
165
VERICUT Help
Tip: Hold the cursor over a saved layout to display the name that is save with the layout as
shown in the picture below.
166
VERICUT Help
Edit/Remove Layouts window

The features in the Edit/Remove Layouts window enable you to re-name, re-order, activate and
delete saved layouts.
Saved Layouts List — The Saved Layouts List contains a list of all views that you have captured.
VERICUT assigns a default name to a layout when you capture it. You can rename the layout by
double clicking on the layout name in the Saved Layouts List and then type in the new name.
By default, VERICUT puts a captured layout at the end of the Saved Layout List. You can re-
order the Layouts in the Saved Layouts List using the (Up) and (Down)
buttons described below.
(Up) — The Up button enables you to move a Layout to a position higher in the
Saved Layouts List. Click on the Layout to be moved so that it becomes highlighted and then
left-click on the Up button to move the Layout one level higher in the list.
(Down) — The Down button enables you to move a Layout to a position lower in the
Saved Layouts List. Click on the Layout to be moved so that it becomes highlighted and then
left-click on the Down button to move the Layout one level lower in the list.
Activate — Applies the highlighted Layout in the Saved Layouts List to the VERICUT graphics
window.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted layout from the Saved Layouts List.
Delete All — Deletes all Layouts from the From the Saved Layouts List.
Close — Closes the Edit/Remove Layouts window.
167
VERICUT Help
Mouse Pick Indicator
The windows that allow selecting geometry in the graphics area have a "Mouse Pick" indicator
icon that enables you designate which window picks in the graphics are to be applied to if
more than one of these windows is open. Click on the icon to toggle the feature On/Off. If you
toggle the “Mouse Pick” indicator “on” in a window, VERICUT automatically toggles "off" the
“Mouse Pick” indicator in all other open windows.
When toggled "on", the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick Highlight Color specified in the File
menu > Preferences window.
The following sections describe the windows in VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation and
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation that use the "Mouse Pick" indicator.
168
VERICUT Help
Windows Using the Mouse Pick Indicator
The "Mouse Pick" indicator icon appears in the following VERICUT windows:
Delete Detached Stock
Model Export Boundaries
Model Export Preview and Combine
NC Program Review
Project Tree
Section
Setup Plan
Tool Manager window, Tool Report tab
X-Caliper
169
VERICUT Help
Graphics Area Right Mouse Button (RMB) Shortcut Menus
Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, or RMB menus, provide easy access to most frequently
used features.
Right-click in a view to display Shortcuts menu, as shown in the illustration below, enabling you
to modify its attributes, such as: view type, standard modeling views, background, etc. Use
dynamic and static view options on the Tool Bar to rotate, zoom, or fit the model.
Sample VERICUT Right Mouse Button menu
The options will vary depending on the type of view and whether you are using VERICUT,
VERICUT Composite Simulation, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
See the Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus section, also in the Getting Started section of
Help for a complete list of windows where Shortcut menus are available.
170
VERICUT Help
Graphics Area RMB Menu Locations

The following sections describe the Right Mouse Button Menu options that are available in the
various view types in VERICUT.
Workpiece View
Right-click in a Workpiece View to display a menu with the following features:
171
VERICUT Help
Add a View — Use to add a view of the specified type. You can add as many views as desired.
View Type — Use to change the view type. (ref. View Attributes window, General tab, in the
View Menu section of VERICUT Help)
View to Back — Moves the view to the back. (ref. Layout (view), in the View Menu section of
VERICUT Help)
View Always in Front — Makes the view remain "always in front". (ref. Layout (view), in the
Reverse — Reverses viewing direction. (ref. View Orient window, in the View Menu section of
VERICUT Help)
Fit — "Fits" the objects in the view. (ref. View Orient window, in the View Menu section of
VERICUT Help)
Set Spin Center — Provides the same functionality as the Set Spin Center feature in the View
Orient window. (ref. View Orient window, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help)
Right-click on the position on an object (not the background) in the view where you want the
spin center located, and then left-click on Spin Center in the menu that displays. The spin
center will be located at your pick point.
Snap to Orthogonal View — Snaps the current view to the closest orthogonal view. (ref. View
Orient window, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help)
Select View — Orients the objects in the view to the selected view. The Select View feature list
will contain all available standard and custom views.
Background Style — Use to specify the background style for the view. (ref. View Attributes
window, General tab, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help)
Component Visibility — Use to make the selected component visible (checked), or not visible
(not checked), in Workpiece views in the VERICUT graphics area. A check indicates that the
component is visible.
If the component list contains more than 32 items, VERICUT will automatically break up the list
into sub-lists. Each sub-list will be identified by the first, and last, component in the list.
The View Components option displays the View Components window which enables you to
toggle on (checked)/toggle off (not checked) the visibility of multiple components at the same
time.
NOTES:
1. Only Components that have models associated with them in the Project Tree are displayed
in the Component Visibility list.
2. Tool Components do not appear in the Component Visibility list. See Holder Visibility and
Cutter Visibility in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on controlling
tool component visibility
172
VERICUT Help
Display Stocks — For a Workpiece view, the Attach Component feature is replaced by
the Display Stocks feature. The Display Stocks choice list will contain the names of each
individual Stock component as well as an "All Stocks" option. The "All Stocks" option
will only be displayed if all stock components have a common non-moving parent
component. This common non-moving parent component is the component that the
Workpiece view is attached to and the component's name will display in the view name.
Accelerated (Open GL) — Toggles Hardware Graphics Acceleration (OpenGL) "On" and "Off". A
check indicates that OpenGL is toggled "On". (ref. View Attributes window, General tab, in the
Active Coordinate System — Use to designate the "active" coordinate system. (ref. Active
Coordinate System, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help.
Display Axes — Use to control when various axes and coordinate systems are displayed. A
check next to any of the Display Axes features indicates that the feature is toggled "On". (ref.
View Axes window, in the View Menu section of VERICUT Help)
Project Tree — Opens the Project Tree. (ref. the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help)
173
VERICUT Help
Machine or Machine/Cut Stock View

Right-click in a Machine or Machine/Cut Stock View to display a menu with the following
features:
174
VERICUT Help
View menu section of VERICUT / VERICUT Composite Simulation Help)
VERICUT Help)
VERICUT Help)
VERICUT Help)
Draw Mode — Use to specify how machine components are displayed. (ref. View Attributes
Background Style — Use to specify the background style for the view. (ref. View Attributes
Component Visibility — Use to make the selected component visible, or not visible, in machine
views (Machine or Machine/Cut Stock) in the VERICUT graphics area. A check indicates that the
component is visible.
If the component list contains more than 32 items, VERICUT will automatically break up the list
into sub-lists. Each sub-list will be identified by the first, and last, component in the list.
The View Components option displays the View Components window which enables you to
toggle on (checked)/toggle off (not checked) the visibility of multiple components at the same
time.
NOTES:
1. Only Components that have models associated with them in the Project Tree are displayed
in the Component Visibility list.
175
VERICUT Help
2. Tool Components do not appear in the Component Visibility list. See Holder Visibility and
Cutter Visibility in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on controlling
tool component visibility.
Attach Component — Attaches the view point and line of sight for a view to the selected
component. (ref. View Attributes window, General tab, in the View Menu section of VERICUT
Help)
Accelerated (Open GL) — Toggles Hardware Graphics Acceleration (OpenGL) "On" and "Off". A
check indicates that OpenGL is toggled "On". (ref. View Attributes window, General tab, in the
Active Coordinate System — Use to designate the "active" coordinate system. (ref. Active
Coordinate System, in the Project Menu section of VERICUT Help.
176
VERICUT Help
Profile View
Right-click in a Profile View to display a menu with the following features:
VERICUT Help)
177
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Help)
VERICUT Help)
Draw Mode — Use to specify how machine components are displayed. (ref. View Attributes
Attach Component — Attaches the view point and line of sight for a view to the selected
component. (ref. View Attributes window, General tab, in the View Menu section of VERICUT
Help)
178
VERICUT Help
View Components window

Location: Graphics Area right mouse button menus: View Components option
The View Components window enables you to toggle on (checked)/toggle off (not checked) the
visibility of multiple components at the same time.
Component List — the component list contains all components in the particular view.
Set All — toggles on (checked) the visibility all components in the Component List.
Clear All — toggles off (unchecked) the visibility all components in the Component List.
Close — closes the View Components window.
179
VERICUT Help
Message Area (Logger)
Message Area (Logger) is one of the "dockable" features enabling you to be able to re-position
it if you choose. See "Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window", also in the Getting Started
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help, for more information.
The message area, also known as the "message logger" or "Logger", is located below the
graphics area, and by default displays the most recent message VERICUT has provided. VERICUT
provides error, warning, and informational messages to assist you during a simulation session.
You can easily determine the type of message by the following:
Error messages are preceded by "Error:". In general, error messages indicate that a problem
has occurred that will definitely affect the desired result.
Warning messages are preceded by "Warning:". In general, warning messages indicate that a
potential problem situation exists but VERICUT is unable determine whether the situation is
critical in your particular environment.
NOTE: What is considered an "error" and what is considered a "warning" is often interpret
differently from shop to shop, as well as from machine to machine. It is best to evaluate both
"errors" and "warnings" in the context of your machining environment regardless of the label
used.
Information messages have no preceding label and provide information about various
conditions, or states, related to VERICUT processing.
You can control the number of messages displayed in the Logger at any one time by clicking on
the divider between the Logger and the Graphics Area and either dragging up to increase the
number message lines displayed , or down to reduce the number message lines displayed.
You can always use the scroll bar to view messages that are not currently visible in the Logger
window.
180
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Right-click in the Message Area (Logger) to display a menu with the following
features:
NOTES:
1. These features provide the same functionality described under Logger View Options for
controlling what is displayed in the Logger. (ref. Logger View Options, in the View Menu
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help)
2. A check next to any of the features indicates that the feature is toggled "On".
Tips:
1. Clicking on an error in the Logger will highlight the NC program record in the NC Program
panel (Info menu > NC Program) that caused the error.
2. Use the F1 key for Help on the Logger. Whether the Logger is docked, or undocked, simply
click in the message area to give it focus, and then press F1.
NOTES:
1. All messages can be seen along with other valuable information in the Log file. See VERICUT
Log window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for additional information.
2. For information and tips about using VERICUT and troubleshooting problems, visit the
VERICUT Users’ Forum or contact CGTech technical support via our website, just click on the
support link.
181
VERICUT Help
Animation Controls
The Animation Controls features, located in the VERICUT main window, enable you to control
and visually monitor certain events related to the simulation. The Animation Controls consist of
the following four features.
Animation Controls is one of the "dockable" features enabling you to be able to re-position it if
you choose. See "Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window", also in the Getting Started section
of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help, for more information.
Tip: Use the key F1 for Help on the Animation Controls features. When undocked click
anywhere in the Animation Controls features bar to give it focus, then F1. When docked, you
can also get to the Help if you click on the Animation Slider to give the Animation Controls bar
focus, then F1.
Animation Speed Slider — Enables you to control the speed of the simulation.
Status Lights — Enables you to visually monitor certain events associated with the simulation
(status of travel limit checking, collisions, probing, subroutines, cutter compensation, cycles,
motion, OptiPath, and when VERICUT is processing).
Progress Bar — Enables you to monitor the progress of the current task.
Simulation (VCR) Controls — Enables you to start, single step, stop, rewind, and reset the
VERICUT simulation.
Each of these Animation Controls features is described in detail in the following sections.
Temporary Messages/Prompts — Many of VERICUT’s functions output temporary messages or

prompts to assist you with using the feature. These messages and prompts are displayed in the
space below the Animations Control features as shown in the picture above.
182
VERICUT Help
Animation Speed Slider
The Animation Speed Slider, located on the left end of the Animation Controls features,
controls the speed at which VERICUT animates material removal in workpiece views.
The Animation Speed Slider will be displayed in one of three ways:
Animation Speed Slider left Animation Speed Slider at Animation Speed Slider right
of center position the center position of center position
The slide bar at the center position represents an Animation Speed of 100%. Moving the slide
bar to the left of the center position slows animation by adding intermediate tool display
positions between motion start and end points. The slide bar at the full left position represents
an Animation Speed of 1%.
Use Min. Motion Dist. and Max. Motion Dist., in the Project Tree, on the Configure Setup
menu: Motion tab to define the range for the Animation Speed Slider.
Moving the slide bar to the right of center enables you to specify a Skip Motion value to group
cuts together for even faster animation display. The Skip Motion value represents the number
of animated tool motions to skip before updating the display. You can also specify the Skip
Motion value in the Project Tree, on the Configure Setup menu: Motion tab.
See Configure Setup menu, Motion tab, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
additional information on Min. Motion Dist., Max. Motion Dist., and Block Skip.
Positioning the cursor over the slide bar displays a tip indicating the slider’s value at the current
position as shown in the pictures that follow. Each corresponds to the slider position shown
above. When the tip is displayed, you can change the slider setting by typing the desired value
for Animation Speed or Skip Motions.
183
VERICUT Help
Status Lights
The "Status Lights", located between the Animation Speed Slider and the Progress Bar in the
Animation Controls features, provide constant visible feedback over when VERICUT is
processing certain events, busy performing a task, or optimizing an NC program file. The
function and conditions represented by the color of each status light is described below.
LIMIT — indicates the status of travel limit checking.

Red — indicates that a travel limit has been exceeded on the current block.
Yellow — indicates that a travel limit has been exceeded during the current session.
Green — indicates when Overtravel Detection On is toggled "On".
Dark Green — indicates that Overtravel Detection On is toggled "Off".
COLL — indicates the status of collision checking.

Red — indicates that a collision occurred on the current block.
Yellow — indicates that a collision has occurred during the current session.
Green — indicates that Collision Detection is toggled "On".
Dark Green — indicates that Collision Detection is toggled "Off".
PROBE — Indicates Probe status.

Green — indicates when Probe is "Armed".
Dark Green — indicates when Probe is "Not Armed".
SUB — indicates the status of Subroutine processing.

Green — indicates when VERICUT is processing a project subroutine.
Dark Green — indicates that no project subroutine is being processed.
184
VERICUT Help
COMP — indicates the status of Cutter Compensation.

Green — indicates that Cutter Compensation is "Active". Cutter compensation is turned on
in the NC Program and is being calculated and applied by VERICUT.
Yellow — indicates that Cutter Compensation is “On but not being applied”. Cutter
compensation is turned on in the NC Program but is not being calculated and applied by
VERICUT.
Dark Green — indicates that Cutter Compensation is "Not Active". Cutter compensation is
turned off in the NC Program.
See Notes about Cutter Compensation Updates in V7.0.2 in the Notes about Special Topics
section of the CGTech Help Library for additional information about each Cutter
Compensation status.
CYCLE — Indicates CYCLE status.

Green — indicates when CYCLE is "Active".
Dark Green — indicates when CYCLE is "Not Active".
FEED / RAPID — Indicates the current Motion status.

Red — indicates a "Rapid" motion.
Green — indicates a "Linear" motion.
Dark Green — indicates some "Other" type of motion.
OPTI — Indicates OptiPath status.

Green — indicates OptiPath is "On".
Yellow — indicates OptiPath is in "Learn Mode".
A yellow OPTI light can also indicate that an "OPTIPATH off" record has suspended the
writing of optimized NC program records.
Dark Green — indicates that OptiPath is "Off".
READY — Indicates VERICUT Status.

Red — indicates that VERICUT is "Busy" processing.
Yellow — indicates that VERICUT is "Paused" in the middle of a block or cycle.
Green — indicates that VERICUT is "Ready" for user commands.
Tip: Place the cursor over any of the Status Lights to see a summary of its function and
conditions.
NOTE: When "sync" is active, the following status lights will be set for the first channel only:
PROBE, SUB, COMP, CYCLE and FEED/RAPID.
185
VERICUT Help
Progress Bar
The Progress bar, located between the Status Lights and the Simulation (VCR) Controls in
Animation Controls features, provide constant visible feedback over the progress of a CPU-
intensive tasks, such as: comparing models using AUTO-DIFF, exporting model data, and
checking the consistency of the stock model(s). The progress bar moves towards the right as
the task nears completion. To interrupt the task, press (Pause).
Sample progress bar part way through a task:
186
VERICUT Help
Simulation (VCR) controls
The simulation controls, also known as VCR buttons, located on the right end of the Animation
Controls features, control interactive tool path simulation. Once VERICUT is configured, you will
use these controls to start and stop the simulation, as well as begin with a new, uncut
workpiece. To see what is associated with a Simulation control icon, simply position the cursor
over the icon and a tip appears. In addition, holding the cursor over the Play/Start-Stop
Options button , or the Step / Subroutine Options button , turns the lower right
corner red indicating that these buttons have a secondary function. Right click on these buttons
to access the secondary function. Right click on the button again to dismiss the secondary
function.
Each of the simulation controls buttons is described below.
Simulation controls:
Icon Name Function

Reset Model Display a new VERICUT model and
rewind the NC program file. The Reset
Confirmation will display.
Rewind NC Program Rewind the NC program file to the
beginning (leave the model as is).
Pause Stop processing immediately.
(or press Escape key <Esc>)
If processing stops in the middle of a
block or cycle, the yellow “Pause”
status light will be displayed.
If processing stops at the end of a

block, the green “Ready” status light
will be displayed.
187
VERICUT Help
Step / Subroutine Options Left click – If the yellow “Pause”

status light is displayed, Step will
process to the end of the current
block.
If the green “Ready” status light is

displayed, Step will process one NC
program record ("single block")
Tips:
1. Once you have clicked on the Step
icon with the left mouse button,
you can step forward one block in
simulation by using the spacebar.
You can step forward as many
times as you like by repeating to
press the spacebar.
2. Once you have clicked on the Step
you can use the space bar for a
continous Step operation.
VERICUT will continue stepping,
one NC block at a time, as long as
you continue to hold the spacebar
down. You do not need to hit the
spacebar repeatedly.
Right click - display the Subroutine

Options buttons that enable you to
specify how you want to handle NC
subroutines during processing. These
features are described in detail
below.
188
VERICUT Help
Play / Start-Stop Options Left click - start or re-start NC

program processing.
Tips:
1. Left click on the Play icon while
simulating to stop the simulation
just like using the Pause icon.
2. Once you have clicked on the Play
you can pause and start the
simulation by using the spacebar.
The spacebar will repeat the last
mouse click.
Right click – displays the Start/Stop

Options window that enables you to
specify conditions that control the
starting, and stopping, of NC program
processing.
Reset Confirmation
Upon selecting the Reset simulation control button, the following window will display enabling
you to confirm the resetting of the model and the rewind of the NC program.
Yes — Continue with the reset of the model and rewind of the NC Program.
No — Do not reset the model or rewind the NC Program.
Do not display this notice again — When toggled on (checked), this confirmation window will
no longer display when the Reset simulation control button is used.
189
VERICUT Help
Start At /Stop At Options window
Location:
VERICUT main window > right click on the (Play / Start/Stop Options) icon
The features on the Start At / Stop At Options window enable you to specify conditions that
control the starting, and stopping, of NC Program processing. Start At / Stop At options are also
called Breakpoint options. When applicable, enter supporting "start at" text or values in the
field next to the feature or select from the pull-down list. Text entered is not case sensitive.
The following picture shows the default Start At / Stop At settings when starting a new project
file.
Start At — The Start At options enable you tp specify where you want the cutting simulation to
start. VERICUT fast forwards from the beginning of the NC program to the specified line/record
while internally processing intermediate tool path records to store values for the current feed
rate, spindle speed, coolant, tool description, and tool location.
Options are:
Beginning — Start NC program processing at the beginning of the first file.
190
VERICUT Help
Line Number — Start NC program processing at the specified line number of selected NC
program file.
Highlight the number displayed in the text field and then enter the desired line number. Use
the to increment/decrement the displayed line number by 1.
Select the NC program from the pull-down list. The list will contain all of the NC programs and
job subroutine files defined for the current job enabling you to select the NC program file.
Line Number (Directly) — Start NC program processing at the specified line number without
internally processing intermediate NC program records.
This line number only applies to the first NC program (or the first active NC program if Use
Selected Files, in the Info menu > NC Program panel, is being used to select only specific NC
program files from the list for VERICUT processing).
Text — Start NC program processing on the line that contains the specified text.
Enter the text that you want processing to start at in the text field.
Tool ID — Start NC program processing when the specified tool is loaded.
Select the desired Tool ID from the pull-down list.
191
VERICUT Help
Stop At — The Stop At options enable you to specify conditions for stopping NC program
processing.
The following information is applicable to all “stop at” record types.
Use the checkbox on the left side of the “stop at” condition record to make the record
active (checked) or inactive (not checked).
Use the pull-down list to select the “stop at” condition record type. After selecting the “type”,
supporting information fields will added to the record.
When applicable, enter supporting text or values in the field(s) provided, or use the pull-down
list if one is provided, to select supporting data for each “stop at” condition record type. Text
entered is not case sensitive.
Use the (Remove Breakpoint) button to remove the “stop at” condition record.
Use the button to add a new “stop at” condition record. You can add multiple “stop
at” condition records at any time, but only one “stop at” condition record of each type. The two
exceptions are Text and Line Number type “stop at” condition records which can be added
multiple times.
Use the button to remove the check from all checkboxes on the left side of the “stop
at” condition records at the same time to make all of the “stop at” condition records inactive.
If more “stop at” condition records than will fit in the window are added, a scroll bar is added to
enable viewing the additional records.
Each of the “stop at” condition record types is described below.
192
VERICUT Help
Options are:
Number of Lines — Stops NC program processing after the specified number of lines have been
processed.
Highlight the number displayed in the text field and then enter the desired number of lines to
be processed before NC program processing is stopped. Use the to increment/decrement
the displayed line number by 1.
Line Number — Stops NC program processing at the specified line number of the selected NC
program file.
Select the NC program from the pull-down list. The pull-down list contains all of the NC
program and job subroutine files defined for the current job.
Text — Stops NC program processing on the line that contains the specified text.
Enter the “stop at” text in the field provided.
Collision — Stops NC program processing when a collision occurs.
This feature ONLY applies to the Machine Simulation collision checking, and ONLY to machine
components other than the STOCK component. It does not apply to holder/stock and
tool/fixture collision checks done from the material removal logic.
193
VERICUT Help
While simulating an NC block, VERICUT stops in mid-motion at each collision point. Clicking Step
continues simulation to the next collision point (or to the end of the motion if no more
collisions exist).
Max Errors — Number of errors which, if detected, stops NC program processing.
Highlight the number displayed in the text field and then enter the desired number of errors
that can occur before NC program processing is stopped.. Use the to increment/decrement
Max Warnings — Number of warnings which, if detected, stops NC program processing.
Highlight the number displayed in the text field and then enter the desired number of warnings
that can occur before NC program processing is stopped.. Use the to increment/decrement
Tool Change — Stops NC program processing when a "tool change" record is encountered in
the NC program.
Program Stop — Stops NC program processing when a "program stop" record is encountered in
the NC program. Examples of such records include: M0 (G-Code NC program files) or STOP.
194
VERICUT Help
Optional Stop — Stop NC program processing when an "optional stop" record is encountered in
the NC program. Examples of such records include: M1 (G-Code NC program files) or OPSTOP.
End of each File — Stops NC program processing at the end of each NC program file.
End of each Setup — Stops NC program processing at the end of each setup.
Each Motion Block — Stops NC program processing at the end of each motion block.
This option is intended to assist with the debugging of large complicated control subroutines.
The concept is: skip over all the playing with variables, and just advance to the next motion.
“Motion” is being defined as any of the following (this may not be an all inclusive list):
 An actual machine motion.
 A motion block, even if it doesn’t create an actual motion (G91 X0)
 A change of the local coordinate system (a change of offsets)
 A spindle being turned on or off
 A tool change
NOTE: When motions occur within a within a machine or control subroutine in which we are
stepping over (not stepping in), a stop will occur at the end of the project level block.
195
VERICUT Help
Subroutine Options
Location:
VERICUT main window > right click on the (Step / Subroutine Options) icon
VERICUT Composite Simulation main window > right click on the (Step / Subroutine
Options) icon
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation main window > right click on the (Step /
Subroutine Options) icon
The Subroutine Options enable you to specify what you want VERICUT to do when a subroutine
is encountered during processing.
Step Into Subroutine — When you come to a subroutine, step into the subroutine, and
continue stepping.
Step Over Subroutine — When you come to a subroutine, do not step into it, execute the
subroutine, and continue stepping on the next line of the calling program.
Step to End of Subroutine — If you are inside a subroutine, finish executing the current
subroutine, and continue stepping on the next line of the calling routine.
Tip:
Position the cursor over the icon and a tip appears to remind you of each icon’s function.
196
VERICUT Help
Micro Step
The Micro Step feature enables “slow motion” processing. When extra intermediate points are
generated during simulation it is possible to do “micro steps” by processing only one point at a
time. Micro Step enables you to step to each intermediate point instead of from the start to the
end of a single block like the Step animation control button does. When the distance is too
short for generating intermediate points, Micro Step will behave exactly like the Step
animation control button.
To use the Micro Step feature, move the Animation Speed Slider all the way to the left and then
use the numeric key pad "+" key to step from intermediate point to intermediate point.
197
VERICUT Help
Project Tree
Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. The features contained in the project
tree will vary slightly depending on the VERICUT application that you are using.
The Project Tree is your primary work area for setting up jobs for verification and simulation.
The features in the Project Tree provide the tools required for the day to day use of VERICUT.
The Project Tree includes a project configuration tool to assist you in setting up your VERICUT
job. For each branch in the project tree, the project configuration tool will display a window
containing features that are applicable to the particular branch.
The Project Tree also enables you to view the "tree" of components that make up the machine
and see how they are connected.
198
VERICUT Help
See the Project Tree section, in VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information about the Project Tree and all of its
features.
199
VERICUT Help
Dynamic Zoom, Pan, and Rotate

The Dynamic Zoom, Pan and Rotate features enable you to manipulate the displayed image of
a view using a single mouse button.
Click with the left mouse button in a view and drag the
Rotate
mouse to rotate the display.
Click with the right mouse button in a view and drag the
Pan
mouse to rotate the display.
Rotate the thumb wheel while the cursor is in a view to

zoom in or out on the display.
Move the wheel toward you to make the displayed image

Zoom
larger.
Move the wheel away from you to make the displayed

image smaller.
Press the thumb wheel down in a view and drag the mouse
to define the box to zoom to. Release the thumb wheel to
start the zoom.
Zoom to Box
You can also click the thumbwheel to define the first corner
of the box, and then move the mouse to the position
defining the other corner of the box and click again.
NOTES:
1. Dynamic Controls (File menu > Preferences window: Display tab) must be set to VERICUT.
2. The Shift key, Ctrl key, and mouse button combinations used in pre-V6.1 for view
manipulation is still available.
3. The Shift key, Ctrl key, and Arrow key combinations are no longer available.
4. In NC Program Review, the dynamic rotate with the left button is briefly suspended when
picking a rectangle for Settings menu > Display to Box.
5. In AUTO-DIFF, when using Compare By Region, the dynamic rotate with the left button is
suspended as long as the Drag Region button is active.
200
VERICUT Help
Look & Feel

Location: File menu > Preferences window: Display tab
View menu > Look & Feel
The Look & Feel features change the appearance of VERICUT's user interface. All windows are
affected. The look and feel of VERICUT can be changed at any time.
To change the user interface look and feel:
1. In the File menu, select Preferences window: Display tab.
2. In the Look & Feel pull-down list, choose the option that provides the desired
appearance.
See File menu > Preferences window: Display tab for additional information.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all systems.
201
VERICUT Help
Options:
Metal —
202
VERICUT Help
Motif —
203
VERICUT Help
Nimbus —
204
VERICUT Help
Windows —
205
VERICUT Help
Windows Classic —
206
VERICUT Help
Text Larger — Use to make the text in VERICUT menus, message logger, windows, etc. larger.
Each time you click on "Text Larger", the text gets incrementally larger to a maximum font size
of "14 point".
207
VERICUT Help
Text Smaller — Use to make the text in VERICUT menus, message logger, windows, etc. smaller.
Each time you click on "Text Smaller", the text gets incrementally smaller to a minimum font
size of "6 point ".
208
VERICUT Help
Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows
File selection windows are used throughout VERICUT to open and save various VERICUT file
types. They are also accessed by using the Browse buttons found on many VERICUT windows to
assist you in specifying required /path/filenames. Most features on this window are standard
file selection window features that enable you to navigate through directories, filter files, and
type, or select, /path/filenames. Each window may vary slightly depending on its intended
purpose. This section describes the features common to all VERICUT file selection windows.
Features specific to a particular window are described in the documentation for the window.
209
VERICUT Help
(Folder) — Displays the “standard” file selection Folder Tree structure in the left panel.
(Favorite) — Displays the Favorites Listing Area section of your Favorites panel in the left
panel. See Favorites panel in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
210
VERICUT Help
File List — When the “standard” file selection Folder Tree structure is displayed in the left panel
the file list displays the files contained in the folder highlighted in the Folder Tree, filtered
according to the setting of the Filter feature described below.
When Favorites Listing Area section of your Favorites panel is displayed in the left panel the file
list displays the files contained in the highlighted “Favorite” folder, filtered according to the
setting of the Filter feature described below.
File — Use this text field to manually enter /path/filename information. VERICUT will fill in this
field as you use the Folder Tree and File List, or the Favorites Listing and File List, to specify the
/path/filename. You can also edit the /path/filename entered by VERICUT.
Filter — Use this feature to specify the types of files to be displayed in the File List.
Shortcut —
(Up One Level) — Enables you to quickly move up one level in the folder structure.
(New Folder) — Displays the New folder window enabling you to create a new folder.
Enter the name for the new folder in the New sub-folder name text field, and then select
OK to create the new folder inside the folder highlighted in the Folder Tree.
Use Cancel to close the New folder window without creating the folder.
This feature is only available when the “standard” file selection Folder Tree structure is
displayed in the left panel.
(Add a Favorite) — Opens the Add a Favorite window enabling you to add a “favorite”
folder or “favorite” file to your Favorites panel. A ”favorite” is a link to a folder of files or a link
to an individual file.
Options List — The Shortcut option list on the file selection windows provides quick access to
files in your Working Directory, or CGTech Library, CGTech Sample, and Training files. Choosing
a shortcut automatically filters for files in that folder. You can also type new shortcuts into the
list, but they are only remembered during the current VERICUT session. See Adding Custom
Environment Variables for Shortcuts in the Environment Variables topic, also in the Getting
Started section of VERICUT Help for information on adding additional permanent shortcuts.
Open / Save — Use to open/save the specified file in the specified folder.
211
VERICUT Help
Cancel — Use Cancel to close the file selection window without opening/saving a file.
Some file selection windows, like those for selecting NC Program files and NC Subroutine files
enable you to select one, or more, files, in the same folder, at the same time.
To select multiple files in these windows, try these techniques:

Select multiple files in sequence — Click the first file name in the sequence, then press and
hold the <Shift> key while clicking the last file name in the sequence. The first, last and all files
between will be added to the File list at the bottom of the window.
You can also click on the first file name in the sequence, and then while still holding down the
mouse button, drag the cursor to the last file name in the sequence.
Select additional individual files — Press and hold the <Control> key while selecting each
additional file. Each will be added to the File list at the bottom of the window.
With either method, selecting a file name a second time, while holding down the <Control>
key, un-selects the file.
The order in which the files are selected determines the order that files will be displayed in the
File field.
212
VERICUT Help
Using the Standard VERICUT File Selection Window
File selection windows are used throughout VERICUT to open and save various VERICUT file
types. Most features on this window are standard file selection window features that enable
you to navigate through directories, filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. This is the
most commonly used file select window used in VERICUT. The few exceptions are described in
the Help Sections where they are used.
This section describes using the file selection window when the “standard” file selection Folder
Tree structure is displayed in the left panel.
Opening a File
1. Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window containing the file you want to
open. Use the (Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file
selection window, to quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
You can also select the folder from the Shortcut pull-down list if it is found there.
2. Once you select the folder in the folder tree, the files in that folder are displayed in the
center section of the file selection window. Use the Filter feature to specify the type of files
that you want displayed.
213
VERICUT Help
3. Select the file that you want to open from those displayed in the center section of the file
selection window so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Click on Open in the lower right corner of the window to open the file and close the file
selection window.
5. You can click on Cancel in the lower right corner of the window to close the file selection
window without opening a file.
Saving a File
1. Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window that you want to save the file to.
Use the Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file selection
window, to quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
You can also select the folder from the Shortcut pull-down list, located in the upper right
corner of the file selection window, if it is found there.
If you want to create a new folder, use the (New Folder) icon, located in the upper
right corner of the file selection window, to display the New folder window. Use it to add
the name of the sub-folder to be added. Click OK in the New folder window to add the new
sub-folder inside the folder highlighted in the folder tree.
center section of the file selection window. Use the Filter feature to specify the type of files
that you want displayed.
214
VERICUT Help
3. Enter the name of the file that you want to save in the File text field, or select a file from
those displayed in the center section of the file selection window if you want to replace it.
4. Click on Save in the lower right corner of the window to save the file and close the file
selection window.
window without saving the file.
215
VERICUT Help
Using the “Favorites” VERICUT File Selection Window
The “standard” file selection windows are used throughout VERICUT to open and save various
VERICUT file types. Most features on this window are standard file selection window features
that enable you to navigate through directories, filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames.
This is the most commonly used file select window used in VERICUT. The couple of exceptions
are described below.
Opening a File in a Favorite Folder
1. Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, containing
the file you want to open.
2. You can also select the folder from the Shortcut pull-down list if it is found there.
3. Once you select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, the files in that folder are
displayed in the center section of the file selection window, filtered according to the setting
of the Filter feature when the “favorite” folder was created.
4. Select the file that you want to open from those displayed in the center section of the file
216
VERICUT Help
selection window.
Tip: You can also double-click with the left mouse button on the file that you want to in the
center section of the file selection window to open the file and close the file selection
window.
Opening a Favorite File
1. Select the “favorite” file in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window.
2. Once you select the “favorite” file in the Favorites List, the file name will be displayed in the
center section of the file selection window.
3. Select the file name that you want to in the center section of the file selection window so
that it becomes highlighted.
selection window.
Tip: You can also double-click with the left mouse button on the file that you want to in the
center section of the file selection window to open the file and close the file selection
window.
217
VERICUT Help
Saving a File to a Favorite Folder
1. Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, where you
want to save the file.
2. You can also select the folder from the Shortcut pull-down list if it is found there.
3. Once you select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, the files in that folder are
displayed in the center section of the file selection window, filtered according to the setting
of the Filter feature when the “favorite” folder was created.
4. Enter the name of the file that you want to save in the File text field, or select a file from
those displayed in the center section of the file selection window if you want to replace it.
5. Click on Save in the lower right corner of the window to save the file and close the file
selection window.
218
VERICUT Help
Right Mouse Button (RMB) Shortcut Menus
Many of the VERICUT windows have Right Mouse Button shortcut menus, or RMB menus,
available by clicking with the right mouse button, a menu displays that contains features
specific to that window.
The following provides a summary of the VERICUT windows that have right mouse button
shortcut menus (RMB menus). Refer to the VERICUT Help section for each window for specific
information about the features contained in these shortcut menus.
VERICUT Main Window

Workpiece View
Machine View
Machine/Cut Stock View
Profile View
Text File (edit) window
NC Program (edit) window
View Section window
Select/Store View window
NC Program (Info) window
G-Code Report window
Control Report window
Profile Sketcher window

Revolve Profile
Sweep Profile
Tool Manager Window

Tool Table
Tool Display Area
Coordinate Systems Area
219
VERICUT Help
Collision and Travel Limits Window

Collision Detect tab
Variables window
Cycles window
Report Template window

Page Layout tab
Styles tab
User Defined Tags tab
Setup Plan window
MDI window
Project Tree panel

Project Branch
Setup Branch
CNC Machine Branch
Control Branch
Machine Branch
Attach Component
Component Branch
Models Branch
Model
Collision Branch
Travel Limits Branch
Coordinate Systems Branch
Coordinate System
G-Code Offsets Branch
G-Code Table
G-Code Table Record
Tooling
NC Programs Branch
NC Program file
NC Subroutines
NC Subroutine file
Saved IP Files
IP file
Machine Settings window

Collision Detect tab
Subroutines tab
220
VERICUT Help
Word Format window

Word Format tab
G-Code Processing window
Control Variables window
Control Settings window

Sync tab
Advanced Control Options window

Subroutines tab
Substitute tab
OptiPath Substitute tab
NC Program Review panel

Main Window
Workpiece View
Machine View
Machine Cut Stock View
Profile View
NC Program Listing Area
NC Program Preview panel

Main Window
Workpiece View
Machine View
Profile View
Inspection Window
221
VERICUT Help
Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window

Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation. The following discussion uses VERICUT
images but the concepts are the same for VERICUT Composite Simulation and VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation.
VERICUT enables you to personalize your workspace to match the process by which you use
VERICUT's many features, as well as incorporating your own personal preferences. Through the
use of "dockable" panels, you can set up your VERICUT workspace as simply or as complex as
you choose.
Each of the “dockable” panels can be displayed in three different states as shown in the picture
below.
1. Docked inside the VERICUT main window. The VERICUT Logger, in the picture below, is
displayed in a “docked” state.
2. Floating (un-docked) is displayed as a stand-alone panel. The Project Tree, in the picture
below, is displayed in a “floating” state.
3. Overlay displays the panel as a tag on the edge the VERICUT main window. The X-Caliper
panel, in the picture below, is displayed in an “overlay” state. You can display the panel
by clicking on the tab. Click again to return to the “overlay” state.
222
VERICUT Help
All “dockable” panels can be combined to create tabbed panels. Each of these concepts will be
define in detail in the sections below.
By “docking”, “floating” or “overlaying” dockable panels, and/or tabbed panels you can tailor
your VERICUT workspace to meet your specific needs.
The layout and last location of all dockable panels, including tabbed panels, are saved in the
Preferencess (prefs) file.
223
VERICUT Help
Dockable Panels
In the following discussion the term "VERICUT" represents VERICUT Simulation, VERICUT
Composite Simulation and VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
The following summarizes the dockable panels that are available:
Dockable Panel Location
Toolbar VERICUT main window
Animation Controls VERICUT main window
VERICUT Logger VERICUT main window
Fastener Project Tree > Configure Design Locations menu > Programming
Programming (VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation only)
Fastener Locations Project Tree > Configure Simulated Locations menu > Detailed Report
(VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation only)
Favorites File menu > Favorites
Machine Offsets Info menu > Machine Offsets
Call Stack Info menu > Call Stack
Subsytem Motion Info menu > SubSystem Motion
840D System Frames Info menu > 840D System Frames
Interactive OptiPath OptiPath menu > Interactive
NC Program Info menu > NC Program
NC Program Review Analysis menu > NC Program Review
NC Program Preview Info menu > NC Program > NC Program Preview icon
224
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Project menu > Project Tree
Status Info menu > Status
SubSystem Motion Info menu > SubSystem Motion
Tape Manager Project Tree > Tape Manager

(Vericut Composite Simulation only)
Tool Change List Project Tree > Configure Tooling > menu > Tool Change By List button
Tool Change By File Project Tree > Configure Tooling > menu > Tool Change By File button
Name
X-Caliper Analysis menu > X-Caliper
NOTES:
1. NC Program Preview is not available in VERICUT Composite Simulation.
2. When any of the above "panels" is docked, make sure that you click in the window so
that it becomes the "active" window before using F1 to get help specific to the window.
Otherwise F1 will go to the CGTech Help Library.
225
VERICUT Help
Single Panels
When you open VERICUT 7.4 for the first time, the Toolbar, the Project Tree , the Animation
Controls and the VERICUT Logger panels are all displayed as “docked” inside the VERICUT main
window. All other “dockable” panels will be displayed as “floating” panels.
Docked Panels
In general, “docked” panels, like the Project Tree, will have a tab that looks like the following
picture.
Most “docked” panels have the three icons described below.
The (Close) icon located at the end of each tab enables you to close the “docked” panel.
The next time that you access the panel from the VERICUT main menu bar, it will be
displayed as a “docked” panel.
The (Overlay) icon converts a “docked” panel to an “overlay” panel at the previous
“overlay” panel location.
(Floating) icon converts a “docked” panel to a “floating” panel at the previous floating
panel location.
The exceptions to the “most docked panels” statement above are:
 The VERICUT Logger panel cannot be closed so therefore does not have a (Close)
icon at the end of the tab.
 The Animation Control panel cannot be closed or overlaid. You can only drag it to
another “docked” location or drag it outside of the VERICUT main window so it becomes
a “floating” panel.
 The Toolbar cannot be an Overlay Panel. You can only drag it to another “docked”
location or drag it outside of the VERICUT main window so it becomes a “floating”
panel. You can close the Toolbar using the (Close) icon. The Toolbar does not size
automatically.
Tip: Holding the cursor over any of the icons will display a tip showing what the icon is used
for.
Right-click on a tab in a “floating” panel to display the following menu. Each menu item
provides the same functionality described above.
226
VERICUT Help
Creating a Docked panel from a Floating panel

1. Using the VERICUT main menu bar, open a dockable panel. In this case it is the NC
Program panel.
2. Click on the “floating” panel’s tab and start dragging the panel toward the location
where you want the panel “docked”. You will see a small panel inside the “floating”
panel as shown in the picture below.
227
VERICUT Help
3. Continue moving the cursor and small panel to the location where you want to dock the
panel. When you get close to a “dockable” location, a blue rectangle similar to the one
shown in the picture below, will display where the panel will be docked.
NOTE: As you move the cursor and small panel around the VERICUT main window, you will
Find many dockable locations represented by blue rectangles in various sizes and orientations.
228
VERICUT Help
4. Releasing the mouse button will dock the floating panel in the location of the blue
rectangle as shown in the picture below.
229
VERICUT Help
Creating a Docked panel from an Overlay panel

1. Start with an “overlay” panel, in this case the NC Program panel, as shown in the picture
below.
2. Click on the (Docked) icon, located at the bottom of the “overlay” tag to change the
“overlay” panel to a “docked” panel at the previous “docked” panel location as shown in
the picture below.
230
VERICUT Help
NOTE: If you want the panel docked in a different location, click on the panel’s tab and drag
the it outside of the main VERICUT window so that it becomes a “floating panel”, then use the
procedure described in the Creating a Docked panel from a Floating panel section above to
dock it in a different location.
Floating Panels
“Floating”panels, like the Machine Offsets panel shown below, will have a tab that looks like
the following picture.
“Floating “ panels have the three icons described below.
The (Close) icon, located at the end of each tab enables you to close the “floating”
panel. The next time that you access the panel from the VERICUT main menu bar, it will be
displayed as a “floating” panel.
The (Overlay) icon converts a “floating” panel to an “overlay” panel at the previous
“floating” panel location.
The (Docked) icon converts a “floating” panel to a “docked” panel at the previous
“floating” panel location.
for.
Right-click on a tab in a “floating” panel to display the following menu. Each menu item
provides the same functionality described above.
231
VERICUT Help
Creating a Floating panel from a Docked panel

To convert a “docked” panel into a “floating” panel, click on the tab in the “docked” panel and
drag the panel outside of the VERICUT main window.
Creating a Floating panel from a Overlay panel

To convert an “overlay” panel into a “floating” panel, click on the “overlay” tag and drag the
panel outside of the VERICUT main window.
Overlay Panels
“Overlay ”panels, like the X-Caliper panel shown below, will have a tag that looks like the
following pictures.
The tag will be displayed vertically when the when the

panel is in an “overlay” state on the right or left side of
the VERICUT main window.
Clicking on the tag will display the X-Caliper panel.
Clicking on it again will return the X-Caliper panel to the
“overlay” state. See the example below.
The tag will be displayed horizontally when the when

the panel is in an “overlay” state on the top or bottom
of the VERICUT main window.
Clicking on the tag will display the X-Caliper panel.
Clicking on it again will return the X-Caliper panel to the
“overlay” state. See the example below.
“Overlay“ tags have the three icons described below.

The push pin icon changes the behavior of an “overlay” panel. Click on the push pin to
change between the two modes.
When the icon is displayed, an open “overlay” panel returns to the “overlay” state
when the focus is lost (click on the “overlay” tag or anywhere outside the open
“overlay” panel).
232
VERICUT Help
only when you click on the “overlay” tag.
The (Docked) icon, located on the right side of a horizontal tag or the bottom of a
vertical tag, changes the “overlay” panel to a “docked” panel at the previous “docked”
panel location.
for.
Right-click on an “overlay” tag to display one of the following menus depending on the current
state of the push pin icon. Each menu item provides the same functionality as described above.
233
VERICUT Help
Vertical Example
Overlay Open
234
VERICUT Help
Horizontal Example
Overlay Open
Open “overlay” panels, like the X-Caliper panel shown below, will have a tab that looks like the
following picture.
Open “overlay“ panels have the following icons described below.
The (Close) icon, located at the end of each tab enables you to close the “overlay” panel
and remove the “overlay” tag. The next time that you access the panel from the VERICUT
main menu bar, it will be displayed as an “overlay” panel.
The push pin icon changes the behavior of the “overlay” panel. Click on the push pin to
change between the two modes.
when the focus is lost (click on the “overlay” tag or anywhere outside the open
“overlay” panel).
only when you click on the “overlay” tag.
235
VERICUT Help
The (Floating) icon converts an “overlay” panel to a “floating” panel at the previous
“floating” panel location. You can also click on the open “overlay” panel’s tab and drag it
outside if the main VERICUT window to change it to a “floating” panel.
The (Docked) icon converts an “overlay” panel to a “docked” panel at the previous
“docked” panel location.
for.
Right-click on a tab in an open “overlay” panel to display one of the following menus depending
on the current state of the push pin icon. Each menu item provides the same functionality
described above.
236
VERICUT Help
Creating an Overlay panel from a Floating panel
1. Using the VERICUT main menu bar, open a dockable panel. In this case it is the NC
Program panel.
2. Click on the “floating” panel’s tab and start dragging the panel toward the location
where you want the panel “docked”. You will see a small panel inside the “floating”
panel as shown in the picture below.
237
VERICUT Help
3. Continue moving the cursor and small panel to the location where you want to overlay
the panel. When the cursor gets on the edge of the VERICUT main window, a very
narrow blue rectangle, similar to the one shown in the picture picture below, will display
where the “overlay” tag will be placed.
You can locate other overlay locations, indicated by the narrow rectangle, by placing the
cursor on the left, bottom or right edges of the VERICUT main window. The overlay
location at the top of the VERICUT main window can be found by placing the cursor on
the very bottom of the VERICUT main Menu bar.
238
VERICUT Help
4. Releasing the mouse button will display the “overlay” tag in the location of the blue
239
VERICUT Help
Creating an Overlay panel from a Docked panel
1. Start with a “docked” panel, in this case the NC Program panel, as shown in the picture
below.
2. Click on the (Overlay) icon in the top right corner of the “docked” panel to convert
the “docked” panel to an “overlay” panel at the previous “overlay” panel location. The
“overlay” tag will be displayed as shown in the picture below.
240
VERICUT Help
NOTE: If you want the “overlay” tag in a different overlay location you can click on the
“overlay” tag and drag it to the desired overlay location using the narrow blue rectangle,
described in the Creating an Overlay panel from a Floating panel section above.
241
VERICUT Help
Tabbed Panels
Any “dockable” panel can be configured with multiple tabs. Tabbed panels can be displayed in
the same three states as any other “dockable” panel. The following are some examples.
Docked Panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

The following picture shows a multi-tab “docked” panel on the left side of the VERICUT main
window. The tabbed panel contains the Project Tree panel, the NC Program panel and the
Status panel. Click on a tab to display the entire panel.
242
VERICUT Help
Create a Docked Panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

1. Open the first “floating” panel, in this case the NC Program panel (Info menu > NC
Program).
2. Open the second “floating” panel, in this case the Status panel (Info menu >Status).
3. Click on the tab in the “floating” Status panel and then drag it into the “floating” NC
Program panel. The ”floating” panel should now look like the picture below.
243
VERICUT Help
4. Click in the non-tabbed section of “floating” panel’s header (indicated by the red box in
the picture below) and start dragging the panel toward the location where you want the
panel “docked”. You will see a small panel inside the “floating” panel as shown in the
picture below.
244
VERICUT Help
5. Continue moving the cursor and small panel to the location where you want to dock the
panel. When you get close to a “dockable” location, a blue rectangle similar to the one
shown in the picture picture below, will display where the panel will be docked.
245
VERICUT Help
6. Releasing the mouse button will dock the “floating” panel in the location of the blue
246
VERICUT Help
Using Docked Tabbed Panels

To change the order of the tabs in a tabbed panel, click on the tab and drag it right or left to the
desired position.
To remove a tab from the tabbed panel, click on the (Close) icon located at the end of the
tab.
To convert a tabbed “docked” panel into a tabbed “floating” panel, click in the non-tabbed
section of “docked” panel’s header (described above in Step 4) and drag the panel outside of
the VERICUT main window.
The all other behavior for a “docked” tabbed panel is the same as described above for Single
Panels.
247
VERICUT Help
Floating Panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

The following picture shows a multi-tab “floating” panel. The tabbed panel contains the
Machine Offsets panel, the Call Stack panel, the SubSystem Motion panel and the 840D System
Frames panel. Click on a tab to display the entire panel. This configuration would replace the G-
Code Debug window of previous releases.
248
VERICUT Help
Create a Floating Panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

This example will re-create the G-Code Debugging window of previous releases.
1. Open the first “floating” panel, in this case the Machine Offsets panel (Info menu >
Machine Offsets).
2. Open the second “floating” panel, in this case the Call Stack panel (Info menu > Call
Stack).
3. Click on the Call Stack tab and drag it into the “floating” Machine Offsets panel.
4. Open the third “floating” panel, in this case the SubSystem Motion panel (Info menu >
SubSystem Motion).
5. Click on the SubSystem Motion tab and drag it into the “floating” Machine Offsets panel.
6. Open the fourth “floating” panel, in this case the 840D System Frames panel (Info menu
> 840D System Frames).
7. Click on the 840D System Frames tab and drag it into the “floating” Machine Offsets
panel. The four tabbed panel should now look like the picture below.
249
VERICUT Help
Using Floating Tabbed Panels

To close a tabbed “floating panel, click on the (Close) icon.
To re-open a tabbed “floating“ panel, open any one of the panels contained in the tabbed panel
using the VERICUT main menu bar. The tabbed panel will display with the selected panel open.
For example using the tabbed “floating” panel created above, selecting SubSystem Motion in
the Info menu will display the tabbed window with the SubSystem Motion panel displayed as
To change the order of the tabs in a tabbed panel, click on the tab and drag it right or left to the
desired position.
To remove a tab from a tabbed panel, click on the (Close) icon located at the end of the
tab.
The all other behavior for “floating” tabbed panels is the same as described above for Single
Panels.
250
VERICUT Help
Overlay Panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

The following picture shows a multi-tab “overlay” panel on the left side of the VERICUT main
window. The tabbed panel contains the Project Tree panel, The NC Program panel and the
Status panel. Click on a tab to display the entire panel.
251
VERICUT Help
Creating an Overlay panel with Multiple Tabbed Panels

1. Open the first “floating” panel, in this case the NC Program panel (Info menu > NC
Program).
2. Open the second “floating” panel, in this case the Status panel (Info menu > Status).
3. Click on the tab in the “floating” Status panel and then drag it into the “floating” NC
Program panel. The ”floating” panel should now look like the picture below.
252
VERICUT Help
4. Click in the non-tabbed section of “floating” panel’s header (indicated by the red box in
the picture below) and start dragging the panel toward the location where you want the
“overlay” tag. You will see a small panel inside the “floating” panel as shown in the
picture below.
253
VERICUT Help
5. Continue moving the cursor and small panel to the location where you want to overlay
the panel. When the cursor gets on the edge of the VERICUT main window, a very
narrow blue rectangle, similar to the one shown in the picture picture below, will display
where the “overlay” tag will be placed.
254
VERICUT Help
6. Releasing the mouse button will display the “overlay” tag in the location of the blue
255
VERICUT Help
Using Overlayed Tabbed Panels

“Overlay” tags for tabbed panels will have a icon indicating that it is a tabbed “overlay”
panel and a (Docked) icon. In addition it will have an icon for each tab in the tabbed panel.
Click on the icon to open the tabbed panel with the previously displayed tab displayed.
Click on one of the icons representing the tabs contained in the tabbed panel, for example
(NC Program), and the tabbed panel will open with the selected tab displayed.
To change the order of the tabs in a tabbed “overlay” panel, click on the tab and drag it right or
left to the desired position.
To remove a tab from a tabbed “overlay” panel, click on the (Close) icon located at the end
of the tab.
To convert a tabbed “overlay” panel into a tabbed “floating” panel, click in the non-tabbed
section of the “docked” panel’s header (described above in Step 4) and drag the panel outside
of the VERICUT main window.
The all other behavior for a tabbed “overlay” panel is the same as described above for Single
Panels.
Final Notes about Tabbed Panels
1. When there is not enough room for all of the tabs to be displayed, an icon like the one
shown in the red box in the picture below will display in the tabbed header indicating
that not all of the tabs are displayed. The number indicates the number of tabs that are
not displayed, in this example 2.
256
VERICUT Help
Click on the icon to display a menu showing which tabs are not displayed, as shown in
the picture below.
Click on a menu item to display the selected tab in the tabbed panel. In the following
picture the Call Stack option was selected.
2. When there is not enough room for all of the tabs to be displayed and not enough room
to display the the icons on the right end of the tabbed header, an additional icon like the
one shown in the red box in the picture below will display at the end of the tabbed
header indicating that the icons are not displayed.
257
VERICUT Help
Click on the icon to display a menu with the missing icon options as shown in the picture
below.
Click on one of the menu options to execute the selected action.
258
VERICUT Help
Introduction to VERICUT Reports
VERICUT Report provides the tools needed modify/create report templates enabling you to
generate "custom" reports.
Generate reports that only include information important to your particular work environment,
in a format that is most meaningful to the users of the report. Eliminate the need to search
through the wide range of information that is included in a more generic "standard" report.
VERICUT Reports:
 Enables you to generate reports using one of the "standard" report templates supplied. The
following "standard" report templates are included and can be found in the "library" folder
of your VERICUT installation:
inspection.VcTemplate - Use this template to create a basic inspection report that
includes the inspection sequence table and graphic showing the location of the
inspection points on the part. This is the default report template that Inspection
Sequence will use if no other template has been specified.
NOTE: Report template inspection.VcTemplate should only be used for creating
reports from the Inspection Sequence window. Using it to create reports from other
VERICUT applications will result in incorrect data being displayed in the report.
vericut.VcTemplate - This is the default report template that VERICUT will use if no
other template has been specified.
vericut_basic.VcTemplate - Use this report template to create a report that contains
overview information about the VERICUT session. Information includes a file summary,
and a Tool Summary table and Tool Use graph for each NC program file.
vericut_optipath.VcTemplate - Use this report template to create a report similar to the
"basic" report but also includes OptiPath information.
vericut_shadecopy.VcTemplate - Use this report template to create a report similar to
the "basic" report but also includes View Capture images specified with File > AutoSave:
View Capture tab.
vericut_full.VcTemplate - Use this report template to create a report similar to the
"View Capture" report but also includes OptiPath information.
NOTE: The above five report templates should only be used for creating reports using
File menu > Create Report > ... in the main VERICUT window. Using them to create
259
VERICUT Help
reports from other VERICUT applications will result in incorrect data being displayed in
the report.
vericut_tools.VcTemplate - Use this report template to create a tool library report. This
is the default report template that Tool Manager will use if no other template has been
specified.
NOTE: Report template vericut_tools.VcTemplate should only be used for creating
reports from the Tool Manager window. Using it to create reports from other VERICUT
applications will result in incorrect data being displayed in the report.
 Enables you to modify a "standard" report template by changing the content, layout and/or
format of the included information and save it as a "custom" report template.
 Enables you to produce "custom" report templates from "scratch". You decide the format,
layout and content that best meet your needs.
 Provides the tools to include a wide variety of information from different sources. Include text,
tables or pictures. Extract information from the VERICUT project file; include information from
external files, or "generic tags" that will be updated with information specific to a particular
user file at the time that the report is created.
What is involved with creating a custom VERICUT report?

Creating and deploying a custom report for use by VERICUT users involves the following steps.
1. Set up "styles" to be used for the report template
2. Define "user defined tags" that will be included in the template
3. Create the page layout for the report template
4. Using the report template
For more information on creating and using custom report templates, see Report Template
window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
260
VERICUT Help
The Project Tree

Location:
Project menu > Project Tree
Toolbar short cut:
Introduction to the Project Tree

The features on the Project Tree provide the tools required for the day to day use of VERICUT
for setting up jobs for verification and simulation. The following basic concepts are needed to
understand the process of setting up a job for VERICUT.
Project — A project consists of one or more setups (see Setup below) enabling you to simulate
multiple operations in a single VERICUT session. Multiple Setups within a project can use the
same, or different, machines. A Project with a single Setup is logically equivalent to the User file
of past VERICUT releases.
Setup — A Setup is a collection of VERICUT settings and files (machine, control, tool library,
etc.), NC program files, and Setup models (Stock, Fixture, Design) that define the machine
operation to be simulated. A Setup is logically equivalent to the User file of past VERICUT
releases.
Current Setup — The Setup menu choices such as CNC Machine, NC Programs, etc., apply only
to the Current Setup. A setup can be designated "current" either by selecting it using the
Current Setup option in the Project menu, or by selecting it in the Project Tree. The "current"
setup is indicated by a checkmark in the Current Setup menu and is displayed as bold in the
Project Tree (See Setup 3 in the picture above).
Active / Inactive Setup — A Setup can be designated as being in either an Active, or Inactive
state. When a Setup is designated as Inactive, it is not simulated, as if it were not present in the
overall process. An Inactive setup can however be designated as the "current" setup and
modified. Inactive Setups are indicated by red text in both the Current Setup menu and in the
Project Tree (See Setup 2 in Project Tree Example 2 below).
261
VERICUT Help
The Project Tree panel

The features on the Project Tree provide the tools required for the day to day use of VERICUT
for setting up jobs for verification and simulation. The following basic concepts are needed to
understand the process of setting up a job for VERICUT.
The Project Tree panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT
main window if you choose. See Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window in the Getting Started
Simulation Help for additional information.
262
VERICUT Help
NOTE: When the Project Tree panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so that it
becomes the "active" panel before using F1 to get help specific to the panel. Otherwise F1 will
go to the CGTech Help Library.
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Project Tree
panel.
(Close) — Closes the Program panel. This icon is only displayed when the NC Program
panel is not docked.
Top Icon Bar:
The six icons at the top of the Project Tree panel enable you to control when picks in the
VERICUT graphics area are applied to the Project Tree, what information is displayed in the
Project Tree, “undo” and “redo” Project Tree changes, and to close the Project Tree completely.
Placing the cursor over each of the icons displays a tip indicating what the icon is used for. The
tip that will display for each icon is displayed in bold text next to the icon in each of the
descriptions below. The function of each of the icons is described below:
(Mouse active to enable mouse tracking and picks, inactive to disable.) — Use this icon
to designate that the NC Program Review panel is the panel that picks in the VERICUT graphics
area are to be applied to. When “Active”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick
Highlight Color specified in the File menu > Preferences window. When “Inactive”, the
icon is displayed.
(Configure) — Use this icon to toggle the Configure menu feature “on” and “off”. When
toggled “on”, the appropriate Configure menu for the selected item in the Project Tree will be
displayed at the bottom of the Project Tree. The picture below shows that a Setup branch has
been selected and the Configure Setup menu is displayed at the bottom of the Project Tree.
263
VERICUT Help
Each of the Configure menus, with all of its features, is described in detail in the Configure
section.
(Show Machine Components) — Use this icon to toggle the Show Machine Components
feature “on” and “off”. When toggled “on”, machine components are displayed the Project
Tree similar to the way that they were displayed in the Component Tree in previous VERICUT
versions. The following pictures show the difference in the Project Tree when this feature is
toggled “on” and “off”.
264
VERICUT Help
Show Machine Components toggled “off” Show Machine Components toggled “on”
NOTE: In some environments, the Show Machine Components icon will not be displayed in
the Project Tree. This is because the CGTECH_MACHINE_CONFIG environment variable has
been set in the vericut.bat file to restrict access to VERICUT’s machine configuration features.
265
VERICUT Help
(Undo) — Use this icon to “undo” changes made in the Project Tree. The icon will be
grayed out until a change is made in the Project Tree. Once a change is made in the Project Tree
the icon will display as shown here. Click on the icon to “undo” the last change made to the
Project Tree. Click on the icon again to “undo” the next to the last change and so on. There is no
limit to the number of changes that you can “undo”.
(Redo) — Use this icon to “redo” changes that you have used the Undo feature on. The
icon will be grayed out until the Undo feature is used. Once the Undo feature is used, the icon
will display as shown here. Click on the icon to “redo” the last “undo”. Click on the icon again to
“undo” the next to the last “undo” and so on. There is no limit to the number of “undo” actions
that you can “redo”.
(Close) — Use this icon to close the Project Tree.
The Project Tree shows all Setups and each Setup's configuration in a tree hierarchy. A project
can consist of one or more setups. VERICUT processes each "active" setup sequentially, starting
at the top of the tree. The functionality available in the Project Tree duplicates the
functionality available in the Project menu, but in a more visual tree format.
Side Icon Bar:
The icons in the Side Icon

Bar enable you to quickly
move to a particular setup,
or “branch” in the “current
setup. Each of the icons is
defined in more detail
below.
Holding the cursor over
any of the icons displays a
tip showing the “branch”
that the icon will go to.
266
VERICUT Help
The Side Tool Bar can be hidden and re-displayed, for better Project Tree navigation. Click on
the button at the top of the Side Tool Bar to hide it . Click on the button to re-display it.
Before After
(Setup) — Click in the Setup icon to display a pull-down list of setups available in the
current project file. Select the desired setup from the list and the selected setup branch
becomes highlighted and the setup becomes the “current” setup.
(Control) — Click on the Control icon and the Control branch in the “current” setup
becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Control icon to open the Open Control window
enabling you to open (load) a Control file.
267
VERICUT Help
(Machine) — Click on the Machine icon and the Machine branch in the “current” setup
becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Machine icon to open the Open Machine window
enabling you to open (load) a Machine file.
(Collision) — Click on the Collision icon and the Collision branch in the “current” setup
becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Collision icon to open the Collision and Travel Limits
window: Collision Detect tab enabling you to configure the settings required for processing G-
Code NC program files related to detecting collisions between machine components.
Collision and Travel Limits window: Collision Detect tab
(Travel Limits) — Click on the Travel Limits icon and the Travel Limits branch in the
“current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Collision icon to open the Collision
and Travel Limits window: Travel Limits tab enabling you to configure the settings required for
processing G-Code NC program files related to detecting when a machine axis limit has been
exceeded.
(Coordinate Systems) — Click on the Coordinate Systems icon and the Coordinate
Systems branch in the “current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Coordinate
Systems icon to highlight Coordinate Systems branch in the “current” setup and expands the
Coordinate Systems branch so that all of the Coordinate Systems in the branch are shown.
(G-Code Offsets) — Click on the G-Code Offsets icon and the G-Code Offsets branch in the
“current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the G-Code Offsets icon to highlight G-
Code Offsets branch in the “current” setup and expands the G-Code Offsets branch so that all
of the G-Code Offset records in the branch are shown.
(Tooling) — Click on the Tooling icon and the Tooling branch in the “current” setup
becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Tooling icon to open the Tool Manager window
enabling you to create and maintain Tool Library files containing descriptions of cutting
tools, or tool assemblies.
(NC Programs) — Click on the NC Programs icon and the NC Programs branch in the
“current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the NC Programs icon to open the NC
Programs File Selection Window enabling you to add one or more NC program files.
(NC Subroutines) — Click on the NC Subroutines icon and the NC Subroutines branch in
the “current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the NC Programs icon to open the NC
Subroutine Files File Selection Window enabling you to add one or more NC subroutine files.
268
VERICUT Help
(Saved IP Files) — Click on the Saved IP Files icon and the Saved IP Files branch in the
“current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Saved IP Files icon to highlight Saved
IP Files branch in the “current” setup and expands the Saved IP Files branch so that all of the IP
files in the branch are shown.
(Tape Manager) — Click on the Tape Manager icon and the Tape Manager branch in the
“current” setup becomes highlighted. Double-click on the Tape Manager icon to open the Tape
Manager window.
NOTE: The Tape Manager icon is only available in VERICUT Composite Simulation.
(Drilling and Fastening) — Click on the Drilling and Fastening icon and the Drilling and
Fastening branch in the "current" setup becomes highlighted and is expanded to display the
Fastener Models branch which is also expanded and the Design Locations and Simulated
Locations branches.
NOTE: The Drilling and Fastening icon is only available in VERICUT Drilling and Fastening
Simulation.
The following examples describe some of the information available to you from the way that
the items in the Project Tree are displayed.
269
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Example 1: "New" VERICUT project with a single setup.
The picture at the left shows the

Project Tree for a "new" project
containing a single setup. Since it is
the only setup, it is by default the
"current" setup, indicated by the
bold text.
The red text here indicates that no

data has been assigned to any of
these items.
The initial machine is defined with

Attach, Fixture, Stock, and Design
components but no models have
been assigned
270
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Example 2: "New" VERICUT Composite Simulation project with a single setup.

bold text.

these items.

Attach, Fixture, and Form
been assigned
271
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Example 3: "New" VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation project with a single
setup.

bold text.

these items.

Attach, Skin, Structure and Fixture
been assigned
272
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Example 4: A project with multiple setups. This example shows a VERICUT project
with multiple setups but the concept is the same for a VERICUT Composite Simulation project
with multiple setups or a VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation project with multiple setups.

Project Tree for a three setup job.
Setup: 1 is displayed in black text
indicating that it is in an "active"
state. The bold text indicates that
Setup 1 is the "current" setup.
The Collision, Travel Limits, NC

Subroutines, and Saved IP Files
labels in Setup: 1 are displayed in
red text indicating that these
features are not being used for
Setup 1.
All of the items in Setup: 2 are

displayed in red text indicating that
Setup 2 is in an "inactive" state.
Setup: 3 is displayed in plain black

text indicating that it is in an
"active" state but is not the
“current” setup.
NC Subroutines and Saved IP Files
are not used in this setup.
273
VERICUT Help
Additional Project Tree Features

Each item in the Project Tree has a Right Mouse Button Shortcut menu containing features
specific to the particular item. Click with the right mouse button on the branch or item in the
Project Tree to display the menu.
In addition, if the Configure feature is toggled “on”, clicking with the left mouse button will
display a window containing the features that applicable to the particular Project Tree branch.
Each item in the Project Tree that has a file associated with it (models, NC programs, Machine
files, Control files, etc.) show the file name next to it as shown in the picture below.
274
VERICUT Help
If you hold the cursor over the file name, the full \path\filename will display as shown in the
picture below.
The "current" NC program is displayed in blue text as shown in the picture below.
275
VERICUT Help
When the "current" NC program is actually processing it is also highlighted in blue as shown in
the picture below.
276
VERICUT Help
Manipulating Multiple Objects in the Project Tree
You have the ability to select multiple Project Tree objects as long as you adhere to the
following guidelines.
1. Only the following branch types allow multiple selections.

 Component
 Models
 Coordinate Systems
 NC Programs
 NC Subroutines
2. Each branch type is mutually exclusive, meaning that you cannot select multiple objects
from under different branch types. For example, you can select multiple models under
different Models branches as shown in the picture below.
277
VERICUT Help
But you cannot select objects under different branch types. For example selecting multiple
NC programs and multiple NC Subroutines in the same selection sequence is not allowed.
3. You can only make multiple selections within a single Setup.
To select multiple objects in the Project Tree, try these techniques:

Select multiple files in sequence — Click the first object in the sequence, then press and hold
the <Shift> key while clicking on the last object in the sequence. The first, last and all objects
between will become highlighted.
Select additional individual files — Press and hold the <Control> key while selecting each
additional object. Each will become highlighted.
With either method, selecting an object a second time, while holding down the <Control> key,
un-selects the object.
Simply clicking on a highlighted object a second time will not un-select the object. Holding the
cursor over the highlighted object after clicking on it will put it in "edit" mode.
You can select objects either in the Project Tree or in the graphics area. Selecting an object in
the Project Tree will highlight the object in the Project Tree and display a three dimensional
wireframe box representing the bounds of the corresponding object in the graphics area.
Selecting an object in the graphics area will display a three dimensional wireframe box
representing the bounds of the selected object in the graphics area and highlight the
corresponding object in the Project Tree.
Once the objects have been selected, the actions that are available are dependent on the
object type.
 Selected Components, Models, or Coordinate Systems can be translated or rotated. Child

components of these objects are not translated or rotated.
 Selected NC programs can be made "Active" or "Inactive".
You can "Drag" and "Drop" selected branches or objects from one location to another. For
example, you can "move" or "copy" selected NC subroutines from one Setup to another.
 To "move" selected objects; click on the highlighted objects and keeping the left mouse
button depressed "drag" the objects to the desired location and release the mouse button
to "drop" the selected objects.
 To "copy" selected objects: click on the highlighted objects and while keeping the left
mouse button depressed, hold down the <Control> key and "drag" the objects to the
desired location and release the mouse button to "drop" a copy of the selected objects.
278
VERICUT Help
Drag and Drop Files from Windows Explorer to the Project Tree
You have the ability to drag one or more files from a Windows Explorer window and drop them
into the Project Tree and have them be loaded it to VERICUT.
Supported file types are:
Project Files
In the Windows Explorer window, select the project file and drag it to the VERICUT Project Tree
panel. You can drop it anywhere in the Project Tree panel. VERICUT will load the Project file and
update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file vericut.VcProject in the Windows Explorer window and then drag it to, and drop
it in, the VERICUT Project Tree.
Before: After:
A new project file. vericut.VcProject is loaded in VERICUT.
279
VERICUT Help
In-Process (IP) Files

In the Windows Explorer window, select an In-Process (IP) file and drag it to the VERICUT
Project Tree panel. You can drop it anywhere in the Project Tree panel. VERICUT will load the
In-Process (IP) file and update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file vericut_1.ip in the Windows Explorer window and then drag it to, and drop it in,
the VERICUT Project Tree.
Before: After:
A new project file. vericut_1.ip is loaded in VERICUT.
280
VERICUT Help
Control Files
In the Windows Explorer window, select the Control file and drag it to the VERICUT Project Tree
panel. You can drop it anywhere in the Project Tree panel. Control Files will be added to the
“current” setup. VERICUT will load the Control file and update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file fan30im.ctl in the Windows Explorer window and then drag it to, and drop it in,
the VERICUT Project Tree.
Before: After:
A new project file. Fan30im.ctl is added to the Project Tree.
281
VERICUT Help
Machine Files
In the Windows Explorer window, select the Machine file and drag it to the VERICUT Project
Tree panel. You can drop it anywhere in the Project Tree panel. Machine files will be added to
the “current” setup. VERICUT will load the Machine file and update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file doosan_vc630_5_axis.mch in the Windows Explorer window and then drag it to,
and drop it in, the VERICUT Project Tree. Notice that the complete machine configuration is
now displayed in the Project Tree.
Before: After:
The “after” Project Tree from the Control File doosan_vc630_5_axis.mch is added to the
example above. Project Tree.
282
VERICUT Help
Model Files
In the Windows Explorer window select one, or more, Model file(s) and drag the selected file(s)
to the VERICUT Project Tree panel. Drag the model file(s) in the Project Tree panel so that the
cursor is over the Component, or Models, branch where you want the model(s) and then drop
the file(s). VERICUT will load the Model file(s) and update the Project Tree panel.
Example 1:
Select the files, vericut_fixture_base.stl and vericut_fixture_fixed_jaw.stl, in the Windows
Explorer window and drag them to the VERICUT Project Tree so that the cursor is over the
“Fixture” component branch and then drop the files. Notice that the two models are added
under the “Fixture” component in the Project Tree.
Before: After:
The “Fixture” component branch with no vericut_fixture_base.stl and
models. vericut_fixture_riser.stl are added under the
“Fixture” component branch.
283
VERICUT Help
Example 2:
Select the files, vericut_fixture_fixed_jaw.stl and vericut_fixture_mobile_jaw.stl, in the
Windows Explorer window and drag them to the VERICUT Project Tree so that the cursor is over
the Models branch under the “Fixture” component and then drop the files. Notice that the two
models are added to the Models branch with the previous two models in the Project Tree.
Before: After:
The “after” Project Tree from Example 1 vericut_fixture_fixed_jaw.stl and
above. vericut_fixture_mobile_jaw.stl are added to
the Models branch.
284
VERICUT Help
Tool Library Files

In the Windows Explorer window, select the Tool Library file and drag it to the VERICUT Project
Tree panel. You can drop it anywhere in the Project Tree panel. Tool Library files will be added
to the “current” setup. VERICUT will load the Tool Library file and update the Project Tree
panel.
Example:
Select the file vericut.tls in the Windows Explorer window and then drag it to, and drop it in, the
VERICUT Project Tree. Notice that the Tool Library name is now displayed in the Project Tree.
Before: After:
The Project Tree with a Tooling branch vericut.tls is added to the Tooling branch in
without a Tool Library specified. the Project Tree.
285
VERICUT Help
NC Program Files
In the Windows Explorer window select one, or more, NC program file(s) and drag to the
VERICUT Project Tree panel. Drag the NC program file(s) in the Project Tree panel so that the
cursor is over the NC Programs branch and then drop the file(s). VERICUT will load the NC
program file(s) and update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file vericut_inch_1.nc in the Windows Explorer window and drag it to the VERICUT
Project Tree so that the cursor is over the NC Programs branch and then drop the file. Notice
that the NC program file is added under the NC Programs branch in the Project Tree.
Before: After:
The Project Tree with no NC program files vericut_inch_1.nc is added to the NC Programs
specified under the NC Programs branch. branch in the Project Tree.
286
VERICUT Help
NC Subroutine Files
In the Windows Explorer window select one, or more, NC subroutine file(s) and drag the
selected files to the VERICUT Project Tree panel. Drag the NC subroutine file(s) in the Project
Tree panel so that the cursor is over the NC Subroutines branch and then drop the file(s).
VERICUT will load the NC subroutine file(s) and update the Project Tree panel.
Example:
Select the file vericut_inch_1.sub in the Windows Explorer window and drag it to the VERICUT
Project Tree so that the cursor is over the NC Subroutines branch and then drop the file. Notice
that the NC subroutine file is added under the NC Subroutines branch in the Project Tree.
287
VERICUT Help
Before: After:
The Project Tree with no NC subroutine files vericut_inch_1.sub is added to the NC
specified under the NC Subroutines branch. Subroutine branch in the Project Tree.
288
VERICUT Help
Transition of Cut Stock and Design Model Between Setups
The following example shows how the Cut Stock and Design Model transition together from
one setup to the next for a multiple setup project file. The Project Tree used in this example is
from the vericut.vcproject file found in the \library\ folder of your VERICUT installation.
The following example shows the Cut Stock and Design transfer together from Setup 1 to Setup
2. In order for the Design model to automatically transfer with the Cut Stock to the next setup,
the setup must be configured such that the Design component is a child of the Stock
component. If you do not want the Design model automatically transferred and re-oriented
with the Cut Stock, make sure that the Design component is not a child of the Stock
component.
Design component is a child Design component is not a child
In the event that the Design model is not visible in the first setup, VERICUT will use the
following procedure for finding a Design component (attached to Stock) to transfer:
 First, VERICUT will try to find a component that is visible in the Workpiece View.
 Next, VERICUT will try to find a component that is visible in the Machine View.
 Finally, VERICUT will try to find a component which could be made visible (i.e., has a model),
regardless of current visibility settings.
A coordinate system designated to "Use for Cut Stock Transition" (ref. Use for Cut Stock
Transition in the Configure Coordinate System menu section, also in the Project Tree section of
VERICUT Help) is being used to automatically orient the Cut Stock and Design model for Setup 2.
The red boxes in each of the pictures below show the section of the Project Tree that we are
focused on.
289
VERICUT Help
Setup 1 before the start of processing
The picture at the left

shows a section of the
Project Tree for Setup 1
before the start of
processing.
Notice that the Design
component is child of the
Stock component.
Setup 2 before the start of processing
This picture shows a section

of the Project Tree for Setup 2
before the start of processing.
290
VERICUT Help
Setup 1 at the end of processing Setup 1
This picture shows Setup 1,

after stopping at the end of
processing of Setup 1. Notice
that a Cut Stock model has
been added to the Project
Tree for Setup1.
At this point Setup 2 has not
changed.
Setup 1 at the start of Setup 2 processing
After doing a Single Step to

start the processing of Setup
2. Notice that the Cut Stock
and the Design Component
and Model are no longer
displayed in the Project Tree
for Setup 1.
291
VERICUT Help
Setup 2 at the start of Setup 2 processing
At the same time, notice that

the Cut Stock and Temporary
Design Component and
Model have automatically
been added to the Project
Tree for Setup 2. The
Temporary Design
Component represents the
Design Component from
Setup 1 re-oriented to the
position required for Setup 2.
Similarly, if you manually orient the Cut Stock using the features in the Configure Model menu
(ref. Configure Model menu, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help) to orient the Cut
Stock after the Cut Stock and Temporary Design component have automatically transferred
from the first setup to the next, changes in orientation of the Cut Stock are also applied to the
Design model.
292
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Menu Table
The following table summarizes the features that are available in the VERICUT Project Tree.
Click on the Item Name in the table below for more information on the menu that will display
from selecting each branch. Selecting branch – RMB will display the corresponding Right Mouse
Button Shortcut menu. Selecting branch – Config will display the corresponding Configure
menu.
Project Tree Menu Table
Item Name Project Tree Representation
Project branch - RMB

Project branch - Config
Setup branch - RMB

Setup branch - Config
CNC Machine branch - RMB

CNC Machine branch - Config
Control branch - RMB

Control branch - Config
Machine branch - RMB

Machine branch - Config
Attach Component - RMB

Attach Component - Config
Component - RMB
Component - Config
293
VERICUT Help
Models branch – RMB

Models branch - Config
Model - RMB
Model – Config
Cut Stock – RMB

Cut Stock - Config
Collision branch - RMB

Collision branch - Config
Travel Limits branch - RMB

Travel Limits branch -Config
Coordinate Systems branch - RMB

Coordinate Systems branch - Config
Coordinate System - RMB

Coordinate System - Config
G-Code Offsets branch – RMB

G-Code Offsets branch - Config
G-Code Table – RMB

G-Code Table - Config
G-Code Table Record – RMB

G-Code Table Record -Config
294
VERICUT Help
Tooling branch - RMB

Tooling branch - Config
NC Program branch - RMB

NC Programs branch - Config
NC Program file- RMB

NC Program file - Config
NC Program CSYS – RMB
NC Subroutines branch - RMB

NC Subroutines branch - Config
NC Subroutine file - RMB

NC Subroutine file - Config
Saved IP Files branch - RMB

Saved IP Files branch - Config
IP file - RMB
IP File - Config
For information on other Right Mouse Button Shortcut menus, see Right Mouse Button
Shortcut menus in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help.
295
VERICUT Help
Using the Project Tree
The basic philosophy of the Project Tree is that it enables you to configure a project’s setups
using the Project Tree features as a guide, as follows:
 Use the Project Tree to step down through the tree structure, configuring each branch of a
setup as you go.
 A “Configure” panel is optionally displayed at the bottom of the tree’s dialog during setup
configuration.
 The “Configure” panel displays settings and actions most commonly used for configuring
the setup.
 The features on each “Configure” panel are specific to the branch or item selected in the
tree.
 Widgets in the panel cause an immediate action when used. There is no OK, Apply, etc.
 Less commonly used features are available in the right-mouse button shortcut menus
associated with each branch or item selected in the tree or from pop-up dialogs accessed
from the VERICUT Menu bar.
296
VERICUT Help
Project Tree Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus
Each item in the Project Tree has a right mouse button shortcut menu (RMB menu) containing
features specific to the particular item.
NOTE: Any item shown in bold in a Project Tree right mouse button shortcut menu can also be
reached directly by double clicking on the item (branch, component, model, etc.) in the Project
Tree that you right -clicked on to display the shortcut menu. For example, double-clicking on
the Project branch in the Project Tree displays the Open Project window, just like clicking on
Open in the shortcut menus shown in below.
The features displayed in the shortcut menu will vary depending on whether you are using
VERICUT, VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
297
VERICUT Help
Project Branch
Right click on the Project branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
New Project — Displays the New VERICUT Project window enabling you to create a New Project
file.
Open — Displays the Open Project file selection window enabling you to open an existing
project file.
Save — Use to save an existing project file with the current VERICUT session settings.
Save As — Opens the Save Project As window, enabling you to save the current project file
under a different name, or in a different location.
Unit — Enables you to change the units of the current project file. A check indicates the
"current" units (Inch or Millimeter).
Import Setup — Opens the Import Setup window, enabling you to copy a setup from either a
pre-V6.0 user file, or from a V6.0 or later project file, and append it after the current setup.
APT Cycles — Opens the Cycles window enabling you to maintain cycle and modal definitions.
298
VERICUT Help
Delete Detached Stock — Displays the Delete Detached Stock window enabling you to delete
or keep pieces of material. This feature provides the same functionality as Project menu >
Stock > Delete Detached Stock. See Delete Detached Stock in the Project menu section of
VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
Expand all Children — Expands all branches of the Project Tree.
Expand Components — Expands all child branches of the selected (highlighted) component.
Collapse all Children — Collapses all branches of the Project Tree.
Recent — Displays a list of recently used project files that you can select from.
Close — Closes the Project Tree panel.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Project menu displays at the bottom of the
Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on the Project Branch in the Project Tree will open the Open Project
file selection window.
Back to the Project Tree Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menu table.
299
VERICUT Help
New Project (New VERICUT Project window)

Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > New Project
File menu > New Project
Toolbar short cut for creating a New Project file: (Inch), or (Millimeter).
Click on the icon with the right mouse button to switch between the two modes.
Selecting New Project displays the New VERICUT Project window. The features on the New
VERICUT Project window enable you to create a new VERICUT project file based on one of the
VERICUT provided project template files, or based on a "custom" project template file that you
have created.
Start New — Use to set VERICUT to a "new" condition, with no files loaded. To establish the
new condition, VERICUT purges all data from memory, and then opens the appropriate
VERICUT project template file, based on the Inch/Millimeter setting described below.
Inch — Use to create a new inch project file. The new project file is based on the init.VcProject
project template located in the /library/ folder of your VERICUT installation.
Millimeter — Use to create a new Millimeter project file. The new project file is based on the
initm.VcProject project template located in the /library/ folder of your VERICUT installation.
NOTE: Inch and Millimeter are only applicable to the Start New feature. When using the Start
From Template feature, described below, the "units" for the new project file will be set from
the units stored in the selected project template file.
300
VERICUT Help
The following example uses VERICUT but the concept is the same for VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation and VERICUT Composite Simulation. The Project Tree shown below is automatically
defined in the new project file, ready for you to configure VERICUT by adding models, NC
programs, descriptions of cutting tools, etc.
Project Tree after a new condition (Show Project Tree after a new condition (Show
Machine Components turned off): Machine Components turned on):
Start From Template — Similar to the Start New feature described above except that the new
project file is based on a "custom'' project template file and not on one of the VERICUT supplied
project template files. Enter the /path/filename of the project template file that you want to
base the new project file on, in the Start From Template text field or click on the (Browse)
icon to display the Select Template Name file selection window and use it to specify the
/path/filename.
New Project Name — Enter the /path/filename or the new project file in the New Project Name
text field or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Select Project Name file selection
window and use it to specify the /path/filename. Make sure that you have "write" privileges to
301
VERICUT Help
folder that you specify. If you do not specify a /path/filename, VERICUT will assign the default
name "unnamed.vcproject to the new project file and save it in your Working Directory. If you
are working with VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation, the default file name is
unnamed.vdafproject and if you ar eworkig with VERICUT Composite Simulation, the default
name is unnamed.vcsproject.
OK — Creates a new project file based on the settings in the New VERICUT Project window,
automatically saves the new project file to the specified location, and then closes the New
VERICUT Project window.
Cancel — Closes the New VERICUT Project window without creating a new project file.
Tips:
You can customize how VERICUT establishes the new condition by making changes to the
init.VcProject or initm.VcProject files. Store the changed files in your Working Directory, or the
CGTech /library/ folder.
See Create a "custom" Project Template File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help
for additional information.
If needed, change the units for the new session as follows:
Click in the graphics area with the right mouse button and then select Project Tree in the
menu that displays.
In the Project Tree panel, right click on the Project branch, and select Unit > Inch (or
Millimeter) in the menu that displays. The current units are indicated by the check mark.
See Create a New VERICUT Project, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
302
VERICUT Help
Open Project window
Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Open
Project Tree > Configure Project menu: Files tab
File menu > Open
Toolbar short cut for opening Project files:
Use to open an existing Project file with the current VERICUT session settings. Use the Open
Project file selection window that displays to select the desired project file. Most features on
this window are standard file selection window features that enable you to navigate through
directories, filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. A description of features specific to
VERICUT can be found in the Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting
Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help.
303
VERICUT Help
Save Project
Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Save
File menu > Save Project
Toolbar short cut for saving Project files: (Save Project), or (Save Project As)
Right click on the icon to toggle between Save Project and Save Project As modes.
Saves (updates) an existing Project file with the current VERICUT session settings. VERICUT will
save the project file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its present folder.
Otherwise, the Save Project File As window will display enabling you to specify a location to
save where you have write permissions.
See Saving a VERICUT Project File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
304
VERICUT Help
Save Project As window
Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Save As
File menu > Save As
Toolbar short cut for saving Project files as: (Save Project), or (Save Project As)
Right click on the icon to toggle between Save Project and Save Project As modes.
Opens the Save Project As window enabling you to save Project files (ref. Project Files in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help). Most features on this window are standard file selection
window features that enable you to navigate through directories, filter files, and type, or select,
/path/filenames. A description of features specific to VERICUT can be found in the Introduction
to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
See Saving a VERICUT Project File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
305
VERICUT Help
Import Setup window
Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Import Setup
Project Tree > Project Branch > Configure Project menu
Project menu > Setup > Import Setup
Enables you to copy a setup from either a pre-V6.0 user file, or from a V6.0 project file, and
appends it after the current setup.
Project File selection window — Use the Setup Import file selection window to specify the
project file that the setup is to be imported from.
Setup List — After selecting the project file, a list of setups contained in the project file. Select
one or more setups to be imported. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys on the keyboard to select
multiple setups.
Import — Use to import the highlighted setups into the "current" project file.
Close — Closes the Import Setup window without importing any setups.
See Import a Setup from Another Project File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
additional information about using the Import Setup window.
306
VERICUT Help
Cycles window
Locations:
Project Tree > Project Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > APT Cycles
Project menu > APT Settings > Cycles tab: Cycle Definitions option
The Cycles window features enable you to maintain cycle and modals definitions used to
interpret "CYCLE" records. This feature is especially useful if simulated cycle motions are not
displayed as expected. When VERICUT cannot find definitions to interpret a CYCLE record, an
error similar to "Invalid CYCLE record" error is issued. In these cases, cycle definitions must be
modified to correctly interpret the cycle data.
307
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar:
The menu bar located at the top of the window provides easy access to major functions. Left
click on any menu name to display the list of functions in that menu. Click on the function in the
menu you want to use.
Edit:
Cut Ctrl+X — Cuts the highlighted text in the file listing and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy Ctrl+C — Copies the highlighted text in the file listing to the paste buffer.
Paste Ctrl+V — Puts the contents of the paste buffer at the location of the cursor in the file
listing.
Icon Bar:
The items in the Icon Bar enable you to search for, and/or replace, specific items in the file
listing, print the file, or exit the window. Moving the cursor over the icon will display name of
the option. Each feature (from left to right) is described below.
Line Number or Search Text — Use this text field to enter a line number, or a string of text, to
search for.
Goto Line Number — Moves the cursor in the file listing to the line number specified in
the Line Number or Search Text field.
Search Forward — Searches forward in the file listing for the text string specified in the
Line Number or Search Text field.
Search Backward — Searches backward in the file listing for the text string specified in the
Replacement Text — Use this text field to enter a "replacement text" string.
Replace One — Replace one occurrence of text string in the Line Number or Search Text
field (or the highlighted text in the file listing) with the text string in the Replacement Text field.
Replace All — Replace all occurrences of the text string in the Line Number or Search Text
field with the text string in the Replacement Text field.
308
VERICUT Help
Print — Print the file.
OK — Accepts the changes and closes the Cycles window.

Cancel — Closes the Cycles window without accepting the changes.
Shortcut: Right-click in the Cycles window to display the following menu:
These features provide the same functionality as those available under Edit in the menu bar.
See Configuring for APT-CLS Cycle Simulation, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
309
VERICUT Help
Using Project Branch Features
Create a New VERICUT Project
Use the procedures described below to set VERICUT to a "new" condition. This action clears all
project-related information as if no files were loaded. After performing this action, configure
VERICUT by adding models, NC programs, descriptions of cutting tools, etc.
To start a new VERICUT project using VERICUT supplied templates:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the New VERICUT Project window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the Project branch and select New Project from the
menu that displays.
 In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu > New Project.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, right-click on the New Project icon to toggle from (Inch)
to (Millimeter) if needed, then left-click on the icon to open the window. If you
simply click on which ever icon is displayed, you can change the units in the New
In the New VERICUT Project window, select the Start New feature and then verify that the
correct units are selected. Reset if necessary.
Enter the /path/filename for the new project file in the New Project Name text field, or click on
the (Browse) icon to display the Select Project Name file selection window and use it to
specify the /path/filename.
Select OK to create the new project file based on the settings in the New VERICUT Project
window, automatically save the new project file to the specified location, and then close the
New VERICUT Project window.
To start a new VERICUT project using a "custom" project template:

menu that displays.
310
VERICUT Help
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, left-click on one of the New Project icons, (Inch) or
(Millimeter). It does not matter which one as units for the new project file is
determined by the units saved in the template file.
In the New VERICUT Project window, select the Start From Template feature.
Enter the /path/filename of the project template file to be used in the Start From Template
text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Select Template Name file selection
window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
See New Project, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
See Project Files in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information on VERICUT
project files.
311
VERICUT Help
Create a "custom" Project Template File

Use the procedure described below to set VERICUT to a "new" condition. This action clears all
project-related information as if no files were loaded. Then modify the VERICUT provided
Project Template file as necessary and then save the "custom" project template file with a new
name.
menu that displays.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, right-click on the New Project icon to toggle from (Inch)
to (Millimeter) if needed, then left-click on the icon to open the window. If you
simply click on which ever icon is displayed, you can change the units in the New
In the New VERICUT Project window, select the Start New feature and then verify that the
correct units are selected. Reset if necessary.
New VERICUT Project window. A new project based on one of the VERICUT supplied project
templates should be displayed in VERICUT.
In the Project Tree panel, modify the project file (machine, control etc.) as needed so that
reflects how you want a new project file to open.
When you are finished, save the project file.
It can now be used as a project template file when creating a new project file. If needed, see
Create a New VERICUT Project, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on
how to do this.
project files.
312
VERICUT Help
Opening an Existing VERICUT Project File
VERICUT session settings, also known as "user configuration values" or "user values", can be
saved in a Project file (.VcProject). Virtually everything changeable in the user interface can be
saved in a Project file. Relatively small in size, Project files minimize the effort required to
configure VERICUT for processing multiple setup jobs.
To open an existing Project file:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the Open Project file selection window.
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the Project Branch and select Open from the menu
that displays.
 In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu >Open.
 In the VERICUT toolbar, click in the (Open Project) icon.

In the Open Project file selection window that opens, select, or type the /path/filename of the
file to open.
Click Open.
The Project file is opened. The current Project file name and unit measurement system are
displayed in the VERICUT window title bar.
project files.
313
VERICUT Help
Saving a VERICUT Project File
VERICUT session settings, also known as "user configuration values" or "user values", can be
saved in a Project file (.VcProject). Virtually everything changeable in the user interface can be
saved in a Project file. Relatively small in size, Project files minimize the effort required to
configure VERICUT for processing multiple setup jobs.
To save a new Project file (or save an existing Project file under a new name):
1. Use one of the following methods to display the Save Project As file selection window.
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the Project Branch and select Save As from the menu
that displays.
 In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu >Save As.
 In the VERICUT toolbar, click in the (Save Project As) icon. If necessary, right-click
on the (Save Project) icon to change it to Save Project As mode and then left-click
on the icon.
In the window that opens, select, or type the /path/filename for the file to be saved.
Click Save.
The project file is saved. At a later time, you can open the project file to reconfigure VERICUT. If
needed, see Opening an Existing Project File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
To save an existing Project file under the same name:

Use one of the following methods to save an existing project file under the same name.
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the Project Branch and select Save from the menu that
displays.
 In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu >Save.
 In the VERICUT toolbar, click in the (Save Project) icon. If necessary, right-click on
the (Save Project As) icon to change it to Save Project mode and then left-click on
the icon.
The project file is saved. At a later time, you can open the project file to reconfigure VERICUT. If
needed, see Opening an Existing Project File, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
314
VERICUT Help
project files.
315
VERICUT Help
Import a Setup from Another Project File

Use the procedure described below to import a setup from either a pre-V6.0 user file (.usr), or
from a V6.0 and newer project file (.VcProject), and append it after the "current" setup in the
"current" project file.
1. Use one of the following methods to display the Import Setup window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the Project branch and select Import Setup from the
menu that displays.
 In the Project Tree, left-click on the Project branch to display the Configure Project
menu and then select Import Setup.
 In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu > Import Setup.
In the Import Setup window, select the /path/filename of the user/project file that contains the
setup that you want to import.
Once you specify the /path/filename, a list of all setups contained in the specified file is
displayed in the lower portion of the Import Setup window. Each setup record displays the
setup name and the machine, control and tool library used by the setup.
Click on the desired setup so that it becomes highlighted and then press the Import button.
VERICUT will add the imported setup after the "current" setup in the "current project file.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to import additional setups.
When you are finished importing setups, click on the Close button to close the Import Setup
window,
See Import Setup window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
316
VERICUT Help
Setup Branch
Right-click on a Setup branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Active — Use to designate whether the setup is "active", or "inactive". (ref. Active/Inactive
Setup in the Introduction to the Project Tree section above.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted setup in the Project Tree and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted setup in the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted setup in the Project Tree.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted setup from the Project Tree.
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted setup.
Properties — Opens the Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings)
enabling you to set properties for the verification session, such as: cut mode, resolution and
tolerance values that affect form display, accuracy, and motion simulation.
317
VERICUT Help
Report >
Report Template > Edit — Opens the Report Template window enabling you to define a new,
or modify an existing, report template.
User-Defined Tag Values — Opens the User-Defined Tag Values window enabling you to assign
job specific information to "generic" User-Defined Tags.
Setup Plan — Opens the Setup Plan window enabling you to add new dimensions or notes to,
or edit existing dimensions or notes, in a setup plan.
G-Code >
Advanced Settings — Opens the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab enabling you to
configure settings to support processing G-Code NC program files.
Variables — Opens the Variables window enabling you to initialize, maintain, and monitor G-
Code variables.
Output Options — Opens the Settings window: G-Code Outputs tab enabling you to configure
the settings required to support processing of G-Code NC program files.
APT Settings — Opens the APT Settings window enabling you to configure settings to support
processing APT-CLS NC program files.
Section — Opens the Section window enabling you to define section planes through a VERICUT
model in a workpiece view.
Inspection — Starts the VERICUT Inspection module enabling you to create, or modify an
inspection report, or create an inspection program.
Die Sinking — Opens the Die Sinking Simulation window enabling you to select electrodes and
simulate the die sinking process.
Load All Stocks — Selecting the Load All Stocks option causes VERICUT to load new stock
models for Stock components having models defined, but a cut stock model does not exist. This
feature provides the same functionality as Project menu > Stock > Load All Stocks. See Load All
Stocks in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Expand all Children — Expands all branches of a Setup branch.
Collapse all Children — Collapses al branches of a Setup branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Setup menu displays at the bottom of the
Project Tree.
Back to the Project Tree Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menu table.
318
VERICUT Help
Properties
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Properties
Project menu > Settings
The Properties option opens the Settings Window, Project Settings tab enabling you to set
properties for the verification session, such as: cut mode, resolution and tolerance values that
affect cut model display, accuracy, and motion simulation.
See Settings window, Project Settings tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
complete information.
319
VERICUT Help
Report Template window
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Report > Report Template
File menu > Report Template in the Inspection Sequence window.
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > Report pull-down list > Report Template
Project menu > Report > Report Template >Edit in the main VERICUT window.
Opens the Report Template window enabling you to define a new, or modify an existing, report
template. It also enables you to preview the report that will be created, as well as create
reports, in HTML or PDF format.
Notice in the picture above that the Report Template window consists of three main areas; the
Menu Bar, the Report Template Content window, and Report Preview window. Each of these
areas is describe in detail below.
See the Using VERICUT Reports section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about using Report Template features and creating VERICUT reports.
320
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar
Menu Bar Features

File
New — Displays an empty Report Template window enabling you to create a new report
template file.
Open — Displays a file selection window enabling you to open an existing report template file.
The "current" report template file is stored in the Preferences file.
Save — Opens a window enabling you to save the current report template file.
Save As — Opens a window enabling you to save the current report template file under a
different name or path.
Recent Files — Provides a list of recently opened Report Template files. To open a file in the
list, select the desired file. The Recent Files List is stored in the Preferences file.
Close — Closes the Report Template window without saving the report template file.
Edit
Add — Enables you to add records to a new or existing report template file.
The following features are available for use in report templates:
NOTE: When starting a new report template, Add will not become active until at least one
style record has been added using the Styles tab.
Text
Use to add text related records to a report template. Select the desired option from the
pull-down list. The options in the list will vary depending on where you accessed the Report
Template window (VERICUT main window, Tool Manager window, or the Inspection
Sequence window).
String — Adds a record to write out a specified text string. Enter the text in the
"Content" field of the record.
321
VERICUT Help
Date — Adds a record to write out the date with the format selected from the pull-
down list.
Short — "12/24/03"
Medium — "Dec 24, 2003"
Long — "December 24, 2003"
Full — "Wednesday, December 24, 2003"
Time — Adds a record to write out the time with the format selected from the pull-
down list.
Short — "10:49 AM"
Medium — "10:49:48 AM"
Long — "10:49:48 AM PST"
Page Number — Adds a record to write out page numbers with the format selected
from the pull-down list.
# — "1"
Page # — "Page 1"
Page # of # — "Page 1 of 3"
File Name
Use to add a record to write out the file name. Select the file type from the pull-down
list. Choose either, Full Path (to write out the file name in the format /path/filename),
or File Name (to write out the file name only), then select the file type from the pull-
down list.
Project File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" Project file.
Machine File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" Machine
file.
Control File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" Control file.
Tool Library File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" Tool
Library file.
Design Model File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current"
Design Model file.
NC Program — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" NC Program
File.
322
VERICUT Help
Log File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the "current" Log file.
Optimized NC Program File — Adds a record to write out the file name of the
"current" Optimized Toolpath file.
Process Data — Adds a record to write out "process" related data of the type selected
Setup Name — Adds a record to write out the name of the Setup.
Material — Adds a record to write out the "material" specified on the OptiPath
Control window, Settings tab.
Machine — Adds a record to write out the "machine" specified on the OptiPath
Control window, Settings tab.
Total Time — Adds a record to write out the total time anticipated to machine the
part (as simulated by VERICUT).
Total Number of Errors — Adds a record to write out the number of errors detected
by VERICUT.
Total Number of Warnings — Adds a record to write out the number of warning
detected by VERICUT.
Total Optimized Time —Adds a record to write out the total time anticipated to
machine the part (as simulated by VERICUT) using optimized toolpath files.
Total Time Difference— Adds a record to write out the total time difference
between Total Time and Total Optimized Time.
Total Distance — Adds a record to write out the total tool movement distance.
Total Cut Distance % — Adds a record to write out the total percentage of tool
movement distance that occurred while in feed rate mode.
Total Volume Removed — Adds a record to write out the total volume of material
removed.
Stock Envelope — Adds a record to write out the rough dimensions (X, Y, Z) of the
stock envelope.
Stock Envelope X — Adds a record to write out the rough X dimension of the stock
envelope.
Stock Envelope Y — Adds a record to write out the Rough Y dimension of the stock
envelope.
Stock Envelope Z — Adds a record to write out the rough Z dimension of the stock
envelope.
323
VERICUT Help
Tool Change Data — Adds a record to write out "tool" related data, of the type selected
from the pull-down list, for the current tool.
Seq — Adds a record to write out the sequential number of the last tool change
event.
Record — Adds a record to write out the last tool change record processed. The
record includes both the sequential line number and the record text.
Tool Description — Adds a record to write out the tool ID and description of a tool
retrieved from a VERICUT Tool Library file. A blank field indicates a description for
this tool was not defined in the library, or the tool did not come from a tool library.
Cutter Info — Adds a record to write out cutter shape geometry data. Includes both
the method used to define the cutter shape (shown in square brackets "[ ]", for
example [Profile] indicates a profile type of cutter definition) followed by the
parameter values used to describe the cutter.
Cutter Height — Adds a record to write out the height of the cutter.
Flute Length — Adds a record to write out the flute length of the cutter.
Gage Point — Adds a record to write out the cutter's gage point value.
OptiPath Record — Adds a record to write out the OptiPath tool description and the
number of teeth for the tool
Optimized By — Adds a record to write out the optimization method used for the
tool.
Original Time — Adds a record to write out the anticipated cutting time (as
simulated by VERICUT) for the tool.
Optimized Time — Adds a record to write out the anticipated optimized cutting time
(as simulated by VERICUT) for the tool.
Time Difference — Adds a record to write out the difference between the optimized
and un-optimized cutting times for the tool
Distance — Adds a record to write out the tool movement distance.
Distance % — Adds a record to write out the percentage of tool movement distance
while in feedrate mode.
Volume Removed — Adds a record to write out the volume of material removed by
the tool.
Errors — Adds a record to write out the number of errors detected by VERICUT for
the tool.
Warnings — Adds a record to write out the number of warnings output by VERICUT
for the tool.
324
VERICUT Help
Min Extension — Adds a record to write out the minimum height required to avoid
shank/holder collisions with the tool.
Tool ID — Adds a record to write out the Tool ID of the "current" tool.
Driven Point — Adds a record to write out the driven point of the "current" tool.
Teeth — Adds a record to write out the number of teeth (flutes) of the "current"
tool.
Cutter ID — Adds a record to write out the Cutter ID of the "current" tool assembly.
Holder ID — Adds a record to write out the Holder ID of the "current" tool assembly.
Cutter Diameter — Adds a record to write out the diameter of the "current" tool.
Cutter Stick-out — Adds a record to write out the "cutter stick-out" value (distance
from the tip of the tool to the lowest point on the holder) of the "current" tool.
Cutter Compensation — Adds a record to write out the cutter compensation value
of the "current" tool.
Comments — Adds a record to adds a blank row enabling you to to write comments
after the report is created.
Air Time % — Adds a record to write out the percent of time that the "current" tool
spent cutting air.
Tool Axial Depth — Adds a record to write out the depth of cut.
Tool Radial Width — Adds a record to write out the width of cut.
Maximum Spindle Speed — Adds a record to write out the maximum spindle speed.
Minimum Spindle Speed — Adds a record to write out the minimum spindle speed.
Maximum Feedrate — Adds a record to write out the maximum feedrate.
Minimum Feedrate — Adds a record to write out the minimum feedrate.
Tool Comments — Adds a record to write out the tool's Comments from the tool
library.
Corner Radius — Adds a record to write out the tool's Corner Radius value from the
tool library. This feature is only available for inserts and parametric APT cutters.
Cutter Description — Adds a record to write out the tool's Cutter Description from
the tool library.
Holder Description — Adds a record to write out the tool's Holder Description from
the tool library.
Tool Maximum Spindle Speed — Adds a record to write out the Maximum Spindle
Speed value from the tool's OptiPath record.
Tool Minimum Spindle Speed — Adds a record to write out the Minimum Spindle
Speed value from the tool's OptiPath record.
325
VERICUT Help
Tool Maximum Feedrate — Adds a record to write out the Maximum Feedrate value
from the tool's OptiPath record.
Tool Minimum Feedrate — Adds a record to write out the Minimum Feedrate value
from the tool's OptiPath record.
Maximum Axial Depth — Adds a record to write out the Maximum Axial Depth
value calculated from the NC program for the tool.
Minimum Axial Depth — Adds a record to write out the Minimum Axial Depth value
calculated from the NC program for the tool.
Maximum Radial Width — Adds a record to write out the Maximum Radial Width
Minimum Radial Width — Adds a record to write out the Minimum Radial Width
Maximum Volume Removal Rate — Adds a record to write out the Maximum
Volume Removal Rate value calculated from the NC program for the tool.
Shank Diameter — Adds a record to write out the diameter of the shank of the tool.
User-Defined Tags —
Add User-Defined Tag — Adds a record to write out the value of a "text type" User
Defined Tag. Use Add User-Defined Tag, to create a new "text type" User-Defined
Tag, or select an existing User-Defined Tag from the pull-down list.
G-Code Variables — Use to write the value of a G-Code Variable to the VERICUT Report.
Selecting G-Code Variables displays the Variable Name window shown below. Enter the
name of the G-Code Variable, whose value that you want to output to the VERICUT
Report, in the Variable Name text field.
Subsystem — Select the Subsystem from the pull-down list.

Variable Name — Use to specify the name of the of the variable whose value you
want to output in the VERICUT Report.
OK — Select OK to add a G-Code Variable record to the report template and close
the Variable Name window.
326
VERICUT Help
Cancel — Select Cancel to close the Variable Name window without adding a G-Code
Variable record to the report template.
NOTES:
1. This feature currently only supports variable types Text and Number (not Array).
2. This feature simply writes out the value of the specified variable to the VERICUT
report. Use this feature in conjunction within a Custom Table to output a more
meaningful entry to the VERICUT Report. See EXAMPLE 2 in the Custom Table
window section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
Table — Displays a window enabling you to add a VERICUT generated table, or "custom"
table, to a report template. Choose one of the following table types from the Table pull-
down list. Each type is described in detail in a separate section below.
Custom Table — Displays the Custom Table window enabling you to output a table of
your own design to a VERICUT report.
File Summary Table — Displays the File Summary Table window enabling you to output
a VERICUT generated file summary table to a VERICUT report.
Tool Summary Table — Displays the Tool Summary Table window enabling you to
output a VERICUT generated tool summary table to a VERICUT report.
View Capture Table — Displays the View Capture Table window enabling you to output
a VERICUT generated table containing View Capture images specified using the features
on the File > AutoSave: View Capture tab.
Tools Table — Displays the Tools Table window enabling you to output a VERICUT
generated tool table to tool library report.
The Tools Table window is only available when the Report Template window was
accessed from the Tool Manager menu bar (File menu > Report Template).
Inspection Features — Displays the Inspection Features Table window enabling you to
output a VERICUT generated inspection features table to an inspection report.
or choose one of the existing (if any) "table type" User-Defined Tags at the bottom of the
list.
Picture — Displays the Picture window enabling you to add VERICUT generated pictures, or
custom pictures from a file, to a report template.
Hyperlink — Displays the Hyperlink window you to add a hyperlink to a file, or Web Address, to
the report template.
Page Break — Enables you to manually add page breaks to control printed output.
327
VERICUT Help
Start NC Program Loop — Use to mark the "start" of a group of records that will be output for
each NC program in project files containing multiple NC programs.
End NC Program Loop — Use to mark the "end" of a group of records that will be output for
each NC Program in project files containing multiple NC programs.
Start Tool Change Loop — Use to mark the "start" of a group of records that will be output at
each tool change.
End Tool Change Loop — Use to mark the "end" of a group of records that will be output at
each tool change.
Start View Loop — Use to mark the "start" of a multiple image Setup Plan.
End View Loop — Use to mark the "end" of a multiple image Setup Plan.
Start Setup Plan Loop — Use to mark the "start" of a group of records that will be output for
each Setup Plan in project files containing multiple Setup Plans.
End Setup Plan Loop — Use to mark the "end" of a group of records that will be output for each
Setup Plan in project files containing multiple Setup Plans.
NOTE: PageBreak, Start NC Program Loop, End NC Program Loop, Start Tool Change Loop,
End Tool Change Loop, Start View Loop, End View Loop, Start Setup Plan Loop and End Setup
Plan Loop cannot be edited. They can only be deleted.
Edit — Enables you edit the content of the highlighted record. This feature is only available for
the Page Layout tab.
Delete — Enables you to delete the highlighted record from the report template file.
Format — Enables you to specify the format that you want the VERICUT Report Preview
window to be displayed in.
PDF — Displays the VERICUT Report Preview window in PDF format.
HTML — Displays the VERICUT Report Preview window in HTML format.
(Display Images) — The Report Template preview window can

only display about 25 tool images at a time (depending on the size of the images). Use the
Display Images tool to specify a group of tool images that you want displayed in the Report
Template preview window. Use the arrow icons to specify the group of images to be displayed.
(Display first 25 Images) — Use to display the first 25 images in the Tool Summary Table.
(Display Previous 25 Images) — Use to display the previous 25 images in the Tool Summary
Table.
(Display next 25 Images) — Use to display the next 25 images in the Tool Summary Table.
(Display last 25 Images) — Use to display the last 25 images in the Tool Summary Table.
328
VERICUT Help
(Set Highlight Color)— The Set Highlight Color icon enables you to specify the color that
you want to be used when object is highlighted in the Report Template Content and Report
Template Preview windows.
The right side of the Set Highlight Color icon shows the current color for highlighted objects. To
change the color for highlighted objects, click on the (Set Highlight Color) icon to display
the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for highlighted objects. The color
pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Report Template
window Menu Bar will update to reflect the selected color.
To close the color pallet window without changing the color, click on the in the upper right
corner of the color pallet window.
(Refresh) — The Report Template preview window is automatically updated when the
Report Template window is re-opened. The Refresh icon enables you to update the Report
Template preview window at any other time as needed.
(Export HTML) — Displays the Save VERICUT Report file selection window enabling you to
specify the /path/filename for the VERICUT Report created in HTML format.
NOTE: The VERICUT Report generated from here is different than the one generated from File
menu > Create Report. The report generated from here is based on the Report Template that is
currently in memory and is only based on the "current" setup.
(Export PDF) — Displays the Save VERICUT Report file selection window enabling you to
specify the /path/filename for the VERICUT Report created in PDF format. (The PDF report
generation is based in part on iText (www.lowagie.com/iText).
NOTE: The VERICUT Report generated from here is different than the one generated from File
menu > Create Report in the VERICUT menu bar. The report generated from here is based on
the Report Template that is currently in memory and is only based on the "current" setup.
(Close) — Closes the Report Template window.
329
VERICUT Help
Report Template Tables
Common Table window Features
The following features are common to all table types except where noted below.
Table — Use the Table pull-down list to select the kind of table that you want to add to the
Report Template. Choose from the following:
Custom Table — The features in the Custom Table window enable you to output a table of
your own design to a VERICUT Report.
File Summary Table — The features in the File Summary Table window enable you to
output a VERICUT generated file summary table to a VERICUT report.
330
VERICUT Help
Tool Summary Table — The features in the Tool Summary Table window enable you to
output a VERICUT generated tool summary table to a VERICUT report.
View Capture Table — The features in the View Capture Table window enable you to
output a VERICUT generated table containing View Capture images, as specified on the File
> AutoSave: View Capture tab, to a VERICUT Report.
Inspection Features — The features in the Inspection Features Table window enabling you
to create an inspection report.
Tools Table — The features on the Tools Table window enabling you to create a tool library
report.
NOTE: The Tools Table window is only available when the Report Template window is
accessed from the Tool Manager menu bar (File menu > Report Template).
Add — Use to add a record to the table. Select the record that you want the new record added
after so that the record becomes highlighted and the press the Add button to add the new
record to the table. The new record is added after the highlighted record. If no records are
highlighted, the new record is added to the end of the table.
Delete — Use to remove a record from the table. Select the record to be removed so that it
becomes highlighted and then press the Delete button. The highlighted record is deleted from
the table.
Hyperlink Features
Type — Use to specify the type of hyperlink that you are adding. Select either File or Web
Address.
File — Use to create a hyperlink to a file.
Web Address — Use to create a hyperlink to a web address.
Hyperlink — When Hyperlink Type is set to File, enter the full path/ filename of the file you
are creating the hyperlink to in the Hyperlink text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Hyperlink file selection window and use it to specify the path/filename.
When Hyperlink Type is set to Web Address, enter the web address (for example,
www.cgtech.com) in the Hyperlink text field. VERICUT will automatically add the "http://"
to the web address.
Table Width — Use to specify the table width relative to the window/page width. Enter the
Table width as a percentage of the window/page width.
Border Size — Use to specify a border size for a "custom" table. Enter the border size in pixels.
Thumbnail Width — Use to specify the width of "images" included in tables. Toggle "on"
(checked) and then enter the width value, in pixels, in the text field.
331
VERICUT Help
Thumbnail Height — Use to specify the width of "images" included in tables. Toggle "on"
(checked) and then enter the width value, in pixels, in the text field.
NOTES: The following rules apply to Thumbnail Width/Thumbnail Height:
1. If only one of the Thumbnail dimensions is toggled "on" (checked), the active dimension
will be used and the other direction dimension will be scaled to maintain the image
aspect ratio.
2. If neither of the Thumbnail dimensions is toggled "on" (checked), the native image size
will be used.
Row Height — Use to specify the row height for a "custom" table. Toggle "on" (checked) and
then enter the height value, in pixels, in the text field.
NOTE: This feature is only available in the Custom Table window.
Maximum Rows/Page — Use to specify the maximum number of rows per page when printing
a "custom" table.
Group Data by Tool — When toggled "on", the Tool Summary Table will group sequences using
the same tool. When toggled "off", the Tool Summary Table will list tools sequence by
sequence.
NOTE: This feature is only available in the Tool Summary Table window.
Style — Use to specify the "style" to be used for the table entries. Select the desired "style"
from the pull-down list. The list will contain all of the styles that have been defined, using the
Report Template Content window: Styles tab, for the current report template. The Style setting
here corresponds to the setting displayed in the Style column in the Report Template Content
window.
Header Style — When toggled "on" (checked), this feature enables you to specify a different
"style" for a table's header row. Select the desired "style" from the pull-down list. The list will
contain all of the styles that have been defined, using the Styles tab, for the current report
template.
OK — Creates a table record, as specified, in the report template and closes the Table window.
Apply — Creates a table record, as specified, in the report template and leaves the Table
window open to create additional tables.
Cancel — Closes the Table window without creating a table record in the report template.
332
VERICUT Help
Custom Table window
The features in the Custom Table window enable you to output a table of your own design to a
VERICUT Report.
Table — Custom Table

TIP: The Table field is editable so that you can create a user defined table tag which will enable
you to populate the table with the contents of a text file.
No. of Columns — Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
No. of Rows — Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
333
VERICUT Help
Once you specify the number of columns and rows that you want in the table, pressing Apply,
expands the window as shown below so that you can define the contents of the table.
Right-clicking in any of the table cells displays the following pop-up menu:
334
VERICUT Help
Insert Row — Select Insert Row to insert an additional blank row into the table.
Insert Column — Select Insert Column to insert an additional blank column into the table
Delete Row — Select Delete Row to delete the row containing the highlighted cell.
Delete Column — Select Delete Column to delete the column containing the highlighted cell.
Insert Picture — Select Insert Picture to display the Picture window enabling you to add
VERICUT generated pictures, or custom pictures from a file or Webb Address, to the report
template.
Insert Table — Select Insert Table to display the Table window enabling you to add a VERICUT
generated table, or "custom" table, inside the current table cell (a nested table) to the report
template. The ability to nest tables enables you to split an individual table cell in one table into
two, or more, cells.
Insert Hyperlink — Select Insert Hyperlink to display the Hyperlink window enabling you to add
a hyperlink to a file or Web Address to the report template.
Insert Text — Select the desired feature from the pull-right list. Each of the features is
described above in the Report Template window, Edit menu bar, under Text.
Repeat to define the contents of each table cell.
Alignment — Left-click in each cell in the alignment row and choose Left, Center, or Right from
the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column to be positioned.
The remainder of the window features, Table Width, Border Size, Thumbnail Width, Row
Height, Maximum Rows/Page, Style, Header Style, OK, Apply and Cancel, are common to all
table windows and are described in the Common Table Features section above.
335
VERICUT Help
Example 1
Using a Custom Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the VERICUT
Report similar to the following picture.
336
VERICUT Help
EXAMPLE 2
Using a Custom Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the VERICUT
Report similar to the following picture. Add a text string identifying the G-Code variable in the
left column and use the G-Code Variables feature (Insert Text > G-Code Variables) to put the G-
Code Variable's value in the right column of the table.
337
VERICUT Help
File Summary Table window

The features in the File Summary Table window enable you to output a VERICUT generated file
summary table to a VERICUT report.
Table — File Summary Table

File Summary Data List
Each row in the File Summary Data List represents a column that will be displayed in a File
Summary table in a VERICUT Report. The first row in the File Summary Data List is used to
define the first column in the File Summary table. The second row in the File Summary Data List
defines the second column in the File Summary table.
The order of the rows in the File Summary Data List can be changed by clicking on square
button at the beginning of any row and dragging the row to the desired position in the list.
338
VERICUT Help
Column — The features in this column are used to specify the type of data that is to be
displayed in this column of the report.
File Type — Adds the file type (Project File, Machine File, Control File, etc.) to the File
summary table record.
File Name — Adds the /path/filename of the file to the File Summary table record.
Header — Use to define the column header to be used for the column in the File Summary
table. Clicking on the "Header" item in a highlighted row, will put it in edit mode so you can
enter a header label that is most meaningful in your work place.
Alignment — Left-click in the Alignment cell in a highlighted row and choose Left, Center, or
Right from the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column of the File
summary table to be positioned.
Width % — Use to specify a width for each column based on a percentage of the table width.
Add — Use to add a row after the highlighted row in the File Summary Data List.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted row from the File Summary Data List.
Tips:
1. You can also click with the right mouse button in the File Summary Data List to display the
following menu and use it to Add/Delete rows in the File Summary Data List.
2. You can change the order of the records in the File Summary Data List by clicking on the
square button on the left side of the record and while holding the mouse button down, drag
the record to the desired location.
The remainder of the window features, Hyperlink Features, Table Width, Border Size,
Thumbnail Width, Thumbnail Height, Maximum Rows/Page, Style, Header Style, OK, and
Cancel, are common to all table windows and are described in the Common Table Features
section above.
339
VERICUT Help
Example
Using a File Summary Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the
VERICUT Report similar to the following picture.
340
VERICUT Help
Tool Summary Table window
The features in the Tool Summary Table window enable you to output a VERICUT generated
tool summary table to a VERICUT report.
341
VERICUT Help
Table — Tool Summary Table

Tool Data List
Each row in the Tool Data List represents a column that will be displayed in the Tool Summary
table in a VERICUT Report. The first row in the Tool Data List is used to define the first column in
the Tool Summary table. The second row in the Tool Data List defines the second column in the
Tool Summary table, and so on.
The order of the rows in the Tool Data List can be changed in a couple of ways. Clicking on one
of the column headings (Column, Header, Alignment) in the Tool Data List will sort the table's
rows alphabetically by the items contained in the column. Secondly, you can click on square
button at the beginning of any row and drag the row to the desired position in the list.
displayed in this column of the report. Clicking on the "Column" item in a highlighted row, will
display a pull-down list of data types that you can select from. The following are the data types
that are available for use in a Tool Summary table.
Tool Thumbnail — Use to display an image of the tool, in a Tool Summary table record.
Turning tool thumbnails are displayed in the XZ plane. All other thumbnails are in ZX plane.
View Capture — Use to output an image at the end of each cutting sequence in Tool
Summary table record. View Capture, in the AutoSave window, must have both Cutter
Change and File End: End of Each File toggled "on".
See AutoSave window: View Capture tab, also in VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for additional information.
Seq — Use to add the sequence number of the tool change event, to a Tool Summary table
record.
Record — Use to add the tool change record processed, to a Tool Summary table record.
The record includes both the sequential line number and the record text.
Tool Description — Use to add a description of a tool retrieved from a VERICUT Tool Library
file, to a Tool Summary table record. A blank field indicates a description for this tool was
not defined in the library, or the tool did not come from a tool library.
Cutter Info — Use to add cutter shape geometry data, to a Tool Summary table record.
Includes both the method used to define the cutter shape (shown in square brackets "[
]", for example [Profile] indicates a profile type of cutter definition) followed by the
parameter values used to describe the cutter.
Cutter Height — Use to add the height of the cutter to a Tool Summary table record.
Flute Length — Use to add the flute length of the cutter to a Tool Summary table record.
Gage Point — Use to add the cutter's gage point value to a Tool Summary table record.
OptiPath Record — Use to add the OptiPath tool description for the tool to a Tool Summary
table record.
342
VERICUT Help
Optimized By — Use to add the optimization method used for the tool to a Tool Summary
table record.
Original Time — Use to add the anticipated cutting time (as calculated by VERICUT) for the
tool to a Tool Summary table.
Optimized Time —Use to add the anticipated optimized cutting time (as calculated by
VERICUT) for the tool to the Tool Summary table record.
Time Difference — Use to add the difference between the optimized, and un-optimized,
cutting times for the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Distance — Use to add the tool movement distance to a Tool summary table.
Distance % — Use to add the percentage of the tool movement distance that occurred
while in feedrate mode to a Tool Summary table record.
Volume Removed — Use to add the volume of material removed by the tool to a Tool
Summary table record.
Errors — Use to add the number of errors detected by VERICUT for the tool to a Tool
Warnings — Use to add the number of warnings output by VERICUT for the tool to a Tool
Min Extension — Use to add the minimum cutter height required to avoid shank/holder
collisions with the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Tool ID — Use to add the Tool ID of the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Driven Point — Use to add the driven point of the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Teeth — Use to add the number of teeth (flutes) of the tool to a Tool Summary table
record..
Cutter ID — Use to add the Cutter ID(s) of the cutter/inserts used in the tool assembly to a
Tool Summary record.
Holder ID — Use to add the Holder ID(s) of the holders used in the tool assembly to a Tool
Cutter Diameter — Use to add the diameter of the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Cutter Stick-out — Use to add the "cutter stick-out" value (distance from the tip of the tool
to the lowest point on the holder) of the tool to a Tool Summary table record.
Cutter Compensation — Use to add the cutter compensation value of the tool to a Tool
Comments — Use to add a blank column enabling you to write comments to a Tool
Summary table record after the report is created.
Air Time % — Use to add the percent of time that the tool spent cutting air to a Tool
343
VERICUT Help
Tool Axial Depth — Use to add the Axial Depth value from the OptiPath record to a Tool
Tool Radial Width — Use to add the Radial Width value from the OptiPath record to a Tool
Maximum Spindle Speed — Use to add the Maximum Spindle Speed value used in the NC
program to a Tool Summary table record.
Minimum Spindle Speed — Use to add the Maximum Spindle Speed value used in the NC
program to a Tool Summary table record.
Maximum Feedrate — Use to add the Maximum Feedrate value used in the NC program to
a Tool Summary table record.
Minimum Feedrate — Use to add the Minimum Feedrate value used in the NC program to a
Tool Summary table record.
NC Program — Use to add the NC program file name (No path) for each tool to a Tool
Tool Comments — Use to add the tool Comments from the tool library to a Tool Summary
table record.
Corner Radius — Use to add the Corner Radius value from the tool library to a Tool
Cutter Description — Use to add the Cutter Description from the tool library to a Tool
Holder Description — Use to add the Holder Description from the tool library to a Tool
Tool Maximum Spindle Speed — Use to add the Maximum Spindle Speed value from the
tool's OptiPath record to a Tool Summary table record.
Tool Minimum Spindle Speed — Use to add the Minimum Spindle Speed value from the
tool's OptiPath record to a Tool Summary table record.
Tool Maximum Feedrate — Use to add the Maximum Feedrate value from the tool's
OptiPath record to a Tool Summary table record.
Tool Minimum Feedrate — Use to add the Minimum Feedrate value from the tool's
OptiPath record to a Tool Summary table record.
Maximum Axial Depth — Use to add the Maximum Axial Depth value, calculated from the
NC program for the tool, to a Tool Summary table record.
Minimum Axial Depth — Use to add the Minimum Axial Depth value, calculated from the
Maximum Radial Width — Use to add the Maximum Radial Width value, calculated from
the NC program for the tool, to a Tool Summary table record.
344
VERICUT Help
Minimum Radial Width — Use to add the Minimum Radial Width value, calculated from the
Maximum Volume Removal Rate — Use to add the Maximum Volume Removal Rate value,
calculated from the NC program for the tool, to a Tool Summary table record.
Shank Diameter — Use to add the Shank Diameter value from the tool library to a Tool
Header — Use to define the column header to be used for the record in the Tool Summary
Right from the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column of the Tool
Summary table to be positioned.
Add — Use to add a row after the highlighted row in the Tool Data List.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted row from the Tool Data List.
Tips:
1. You can also click with the right mouse button in the Tool Data List to display the following
menu and use it to Add/Delete rows in the Tool Data List.
2. You can change the order of the records in the Tool Data List by clicking on the square
button on the left side of the record and while holding the mouse button down, drag the
record to the desired location.
Thumbnail Width, Thumbnail Height, Maximum Rows/Page, Group Data By Tool, Style,
Header Style, OK, and Cancel, are common to all table windows and are described in the
Common Table Features section above.
345
VERICUT Help
Example
346
VERICUT Help
Using a Tool Summary Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the
347
VERICUT Help
View Capture Table window
The features in the View Capture Table window enable you to output a VERICUT generated
table containing View Capture images, as specified on the File > AutoSave: View Capture tab,
to a VERICUT Report.
Table — View Capture Table

View Capture Data List
Each row in the View Capture Data List represents a column that will be displayed in the View
Capture table in a VERICUT Report. The first row in the View Capture Data List is used to define
the first column in the View Capture table. The second row in the View Capture Data List
defines the second column in the View Capture table.
348
VERICUT Help
The order of the rows in the View Capture Data List can be changed by clicking on square
button at the beginning of any row and dragging the row to the desired position in the list.
displayed in this column of the report.
Thumbnail — Displays a View Capture image to a View Capture table record.
Comments — Displays VERICUT generated comments about the image.
Header — Use to define the column header to be used for the column in the View Capture
Right from the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column of the View
Capture table to be positioned.
Add — Use to add a row after the highlighted row in the View Capture Data List.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted row from the View Capture Data List.
Tips:
1. You can also click with the right mouse button in the View Capture Data List to display the
following menu and use it to Add/Delete rows in the View Capture Data List.
2. You can change the order of the records in the View Capture Data List by clicking on the
section above.
349
VERICUT Help
Example
Using a View Capture Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the
350
VERICUT Help
Tools Table window
The features on the Tools Table window enabling you to create a tool library report. The Tools
Table window is only available when the Report Template window is accessed from the Tool
Manager menu bar (File menu > Report Template).
NOTE: Report templates containing Tools Tables should only be used for creating tool library
reports from the Tool Manager window. Using them to create reports from other VERICUT
applications will result in incorrect data being displayed in the report.
351
VERICUT Help
Table — tools
Tool Data List
Each row in the Tool Data List represents a column that will be displayed in the Tool Library
Report. The first row in the Tool Data List is used to define the first column in the Tool Library
Report. The second row in the Tool Data List defines the second column in the Tool Library
Report, and so on.
The order of the rows in the Tool Data List can be changed in a couple of ways. Clicking on one
of the column headings (Column, Header, Alignment) in the Tool Data List will sort the table's
rows alphabetically by the items contained in the column. Secondly, you can click on square
button at the beginning of any row and drag the row to the desired position in the list.
that are available for use in a Tool Library Report.
Thumbnail — Use to display a thumbnail image of the tool, in a Tool Library Report. Turning
tool thumbnails are displayed in the XZ plane. All other thumbnails are in ZX plane.
ID — Use to display the alpha-numeric text that identifies the tool in the Tool Library, in a
Tool Library Report.
Description — Use to display the description of the tool in a Tool Library Report.
Gage Point — Use to display the location of the gage point of the tool assembly, in a Tool
Library Report.
Driven Point — Use to display the offset for the tool control point, or "driven point", in a
Tool Library Report.
Type — Use to display the type of tool (Mill, Turn, Probe, etc.), in a Tool Library Report.
Flute Length — Use to display the tool's flute length in a Tool Library Report.
Cutter Geometry — Use to display the cutter geometry (for example, Bull Nose: 1.5, 0.0625,
3.25) in a Tool Library Report.
OptiPath Description — Use to display the description from an OptiPath record associated
with the tool, in a Tool Library Report.
Teeth — Use to display the number of teeth that the tool has, in a Tool Library Report.
Comments — Use to display any comments from the tool library tool record, in a Tool
Library Report.
Cutter Compensation — Use to display the cutter compensation value of the tool in a Tool
Library Report.
Cutter ID — Use to display the ID(s) of the cutter(s) used in the tool assembly, in a Tool
Library Report.
352
VERICUT Help
Holder ID — Use to display the ID(s) of the holder(s) used in the tool assembly, in a Tool
Library Report.
Cutter Diameter — Use to display the diameter of the cutter in a Tool Library Report.
Cutter Height — Use to display the height of the cutter in a Tool Library Report.
Cutter Stick-out — Use to display the "cutter stick-out" value (distance from the tip of the
tool to the lowest point on the holder) of the tool, in a Tool Library Report.
Corner Radius — Use to display the corner radius value of the cutter in a Tool Library
Report.
Cutter Description — Use to display the Cutter Description in a Tool Library Report.
Holder Description — Use to display the Holder Description in a Tool Library Report.
Shank Diameter — Use to display the Shank Diameter of the cutter in a Tool Library Report.
Tap Pitch — Use to display the Tap Pitch of the tap in a Tool Library Report.
See Tool Manager window, also in VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information on these data types.
Header — Use to define the column header to be used for the record in the Tool Library Report.
Clicking on the "Header" item in a highlighted row, will put it in edit mode so you can enter a
header label that is most meaningful in your work place.
Right from the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column of the Tool
Library Report to be positioned.
Add — Use to add a row after the highlighted row in the Tool Data List.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted row from the Tool Data List.
Tips:
1. You can also click with the right mouse button in the Tool Data List to display the following
menu and use it to Add/Delete rows in the Tool Data List.
2. You can change the order of the records in the Tool Data List by clicking on the square
button on the left side of the record and while holding the mouse button down, drag the
record to the desired location.
353
VERICUT Help
section above.
Example
Using a Tools Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table in the Tool
Library Report similar to the following picture.
354
VERICUT Help
355
VERICUT Help
Inspection Features Table window

The features in the Inspection Features Table window enabling you to create an inspection
report. The Inspection Features Table window is only available when the Report Template
window was accessed from the Inspection window menu bar (File menu > Report Template).
NOTE: Report templates containing Inspection Feature Tables should only be used for creating
inspection reports from the Inspection window. Using them to create reports from other
VERICUT applications will result in incorrect data being displayed in the report.
356
VERICUT Help
Table — Inspection Features

Inspection Feature List
Each row in the Inspection Features List represents a column that will be displayed in the
Inspection Report. The first row in the Inspection Features Table is used to define the first
column in the Inspection Report. The second row in the Inspection Feature List defines the
second column in the Inspection Report, and so on.
The order of the Inspection Feature List's rows can be changed in a couple of ways. Clicking on
one of the column headings (Column, Header, Alignment) in the Inspection Feature List will
sort the table's rows alphabetically by the items contained in the column. Secondly, you can
click on square button at the beginning of any row and drag the row to the desired position in
the list.
that are available for use in an Inspection Report.
Symbol — Use to display the symbol of the type of measurement that the record
represents, for example for a floor thickness, in an Inspection Report.
Feature — Use to display a very brief description of the type of feature the record
represents, for example "Floor Thickness", in an Inspection Report.
Identifier — Use to display the feature identifier associated with the inspection record, for
example, A1, in an Inspection Report.
Instrument — Use to display the type of instrument that is to be used to check the
dimension, for example, "Ultrasonic", in an Inspection Report.
Dimension — Use to display the expected dimension in an Inspection Report.
Tolerance — Use to display the acceptable tolerance value, or range of values, in an
Inspection Report.
Geo. Tolerance — The geometric tolerance specification associated with the record, for
example, , in an Inspection Report.
Measurement — Use to display the inspector's actual measurement in an Inspection
Report.
Tool ID — Use to display the identifier of the tool that cut the feature, in an Inspection
Report.
See VERICUT Inspection, in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help for additional
information on these data types.
357
VERICUT Help
Header — Use to define the column header to be used for the record in the Inspection Report.
Clicking on the "Header" item in a highlighted row, will put it in edit mode so you can enter a
header label that is most meaningful in your work place.
Right from the pull-down list to specify how you want the data in that column of the Inspection
Report to be positioned.
Add — Use to add a row after the highlighted row in the Inspection Feature List.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted row from the Inspection Feature List.
Tips:
1. You can also click with the right mouse button in the Inspection Feature List to display the
following menu and use it to Add/Delete rows in the Inspection Feature List.
2. You can change the order of the records in the Inspection Feature List by clicking on the
section above.
358
VERICUT Help
Example
Using an Inspection Features Table defined as shown in the picture above will result in a table
in the Inspection Report similar to the following picture.
359
VERICUT Help
360
VERICUT Help
Picture window
Picture — Displays a window enabling you to add VERICUT generated pictures, or custom
pictures from a file, to a report template.
Picture — Use to specify the type of picture to add. Select one of the picture types from the
pull-down list.
Add a custom image using:
From File — outputs the image from the specified file.
or choose one of the VERICUT generated pictures:
Tool Use Graph — outputs a Tool Use graph image.
Cutting Graph — outputs a Cutting Conditions graph image.
Start of Process Image — outputs an image at the start of processing. When included
within a "tool change loop", an image of the part at the start of cutting with current tool
is output. When included within a "toolpath loop", an image of the part at the start of
the current toolpath is output.
End of Process Image — outputs an image at the end of processing. When included
within a "tool change loop", an image of the part at the end of cutting with current tool
361
VERICUT Help
is output. When included within a "toolpath loop", an image of the part at the end of
the current toolpath is output.
Tool Image — outputs an image of the current tool. When included within a "tool
change loop", an image of the current tool is output at each tool change.
Setup Plan — outputs a Setup Plan image. Multiple image setup plans can be output by
using a Start Setup Plan Loop record before the Setup Plan record and an End Setup
Plan Loop record after.
Inspection Picture — outputs a VERICUT Inspection image to the report.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable to VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation.
or choose one of the existing (if any) "picture type" User-Defined Tags at the bottom of the
list.
File — Enter the /path/filename of the image file, or use the (Browse) icon to display the
Picture file selection window and use it to specify the path/filename. This feature is only active
when Picture is set to From File.
Setup Plan — Select the desired Setup Plan from the pull-down list.
Border Size — Use to add a border to the image. Enter the border size in pixels.
Width — Use to specify the width for the displayed image. Toggle "on" (checked) and then
enter the width value in pixels.
Height — Use to specify the height for the displayed image. Toggle "on" (checked) and then
enter the height value in pixels.
NOTES: The following rules apply to Width/Height:
1. If only one of the dimensions is toggled "on", the active dimension will be used and the
other direction dimension will be scaled to maintain the image aspect ratio.
2. If neither of the dimensions is toggled "on", the native image size will be used.
Hyperlink Features
Address.
Web Address — Use to create a hyperlink to web address.
Hyperlink — When Hyperlink Type is set to File, enter the full path/ filename of the file you
are creating the hyperlink to in the Hyperlink text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Hyperlink file selection window and use it to specify the path/filename.
362
VERICUT Help
www.cgtech.com) in the Hyperlink text field. VERICUT will automatically add the "http://"
to the web address.
OK — Adds the picture record, as specified, to the template and closes the Picture window.
Apply — Adds the picture record, as specified, to the template and leaves the Picture window
oen to add additional picture records.
Cancel — Closes the Picture window without adding a picture record to the template.
EXAMPLE
Using a Picture window defined as shown in the picture above will result in a picture in the
363
VERICUT Help
364
VERICUT Help
Hyperlink window
The features on the Hyperlink window enable you to add a hyperlink to a file, or Web Address,
to the report template.
Text — Enter the text that you want displayed for the hyperlink in the text field.
Style — Select the style that you want to use for the hyperlink text from the pull-down list. The
list will contain all of the styles that have been defined, using the Report Template Content
window: Styles tab, for the current report template.
Hyperlink Features
Address.
Web Address — Use to create a hyperlink to web address.
Hyperlink — When Hyperlink Type is set to File, enter the full path/ filename of the file you are
creating the hyperlink to in the Hyperlink text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to display
the Hyperlink file selection window and use it to specify the path/filename.
www.cgtech.com) in the Hyperlink text field. VERICUT will automatically add the "http://" to
the web address.
OK — Adds the Hyperlink record to the report template and closes the Hyperlink window.
Apply — Adds the Hyperlink record to the report template and leaves the Hyperlink window
open to add additional Hyperlink records.
365
VERICUT Help
Cancel — Closes the Hyperlink window without adding a Hyperlink Record to the report
template.
EXAMPLE
Using a Hyperlink window defined as shown in the picture above will result in a hyperlink in the
366
VERICUT Help
Report Template Content window

The features in the Report Template Content window, displayed on the left side of the Report
Template window, enable you to define a new, or modify an existing, report template.
The Tabs
Page Layout tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify or modify the content and page
layout of a report template.
Styles tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify display characteristics (font, font size,
color, etc.) to be used for the report template.
User-Defined Tags tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify "generic" records included
in a report template that will be updated with information specific to a particular user file at the
time the report is created. The user file specific information can be associated with the User-
Defined Tag using the User-Defined Tag Values window. If all User-Defined Tag values are not
defined prior to creating a report, you will be prompted for any missing information at the time
the report is created.
367
VERICUT Help
Page Setup tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify or modify page format
characteristics such as margins, orientation and paper size. The features on this tab are
intended to be use with PDF format reports, although it may also be useful for HTML format
reports with certain web browsers.
368
VERICUT Help
Report Template Content window, Page Layout tab
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Report > Report Template
File > Report Template in the Inspection Sequence window.
369
VERICUT Help
The Record Table

Each record in the table consists of five columns of information. Click on any column in a row to
highlight a record for editing. The order of the records in the table can be changed by clicking
on the square button at the beginning of the record and dragging the record to the desired
position. Each record in the table consists of the following information:
Category — Use the options in this column to specify what "part" of the report the record is to
be included. With the record highlighted, click on the record "category" and select from the
pull-down list (Body, Page Header, Page Footer, First Page Header, or First Page Footer).
Type — Indicates the record type. With the record highlighted, double click Table or Picture to
display the corresponding window for editing the record.
Content — Indicates the "content" of the record. With the record highlighted, double click on
the content of a Table or Picture record to display the corresponding window for editing the
record. Double click on the "content' of a text string record to add or modify the text.
Alignment — Indicates how the information will be aligned horizontally in the report. With the
record highlighted, click on the record "category" and select from the pull-down list (Body,
Page Header, Page Footer, First Page Header, or First Page Footer).
Style — Indicates the "style" to be used for the record. With the record highlighted, click on the
record "style" and select from the pull-down list. The list will contain all of the styles that have
been defined, using the Styles tab, for the current report template.
Shortcut: Right-click in the Record Table to display the following menu:
370
VERICUT Help
NOTE: These features provide the same functionality as those described above under Edit in
the Report Template menu bar. The third level features (Date, Time, Page Number, etc.) each
have an additional pull-down list of features as described above under Edit.
To Report Template Content window
371
VERICUT Help
Report Template Content window, Styles tab
Locations:
The Style Record Table

Each record in the table consists of nine columns of information describing a particular style
record. Click on any column in a row to highlight a record for editing. Each record in the table
consists of the following information:
Style Name — The name used to identify a particular style record. These names are the items
that will appear in the Style pull-down list, in the record table, on the Page Layout tab and also
on the Report Template Tables windows.
Font — Indicates the font type to be used for the style record. With the record highlighted, click
on the Font field and select from the pull-down list.
Size — Indicates the font size to be used for the style record. With a record highlighted, click on
the Size field and then either select the font size from the pull-down list or type in a font size.
Bold — Toggle the "Bold" characteristic "on/off" for the style record.
Italic — Toggle the "Italic" characteristic "on/off" for the style record.
Underline — Toggle the "Underline" characteristic "on/off" for the style record.
Font Color — With the record highlighted, double click on the Font Color field to display a color
pallet. (You can also right-click on a "color" field and select Set Color to display the color pallet.)
372
VERICUT Help
Click on the desired font color in the pallet. Click on the X in the upper right corner of the color
pallet to dismiss the pallet.
Background Color — With the record highlighted, double click on the Background Color field to
display a color pallet. (You can also right-click on a "color" field and select Set Color to display
the color pallet.) Click on the desired background color in the pallet. Click on the X in the upper
right corner of the color pallet to dismiss the pallet.
Border Size — Indicates the border size to be used for the style record. With the record
highlighted, click on the border size and type in a font size (in pixels).
the table.
Shortcut: Right-click in the Style Record Table to display the following menu:
NOTES:
1. Feature Set Color provides the same functionality as described above for Font Color.
2. Features Add and Delete provide the same functionality as described above.
373
VERICUT Help
Report Template Content window, User-Defined Tags tab

Locations:
User-Defined Tags enable you to define "generic" records in a report template, whose value is
specified at the time that the template is used to create a report. User-Defined Tag values can
be defined in the User-Defined Tags window or by using PPRINT data in the toolpath file.
The User-Defined Tag Record Table

Each record in the table consists of a Tag Name that is used to identify the record and a Type
(Text, Table or Picture from File). Click on any column in a row to highlight a record for editing.
Each record in the table consists of the following information:
Tag Name — The name used to identify a particular User-Defined Tag record. After adding a
User-Defined Tag record, enter a unique tag name in the Tag Name text field.
Type — Indicates the "type" of information represented by the tag. After adding and naming a
User-Defined Tag record, click in the Type field and select the appropriate data type (Text,
Table, or Picture From File) from the pull-down list.
NOTE: Tag Name and Type can be edited by highlighting the record and then clicking in the
appropriate field and either editing the text or selecting the desired type from the pull-down
list. Once a Tag Name is referenced in a report template, the User-Defined Tag record can no
longer be edited.
374
VERICUT Help
the table.
Shortcut: Right-click in the User-Defined Tag Record Table to display the following menu:
NOTE: These Add and Delete features provide the same functionality as those described
above.
375
VERICUT Help
Report Template Content window, Page Setup tab
Features on this tab enable you to specify or modify page format characteristics such as
margins, orientation and paper size. The features on this tab are intended to be used with PDF
format reports, although it may also be useful for HTML format reports with certain web
browsers.
Margins — Use to specify the page margins for the VERICUT Report.
Left — Enter the size of the left margin, in pixels, in the text field.
Right — Enter the size of the right margin, in pixels, in the text field.
Top — Enter the size of the top margin, in pixels, in the text field.
Bottom — Enter the size of the bottom margin, in pixels, in the text field.
Orientation — Use to specify orientation of pages in the VERICUT Report.
Portrait — Select to display the page in a "portrait" orientation.
376
VERICUT Help
Landscape — Select to display the page in a "landscape" orientation.
Paper Size — Use to specify the paper size to be used for the VERICUT Report. Select one of the
following paper sizes from the pull-down list: 11X17, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9,
A10, ARCH_A, ARCH_B, ARCH_C, ARCH_D, ARCH_E, B0, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, FLSA, FLSE,
HALFLETTER, LEDGER, LEGAL, and NOTE.
377
VERICUT Help
Report Template Preview window

The Report Template Preview window, displayed on the right side of the Report Template
window and the User-Defined Tags window, enables you to see a preview of the report that will
be created using the report template shown in the Report Template Content window. In the
case of the User-Defined Tags window, the Report Template window enables you to view the
specified User-Defined Tag values in the context of the VERICUT report.
The Report Template Preview window:
1. Only displays report information for the "current" setup.

2. Does not support two byte languages (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
378
VERICUT Help
Notice in the Report Template window shown below that the File Summary Table record in the
Report Template Content window: Page Layout tab has been selected and therefore is
highlighted. Also notice that the File Summary Table displayed in the Report Template Preview
window is highlighted in yellow. This enables you easily determine what is actually created in
the VERICUT Report by the selected Report Template record.
This is also true with the User-Defined Tags window enabling you to easily determine what is
actually created in the VERICUT Report by the selected User-Defined tag record.
379
VERICUT Help
User-Defined Tags window
Locations:
Project menu > Report > User-Defined Tag Values
File > User-Defined Tag Values in the Inspection Sequence window.
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > Report pull-down list > User-Defined Tag Values in the Tool
Manager window.
Opens the User-Defined Tags window enabling you to assign job specific information to
"generic" User-Defined Tags (ref. Report Template window: User Defined Tag tab, also in the
VERICUT Help section), prior to creating a report.
Notice in the picture above that the User-Defined Tags window consists of two main areas. The
User-Defined Tag window, and Report Preview window.
In the User-Defined Tag window, double click on a Tag Value field to enter, or edit, the tag
value.
Once the User Defined Tag values have been specified, they are stored in the project file. Use
the check boxes in the Global column to specify whether a User Defined Tag value applies to
the project or to a particular setup. When toggled “on” (checkmark visible), the User Defined
Tag value is saved at the project level. When toggled “off”, the User Defined Tag value is saved
with the setup.
380
VERICUT Help
If a setup-specific User-Defined Tag does not exist, then the "Global" User-Defined Tag value is
used. If a setup-specific User-Defined Tag exists, but has no value, the "Global" User-Defined
Tag value is not used.
If User Defined Tag values are not specified prior to creating a report, you will be prompted for
them at the time the report is created.
You can also specify User-Defined Tag Values using Data from a file or using PPRINT statements
in the NC program file.
The Report Preview window enables you to view the User-Defined Tag values in the context of
the Report Template that they are associated with. The Report Template Preview window is
described above in the Report Template window section.
381
VERICUT Help
Using VERICUT Reports
Creating a "Custom" Report Template
Use the procedures described below to create a custom report template.
Modify an existing report template to create a custom template:

1. Depending on the type of report template that you are creating, open the Report Template
window in the appropriate location.
Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit in the VERICUT menu bar.
File menu > Report Template in the Tool Manager menu bar.
File menu > Report Template in the Inspection menu bar.
2. In the Report Template window menu bar, select File menu >Open.
3. Use the Open Report Template window to select one of the standard report templates
located in the library folder of your VERICUT installation.
4. In the Report Template window, use the features on the Page Layout tab to add, remove
or modify items related to the "content" and "page layout" of the report.
5. In the Report Template window, use the features on the Styles tab to add, remove or
modify style records related to the "format" (font, size, colors, etc.) of the report.
6. In the Report Template window, use the features on the User-Defined Tags tab to add or
remove "generic" records included in a report template that will be updated with job
specific information at the time the report is created.
7. In the Report Template window, use File > Save As to display the Save Report Template
window.
8. Specify the /path/ filename for the "custom" report template file, and then Save.
Create a new "custom" report template:

1. Depending on the type of report template that you are creating, open the Report Template
window in the appropriate location.
Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit in the VERICUT menu bar.
File menu > Report Template in the Tool Manager menu bar.
File menu > Report Template in the Inspection menu bar.
2. In the Report Template window, select File >New to clear the Report Template window.
382
VERICUT Help
3. In the Report Template window, use the features on the Styles tab to add style records
related to the "format" (font, size, colors, etc.) of the new report template. At least one
style record must be created before you can start adding "content" items to the Page
Layout tab.
4. In the Report Template window, use the features on the User-Defined Tags tab to add
"generic" records included in a report template that will be updated with job specific
information at the time the report is created.
5. In the Report Template window, use the features on the Page Layout tab to add items
related to the "content" and "page layout" of the report.
6. In the Report Template window, use File > Save As to display the Save Report Template
window.
7. Specify the /path/ filename for the newly created "custom" report template file, and then
Save.
See Report Template window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
383
VERICUT Help
Create a Report Using a Report Template
Report Templates are used to specify the content and format of various reports that can be
created in VERICUT. At the time that the report is created, information created by VERICUT
during the "current" session and other designated locations is assembled according to the
content and format instructions contained in the report template and a report file is created in
a specified location.
The report is a file that contains information about the VERICUT session as specified in the
report template. Depending on where in VERICUT the report is created from, and the
"template" used, a wide variety of information such as: the current NC program and project
files, part images, machining times, optimization results, tool library and inspection data can all
be output as a report. The reports can be output in Text, HTML or PDF format.
Use the procedures below to create various reports in VERICUT.
To create a report file showing an overview of the results of the current VERICUT session:
This report will contain information equivalent of the type found in the Results File in previous
releases.
1. Ensure VERICUT is configured to create the desired data for the report, for example: auto-
saving images, optimizing, etc., then process the NC program(s).
For example, if you want images of the workpiece saved at cutter changes to appear in the
report file:
Click File menu > AutoSave: View Capture tab.
Click Properties - ensure Type is set to save JPEG images, click OK.
In the Auto Save group, select Cutter Change and File End, then enter the ShadeCopy File
name (.jpg extension), click OK.
If the report is to contain optimization data, make sure that OptiPath is turned on.
Select (Play / Start-Stop Options), to process the NC program(s).
Select the report template file to be used.

Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit
In the Report Template window, select File > Open and use the file selection window to select
a report template (.xml) file. You can select one of the VERICUT supplied "standard" template
files (vericut_xyz.VcTemplate), found in the "library" folder of your VERICUT installation or a
"custom" template file you have created, then Open.
File > Close to dismiss the Report Template window.
384
VERICUT Help
Enter any job specific, User-Defined Tag values required by the selected user template.
Project menu > Report > User-Defined Tag Values.
In the User-Defined Tag Values window, enter/edit any of the User-Defined Tag values as
necessary, then OK to save the tag values and dismiss the window.
NOTE: Some or all of the User-Defined Tag values may have been previously defined when an
earlier report was created. Tag values are stored in the project file. Also, if you do not enter all
of the User-Defined Tag values during this step, you will be prompted for any missing values at
the time that the report is created.
Create the Report.

File menu > Create Report > report format (where "report format" is Text, HTML or PDF)
In the Save VERICUT Report window, specify the /path/file name for the report file to be
created. If you want the report to display in your browser immediately after the report is
created, make sure that View Report is toggled "on", and then Save.
VERICUT will now write out the report file, in the specified format, to the specified location and
display the report in your browser if you indicated that.
To create a Tool Library report file:

In the Tool Manager window,
File menu > Create Report > report format (where "report format" is Text, HTML or PDF)
In the Save VERICUT Report window, specify the /path/filename for the report file to be
created. If you want the report to display in your browser immediately after the report is
created, make sure that View Report is toggled "on", and then Save.
VERICUT will now write out the report file to the specified location and display the report in
your browser if you indicated that.
NOTE: By default VERICUT will use the vericut_tools.VcTemplate report template, located in
the "library" folder of you VERICUT installation. If necessary, use Project menu > Report >
Report Template to select a report template (as described in step 2 above) or Project menu >
Report > User-Defined Tag Values to enter/edit job specific values related to the chosen report
template (as described in step 3 above).
385
VERICUT Help
To create an Inspection report file:

In the Inspection window, select File menu > Create Report > report format (where "report
format" is Text, HTML or PDF). You can also use (Export HTML) or (Export PDF),
located in the Inspection Icon Bar, to create an HTML or PDF formatted report.
VERICUT will display the report based on the "current" Inspection file and write out the report
file, using the specified format, to the same folder where the Inspection file is located.
If the "current" Inspection file has not been saved, the Save VERICUT Report window will
display. Specify the /path/filename for the report file to be created, and then Save. VERICUT
will then save the report and display the Inspection report using your default browser.
NOTE: By default VERICUT will use the inspection.VcTemplate report template, located in the
"library" folder of you VERICUT installation. If necessary, use Project menu > Report > Report
Template to select a report template (as described in step 2 above) or Project menu > Report >
User-Defined Tag Values to enter/edit job specific values related to the chosen report template
(as described in step 3 above).
information.
386
VERICUT Help
Customizing Headers in VERICUT Generated Tables
The default column headers used in VERICUT generated tables (File Summary table, Tool
Summary table and View Capture table) are fully customizable. Use the following procedures
to customize the headers in these tables:
Customize the headers in VERICUT generated tables in existing report templates:

1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit to display the
Report Template window.
Select the Page Layout tab.
If the report template containing the table headers to be modified is not currently displayed,
use File > Open, in the Report Template window menu bar, to open the appropriate report
template file.
When the correct report template is displayed, highlight the table record containing the
headers to be customized, and then select Edit menu > Edit in the Report Template menu bar
to display the Table window. (You can also right-click in the highlighted table and select Edit
from the menu that displays, or simply double click on the highlighted table record to display
the Table window)
In the Table window, click on the header text to be modified, and then enter the desired
header text. In a similar manner, continue to modify any other of the header text fields. When
finished, select OK to dismiss the Table window and return to The Report Template window.
In the Report Template window, use the same procedure to customize the headers in any
other VERICUT generated table, select File > Save (or Save As) to save the customized report
template file. When you generate a report using the customized report template, VERICUT
generated tables will have your custom headers instead of the default ones.
Customize headers when adding VERICUT generated tables to a report template:

Using the general procedures described in Creating a "Custom" Report Template, add a
VERICUT generated table with custom headers as follows:
1. In the Report Template window, highlight the record that you want the VERICUT generated
table added after, then select Edit > Add > Table in the Report Template window menu bar (or
right-click on the highlighted record and select Add > Table in the menu that displays) to display
the Table window.
In the Table window, select the type of VERICUT generated table that you want to add from the
Table pull-down list.
For each record in the table, click on the header text to be modified, and then enter the desired
header text. In a similar manner, continue to modify any other of the header text fields. When
finished, select OK to dismiss the Table window and return to the Report Template window.
387
VERICUT Help
Continue creating the custom report template as described in Creating a "Custom" Report
Template.
information.
388
VERICUT Help
Using Data from a File in a Report
Use the following procedure to add data from a text file and use it in a report.
In your text file:

Set up a text file similar to the following example which is used to put generic header
information in a report. Notice that each data entry is separated by a blank space.
GENERIC PROGRAM HEADER
NC Programmer: Fred Smith

Department Number: 123456
Job Billing Number: 678
ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRST

1234 5678 2468 1357 3456
Setting up the text file in this manner will result in a single column table. See Example 1
results.
You can also structure your text file to create a multiple column table as follows:
Table Data Source:, text file, , ,

DATA:, , , ,
ABCD,EFGH,IJKL,MNOP,QRST
1234,5678,2468,1357,3456
Notice that the data for each column is separated by "," characters. The number of columns
that will appear in the report's table is determined by the number of columns of data that
are specified in the first row. Notice how blank spaces separated by "," characters are used
to designate empty cells which are used as "place holders" so that the table has enough
columns to accommodate the data in the lower rows of the table.
389
VERICUT Help
Setting up the text file in this manner will result in a multiple column table. See Example 2
results.
In the Report Template Window:

1. In the VERICUT menu bar, select Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit to open the
In the Report Template window menu bar, File >Open to open an existing report template file
or File > New to create a new report template file.
Click on User-Defined Tags tab.
In the User-Defined Tags window, click on the Add button. (You can also right-click in the
window and select Add from the menu that displays or select Edit menu > Add in the Report
Template menu bar)
In the record that is added enter the Tag Name, in this case, generic_header in the Tag Name
field.
Click in the Type field and select Table from the pull-down list.
Click on the Page Layout tab.
Right-click in the window and select Add > Table from the menu that displays. (Or select Edit >
Add > Table in the Report Template menu bar)
In the Table window, click on the "pull-down" button at the right of the Table field and select
the user-defined tag name that you set up for this table. In this case, generic_header.
Use the other Table window features to further define how the table will be displayed in the
report, then OK.
In the Report Template menu bar, File > Save to save the report template file, then File > Close.
Create the report:

1. In the VERICUT menu bar, select File > Create Report > format, where format is Text, HTML or
PDF.
In the Save VERICUT Report window, enter the /path/filename for the report to be created,
and then Save.
In the User-Defined Tags window, enter the /path/filename of the text file, to be used to
populate the table in the report, in the Tag Value field. OK.
The output for the tables you just added (using Text format) should be similar to the following
(depending on your Table feature settings):
390
VERICUT Help
Example 1 results:
Example 2 results:
information.
391
VERICUT Help
Using PPRINT Info from an NC Program in a Report
Using VERICUT comment records in the NC program file enables you to specify User-Defined
Tag values, or define the content for tables, for use in VERICUT reports. Use the following
procedures to extract PPRINT information from the NC program for use it in a VERICUT report.
In the Report Template Window:

1. In the VERICUT menu bar, select Project menu > Report > Report Template >Edit to open the
In the Report Template window menu bar, select File >Open to open an existing report
template file or File > New to create a new report template file.
Add table data directly from PPRINT data in the NC program:

a. Click on User-Defined Tags tab.
b. In the User-Defined Tags tab, click on the Add button. (You can also right-click in the
window and select Add from the menu that displays or select Edit > Add in the Report
Template menu bar)
c. In the record that is added enter the Tag Name, in this case, setup_info in the Tag Name
field.
d. Click in the Type field and select Table from the pull-down list.
e. Click on the Page Layout tab.
f. In the Page Layout tab, right-click in the window and select Add > Table from the menu
that displays. (Or select Edit > Add > Table in the Report Template window menu bar)
g. In the Table window, click on the "pull-down" button at the right of the Table field and
select the user-defined tag name that you set up for this table. In this case, setup_info,
indicating that the table data is coming from a User-Defined Tag.
h. Set Table Width = 0%. This will allow the width of the table to be defined by the
incoming data.
i. Use the other Table window features to further define how the table will be displayed
in the report, then OK.
392
VERICUT Help
Add table data from a text file using PPRINT data in the NC program:
a. Click on the User-Defined Tags tab.
Template window menu bar)
c. In the record that is added enter the Tag Name, in this case, table_data in the Tag Name
field.
d. Click in the Type field and select Table from the pull-down list.
f. In the Page Layout tab, right-click in the window and select Add > Table from the menu
that displays. (Or select Edit > Add > Table in the Report Template window menu bar)
g. In the Table window, click on the "pull-down" button at the right of the Table field and
select the user-defined tag name that you set up for this table. In this case, table_data,
indicating that the table data is coming from a User-Defined Tag.
h. Set Table Width = 0%. This will allow the width of the table to be defined by the
incoming data.
i. Use the other Table window features to further define how the table will be displayed
in the report, then OK.
Add a picture from a file using PPRINT data in the NC program:

c. In the record that is added enter the Tag Name, in this case, add_picture in the Tag
Name field.
d. Click in the Type field and select Picture From File from the pull-down list.
f. In the Page layout tab, right-click in the window and select Add > Picture from the menu
that displays. (Or select Edit > Add > Picture in the Report Template window menu bar)
g. In the Picture window, click on the "pull-down" button at the right of the Table field
and select the user-defined tag name that you set up for this picture. In this case,
add_picture, indicating that the picture data is coming from a User-Defined Tag.
h. Use the other Picture window features to further define how the picture will be
displayed in the report, then OK.
393
VERICUT Help
Add text using PPRINT data in the NC program:

c. In the record that is added enter the Tag Name, in this case, add_text in the Tag Name
field.
d. Click in the Type field and select Text from the pull-down list.
f. In the Page Layout tab, right-click in the window and select Add > Text > User-Defined
Tags > add_text from the menu that displays. (Or select Edit > Add > Text > User-
Defined Tags > add_text in the Report Template window menu bar)
NOTE: If you had not previously added User-Defined Tag add_text using the User-
Defined Tag tab, you could add it here using Add > Text > User-DefinedTags > Add
User-Defined Tag from the menu that displays. (Or select Edit > Add > Text > User-
Defined Tags > Add User-Defined Tag in the Report Template window menu bar)
3. Click on the Page Layout tab, set the other record characteristics (Category, Alignment, Style,
etc.) as appropriate.
4. In the Report Template window menu bar, File > Save to save the report template file, then File
> Close.
In your NC program file:

Set up the PPRINT statements in your NC program similar to the following examples. The
examples are shown in the format that they would appear in a G-Code NC program file. They
can similarly be set up using the "PPRINT/VERICUT-..." format for APT and CLS NC program files.
See Controlling VERICUT with Comment Records, in the Automating VERICUT section, in the
CGTech Help Library, for additional information.
394
VERICUT Help
Add table data directly from PPRINT data in the NC program:

(VERICUT-BEGINTABLE "setup_info")
( 1ST OP, METALDYNE PUNCH SLEEVE BODY )
( PART #,H0070-0243 )
( REV.,"A" )
( NC Program File,L1H0070-0243.TXT)
( DATE ORIGINALLY PROGRAMMED,10/24/03 )
( PROGAMMED BY,CHARLIE WILSON )
( STOCK,6-1/2" H-13 CUT +.150 )
(- ,CHUCK ON STOCK DIA. 3.00" DEEP )
(- ,WITH FULL CHUCK PRESSURE )
(- ,UNDERCUT YOUR JAWS FOR A GOOD GRIP )
(VERICUT-ENDTABLE)
Notice the first and last statements in this group. VERICUT-BEGINTABLE is used to designate
the start of a group of PPRINT statements that are to be included in the report. "setup_info" is
the name that is used to identify this particular group of statements. VERICUT-ENDTABLE is
used to designate the end of a group of PPRINT statements that are to be included in the
report.
Add table data from a text file using PPRINT data in the NC program:
(VERICUT-USERTAG "table_data"="/example/table_data.txt")
The content of the example text file, table_data.txt, is shown below.
Table Data Source:, text file, , ,
DATA:, , , ,
ABCD,EFGH,IJKL,MNOP,QRST
1234,5678,2468,1357,3456
Notice that the data for each column is separated by "," characters. The number of columns
that will appear in the report's table is determined by the number of columns of data that are
specified in the first row. Notice how blank spaces separated by "," characters are used to
designate empty cells which are used as "place holders" so that the table has enough columns
to accommodate the data in the lower rows of the table.
NOTE: See Using Data from a File in a Report, above, for additional information related adding
table data from a text file.
395
VERICUT Help
Add a picture from a file using PPRINT data in the NC program:

(VERICUT-USERTAG "add_picture"="/hhelp/vericut/vericut.jpg")
Add text using PPRINT data in the NC program:

(VERICUT-USERTAG "add_text"="This text was added using PPRINT data from the
toolpath.")
Create the report:

1. Generate the NC program containing the PPRINT statements described above.
2. In the VERICUT menu bar, select File menu > Create Report > format, where format is Text,
HTML or PDF.
3. Enter the /path/filename for the report to be created, and then Save.
The output for the table records you just added (in HTML format) should be similar to the
following picture (depending on your feature settings and the contents of the text and image
files you use.):
information.
396
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan
Introduction to Setup Plan

Setup Plan enables you to create a setup plan image, including notes and dimensions, which
can be included in a VERICUT report.
Important Concepts
Setup Plan View — The Setup Plan View defines the spatial relationship between the model
and paper and affects how the image appears on the paper, i.e. the orientation and position of
the model in the jpeg image. It is represented on screen by the spatial relationship between the
models and the paper-edge rectangle (also referred to as the "plan rectangle").
397
VERICUT Help
Dimension Plane — The dimension plane (also referred to as "the glass") is the plane that all
dimensions are projected into. This affects how dimensions display on the screen, how
dimension values are calculated, and defines the meaning of "horizontal" (X-axis of the Csys)
and "vertical" (Y-axis of the Csys), etc.
Viewport Image — The viewport image is the orientation of the image in the VERICUT viewport
and is manipulated using VERICUT's view controls. The viewport image does not affect the
Setup Plan View or the dimension plane.
398
VERICUT Help
Select View window
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Report > Setup Plan
Project menu > Report > Setup Plan
The Select View window enables you to specify the initial view that you want to create the
setup plan in. The view choices in the list will include: Active View (The view that is currently
active in the VERICUT session. This is the default.); Standard Views (XY, YX, YZ, ZY, ZX, XZ, V-ISO
and H-ISO); and any custom views previously defined in the Select View window, or in the
Select/Store View window, for the current setup. See Select/Store View window, also in the
VERICUT Help section, for additional information.
NOTE: Selecting one of the standard views (XY, YX, YZ, ZY, ZX, XZ, V-ISO or H-ISO) specifies
only the view orientation. The view type (Machine or Workpiece) is determined by the view
that is currently active in the VERICUT session.
399
VERICUT Help
OK — After selecting the initial view for the setup plan, click OK. The following will happen:
1. View 1 in VERICUT will change to the selected view.
2. The "plan rectangle", representing the default plan size is displayed on the glass (a plane,
referred to as "the glass", parallel to the view that setup plan record is associated with) in
the specified view. See the picture below. The "plan rectangle" is drawn on the glass in the
Clip Box color specified on the Settings tab.
3. Unless you selected an existing custom view previously defined in the Select/Store View
window, a new "Setup Plan" view will be created and will be added to the Select/Store View
window. If you selected a previously defined view, the original view name will be used in
the Setup Plan record.
New views will be added to both the Select/Store View window and the Select View
window, even if a setup plan record is not actually created for the initial view selected
(selecting Cancel in the Setup Plan window).
4. The Setup Plan window displays, enabling you to continue the process of creating a setup
plan.
Setup Plan view with "plan rectangle"
Cancel — Use Cancel to close the Select View window without any further action to create a
setup plan.
NOTE: The Select View window only displays when you select Project menu > Report > Setup
Plan when no setup plan records exist for the current setup. If one, or more, setup plan records
already exist the Setup Plan window opens immediately.
400
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window
Locations:
Toolbar short cut: (Setup Plan)
The features in the Setup Plan window enable you to add new dimensions or notes to, or edit
existing dimensions or notes in, a setup plan. The dimensions are placed on a dimension plane
(referred to as "the glass") represented by the XY plane of the specified Csys.
Once the Setup Plan is created it can be included in a VERICUT report. See the Adding a Setup
Plan Image to a Report topic below for information about adding Setup Plan information to
VERICUT Reports.
401
VERICUT Help
(Down to enable mouse tracking and picks, up to disable.) — Use this icon to designate
that the Setup Plan window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics area are to be
applied to. When toggled “on”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick Highlight Color specified
in the File menu > Preferences window.
Setup Plan Table

Each record in the Setup Plan Table represents a setup plan image that can be added to a
VERICUT report. Each record consists of the following columns of data:
Plan Size — Sets the size of the "plan rectangle" drawn on the glass. Choose (A, B, C, A1, A2, or
A3) from the pull-down list. (Default = A for inch, A1 for mm)
Orient — Sets the orientation of the "plan rectangle" drawn on the glass. Choose (Portrait, or
Landscape) from the pull-down list. (Default = Landscape)
View — Defines the orientation of the setup plan image in VERICUT's 3D space. Select the
desired view from the pull-down list. The list contains all views defined in the View menu >
Select/Store View window for the current setup.
Csys — Used to define the dimension plane, represented by the XY plane of the Csys, and the
meaning of "horizontal" (X-axis of the Csys) and "vertical" (Y-axis of the Csys). The default is
View Csys, the coordinate system that defines the view for the current setup plan record.
Scale — Sets the size of the "plan rectangle" relative to VERICUT's 3D space. Enter the desired
scaling factor in the number field. (Default = 1)
Clip — Use to activate the "clip image rectangle" that will be used to determine what will be
displayed in the setup plan image in the setup plan report.
When toggled "On", (checkmark displayed) a re-sizable "clip image rectangle" is displayed on
the on the glass is drawn on the glass in the Clip Box color specified on the Settings tab. The
image that appears in the setup plan report is clipped (contained) by this rectangle.
402
VERICUT Help
To change the size and location of the "clip image rectangle, hold the cursor over any of the
four corners, or over the midpoint of any of the rectangle's sides so that a red dot displays as
shown in the picture below. Also notice that the rectangle changes to the Selection color
defined on the Settings tab.
Left click on the dot and drag it to modify the "clip image rectangle". Repeat the "click and
drag" using the other available red dot control points until the desired "clip image rectangle"
size, shape, and location is achieved.
403
VERICUT Help
404
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan Table Right Mouse Button Menu

Right-click in the Setup Plan Table to display the following menu:
Restore View — This feature enables you to easily return a rotated view in the VERICUT
graphics area to the view orientation specified in the highlighted setup plan record.
Modify View — Modifies the View Type and orientation of the view in the highlighted
record in the Setup Plan Table to match those of View 1 in the VERICUT graphics window.
This feature provides the same functionality as Modify in the Select/Store View window.
Fit To Paper — Use to "fit" the VERICUT view to the size of the setup plan paper. See the
pictures below.
VERICUT view before using Fit To Paper
405
VERICUT Help
VERICUT view after using Fit To Paper
Fit to View — Use to “fit” the Plan Rectangle to the size of the current view. See the
pictures below.
406
VERICUT Help
VERICUT view before using Fit To View
VERICUT view after using Fit To View
When a record is selected in Setup Plan Table:

1. The selected record becomes highlighted.
407
VERICUT Help
2. The View 1 display in VERICUT switches to the view associated with the selected record.
3. A rectangle representing the plan size, and its scale in the view, is drawn on the glass in
the Clip Box color specified on the Settings tab.
4. If the Clip checkbox in the in the setup plan record is toggled "On" (checked) a re-sizable
"clip image rectangle" is drawn on the glass in the Clip Box color specified on the
Settings tab.
5. Dimensions/notes associated with the record are drawn on the glass.
Stored Views — Opens the Select /Store View window (ref. Select/Store View window, in the
View Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help).
Add — Adds a setup plan record to the Setup Plan Table.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted setup plan record from the table.
Restore View — This feature enables you to easily return a rotated view in the VERICUT
graphics area to the view orientation specified in the highlighted setup plan record.
Modify View — — Modifies the View Type and orientation of the view in the highlighted record
in the Setup Plan Table to match those of View 1 in the VERICUT graphics window. This feature
provides the same functionality as Modify in the Select/Store View window.
Fit To View — Use to “fit” the Plan Rectangle to the size of the current view.
Linear tab — Use the features on this tab to add, or modify, linear dimensions in the highlighted
setup plan record.
Radial tab — Use the features on this tab to put radial dimensions on the highlighted setup plan
record.
Angular tab — Use the features on this tab to put angular dimensions on the highlighted setup
plan record.
Note tab — Use the features on this tab to put notes on the highlighted plan record.
Settings tab — Use the features on this tab to define characteristics to be used for notes and
dimensions (number format, font, font size, etc.).
OK — Saves all setup plan records and closes the Setup Plan window.
Apply — Saves all setup plan records and leaves the Setup Plan window open for additional
work.
408
VERICUT Help
Recalculate — Selecting Recalculate causes VERICUT to re-calculate all dimension values, and
apply the "current" settings on the Settings tab to all dimensions and notes in the highlighted
setup plan record.
NOTE: Any dimension text values that were manually entered, for example "not to scale"
dimensions will be overwritten by VERICUT calculated values when Recalculate is used.
Cancel — Closes the Setup Plan window without saving setup plan records.
NOTES:
1. Setup Plan data is saved per setup in the project file.
2. Image (not glass) is clipped in HTML/PDF output based on the status (checked/ not checked)
of the Clip checkbox in the setup plan record, and "clip image rectangle" size and position.
3. See the Adding a Setup Plan Image to a Report topic below for information about adding
Setup Plan information to VERICUT Reports.
409
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window, Linear tab
Locations:
The features on the Linear tab enable you to add linear dimensions to, or modify existing linear
dimensions in, the setup plan record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of linear dimension that you want to create.
Horizontal — Dimensions the horizontal distance between Point 1 and Point 2.
Vertical — Dimensions the vertical distance between Point 1 and Point 2.
Shortest — Dimensions the straight line distance between Point 1 and Point 2.
In the following picture, all three dimensions were defined using the same two points (the mid-
points of the edges). Each of the three dimensions was created using a different Dimension
Type as shown in the picture.
410
VERICUT Help
Arrow — Use to specify the type of arrow to be used for the dimension.
Inside — Place the arrows between the two points.
Outside — Place the arrows outside of the measured points.
None — Do not use arrows for the dimension. Display only a line between the two points.
The following picture illustrates the difference between Inside, Outside, and None.
411
VERICUT Help
Point 1 — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click the arrow
to enter "pick" mode and follow the prompts below the message area (logger) to define
the point. The following construction methods are available:
Point — Use to select a point.
Vector/Plane — Define a point represented by the intersection of a vector with a plane.
3 Planes — Define a point represented by the intersection of three planes.
Circle — Define a point represented by the center of a circle.
CSYS Origin — Define a point represented by the origin of a coordinate system (CSYS).
Once you have finished picking the geometry required to satisfy the chosen construction
method, VERICUT will display the point in View 1 and display a red check next to Point 1 on the
Linear tab, as shown in the Linear tab picture above, to indicate that Point 1 has been selected.
VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Point 2.
If you want to re-select Point 1, repeat the above steps.
to enter "pick" mode and follow the prompts below the message area (logger) to define
the point. The following construction methods are available:
Linear tab, as shown in the Linear tab picture above, to indicate that Point 2 has been selected.
VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Text.
Text — VERICUT will automatically fill in the dimension in the Text text field after you select
Point 1 and Point 2. Pick the position in View 1 where you want the dimension text placed.
If you want to move the text position, click the arrow to enter "pick" mode, then pick the
new location in View 1.
412
VERICUT Help
You also have the option of adding to the text, for example adding a tolerance value. If the text
that you add is typical of all linear dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Settings
tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all linear dimensions.
You can also override the value that VERICUT enters, for example to create a "not to scale"
dimension.
In either case, when you finish editing the text, click the arrow to enter "pick" mode, then
pick the position in View 1 where you want the dimension text placed.
Add — Use to add the dimension to the setup plan record. The dimension will display in View 1
in the Dimension color specified on the Settings tab.
Modify — The Add button changes to Modify when you are in "edit" mode. Use Modify to add
your changes to the setup plan record.
To enter "edit" mode, simply select an existing dimension or note in View 1 so that it becomes
highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Settings tab. VERICUT will automatically display
the correct tab for editing the selected dimension or note. Use the tab features to change the
dimension as desired. When finished with your changes, use the Modify button to add the
changes to the setup plan record and display the modified dimension in View 1 in the
Dimension color specified on the Settings tab.
See the Tips on Editing Setup Plan Dimensions topic below for additional information.
Delete — Use when in "edit" mode to delete the selected (highlighted) dimension from the
setup plan record.
Cancel — Use to cancel the current selections for the dimension, and return it to its original
condition. In "add" mode the dimension returns to the un-defined condition. In "edit" mode the
dimension returns to its un-edited condition.
Steps for creating a linear dimension
1. Choose the dimension type.

2. Choose the arrow type.
3. Pick the start point of the linear dimension (Point 1).
4. Pick the end point of the linear dimension (Point 2).
5. Pick the location for the dimension text.
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the linear dimension to the setup plan
record.
To Setup Plan window
413
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window, Radial tab
Locations:
The features on this tab enable you to add new radial dimensions to, or edit existing radial
dimensions in, a setup plan record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of radial dimension that you want to create.
Radius — Display the dimension using the radius value.
Diameter — Display the dimension using the diameter value.
Inside — Places the arrow inside of the radial entity being dimensioned.
Outside — Places the arrow outside of the radial entity being dimensioned.
None — Do not use arrows for the dimension. Only display a line outside of the radial entity
being dimensioned.
414
VERICUT Help
The following picture illustrates the difference between Inside, Outside, and None when
creating Radius dimensions.
creating Diameter dimensions.
415
VERICUT Help
Center Point — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click the
arrow to enter "pick" mode and follow the prompts below the message area (logger) to
define the point representing the center of the circle/arc being dimensioned. The following
construction methods are available:
CSYS Origin— Define a point represented by the origin of a coordinate system (CSYS).
method, VERICUT will display the point in View 1 and display a red check next to Center Point
on the Radial tab, as shown in the Radial tab picture above, to indicate that the center point has
been selected. VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Point on Radius.
Point on Radius — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click
the arrow to enter "pick" mode and follow the prompts below the message area (logger)
to define a point on the circle/arc being dimensioned. The following construction methods are
available:
method, VERICUT will display the point in View 1 and display a red check next to Point on
Radius on the Radial tab, as shown in the Radial tab picture above, to indicate that point on the
circle/arc being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick"
mode for Text.
Center Point and Point on Radius. Pick the position in View 1 where you want the dimension
text placed.
416
VERICUT Help
that you add is typical of all radial dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Settings
tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all radial dimensions.
dimension.
setup plan record.
Steps for creating a radial dimension

3. Pick the center point of the circle/arc being dimensioned (Center Point).
4. Pick a point on the circle/arc being dimensioned (Point on Radius).
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the radial dimension to the setup plan
record.
417
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window, Angular tab
Locations:
The features on this tab enable you to add new angular dimensions to, or edit existing angular
dimensions in, a setup plan record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of angular dimension that you want to create.
Smaller — Displays the smaller of the two angles defined using the three points specified
below. For example the same three points could define both a 30 degree and a 150 degree
angle. Use Smaller to dimension the 30 degree angle.
Larger — Displays the larger of the two angles defined using the three points specified below.
For example the same three points could define both a 30 degree and a 150 degree angle. Use
Larger to dimension the 150 degree angle.
418
VERICUT Help
The following picture illustrates the difference between Smaller and Larger.
Inside — Place the arrows between the lines defining the angle.
Outside — Place the arrows outside of the lines defining the angle.
None — Do not use arrows for the dimension. Only an arc displays between the lines defining
the angle.
419
VERICUT Help
to enter "pick" mode and follow the prompts below the message area (logger) to define a
point on the line representing one side of the angle. The following construction methods are
available:
Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that a point on a line
representing the first side of the angle being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT will also
automatically activate "pick" mode for Point 2.
point on the line representing the other side of the angle. The following construction methods
are available:
Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that a point on a line
representing the second side of the angle has been selected. VERICUT will also automatically
activate "pick" mode for Center Point.
420
VERICUT Help
define the point representing the vertex of the angle. The following construction methods are
available:
on the Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that point
representing the vertex of the angle being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT will also
automatically activate "pick" mode for Text.
If you want to re-select Center Point, repeat the above steps.
Point 1, Point 2, and Center Point. Pick the position in View 1 where you want the dimension
text placed.
that you add is typical of all angular dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Settings
tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all angular dimensions.
dimension.
421
VERICUT Help
setup plan record.

3. Pick a point on a line representing one side of the angle (Point 1).
4. Pick a point on a line representing the second side of the angle (Point 2).
5. Pick the point representing the vertex of the angle being dimensioned (CenterPoint).
7. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the radial dimension to the setup plan
record.
422
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window, Note tab
Locations:
The features on this tab enable you to add new notes to, or edit existing notes in, a setup plan
record.
Note — Select the style of note that you want to add from the pull-down list. Select one of the
following styles:
Text — Use to add a text only note to the setup plan.
Text with Leader — Use to add a text note with a leader to the setup plan.
Text File — Use to add text from a text file as a text only note to the setup plan. Enter the
/path/filename of the text file in the File Name text field or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Text File file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
423
VERICUT Help
Text File with Leader — Use to add text from a text file as a text note with a leader to the setup
plan. Enter the /path/filename of the text file in the File Name text field or click on the
(Browse) icon to display the Text File file selection window and use it to specify the
/path/filename.
Symbol — Use to add a symbol to the setup plan. Enter the /path/filename of the file
containing the symbol image in the File Name text field or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Image File file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
Symbol with Leader — Use to add a symbol with a leader to the setup plan. Enter the
/path/filename of the file containing the symbol image in the File Name text field or click on the
(Browse) icon to display the Image File file selection window and use it to specify the
/path/filename.
Section Indicator — Use to add a section indicator with label to the setup plan.
The following picture illustrates the difference between Text, Text with Leader, and Section
Indicator when creating notes.
Text — Use the text field to specify the text associated with the note, or section indicator label.
Then click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode, and pick the location in View 1 where you want
the note/section indicator text placed.
424
VERICUT Help
Leader Start — Click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode, then pick the location in View 1
where you want the note leader to start. This is the end of the leader with the arrow.
When creating Section Indicators, this feature is used to specify the start location of the section
indicator. The relationship between this location and the one specified using Leader End
(described below) are used to indicate the length and orientation if the linear portion of the
section indicator.
The relationship between the linear portion of the section indicator and the location that you
picked to position the section leader text determines the direction of the section indicator
arrows. The arrows will always point away from the text pick location.
Leader End — Click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode then pick the location in View 1 where
you want the note leader to end. This is the straight end of the leader.
When creating Section Indicators, this feature is used to specify the end location of the section
indicator. The relationship between this location and the one specified using Leader Start
(described above) are used to indicate the length and orientation if the section indicator.
Add — Use to add the note/section indicator to the setup plan record. The notes will display in
View 1 in the Text color specified on the Settings tab. The note leader, or section indicator will
display in the Dimension color specified on the Settings tab.
To enter "edit" mode, simply select an existing note, or section indicator, in View 1 so that it
becomes highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Settings tab. VERICUT will automatically
display the correct tab for editing the selected note. Use the tab features to change the
note/section indicator as desired. When finished with your changes, use the Modify button to
add the changes to the setup plan record and display the modified dimension in View 1 in the
colors specified on the Settings tab.
setup plan record.
425
VERICUT Help
Steps for creating a note:
1. Choose the Note type (Text or Text with Leader).

2. Enter the note text in the text field.
3. Click on , then pick the position in View 1 where you want the note placed.
If you are creating a Text with Leader note, continue with the following:
4. Click on the Leader Start , and then pick the start point of the Note leader.
5. Click on the Leader End , and then pick the end point of the Note leader.
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the note to the setup plan record.
Steps for creating a section indicator:
1. Set Note type to Section Indicator.

2. Enter the text associated with the section indicator in the text field.
3. Click on , then pick the position in View 1 where you want the section indicator text to
be placed.
4. Click on the Leader Start , and then pick the location in View 1 where you want the
section indicator to start.
5. Click on the Leader End , and then pick the location in View 1 where you want the
section indicator to end.
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the note to the setup plan record.
426
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan window, Settings tab
Locations:
The features on this tab enable you to specify, or edit existing, text characteristics (format, font,
color, etc.), to be used in the setup plan.
Number Format — Use the Number Format features to specify how numbers are to be
displayed in the Setup Plan.
Decimal Places — Use to specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Trailing Zeros — When toggled "On" trailing zeros will be displayed.
Number Label — Enables you to append the specified characters to the end of a number (i.e.,
in, mm. TYP, etc.). This feature only appends to VERICUT calculated values. They will not
append to user entered values (for example, when creating "not to scale" dimensions).
Linear — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of linear dimensions.
Radial — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of radial dimensions.
Angular — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of angular dimensions.
427
VERICUT Help
Fonts — Use the Fonts features to specify the font characteristics (font, style, and size) to be
displayed in the Setup Plan.
Note — Use the following to specify font characteristics to be used for Notes.
Font — Select the desired font from the pull-down list.
Style — Select Plain, Bold, or Italic from the pull-down list.
Size — Select the desired font size from the pull-down list.
Dimension — Use the following to specify font characteristics to be used for Dimensions.
Colors — Use the Color Pallet icon to specify colors for specific Setup Plan entities (Selection,
Edit, etc.).
The right side of the (Color Pallet) icon shows the current color of the entity. To change the
color of the entity, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the color pallet window shown
below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the entity. The color pallet
will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Setup Plan window: Settings tab
will update to reflect the selected color.
corner of the color pallet.
Selection — Use to specify the selection (highlight) color to display dimensions and notes when
you hold the cursor over them, to assist in selecting existing entities editing.
Edit — Use to specify the color to display dimensions and notes when they are in edit mode.
Clip Box — Use to specify the color to display the clip box (ref. "Clip" in the Setup Plan window).
Dimension — Use to specify the color to display dimension lines, note leaders, and section
markers.
428
VERICUT Help
Text — Use to specify the color to display the text in dimensions, notes and section indicators.
429
VERICUT Help
Things to Remember When Working With Setup Plan

The following things should be kept in mind when working with Setup Plan.
 Setup Plan always displays in the first viewport.
 A setup plan is always controlled by a stored view. You either select one that exists, or one
is automatically created for you.
 If you choose Active View, or one of the internal views (XY, YX, etc.), from the first dialog,
then a stored view is automatically created. The content of the currently highlighted view
determines the setup plan's view type and attributes for automatically created stored view.
 Do not use an OpenGL Machine view for Setup Plan.
 All dimensions are 2D, projected into a dimension plane. They are either projected into the
stored view's plane, or they are projected into the XY place of a selected CSYS. Depends on
your choice in the CSYS column of the Setup Plan table.
 All dimensions are point-to-point. They do not dimension "features". They are all
constructed from points projected into the dimension plane. Each dimension type has
point-constructor choices.
 The dimension text field is text, not numeric. You can enter any text string you want to into
a dimension text field. When the dimension is initially created the text field is filled by a
calculated number. The text field is re-calculated during modification if:
a. the text field is blanked
b. an end-point is moved
c. the Recalculate button is pressed.
Setup plan "settings" are saved in the preferences file (cgtech_xx_user.prefs, where xx is the
VERICUT version number).
430
VERICUT Help
Tips on Editing Setup Plan Dimensions

The following is intended to get you started with using Setup Plan window "Edit" mode.
To enter edit mode:

Select an existing dimension or note in the view so that it becomes highlighted. VERICUT will
automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected dimension.
Use the tab features to change the dimension as desired. Most of the features just required
selecting a different option from the pull-down list. The ones shown below may be slightly less
obvious.
Editing a point:
In "edit" mode, select the dimension in the view so that it becomes highlighted.
Changing a point in a dimension is just like creating it initially. For the point that you want to
edit:
Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click the arrow and
follow the prompts in the message area to define the new point.
Changing the position of the dimension text:

Click the arrow next to Text, and then pick the location in the view where you want the
dimension moved to. You can move the location of the dimension closer, or further away, than
its current position depending on the new location that you pick. You can also move just the
text associated with the dimension to another position along the current dimension line.
Add changes to the Setup Plan record:

When finished with your changes for a dimension, use the Modify button to add the changes to
the setup plan record.
Use OK or Apply in the Setup Plan window to save the setup plan to the project file.
431
VERICUT Help
Adding a Setup Plan Image to a Report

The following provides an overview of the steps needed to add a setup plan to a report.
1. Use View menu > Select/Store to display the Select/Store View window and use it to create
the views that you want in the setup plan.
2. Use Project menu > Report > Setup Plan, or click on (Setup Plan) in the toolbar, to
display the Setup Plan window and use it's features to create the setup plan record(s)
(images) that you want in the Setup Plan report.
3. Use Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit to display the Report Template
window and use it's features to create a new, or modify an existing report template, to
include the Setup Plan image, or images.
Single Image Setup Plan
 On the Report Template window: Page Layout tab select the record that you want
the Setup Plan added after so that it becomes highlighted.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Picture to display the
Picture window.
 In the Picture window, select Setup Plan from the pull-down list, then OK. The Setup
Plan record will be added to the report template.
 Save the report template.
NOTE: If you use this approach for a multiple image setup plan, only the first record in
the Setup Plan table will be included in the report.
Multiple Image Setup Plan

 On the Report Template window: Page Layout tab select the record that you want
the Setup Plan added after so that it become highlighted.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Start View Loop to
add the Start View Loop record to the report template.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Picture to display the
Picture window.
 In the Picture window, select Setup Plan from the pull-down list, then OK. The Setup
Plan record will be added to the report template.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > End View Loop to add
the End View Loop record to the report template.
4. Use File menu > Create Report > (format) to generate the report.
432
VERICUT Help
G-Code Advanced Settings
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > G-Code > Advanced Settings
Project menu > G-Code Advanced Settings
Toolbar short cut:

The Advanced Settings option opens the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab which has
features that enable you to configure the settings required for processing G-Code NC program
files.
See Settings window, G-Code Advanced tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
433
VERICUT Help
Variables window
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > G-Code > Variables
Project menu > Variables
Toolbar short cut:
Features on the Variables window, are used to initialize, maintain, and monitor G-Code
variables. Variables are assumed to have zero for a default value. However, you can initialize
variables with any numeric or text value. When this window is open during processing, it gives
immediate feedback when variables are set or changed by the NC program file. Variables are
saved to the .VcProject file if an initial value or a description is entered, or if the variable is
included in the Tracking Variables list.
434
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar:
File menu
Exit Ctrl + E — Use to close the Variables window.
Edit menu
Add Variable — Opens the Variable Add window enabling you specify the characteristics of a
new variable and add it to the variable list.
Delete Variable — Deletes the highlighted variable from the variable list.
Delete All — Deletes all variables in the variable list.
Filter menu
User Defined Variables — Depending on the current state (hidden/shown), clicking on

this feature will either "hide" all User Defined Variables or "show" all User Defined Variables in
the Variables List.
User Defined Variables are added using the Variable Add window (Variables window Menu bar:
Edit menu > Add Variable).
Local Variables — Depending on the current state (hidden/shown), clicking on this

feature will either "hide" all Local Variables or "show" all Local Variables in the Variables List.
Local Variables are added through the main NC Program.
Setup Variables — Depending on the current state (hidden/shown), clicking on this

feature will either "hide" all Setup Variables or "show" all Setup Variables in the Variables List.
Setup Variables are added using a Setup Initialization file. See Initialization File in the Configure
Setup menu: G-Code tab section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete
information.
Machine Variables — Depending on the current state (hidden/shown), clicking on this

feature will either "hide" all Machine Variables or "show" all Machine Variables in the Variables
List.
Machine Variables are added using a Machine Initialization file. See the Initialization File
feature on the Configuration menu: Machine Settings tab, in the Configuration Menu section of
Help for complete information.
435
VERICUT Help
Control Variables — Depending on the current state (hidden/shown), clicking on this

feature will either "hide" all Control Variables or "show" all Control Variables in the Variables
List.
Control Variables are added using the Control Variables window (Configuration menu > Control
Variables). See Control Variables window in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete
information.
Control Variables can also be added using a Control Initialization file. See the Initialization File
feature on the Configuration menu > Control Settings window: General tab, in the Configuration
Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
Utilities menu
Update Each Block — Clicking on the Update Each Block option toggles between "active"
(checked) and "inactive" (not checked) states. Clicking on activates
the feature. Clicking on de-activates the feature.
When Update Each Block is "active", the variables in the Tracking Variables list are updated as
each block is processed. This feature has no effect on the variables in the Variables List. The
(Play) button must be used to start the processing.

When Update Each Block is "inactive", the variables in the Tracking Variables list are updated at
the same time that the variables in the Variables List are updated.
Search — Selecting this option displays the Search Variable window enabling you to
quickly find a particular variable in the Variables list.
Tracking Variables:
The Tracking Variables portion of the Variables window enables you to easily track variables of
special interest without having to scroll through all variables in the Variables List. The following
information is displayed for all variables selected for tracking:
Name — Name of the variable being tracked.
SubSystem — Indicates the subsystem (if any) that the variable being tracked is associated
with.
436
VERICUT Help
NOTE: SubSystem in this case pertains to the subsystems defined in the Variables window
variable tree, NOT the subsystems defined by the machine.
Subroutine — Subroutine (if any) that the variable being tracked is associated with.
Description — A description of the variable being tracked.
Type — Type of variable (Number, Text, Number Array, String Array, Frame, Frame Array,
Axis, Axis Array, Integer, or Integer Array). See Variable Add window, also in the Project Tree
Simulation Help for more detailed descriptions of these variable types.
Current Value — The current value of the variable.
Initial Value — The initial value of the variable.
Add/Remove Tracking Variables:
— Use to add the highlighted variable in the Variables List to the Tracking Variables list.
Tip: You can also "drag" and "drop" a variable from the Variables List to the Tracking
Variables List. Left-click on the variable name in the Variables List Tree so that it become
highlighted, and then while keeping the mouse button depressed, drag the variable to the
Tracking Variables List and release the mouse button.
— Use to remove the highlighted variable(s) from the Tracking Variables list.
Tip: Use one of the following methods to highlight multiple variables in the Tracking
Variables list.
1. Use the "Shift" key to select a consecutive range of blocks. Click on the first block in
the range so that it becomes highlighted, and then while holding down the "Shift"
key, click on the last block in the range. All of the blocks between the first and last
should now be highlighted.
You can also click on the first variable in the list , then while keeping the mouse
button depressed, drag the cursor to the last variable in the range.
2. Use the "Ctrl" key to select multiple individual blocks. Click on the first block so that
it becomes highlighted, and then while holding down the "Ctrl" key, select additional
blocks. Each block will become highlighted when it is selected.
437
VERICUT Help
Filter Variables:
The Filter Variables icons provide the same functionality described above for the features in the
menu bar Filter menu section. The difference here is that the here you get a visual confirmation
of the current state. When a variable group is in a "hidden" state, the icon is highlighted yellow.
The icons toggle back and forth between the two states each time you click on it.
Icon Function
Click to hide User Defined Variables
Click to show User Defined Variables
Click to hide Local Variables
Click to show Local Variables
Click to hide Setup Variables
Click to show Setup Variables
Click to hide Machine Variables
Click to show Machine Variables
Click to hide Control Variables
Click to show Control Variables
Tip: Hold the cursor over the icon in the Variables window for a tip showing what the icon will
do if you click on it.
438
VERICUT Help
Variables List:
The Variables List, located in the lower portion of the Variables window, displays all variables
initialized and encountered during NC program processing. Variable data displayed in red text
indicates that the variable value changed while processing the current block.
Name — The Name column displays a tree structure showing a list of all variables, and how
each variable relates to the overall structure of the NC program (subsystem, NC program,
subroutines, etc.). Tree is constantly updated as the NC program is processed.
Notice that each variable has an icon image associated with it indicating its type, and therefore
its source (described above in the Filter menu section). The variable type represented by the
icon image is described below:
User Defined Variable
Control Variable
Local Variable
Machine Variable
Setup Variable
Description — A description of the variable. This field enables you to enter a description for the
NC Variable. This feature enables you to document variables for later use, as well as simplifying
the tracking of states. Instead of just seeing 4001, a more meaningful "Motion Type"
439
VERICUT Help
description can be added. Descriptions that end with an " * " has been automatically generated
by VERICUT. Automatically generated descriptions can result from any of the following:
Setting a variable on the G-Code Processing window.
Calling one of the Autoset… macros.
Calling the SetDynamicVars macro.
Axis, Axis Array, Integer, or Integer Array); also indicates the type of data that can be assigned
to the variable. See Variable Add window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more
detailed descriptions of these variable types.
Initial Value — Use to specify an initial value for the variable.
NOTE: For Number or Integer type variables it is possible to create a "vacant" variable with no
defined values. This is done by leaving the Initial Value field blank. This is significant because
VERICUT treats variables differently depending on whether the variable exists (defined within
VERICUT) versus whether the variable has an undefined value.
If you try to access a non-existing variable (a variable that does not show up in variables
window) VERICUT outputs an error message saying; "un-initialized variable, defaulting to zero".
When you call a G65 subroutine, variables 1-33 get initialized to "undefined" or "vacant" except
those, which are set on the call to the subroutine. If you try to access an "undefined" variable,
then VERICUT does not output an error message, or default to zero.
Add — Opens the Variable Add window enabling you specify the characteristics of a new
variable and add it to the variable list.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted variable from the variable list.
Delete All — Deletes "all" variables in the Variables window Variables List as well as all control
variables in the Control Variables window Variables List
Shortcut: Right-click in the Variables List to display the following menu:
440
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. Features Add, Delete, and Delete All provide the same functionality as described above and
also under Edit menu.
2. Feature Variable modify opens the Variable Modify window enabling you to modify the
characteristics of array variables. This feature is only active when an array variable is
highlighted.
441
VERICUT Help
Variable Add window
Accessed by selecting Add in the Variables window or the Control Variables window
(Configuration menu > Control Variables), the features in this window enable you to specify
the characteristics of a new variable.
When accessed from the Variables window, the Variable Add window is used to define a new
User Defined variable and add it to the Variables List in the Variables window. User Defined
Variables are automatically added to the Word Format window.
When accessed from the Control Variables window, the Variable Add window is used to define
a new Control variable and add it to the Variables List in the Control Variables window. Control
Variables are automatically added to the Word Format window.
The Variable Add window will look different depending on the "type" of variable being defined.
Name — Name of the variable.

SubSystem — Use this feature to specify the subsystem that the variable is associated with.
NOTE: SubSystem in this case pertains to the subsystems defined in the Variables List variable
tree, NOT the subsystems defined by the machine.
Description — Use this field to add descriptive information about the variable
Type — Select the Type of variable from the pull-down list; also indicates the type of data that
can be assigned to the variable.
442
VERICUT Help
Options:
Number — The variable is a real number. For example, value ="0010" => the numeric value
"10" is used.
Text — The variable is a text string. For example, value ="0010" => the text string "0010" is
used.
Number Array — The variable is an array. When Number Array is selected as the variable type,
an Array Dimension field and an array table are added to the Add Variable window.
Array Dimension — Use to specify the dimensions of the array that the variable represents,
for example "3, 4", for a 3x4 array.
Array Table — Use the array table to initialize specific array values if desired. VERICUT
automatically adjusts the size if the array based on the dimension set with Array Dimension
and all values are defaulted to 0.
443
VERICUT Help
NOTES ON USING ARRAY VARIABLES:

1. Non-numeric variables must be defined in the Words window to enable proper parsing.
2. In the Variables window, Type must be set to Array, and Array Dimension must also be
defined.
3. In the MCD file, the syntax must be of the form: name[2,1]=5 where the square brackets
are left and right precedence, and indexes are separated by commas. Each index can also be
defined as an expression. For example: name[#7+1,1]=3.
4. Array variables are also supported in the Word Address window as a variable to be set.
Non-numeric variables can not be used with override values.
String Array — The variable is an array. When String Array is selected as the variable type, an
Array Dimension field and an array table are added to the Add Variable window.
Array Dimension — Use to specify the dimensions of the array that the variable represents, for
example "3, 4", for a 3 x 4 array.
automatically adjusts the size if the array based on the dimension set with Array Dimension and
all values are defaulted to 0.
444
VERICUT Help
Frame — When Frame is selected as the variable type, a frame table is added to the Add
Variable window.
Frame Table — Use the array table to initialize specific frame values if desired.
445
VERICUT Help
Frame Array — The variable is an array. When Frame Array is selected as the variable type, an
Array Dimension field and a frame array table are added to the Add Variable window.
Array Dimension — Use to specify the dimensions of the array that the variable represents,
for example "3, 4", for a 3x4 array.
automatically adjusts the size if the array based on the dimension set with Array Dimension
and all values are defaulted to 0.
446
VERICUT Help
Axis — the variable is an axis name. For example, $P_AXN1 ="X" => the text value "X" is used.
Use to define Siemens 840D AXIS variables.
Axis Array — The variable is an array. Use to define Siemens 840D AXIS array variables. When
Axis Array is selected as the variable type, an Array Dimension field and an array table are
added to the Add Variable window.
example "3, 4", for a 3x4 array.
Integer — Integer variables are similar to Number variables (described above), except that their
input values are automatically be rounded to the closest integer value. For example, a value of
1.3 will be rounded to the integer 1. A value of 1.9 will be rounded to the integer 2.
Integer Array — The variable is an array. When Integer Array is selected as the variable type,
an Array Dimension field and an array table are added to the Add Variable window.
447
VERICUT Help
example "3, 4", for a 3 x 4 array.
Integer Array variables are similar to Number Array variables (described above), except that
their input values are automatically be rounded to the closest integer value.
If you try to access a non-existing variable (a variable that does not show up in variables
window) VERICUT outputs an error message saying; "un-initialized variable, defaulting to zero".
OK — Adds the variable to the Variables List in either the Variables window or the Control
Variables window, depending on where Variable Add window was accessed from. The variable
is also added to the Word Format window and then closes the Variable Add window.
Apply — Adds the variable to the Variables List in either the Variables window, or the Control
Variables window, depending on where Variable Add window was accessed from. The variable
is also added to the Word Format window and then leaves the Variable Add window open
enabling you to specify additional variables.
Cancel — Closes the Variable Add window without adding the variable to the Variables List in
either the Variables window, or the Control Variables window, depending on where Variable
Add window was accessed from.
448
VERICUT Help
Variable Modify window
The Variable Modify window is accessed by selecting Variable Modify in the Variables window,
right mouse button shortcut menu or the Control Variables window, right mouse button
shortcut menu. The features in this window enable you to modify the characteristics of an
existing array variable.
449
VERICUT Help
See Variables window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on the Variables
window.
See Control Variables window in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
the Control Variables window.
The Variable Modify window will look different depending on the "type" of array variable
(Number Array, String Array, or Frame Array, Axis Array, or Integer Array) being modified.
The features available in the Variable Modify window are identical to the ones described above
under Variable Add window for Types: Number Array, String Array , Frame Array, Axis Array,
and Integer Array.
450
VERICUT Help
Search Variable window

Accessed by selecting Utilities menu > Search in the Variables window, the Search Variable
window enables you to search for all occurrences of a particular variable. This functionality is
very similar to the Search For window: Variables tab accessed from the G-Code Processing
window, Utilities menu > Search option.
Specify the variable to be searched for by selecting from the list or by typing the variable name
in the text field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering capability to help
you Search variables. As you enter text characters in the text field, the list of variables is
automatically filtered to show only those variables that match the entered text string.
(Clear Text) — Use this icon to clear the text from the text field.
After selecting the variable that you want to search for, use the icons at the bottom of the
window to find the First, Next, or Previous occurrence of the variable in the Variables window.
451
VERICUT Help
When VERICUT has found the last occurrence of the specified variable in the Variables window,
pressing (Search Next) again will cause VERICUT to search for the specified variable in the
G-Code Processing window (ref. G-Code Processing window in the Configuration menu section
Help). If one or more occurrences of the specified variable is found in the G-Code Processing
window, VERICUT will automatically open the G-Code Processing window and highlight the
specified variable.
(Search First) — After specifying the variable to search for, use this icon to search for the
first occurrence of the variable in the Variables window.
(Search Next) — Use this icon to search for the next occurrence of the specified variable in
the Variables window. Repeat using this icon to Search additional occurrences.
(Search Previous) — Use this icon to search for the previous occurrence of the specified
variable in the Variables window.
(Close) — Use this icon to close the Search Variable window.
See the example in the Using the Search Variables window, also in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help p for additional information.
452
VERICUT Help
Using the Search Variables window

To find all occurrences of a specific variable:
1. Click on (G-Code Variables) in the Toolbar, or select Project menu > G-Code >
Variables in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the Variables window.
2. In the Variables window menu bar, select Utilities menu > Search to display the Search
Variables window.
3. In the Search Variables window, select the name of the variable that you want to find from
the Variables list. You can also type the name of the variable in the Variable text field.
Tip: Use the automatic filtering capability to help you find variables. As you enter text
characters in the text field, the list of variables is automatically filtered to show only those
variables that match the entered text string.
4. Press (Search First). VERICUT will find and highlight the first occurrence of the specified
variable in the Variables window Variables List.
5. Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence of the specified variable in the
Variables window.
Continue pressing (Search Next) to find all occurrences of the specified variable in the
Variables window.
When VERICUT has found the last occurrence of the specified variable in the Variables
window, pressing (Search Next) again will cause VERICUT to search for the specified
variable in the G-Code Processing window (ref. G-Code Processing window in the
Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). If one or more occurrences of the specified
variable is found in the G-Code Processing window, VERICUT will automatically open the G-
Code Processing window and highlight the specified variable.
Continue pressing (Search Next) to find additional occurrences of the specified variable
in the G-Code Processing window.
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence of the specified variable.
6. When finished with your search, press the (Clear Text) icon to clear the Variable text
field, and then repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to search for another variable or press the
(Close) icon to close the Search Variable window.
453
VERICUT Help
Output Options
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > G-Code > Output Options
Project menu > Settings > G-Code Outputs tab
Project menu > G-Code Outputs
The Output Options option opens the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab which has
features that enable you to configure the settings required to support the processing of G-Code
NC program files.
See Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
454
VERICUT Help
APT Settings
Locations:
Project menu > Settings > APT Settings tab
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > APT Settings
Project menu > APT Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The APT Settings option opens the Settings window, APT Settings tab enabling you to configure
the settings required to support the processing of APT-CLS NC program files.
See Settings window, APT Settings tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
455
VERICUT Help
Section window
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Section
View menu > Section
Toolbar short cut:
456
VERICUT Help
Planes
The features on the Section window enables you to define section planes through a VERICUT
model in a workpiece view. You can also define a section wedge through a VERICUT model in a
workpiece view.
You can Section with any (reasonable!) number of Planes and Wedges, in any orientation.
Section plane and section wedge orientation and distance are described with respect to the
active coordinate system.
Restore the original model by clicking anywhere off the part in the workpiece view, or click
Restore on the Section window. You can continue cutting on the sectioned model, or restore
the original (un-sectioned) model. Machine cuts are applied to the entire model regardless of
how it is displayed after sectioning.
that the Section window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics area are to be
in the File menu > Preferences window.
Section on mouse pick — Immediately sections the model through the point selected with
mouse. The wedge section and section plane orientation is controlled by the characteristics of
the plane or wedge record that is highlighted in the Section Planes and Wedge Section tables.
457
VERICUT Help
Tip: You can also position the plane or wedge representation of the highlighted section record
by clicking on the representation and dragging it to the desired location. The resulting section
display is constantly updated as you move the plane/wedge representation.
Plane Section table:

On — Toggles on and off to activate/deactivate defined section planes in the table. Only the
active planes will be used to determine the portion of the model that will be displayed after the
section planes are applied.
NOTE: The on/off state of this toggle is only used in conjunction with the Section button
below. It has no effect on which plane/direction vector is displayed in the active workpiece
view. The plane /direction vector that is displayed in the active workpiece view is determined
by the plane that is highlighted in the section planes table.
Pl Type — Specifies section plane orientation. Standard options include six orientations that are
perpendicular to axes of the active coordinate system (POS X, POS Y, POS Z, NEG X, NEG Y and
NEG Z). POS and NEG define the direction of the normal vector of the section plane with
respect to the coordinate system axis. The normal vector points away from the portion of the
part that will be displayed when it is sectioned. Using the Custom option, you can define a
section plane at any orientation by entering the I, J, and K components of the desired normal
vector in the Normal I J K fields (see below).
Normal I, Normal J, Normal K — Specifies the I J K coefficients of a vector perpendicular to the
desired section plane. These values are automatically set when Pl Type is set to one of the six
standard options and cannot be changed. When Pl Type is set to Custom, the values can be
changed to define the direction vector of the desired section plane. Values entered do not have
to define a unit vector (vector length=1). Any combination of values can be entered to define
the normal vector.
Distance — Distance along the normal vector (see above), measured from the active coordinate
system origin to the desired location of the section plane. Key in a value or pick a point on the
model with the mouse. A positive value is measured along the specified normal vector; a
negative is measured in the reverse direction.
Start / End — When selected, defines the starting and ending planes for automatic sectioning.
(See the "Automatic sectioning features" section below).
The following actions can be accomplished by either selecting the associated button in the
Section window or selecting it from the pull-down that results from using the right mouse
button while the cursor is in the section planes table.
Add — Use to add additional section planes to the table.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted section plane from the table.
Reverse — Use to reverse the direction vector of the highlighted plane to display the opposite
side of the model after sectioning.
458
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Right-click in the Section Planes Table to display the following menu:
These features provide the same functionality as those described above.
Automatic sectioning features:

This group of features displays a series of animated sectioned views, beginning with the plane
identified as the "Start" plane (Start selected), and ending with the "End" plane (End selected).
The start plane direction vector must point away from the end plane and the end plane vector
must point away from the start plane for proper automatic sectioning to take place. Automatic
section cuts are equally spaced.
Cuts — The number of equally spaced section planes that will automatically be applied
between the start and end section planes.
Delay — Seconds of delay to pause between each automatic section cut display.
Auto Section — Begins the automatic sectioning sequence. To interrupt an automatic
sectioning, press (Pause), or click in the VERICUT main window and press the Escape <Esc>
key.
Wedges
Wedge Section table:

On — Toggles on and off to activate/deactivate defined wedge records in the table. Only the
active wedge sections will be used to determine the portion of the model that will be displayed
after the wedge sections are applied.
NOTE: The on/off state of this toggle is only used in conjunction with the Section button
below. It has no effect on which wedge section planes are displayed in the active workpiece
view. The wedge section planes that are displayed in the active workpiece view is determined
by the wedge section record that is highlighted in the Wedge Section table.
A Wedge is defined by its Edge (point, direction), Start Vector, and the Angle. Start Vector
defines the 1st (Start) half-plane of the wedge – this is the half-plane going through the Edge
and the Start Vector. The 2nd (End) half-plane of the Wedge is obtained by rotating the Start
half-plane by the Angle around the Edge in the CW direction looking along the Edge. See the
picture below.
459
VERICUT Help
Sectioning removes material between the 2 half-planes of the wedge.

Graphically, the selected Wedge is displayed as 2 rectangles representing the 2 half-planes of
the wedge. The start/end half-planes are drawn in solid/dashed lines, respectively.
Edge Point — use to specify a point on the wedge edge.

Edge Direction — use to specify the direction of the wedge edge.
Start Vector — use to specify a vector defining the starting plane of the wedge.
Angle (deg) — use to specify an angle, in degrees, measured from the Start Vector.
Color — use to specify a color for the wedge section from the pull-down list.
460
VERICUT Help
The numerical fields in the Wedges table can be typed in, or filled in by the mouse picking. The
mouse pick values go to the selected cell of the Wedges table highlighted in yellow.
Shortcut: Right-click in the Wedges Table to display the following menu:
These features provide the same functionality as those described above.
Section — Applies the active section plane(s) in the Section planes table and the active wedge
section records in the Wedge table to the model. The resulting "sectioned" model is displayed
in all workpiece views.
Restore — Restores the solid model from the sectioned display. The sectioned model is for
display purposes only. When cutting has been performed with a sectioned view displayed, the
results are the same as if the entire model was displayed.
Close — Closes the Section window.
461
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Inspection
Inspection Sequence
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Inspection
Analysis menu > Inspection
Toolbar short cut:
The "end product" of VERICUT's Inspection module is a report, or set of reports, which define
the inspection operations to be performed on a part. Typically these check measurements
would be made while the part is still on the machine, perhaps after each tool's activity, to
ensure that the job is proceeding as intended. If a discrepancy is found, no additional time will
be wasted on subsequent machining. The format of the reports can be extensively customized,
but there are two essential elements for each inspection report; a picture showing the features
to be inspected, and a table giving the required dimensions and tolerances for each. The
following four pairs of pictures and tables illustrate the inspection requirements after cutting a
simple part with each of four tools.
462
VERICUT Help
After the first tool, we simply check the remaining stock thickness at the "floor" of the part.
463
VERICUT Help
After the second tool, we check the floor thickness at each end of the part, and the "wall"
thickness of the two webs.
464
VERICUT Help
After the third tool, we re-check the web thicknesses.
465
VERICUT Help
And after the fourth and final tool, we specify many more measurements to be made. Note the
use of datum planes for defining distance and angle dimensions, and how the feature identifiers
tie the dimensions to the appropriate datum planes.
466
VERICUT Help
The reports can be generated as HTML files that reference GIF and JPEG images, or as PDF files
that have all the images embedded. But let's take a look at how you would start to use the
Inspection Sequence module. You will find it in VERICUT's menus at Analysis menu >
Inspection. When you trigger it from a project file that has not previously exercised the module,
a dialog similar to the following should appear.
You can re-size this window if you wish, re-arrange the columns in the table and set their
widths. Your preferences will be remembered next time you display the dialog. If you let the
cursor hover over any of the icons in the toolbar, a short tip will be displayed to explain its
function. While all the functions are also accessible in the dialog's menus, it is likely that you
will find the toolbar to be more convenient. In addition, each of these features is also available
by clicking with the right mouse button in the inspection window to display the following right
mouse button shortcut menu:
467
VERICUT Help
Following are the icons and a brief description of their intended use.
Clears the table, ready to start a new inspection sequence.
Prompts for and opens an existing inspection sequence file. Such files typically have the
extension ".VcInspect". Note that you can also open the ten most recently accessed files
more directly from the "File" menu.
Saves the current inspection sequence to a file. You may be prompted to select a file
name if the current sequence was not derived from an existing file. There is also a "Save
As" option in the "File" menu.
Opens another dialog to assist in identifying the features on the stock that were cut by
each tool.
Inserts a row in the table for a wall thickness measurement. You will be prompted to pick
the wall in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a floor thickness measurement. You will be prompted to pick
the floor in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a hole diameter measurement. You will be prompted to
pick the hole in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a datum plane. You will be prompted to pick the plane in a
workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a distance from a datum plane. You will be prompted to
pick the relevant feature in a workpiece view. It does not make sense to use this type of
measurement without a datum plane.
Inserts a row in the table for an angle between a selected plane and a datum plane. You
could use this type of feature without a datum plane if it is obvious which angle is to be
measured.
Inserts two or three rows in the table for the coordinates of a position. You could use
this type of feature to specify the location of the center of a hole, relative to the
currently active coordinate system. You will be prompted to pick the hole in a
workpiece view.
468
VERICUT Help
Inserts a row in the table for a hole depth measurement. You will be prompted to pick
the hole in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a radius measurement. You will be prompted to pick the
hole or cylinder in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a surface finish requirement. You will be prompted to pick
the surface in a workpiece view.
Inserts a row in the table for a tabulated note. You will be prompted to pick a reference
location in a workpiece view.
Changes the measuring instrument in the currently selected row to "Probe".
Changes the measuring instruments in all rows to "Probe". Typically this would be used
just before the next icon.
Causes the Inspection Programming dialog to be displayed, and transfers any features
that have "Probe" as their measuring instrument, to the extra dialog.
Allows you to re-position the selected row's symbol in a workpiece view. The row's
dimension will be recalculated, and if the tolerance value was automatically generated,
it will also be updated.
Deletes the selected row from the table.
Refreshes all the rows. This is equivalent to using the re-positioning icon, , for each
row and picking all the same screen positions. It causes each dimension and non-edited
tolerance to be recalculated, and is explained in more detail at the end of this
document.
Opens the Save Inspection Sequence window enabling you to specify the
/path/filename for the inspection report file to be created. Selecting Save generates and
displays an HTML inspection report.
Opens the Save Inspection Sequence window enabling you to specify the
/path/filename for the inspection report file to be created. Selecting Save generates and
displays a PDF inspection report.
Exits the dialog. If you have made any changes to the table and not saved the file, you
will be prompted to do so before the window closes.
469
VERICUT Help
File Organization
An inspection file retains all the information needed to reproduce the dialog's table and the
corresponding symbols on the workpiece for a single report. Thus in the example at the start of
this document there are four inspection files involved. A file is not the report itself. A report is
generated on demand and will typically have the extension ".htm" or ".pdf". Unless you
explicitly specify a file name when you first save an inspection sequence, the dialog will offer
the project file name, with its extension changed to ".VcInspect". If there will be several
sequences for a part, it is suggested that you adjust the file names to include suffixes "1", "2", ...
or "A", "B", ... or perhaps tool identifiers.
When you request that a report be generated, the report file name will be the same as the
inspection sequence file name, with the extension changed to ".htm" or ".pdf". For a PDF file,
any pictures required in the report will be embedded, which makes it trivial to pass the report
around electronically. For an HTML file, the pictures are generated as separate GIF and JPEG
files, making it more difficult to keep all the pieces together, unless you place all inspection files
and reports for a part in their own folder, perhaps named using the part's identifier.
Inserting Rows
For measurements that do not require a datum plane, such as a wall or floor thickness, adding
the required information to the table is very simple. Pick the relevant icon from the toolbar, for
example for a floor thickness, and then pick the location where the measurement is to be
made on a workpiece view. A row will be appended to, or inserted in, the table and a feature
symbol will be placed on the view. Next to the symbol will be an identifier that is repeated in
the table. You can adjust the view orientation while it contains numerous feature symbols, but
the orientation is going to be used for a report's picture eventually, so it makes sense to find
one, sooner rather than later, that exposes all the features to be checked.
Let's look at each entry in the feature's row. Assuming you haven't already re-arranged the
columns, the first one on the left contains the name of the workpiece view. An inspection
report can have a page for each of several views if you need more than one to illustrate each
470
VERICUT Help
required feature. The second column contains the same symbol as appears in a view. The third
contains a very brief description of the type of feature, "Floor Thickness" in this case. If you click
on this entry, you will find that you can adjust the feature type, perhaps making it a "Wall
Thickness" instead. When you do so, the symbol will be updated to reflect the new choice. You
can also enter the name of a different feature type that we have not thought to offer. If you do
so, there will be no corresponding symbol in the second column.
In the fourth column is an automatically generated feature identifier. If the first feature
inserted in a table does not require a datum plane, its identifier will be "A1". The next will be
"A2", then "A3", etcetera. If you were to edit the last one in this sequence, making it "B1", then
subsequently appended rows would continue the new sequence, with "B2", "B3", and etcetera.
If you then inserted a row after the last "A" feature, its identifier would continue the "A"
sequence.
The fifth column indicates the type of instrument to be used to check the dimension. It will
initially show a suitable instrument type, such as "Ultrasonic" for a floor thickness and "Snap
Caliper" for a wall thickness. Similar to feature types, you can edit the instrument type entry by
picking from the drop-down list of instrument types, or by entering your own description. Also
you can use the (Use probe for the selected feature) icon or the (Use probe for all
features) icon if probe cycles are to be used to measure the features on the machine.
The sixth column is used to specify the expected dimension. For many feature types, but not all,
this column will be populated by the system. For our floor thickness example, behind the
scenes we use X-Caliper's abilities to determine the distance through the stock from the
position you picked to the next "air". The same calculation is performed for wall thickness. And
if you pick a cylinder when locating a diameter or radius feature, we can obviously fill in the
column easily. Things are a little more complicated when a datum plane is involved, which we
will get to soon. Whether the column is populated automatically or not, you can always adjust
the value.
If the dimension value is generated by the system when you insert the row, the seventh column
is filled too. There are hard-coded default tolerance values, or you can supply your own. A
sample file contains an explanation of the flexibility available and the format to be used. If the
tolerances generated do not reflect the values you want, at least they give you initial entries to
edit, with the advantage that you don't need to know how to keyboard enter a plus/minus
symbol. If you need non-symmetric tolerances you could enter "+0.010/-0.008" for example, or
you could employ DIN standards by typing an "H" number. Incidentally, if you do want to type a
plus/minus symbol, on a Windows system try holding down the "Alt" key while you hit the
numeric pad keys "0", "1", "7" and "7", then release the "Alt" key. Cut and paste is easier to
remember.
We'll cover the eighth, Geometric Tolerance, column towards the end of this document.
The ninth column is where an inspector will enter the measurements he makes to generate a
record of the part's compliance. Probably this will occur on paper copies of the reports
generated by this module. But if your company is on the bleeding edge of digital record keeping
and you make VERICUT available to your inspectors (which we whole-heartedly encourage)
they could enter the values directly into the table.
471
VERICUT Help
The tenth and last column is filled automatically, if possible, with the identifier of the tool that
cut the feature. You can edit this entry if you wish. Note that you can re-order the columns and
your arrangement will be remembered.
Datum Planes
For measurements that require a datum plane, such as distances and angles, it makes sense to
add a row for the plane first, followed by rows for one or more measurements to be taken from
the plane. Pick the relevant icon, , and a position in a workpiece view. Note that in the
fourth column, the datum plane's identifier is the next available single letter, and that columns
5 through 10 are shaded to show that they are unused. You can alter the identifier if you wish,
but it is strongly suggested that you stay with the single letter convention. You can also edit the
third column's entry if you wish to use "Right Face" or something more descriptive.
Now pick the icon for appending a distance row, , and pick another feature in a workpiece
view. If you pick a plane which is parallel to the datum plane, then there is no doubt about the
intention and we can automatically populate the sixth, dimension column. If you pick some
other type of feature, such as the closest edge of a cylindrical boss, then the value we insert
may not be exactly the one you need, and you would need to edit it. Repeat the steps in this
paragraph to add other measurements from the datum plane. You will see that the identifiers
all start with the plane's letter and are numbered consecutively.
For angle dimensions, , the value will be in degrees, is always acute, and is the angle
between the surface normal at the picked position and the datum plane's normal. If the feature
selected is not a plane, the angle may well be approximate and will need to be edited. To type a
degree symbol on a Windows system, hold down the "Alt" key while you hit the numeric pad
keys "0", "1", "7" and "6", then release the "Alt" key. No default tolerances are provided for
angle measurements, unless you supply the "rules" in an external file.
472
VERICUT Help
See Using Datum Planes in the Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Coordinate Systems
When you insert position rows, , their dimension values are in the active coordinate
system. No other type of measurement is dependent on a coordinate system. When the first
position is selected with a particular coordinate system active, the 2 or 3 rows for the position's
coordinates are preceded by a row containing the name of the active coordinate system, and
an identifying letter.
You can use more than one coordinate system, and each will be allocated a unique letter, which
will be used in the coordinate system's row and all rows with positions to be measured in that
system. If you adjust the name of a coordinate system elsewhere in VERICUT it would make
sense to change it in the sequencing table too. If you adjust the location or orientation of a
coordinate system, you can update the dimensions and tolerance on the associated position
rows by refreshing, , the table. If you want to switch some position measurements from one
coordinate system to another, you could can edit the system's name in the table and then use
the refresh, , capability.
Coordinate system axes are reproduced in the inspection report pictures, provided they are
visible in the workpiece views on the screen. The coordinate system rows in the report's tables
are the only connection between system names and feature identifiers.
Modifying a Symbol Position
When you generate a report for an inspection sequence, with the Export HTML icon, or the
Export PDF icon, the pictures are based on the workpiece views, but the feature identifiers
are moved to the top and bottom edges. Primarily this is to reduce the chance of an inspector
missing one in a cluttered picture. But the algorithm involved is not foolproof when it comes to
ensuring that the lines from the features to their identifiers do not cross. When you see the
473
VERICUT Help
pictures you may decide to re-orient their views and try again, or to move some of the symbol
positions.
To move a row's symbol, select the row then pick the modification icon, . You will be
prompted to select a new position in a workpiece view. If the system is able to re-calculate the
dimension at the new position, it will do so and update the value in the sixth column of the
table. So if, for example, you move a wall thickness symbol from one wall to another, or if you
move it along a wall of non-uniform thickness, you should expect the value to change. The
tolerance value will be altered if it was generated by the system. A tolerance value which you
entered, either by editing a supplied value or by typing into any empty cell, will not be adjusted.
Such tolerance values are shown in italics.
If you move a datum plane's symbol, dimensions that depend on that plane will not be
updated. However if you move a distance or angle symbol, provided there is a datum plane
with an identifier which is the first letter of the symbol's identifier, the system will try to update
the individual dimension value.
Geometric Tolerance
In the eighth column of an inspection sequence table you can place geometric tolerance
specifications. If you do not use the widely misinterpreted GD&T standard, you can shrink this
column's width to zero in the table, and omit it completely from your report template. But if
your company uses geometric tolerancing, select a row that requires it and either select "Edit
Geometric Tolerance" from the "Edit" menu, or right-click on the table and pick the same
option from the pop-up menu. The following dialog will be presented.
In the twenty-four white boxes you can assemble the elements of a geometric tolerance
specification. For a symbol, such as for "Position", simply click on the required icon amongst
the characteristics and modifiers. The symbol will be placed in the box that currently has the
yellow border, which will automatically step to the next box. The same is true for a separator,
or vertical bar. To enter text in a box, either a tolerance value or a datum plane reference, just
type into an empty box, then hit the "Tab" or "Enter" key to step to the next one. The "Text"
button can be used to convert an existing symbol or separator box to text. As you define the
474
VERICUT Help
elements of the geometric tolerance specification, a picture is continually updated at the top of
the dialog.
You can use one of the icons to shift elements to the right and make space for another
one. The icons will delete an element and shift the remaining ones to the left. Once you
are satisfied with the assembly of elements, click on the "OK" button. The dialog will disappear
and the picture of the geometric tolerance box will be placed in the inspection table.
If the combination of dimension and geometric tolerance specification in this illustration

doesn't make sense, we apologize. We prefaced this section by saying that the standard was
widely misinterpreted, and count ourselves among the confused. The software does not
attempt to enforce compliance.
See Add Geometric Tolerance Data in the Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project
Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
475
VERICUT Help
Refreshing All Rows

When a design is changed slightly, it is possible that some of the features previously selected
for inspection will be altered. The icon is intended to help in this situation by identifying
which features have changed. It is equivalent to selecting the repositioning icon, , for each
row of the table, and picking the same screen location for each feature. Let's take a wall
thickness measurement as an example. The row's icon was on the side of the wall in the prior
design. When we trigger the refresh capability, the software will determine the thickness of the
current workpiece directly under the icon's screen position. This thickness will be inserted in
the "Dimension" column of the feature's row, and the tolerance value will be updated too,
provided it was not previously edited by the user.
To highlight features that have changed significantly, the color of the dimension cells in the
table may be changed to one of the following shades, . The lightest shade
indicates a change greater than 10%, the next 20%, 30% and 40%, up to the darkest shade,
which indicates a change of 50% or more. You can clear a colored cell simply by selecting its
row. To illustrate the refresh function, we will again use the example at the start of this
document. After cutting the part with the second tool, we inspected two wall and two floor
thicknesses.
If we now proceed to cut with the third tool, the sides of the walls are finish machined.
476
VERICUT Help
We can now trigger the refresh function with the icon. Because the wall thickness icons B1
and B2 are still on the sides of the walls, their dimensions will be adjusted.
Note that the color of the changed dimension cells has been set to the third shade, because the
values have been reduced by 33%.
Inspection Analysis menu, Feature Identifier

It is common practice to inspect the first and last feature cut by each tool. Measurement of the
first feature will confirm that the correct tool is loaded, and measurement of the last will check
for excessive tool wear. However, on a complex part it may not be obvious where these two
477
VERICUT Help
features are located. The dialog accessed from this menu item is designed to help. It displays a
table with a row for each tool that currently has an "imprint" on the cut stock.
When you select a row, the background of the cell containing the tool's identifier is changed to
match its "cut color",
and two markers will appear in the workpiece view to indicate the first (1) and last (2) features
cut by the tool. The colors of these two features will also be adjusted to match the color in the
dialogs drop-down palette.
478
VERICUT Help
You can use the and buttons to walk through the features cut by the tool until you find
the ones that are suitable for inspection. It is not necessary to close the feature identifying
dialog while you add rows and features to the inspection sequence table.
See Using the Feature Identifier in the Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project
Colors
By default, feature icons are black, both in the workpiece views and the reports. And the icon
corresponding to the selected row of the table will be orange in its workpiece view, to help you
locate it quickly. These on-screen colors can be adjusted, without affecting the appearance of
the reports. Under the "Colors" menu there are three choices;
In front
The color you choose here will be used for any feature icon on a face of the cut stock whose
outward normal points out of the screen.
Behind
The color you choose here will be used for any feature icon on a face of the cut stock whose
outward normal points into the screen. Having such icons in the view when you generate a
report is not good practice, as it may not be clear to the reader where the feature's
measurement is to be taken. If you do produce a report with features on the "back side" of the
stock, they are marked with an open circle instead of the usual filled circle. The following two
479
VERICUT Help
pictures illustrate this with a workpiece view and report. Icons "in front" are black, those
"behind" are pink, and the selected one is green.
480
VERICUT Help
Selected
The color you choose here will be used for the single feature icon corresponding to the selected
row in the sequencing table.
See Using Inspection Sequence in the Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree
481
VERICUT Help
Inspection Programming
The "end product" of VERICUT's Inspection module is a report, or set of reports, which define
the inspection operations to be performed on a part. Typically these check measurements
would be made while the part is still on the machine, perhaps after each tool's activity, to
ensure that the job is proceeding as intended. If a discrepancy is found, no additional time will
be wasted on subsequent machining. This goal can be reached quickly if the inspection is
performed on the machine and by the machine, using one or more probes.
To explain the Inspection Programming module we will start with the third set of checks from
the Inspection Sequencing document. This consisted of two wall thickness measurements after
the third tool had cut the part. Note that the active coordinate system is "Machine Origin".
We use the (Use probe for all features) icon to override the measuring instrument for
both features, so that they will be probed.
482
VERICUT Help
Next we use the (Program probe cycles) icon to request the Inspection Programming
dialog. Before we see it, we will be prompted to select a post-processor file, which typically has
the extension ".VcPost". For this explanation we shall use a post-processor developed for
Renishaw probe cycles on a Fanuc controller. The name of the file is "RenishawFanuc.VcPost".
This file can be found in the \samples\ folder of your VERICUT installation.
You can view the post-processor content, and edit it if you wish, by clicking the (Edit post-
processor) icon. Development of a post-processor for probe cycle programming is documented
elsewhere (refer to CGTech PostProcessor Help section of VERICUT Development Tools, located
in the CGTech Help Library).
Enter a /path/filename for the probe NC program to be created in the Probe program text field,
or click on the (Browse for probe program) icon and use the Probe program file selection
window to specify the \path\filename. Note that a default name is supplied for the G-Code
program that will be generated, using the current inspection file name with the ".VcInspect"
extension replaced by "-Probe.mcd" if you do not specify one.
The two blank pink cells in the table, in the "Cycle" column, need to be filled with the name of
the cycles we wish to use. Because the two webs are in the machine's YZ plane, we can use a
"WallX" cycle to measure each of them. Double-click on one of the pink cells and select the
cycle name from the drop-down list. Then repeat for the second feature. The cycle names
presented in the drop-down lists are defined in the post-processor, and will vary from one
target machine to another.
483
VERICUT Help
The numbered columns in the table contain the names of parameters for the cycles. Each probe
cycle row is preceded by an "Approach" row, and followed by a "Retract" row. The table starts
with an "Initialization" row and ends with a "Termination" row. All of these rows can have
associated parameters in the numbered columns. Pink cells represent mandatory parameters.
Once they are edited to contain numeric values, the color disappears. Optional parameters are
not colored initially. You can hover over any parameter cell to see the parameter name
displayed as a tool-tip, even after it contains a numeric value.
You will see that the X and Y parameters in the two "Approach" rows have been filled in
automatically. These points will be in the center of the selected webs, as required by the probe
cycle, but the Z parameter, while mandatory, has not been supplied. This is because the
approach should place the probe near to, but not on, the workpiece. To see the value of Z on
top of the first web, right-click on the pink Z cell in the first "Approach" row, and pick "Z" from
the pop-up menu.
484
VERICUT Help
Then edit the value to increase it by a couple of millimeters. This should leave the probe above
the web at the end of the approach. Repeat for the second web's approach.
Before we can run the post-processor to turn the table content into a G-Code program, we
need to eliminate all the pink by supplying numeric values for the mandatory parameters, and
perhaps supply some of the optional parameters too. Parameter names and their interpretation
are a function of the post-processor and the probe cycles available on the target machine. So
the following is only representative of the process.
To fill the "WidthX" cells we can right-click on each and select "Nominal Dimension" from the
drop-down menu. The value is derived from the feature's "Dimension" column in the original
Inspection Sequencing table.
485
VERICUT Help
We should fill the "Tolerance" cells for each feature in the same way, even though these
parameters are optional. Right-click on each Tolerance cell and pick "Maximum Tolerance" from
the drop-down menu. The value comes from the "Tolerance" column of the original table.
The remaining two pink cells are "Depth", which is the distance down the web, from the top,
that the probe should move before stepping inward to make the measurement. There is no
suitable value available in the drop-down menu, so we can just edit these cells to supply one.
Now that all the pink is gone, what else may we need before generating the probe cycle
program? The "Initialization" row contains three parameters, "Clearance", "FeedRate" and
"SlowRate". These parameters appear in "Approach" and "Retract" rows too, so they can be
adjusted for each feature if necessary.
"Clearance" is the height above the approach point where the probe should be armed, and is
also used after each cycle for the retract distance.
"FeedRate" is the normal feed rate which will be used for the first part of each approach.
"SlowRate" is the much slower speed of the probe once it is armed, for which the probe cycles
supply a default if necessary. So let's provide blanket "Clearance" and "FeedRate" values in the
"Initialization" row.
486
VERICUT Help
What's missing? It would be faster to use rapid motion before each approach. So right-click on
the first "Approach" cell and pick "Insert Rapid" from the drop-down menu. Note that you can
also insert moves at the normal feedrate if you wish to avoid obstacles.
Replace the pink cell contents with suitable coordinates and repeat for the second web if you
think a rapid motion over this short distance would make sense.
487
VERICUT Help
There is an alternative more automated way to insert motion between the retract move away
from one feature and the approach move to the next. If you wish to explore this, right-click on
the second "Rapid" cell you have just inserted and pick "Delete" from the drop-down menu.
When you right-click on an "Approach" cell that has a "Retract" cell immediately above, the
drop-down menu contains three choices.
Picking "Insert Transit" will cause insertion of from one to four "Move" and "Rapid" rows. The
"Transit" parameters along the bottom edge of the dialog are relevant. The "Retract Direction"
is an IJK vector which determines how the probe is moved away from the workpiece. In this
sample the probe is moved parallel to the Z axis. The "Bottom Clearance" defines how close the
tip of the probe can come to any obstacle between the features. The workpiece itself, and any
fixtures are considered potential obstacles. The "Side Clearance" defines how close the side of
the probe is allowed to get to the obstacles. If you have a long probe and not much variation in
workpiece height, you could use a side clearance just a little bigger than the probe's radius.
With a short probe or a workpiece surrounded by large fixtures, it would be wiser to use a value
generously bigger than the radius of the probe's holder. The first row inserted will be a "Move"
to raise the probe above the prior feature by at least the bottom clearance. Then a "Rapid" row
488
VERICUT Help
will raise it further to clear any other obstacles that may exist with the feature, another "Rapid"
will transit the probe, and a final "Rapid" will drop the probe back to within the bottom
clearance of the next feature.
Some suites of probe cycles have the ability to save the result of one measurement and
compare it with other measurements in a later cycle. For example, if you wanted to check that
the Z dimension of one surface matched that of another, you could save the result of probing
the first surface, and then on the second one use a cycle that compared the new probed Z with
the stored value. While it doesn't make sense for this example, as we won't be comparing the
webs with each other, if the post-processor is written to handle this capability, you could insert
a "Save" after any cycle by right-clicking on the corresponding "Retract" cell and picking "Insert
Save" from the pop-up menu.
We are now ready to click the (Run post to generate program) icon to run the post-
processor and create the Probe NC program. Hopefully this will be an anti-climax, with no error
messages in additional debugging dialogs.
When the post-processor finishes processing, the resulting G-Code program displays in the NC
program editor window enabling you to view, and perhaps edit it.
489
VERICUT Help
You can also view, or edit, the Probe NC program at any time by clicking on the (Edit probe
program) icon to display the probe program in the NC program editor window.
The comments in the probe NC program are derived from the second, third and fourth columns
of the table for each feature. Note that the first block number in the program comes from the
entry box at the top of the Inspection Programming dialog. So you could use a much
larger value if you intend to cut and paste the program into the one that cuts the part.
You can simulate the probe cycle program by clicking on (Simulate probe program) in the
Inspection Programming window. This will append the new program's file name to the end of
the NC Programs list in the Project Tree. It will also make all other NC programs in the list
"inactive".
490
VERICUT Help
You should then be able to click on VERICUT's (Step / Subroutine Options) or, (Play /
Start-Stop options) icon to start the simulation.
491
VERICUT Help
Customizing VERICUT Inspection

The behavior of the Inspection Sequencing dialog can be customized in a number of ways by
defining one or more text files and having an environment variable,
CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES, which points to one of them. You can define the default
tolerance values that are placed in the dialog's table for each type of measurement. You can
define the default instruments to be used for each feature type, and specify additional
instrument types. And you can supply your own icons for the feature types, which will be used
in the dialog and the generated reports.
Default Tolerances
There are hard-coded default tolerances values that conform to DAN 11304. When you add or
modify a row in the sequencing dialog's table, and the nominal dimension is supplied by the
system, a default tolerance will be generated too. If DAN 11304 isn't what you need, you can
supply your own set of defaults, with different strategies for each feature type if necessary. A
sample file contains an explanation of the flexibility available and the format to be used.
If you only need one set of default tolerances for all the workpiece types that you deal with,
then the environment variable, CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES should specify the fully
qualified path and name of the sole text file. If you need more than one set of default
tolerances, then the environment variable should reference a file that contains a list of the files
that each contain a set of default tolerances. For example, if you machine parts for two
customers, and one of them is still using a mix of units, you may have three default tolerance
files;
CustomerA-Inch-Tols.txt
CustomerA-MM-Tols.txt
CustomerB-MM-Tols.txt
In this case, you would create one more file containing a list of these files. You might call it
"Inspection-Tols.list" and it would contain something like the following;
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerA-Inch-Tols.txt
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerA-MM-Tols.txt
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerB-MM-Tols.txt
492
VERICUT Help
The environment might be defined in the batch file you use to invoke VERICUT, and could be as
follows;
set CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES=C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\Inspection-Tols.list
If you have more than one default tolerance file set up this way, then there will be a drop-down
choice list in the bottom-right corner of the Inspection Sequencing dialog.
If you pick a different file of default tolerances while there are some rows in the table, then any
tolerance values that have not been edited will be recalculated on the basis of the selected
file's content.
Instruments
Each cell in the Instrument column of the Inspection Sequencing dialog's table contains a drop-
down list of instrument types.
493
VERICUT Help
Some of these instruments are the defaults for some of the feature types. Thus each floor
thickness row will, by default, suggest use of an ultrasonic depth gage, and each wall thickness
row will mention a snap caliper. You can extend this list of instruments, or provide a separate
list for each type of feature.
If you have several default tolerance files for different customers, units or types of parts, you
can customize the lists of instruments in each of them. If you have no default tolerance file and
use the hard-coded DAN 11304 values, but need different instruments, then you can create a
file containing just the customizing text for the instruments.
Following is a sample of such text;
Instrument Wall Micrometer

Instrument Wall Ultrasound
Instrument Wall Caliper
Instrument Floor Ultrasound
Instrument Plumb Line
Instrument Ruler
Each line starts with the keyword "Instrument". If the next word in a line is one of the feature
types; Wall, Floor, Diameter, Length, Angle, Position, Depth, Radius or Finish, then you must
provide similar lines for all the instruments that can be used to measure that feature type. The
instrument name that follows the type in the first such line becomes the default for that
feature type. The list of instruments for a feature type will replace the entire "un-customized"
drop-down list. If no customizing lines are provided for any feature type, the "standard" list will
still be used. If the second word on a line is not one of the feature types, then everything after
the "Instrument" keyword is just the name of an additional instrument type which will be
appended to the "standard" list. So with the sample customizing text shown above, "Plumb
Line" and "Ruler" will be appended to the list for all feature types except "Wall" and "Floor". On
the other hand, the drop-down list for a "Wall" feature will be much shorter.
494
VERICUT Help
Note that "Probe" is offered as an instrument type regardless of whether the list has been
customized. This ensures compatibility with the Programming capability.
Icons
By default there are several 24x24 pixel, monochrome icons used in the left-most column of the
Inspection Sequencing and Inspection Programming dialogs' tables and the Inspection Reports,
which denote the type of feature to be measured.
Feature Type Icon File Name

Wall Thickness InspectW.gif
Floor Thickness InspectF.gif
Hole Diameter InspectD.gif
Datum Plane InspectS.gif
Distance InspectL.gif
Angle InspectA.gif
Position InspectP.gif
Hole Depth InspectH.gif
Radius InspectR.gif
Surface Finish InspectT.gif
Note InspectN.gif
If these icons are not to your taste, you can redesign them, but making them larger is not
recommended. The icon files are distributed as part of the file, CGTech.jar, which you will find
in the "classes" folder under your CGTech installation folder. A "jar" file is a variation of a "zip"
file which commonly available file compression programs can manipulate.
We suggest that you make a copy of CGTech.jar, calling it "CGTech.jar.zip" so that a program
such as WinZip can recognize it. Then you can use WinZip to extract the icon files that you wish
to adjust. Note that in each icon file, the white background color is actually transparent. You
will need to use a paint program that supports GIF Version 89a, to handle the transparency.
When you have adjusted, or entirely replaced the image, save it with the same file name and
use WinZip again to update the compressed version in CGTech.jar.zip. When you have changed
all icons necessary, delete the original CGTech.jar and rename CGTech.jar.zip to take its place.
495
VERICUT Help
Using VERICUT Inspection
Inspection and the Machining Process

The following illustrates how Inspection could be used to define inspection requirements
throughout the machining process to ensure that no time is wasted on subsequent machining
operations on a part that is already out of tolerance. In this simple example, critical features
have been documented for inspection after cutting is completed with each of four tools.
1. After cutting with the first tool, the remaining stock thickness at the "floor" of the part is to be
checked before starting the next cutting operation.
496
VERICUT Help
After cutting with the second tool, the floor thickness at each end of the part, and the "wall"
thickness of the two webs must be checked before starting to cut with the next tool.
497
VERICUT Help
2. After cutting with the third tool, the two web thicknesses are checked before continuing.
498
VERICUT Help
3. And after cutting with the fourth and final tool, the final inspection requirements have been
documented. In the Inspection Sequence table, notice how datum planes are used for defining
distance and angle dimensions, and how the feature identifiers tie the dimensions to the
appropriate datum planes. (see Using Datum Planes, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help)
499
VERICUT Help
Using Inspection Sequence

Use the procedures described below to create a table of features to be inspected and use it to
generate an inspection report:
Prepare to use Inspection Sequence:

1. Open the project file and simulate the cutting of the part in the usual way, displaying it in a
"workpiece" view.
2. Click (Inspection) on the Toolbar, or click Analysis menu > Inspection to display the
Inspection window.
Add inspection records to the table:

1. In the Inspection window, select one of the Edit menu > Insert "feature type" Row options:
Insert Wall Thickness Row
Insert Floor Thickness Row
Insert Hole Diameter Row
Insert Datum Plane Row
Insert Distance Row
Insert Angle Row
Insert Position Rows
Insert Hole Depth Row
Insert Radius Row
Insert Surface Finish Row
Insert Note Row

You can also click on the appropriate icon in the Inspection window Toolbar, or right click in the
inspection table area and select from the menu that displays. Certain feature types, like
500
VERICUT Help
Distance and Angle, are measured relative to a datum plane. See Using Datum Planes in the
Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, for
examples of how datum planes are used with these feature types.
2. Pick the corresponding feature in the Workpiece view.

Notice that the record gets added to the table and an inspection feature marker, with the
corresponding "identifier", displays in the workpiece view. Also notice that the first seven
columns, and the last column, of information are automatically filled in by VERICUT. Any of the
fields can then be edited. (See Inspection Sequence in the VERICUT Inspection section, also in
the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information)
3. Repeat the above steps to add additional inspection records to the table. The new record will
be added after the highlighted record.
Delete records from the table:

1. In the Inspection window, click anywhere in the record so that it becomes highlighted.
2. Select Edit menu > Delete Row or, click on (Delete Row) in the Inspection window Toolbar,
or right click in the inspection table area and select Delete Row from the menu that displays.
As more records are added to the table, and feature markers (icon/identifier) are added to the
workpiece view, it may become necessary to change the order of the records in the inspection
table or to reposition the feature markers. This can be accomplished by:
Change the order of the records in the inspection table:

1. Click on the button located to the left of each row and "drag" it to the desired position in the
table.
Reposition the inspection markers:

1. In the Inspection window, click anywhere in the record corresponding to the inspection marker
so that it becomes highlighted.
2. Select Edit menu > Modify Marker Location or, click on (Modify Marker Location) in the
Inspection window Toolbar, or right click in the inspection table area and select Modify Marker
Location from the menu that displays.
501
VERICUT Help
3. Click on the new position for the inspection marker in the Workpiece view. The inspection
marker will move to the selected position.
If VERICUT is able to re-calculate the dimension at the new position, it will do so and update the
value in the Dimension column of the table. For example, if you move a wall thickness symbol
from one wall to another, or if you move it along a wall of non-uniform thickness, you should
expect the value to change. The Tolerance value will not be altered.
If you move a datum plane's symbol, dimensions that depend on that plane will not be
updated. However if you move a distance or angle symbol, provided there is a datum plane
with an identifier which is the first letter of the symbol's identifier, VERICUT will try to update
the individual dimension value.
Save the inspection sequence:

In the Inspection window, click on File menu > Save to display a file selection window. You can
also click on File menu > Save As, or click on (Save File) in the Inspection window Toolbar,
to display the file selection window. Use the Save Inspection Sequence file selection window
that displays to specify the /path/filename for the inspection table file (.vcinspect) to be saved.
Create the inspection report:

1. In the Inspection window, select File menu > Create Report > report format, where report
format is Text, HTML, or PDF, or click on (Export HTML) or (Export PDF) in the
Inspection window Toolbar.
VERICUT will create the inspection report that will include the inspection records and a
modified view with the identifier "flags" positioned automatically. A Text (containing only the
inspection records), or HTML file containing the inspection report will display in your default
browser (such as Internet Explorer). A PDF file containing the inspection report will display in
your Adobe Reader.
It will also automatically be saved in the folder where you saved the Inspection Sequence table.
If you create the inspection report before the Inspection Sequence table is saved, the Save
Inspection Sequence window will display enabling you to specify the /path/filename for the
inspection report file (.htm).
When you generate a report for an inspection sequence, with the (Export HTML) or
(Export PDF) icons, the picture is based on the active workpiece view, but the inspection
markers are moved to the top and bottom edges. Primarily this is to reduce the chance of an
inspector missing one in a cluttered picture. The algorithm involved is not foolproof, when it
comes to ensuring that the lines from the features to their identifiers do not cross. When you
502
VERICUT Help
see the resulting picture you may decide to re-orient the view and try again, or to move some
of the inspection markers.
See Introduction to VERICUT Reports in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more
information.
See Using VERICUT Reports also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for more
information.
503
VERICUT Help
Using Inspection Programming

Use the procedures described below to create a probe NC program and use it to simulate a
probing inspection sequence in VERICUT.
Prepare to use Inspection Sequence:

1. Open the VERICUT project file.
Inspection window.
3. If one, or more, inspection sequence files have previously been saved for the project file, use
Inspection window File menu > Open to display the Open Inspection Sequence file selection
window and use it to select the inspection sequence file that you want to create a probing NC
program for.
If no inspection sequence files have been created for the project file, use the procedures
described in the Using Inspection Sequence in the Using VERICUT Inspection section, also in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help to create an inspection sequence file.
4. In the Inspection window, select Program menu > Use probe for all features or, click on
(Use probe for all features) in the Inspection window Toolbar, or right click in the inspection
table area and select Use probe for all features from the menu that displays to override the
current measuring instruments with probes.
5. In the Inspection window, select Program menu > Program probe cycles or, click on
(Program probe cycles) in the Inspection window Toolbar, or right click in the inspection table
area and select Program probe cycles from the menu that displays.
Use the Post-processor file selection window that displays to specify the post-processor file that
is to be used. Once you specify the Post-processor file, then Open the Inspection Programming
window will display. In the Inspection Programming window, you can view the post-processor
content, and edit it if necessary, by clicking on (Edit post-processor).
6. Enter a /path/filename for the probe NC program to be created in the Probe program text field,
or click on the (Browse for probe program) icon and use the Probe program file selection
window to specify the \path\filename.
7. In the Inspection Programming window, Notice that all of the rows can have associated
parameters in the numbered columns. Pink cells represent mandatory parameters which must
be defined before a probe program can be created. Once they are edited to contain numeric
values, the color disappears. Optional parameters are not colored initially. You can position the
504
VERICUT Help
cursor over any parameter cell to see the parameter name displayed as a tool-tip, even after it
contains a numeric value.
See Inspection Programming in the VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help for specific examples of how to manipulate the various fields.
8. Once you have addressed all of the mandatory pink cells and updated any of the optional cells
that you want to, you are now ready to click the (Run post to generate program) icon to
run the post-processor and create the Probe NC program. Hopefully this will be an anti-climax,
with no error messages in additional debugging dialogs.
When the post-processor finishes processing, the resulting G-Code program displays in the NC
program editor window enabling you to view, and perhaps edit it.
The comments in the probe NC program are derived from the second, third and fourth columns
of the table for each feature. Note that the first block number in the program comes from the
entry box at the top of the Inspection Programming dialog. So you could use a much
larger value if you intend to cut and paste the program into the one that cuts the part.
9. You can now simulate the probe cycle program by clicking on (Simulate probe program) in
the Inspection Programming window. This will append the new program's file name to the end
of the NC Programs list in the Project Tree. It will also make all other NC programs in the list
"inactive".
10. You should now be able to click on VERICUT's (Step / Subroutine Options) or, (Play /
Start-Stop Options) icon to start the simulation.
See Inspection Programming in the VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help for specific examples of how to manipulate the various fields.
505
VERICUT Help
1. What's missing? It would be faster to use rapid motion before each approach. So right-click on
the first "Approach" cell and pick "Insert Rapid" from the drop-down menu. Notice that you can
also insert moves at the normal feedrate if you wish to avoid obstacles.
2. Replace the pink cell contents with suitable coordinates and repeat for the second web if you
think a rapid motion over this short distance would make sense.
506
VERICUT Help
3. Some suites of probe cycles have the ability to save the result of one measurement and
compare it with other measurements in a later cycle. For example, if you wanted to check that
the Z dimension of one surface matched that of another, you could save the result of probing
the first surface, and then on the second one use a cycle that compared the new probed Z with
the stored value. While it doesn't make sense for this example, as we won't be comparing the
webs with each other, if the post-processor is written to handle the capability, you could insert
a "Save" after any cycle by right-clicking on the corresponding "Retract" cell and picking "Insert
Save" from the pop-up menu.
4. We are ready to click on (Run post to generate program) to run the post-processor.
Hopefully this will be an anti-climax, with no error messages in additional debugging dialogs. To
see the resulting G-Code program, and perhaps edit it, click on (Edit probe program) to
display the probe program in a text editor window.
507
VERICUT Help
Using the Feature Identifier
Use the procedure described below to create an table of features to be inspected and use it to
generate an inspection report:
1. Open the project file and simulate the cutting of the part in the usual way, displaying it in a
"workpiece" view.
Inspection window.
3. In the Inspection window, select Analysis menu > Feature Identifier or, click on (Feature
Identifier) icon in the Inspection window Toolbar to display the Inspection Feature Identifier
window.
4. In the Inspection Feature Identifier window Cutter Table, select the cutter used to cut the
feature that you are interested in identifying so that it becomes highlighted.
5. Using either First Feature (Step backward/Step forward), or Last Feature

(Step backward/Step forward), depending on which end of the feature list you want to start,
step through the features associated with the selected cutter until the desired feature is
identified. Use the feature to add an inspection record to the table in the Inspection window.
See Inspection Analysis menu, Feature Identifier in the Inspection Sequence section, also in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
508
VERICUT Help
Add Geometric Tolerance Data
In the Geo. Tolerance column of an inspection table you can place geometric tolerance (GD&T)
specifications. Use the following procedure to do that.
In the Inspection window:

1. In the Inspection table, select the row that you want to add the geometric tolerance
specification to. It should become highlighted.
2. Select Edit menu > Edit Geometric Tolerance (or right-click in the Inspection table and select
Edit Geometric Tolerance from the pop-up menu) to display the Geometric Tolerance window.
In the Geometric Tolerance window:

Use the twenty-four white element boxes to assemble the elements of a geometric tolerance
specification. Notice that the first element box is highlighted, indicating that it is the "active"
element box. Add symbols, separators, or text to create a geometric tolerance specification.
1. Click on the Characteristic symbol , for "Position". Notice that the symbol is entered in the
first element box and the second element box automatically becomes active. Also notice that
the symbol is displayed at the top of the window as it will look when added to the Inspection
table.
Tip: Hold the cursor over a characteristic symbol for a text reminder of what the symbol
represents.
509
VERICUT Help
2. Click on the Separator button . Notice that the separator is added to the second element
box and to the display at the top of the window. The third window automatically becomes
active.
3. Click on the Modifier symbol , for "Diameter". Notice that the symbol is entered in the third
element box and to the display at the top of the window and the fourth element box
automatically becomes active.
Tip: Hold the cursor over a Modifier symbol for a text reminder of what the symbol represents.
4. Type 0.50 in the fourth element box. When you hit the "Enter" key the text is added to the
element box, the display at the top of the window and makes the next element box active.
5. Continue adding symbols, text or separators until you are finished defining the geometric
tolerance specification.
The following "Usage Notes" should also be helpful:
Click on (Insert), located under any element box, to shift the contents to the right to insert
an additional element box.
Click on (Delete), located under any element box to delete it and shift the remaining
element boxes to the left.
Click on the Text button, , to convert an existing Characteristic or Modifier symbol, or

Separator box to a text box.
When you have finished defining the geometric tolerance specification it should look similar to
the sample below.
510
VERICUT Help
Click OK to add the geometric tolerance specification shown at the top of the Geometric
Tolerance window to the Inspection table and dismiss the Geometric Tolerance window.
The new geometric tolerance entry is shown in the sample Inspection table below.
NOTE: If the combination of dimension and geometric tolerance specification in the above
example doesn't make sense, we apologize. The intent was to illustrate how to use the various
features in the Geometric Tolerance window. The features in the Geometric Tolerance window
provide the tools to assemble a geometric tolerance specification but does not attempt to
check the validity of the specification created, or enforce compliance to any "standard".
See Geometric Tolerance in the Inspection Sequence section, also in the Project Tree section of
511
VERICUT Help
Using Datum Planes
For measurements that require a datum plane, such as distances and angles, it makes sense to
insert a datum plane record to the Inspection table first, followed by one or more inspection
records requiring measurements relative to the datum plane.
1. In the Inspection window, select Edit menu > Insert Datum Plane Row or, click on (Insert
Datum Plane Row) in the Inspection window Toolbar, or right click in the inspection table area
and select Insert Datum Plane Row from the menu that displays.
Notice that in the Identifier column of the datum plane record, the datum plane's identifier by
default becomes the next available single letter, and the remaining columns are shaded to
show that they are unused. You can modify the identifier if you wish, but it is strongly
suggested that you stay with the single letter convention. You can also edit the entry in the
Feature column if you wish, to use something more descriptive, like "Top Face", rather than
"Datum Plane".
2. Now click on (Insert Distance Row) in the Inspection window Toolbar, or use any of the
method described in step 1, to add a Distance row to the Inspection table. Then select the
feature in the "Workpiece" view that represents the feature to be measured. If you pick a plane
which is parallel to the datum plane, then there is no doubt about the intention and VERICUT
can automatically populate the Dimension column. If you pick some other type of feature, such
as the closest edge of a cylindrical boss, then the value VERICUT inserts may not be exactly the
one you need, and you would need to edit it.
3. Repeat the above procedure to add additional inspection records requiring measurements from
this datum plane. Notice that as you add inspection records that their identifiers all start with
the datum plane's identifier letter, and are numbered consecutively.
For angle dimensions, , the value will be in degrees, is always acute, and is the angle
between the surface normal at the picked position and the datum plane's normal. If the feature
selected is not a plane, the angle may well be approximate and will need to be edited.
To type a degree symbol, °, on a Windows system, hold down the Alt key while you hit the
numeric pad keys 0, 1, 7 and 6, and then release the Alt key. No default tolerances are provided
for angle measurements, unless you supply the "rules" in a custom inspection tolerance file.
512
VERICUT Help
See Datum Planes in the Inspection Sequence section of VERICUT Inspection, also in the Project
513
VERICUT Help
Creating a Custom Inspection Tolerance File
The following sample file contains an explanation of the flexibility that is available, and the
format to be used, for creating and using a custom inspection tolerance file.
NOTE: Blank lines and Font changes in the following sample file are only used to enhance
readability.
! Sample millimeter default tolerances for VERICUT Inspection.

! Any line that starts with an exclamation point is a comment.
! To have VERICUT use a default tolerance file like this one,

! the environment variable CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES must
! specify the fully qualified path and file name.
! It is assumed that default tolerances will be specified

! for mutually exclusive ranges of nominal dimension values.
! Different types of dimensions can have independent sets of
! default tolerances, so the values used for hole diameters
! can be different than those used for wall thicknesses.
! Tolerances for a dimension range can be different upper
! and lower values, a single "+/-" value, or a single text
! string such as "H10".
! The format of a default tolerances file is best explained

! by illustration. Note that parameters in the file are NOT
! comma delimited. Numeric values can use the "," for the
! decimal point character, so parameters are space delimited.
! The following table defines default tolerances for wall
! and floor thicknesses.
514
VERICUT Help
Wall Floor
0.5 0.2 -0.1
30.0 0.3 -0.2
120.0 0.5 -0.4
400.0 0.8 -0.6
1000.0
! The left column defines the ranges of nominal dimensions.

! In this example the first range is from 0.5mm to 30.0mm.
! Any dimension smaller than 0.5mm will not have tolerances
! defined. The middle and right columns contain the upper
! and lower tolerance values. Thus a wall or floor which is
! nominally 20mm thick will be given tolerances values of
! "-0.1 / +0.2". Note that the values in the left column are
! in increasing order, and that the last row contains just
! the top end of the last range. In this case, any dimension
! greater than 1 meter will not have default tolerances
! supplied.
! The eight categories for dimension types are; Wall, Floor,

! Diameter, Length, Angle, Position, Depth and Radius. Only
! the English language versions of these keywords will be
! recognized. It is not necessary to define tolerance sets in
! a file for all these dimension types. There are hard-coded
! values in VERICUT for any type except "Angle" that is not
! specified in the active file, or for all types if no such
! file is in use. Default tolerances are NOT supplied for
515
VERICUT Help
! angle dimensions unless a suitable file is employed.
! The hard-coded millimeter tolerances are as specified in this

! second sample table. They correspond to DAN 11304.
Length Position Depth Radius
0,5 0,2
30,0 0,3
120,0 0,5
400,0 0,8
1000,0 1,2
2000,0 2,0
4000,0 3,0
8000,0 4,0
12000,0 5,0
16000,0 6,0
20000,0
! Note that in this table only one tolerance value is supplied

! for each range. This will be presented as a "+/-" tolerance.
! Rows with three values (bottom of range, upper tolerance,
! lower tolerance) can be mixed with rows having two values
! (bottom of range, +/- tolerance) in the same table.
! Our last sample will use a third format for some rows, with
! a textual tolerance specification instead of a numeric value.
516
VERICUT Help
! Apologies to our German customers if the sample doesn't make

! sense.
Diameter
0,5 H10
10,0 H12
30,0 -0,2 0,3
60,0 0,4
120,0
! Note that for a hole diameter, when both an upper and lower
! tolerance are provided, the negative value can be in the
! middle column if it is your company's convention that the
! tolerances be in the order "maximum material condition" and
! "least material condition".
See Customizing VERICUT Inspection in the VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help for additional information on customizing VERICUT Inspection.
517
VERICUT Help
Using a Custom Inspection Tolerance File
There are hard-coded default tolerances values that conform to DAN 11304. When you add or
modify a row in the sequencing dialog's table, and the nominal dimension is supplied by the
system, a default tolerance will be generated too.
If DAN 11304 isn't what you need, you can supply your own set of defaults, with different
strategies for each feature type if necessary. Creating a Custom Inspection Tolerance File also in
the Using VERICUT inspection section contains an explanation of the flexibility available and the
format to be used to create custom default inspection files.
If you only need one set of default tolerances for all the workpiece types that you deal with,
then the environment variable, CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES should specify the fully
qualified path and name of the sole text file.
If you need more than one set of custom default tolerances, then the environment variable
should reference a file that contains a list of the files that each contain a set of default
tolerances. For example, if you machine parts for two customers, and one of them is still using a
mix of units, you may have three default tolerance files;
CustomerA-Inch-Tols.txt
CustomerA-MM-Tols.txt
CustomerB-MM-Tols.txt
In this case, you would create one more file containing a list of these files. You might call it
"Inspection-Tols.list" and it would contain something like the following;
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerA-Inch-Tols.txt
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerA-MM-Tols.txt
C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\CustomerB-MM-Tols.txt
The environment might be defined in the batch file you use to invoke VERICUT, and could be as
follows;
set CGTECH_INSPECTION_TOLERANCES=C:\CGTech\Inspection\Defaults\Inspection-Tols.list
If you have more than one default tolerance file set up this way, then there will be a drop-down
choice list in the bottom-right corner of the Inspection Sequencing dialog.
See Customizing VERICUT Inspection in the VERICUT Inspection section, also in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help for additional information on customizing VERICUT Inspection.
518
VERICUT Help
Die Sinking Simulation
Locations:
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Die Sinking
Analysis menu > Die Sinking Simulation
The features on the Die Sinking Simulation window enable you to select electrodes and
simulate the die sinking process.
Simulation Display Features

Stock — Enables you to select the Stock component that is to be used for the simulation. Select
the name of the Stock component from the pull-down list.
Display Stock — use to specify whether or not to display the Stock model during the
simulation. The stock model can be displayed as Solid or Translucent. The stock model remains
displayed during the Burn process unless Display Burned Material is toggled on. In this case the
519
VERICUT Help
Stock model will be turned off when you select Burn and only the material removed by the
simulated EDM burn will be displayed at the end of the burn process.
Display Electrodes — use to specify whether or not to display the Electrode model(s). Electrode
models can be displayed as Solid or Translucent. Electrode models are always toggled off after
Burn is selected.
Display Burned Material — use to specify whether or not to display the material that is
removed by each electrode during the simulation. The "burned material" can be displayed as
Solid or Translucent.
Animate — use to specify whether or not to display electrode animation during the "burn"
process. Use the slider bar to control the speed of the animation. If toggled off, displays only
the result of the burn process.
Electrode Table
Table of electrodes selected for use during Die Sinking Simulation.
On — Toggles on and off to activate/deactivate individual electrodes in the table. Only the
active electrodes will be used during the "burn" process.
Electrode — The name of the electrode component.
Overburn — this column enables you to specify an "overburn" value for each electrode. The
"overburn" value is applied as an offset to each electrode during "burn" processing.
Volume Removed — this column displays the volume of material that was removed by each
active electrode during the burn process. The "volume removed" value is updated in the table
as each electrode completes the burn process.
Click and drag the button in the first column of each row to change position of an electrode in
the table. "Active" electrodes will be processed sequentially starting at the top of the table.
Add — use to add additional electrodes to the table. Select the electrode to be added from the
pull-down list then select Add. The pull-down list will contain all electrode components found in
the Component Tree that are not currently in the table.
Delete — use to remove the highlighted electrode from the table.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Electrode table to display a menu containing Add and
Delete. These provide the same functionality described above. Clicking on Add will display the
pull-down list of available electrodes that you can choose to add to the table.
Set All — use to activate "all" electrodes in the table.

Clear All — use to deactivate "all" electrodes in the table.
520
VERICUT Help
Die Sinking Simulation features

Compare With Design — displays the AUTO-DIFF window enabling you to compare the stock
model at the end of the burn process with the design model.
Save Model — enables you to save the stock model that resulted from the burn process as a
VERICUT solid (.vct) file.
Apply — Use to save the current Die Sinking Simulation settings.

Burn — Use to start the "burn" process.
Restore — Restores the stock model to the state it was in prior to the "burn" process.
Report — Use to create a Die Sinking Simulation Report.
Click here to see a sample Die Sinking Simulation Report
Close — Closes the Die Sinking Simulation window.
521
VERICUT Help
CNC Machine Branch
Right-click on a CNC Machine branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
MDI — Opens the MDI window enabling you to manually enter and process blocks of G-Code
data.
Expand All Children — Expands all branches of a CNC Machine branch.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches of a CNC Machine branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure CNC Machine menu displays at the bottom
of the Project Tree.
Back to the Project Tree Menu table.
522
VERICUT Help
MDI window
Locations:
Project Tree > CNC Machine Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > MDI
Project menu > MDI
Toolbar short cut:

The features on the MDI window enable you to manually enter and process blocks of G-Code
data. The MDI, or "Manual Data Input" function provides a quick and easy way of verifying that
the machine/control combination responds to G-Code data commands as expected.
523
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar
File Menu
The features in the File menu enable you to import, export or print NC blocks created in the NC
Blocks table.
Options:
Open — Opens a file selection window enabling you to specify a text, or .mcd, file to populate
the NC Blocks table.
Save — Saves (updates) an existing text (.mcd) file with the current NC blocks.
Save As — Opens a window enabling you to save the contents of the NC Blocks table to a new
file.
Print — Opens a window enabling you to print the NC Blocks table.
Close — Closes the MDI window.
Edit Menu
The features in the Edit menu enable you to manipulate blocks in the NC Block table.
524
VERICUT Help
Options:
Copy — Use to copy the highlighted block(s) in the NC Block table to the Windows clipboard.
Paste — Use to paste a copied block(s) after the highlighted block in the NC Block table.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted block(s) from the NC Block table
Clear All — Use to clear all blocks from the NC Block table.
Main Window
Remove Material — Use to activate/de-activate VERICUT material removal.
When toggled "On" (check), material removal as well as machine motion will be displayed.
When toggled "Off" (no check), only machine components are positioned to specified location
and no cutting is performed. This is useful for positioning the tool at specific location before
cutting, or to verify the actual tool position before executing new blocks.
SubSystem ID — Use this feature to specify which machine subsystem the G-Code data
command is to be applied to.
Machine Motion Jog

The Machine Motion Jog features enable you to incrementally jog the position of the VERICUT
machine in the same way that you can jog the real machine.
Axis — Indicates the current axis that the "Jog" feature will apply to. To change the current axis,
simply select it from the pull-down list. The Axis list includes all of a machine’s moving axes as
well as the Tool Axis. The name used for a particular Machine axis will be shown in parentheses
as shown in the example below:
525
VERICUT Help
(Machine CSYS) / (Local CSYS) — This icon toggles between machine coordinate
system and local coordinate system enabling you to specify the coordinate system that you
want the Jog motion to be relative to. Left click on the icon to switch between modes.
When in local coordinate system mode, it is assumed that the axis motion follows the format of
“Axis + Position”. For example, if current axis is the “U” axis and its position is “10mm”, then
the motion command is “U10”. If your control uses a different format than described above, an
undesirable simulation will occur.
When in machine coordinate system mode, jog motion bypasses the control, so the local
coordinate is not updated. When you switch from machine coordinate system mode to local
coordinate system mode while jogging, the previous “local” position in the control will be used,
which does not reflect the current local position.
The current axis position (linear or rotary), with respect to the Axis "zero" position, is displayed
in text field next to Axis.
Use the (increase) and (decrease) buttons to jog the machine the specified "Jog
Distance" each time you press them. You can also press and hold the button down to
repeatedly move the specified distance.
Jog Distance — Use to set the distance the axis position will move by a single click on
increase/decrease buttons.
NOTE: Moving the machine axes with Machine Motion Jog will not produce a block in the NC
Blocks table until the Save Location as NC Block button is pressed.
Machine Travel Limits Slider

The Machine Travel Limits Slider enables you to move a specified machine axis through the
entire range of travel. As you move the slider in the MDI window, you will see the specified axis
moving in a Machine or Machine/CutStock view in the graphics area. Collisions will be displayed
in the graphics area. Collision and other error messages will be displayed in the Logger.
The numbers in the four boxes, from left to right, represent the following:
The value of the Minimum Travel Limit
The distance between the Minimum Travel Limit and the current axis position.
The distance between the Maximum Travel Limit and current axis position.
The value of tht Maximum Travel Limit.
526
VERICUT Help
The Minimum and Maximum Travel Limit values are automatically set for the selected axis
based on the travel limit settings on the Machine Settings window: Travel Limits tab.
The axis that you want to move is specified using the Axis feature describe above in the
Machine Motion Jog Section.
Use the slider to move the specified axis. You can click on the slider and drag it to the left
(toward the Minimum travel limit) or to the right (toward the Maximum travel limit). You can
also click on the slide bar to the left (toward the Minimum travel limit) of the slider or click on
the slide bar to the right (toward the Maximum travel limit) of the slider. Each time that you
click on the slide bar, the slider will move approximately 10% of the total distance between the
travel limits in the selected direction.
The slider will become disabled in the following situations:
The travel limit specified for the axis on the Machine Settings window: Travel Limits tab is
invalid or does not exist
Travel limit record, on the Machine Settings window: Travel Limits tab, for the specified axis has
the Ignore option is toggled “on” (checked).
The specified axis is the Tool Axis.
In each situation, the row above the slider (with the four boxes) will be replaced with a message
explaining the reason why the slider is disabled.
Move to Pick Location

The Move to Pick Location features enable you to position a tool component at a specific point
by picking on stock, or machine models and components, displayed in the VERICUT Graphics
Area.
Pick Point — enables you to position the tool at any point in a Workpiece or Machine
view. VERICUT will use the selected point and a vector normal to the surface of model or stock
at the selected point. Moving the cursor in the view over model will display the point and
vector associated with the current position. Click the left mouse button to select the point.
Pick Vertex — enables you to easily position a tool on one of the six key points
associated with the triangles representing the faces of an uncut model (machine, fixture
components or stock model before cutting). For each triangle, the points consist of the three
vertices and the midpoint of each of the triangle's three sides. VERICUT selects the point closest
to your mouse pick. Moving the cursor in the view over model will display the nearest triangle
side and point. Click the left mouse button to select the point. VERICUT will use the selected
point and a vector normal to the surface of model or stock at the selected point. If the mouse
pick is over the cut stock, Pick Vertex works in the same way as the Pick Point feature
described above.
527
VERICUT Help
Pick Vertex Example
Pick Circle — enables you to position a tool at a point along the axis of a cylinder. This
feature requires two picks. The first pick designates the plane that the point is to be in. The
second pick is the cylindrical feature whose axis the point lies along. VERICUT will use the point
where the axis of the cylindrical feature intersects the plane. The associated vector is defined
by the cylindrical axis.
Pick Model Origin — enables you to position the tool at a point represented by the origin
of a model's coordinate system. The vector is defined as the model coordinate system's Z-axis.
Placing the cursor over any model will display the model's coordinate system. Select the model
using the left mouse button.
Pick CSYS Origin — enables you to position a tool at a point represented by the origin of
any displayed coordinate system. VERICUT uses the coordinate system axis closest to the pick
point as the vector. Move the cursor near one of the coordinate system's axis and an arrow
representing the vector will display along the axis. Click with the left mouse button select the
origin point and vector.
528
VERICUT Help
Pick CSYS Origin Example

Notice the cursor positioned near the Y-axis of the CSYS and the arrow displayed on the axis
indicating that it will be used as the vector.
Pick Component Origin — enables you to position the tool at a point represented by the
origin of a component's coordinate system. The vector is defined as the component coordinate
system's Z-axis. Placing the cursor over any component will display the component's coordinate
system. Select the component using the left mouse button.
Pick Next Side Plane — when active, this feature enables you to select a plane to
position the side of the tool to. Activate "Pick Next Side Plane" mode by:
1. Use the Pick Base Plane feature, described below, to select a base plane.
2. Toggle Modal Base Plane, described below, "On".
3. Set Tool Orientation, described below, to Tangent.
4. Position the tool using any of the above methods. At this point the Pick Next Side Plane
icon should be active.
Note that the order in which these steps are carried out is important.
After completing the above steps, the tool is positioned tangent to the surface at the pick point.
This tangent plane can be driven along for the next motion if the next pick is in "Pick Next Side
Plane" mode. After the motion to the "next side plane" is completed, the previous "side plane"
is replaced by current "next side plane" and tool is ready to be driven to the next "Pick Next
529
VERICUT Help
Side Plane" location. You can continue driving the tool along in this manner as long as you
continue selecting "Pick Next Side Plane" locations.
Tool Orientation — Use to specify the tool vector orientation in relation to the picked vector
(using any of 6 methods specified above). Choose either Normal, or Tangent.
Normal specifies that tool vector is set to the pick vector value. Tangent specifies that tool
vector will be aligned tangent to the plane created by crossing last tool vector and pick vector.
The tool position will be offset by maximum tool radius from the plane. Using a Tangent
orientation with the Pick Point method will position the tool tangent to a wall by using one
mouse click on the wall. Tool Tangent Offset can be applied in addition to tool radius offset.
Tool Axis Offset — Use to specify a value representing a distance offset the tool along the tool
axis vector. A positive value moves up the tool axis from the tool pick point. A negative value
moves down the tool axis from the pick point.
Tool Tangent Offset — Use to specify a value representing an offset of the tool in radial
direction (perpendicular to the tool axis), in addition to tool radius, when Tangent tool
orientation is active. This offset can be used to prevent scratching a part when positioning tool
tangent to wall (positive value), or for cutting a wall (negative value).
Orient Tool Axis — Use to change tool axis orientation. When the box is checked and machine
has 5 axis capabilities, the tool axis will be set based on pick vector value and Tool Orientation
method. If the box is not checked, the tool axis vector remains unchanged while changing to
the position to pick point.
Alternate — Use this button to orient the tool using alternative rotary axes solution. When tool
axis vector is resolved on a pick, the shortest route for rotary axes is applied. To find what the
alternative solution is, use this button. This button is active only after a change to the tool axis
vector. Subsequent use of this button toggles from one possible solution, to another.
Modal Base Plane — Use this check box to specify a modal base plane is to be used as the
reference for Tool Axis Offset. If box is checked, tool positions for all pick generated motions
are offset relative to the specified modal base plane. Use Pick Base Plane, described below, to
select the plane. If the box is unchecked, tool positions for all pick generated motions are offset
relative to current pick point.
Pick Base Plane — Use to select a modal base plane (see above) to establish a common
base for Tool Axis Offset. This icon is in same group with other Move to Pick Location icons
(deactivates the others when pressed) but it is a one shot pick (becomes inactive after each
successful pick).
Always Save Location — Use this feature to simplify NC block generation. When the check box
is checked, an NC block is created in NC Block Entry text field for every resolved pick location
and is saved in NC Blocks List. If the box is not checked, you must use the Save Location to List
button, at each pick location, to create an NC block and store it in NC Block List. This feature is
not applicable when Machine Motion Jog is being used since a single jog does not create any
NC Block information to save.
530
VERICUT Help
Save Location to List — Use to create an NC block from the current pick location and saves it in
NC Block List.
NOTE: The Save Location to List button does not execute the block in NC Block Entry text
field. It simply creates the NC block and stores it in the NC Block List.
In Machine Motion Jog mode, it is important to create NC blocks for each desired machine
position before jogging the machine to the next location. In this case, after using Save Location
to List to create the block and store it in the NC Block List, make sure that the newly added
block is highlighted and then press Play Selected NC Blocks to process the NC block and update
the control with the machine component's current location.
In Move to Pick Location mode, the machine moves to the pick location (at the mouse click)
and this location is processed through the control, and all other possible translations, before
actual machine axes are defined and positioned.
NC Blocks List — the list contains a sequence of NC blocks that have been created. The list
enables you to select a block, or sequence of blocks, in order to delete, copy and paste, or
execute the selected block(s). A right mouse click displays a pop-up menu with features that
enable you to edit, or execute, blocks in the list. Edit the content of a block by double clicking
on the block to put it in "edit" mode, then make the necessary changes.
Shortcut: Right-click in the NC Block List to display the following menu:
NOTE: Copy, Paste, Delete and Clear All are described in the Edit Menu section above. Play
Selected NC Blocks and Play MDI to End are described below.
Manipulating blocks in the in the NC Block List:

1. Use the "Shift" key to select a consecutive range of blocks. Click on the first block in the
range so that it becomes highlighted, and then while holding down the "Shift" key, click on
531
VERICUT Help
the last block in the range. All of the blocks between the first and last should now be
highlighted.
2. Use the "Ctrl" key to select multiple individual blocks. Click on the first block so that it
becomes highlighted, and then while holding down the "Ctrl" key, select additional blocks.
Each block will become highlighted when it is selected.
3. Re-order blocks in the NC Block List by left-clicking on the square button at the beginning of
the row and drag the row (while keeping the left mouse button depressed) to the desired
position.
NC Block Entry — is a text buffer where an internally generated NC block is displayed, or an NC
block can manually be entered. Use the Add to List button to add the block displayed in the NC
Block Entry text field to the NC Block List.
Add to List — Use to add the contents of the NC Block Entry text field to the NC Block List.
(Reset Model and MDI) — Resets the VERICUT model in the graphics area and highlights
the first block in the NC Block List.
(Pause MDI) — Pauses the execution of NC blocks.
(Single MDI Step) — Use this icon to execute a single NC block, or a selected sequence of
blocks, in NC Block List.
When an NC block in the MDI window calls a subroutine like the M06 command in the example
below, three additional icons are displayed as shown.
In addition, a message is displayed below the logger explaining the presence of the three
additional icons as shown below.
532
VERICUT Help
The additional icons (MDI Step Controls) enable you to specify what you want VERICUT to do
with the subroutine that is being called. You can choose to "step into" the subroutine, "step
over" the subroutine, or "step out" of the subroutine if you have already stepped into it.
The function of the three MDI Step Control icons is identical to the Subroutine Option icons that
display when you right-click on the (Step / Subroutine Options) icon in the main VERICUT
window. The three MDI Step Control icons are described below:
(Step Into Subroutine) — When you come to a subroutine, step into the subroutine, and
continue stepping.
(Step Over Subroutine) — When you come to a subroutine, do not step into it, execute
the subroutine, and continue stepping on the next line of the calling program.
(Step to End of Subroutine) — If you are inside a subroutine, finish executing the current
subroutine, and continue stepping on the next line of the calling routine.
Tip: Position the cursor over the icon and a tip appears to remind you of each icon’s function.
(Play MDI to End) — Use this icon to execute all blocks in the NC Block List
See Manually Moving the Machine via MDI in the Using the MDI window section, also in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
NOTES:
1. Use of Machine Motion Jog and Play MDI to End require a Machine Simulation license.
2. Do not attempt to use MDI before machine construction is complete. If the Stock, Tool, and
all motion components are not present in the machine definition, the machine may not
respond to motion commands as expected.
533
VERICUT Help
3. After adding motion type components to a machine, always press (Reset Model)
before using MDI to test machine movements.
4. Calls to subroutines and NC macros are not supported while in Move to Pick Location
mode. Use a short test NC program file instead. Calls to subroutines and NC macros are
supported while in Machine Motion Jog mode.
534
VERICUT Help
Using the MDI window
535
VERICUT Help
Manually Moving the Machine via MDI
After you define an NC machine and control, you can manually move the machine using
commands typed in an "MDI console" window-similar to how an operator tests machine
motions on the shop floor. This procedure can be especially helpful to test or prove-out newly
constructed machines.
NOTE: If you made any changes to the machine/control configuration, be sure to press
(Reset Model) in the VERICUT main window before manually moving the machine.
To manually enter and process a single block of machine code data:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the MDI window:
In the Project Tree, right click on a CNC Machine Branch and select MDI from the menu that
displays.
Click on the (MDI) icon in the VERICUT Toolbar.

Click on Project menu > MDI in the VERICUT menu bar.
2. In the MDI window, enter the block of data to in the NC Block Entry text field at the bottom of
the window.
3. Press Add to List to add the block to the NC Block List.
4. Press the (Play MDI to End) icon to process the data block. You can process as many
blocks of data as you wish in this manner.
To use Machine Motion Jog

displays.

536
VERICUT Help
2. In the MDI window, select the machine axis that you want to jog, from the Axis pull-down list.
3. Specify the distance that you want the machine to move each time you jog in the Jog Distance
field.
4. Use the (decrease) and (increase) buttons to jog the machine the specified "Jog
Distance" each time you press them. You can also press and hold the button down to
repeatedly move the specified distance.
Moving the machine axes with Machine Motion Jog will not produce a block in the NC Blocks
List. Press the Save Location to List button to add the position to the NC Blocks List.
NOTE: Using Machine Motion Jog requires a Machine Simulation license.
To use the Machine Travel Limits Slider

1. Use one of the following methods to display the Machine Settings window:
Click on the (Machine Settings) icon in the VERICUT Toolbar.

Click on Configuration menu > Machine Settings in the VERICUT menu bar.
2. Click on the Travel Limits tab.
3. Ensure that Minimum and Maximum travel limit values are specified for each of the machine’s
axes.
displays.

5. In the MDI window, select the machine axis that you want to move, from the Axis pull-down
list.
6. Use the Machine Travel Limits Slider to move the specifed axis.
You can click on the slider and drag it to the left (toward the Minimum travel limit) or to the
right (toward the Maximum travel limit).
You can also click on the slidebar to the left (toward the Minimum travel limit) of the slider
or click on the slidebar to the right (toward the Maximum travel limit) of the slider. Each
time that you click on the slidebar, the slider will move approximately 10% of the total
distance between the travel limits in the selected direction.
537
VERICUT Help
7. The axis motion will be displayed in a Machine or Machine/Cut Stock view in the graphics area.
Collisions will be displayed in the graphics area. Collision and other error messages will be
displayed in the Logger.
NOTE: Using Machine Motion Jog requires a Machine Simulation license.
To use graphic pick locations to create NC Blocks

displays.

2. In the MDI window, click on the icon representing the Pick Location method that you want to
use.
See MDI window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Tip: Hold the cursor over the icon to see what method that the icon represents.
3. Pick a feature in the VERICUT graphics area that is appropriate for the Pick Location method
selected.
4. Press the Save Location to List button to add the position to the NC Blocks List.
Tip: You can toggle Always save location "On" to automatically save each pick location as a
block in the NC Block List.
To process one, or more blocks In the NC Block table:

1. Use one of the following mehods to display the MDI window:
displays.

2. In the MDI window, add blocks to the NC Block List using any of the methods described above.
538
VERICUT Help
To process a single NC block, or a selected sequence of blocks:

1. Select one or more blocks, in the NC Block List, so that they become highlighted.
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information..
Press (Single MDI Step) process the highlighted blocks.
To process all blocks in the NC Block List:
1. Press the (Play MDI to End) icon to process all blocks in the NC Block List.
NOTE: Using Play MDI to End requires a Machine Simulation license.
Press the (Pause MDI) icon at any time to pause the execution of NC blocks.
Press the (Reset Model and MDI) icon to reset the VERICUT model in the graphics area
and highlights the first block in the NC Block List.
To process a block in the NC Block List that calls a subroutine:

displays.

2. In the MDI window, add blocks to the NC Block List using any of the methods described above.
3. When a block in the NC Block List calls a subroutine (for example a tool change command), the
three additional icons will automatically display enabling you to specify how you want to handle
the subroutine.
Press the (Step Into Subroutine) icon to step into the subroutine, and continue
stepping through the blocks in the subroutine. You can see the bloskc in the subroutine in
the NC Program panel (Info menu > NC Program).
539
VERICUT Help
Once you have stepped into the subroutine, you can press the (Step to End of
Subroutine) icon to finish executing the current subroutine, and continue stepping on the
next line of the calling routine.
If you do not want to step though the subroutine, press the (Step Over Subroutine)
icon to execute the subroutine and continue stepping on the next line of the calling
program.
Tip: Position the cursor over the icon and a tip appears to remind you of each icon’s
function.
540
VERICUT Help
Control Branch
Right-click on a Control branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open — Opens the Open Control window enabling you to open a control file.
Save — Opens the Save Control File window enabling you to save the current control file.
Save As — Opens the Save Control File window enabling you to save the current control file
under a different name or path.
Copy — Copies the highlighted control file from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Uses the contents of the paste buffer to replace the highlighted control file in the
Project Tree.
MDI — Opens the MDI window enabling you to manually enter and process blocks of G-Code
data.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Control menu displays at the bottom of the
Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on a Control Branch will open the Open Control file selection
window enabling you to open a control file.
541
VERICUT Help
Open Control window
Locations:
Project Tree > Control Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Open
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu
Configuration menu > Control > Open
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Open Control window enable you to open (load) a Control file (ref. Control
File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). Control files contain data that describes how the
NC control processes machine code data.
Most features on this window are standard file selection window features that enable you to
navigate through directories, filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. A description of
features specific to VERICUT can be found in the Introduction to VERICUT File Selection
542
VERICUT Help
Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help
or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
To save space, the features described below are unique to this window.
Help on Samples — Opens the VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help section on
"Library Control Files". Assuming Shortcut=CGTECH_LIBRARY, you can find the file you want in
the on-line Help, then cut & paste the file name into the file selection window and press Open
to open the file.
See Saving or Opening an NC Control Configuration, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
543
VERICUT Help
Machine Branch
Right-click on a Machine branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open — Opens the Open Machine window enabling you to open (load) a Machine file.
Save — Opens the Save Machine File window enabling you to save the current machine file.
Save As — Opens the Save Machine File window enabling you to save the current machine file
under a different name or path.
Copy — Copies the highlighted machine file from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Uses the contents of the paste buffer to replace the highlighted machine file in the
Project Tree.
New — This feature is only displayed in the right mouse button window when Show Machine
Components is toggled "On". The New feature enables you to remove all Machine components
that are defined in the machine file. VERICUT will keep all components defined in the project
file and attach them to the "Base" component.
Expand All Children — Expands all branches of a Machine branch.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches of a Machine branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Machine menu displays at the bottom of the
Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on a Machine Branch will open the Open Machine window enabling
you to open a machine file.
544
VERICUT Help
Open Machine window
Locations:
Project Tree > Control Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Open
Configuration menu > Machine > Open
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Open Machine window enable you to open (load) a Machine file (ref.
Machine File in the Getting Started with VERICUT section of VERICUT Help). Machine files
contain data that describes NC machine construction, kinematics, and other properties.
545
VERICUT Help
Help on Samples — Opens the VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help section on
"Machine files". Both library and sample machines are listed. find the file you want in the on-
line Help, then cut & paste the file name into the file selection window. For machines located in
the library, set Shortcut=CGTECH_LIBRARY and press Open to open the file. For "sample"
machines, set Shortcut=CGTECH_SAMPLES and press Open.
See Saving or Opening an NC Machine Configuration, also in the Project Tree section of
546
VERICUT Help
Attach Component Branch
Right click on an Attach Component branch in the Project Tree panel to display one of the
following menus. The menu that displays depends on whether the Show Machine Components
feature is toggled “on” or “off”.
Show Machine Components toggled “off”
Paste — Use to paste the contents of the paste buffer to the Attach Component.
Append —Use to connect the selected component to the Attach Component (ref. Component
Type , in the Configuration Component menu, Common Features: Component tab section for
complete information on each of these component types). Hold the cursor over the at the
bottom of the components list to view additional components.
Expand All Children — Expands all branches below the Attach Component.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches below the Attach Component.
547
VERICUT Help
Show Machine Components toggled “on”
Cut — Cuts the highlighted Attach Component branch from the Project Tree and puts it in the
paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted Attach Component branch to the paste buffer.
Paste — Use to paste the contents of the paste buffer to the Project Tree.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted Attach Component branch from the Project Tree.
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted Attach Component.
Type in the Configuration Component menu, Common Features: Component tab section for
548
VERICUT Help
Visibility — Use the Visibility features to specify whether or not the Attach Component branch
is visible, and in what views. A check indicates “visible” in the view.
Blank — The highlighted Attach Component branch is not visible in any view. When Visibility is
set to "Blank" for a component, the icon representing the component in the Project Tree will be
displayed in gray instead if a color.
Workpiece View — The highlighted component branch is only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — The highlighted Attach Component branch is only visible in a Machine View
(Machine, or Machine/Cut Stock).
Both — The highlighted Attach Component branch is visible in any view.
Add Model — The Add Model pull-down list contains the model types that can be added to an
Attach Component. Select from the listed model types (ref. Model Type in the Configure
Component menu, Common Features section for complete information on each model type).
Expand All Children — Expands all branches below the Attach Component.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches below the Attach Component.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Component menu displays at the bottom of
the Project Tree.
549
VERICUT Help
Component Branch
Right-click on a Component branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Cut — Cuts the highlighted component branch from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste
buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted component branch from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
550
VERICUT Help
Paste — Uses the contents of the paste buffer to replace the highlighted component branch in
the Project Tree.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted component branch from the Project Tree.
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted component branch.
Type , in the Configuration Component menu, Common Features: Component tab section for
Visibility — Use the Visibility features to specify whether or not a component branch is visible,
and in what views. A check indicates “visible” in the view.
Blank — The highlighted component branch is not visible in any view. When Visibility is set to
"Blank" for a component, the icon representing the component in the Project Tree will be
displayed in gray instead if a color.
Workpiece View — The highlighted component branch is only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — The highlighted component branch is only visible in a Machine View
(Machine, or Machine/Cut Stock).
Both — The highlighted component branch is visible in any view.
NOTE: The Visibility feature is not available in right mouse button shortcut menu for Tool
Component branches. See Holder Visibility and Cutter Visibility, also in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help for information on controlling tool component visibility.
Expand All Children — Expands all branches of a Component branch.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches of a Component branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Component menu displays at the bottom of
the Project Tree.
551
VERICUT Help
Models Branch
Right-click on a Models Branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following feature:
Expand All Children — Expands all branches of a Models branch.

Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches of a Models branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Models Branch menu displays at the bottom
552
VERICUT Help
Model
Right-click on a Model in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Cut — Cuts the highlighted model from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted model from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted model in the Project Tree.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted model from the Project Tree.
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted model.
Visible — Use to make the highlighted model visible, or not, visible in the VERICUT graphics
area. The Visible icon will indicate the visibility status of the model. indicates "visible",
indicates "not visible". Click on Visible to toggle between the two modes. In the Project
Tree, any model in the "not visible" state will be displayed in gray instead if a color.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Model menu displays at the bottom of the
Project Tree.
553
VERICUT Help
Cut Stock
Right-click on a Cut Stock in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Save Cut Stock — The Save Cut Stock option opens the Save Cut Stock file selection window
enabling you to save the selected Cut Stock model as a VERICUT Solid file (.vct). This option is
only active after a Cut Stock model has been created by VERICUT. The default file extension is
.vct. (ref. Save Cut Stock > VERICUT Solid in the File menu section of VERICUT Help for
additional information)
Preserve Stock Transition — Use to create the coordinate systems required for transitioning
the cut stock(s) from one setup position to another. Preserve Stock Transition can be used to
create the coordinate systems for each Stock component. Preserve Stock Transition is only
active when a stock component model is selected.
When Preserve Stock Transition is pressed, two coordinate systems named "Previous Setup
name : Current Setup name : Active Stock component name" are created and added. Previous
Setup name, Current Setup name and Active Stock component name are replaced by the actual
names of these entities used in the project file, for example "Rough:Finish:Stock1". One CSYS is
added to the current setup, attached to the Stock Component parent of the selected model. It
is created with Use for Cut Stock Transition toggled "On" (see the Define (Coordinate System
window) section) , designating it as a coordinate system used for transitioning the cut stock
from one setup position to another. The other CSYS is added to the first setup in the project,
and is located at the origin of the stock component whose name matches current setup stock
component. The following illustrates how to use Preserve Stock Transition:
1. Configure Setup #1.
2. Simulate.
4. Move cut stock into position using cut features and assembly modeling to position the cut
stock
5. Press Preserve Stock Transition.
6. Simulate.
554
VERICUT Help

8. Move cut stock into position.
9. Press Preserve Stock Transition.
10. Simulate.
11. and so on ...
Cut — Cuts the highlighted model from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted model from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted model in the Project Tree.
555
VERICUT Help
Save or Load a VERICUT Solid (.vct file)
The VERICUT "Cut Stock" model can be saved as a VERICUT Solid file, then later loaded as a
Stock, Fixture or Design component model.
To save a "Cut Stock" model as a VERICUT Solid file:
From the VERICUT menu bar

1. In the VERICUT Menu Bar, or click File menu > Save Cut Stock > VERICUT Solid > stock, where
stock is the cut stock to be saved, to display the Save Cut Stock file selection window.
2. In the Save Cut Stock file selection window that displays, enter a /path/filename for the
VERICUT Solid file to be saved.
3. Toggle "Save with Features" On (checked), or Off, depending on whether you want geometry,
history database and cut database data saved in the VERICUT solid file, or just geometry data.
Then select Save in the file selection window to save the VERICUT solid file.
You can load saved VERICUT Solid files as described below.
From the Project Tree
1. Click (Project Tree) on the Toolbar, or click Project menu > Project Tree in the VERICUT
main menu bar to display the Project Tree panel.
2. In the Project Tree panel, right-click on the "Cut Stock" model and then select Save Cut Stock in
the pull-down menu to display the Save Cut Stock file selection window. (If there is no "Cut
Stock" model in the Project Tree, process the NC program using (Play / Start-Stop
Options).
3. In the Component Tree main menu click on File > Save Cut Stock.
4. In the Save Cut Stock file selection window, enter a /path/filename for the VERICUT Solid file to
be saved.
5. Toggle "Save with Features" On (checked), or Off, depending on whether you want geometry,
history database and cut database data saved in the VERICUT solid file, or just geometry data.
Then select Save in the file selection window to save the VERICUT solid file.
You can load saved VERICUT Solid files as described below.
556
VERICUT Help
To load a VERICUT Solid file:
1. Click (Project Tree) on the Toolbar, or click Project menu > Project Tree in the VERICUT
main menu bar to display the Project Tree panel.
2. In the Project Tree panel, use one if the following methods to load a VERICUT solid file:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on the component that you want to add the VERICUT solid file
to and then select Add Model > Model File in the pull-down menu, to display the Open file
selection window.
Use the file selection window to specify the /path/filename of the VERICUT solid file (.vct)
that you want to load.
 In the Project Tree panel, click on the component that you want to add the VERICUT solid
file to so that it becomes highlighted.
In the Configure Component menu at the bottom of the Project Tree panel, select Model
File from the Add Model pull-down list to display the Open file selection window.
Use the file selection window to specify the /path/filename of the VERICUT solid file (.vct)
that you want to load.
VERICUT adds the model to the component.
See the Cut Stock and Configure Component menu also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help.
Also see VERICUT Solid in the File menu section of VERICUT Help.
557
VERICUT Help
Collision Branch
Right-click on a Collision Branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open — Opens the Collision and Travel Limits window: Collision Detect tab enabling you to
specify when collisions between two machine components are detected, which components
are protected, and the tolerances used for detecting collisions.
Machine Collision Detection — Toggles Machine Collision Detection “on” (checked) and “off”.
See Check Collisions Between menu, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
information on specifying the Tool to Stock/Fixture collision conditions that you want VERICUT
to check during processing.
The sequence of events that takes place when a collision is detected is dependent on how the
Animation Speed Slider is set and whether Stop at Max Errors is toggled “on” or “off”. See
What Happens When a Collision is Detected?, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
for complete information.
Back to the Tree Menu table.
558
VERICUT Help
What Happens When a Collision is Detected?

The sequence of events that takes place when a collision is detected is dependent on how
certain VERICUT features are set. It is assumed that collision checking conditions have already
been set and collision checking has been turned on using the Collision Branch and the Check
Collisions Between menu features, also described in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help.
What happens when a collision is detected is dependent on how the Animation Speed Slider
(ref. Animation Speed Slider, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) is set and whether
Stop at Max Errors (ref. Configure Project menu, Start/Stop tab, also in the Project Tree section
Help) is toggled “on” or “off”.
The following summarized the events that will take place with various combinations of
Animation Speed Slider/Stop at Max Error settings:
1. The Animation Speed Slider is set at 100% and Stop at Max Errors is toggled “Off”.
 VERICUT reports the collision error in the Logger and in the VERICUT Log file.
 VERICUT continues processing.
2. The Animation Speed Slider is set at 100% and Stop at Max Errors is toggled “on”.
 VERICUT stops at the end of the block.
3. The Animation Speed Slider is set at less than 100% and Stop at Max Errors is toggled “off”.
 VERICUT reports near miss conditions (if Near Miss values are set) to the Logger and
VERICUT Log file.
 VERICUT continues processing.
4. The Animation Speed Slider is set at less than 100% and Stop at Max Errors is toggled “on”.
 VERICUT reports near miss conditions (if Near Miss values are set) to the Logger and
VERICUT Log file and immediately stops processing.
 Press Play to continue processing.
 VERICUT reports the collision error in the Logger and in the VERICUT Log file and
immediately stops processing.
 Press Play to continue processing.
559
VERICUT Help
Travel Limits Branch

Right-click on a Travel Limits Branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open — Opens the Collision and Travel Limits window: Travel Limits tab enabling you to specify
the valid range of travel for each machine axis, and control when travel limit errors are
detected.
Log Error for Over Travel — Toggles Log Error for Over Travel “on” (checked), to start machine
travel limit checking, and “off”.
560
VERICUT Help
Collision and Travel Limits window
Locations:
Project Tree > Collision Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Open
Project Tree > Travel Limits Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Open
The features on the Collision and Travel Limits window enable you to configure the settings
required for processing G-Code NC program files related to detecting collisions between
machine components and detecting when a machine axis limit has been exceeded.
Collision Detect tab — Features on this tab control when collisions between machine
components are detected, which components are protected, and tolerances used for detecting
collisions.
Travel Limits tab — Features on this tab define how far each machine axis can go, and control
when travel limit errors are detected.
Apply — Applies the changes and leaves the Collision and Travel Limits window open.
Close — Closes the Collision and Travel Limit window without applying changes.
561
VERICUT Help
Collision and Travel Limits window, Collision Detect tab

Features on the Collision Detect tab enable you to control when collisions between machine
components are detected, which components are protected, and specify the tolerances used
for detecting collisions.
Colliding components are highlighted using the red Error color, and errors are issued to the Log
file identifying collision causing block(s) and machine components.
Machine Collision Detection — When toggled "On", detects collisions between specified
components.
Ignore Collision between Cutter and Stock — Controls when collisions between the cutter and
the Stock component are ignored. This feature is useful when collision detection is desired
562
VERICUT Help
between the stock and shank or holder portions of the tool assembly in the machine view, but
not with the cutter.
Options are:
No — (default) Does not ignore cutter-stock collisions. All collisions are reported.
All Tools — Ignores cutter-stock collisions for all tools, even inactive tools in multi-tool
machines.
Active Tool — Ignores cutter-stock collisions for the active tool. However, collisions between
stock and inactive tools are detected.
Default Near Miss — Specifies the default collision tolerance applied to all collision cases when
Set All is pressed (see below).
Set All — Sets the default collision tolerance for all collision cases to the Default Near Miss
value. You can edit the supplied tolerance for individual cases.
Component/Component collision list

Lists the component-to-component collision cases that are checked when collision detection is
turned on.
NOTES:
1. Records displayed in pink are created, and modified, using the Machine Settings window:
Collision Detect tab (Configuration menu > Machine Settings > Collision Detect tab) and
saved in the machine file.
The Machine Settings window: Collision Detect tab and the Collision and Travel Limits
window: Collision Detect tab (Project Tree: Collision branch right mouse button menu >
Open) are linked so that whenever additions or changes are made in the Machine Settings
window: Collision Detect tab they are also updated in the Collision and Travel Limits
window: Collision Detect tab.
Pink records cannot be modified in the Collision and Travel Limits window: Collision Detect
tab.
2. Records displayed in white are part of the setup and can be created, or modified, in the
Machine Settings window: Collision Detect tab or in the Collision and Travel Limits window:
Collision Detect tab and are saved with the setup in the project file.
These two windows are linked so that whenever additions, or changes, are made to white
records in one window they are updated in both windows when you select Apply or OK.
Component1/Component 2 — Use these features to specify the component-to-component
collision cases to check. The Near Miss value controls how close the components are permitted
563
VERICUT Help
to be before reporting a collision. Clicking on a component field in a record displays a pull-down

list of component to choose from.
NOTE: Do not configure for collision detection between components that move (slide or
rotate) against each other, such as connected motion axes. In these cases, errors may occur
each time the components move.
Sub-Components — Toggle On/Off to include Sub-Components of Component1/Component2
during collision checking.
Near Miss — Use to specify the tolerance to use for collision checking. Enter a positive value to
be alerted if components come near each other within the specified clearance, zero to indicate
components may not touch, or a negative value if components are expected to collide by the
specified value.
NOTE: "Near Miss" tolerances are not supported for collision checking against the cut model.
The accuracy of collisions with the cut stock is dependent on the "Cutting Resolution".
Ignore — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will ignore the specific collision record during
collision checking. Ignore, when toggled “on”, only remains active for the current session. It is
not saved in the project file.
Add — Adds a new collision case record to the list. The new record is added after the
highlighted record.
Delete — Deletes the selected collision case record from the list. Records displayed in pink
come from the machine file and can not be deleted.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Component/Component collision list to display a menu
containing Add and Delete. These provide the same functionality described above.
To Collision and Travel Limits window
564
VERICUT Help
Collision and Travel Limits window, Travel Limits tab

Features on the Travel Limits tab enable you to specify how far each machine axis can go, and
control when travel limit errors are detected.
Overtravel errors cause the violating machine component to "light up" in the Overtravel Color
and errors are output to the Log file identifying the problem component.
Log Error for Over Travel — When active, turns on over travel detection (travel limit checking).
Components that move beyond specified limits are highlighted in the Overtravel Color and
errors are issued to the Log file identifying error causing block(s) and machine components.
Allow Motion Beyond Limit — When toggled "on", axes are allowed to freely travel beyond
defined limits. When toggled "off", an axis is never allowed to travel beyond the defined limit.
565
VERICUT Help
Overtravel Color — Use to specify the color in which components that move past their
specified limits are shaded. Available shade colors are defined on the Edit menu > Colors:
Define tab.
Travel Limit Record Table

List of travel limit records in which each record consist of a group number, motion component
(and its axis limits), travel limit condition and an ignore switch. These records come from the
machine file and can not be edited.
Group — Indicates the travel limits record group that is currently active A specific group is of
travel limit records is activated by using the TravelLimitsGroup macro. For information on the
TravelLimitsGroup macro, and all VERICUT macros, see VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help
Library.
Component — Indicates a motion component for travel limit checking.
Minimum / Maximum — Indicates the minimum, and maximum, travel limits for the motion
axis specified in the record.
The next three columns in the Travel Limit Record Table indicate conditions when the travel
limit record is used. The condition can be set to "off" indicating no special condition for this
record or set to a motion component on the machine.
When a motion component is specified, then the travel limit record is used if the axis of the
conditional component is within the conditional minimum and maximum limit values.
Component (C) — Indicates a condition when the travel limit record is used. It is set to "off" to
indicate no special condition for this record, or to a conditional motion component on the
machine.
Minimum (C) / Maximum (C) — Indicates the minimum, and maximum, travel limits for the
conditional motion component (Component (C)) that will cause the travel limit record to be
used.
Ignore — When toggled "on", over travel checking is ignored for the corresponding axis.
To Collision and Travel Limits window
566
VERICUT Help
Coordinate Systems Branch

Right-click on a Coordinate Systems branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following
menu:
Add New CSYS — Adds a new CSYS to the Coordinate Systems branch in the Project Tree.
VERICUT automatically provides a unique name for the CSYS. You can right-click on the default
name and select Rename from the menu that displays to rename the CSYS if desired.
New coordinate systems are created with zero translation and rotation values and attached to
the Base component. The newly added coordinate system is automatically selected in the
Project Tree. If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Coordinate System menu
automatically displays at the bottom of the Project Tree enabling you to make any necessary
modifications to the newly added CSYS.
CSYS from File — Displays a file selection box enabling you to specify the CSYS file to be used.
The Create CSYS While Simulating feature, in the Configure Coordinate System menu, must be
toggled “off” (not checked) when using CSYS from File. This functionality is also available via
the csys_file command line option.
See CSYS File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on CSYS file formats.
Paste — Use to paste the contents of the paste buffer to the Coordinate Systems branch.
Delete All — Deletes all coordinate systems from the Coordinate System branch.
Expand All Children — Expands the Coordinate System branch showing all coordinate systems
available in the setup.
Collapse All Children — Collapses the Coordinate System branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Coordinate System menu displays at the
bottom of the Project Tree.
567
VERICUT Help
Coordinate System
Right-click on a Coordinate System in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Add New CSYS — Adds a new CSYS to the Coordinate Systems branch in the Project Tree.
VERICUT automatically provides a unique name for the CSYS. You can right-click on the default
name and select Rename from the menu that displays to rename the CSYS if desired.
the Base component. The newly added coordinate system is automatically selected in the
Project Tree. If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure Coordinate System menu
automatically displays at the bottom of the Project Tree enabling you to make any necessary
modifications to the newly added CSYS.
The Create CSYS While Simulating feature, in the Configure Coordinate System menu, must be
toggled “off” (not checked) when using CSYS from File. This functionality is also available via
the csys_file command line option.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted coordinate system from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste
buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted coordinate system from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted coordinate system in the
Project Tree.
568
VERICUT Help
Delete — Deletes the highlighted model from the Project Tree.

Rename — Use to rename the highlighted coordinate system.
Active — Displays a list of all available coordinate systems enabling you to set the active
coordinate system. A check indicates the active coordinate system.
Visible — Use to make the highlighted coordinate system visible, or not visible in the VERICUT
graphics area. The Visible icon will indicate the visibility status of the coordinate system.
indicates "visible", indicates "not visible". Click on Visible to toggle between the two
modes. In the Project Tree, any coordinate system in the "not visible" state will be displayed in
gray instead if a color.
Back to the Tree Right Menu table.
569
VERICUT Help
G-Code Offsets Branch
Right-click on a G-Code Offsets branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Expand All Children — Expands all branches below the G-Code Offsets branch.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches below the G-Code Offsets branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure G-Code Offsets menu displays at the bottom
570
VERICUT Help
G-Code Table
Right-click on a G-Code Table in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Delete — Deletes the highlighted G-code Table from the Project Tree.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu displays at the
571
VERICUT Help
G-Code Table Record

Right-click on a G-Code Table record in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Delete — Use to delete one, or more, highlighted G-code Table Records from the Project Tree.
Use the Shift key to select a range of Work Offset Records so that they become highlighted. Use
the Ctrl key to select multiple individual Work Offset Records so that they become highlighted.
If the Configure icon is toggled "on", the Configure G-Code Offsets Table Record menu displays
at the bottom of the Project Tree.
Tooling Branch
Right-click on the Tooling Branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open — Opens a file selection window enabling you to open a tool library file.
Tool Manager — Opens the Tool Manager window enabling you to create and maintain
VERICUT Tool Library files containing descriptions of cutting tools, or tool assemblies.
572
VERICUT Help
Cutter Visibility — Use the Cutter Visibility features to specify whether or not cutters are
visible, and in what views. A check indicates “visible” in the view. The setting applies to all
cutter components in the setup.
Blank — Cutters are not visible in any view.
Workpiece View — Cutters are only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — Cutters are only visible in a Machine View (Machine, or Machine/Cut
Stock).
Both Views — Cutters are visible in any view.
Holder Visibility — Use the Holder Visibility features to specify whether or not holders are
holder components in the setup.
Blank — Holders are not visible in any view.
Workpiece View — Holders are only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — Holders are only visible in a Machine View (Machine, or Machine/Cut
Stock).
Both Views — Holders are visible in any view.
Translucent — When toggled “on” (checked), visible cutters and holders are displayed in
translucent mode. When toggled “off” visible cutters and Holders are displayed in solid mode.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted tool library from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted tool library from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Replaces the highlighted tool library, with the tool library contained in the paste
buffer.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted tool library from the Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on Tooling in the Project Tree panel will open the Tool Manager
window.
573
VERICUT Help
Tools Used
The Tools Used feature enables you to see at a glance the tools that are being used for the
“current” Setup. At each tool change in the simulation, an image representing the tool
component type along with the tool’s ID is added to the Tooling branch in the Project Tree. If
the tool in Tool Manager has the Description field filled in, that description will also be
displayed in the Project Tree as shown in the picture below.
The following are the tool component types that may appear in the list.
Mill Water Jet
Turn Ultrasonic Knife
Probe Polisher
Hole Making
The tools are shown in the order in which they were used. The last tool in the list is the “active”
tool. This feature is only available for tools that are contained in a Tool Library. Tools defined
within an APT NC program will not be displayed in the Tools Used list.
574
VERICUT Help
If you right-mouse click on a tool in the list, and then click on the Tool Manager option that
displays as shown in Picture 1 below will display Tool Manager with the tool highlighted and
expanded as shown in the Picture 2 below.
Alternatively, you can double click on a tool in the list to display the Tool Manager.
Picture 1
Picture 2
575
VERICUT Help
Click on a tool in the Tools Used list and a 3D image of the tool will display in the Configure
menu area of the Project Tree as shown in the picture below.
Left clicking on the 3D image and moving the cursor allows dynamic rotation of the tool.
Right click on the image to display the following menu:
Fit —"Fits" the objects in the view. (ref. View Orient window, in the View Menu section of
VERICUT Help)
Snap to Orthogonal View — Snaps the current view to the closest orthogonal view. Orient the
view so that it is close to the orthogonal view that you want and then click on the Snap to
Orthogonal View in the menu and the view will re-orient to the exact orthogonal view.
576
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window
Locations:
Project Tree > Tooling Right Mouse Shortcut Menu
Project menu > Tools
Toolbar shortcut:
The Tool Manager window enables you to create and maintain Tool Library files containing
descriptions of cutting tools, or tool assemblies. Library tools are used when a setup’s Tooling
Branch is configured to do so.
577
VERICUT Help
Overview of using the Tool Manager window

In general, double click on a tool component to modify, or key in supporting values into the
associated data fields. Right click on a tool component to display a shortcut menu whose
features enable you to define, and modify, tool components. Tools can be defined interactively
inside, or outside, of VERICUT by running the Tool Manager "toolman" command file.
The Tool Manager window consists of five distinct areas, the Tool Bar, the Tool List Area and
Coordinate Systems List Area, the Tool Parameter Definition Area, the Tool Display Area, and
the Message Area. Each of these areas is described in detail in the sections below.
The window header displays the current tool library file. This window can be resized like most
other window, via dragging the window header, sides or corners.
Tips:
1. Right-click shortcut menus: Features used to manipulate tools, or tool assemblies, are
displayed in a shortcut menu when the right mouse button is clicked in the Tool List Area
portion of the Tool Manager window.
Features used to manipulate the tool graphics are displayed in a shortcut menu when the
right mouse button is clicked in the Tool Display area of the Tool Manager window.
Features used to manipulate coordinate systems are displayed in a shortcut menu when the
right mouse button is clicked in the Coordinate Systems list area of the Tool Manager
window.
2. You can move objects in the Tool Manager window via dragging them from one parent tool
to another, or copy them via holding down the <Ctrl> key and dragging.
See Using the Tool Manager, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about
VERICUT tools and using the Tool Manager to create and maintain tool libraries.
578
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Bar

The Tool bar, located across the top of the Tool Manager window, provides easy access to Tool
Library functions. Each icon contains one function or a group of related functions. Left click on
any icon to activate the function. If the icon includes a , click on the to display the list of
functions that are available for that icon. Click on the function in the list that you want to use.
Each of the functions is described in detail below.
(New File) — Use to create a new Tool Library file.
(Open File) — Displays the Open file selection window enabling you to open an
existing Tool Library file. Click on the to display a list of recently used tool library files as
(Save File) — Use to save the current Tool Library file. If you do not have write privileges
to the location of the current tool library file, the Save Tool Library As file selection window will
display enabling you to save the current tool library to a different location. Right-click on the
Save File icon to display the Save As File icon described below
(Save As File) — Displays the Save Tool Library As file selection window enabling you to
save the current Tool Library file with a new name/location.
579
VERICUT Help
(Generate Tool Report) — Use this feature to create and view Tool Manager reports,
Click on the Report icon to display the Save Tool Report file selection window enabling you to
create and view a Tool Manager report.
Click on the to display a menu with the following options.
Text — Displays the Save Tool Report window enabling you to create a and view a Tool
Manager report in text format.
HTML — Displays the Save Tool Report window enabling you to create a and view a Tool
Manager report in HTML format.
PDF — Displays the Save Tool Report window enabling you to create a and view a Tool
Manager report in PDF format.
See Introduction to VERICUT Reports, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
information on report template files supplied with VERICUT.
Report Template — Displays the Report Template window enabling you to select and/or
modify an existing tool manager report template or create a new one.
User-Defined Tag Values — Opens the User-Defined Tag Values window enabling you to
assign/edit user-defined tag values used by the current tool manager report template.
(Utilities) — Click on the Utilities icon or the to display a menu with the following
options.
580
VERICUT Help
Merge — Opens the Merge Tool Library window enabling you to merge two tool libraries
into one.
Save Selected Tool — Use to save the selected tool to a specified tool library file. Selecting
Save Selected Tool displays a file selection window enabling you to specify a /path/filename
for the tool library file.
Export Selected Tool — Use to export the highlighted tool in the specified format (STL or
VRML). Selecting Export Selected Tool displays a file selection window enabling you to
specify a /path/filename for the file to receive the exported tool data.
You can choose to export any individual component in the tool assembly by selecting that
component in the Tool Manager table, and then choose the Export Selected Tool option:
581
VERICUT Help
The following tool component will be exported to the specified file.
Or you can export the entire tool by selecting the tool's ID, and then choose the Export
Selected Tool option:
582
VERICUT Help
The following tool assembly will be exported to the specified file.
The origin of the exported STL model corresponds to the tool's origin as seen in Tool
Manager.
The accuracy of the exported model is controlled by VERICUT's Model Tolerance feature
located on the Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings > Project
Settings tab). \VCUT}
NOTE: For a change to Model Tolerance to take affect in the Tool Manager, the Tool
Manager window must be closed when the tolerance is changed, then re-opened.
Using the Export Selected Tool feature

To change the exported tool model tolerance:
1. Ensure that the Tool Manager window is closed
2. Open the Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings), and note
the current Model Tolerance value used for simulation purposes.
3. Change the Model Tolerance value as desired for the tool export operation and click
OK.
To export the tool to the specified file:
583
VERICUT Help
1. Open the Tool Manager, select the tool (or tool component) to export, then select
Tool Manager File menu > Export Selected Tool > model format (STL or VRML)
2. In the file selection window that displays, specify the \path\filename of the file to
receive the exported tool data, then click Save.
When finished, reset the Model Tolerance value back to its original value.
Reset File Lock — Enables you to delete an existing Tool Library file lock. Selecting Tool
Manager, File menu > Reset File Lock will display the following message where “QA” is the
logon ID of the user that currently has the Tool Library file locked.
Select “Yes” to delete the file lock. Select “No” to cancel the action.
(Undo) — Use this icon to “undo” changes made in the Tool Manager. The icon will be
grayed out until a change is made in the Tool Manager. Once a change is made, the icon will
display as shown here. Click on the icon to “undo” the last change made to the Tool Manager.
Click on the icon again to “undo” the next to the last change and so on. There is no limit to the
number of changes that you can “undo”.
(Add New Tool after Current Tool) — Use the following features to add a new tool
assembly after the
584
VERICUT Help
highlighted Tool in the Tool List. Click on the part of the Add Tool icon to display a menu
with the following options.
Mill — Adds a Mill tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List. The tool
assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Cutter
component as shown below.
Hole Making Tool — Adds a Hole Making tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool
list. The tool assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a
default Cutter component as shown below.
Turn — Adds a Turn tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool list. The tool
assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Insert
585
VERICUT Help
Probe — Adds a Probe tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool list. The tool
assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Probe
Water Jet — Adds a Water Jet tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool list. The
tool assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Water
Jet component as shown below.
Knife — Adds an Ultrasonic Knife tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool list. The
tool assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Knife
Polisher — Adds a Polisher tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the tool list. The tool
assembly will consist of the Tool with a default Holder component and a default Cutter
Mill Tool with Cutter Body — Displays the Mill Tool with Cutter Body window enabling you
to quickly and easily define inserted milling tools. After defining the insert(s) and the cutter
body, an inserted mill tool assembly will be added after the highlighted tool in the Tool List.
The tool assembly will consist of the Tool with the defined Holder component (cutter body)
and the defined Insert components as shown below.
Create Standard Hole-making Tool — Displays the Standard Tool window enabling you to
select tools from a Standard Tool Library. See Standard Tool window in the Tool Component
tab (Hole Making Tool) section of VERICUT, VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation, or
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help foor additional information.
586
VERICUT Help
DXF Tool — Opens the DXF Geometry window enabling you to import two dimensional
geometry from files which comply with a de facto CAD system standard, the Data eXchange
Format (DXF).
CAD Tool — Opens the Import CAD Tool window enabling you to read, extract, identify tool
insert and holder solid models from a CAD system, and then import them into VERICUT's
Tool Manager. Currently, only STEP and CATIA V5 files are supported.
Search Tool — Displays the Search Tool window enabling you to search existing tool
libraries for tools with specific attributes.
(Add a Component to the Selected Tool) — Use the following features to add tool
components to the Tool List. Click on the part of the Add a Component to the Selected
Tool icon to display a menu with the following options.
Holder — Adds a Holder component to the highlighted Tool.

Cutter — Adds a Cutter component to the highlighted Tool.
Cutter Body — Displays the Mill Tool with Cutter Body window enabling you to quickly and
easily define an inserted milling tool cutter body.
Qualified Dimensions — The Qualified Dimensions feature is only available for turning tools
that use inserts created in a CAD system or STL inserts. This feature enables VERICUT to
correctly position and project the turning insert cutting faces on the turning plane.
Click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted. Click on the part of the
(Add a Component to the Selected Tool) icon in the Tool Manager window Tool
Bar to display a menu. Select Qualified Dimensions in the menu to display the Tool
Information tab as shown in the picture below.
587
VERICUT Help
You can also right-click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted and then select
Add Qualified Dimensions in the menu that displays to display the Tool Information tab.
Use the Qualified Dimensions field in the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab to specify the
Qualified Dimensions. See Qualified Dimensions in the Tool Information tab section of
VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
OptiPath — Displays the OptiPath window enabling you to define a new OptiPath record for
the highlighted tool.
Search OptiPath — Displays the Search OptiPath Record window enabling you to search
existing tool/OptiPath libraries for records with specific attributes.
(Import Tool) — Use to import tools from the following locations. Click on the Import
Tool icon or on the part of the Import Tool icon to display a menu with the following
options.
588
VERICUT Help
OptiPath Library — Displays the “Open OptiPath library file” file selection window, enabling
you to import an existing OptiPath library file.
Lemoine Tool — Displays the “Open Lemoine Tool library file” file selection window
enabling you to select the the desired tool library file.
Access TDM — Displays the TDM Interface window enabling you to access tools from the
TDM Systems', Tool Data Management (TDM) system database.
Zoller Database — Displays the Zoller Database Access window enabling you to retrieve tool
data from Zoller Database Service and import selected tools from a setup sheet in the Zoller
database to the VERICUT Tool Manager.
Tool Spread Sheet — Opens the Import Tool Spread Sheet window enabling you to import
tools from a spread sheet to Tool Manager.
NOVO Tool — Displays the NOVO/Kennametal Tool Import Interface window enabling you
to access tool assembly models and and application data from the NOVO/Kennametal Tool
database.
Create from APT NC Program — Causes the Tool Manager to scan the NC program files for
cutter statements (including CUTTER, PPRINT-VERICUT TC, etc), and create a tool library file
named <user filename>.tls. The APT NC program tools replace the current tool library
contents. Tools are numbered sequentially, beginning at 1.
(Analysis) — Clicking on the Analysis icon displays the Measurement Tool window
enabling you to use X-Caliper like tools to measure tool components in Tool Manager. Clicking
on the part of the Analysis icon displays a menu with the following options.
589
VERICUT Help
Selecting any of the menu options displays the Measurement Tool window with the selected
feature active.
Feature — Displays the Measurement Tool window with the Feature option active enabling
you to obtain critical information related to a selected tool component.
Distance/Angle — Displays the Measurement Tool window with the Distance/Angle option
active enabling you to measure the distance and/or angle between two selected entities of
a tool component.
Thickness — Displays the Measurement Tool window with the Thickness option active
enabling you to measure the distance and/or angle between two selected entities of a tool
component.
Air Distance — Displays the Measurement Tool window with the Air Distance option active
enabling you to measure the distance and/or angle between two selected entities of a tool
component.
(Turret Setup) — Displays the Turret Setup window enabling you to load or change
tools, or change tool positions in a turret.
NOTE: The Turret Setup feature is only active when the machine configuration contains one, or
more Turret components.
(Stack) —The Stack icon causes VERICUT to automatically stack the tool components of
the “current” tool on top of each other. The action takes place immediately upon clicking on
the Stack button. Use the (Undo) icon described above to undo the action.
NOTE: The Stack feature is only applicable to non-turning tool components (Revolved Cutters,
Hole Making Tools, Probe Tips, Water Jet Tools, Knife Tools and Polisher Tools). In addition, the
Stack feature is not appropriate for milling inserts or any type of multi-cutter tool (like a
probing tool with multiple probe tips).
590
VERICUT Help
(Automatic Gage Offset Z) — Use this icon to have VERICUT calculate the highest point
on the Z-axis of the tool and uses it for the Gage Point whenever a tool component is modified.
This feature only applies to milling tools.
(Automatic Driven Point) — Use this icon to have VERICUT calculate the driven
point value whenever a tool component is modified.
On the Tool Manager Tool Information tab, select the Driven Point record having the value that
needs to be adjusted and then click on the Auto Driven Point icon. VERICUT will calculate and
adjust the values in the Driven Point record to reflect the tip of the tool.
(Orient) — Clicking on the part of the Orient icon displays a menu with the
following options.
Snap to Orthogonal View — Snaps the current tool in the Tool Display area to the closest
orthogonal view. Orient the tool so that it is close to the orthogonal view that you want and
then click on the Snap to Orthogonal View icon and the tool will re-orient to the exact
orthogonal view.
Orient — Opens the Tool Manager View Orient window enabling you to orient the view of a
tool or tool assembly. Features include: rotate, zoom, pan, reverse, etc.
591
VERICUT Help
Merge Tool Library window

Locations:
Tool Manager: Tool Bar, Utilities > Merge option
The Merge Tool Library window has features that enable you to quickly, and easily, merge two
tool library files.
Master Tool Library — Enter the /path/filename, of the master tool library file, in the Master
Tool Library text field or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Open file selection
window and use it to specify /path/filename of the master tool library file.
Update Tool Library — Enter the /path/filename, of the tool library file that will be merged into
the master tool library file, in the Update Tool Library text field, or click on the (Browse)
icon to display the Open file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename of
update tool library file.
For Duplicated IDs — Use to select one of the options to specify how duplicate tool IDs are to
be handled during the merge operation.
Discard All — When toggled "On", duplicate tool IDs in the Update Tool Library will be
discarded.
Overwrite All — When toggled "On", duplicate tool IDs in the Master Tool Library will be
overwritten by the ones in the Update Tool Library.
Prompt — When toggled "On", a window will display when a duplicate tool ID is
encountered, enabling you to specify whether to Discard the duplicate tool ID in the
Update Tool Library, or Overwrite duplicate tool ID in the Master Tool Library, or to Quit
the merge operation.
592
VERICUT Help
Merged Tool Library — Enter the /path/filename, for the merged tool library file, in the
Merged Tool Library text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Save Tool Library
As file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename of the merged tool library file.
OK — Starts the merge operation and closes the Merge Tool Library window.
Apply — Starts the merge operation and leaves the Merge Tool Library window open for
additional merges.
Cancel — Closes the Merge Tool Library window without doing the merge operation.
See Merging Tool Libraries, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
using the Merge Tool Library window.
593
VERICUT Help
Tool Library File Locking

A Tool Library file locking mechanism is enabled by default. When locking is enabled, a lock file
is created when a user opens a tool library file in Tool Manager. When a second user opens the
same tool library file, Tool Manager checks for the existence of a lock file. If a lock file exists, the
following warning is displayed:
where “U:\QA\vericut.tls” is the \path\filename of the Tool Library file that is already opened
and “QA” is the logon id of the user that has the file locked.
Select “OK” to open a read only version of the Tool Library file
The File menu Save, Save As, Save Selected Tool options are disabled. The options stay
disabled until a different unlocked file is loaded or by the File menu options New File or Close
are used.
The lock file name = “~vc” + tool library file name + “.lck”.
For example: ~vcvericutm.tls.lck.
The lock file is created in the same folder where the tool library file is located.
The Tool Library file locking feature can be turned off by setting an environment variable:
Set CGTECH_TOOL_LIB_LOCK=FALSE.
NOTES:
1. If the Tool Library file is read only, then no lock file will be created.
2. If unexpected VERICUT termination occurs, but the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is able
to “exit” gracefully, then the lock file is deleted. But if unexpected Java Runtime
Environment (JRE) termination occurs, then the lock file is not automatically deleted and
will have to be deleted manually.
594
VERICUT Help
Import CAD Tool window
Locations:
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > (Add New Tool after Current Tool) icon > CAD Tool
The features on the Import CAD Tool window enable you to read, extract, identify tool insert
and holder solid models from a CAD system, and then import them into VERICUT's Tool
Manager. Currently, only STEP and CATIA V5 files are supported.
595
VERICUT Help
CAD File — Use to specify the CAD file containing the tool data. Enter the /path/filename in the
CAD File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Select CAD File file selection
window to specify the /path/filename. Currently, only STEP and CATIA V5 files are supported.
Tool Type — Select Mill, or Turn to specify, the "type" of tool being imported into Tool
Manager.
Units —Use to specify the "units" of the tool to be imported into Tool Manager. Select Inch or
Millimeter. This is not the incoming units of the CAD model file since that is determined by
reading the unit setting in the CAD file.
Normals — Select Inward, or Outward to specify the direction of surface normal vector relative
to the material. Use Inward to specify that the surface normal vectors point inward towards the
material, or Outward if the surface normal vectors point away from material.
NOTE: The "Units" and "Normals" settings must be specified before the CAD File is loaded.
TDM Tool — When toggled on (checked) enables reading TDM tools into CAD Tool Import.
The following rules must be followed when creating tools in TDM for import into the Import
CAD Tool window:
1. All inserts for mill tools and turning tools will have their contours colored “green,” RGB =
(0,1,0).
2. Contours representing the revolved profile for a mill tool, that is not a revolved insert, will
have their color set to “red,” RGB = (1,0,0).
3. All contours for inserts will lie on the insert face for both mill tools and turning tools.
Revolved Axis Set Mounting Orientation — When toggled on (checked) the milling tool will be
oriented about the revolved axis. This is the default. When toggled off (unchecked) the milling
tool will be oriented as it is defined in the STEP file.
Load — Reads the specified CAD File, identifies and extracts all solid bodies and then populates
the table and displays all solid bodies in the Tool Manager Tool Display area.
Select Cutting Face — For each "Insert" type component, use the Select Cutting Face icon
to initiate the picking sequence. Pick one or more surfaces representing the cutting face of the
insert. When finished selecting the faces that represent the cutting face, click on the Select
Cutting Face icon again to end the picking sequence. You can also end the cutting sequence by
selecting the <Esc> key on your keyboard. This feature is only active when an "Insert" type
component is highlighted in the Component Table.
596
VERICUT Help
Single Surface Cutting Face Multiple Surface Cutting Face
Select Revolved Axis — For each "Revolved" type component, use the Select Revolved
Axis icon to display a coordinate system on the tool displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display
area enabling you to select the rotation axis of the revolved cutter. VERICUT will then create a
profile, similar to a profile created using the Profile Sketcher, for the revolved cutter. VERICUT
will then use the profile to calculate material removal. This feature is only active when a
"Revolved" type component is highlighted in the Component Table.
Move Revolved CSYS — This feature enables you to move the “revolved CSYS” based on
interactive mouse picks.
Component Table —
After specifying the CAD file, a record is created in the Component Table for each solid body
contained in the file. You can re-order the records in the table by clicking on the button in the
first column of the record and dragging it to the desired position.
Index — Represents the position of CAD solid body in the CAD File. For example, Index = 1
represents the first tool component in the CAD file, Index = 2 represents the second tool
component in the CAD file, etc.
ID — CAD solid body ID
Type — For each body in the table, select its "Type".
None — The None type indicates that nothing is to be done with the model. Any body in the
table designated as type "None" will NOT be transferred to VERICUT's Tool Manager.
Insert — The Insert type is used for a model representing a relatively "flat" looking insert
that is mounted in a holder. NOT something that is already "spun".
Use the Select Cutting Face feature to select curves that represent the "top" cutting
edges of the insert.
597
VERICUT Help
The tool is imported as an "Insert Cutter" in Tool Manager.

The model is imported as a 3D polygon file (.ply extension).
The "Cutting Face" is imported as a 2D sweep profile.
Holder — The Holder type is used for a model representing an object that holds another
object (typically another holder, a cutter, or an insert).
The tool is imported as a "Holder" in Tool Manager.
The model is imported as a 3D polygon file (.ply extension).
Revolved — The Revolved type is used for a model representing a typically "round" looking
cutter which is "spun" around a centerline.
Use the Select Revolved Axis feature to select the rotation axis of the revolved cutter.
VERICUT will “slice” through the model with a plane which passes through rotation axis
and one of the other axes of the displayed coordinate system to create a profile.
The tool is imported as a "Revolved Cutter" in Tool Manager.
The model is imported as a 3D polygon shape/file (.ply extension).
Blank — If unchecked, then the solid body is displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area. If
checked, then the solid body is NOT displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area.
NOTE: The CAD File may contain multiple CAD solid bodies with the same ID. So, to uniquely
identify the CAD solid bodies, the CAD solid body occurrence (Index) in the CAD File is used
along with the CAD solid body ID to uniquely identify it.
Set Selected — This feature enables you to specify the Type or Blank features described above,
to a selected group of solid bodies in the Component Table at once.
None — Use to set all of the selected bodies to Type: None.
Insert — Use to set all of the selected bodies to Type: Insert.
Holder — Use to set all of the selected bodies to Type: Holder.
Revolved — Use to set all of the selected bodies to Type: Revolved.
Blank Off — Use to toggle “off” (not checked) the Blank feature for all of the selected
bodies.
Blank On — Use to toggle “on” (checked) the Blank feature for all of the selected bodies.
Take Action — Use to apply the Set Selected settings, above, to the bodies selected in the
Component Table.
Example 1:
The following describes how to set a group of bodies in the Component Table to Type: Insert.
1. In the Component Table, select the bodies that you want to set as Inserts.
2. Select Insert from the Set Selected pull-down list.
598
VERICUT Help
3. Click on the Take Action button set the selected bodies in the Component Table to Type
= Insert.
Example 2:
The following describes how to toggle “on” (checked) the Blank feature for a group of bodies in
the Component Table so they are NOT displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area..
1. In the Component Table, select the bodies that you want to set as Blank.
2. Select Blank On from the Set Selected pull-down list.
3. Click on the Take Action button set the selected bodies in the Component Table to
Blank = checked (on). The selected bodies are now “blanked” (not displayed) in the Tool
Manager Tool Display area.
Remove reference to CAD file in the saved tool — When toggled "off" (un-checked), the
imported tool components are stored in the same CAD format that they were imported in.
When toggled "on" (checked), the imported tool components are saved as VERICUT Polygon
files.
NOTE: The Model Tolerance value specified in Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project
menu > Settings) is used when creating the VERICUT Polygon (.ply) files.
Add New Tool — Creates a new tool in Tool Manager with all table entries not defined as Type
= "None".
Append To Tool — Appends all table entries not defined as Type = "None" to the currently
selected tool in Tool Manager.
Cancel — Closes the CAD Geometry window.
See Import CAD Tool Component Models Using the CAD Geometry window, also in the Project
Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for information about using the Milling Tool Wizard.
599
VERICUT Help
Search Tool window
Locations:
Project menu > Tools: Right-click Tool list Area > Add Tool > Search Tool
Project menu > Tools: Right-click Tool list Area > Search Tool
Project menu > Tools: Add Tool > Search Tool
The Search Tool window enables you to search existing tool libraries for tools with specific
attributes.
600
VERICUT Help
Libraries group:
Include Current Library — When toggled "on" (checked), records matching the search
attributes in the current library are included in the search results.
Files — Use to search one or more tool library files for tools meeting the specified search
criteria.
Directories — Use to search one or more directories of tool library files for tools meeting the
specified search criteria.
Browse — Displays a selection window to assist you in selecting the files/directories to be
searched.
Tool group:
ID — Search for the specified tool ID.
Description — Search for a specified string of text within the tool's Description field.
Comments — Search for a specified string of text within the tool's Comment field.
Units — Select Any, Inch or Millimeter from the pull-down list.
Component Type — Use to search for tools that include a specific tool component type. Select
Any, Revolved Cutter, Insert Cutter, Probe Tip, Tap, Water Jet, Knife, Polisher or Holder from
the pull-down list.
Teeth — Use to search for tools containing cutters with a specific number of teeth.
To — Use with Teeth above to specify a range of number of teeth. For example, for a range of 2
to 4 teeth, enter a 2 in the Teeth field and a 4 in the corresponding To field.
Tool Type — Use to search for tools of a specified type. Select Any, Mill, Turn, Probe, Tap,
Water Jet, Knife or Polish from the pull-down list.
Revolved Cutter group:

Diameter — Use to search for revolved cutters with a specific diameter.
To — Use with Diameter above to specify a range of diameters. Enter one end of the range in
the Diameter field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Flute Length — Use to search for revolved cutters with a specific flute length.
To — Use with Flute Length above to specify a range of flute lengths. Enter one end of the
range in the Flute Length field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Height — Use to search for revolved cutters with a specific height.
To — Use with Height above to specify a range of heights. Enter one end of the range in the
Height field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
601
VERICUT Help
Corner Radius — Use to search for revolved cutters with a specific corner radius.
To — Use with Corner Radius above to specify a range of corner radii. Enter one end of the
range in the Corner Radius field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Insert Cutter group:

Insert Style — Use to search for a specific insert style (General, Groove, or Thread). Select one
of the following insert styles from the pull-down list"
Insert Style Description
Any
85 Degree
GENERAL INSERT A
Parallelogram
82 Degree
GENERAL INSERT B
Parallelogram
Inch Millimeter
80 Degree
GENERAL INSERT C
Diamond
602
VERICUT Help
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT C 100 Degree

100 Diamond
Inch Millimeter
55 Degree
GENERAL INSERT D
Diamond
Inch Millimeter
75 Degree
GENERAL INSERT E
Diamond
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT H Hexagon
603
VERICUT Help
55 Degree
GENERAL INSERT K
Parallelogram
GENERAL INSERT L Rectangle
Inch Millimeter
86 Degree
GENERAL INSERT M
Diamond
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT O Octagon
604
VERICUT Help
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT P Pentagon
GENERAL INSERT R Round
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT S Square
Inch Millimeter
GENERAL INSERT T Triangle
605
VERICUT Help
Inch Millimeter
35 Degree
GENERAL INSERT V
Diamond
Inch Millimeter
80 Degree
GENERAL INSERT W
Trigon
Inch Millimeter
Custom
GENERAL INSERT CD
Diamond
Custom
GENERAL INSERT CP
Parallelogram
606
VERICUT Help
Square,
GROOVE INSERT S2
double end
Radius,
GROOVE INSERT R2
double end
40 Degree V,
GROOVE INSERT V2
double end
45 Degree
GROOVE INSERT C2 Chamfer,
double end
Square, single
GROOVE INSERT S1
end
607
VERICUT Help
Chamfer,
GROOVE INSERT C1
single end
Round, single
GROOVE INSERT O1
end
Radius, single
GROOVE INSERT R1
end
Inch Millimeter
55 Degree,
THREAD INSERT T55
triangle
608
VERICUT Help
Inch Millimeter
60 Degree,
THREAD INSERT T60
triangle
Inch Millimeter
30 Degree,
THREAD INSERT TT trapeze
triangle
Inch Millimeter
ACME,
THREAD INSERT TA
triangle
Inch Millimeter
Buttress,
THREAD INSERT TBR triangle, right
hand
609
VERICUT Help
Inch Millimeter
Buttress,
THREAD INSERT TBL triangle, left
hand
60 Degree,
THREAD INSERT A60 double end,
asymmetrical
60 Degree,
THREAD INSERT S60 double end,
symmetric
ACME, double
THREAD INSERT DA
end
610
VERICUT Help
Buttress,
THREAD INSERT TDB
double end
Insert Size — Use to search for insert cutters with a specific insert size.
To — Use with Insert Size above to specify a range of insert sizes. Enter one end of the range in
the Insert Size field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Thickness — Use to search for insert cutters with a specific thickness.
To — Use with Thickness above to specify a range of insert thicknesses. Enter one end of the
range in the Thickness field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Corner Radius — Use to search for insert cutters with a specific corner radius.
To — Use with Corner Radius above to specify a range of corner radii. Enter one end of the
range in the Corner Radius field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
611
VERICUT Help
Probe Tip group:

Sphere Diameter — Use to search for probe tips with a specific sphere diameter (or within a
diameter range).
To — Use with Sphere Diameter above to specify a range of sphere diameters. Enter one end of
the range in the Sphere Diameter field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To
field.
Stem Diameter — Use to search for probe tips with a specific stem diameter (or within a
diameter range).
To — Use with Stem Diameter above to specify a range of stem diameters. Enter one end of
the range in the Stem Diameter field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To
field.
Probe Length — Use to search for probe tips with a specific length (or within a length range).
To — Use with Probe Length above to specify a range of lengths. Enter one end of the range in
the Probe Length field and the other end of the range in the corresponding To field.
Holder group:
ID — Use to search for a holder with a specific ID.
Search — Start the search of the specified tool library (libraries) based on the attributes
specified above.
Tool List:
Displays a list of the tools found during the search. The Tool List display and interaction is the
same as the Tool Table in the Tool Manager, with the one exception that the tool library file
name is also displayed here.
Duplicate — Duplicates the selected tool in the current tool library.

Reference — Creates a reference to the selected tool in the current tool library.
Close — Closes the Search Tool window.
See Copy a Tool Assembly or Tool Component from a Different Tool Library, also in the Project
Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for information on using the Search Tool window.
612
VERICUT Help
Using the Search Tool window
613
VERICUT Help
Copy a Tool Assembly or Tool Component from a Different

Tool Library
Use the procedures below to copy a tool assembly, or tool component, from an existing Tool
Library file to the current Tool Library file. The following assumes that the Tool Manager
window is already open and that an existing tool library has been opened to add the new tool
assembly, or tool component to. If necessary, refer to the following topics below:
Accessing the Tool Manager

Open an Existing Tool Library File
NOTE: Remember to save the Tool Library file with the modified tool information when you
finish. If necessary, refer to Save a Tool Library File below.
1. In the Tool Manager Tool List Area, right-click on the tool ID that the copied tool is to be
added after and then select Search Tool or Add Tool > Search Tool from the menu that
displays to display the Search Tool window.
2. In the Search Tool window, specify the Tool Library file(s), or folder of Library Files that you
want to search for the tool assembly in. Either type the /path/filename(s) of the Tool Library
file(s) or the /path/ to the Tool Library file folder, or click on the (Browse) icon and use
the file selection window that displays to specify them.
3. All of the tool assemblies contained in the specified libraries are displayed in the bottom
part of the Search Tool window. Double-click the tool ID, or click on the "+" sign to expand
the tool assembly in the table so that you can see its components. Click on the "-" sign to
collapse the tool assembly. You can also right-click and select Expand All to expand all of
the tool assemblies at one time. Right-click and select Hide Tool Components to collapse all
of the tool assemblies at one time.
4. Use the search criteria in the top of the Search Tool window to define the tool assembly
that you are looking for then select Search. The Tool table will update showing only the
tools that meet the criteria that you specified. Continue adding search criteria and selecting
Search as needed to further narrow down the number of tool assemblies displayed in the
Tool table. At any time during your search you can go back to the complete tool component
list by selecting Show All. Then you can re-start your search using different search criteria.
5. Once you Search the tool that you are looking for, select it in the Tool table so that it
becomes highlighted and click on either Duplicate to duplicate the tool assembly in the
current Tool Library file, or Reference to create a reference to the tool assembly in the
current Tool Library file.
614
VERICUT Help
6. Repeat the above procedure to search for other tools, or click on Close to close the Search
Tool window.
NOTE: You can also use the procedure described above to copy individual tool components
(cutter, insert, or holder) from tool assemblies in a different tool library.
See Tool Manager window and Search Tool window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
615
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window
Locations:
Project menu > Tools: Right-click in Tool List Area > Add OptiPath
Project menu > Tools: Tool Bar > Add Component pull-down menu > OptiPath
Opens the OptiPath window in the center of the Tool Manager window enabling you to create
and maintain OptiPath records that describe how to optimize feed rates and/or spindle speeds
for various tools and cutting conditions. The OptiPath data is used by VERICUT during tool path
optimization. The OptiPath window shows the optimization values for the selected tool.
616
VERICUT Help
OptiPath record data

Description — Use to enter a description for the OptiPath record.
Material — Stock material to be cut. Enter a new material name, or click on the arrow to select
from a list of materials defined in the library. Any combination of alpha or numeric characters
can be used.
Machine — NC machine that will be used to cut the workpiece. Enter a new machine name, or
click on the arrow to select from a list of machines defined in the library. Any combination of
alpha or numeric characters can be used.
Teeth — Displays the number of teeth that the tool has.
Unit Power — Power that is required to remove one cubic unit of material per minute. The
power specification differs, depending on the units set for the OptiPath record (ref. OptiPath
window: Settings tab also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Accel/Decel — When Accel/Decel is active, and a G-Code NC program is being optimized, this
feature applies Accel/Decel settings from the NC machine configuration to adjust optimized
feed rates. VERICUT looks ahead in the NC program file and slows the machine prior to
direction changes, as well as changes feed rates based on the machine axes ability to accelerate
and decelerate.
Options:
Off — Does not adjust optimized feed rates for acceleration/deceleration.
Exact Stop — Assumes all axes must stop and be positioned exactly at the programmed
location before the next block is processed. This option is recommended when sharp
corners are required between motion blocks.
Continuous — Allows small errors in positioning in order to maintain a more constant
velocity during corners or direction changes.
NOTES:
1. The block preceding an un-optimized block is not processed through Accel/Decel logic.
2. Accel/Decel settings apply to all linear and circular motions, including those in air.
3. This Accel/Decel setting is used to calculate OptiPath feedrates and cycle times. They
are unrelated to the Accel/Decel settings in the in the Modeling window: Component
Attributes tab.
OptiPath Cutter Shape Graphic — The OptiPath Cutter Shape Graphic automatically displays for
the tool, in the Tool Library, that the OptiPath record is associated with. VERICUT refers to the
cutter shape to calculate material removal volume and other machining related data via
features on the OptiPath Manager Feed/Speed tab.
617
VERICUT Help
Feed/Speed tab — Features on this tab are used to describe and test various cutting conditions
to optimize, as well as control how optimization will be performed for the selected tool.
Tip: Watch the white message area in the middle of the OptiPath window for hints on using
Optimization Method features as you select them on the Feed/Speed tab.
Settings tab — Features on this tab specify important settings for the optimization process,
such as: the OptiPath record units, when to add (interpolate) more cuts, resolution,
minimum/maximum optimized feed rates, how to optimize circle and NURBS motions, and
more.
Limits tab — The features on this tab enable you to specify limits for cutting characteristics
(feedrate, cut depth, volume removal rate, chip thickness, surface speed and RPM) for milling
cutters and drills. It does not apply to turning tools.
Hard Material tab — The features on this tab enable you to adjust the optimized feed rate for
‘hostile’ cutting conditions (non-climb, thin radial width, and side-loaded cuts) when cutting
hard materials.
Plunge tab — The features on this tab control the optimized feed rate for motions along the
tool axis that plunge into or retract from material.
Entry/Exit tab — The features on this tab control the optimized feed rate for entering and
exiting material.
Angle tab — The features on this tab adjust the optimized feed rate for 3-axis linear cuts
ramping in material.
Depth Table tab — The features on this tab controls how optimized feed rates are calculated
for cutting at various depths during Optimize by Tables optimization.
Width Table tab — The features on this tab adjust the optimized feed rate for cuts that are less
than full cutter width during Optimize by Tables optimization.
Add — Adds the OptiPath data and optimization parameters to the newly created OptiPath
record.
Modify — Applies the modified OptiPath data and optimization parameters to an existing
OptiPath record.
Close— Closes the OptiPath Manager window.
See Using the OptiPath Window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
using the features in the OptiPath window.
618
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Feed/Speed tab
Locations:
Features on this tab are used to describe and test various cutting conditions to optimize, as well
as control how optimization will be performed for the selected tool. As methods are selected,
some of the features become locked (unavailable for editing). However, they respond to show
you the relationships between feed per tooth, RPM, cutter shape, and feed rate through
various cutting conditions. In general, this is a three step process:
1. Configure the features in the Cutting Condition group to represent a known successful
cutting condition which is typical for the tool.
2. Select the desired optimization method(s).
3. Again use the Cutting Condition group to test how optimization will be performed.
After configuring the features on this tab, be sure to review the other tabs in the OptiPath
window for proper optimization values.
619
VERICUT Help
Cutting Condition group:

This group of features is used to describe and test various machining conditions to optimize.
You can enter or adjust the sliders to set the desired values. As values change, the cutter
graphic is updated to reflect the current cutting condition. The unit of measure for the values is
determined by the units selected on the Settings tab.
NOTE: If the sliders don't go far enough to reach the desired value or the value in the
corresponding data field turns red, then another optimization setting is limiting input. If all
settings on the Feed/Speed tab look okay, then check values on the Settings tab, such as
Maximum/Minimum Cut feed rates.
Axial Depth / Radial Width — Depth and width of cut.
Feed per Minute — Feed rate calculated from feed per tooth, spindle speed, and number of
cutting teeth on the cutter.
Feed per Tooth — Thickness of material or "chip load" removed by each tooth on the cutter.
Optimization Method group:

This group of features is used to control how optimization will be performed for the selected
tool. Note that all methods optimize air cuts (tool motions not in contact with material).
However, the Air Cut Feed Rate method optimizes only the cuts entirely in air.
Tips:
1. Watch the white message area in the middle of the OptiPath window for hints on using
Optimization Method features as you select them on the Feed/Speed tab.
2. When Chip Thickness and Volume Removal methods are combined (both selected),
VERICUT calculates optimized feed rates for each, then uses the feed rate having the
smaller value. This has the affect of protecting you against excessive chip thickness or
volume conditions that can occur using only one of these optimization methods.
Chip Thickness — When selected, optimizes cutting by flat, ball, and bull nose endmills based
on maintaining a specified chip thickness. This method increases the feed rate when width of
cut is less than 50% cutter diameter, or when depth of cut is less than the tool corner radius.
Good for optimizing high speed machining and for semi-finishing and finishing operations using
carbide cutting tools where the danger of "chip thinning" exists. It is especially effective for
mold and die applications machining hard materials. Use the slide bar or enter the chip
thickness in the data field. If unknown, unselect all optimization methods and use the Cutting
Condition sliders to calculate it.
Volume Removal — When selected, optimizes based on a constant volume of material to be
removed. This option is good for optimizing tools that encounter widely varying cutting
620
VERICUT Help
conditions, such as hogging or roughing operations that cut at different cut depths and widths.
Use the slide bar or enter the volume removal rate (cubic units) in the data field. If unknown,
unselect all optimization methods and use the Cutting Condition sliders to calculate it.
Spindle Speed — When selected, outputs spindle speed values that support optimized feed
rates. This value is also considered for Cutting Condition calculations (see above). Use the slide
bar or enter the spindle speed (revolutions per minute) in the data field.
Surface Speed — When selected, optimizes feed rates and spindle speeds based on constant
surface speed (CSS). Good for optimizing finish machining by ball or bull-nosed end mills and
high speed machining, this option varies spindle speeds to maintain a constant surface speed at
the maximum tool contact diameter. Feed rates are adjusted to maintain a constant feed per
tooth ("chip load") in material. Use the slide bar or enter the CSS value in feet/minute (FM) for
inch tool paths, meters/minute (MM) for metric tool paths. If unknown, unselect all
optimization methods and use the Cutting Condition sliders to calculate it. Use features on the
Spindle tab to limit RPM fluctuations and specify the feed per tooth load to be maintained.
NOTE: CSS optimization is for use on high speed NC machines capable of varying spindle
speed quickly without harming spindle motor hardware.
Spindle Power — Power required that is required to remove material. The value entered differs
depending on the active units for the OptiPath record:
Inch units => horsepower required to remove 1 cubic inch of material
Metric units => kilowatts required to remove 1 cubic centimeter of material per second
Air Cut Feed Rate — This option is useful for reducing time of proven tool paths, without
affecting cutting feed rates and resulting surface finishes. When the checkbox is cleared, this
feature controls the feed rate used by all other optimization methods to optimize air cuts.
Default option — when selected, the air cut feed rate is determined as follows:
G-Code NC program = The setup’s maximum feed rate value for the machine's first linear
component.
APT NC program = The setup’s Fast Feed value.
To specify an air cut feed rate value, clear the Default checkbox and enter a value in the data
field. The feed rate entered should reflect the maximum speed at which machine axes can
move simultaneously in feed mode (e.g. G01).
Optimize by Tables — When selected, optimizes based on specified feed rates for various cut
depths, widths, and angles. This option is good for optimizing tools used in hogging or roughing
operations where more control over cutting feed rates for various cut depths, widths, or angles
is desired. Use the features on the Depth Table, Width Table, and Angle tabs to configure
settings for this method.
Fill — Automatically fills table data fields with values calculated using the Cutting Condition
sliders. The following values are supplied:
621
VERICUT Help
Depth Table — defines five equally spaced cut depths based on cutter height and a cutting feed
rate for each, based on volume of material removed. Also supplies the calculated volume
removal rate for the value for Max. Volume Removal Rate.
Width Table — calculates a percentage of calculated feed rate for each % Width value based on
volume of material removed.
To OptiPath window
622
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Settings tab
Locations:
Features on this tab specify important settings for the optimization process, such as: the
OptiPath record units, when to add (interpolate) more cuts, resolution, minimum/maximum
optimized feed rates, how to optimize circle and NURBS motions, and more.
Modify Existing Cuts Only — When selected, this option calculates the most efficient feed rate
for each motion. VERICUT uses the Resolution value (see below) to divide each motion into
samples and calculates an optimum feed rate for each sample. The feed rate calculated for the
sample with the most severe cutting conditions is retained as the optimized feed rate for that
motion. This option is recommended when disk space is limited for storing optimized tool path
data, or when tool positions are relatively close together. A tool path optimized with this choice
has more efficient feed rates and the same or slightly more records than the original.
623
VERICUT Help
Sample optimization results using the Modify Existing Cuts Only option:
Add More Cuts — Similar to Modify Existing Cuts Only except motions are divided up when
cutting conditions warrant feed rate changes. A tool path optimized with this choice has very
efficient feed rates, but many more records than the original. The Minimum Feedrate Change
value (see below) controls the quantity of feed rates output to the optimized tool path file. This
option is recommended when disk space is ample, or when optimizing widely varying cutting
conditions, such as: intermittent cutting, deep versus shallow cuts, etc.
624
VERICUT Help
Sample optimization results using the Add More Cuts option:
Inch / Millimeter options — Controls the unit measurement system in which optimization data
is entered. If the OptiPath record units are different from the session units, the record values
are converted appropriately when loaded.
Resolution — Controls the frequency or "sampling distance" used to analyze each tool path
motion. Each feed rate controlled motion is partitioned into samples based on this distance.
The samples are then analyzed during feed rate calculation.
Options:
Distance — Uses the sampling distance in the corresponding data field. Distance is measured
along the tool motion. Using a resolution equal to 1/2 to 1/4 of the tool diameter is
recommended.
Auto — Automatically calculates the resolution distance based on the size of the cutting tool
relative to the displayed model. This choice is recommended when little or no knowledge of
cutting methods or feed rates is available.
625
VERICUT Help
Example of Resolution applied when optimizing tool path motions:
Minimum Feedrate Change — Specifies the minimum change from the current optimized feed
rate that will cause a new optimized feed rate to be output. This feature controls the quantity
of feed rates output to the optimized tool path file. A small value causes more optimized feed
rates to be output than when a larger value is entered.
Default option — When selected, sets the default Minimum Feedrate Change = 1 IPM or 25
MMPM, whichever applies.
Clean-up Feedrate — Feed rate used when the tool is adjacent to, but not removing material.
This condition is commonly referred to as a "spring pass".
Default option — When selected, sets the default clean-up feed rate as follows:
G-Code NC program = 50% of the setup’s maximum feed rate value for the machine's first linear
component.
APT NC program = 50% of the Fast Feed value.
Tip: Set the Clean-up Feedrate to be less than the Air Cut Feedrate, since actual cutting leaves
small amounts of material from tool deflection.
Circle Feedrate — Controls when and how feed rates are optimized for circular motions (e.g.
G02-3). Circle feed rate optimization produces a single optimized feed rate for the entire
circular motion regardless of the active Modify Existing Cuts Only or Add More Cuts option.
Options:
Programmed — Uses the original programmed feed rate.
Fixed — Uses the feed rate in the corresponding data field.
Optimize — Calculates an optimized feed rate based on the maximum material removed
throughout the circular motion.
626
VERICUT Help
Break-up — OptiPath will attempt to break up circles only if both this option and the Add More
Cuts option has been selected.
For APT, only one output format is supported:
CIRCLE/ xc, yc, zc, i, j, k, rad - defines circle center, plane and radius
GOTO/x,y,z,ijk - defines the ending point of the motion
Circle feed rates are not optimized under the conditions listed below. These circles receive the
original programmed feed rate.
 helical (spiral) circle motions
 circle motion where the tool axis is not perpendicular to the circle axis
 G-code data circle motion programmed in inverse time feed rate mode (e.g. G93)
 APT Circles, for Tool Path Types other than VERICUT APT, are not broken up and will not
be optimized.
Radius Control — When toggled On, OptiPath adjusts the feedrate for circular motions. During
circle motions, OptiPath determines the maximum contact point away from the tool center line
and adjusts the feed rate so the desired feed rate is achieved at that point. Radius Control is
only available when Circle Feedrate is set to Optimize or Break-up.
NOTE: If the effective cutting radius, R, is bigger than the circle radius, r, OptiPath adjusts
(lowers) the feedrate by the factor r/R which is < 1. If R is less than r (r/R > 1), no adjustment is
done (OptiPath will not increase the feedrate calculated based on the tool center).
NURBS Feedrate — Controls when and how to optimize NURBS motion feed rates (e.g. G06,
G06.2). The active Modify Existing Cuts Only or Add More Cuts option does not affect feed
rates calculated by this feature.
Options:
Programmed — Uses the original programmed feed rate.
One Feedrate — Calculates the most efficient feed rate for NURBS motions. The feed rate
calculated for the most severe cutting condition used as the optimized feed rate.
Multi Feedrate — Calculates multiple feed rates for NURBS motions when cutting conditions
warrant feed rate changes.
Feedrate Wear Reduction — Reduces the calculated feed rate based on the amount of material
that has been removed. The value entered is the percentage of reduction to be applied after
each cubic unit of material removed. Zero indicates no adjustment for wear.
Example: assume "Feedrate Wear Reduction=.2". The calculated feed rate is reduced .2% after
each cubic unit of material has been removed. After five cubic units removed the calculated
feed rate is reduced 1% (.2% x 5).
Minimum RPM Change — Specifies the minimum change from the current optimized spindle
speed required to output a new spindle speed. This feature controls the quantity of spindle
627
VERICUT Help
speed changes output to the optimized tool path file. Small Minimum RPM Change values,
cause more spindle speed changes to be output than larger values.
Tip: Start with a value such that only 3-4 changes can occur across the RPM range.
Default option — When selected, sets the default minimum RPM change = 1000.
To OptiPath window
628
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Limits tab
Locations:
The features on this tab enable you to specify limits for cutting characteristics (feedrate, cut
depth, volume removal rate, chip thickness, surface speed, RPM and tool wear) for milling
cutters and drills. It does not apply to turning tools.
Minimum Cut Feedrate — Specifies the minimum optimized feed rates that can be output
when removing material.
Default option — When selected, sets the default minimum feed rate = 1 IPM or 25 MMPM.
629
VERICUT Help
Maximum Cut Feedrate — Specifies the maximum optimized feed rates that can be output
Default option — When selected, sets the default maximum feed rate as follows:
G-Code NC program = 90% of the Default Clean-up Feedrate.
(Default Clean-up Feedrate = 50% of the setup’s maximum
feedrate value for the machine's first linear component)
APT NC program = 90% of the Default Clean-up Feedrate
(Default Clean-up Feedrate = 50% of the Fast Feed value).
Maximum Cut Depth — Specifies the maximum cut depth that can be output when removing
material.
Ignore — When selected, the Maximum Cut Depth limit is ignored.
Maximum Volume Removal Rate — Specifies the maximum volume removal rate that can be
output when removing material.
Ignore — When selected, the Maximum Volume Removal Rate limit is ignored.
Maximum Chip Thickness — Specifies the maximum chip thickness that can be output when
removing material.
Ignore — When selected, the Maximum Chip Thickness limit is ignored.
Clean-up Volume Tolerance — The Clean-up Volume Tolerance is to force OptiPath to output a
clean-up feedrate for cuts which remove very small amounts of material. If the Clean-up
Volume Tolerance value is positive, OptiPath outputs a clean-up feedrate on blocks removing
material with a removed volume less than the specified Clean-up Volume Tolerance value. The
default value is 0. Previously, OptiPath output Max Cut Feedrate on blocks with very small
volume removal.
The Clean-up Volume Tolerance value is only applied to 3-axis and circular cuts. Other OptiPath
settings might override the new logic if a corresponding condition occurs: Entry/Exit, Plunge,
and Accel/Deccel. The new setting is applied to circular cuts only if the Circle Feedrate option
on the Settings tab is set to Optimized or Break-up.
The Clean-up Volume Tolerance value can be changed during simulation using the OptiSettings
macro with Override Text = CLEANUP_VOLUME_TOL.
Maximum Surface Speed — Specifies the maximum surface speed rate that can be output
Ignore — When selected, the Maximum Surface Speed limit is ignored.
Minimum RPM — Specifies the minimum spindle speed that can be output during optimization.
Default option — When selected, sets the default minimum RPM as follows:
630
VERICUT Help
G-Code NC program => machine spindle minimum set by SpindleSpeedMin macro, if not set
then 100 RPM.
APT NC program — 100 RPM.
Maximum RPM — Specifies the maximum spindle speed that can be output during
optimization.
Default option — When selected, sets the default maximum RPM as follows:
G-Code NC program — machine spindle maximum set by SpindleSpeedMax macro, if not
set then 20000 RPM.
APT NC program — 20000 RPM.
Tool Wear Limits

The features in this section enable you to specify limits for tool wear based on time, distance
and volume of material removed. OptiPath will track these values for each tool and when the
values exceed corresponding max limit settings, warning messages are issued to the logger and
log file.
Tool wear limit checking is turned on by the Check Cutting Limits feature on the Project Tree
Configure Setup menu, Motion tab.
Maximum Cut Time — Use this feature to specify the maximum cut time value that will cause a
tool wear Warning message to be output. The Maximum Cut Time is the accumulated time a
tool can spend removing material.
Ignore — When selected (checked), the Maximum Cut Time limit is ignored.
Maximum Cut Distance — Use this feature to specify the maximum cut distance value that will
cause a tool wear Warning message to be output. The Maximum Cut Distance is the
accumulated distance traveled while removing material.
Ignore — When selected (checked), the Maximum Cut Distance limit is ignored.
Maximum Cut Volume — Use this feature to specify the maximum cut volume value that will
cause a tool wear Warning message to be output. The Maximum Cut Volume is the maximum
allowed volume of the removed material.
Ignore — When selected (checked), the Maximum Cut Volume limit is ignored.
To OptiPath window
631
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Hard Material tab
Locations:
Features on this tab enable you to specify feedrate adjustment factors for special cutting
conditions encountered during the optimization process
Feedrates may need to be adjusted (typically slower than what OptiPath would normally
calculate) based on the following 'hostile' conditions when cutting hard materials.
These hostile conditions generally occur when cutting hard or difficult to machine materials
such as tool steel, stainless steel, and high temperature alloys. Since there is no good scientific
or empirical information to apply to these hostile conditions, the following features enable you
to adjust the feed rates under each of these Hard Material conditions.
Each feature consists of a checkbox to toggle the feature on/off, and a numeric field enabling
you to enter a factor to be applied to the calculated feed rate for each of these conditions. The
number represents a percentage of the calculated feed rate.
632
VERICUT Help
When a feature is toggled "on", the factor is applied to the calculated feedrate each time that
the particular condition is detected.
Since these cutting conditions are not mutually exclusive, any combination (or all) of the
features can be toggled "on" at the same time and any, or all, of the factors may be applied to
the same calculated feed rate as appropriate for the cutting conditions.
Manager window for proper optimization values.
Adjust Feedrate for Non-Climb Cut —
Non-Climb, or "Conventional", cutting occurs when the cutter tooth enters material close to
parallel to the direction of motion. See the following diagram:
The cutting condition worsens as the tooth entry angle decreases. When the tooth entry angle
is near zero the cutting edge contacts material parallel to the direction of motion and requires
excessive force to push the edge into material. The tooth finally enters material when pressure
between the cutter and material increases and the tooth rotates past the tangent contact.
The picture below shows the worst condition.
633
VERICUT Help
Adjust Feedrate for Thin Radial Width Cut —

A thin radial width cut, typically only has one tooth engaged in material. When the width of
material becomes so small that only one tooth of the cutter is engaged, the tool is no longer
well supported and an otherwise reasonable feed rate becomes too aggressive. As the spindle
spins the tool transitions between a tooth engaged and cutting, and no tooth engaged, causing
the tooth to "bang" into material each time it enters. This "banging" causes premature cutting
edge breakdown and reduces tool life.
Determining the number of teeth engaged depends on the number of teeth in the cutter, the
material contact axial depth, the width and location of the contact, and the flute helix angle.
Adjust Feedrate for Side-Loaded Cut —

A side-loaded cut, is a condition where material is exclusively on the "climb" side of the cutter
When the tool is cutting with all material on the right of the tool center (for a clockwise rotating
spindle), the cutting pressure forces the tool to deflect in the opposite direction. The deflection
seriously affects cutting performance, increases cutting forces, and causes premature edge
breakdown.
To OptiPath window
634
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Plunge tab
Locations:
The features on this tab control the optimized feed rate for motions along the tool axis that
plunge into or retract from material.
Plunge Feedrate — Controls when and how feed rates are calculated for plunging along the
tool axis into material.
Options:
Off — Disable plunge feed rate control.
Feed/Minute — Uses the feed rate entered in the corresponding data field.
635
VERICUT Help
% of Prog. — Adjusts programmed feed rates based on the percentage entered in the
corresponding data field. 100% uses the programmed feed rate as is, 50% cuts the feed rate in
half, etc.
NOTE: Plunge Feedrate overrides Angle table feed rate for 90 degree cutting angle (plunge
motion), or the Entry Feedrate for entry on plunge motions.
Clearance Distance — Specifies the distance from material to instate the feed rate for plunging.
Retract Feedrate — Controls when and how the feed rates are calculated for retracting along
the tool axis away from material.
Options:
Off — Disable retract feed rate control.
% of Prog. — Adjusts the programmed feed rate based on the percentage entered in the
corresponding data field. 100% uses the programmed feed rate as is, 50% cuts feed rate in half,
etc.
NOTE: Retract Feedrate overrides Angle table feedrate for -90 degree cutting angle (retract
motion).
To OptiPath window
636
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Entry/Exit tab
Locations:
The features on this tab control the optimized feed rate for entering and exiting material. The
feed rate takes affect at a specified distance from material contact and remains in effect until
the tool has cut a specified distance into material, or the entry motion ends.
637
VERICUT Help
The following picture illustrates where the Entry/Exit tab features occur during an actual cutting
sequence.
How accurately the NC motion blocks hit the actual values in the OptiPath record depends
entirely on OptiPath resolution and the simulation Cut Tolerance. The following summarizes
how the values of NC motions are output by OptiPath:
 Entry Clearance distance is equal to or slightly greater than the setting.
 Entry Cut distance is equal to or slightly greater than the setting.
 Exit Cut distance is equal to or slightly greater than the setting.
 Exit Clearance distance is equal to or slightly greater than the setting.
Entry Feedrate — Use to specify when, and how, feed rates are calculated for entering
material.
Options:
Off — Turns off Entry (or Exit) Feedrate calculation and application during optimization.
% of Prog. — Adjusts the programmed feed rate based on the percentage entered in the
corresponding data field. 100% uses the programmed feed rate as is, 50% cuts feed rate in half,
etc.
% of Calc. — Similar to % of Prog. except adjusts the calculated feed rate.
Clearance Distance — Use to specify the distance before entering material to start applying the
specified Entry Feedrate.
Cut Distance — Use to specify the distance to cut into material, using the Entry Feedrate,
before normal feed rate optimization resumes.
638
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. When entry motions are optimized with the Modify Existing Cuts Only option, calculated
entry feed rates are considered among other cutting conditions to determine the
appropriate feed rate for motions which enter material.
2. Plunge Feedrate overrides entry controlled feed rate for entry on plunge motions.
Exit Feedrate — Use to specify when, and how, feed rates are calculated for exiting material.
Options are same as described above for Entry Feedrate.
Cut Distance — Specifies the distance before breaking out of material. For the part of the
motion inside material, but within the Cut Distance from the exit point, the exit feedrate is
output ONLY to slow the cutter down. In other words, within the Cut Distance the minimum of
the Exit feedrate and the calculated optimized feedrate is output.
NOTE: OptiPath does not currently support situations requiring more than one block to
transition the tool from material to air.
Clearance Distance — Specifies the distance after breaking free from material to continue using
the Exit Feedrate, after which the Air Cut Feedrate begins.
To OptiPath window
639
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Angle tab
Locations:
The features on this tab adjust the optimized feed rate for 3-axis linear cuts ramping in
material. While these features are normally used to reduce the feed rate for ramping
downward, they can also be used to affect feed rates for upward ramping motions.
Adjust Feedrate for Entry Angle — When active, adjusts feed rates for ramping motions based
on the table configuration.
Angle table — Table of cut angles and corresponding % feed rate adjustments to apply when
the tool ramps into material. Values can be entered or supplied via dragging the control points
on the graph. Add after, or delete table entries via right-clicking on them and choosing the
appropriate option (or use the Add / Delete buttons below the table). Cuts at angles less than
the minimum listed in the table receive the adjustment specified for the minimum angle.
Similarly, when the maximum specified cut angle is exceeded, the adjustment specified for the
maximum angle is used.
640
VERICUT Help
Angle column — Lists up to five cut angles (in descending order) that describe the range of
expected cut angles to adjust. Values can be from -90 to 90, where "0" represents horizontal
milling, "90" represents plunge motion along the tool axis, and "-90" represents retract motion.
% Feedrate column — Lists % feed rate adjustments to apply to calculated feed rates when
ramping in material at the corresponding angle. 100% uses the calculated feed rate as is, 50%
cuts feed rate in half, etc.
Sample Angle table:
NOTES:
1. Angle adjusted feedrate for 90 degree cutting angle is overridden by Plunge Feedrate if
active.
2. Planar milling motions (0 degree angle) are not adjusted.
To OptiPath window
641
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Depth Table tab
Locations:
The features on this tab controls how optimized feed rates are calculated for cutting at various
depths during Optimize by Tables optimization. The calculated feed rate can be used as
calculated or adjusted using the Angle and/or Width tables, as well as features on other tabs in
this window.
NOTE: This tab is only available when the Optimize by Tables option on the Feed/Speed tab is
toggled “on” (checked).
Feedrate value type option list — Controls the how to interpret the feed rates in the Depth
table.
642
VERICUT Help
Options:
Feed/Minute — Calculates optimized feed rates based on absolute feed rates specified for
various cut depths. Specify feed in units specified on the Settings tab.
% of Prog. — Calculates optimized feed rates based on percentages of programmed feed rates
specified for various cut depths. "100" uses the programmed feed rate as is, "50" cuts the feed
rate in half, etc.
Feed/Tooth — Calculates optimized feed rates based on feed per tooth, or chip load specified
for various cut depths. Specify feed per tooth in units used by the tool path file (IPR or MMPR).
Depth table — Table of cut depths and corresponding feed rates to apply when cutting at a
specified depth. Values can be entered or supplied via dragging the control points on the graph.
Add after, or delete table entries via right-clicking on them and choosing the appropriate option
(or use the Add / Delete buttons below the table). Cuts at depths less than the minimum listed
depth in the table receive the feed rate specified for the minimum depth.
Depth column — Lists up to five cut depths (in descending order) that describe the range of
cutting by the tool.
Feedrate column — Lists feed rates to apply when the tool is cutting at the corresponding
depths. Feed rate values are interpreted differently based on the active feed rate value type
option (see "Feedrate value type option list" above).
Sample Depth table:
Tip: Un-select all optimization methods and use the Cutting Condition sliders to determine
appropriate feeds and speeds for a known successful cutting condition, then select Optimize by
Tables and press Fill to automatically enter Depth Table values.
Feedrate Control Options — Controls when and how volume removal rate is considered in feed
rate calculations during optimization by tables.
643
VERICUT Help
Options:
Off — Disable volume removal rate considerations.
Const. Volume Below Min. Depth — Specifies a constant volume of material is to be removed
when the depth of cut is less than the lowest Depth table entry. The volume removal rate is
expressed in cubic units, where “units” refers to the units specified on the Settings tab. If
unknown, un-select all optimization methods and use the Cutting Condition sliders to calculate
it.
The example below shows the affect of Constant Volume Below Minimum Depth on feed rate
calculations for a ball-nose endmill when the lowest Depth Table entry is equal to the radius of
the tool.
Max. Volume Removal Rate — Specifies the maximum volume removal for the tool. Optimized
feed rates are bounded such that the rate at which material is removed never exceeds this
value. The volume removal rate is expressed in cubic units, where "units" refers to the units
specified on the Settings tab. If unknown, un-select all optimization methods and use the
Cutting Condition sliders to calculate it.
To OptiPath window
644
VERICUT Help
OptiPath window, Width Table tab
Locations:
The features on this tab adjust the optimized feed rate for cuts that are less than full cutter
width during Optimize by Tables optimization. When the tool is cutting with less than full
diameter the feed rate can typically be higher than for a full width cut, also know as a "slot cut".
NOTE: This tab is only available when the Optimize by Tables option on the Feed/Speed tab is
toggled “on” (checked).
On — When selected, adjusts feed rates for cuts of varying width based on the Width table
configuration.
Width table — Table of cut widths and corresponding % feed rate adjustments to apply when
removing material with the specified cutter width. Values can be entered or supplied via
dragging the control points on the graph. Add after, or delete table entries via right-clicking on
them and choosing the appropriate option (or use the Add / Delete buttons below the table).
645
VERICUT Help
Cuts at widths less than the minimum listed in the table receive the adjustment specified for
the minimum width.
% Width column — Lists up to five cut widths (in increasing order) that describe the range of
expected cut widths to adjust.
% Feedrate column — Lists % feed rate adjustments to apply to calculated feed rates when
removing material with the corresponding cut width. 100% uses the calculated feed rate as is,
50% cuts feed rate in half, etc.
Sample Width table:
To OptiPath window
646
VERICUT Help
Using the OptiPath Window
647
VERICUT Help
Overview of Optimizing NC Programs
This section provides information about using OptiPath to optimize milling NC programs.
OptiPath creates an optimized NC program by re-calculating feed rates and/or spindle speeds.
Optimization does not change rapid motions, or the programmed path of the tool. Instead,
optimization ensures that the NC program has the optimum feed rates (or spindle speeds) to
produce high quality parts in the least amount of time. You can use OptiPath interactively, in
batch mode, or via embedding "VERICUT-COMMAND" and "VERICUT-OPTIPATH" records in
your NC program file(s).
Optimizing NC programs eliminates, or reduces these common inefficiencies:

 excessively conservative feed rates
 cutting feed rate used for motions in air
 no feed rate compensation for milling less (or more) material than expected
 no feed rate compensation for changing cutting conditions, such as: changing cut depth,
width, or plunge angle
 carbide cutting tools suffering from "chip thinning" cutting conditions
Optimized NC programs typically yield these significant improvements:

 30-60% reduction in machine cycle time (doubles machine capacity)
 higher quality machined parts with better surface finishes
 tool noise and breakage is reduced or eliminated
 longer tool life reduces perishable tool costs
Optimization is controlled by user defined optimization settings and VERICUT's constant

knowledge of cutting conditions. Define optimization settings using the OptiPath window,
accessible through Tool Manager. OptiPath records are stored in the Tool Library file. Each
record is uniquely identified by the stock material to be cut, machine that will cut the part,
description of the cutting tool, and number of teeth on the tool. Optimization is performed on a
"per tool" basis, so OptiPath records can be tailored for specific tools and cutting
characteristics.
Optimization is turned on, and controlled, via the OptiPath Control window features. Select the
file to receive the optimized data, type of material to be cut, and the NC machine that will cut
648
VERICUT Help
the part. References to OptiPath records can be pre-defined with tools in a Tool Library file, or
you can use a Tool List to link cutting tools present in the NC program with the OptiPath records
in the library.
Basic steps to optimize an NC program:

1. Prepare the NC program for optimization:
 Configure VERICUT to process the project file: models, NC program file name and
orientation, cutting tools, etc.
 Verify that the NC program is error-free before optimizing.
 If uncut stock is required for optimization, reset the model.
2. Configure the OptiPath Control window for optimizing the NC program(s), including the file
to receive the optimized data, stock material to be cut, and machine that will cut the part.
3. Select "Prompt While Cutting" optimization to create OptiPath records at run time, or, use
the OptiPath window, accessed through Tool Manager, to create the OptiPath records
needed to optimize cutting tools in the NC program. Ensure that all tools to be optimized
have an OptiPath record available in the Tool Library file. Tools that do not have
corresponding OptiPath records will not be optimized.
4. Non-interactive optimization only - link OptiPath records in the Tool Library file to cutting
tools in the NC Program file(s), then turn optimization on. There are two methods of
creating the links:
Tool Library association method - associate the OptiPath tool description with a tool in a
Tool Library file, then choose the stock material and machine in the OptiPath Control
window.
Tool List association method - choose the stock material and machine in the OptiPath
Control window, then build a tool list that associates OptiPath records with cutting tools to
be optimized in the NC program file.
Optimization is performed during cutting. Optimized tool motions (and any un-optimized tool
motions) are written to the Optimized file. Optimization is automatically turned off when the
end of the last NC program is encountered.
Optimization considerations:
Factors that affect the optimization process are discussed below.
Cutting Resolution — Located on the Settings window: Project Settings tab, the Cutting
Resolution affects the accuracy of the cut workpiece and has a direct impact on the results from
OptiPath, as well AUTO-DIFF, Model Export, holder collisions, "Fast Feed" errors, dynamic
rotation speed, zoom speed, etc. If insufficient Cutting Resolution is used when optimizing,
resulting feed rates may vary (oscillate) during relatively constant cutting conditions, or
649
VERICUT Help
VERICUT may have difficulty determining exactly when the tool is entering or exiting material. If
this occurs, reset the model, then reduce the Cutting Resolution value and re-optimize.
Unoptimizable cutters — The following cutter types are un-optimizable: Tap, Water Jet, Drill,
Wire EDM, Probing tools, and Revolved Profile Cutters with a "Point". Optimization is
suspended for these tool motions and feed rates; the un-optimized data is passed “as is” to the
Optimized file.
Other conditions that cause optimization to be suspended — Optimization is suspended for
NC program processing under the conditions described below.
 turning operations
 drill cycles
 fixed tool axis canned cycles (e.g. APT CYCLE record, G-codes G81-89)
 motion caused by an APT GODLTA record
 VERICUT-MODAL record encountered
 "VERICUT-OPTIPATH off" record encountered
 when 2D Rotation has just been turned on. The following warning message is output:
"Optimization turned off while 2D Rotation is active". It is recommended to suspend
optimization during these motions.
NOTE: If Debug Optimization is turned on, a DEBUG message will be printed on every line
which is suspended for this reason.
G-Code related:
 tool positions programmed in motion states other than G01, G02, G03 or NURBS
 motions programmed in constant surface speed (CSS) mode
 circle motions programmed in inverse time (IVT) mode
 tool positions offset using values in a Cutter Compensation table, e.g. G41-42Dn
 tool path motions in rotated planes (e.g. Fanuc G68) cannot be optimized.
Optimizing G-Code NC programs:

By default, VERICUT optimizes G-Code data blocks containing any combination of the
"optimizable" codes listed below. A block is not optimizable if it contains codes other than
those designated as optimizable.
Default optimizable G-Codes:
 G01 — linear interpolation
650
VERICUT Help
 G02 G03 — circular interpolation CW, CCW

 G06 G06.2 — NURBS interpolation
 F — feed rate
 N — block sequence number
 X Y Z A B C — axis positioning (in G01 mode)
 X Y I J — circle center data (in G02 or G03 mode and in XY plane)
 X Z I K — circle center data (in G02 or G03 mode and in ZX plane)
 Y Z J K — circle center data (in G02 or G03 mode and in YZ plane)
 BSPLINE P SD K PL R PW X Y Z — NURBS data (in NURBS interpolation mode)
 "Variable Tag" word, e.g. "#"
Examples of G-Code data blocks follow, some of which are optimizable and some that are not.
G01 X1.0 Y2.0 F20.0 <= optimizable
X18.0 Y.2 A180 <= optimizable
G01 X12.0 Z1.5 M03 <= NOT optimizable: M03
G00 Y.5 Z3.0 <= NOT optimizable: G00 mode
G41 X4.0 Y1.2 F30 D01 <= NOT optimizable: G41/
Using the "Optimizable" macro

The Optimizable macro can be used to mark additional NC codes as being optimizable. All NC
code groups present in the block to optimize must be configured to call this macro. Consider
the "M03" example above: G01 X12.0 Z1.5 M03. This block can be optimized by adding the
optimizable macro to the following NC code groups: G 1, X *, Z *, M 3. For example, to add the
optimizable macro to the "M 3" group in the NC control configuration:
Word=M Range=3, Condition=* *, Macroname=Optimizable, Scan=No, After=No
If any of the code groups in the block are not configured to call the optimizable macro, then the
block is not optimized. Thus, if you were to configure only the M 3 group to call this macro in
the above example, the block would still not be optimized.
NOTES:
1. Cutter compensation codes — If CDC codes are present in the NC program, but are not
used (e.g. compensation register values not defined, or set to zero), and then set the
Process Cutter Comp. option on the Project Tree Configure Setup menu: G-Code tab to
“Off” to enable optimization of motions following the blocks that control CDC. To also
optimize blocks containing CDC codes (e.g. G41-42Dn), use the Optimizable macro.
651
VERICUT Help
2. Optimizing motions in absolute vs. incremental input dimension modes —Optimization is

effective on motions programmed in absolute or incremental input dimension mode.
However, the blocks containing the G-Code command for changing the dimensioning mode
(e.g. G90/G91) are not optimizable without using the Optimizable macro.
3. Optimizing motions in inverse time or feed per minute feed mode — Optimization is
effective on motions in IVT or feed per minute feed mode. However, the blocks containing
the G-Code command for changing this mode (e.g. G93/G94) are not optimizable without
using the Optimizable macro.
4. Optimizing G-Code NC programs with subroutines or macros — VERICUT supports both the
expansion, and the optimizing of subroutines, within a G-Code NC program.
Expansion of Subroutines
 The call to the OptiPathExpandSubs macro sets a non-modal flag, which gets reset
to "don't expand" on every block. The call to this macro should be associated with a
Word rather the then the start of processing event. For example: M98 will call
OptiPathExpandSubs and then call CallSub.
 The OptiPathExpandSubs macro supports the following values:
0 = do not expand
1 = expand
2 = expand only if the current tool is being optimized.
 The subroutine Call, Start, and return will be commented out. For example: the mcd
line "N5 O100 (Example sub)" will get converted to "(OptiPath Expansion: N5 O100)
(Example sub)".
Optimization of Subroutines
 The call to the OptiPathOptimizeSubs macro sets a non-modal flag, which gets reset
to "don't optimize" on every block. The call to this macro should be associated with
a Word rather the then the start of processing event. For example: M98 will call
OptiPathOptimizeSubs and then CallSub.
 Each optimized subroutine will be output to a separate file. The name of the file will
be the subroutine name with an ".opti" extension. The writing to separate files is
independent of how, or where, the subroutines were located in the original
program. The user is responsible to do whatever is needed to incorporate these new
subroutines into their program.
 The OptiPathOptimizeSubs macro supports the following values:
0 = do not optimize
1 = optimize
2 = optimize only if the current tool is being optimized.
652
VERICUT Help
General Usage Notes for Expansion/Optimization of Subroutines

 The call to OptiPathExpandSubs and OptiPathOptimizeSubs macros are mutually
exclusive.
 The expansion/optimization of subroutines with loop counts is supported.
 The expansion/optimization of NC macro calls is supported; however, you should
take extra caution when expanding NC macro calls.
 Auto sequencing of expanded subroutines is supported. The sequencing, however,
will now be based on the mainline sequence numbering. (Previously, each
subroutine had its own set of sequence numbers).
 Lines in the input file prior to the first line being processed will be passed to the
output file.
 Lines after the M02/M30 will be passed to the output file.
NOTES:
1. This could create problems depending on where in the file the M02/M30 is
located.
2. Typically subroutines will come after the M30. The subroutines will be written
out, even if all subroutines were expanded or optimized.
 Checks have been added to try to determine when it is valid to expand/optimize a

subroutine. Typically, no message will be given on why a subroutine was not
expanded. DEBUG messages are printed, however, if DEBUG Loop Logic is turned on.
The following are possible reasons why a subroutine might not be
expanded/optimized:
OptiPath is not turned on.
The OptiPathExpandSubs or OptiPathOptimizeSubs macros were not called
prior to the sub call on this block.
Motion was specified with the call to the subroutine.
An NC Macro variable was specified with the call to the subroutine.
The subroutine is a Control subroutine.
The "Begin Comment" character was not defined.
The subroutine is a nested subroutine, and its parent's subroutine was not
expanded.
OptiPathExpandSubs was called with an override value of 2, and the current tool
is not being optimized.
653
VERICUT Help
OptiPathOptimizeSubs was called with an override value of 2, and the current

tool is not being optimized.
Areas of Caution
The following describes various ways the expanded output may be incorrect. In all cases,
you are responsible for validating the results.
 Start/End of subroutine. In most cases, the start and end of a subroutine are clearly
identified. In some cases, the file in which it is contained identifies the subroutine.
The software will comment out the first and last line of the subroutine, which might
not be valid under these circumstances.
 The general format of the comment is as described above. For some controls, this
might be invalid. For example: the line might need to start with a sequence number.
 The call to the subroutine will be commented out. If this line contains anything other
then the macro call, expanding the subroutine might be invalid. We check for macro
variables and motion. Other items might exist which could invalidate the expansion.
 The start and end of the subroutine will be commented out. If these lines contain
anything other then the above, expanding the subroutine might be invalid. No
software checks are made for this.
 A subroutine being expanded cannot contain any type of branching logic. An error
will be produced during run time if this situation is encountered.
5. Optimizing Heidenhain or other NC programs with ascending block sequence number

constraints — You can re-sequence optimized NC program blocks using OptiPath control
settings.
654
VERICUT Help
The Chip Thinning Problem
"Chip thinning" occurs when cutting conditions cause the tool to remove a thinner, or smaller
chip with the programmed feed rate than anticipated by the NC programmer. This causes a
variety of problems in machining, such as: poor surface finish, shortened tool/insert life, or
even worse, broken tools or damage to the NC Machine from excessive vibration encountered
while cutting.
Chip thinning is a 3-dimensional problem. Consider the examples shown below.
Width of cut — If the desired chip thickness is achieved during the wide cut as shown below
(upper left), using the same feed rate would produce a chip only half as thick in the narrower
cut (upper right). In this example, to maintain a constant chip thickness, VERICUT would double
the feed rate, as shown at upper right.
Depth of cut — If the desired chip thickness is achieved during the deep cut as shown below
(lower left), using the same feed rate would produce a chip only half as thick in the shallower
cut (lower right). To maintain a constant chip thickness, VERICUT would double the feed rate, as
shown at lower right.
VERICUT knows the amount of material in contact with the cutter at all times, so it can
determine each bite's maximum chip thickness. VERICUT's OptiPath module modifies feed rates
to maintain this desired maximum chip thickness for every bite into material, regardless of the
depth or width of cut.
655
VERICUT Help
Add a New OptiPath Record to a Tool in the Tool Library
Tool Library files contain optimization data for use by VERICUT's OptiPath feed rate
optimization module. Use the procedures below to add new OptiPath records to tools in a Tool
Library.
NOTE: Remember to save the Tool Library with the new information.
For ease of understanding, this section is divided into the basic tasks below. We recommend
that tasks be completed in listed order.
Tips:
1. Right-click shortcut menu: Features used to manipulate tools are displayed in a shortcut
menu when a tool is selected and the right mouse button is clicked in the Tool Manager
window. Similarly, features used to manipulate tool components are displayed when they
are selected and the right mouse button is clicked.
2. You can move objects in the Tool Manager window via dragging them from one parent tool
(folder) to another, or copy them via holding down the <Ctrl> key and dragging.
Open a Tool Library File and Select a Tool:

1. Double-click on Tooling in the Project Tree, or right-click on Tooling in the Project Tree and
select Tool Manager from the menu that displays, or click on the (Tools) on the
VERICUT Toolbar, or click on Project menu > Tools in the VERICUT menu bar to display the
Tool Manager window.
2. In the Tool Manager window, click on the (Open File) icon in the Tool Bar and then in
the file selection window that opens, select or type the /path/filename of the tool library
file containing the tools that you want to add OptiPath records to and click Open.
3. The Tool Library file is opened. The first tool in the library is selected and displayed in the
Tool Manager's Tool Display window.
4. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, right-click on the tool that you want to add the OptiPath
record to and then select Add OptiPath > New from the menu that displays to display the
OptiPath window.
656
VERICUT Help
Identify the New OptiPath Record:
1. In the OptiPath window, enter or edit the Tool Description.

2. Specify the Material for the new OptiPath record by selecting from the pull-down list of
materials, or enter a new one in the Material field.
3. Specify the Machine for the new OptiPath record by selecting from the pull-down list of
machines, or enter a new one.
4. The new OptiPath record must have a unique combination of the above three identifiers.
5. To change the units for the OptiPath record, click the OptiPath window: Settings tab and
choose the desired Units (Inch or Millimeter).
Choose One or More Optimization Methods:

1. For assistance with calculating values for feed rates, volume, or spindle speed, use the
Cutting Condition sliders to configure a known successful cutting condition on which to
base optimization. See Calculate Feed Rates, Spindle Speeds, or Test Optimization , also in
the Using the OptiPath window section, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
2. On the OptiPath window: Feed/Speed tab, use the Optimization Method group features to
choose the options suitable for optimizing the tool's motions. If needed, use the sliders, or
enter supporting data, for the selected methods of optimization.
Tip: When you toggle "on" an optimization method, look at the information about the
method that displays in the middle of the OptiPath window.
Following are some recommendations for common cutting scenarios.
Chip Thickness — for optimizing high speed machining and for semi-finishing and
finishing operations using carbide cutting tools where the danger of " chip thinning"
exists. It is especially effective for mold and die applications machining hard materials.
Volume Removal — for optimizing tools that encounter widely varying cutting
conditions, such as hogging or roughing operations that cut at different cut depths and
widths.
Tip: Combine Chip Thickness and Volume Removal methods to protect against
excessive chip thickness or volume conditions that can occur using only one of these
optimization methods.
Surface Speed — for optimizing finish machining operations; using ball or bull-nosed
end mills and high speed machining. Use features on the Angle tab to limit RPM
657
VERICUT Help
fluctuations and specify the feed per tooth load to be maintained. (Use only on high
speed NC machines capable of varying spindle speed quickly without harming spindle
motor hardware.)
Air Cut Feed Rate — for reducing time of proven tool paths, without affecting cutting
feed rates and resulting surface finishes.
Optimize by Tables — for optimizing tools used in hogging or roughing operations
where more control over cutting feed rates for various cut depths, widths, or angles is
desired than is provided via the chip thickness or volume methods.
Tip: Click Fill to automatically fill table data fields with values calculated using the
Cutting Condition sliders. Then access the Depth, Width, and Angle tabs to edit values
as needed.
3. Enter supporting data for the selected optimization method(s).
Supply the Remaining Optimization Settings:

While the OptiPath window provides many settings that are optional, the following steps focus
on settings that are essential for optimization and those that are commonly used. See OptiPath
window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for descriptions of all available OptiPath record
settings.
Feed/Speed tab:
1. To override programmed spindle speeds with RPM values calculated by OptiPath
corresponding to optimized feed rates, select the Spindle Speed checkbox.
2. Enter the Air Cut Feedrate to use when the tool is in air.
3. Note that this value is used by all optimization methods to optimize cutting in air, even
when the checkbox is not selected. Selecting Default uses the NC machine's X-axis Max
Feed Velocity (G-Code NC programs), or Fast Feed value (APT NC programs).
Settings tab:
1. Choose between:
Add More Cuts — Recommended when disk space is ample or when optimizing widely
varying cutting conditions.
Modify Existing Cuts Only — Recommended when disk space is limited or when tool
positions are relatively close.
658
VERICUT Help
2. Enter the Resolution value. Use the Distance option for analyzing tool motions (1/4-1/2
cutter diameter recommended), or choose the Auto option to have VERICUT automatically
calculate this value.
3. Enter Minimum Feedrate Change to limit outputting a new optimized feed rate.
4. Selecting Default uses 1 IPM or 25 MMPM, whichever applies.
5. Enter Clean-up Feedrate for when the tool is adjacent to, but not removing material
("spring pass").
Selecting Default uses 50% of the NC machine's X-axis Max Feed Velocity (G-Code NC
programs), or 50% of Fast Feed value (APT NC programs).
Limits tab:
1. Enter Maximum Cut Feedrate and Minimum Cut Feedrate to limit optimized feed rates
when cutting material.
Selecting Default for Minimum Cut Feedrate uses 1 IPM or 25 MMPM, whichever applies.
Selecting Default for Maximum Cut Feedrate uses 45% of the NC machine's X-axis Max
Feed Velocity (G-Code NC programs), or 45% of Fast Feed value (APT NC programs).
Configure Optimization for Special Conditions (e.g. circles,

NURBS, entering/exiting material, ramping, etc.):
The following describes the OptiPath feature that is used to control the specified condition.
Optimize circle feed rates — configure the Settings tab: Circle Feedrate option.
Optimize NURBS feed rates — configure the Settings tab: NURBS Feedrate option.
Adjust optimized feed rates for tool wear — configure the Settings tab: Feedrate Wear
Reduction option with a value representing the percentage of reduction that is to be applied to
calculated feed rates after each cubic unit of material is removed.
Control feed rates when plunging along the tool axis into material, or retracting from material
— configure the Plunge tab: Plunge Feedrate option, and/or Retract Feedrate option.
Control feed rates when entering or exiting material — configure the Entry/Exit tab: Entry
Feedrate option, and/or Exit Feedrate option.
Adjust optimized feed rates when ramping into material — configure the Angle tab features.
659
VERICUT Help
Test How Optimization Will Perform:

On the OptiPath window, use the Feed/Speed tab: Cutting Condition sliders to test how
optimization will perform under various cutting conditions.
1. Use the Axial Depth and Radial Width sliders (or enter values in the corresponding text
field) to describe the cutting conditions to be tested.
2. Observe the calculated Feed per Minute, and Feed per Tooth values. These are the
projected optimized feed rates.
If any optimization values are changed, remember to press Modify in the OptiPath window
to update the OptiPath record, and then save the Tool Library file with the new information.
Add the OptiPath Record to the Tool:

When finished defining the OptiPath record, press Add to add the new OptiPath record, with
optimization parameters, to the tool in the Tool Library.
Repeat the above procedure to add OptiPath records to other tools in the Tool Library. Be sure
to save the Tool Library when you finish.
See Tool Manager window, and OptiPath window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
more information.
Add a Local OptiPath Record to a Referenced Tool
When a referenced tool is added to the "current" tool library, the OptiPath records associated
with the externally referenced tool will be copied to the "current" tool library and marked as
external references.
In Tool Manager, if all of a tool's matching OptiPath records are from externally reference tools,
the OptiPath main node icon also displays black and white (the same icon used by "inactive"
OptiPath records) and its tip says "Referenced OptiPath Record". You cannot
open/modify/cut/copy/paste referenced OptiPath records.
You can add a local OptiPath record to override an external OptiPath record. After adding the
local record, the OptiPath main node icon will now be displayed in color and the local record
will be marked as Active. Referenced OptiPath records will continue to be displayed in black
and white and marked as inactive.
660
VERICUT Help
Calculate Feed Rates, Spindle Speeds, or Test Optimization

VERICUT's OptiPath window is used to create and maintain OptiPath records that contain
optimization data for use by the OptiPath feed rate optimization module. Features are also
provided to assist with calculating feed rates and spindle speeds, as well as test how
optimization will perform under various cutting conditions. The actions described below are
typically performed on a new or modified OptiPath record to ensure it will optimize tool
motions as expected. OptiPath records are stored with the tool in the Tool Library.
Calculate Feed Rates/Spindle Speeds:
1. Double-click on Tooling in the Project Tree, right-click on Tooling in the Project Tree and select
Tool Manager from the menu that displays, click (Tools) on the Toolbar, or click Project
menu > Tools to display the Tool Manager window.
2. In the Tool Manager window, select the tool that you want to calculate feeds/speeds for to so
3. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, right-click on the tool that you want to calculate feeds/speeds
for and then select Add OptiPath > New from the menu that displays to display the OptiPath
window.
4. On the OptiPath window: Feed/Speed tab, clear all optimization method checkboxes.
5. Use the Cutting Condition sliders, or enter values in the corresponding text field to describe a
known successful cutting condition on which to base optimization. This is the condition that is
most commonly encountered by the tool.
6. If the sliders don't go far enough to reach the desired value, or the value in the corresponding
data field turns red, then another optimization setting is limiting input. If all settings on the
Feed/Speed tab look okay, then check values on the Limits tab, such as Maximum Cut
Feedrate, Minimum Cut Feedrate, etc.
7. If desired, use Surface Speed, Spindle Speed, and Spindle Power to assist with calculating
desired feed rates and/or spindle speeds.
8. Use the Cutting Condition sliders on the OptiPath window: Feed/Speed tab to test how
optimization will perform under various cutting condition with the new settings.
If necessary, refer to Test How Optimization Will Perform, in the Add a New OptiPath Record
to a Tool in the Tool Library section above for additional information.
Tip: Moving the sliders shows the dynamics of metal removal by also affecting positions of
related sliders.
661
VERICUT Help
See Tool Manager window, and OptiPath window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
more information.
662
VERICUT Help
Modify, Copy, or Delete an Existing OptiPath Record
Use the procedures described below to modify, copy, or delete OptiPath records in a Tool
Library file. All of the following tasks assume that the Tool Manager window is already open. If
necessary, double-click on Tooling in the Project Tree, right-click on Tooling in the Project Tree
and select Tool Manager from the menu that displays, click (Tools) on the Toolbar, or click
Project menu > Tools to display the Tool Manager window.
NOTE: Remember to save the Tool Library with the modified information.
Modify an Existing OptiPath Record:

1. In the Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, find the tool having the OptiPath record that you want
to modify. Double-click on the OptiPath record to display the OptiPath window.
2. In the OptiPath window, edit identifiers in the table and/or edit optimization settings as
desired. See Add a new OptiPath Record to a Tool in the Tool Library, also in the Using the
OptiPath Window section, for specific information about using the features in the OptiPath
window.
3. When you are finished, press Modify.
4. Use the Cutting Condition sliders on the OptiPath window: Feed/Speed tab to test how
optimization will perform under various cutting condition with the new settings.
If necessary, refer to Test How Optimization Will Perform, in the Add a New OptiPath
Record to a Tool in the Tool Library section above for additional information.
If any optimization values are changed, remember to press Modify and then save the Tool
Library file with the new information.
663
VERICUT Help
Copy an Existing OptiPath Record:
Copy a record in the current Tool Library file:

1. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, find the tool having the OptiPath record that you want to
copy.
2. Right–click on the OptiPath record that you want to copy and select Copy from menu that
displays.
3. Right-click on the tool that you want the OptiPath record copied to and then select Paste
from the menu that displays.
4. Double-click on the new OptiPath record to display the OptiPath window.
5. In the OptiPath window, edit one or more of the identifiers: Tool Description, Material,
and/or Machine. The new OptiPath record must have a unique combination of the above
three identifiers.
6. If necessary, modify the new record as described in the Modify an Existing OptiPath Record
section above.
7. If any optimization values are changed, remember to press the Modify button and then
save the Tool Library file with the new information.
Copy records from an external Tool/OptiPath Library file:

1. In the Tool Manager Tool List Area, right-click on the tool that you want the OptiPath record
copied to and then select Search OptiPath from the menu that displays to display the
Search OptiPath Record window.
2. In the Search OptiPath Record window, type the /path/filename, of the Tool/OptiPath
Library containing the OptiPath record that you want to copy, in the Libraries text field, or
click on the (Browse) icon and use the file selection window that displays to select the
/path/filename.
3. Select OptiPath record attributes to identify the OptiPath record that you want to copy, and
click on the Search button. OptiPath records matching your search attributes will display in
the lower section of the Search OptiPath Record window. If you do not specify search
attributes and click on the Show All button all OptiPath records in the specified
Tool/OptiPath Library will display in the Search OptiPath Record window.
4. Click on the desired OptiPath record so that it becomes highlighted, and then click on the
Add/Modify button. The contents of the selected record will display in the OptiPath
window.
664
VERICUT Help
5. In the OptiPath window, edit one or more of the identifiers: Tool Description, Material,
and/or Machine. The new OptiPath record must have a unique combination of the above
three identifiers.
6. If necessary, modify the new record as described in the Modify an Existing OptiPath Record
section above
7. When finished, click on the Add button. The record will be added to the tool in the
"current" Tool Library.
Remember to save the Tool Library file with the new information.
Delete an Existing OptiPath Record:
Active OptiPath Records:

Use the following procedure to delete "active" OptiPath records that you can see in the Tool
Manager’s Tool List Area:
1. In the Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, find the tool having the OptiPath record that you want to
delete.
2. Right–click on the OptiPath record that you want to delete and then select Delete from menu
that displays.
The record is deleted. If you deleted an OptiPath record by mistake, click on the (Undo)
icon in Tool Manager’s Tool Bar.
3. Save the Tool Library file.
Inactive or Not Used OptiPath Records:

Use the following procedure to delete "in-active" or "Not Used" OptiPath records that you can
see in the Tool Manager’s Tool List Area:
1. Right-click In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area and then select Search OptiPath from the menu
that displays to display the Search OptiPath record window, or select Add Component > Search
OptiPath in Tool Manager’s Tool Bar to display the Search OptiPath record window.
2. In the Search OptiPath record window, click on the Show All button to display all OptiPath
records in the "current" Tool Library.
3. Select the OptiPath record that you want to delete so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Click on Delete to delete the record.
665
VERICUT Help
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 to delete additional records, or click on the Close button to close the Search
OptiPath record window.
6. Save the Tool Library file.
See Tool Manager window, Search OptiPath Record window, Using the Search OptiPath Record
window, and OptiPath window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
666
VERICUT Help
Search OptiPath Record window
Locations:
Project menu > Tools: Add Component > Search OptiPath
Project menu > Tools: Right-click Tool list Area > Search OptiPath
The Search OptiPath Record window enables you to search existing tool/OptiPath libraries for
records with specific attributes.
Libraries:
Include Current Library — When toggled "on" (checked), records matching the search
attributes in the current library are included in the search results.
Files — Use to specify one, or more, tool/OptiPath library files to be searched for OptiPath
Records meeting the specified search criteria.
Directories — Use to specify one, or more, directories of tool/OptiPath library files for OptiPath
records meeting the specified search criteria.
Browse — Displays a file selection window to assist you in selecting the files/directories to be
searched.
667
VERICUT Help
Search Attributes:
Description — Search for existing OptiPath records containing a specified string of text within
the record's Description field.
Material — Search for existing OptiPath records containing a specific material type.
Machine — Search for existing OptiPath records containing a specific machine type.
Search — Start the search of the specified library files/directories, based on the search
attributes specified above. OptiPath records found matching the search attributes are written
to the OptiPath Record List.
Show All — Displays all OptiPath records found in the specified library file(s)/directories in the
OptiPath Record List.
OptiPath Record List:

Displays a list of OptiPath records found during the search. For each record in the list, the
Material, the Machine description, and the tool Description, are displayed. The Tool
Referenced column is only used for OptiPath records in the "current" tool library.
Add/Modify — Opens the OptiPath window, populated with the data from the selected
OptiPath record, ready for modifying. If no changes are required, select Add in the OptiPath
window to add the OptiPath record to the "current" tool library. This feature is only displayed
for OptiPath records in the "current" tool library.
Duplicate — Enables you to duplicate the highlighted OptiPath record in the "current" tool
library. This feature is only displayed for OptiPath records in "external" files.
Reference — Creates a reference to the selected OptiPath record in the "current" tool library.
This feature is grayed out for OptiPath records in external files.
Delete — Enables you to delete the selected OptiPath record in the "current" tool library. This
feature is grayed out for OptiPath records in external files.
Close — Closes the Search OptiPath Record window.
See Using the Search OptiPath Record window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
information on using the features on the Search OptiPath Record window.
668
VERICUT Help
Using the Search OptiPath Record window
The features in the Search OptiPath record window enable you to see all OptiPath records
stored in the "current" Tool Library, including "in-active" and "Not Used" records. It also allows
you to see the OptiPath records associated with each tool in the Tool Library. You can also use
the Search OptiPath record window to search for OptiPath records in Tool Library files, and
OptiPath Library files, other than the "current” Tool Library.
669
VERICUT Help
Search for OptiPath Records in the "Current" Tool Library
1. Double-click on Tooling in the Project Tree, right-click on Tooling in the Project Tree and
select Tool Manager from the menu that displays, click (Tools) on the Toolbar, or click
2. Right-click in Tool Manager’s Tool List Area and then select Search OptiPath from the menu
that displays to display the Search OptiPath record window.
3. In the Search OptiPath Record window, make sure that Include Current Library is toggled
“on” (checked) and then select Show All to display all OptiPath records in the "current" Tool
Library.
4. If the "current" Tool Library is very large, and contains many OptiPath records, use the
Description, Material and Machine pull-down lists to specify specific search attributes, and
then click on Search. Only OptiPath records matching the search attributes that you
specified will display in the Search OptiPath Record window.
5. After selecting one of the displayed OptiPath records so that it becomes highlighted, you
can choose to do any of the following:
Add/Modify — selecting this feature displays the selected OptiPath record in the OptiPath
window where you can Modify the existing record or specify changes and Add a new record
to the tool highlighted in Tool Manager.
Reference — selecting this feature enables you to establish an association between the
highlighted OptiPath record and the highlighted tool in the Tool Library.
Delete — select this feature to delete the highlighted OptiPath record.
670
VERICUT Help
Search for OptiPath Records in "External" Tool/OptiPath

Libraries
1. Double-click on Tooling in the Project Tree, right-click on Tooling in the Project Tree and
select Tool Manager from the menu that displays, click (Tools) on the Toolbar, or click
2. Right-click in Tool Manager’s Tool List Area and then select Search OptiPath from the menu
that displays to display the Search OptiPath record window.
3. In the Search OptiPath Record window, specify where you want to search for OptiPath
records.
4. Select Files to search one, or more, Tool/OptiPath Library files. Enter the /path/filename for
each file to be searched (separated by semi colons ";") in the Libraries text field, or click on
the (Browse) icon and use the file selection window that displays to select the files.
Select Directories to search one or more directories containing Tool/OptiPath Library files.
Enter the /path/ for each folder to be searched (separated by semi colons ";") in the
Libraries text field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the window that displays to
select the directories.
5. In the Search OptiPath Record window, specify what type of OptiPath records that you want
to search for.
Use the Description, Material, and Machine fields to specify the specific type of OptiPath
records to search for, and then press the Search button. All OptiPath records, in the
specified Files/Directories, matching your search attributes will display in the lower section
of the Search OptiPath Record window.
If you do not specify search attributes, and select the Show All button, all OptiPath records
in the specified Files/Directories will display in the Search OptiPath Record window.
6. Select one of the displayed OptiPath records so that it becomes highlighted.
7. Select the Duplicate button to make a copy of the selected record. Notice that the
duplicated record is added to the OptiPath record list for the "current" tool library indicated
as "Not Used".
8. Highlight the added record and select the Add/Modify button to display the OptiPath
window. Use its features to edit the Material and Machine to match the current setup's
Material and Machine and to make any other needed changes. Select the Modify button to
add the modified record to the OptiPath record list for the "current" tool library indicated as
"Not Used". Select the Close button to close the OptiPath ID window.
9. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, highlight the tool that the modified OptiPath record is to
be associated with. In the Search OptiPath Record window, highlight the modified record
671
VERICUT Help
and select the Reference button to add the OptiPath record to the selected tool in Tool
Manager. If the Reference button de-sensitized it is because the tool that you selected in
Tool Manager is not optimizable (like a drill tool, etc.).
10. To summarize, in order to reference an external OptiPath record in the current tool library,
you first need to duplicate it in the current tool library and then reference it to a tool in the
current tool library.
11. Save the Tool Library with your changes.
NOTE: If you had the Include Current Library option toggled "on" (checked) when you did the
search and you select an OptiPath record from the current library, see Step 4 in the Search for
OptiPath Records in the "Current" Tool Library section above for information on how to re-use
it in the "current" tool library.
See Tool Manager window, Search OptiPath Record window, OptiPath window, and Using the
OptiPath Window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
672
VERICUT Help
TDM Interface window
Locations:
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > (Import Tool) icon > Access TDM
The TDM Interface provides access to the information stored in TDM Systems', Tool Data
Management (TDM) system database.
Account — Use to enter tor TDM account ID.

Password — Use to enter your TDM account password.
Database — If the TDM database is installed on your localcomputer the Database text field can
be left blank. Otherwise enter the name of the server where the database is located.
Connect — Click on the Connect button to log into your TDM account. If there are any
problems, an error message will display in the text field to the right of the Connect button.
673
VERICUT Help
The values you enter for Account, Password and Database are saved and automatically re-used
the next time you enter this dialog, so it should not be necessary to click on the Connect button
again.
Lists — Typically the TDM database will contain lists of tools that pertain to jobs or machines.
To select such a list, you can specify a filter for the list names. If you do not enter a filter, all the
lists will be placed in the table above, and there can be thousands.
Filters — Use the following filters to specify the tool lists that you want displayed in the Lists
table. You can use "*" and "?" as wild cards in the filter (in the normal VERICUT manner) or use
"%" as you would with TDM.
List Name — Use to enter a TDM list name to be used as a filter.
NC Program — Use to enter an NC program name to be used as a filter.
Part Name — Use to enter a Part name to be used as a filter.
Load — After specifying the filter, click on the Load button to add the associated lists to the
Lists table as shown in the picture below.
674
VERICUT Help
Pick the tool list that you need from the Lists table and the tools contained in that tool list will
display in the Tools table as shown in the picture below.
The column headings in the Tools table correspond to the TDM field names, but the content of
the Tool No. column gets used as the tool’s ID in Tool Manager, and the TDM Tool ID and
Description fields are combined to form the tool’s Description in Tool Manager.
Merge OptiPath Data from — Opens a file selection window enabling you to specify the file
that you want merge OptiPath data from.
Build Tool Assignment List — When toggled on (checked) and there are tools with
“TURRETINDEX” and “SPINDLE” defined in TDM a tool list will be built in the tool library file. A
message “Tool list has been updated.” will be output to the Tool Manager logger after the
import.
In cases where no matching tool component index is found with given turret index, the record
in the assignment list will be shown as if it was a single channel/single turret system (no
subsystem name). The tool list will be incorrectly built and the user is responsible correcting the
problem.
Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool — This feature is used to specify the format that
the imported tool is to be saved in. When toggled "on" (checked), the default, the imported
tool components are saved as VERICUT Polygon files. When toggled "off" (un-checked), the
imported tool components are stored in the same CAD format that they were imported in. This
feature is for TDM import only and the setting is saved in the project file.
675
VERICUT Help
Append to Tool Library — When toggled on (checked), the Append to Tool Library option
enables you to add the tools from the selected TDM list to those present in the currently
accessed library. If there is a conflict between tool IDs, the tools already in the library will
prevail. When this option is active, there will be no link between the project file and the TDM
list, because the set of tools accessed by the project file is more comprehensive than the
content of the TDM list.
OK — Selecting OK transfers the tool data to Tool Manager and then closes the TDM Interface
window.
Apply — Selecting Apply transfers the tool data to Tool Manager and and leaves the TDM
Interface window open for additional work.
After using either the OK or the Apply button, the tool data transferred to Tool Manager and
the project file will reference the TDM list. To indicate this, Tool Manager's title bar will display
the TDM list name instead of a VERICUT tool library name as shown in the picture below.
You can save the tool data to a VERICUT tool library and the link between the project file and
the TDM tool list will be severed.
Cancel — Selecting Cancel closes the TDM Interface window without transferring the tool data
to Tool Manager.
676
VERICUT Help
Zoller Database Access window
Locations:
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > ( Import Tool) icon > Zoller Database
The Zoller Database Access window enables you to retrieve tool data from the Zoller Database
Service and import selected tools from a setup sheet in the Zoller database into the VERICUT
Tool Manager.
In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the (Import Tool) icon’s and select Zoller
Database from the menu that displays to display the Zoller Database Access window shown
below.
NOTE: The Zoller Database option is only displayed in the Import Tool menu when you have a
Zoller TMS Interface license.
User — Enter your user name in the User text field.
677
VERICUT Help
Password — Enter your user password in the Password text field.

Base URI — Enter the he base URI for the Zoller web service (protocol, hostname, optional port
number and the service name) in the Base URI text field.
NOTE: User, Password, Base URI are all saved in the preferences file.
Status Icon — The colored light on the Status icon indicates the result of the current action.
Each light is described below.
Press the (Status) icon to clear the list of tools in the Tools list and retrieve all setup sheets
in the database and display them in the Status Sheets list regardless of the Filters settings.
Result — The result lights indicate the result of the current action. Each light is described
below.
(Red light) — Bad Connection
(Light Green light) — Successful Connection
(Dark Green light) — No Record Found
Setup Sheets — Displays a list of all setup sheets found in database.
Filters — Use the following filters to search for a specific setup. Notice that each of the search
filters corresponds to a column in the Setup Sheets list.
678
VERICUT Help
Setup Sheet ID — Enter a Setup Sheet ID in the text field and then press the (Search
Setup Sheets) icon to start the search.
Name — Enter a Setup Sheet Name in the text field and then press the (Search Setup
Sheets) icon start the search.
NC Program No. — Enter an NC program number in the text field and then press the
(Search Setup Sheets) icon start the search.
Part No. — Enter a part number in the text field and then press the (Search Setup Sheets)
icon start the search.
Tools — Selecting a setup sheet in the Setup Sheets list so that becomes highlighted will cause
all tools associated with the selected setup to be retrieved and displayed in the Tools list.
Add — Enables you to add Tool records to the Tools list enabling you to manually enter a Tool
ID and retrieve the tools from the Zoller database without a using a Setup Sheet.
Delete — Use to delete one or more highlighted tools from the Tools list. Use the Shift key to
select a range of tools in the Tools list. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple individual tools in the
Tools list.
Import Tool ID from — Use to specify how you want the Zoller tool identifier transferred to the
VERICUT Tool ID. Select one of the following:
Tool No. — Transfer the Zoller Tool Number as the VERICUT Tool ID.
Tool ID — Transfer the Zoller Tool ID as the VERICUT Tool ID.
Append to Tool Library — When toggled “on” (checked) the tools in the Tools list will be
appended to “current” tool library. When toggled “off” (unchecked), a new tool library will be
created VERICUT and the tools in the Tools list will be added to the new tool library.
679
VERICUT Help
OK — Imports all of the tools in the Tools list to VERICUT’ Tool Manager and closes the Zoller
Database Access window.
Apply — Imports all of the tools in the Tools list to VERICUT’ Tool Manager and leaves the Zoller
Database Access window open for additional work.
Cancel — Closes the Zoller Database Access window without importing tools to VERICUT’s Tool
Manager.
See Using the Zoller Database Access window, below, for additional information.
680
VERICUT Help
Using the Zoller Database Access window
If all of the tools in the Tools list are from a setup sheet (no manually editing of the tools in the
Tools list after selecting a setup sheet in Setup Sheets list) and Append to Tool Library is
toggled “off” (not checked), then the selected Setup Sheet ID is imported to VERICUT as tool
library Zoller: “setup sheet ID”, which can be saved in the VERICUT project file and used as
dynamic link to the Zoller Database.
The next time that the project file is loaded, the tool library Zoller: “setup sheet ID” will cause
all of the tools associated with “setup sheet ID” to automatically be retrieved and added to
VERICUT Tool manager without the need to access the Zoller Database Access window. See the
example below.
1. In the Project Tree, right click on the Tooling branch and select Tool Manager from the
menu that displays to display the VERICUT Tool Manager. (Alternatively you can select
Project menu > Tools in the VERICUT main menu bar to display the VERICUT Tool Manager.)
2. In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the (Import Tool) icon’s and select Zoller
Database from the menu that displays to display the Zoller Database Access window.
3. Assuming that the Status icon indicates a successful connection to the Zoller web
service, the Setup Sheets list will contain all of the setup sheets found in the database.
4. Select the desired setup sheet from the list so that it becomes highlighted. All of the tools
associated with the selected setup sheet will be retrieved from the Zoller database and
listed in the Tools list.
5. Select OK or Apply. Notice that the tools are now displayed in a new tool library file named
Zoller: “setup sheet ID”, where “setup sheet ID” is the ID of the setup sheet that you
selected in Step 4.
6. Close Tool Manager. You will be prompted:
“The tool library name “setup sheet ID” will be applied, would you like this change
transferred to VERICUT?” Select Yes.
7. Notice that Zoller: “setup sheet ID” is now added as the tool library for the Tooling branch in
the Project Tree.
8. In the Project Tree, right click on the Project branch and then select Save or Save As from
the menu that displays to save the project file. (Alternatively, you can select File menu >
Save Project or File menu > Save As in the VERICUT main menu bar to save the project file.)
The next time that the project file is loaded, the tool library Zoller: “setup sheet ID” will
cause all of the tools associated with “setup sheet ID” to automatically be retrieved and
681
VERICUT Help
added to VERICUT Tool manager without the need to access the Zoller Database Access
window.
See Zoller Database Access window, above, for additional information
682
VERICUT Help
Import Tool Spread Sheet window
Locations:
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > ( Import Tool) icon > Tool Spread Sheet
The features on the Import Tool Spread Sheet window enable you to import tools from a spread
sheet into Tool Manager.
In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the (Import Tool) icon’s and select Tool
Spread Sheet from the menu that displays to display the Import Tool Spread Sheet window
shown below.
Spread Sheet File — The original spread sheet file containing the tool data.
Template File — File containing template(s) to be used to interpret the data in the Spread
Sheet File.
Two file types are supported for both the Spread Sheet File and the Template File:
683
VERICUT Help
1. *.xlsx file, created by Microsoft Excel version 2007 or later.

2. *.csv file, comma separated text file.
Units — The units of to be used for the tools to be created from the spread sheet.
Holder Position — The following options enable you to specify how the holder and tools are
positioned:
Stack — The holder is positioned on top of the cutter.
At Gage Point — The holder zero point is positioned at the gage point.
At Tool Tip — The holder zero point is positioned at the tool’s zero point.
A template table maps the columns in the tool .xlsx to the parameters in Tool Manager that
define the tool, which looks like this:
Currently the following tool types are supported: Drill, End Mill, Apt7, Tap, and Probe.
Maximum of two holders are supported for now: A cone under a model or reference holder.
The template table can be in a separate Template File; or another worksheet in the Spread
Sheet File. For *.xlsx files, the template table sheet has to be named “CGTECH_TLS_IMPORT”
(or localized version as in VcRes.local). The template table sheet name and all tags in the
template table are case insensitive.
Similarly, for csv files, you can have template tables saved in a separate Template File; or
another worksheet in the Spread Sheet File.
In the case where the template table is defined both as a worksheet in the Spread Sheet File,
and as a Template File, the Template File will be ignored. A template sheet/file can have
multiple template tables.
Column Name — The Column ID from the original spread sheet. Formulas are supported as
Column Names. A formula always starts with “=” sign. A “$” sign indicates a Column ID used in
a formula.
For example, for Parameter “Diameter”, you can use “D” (Column D in the spread sheet) or
“=$C*2” (Column C’s value * 2).
For text columns (Tool ID, Tool Description, Tool Comments, Cutter ID, Holder Reference ID,
Holder Model File Name), the only operator supported now is “+” to concatenate strings. For
example, “Holder Model File” can be “=$x+.stl”.
684
VERICUT Help
Excel Sheet Name — The name of the worksheet, in the original spread sheet file, containing
the tool data
Start Row Index — The row number in the spread sheet/worksheet where the tool data starts.
End Row Index — The row number in the spread sheet/worksheet where the tool data ends.
Row Condition — [Column ID] = [Cell Value]. For example, “I=CH” says this mapping only
applies to all rows whose Column I’s values are “CH”, i.e. only for a chamfer tool. Thus there can
be a group of template rows for each of tool types.
Reference Tool Library — looks for a holder name in the “Holder Reference ID” column and
references it in the tool
The import table lists all template tables read from template sheet. Editing is allowed for Row
indexes and Row Condition. The icon applies edits to all rows in the template table; the
icon applies edits only to current edited cell.
The Tool Data table is a preview of what is going to be imported for the selected template in
the import table.
Import — creates tools for all templates that have “Import” toggled on, within Start Row Index
/ End Row Index row range and have met the Row Condition.
Import Selected Tool Data — only creates tools from selected rows in the Tool Data table.
Tools are appended in the current Tool Manager session. The first appended tool is highlighted.
Unique tool IDs are ensured by appending “_#” after existing IDs. (For example, Tool 1_2).
Close — closes the Import Tool Spread Sheet window.
See sample .xlsx template
See sample .csv template
685
VERICUT Help
NOVO/Kennametal Tool Import Interface window

Locations:
Tool Manager > Tool Bar > ( Import Tool) icon > NOVO Tool
The Novo/Kennametal Tool Import Interface window enables you to easily download
Kennametal 3D tool models from the MachiningCloud and quickly transfer them to a VERICUT
tool library.
In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the (Import Tool) icon’s and select NOVO Tool
from the menu that displays to display the Import NOVO Tools window shown below.
NOVO Tool File — Enter the \path\filename of the file containing the list of the tool models
that you want to import in the text field, or click on the (Browse) and use the Select Novo
File file selection window that displays to specify the \path\filename of the file containing the
list of the tool models.
686
VERICUT Help
Tool Table — After specifying the NOVO tool file, the Tool Table will be populated with a list of
the tool models contained in the NOVO tool file. The checkboxes in the Active column enable
you to specify which tools you want to import.
Set Selected — This feature enables you to specify the following settings to a selected group of
tool models in the Tool Table at the same time.
None — Use to set all of the selected tool models to None. None indicates that nothing is to
be done with the tool model. Any tool model in the table designated as "None" will NOT be
transferred to VERICUT's Tool Manager.
Active Off — Use to toggle the Active checkboxes for all of the selected tool models to off
(not checked).
Active On — Use to toggle the Active checkboxes for all of the selected tool models to on
(checked).
Take Action — Use to apply the Set Selected settings, above, to the selected tool models in the
Tool Table.
Remove reference to CAD file in the saved tool — When toggled "off" (not checked), the
imported tool models are stored in the same CAD format that they were imported in. When
toggled "on" (checked), the imported tool components are saved as VERICUT Polygon files.
NOTE: The Model Tolerance value specified in Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project
menu > Settings) is used when creating the VERICUT Polygon (.ply) files.
Import — Use to import the designated tool models from NOVO Tool to the currently active
VERICUT tool library and then close the Novo/Kennametal Tool Import Interface window.
Close — Close the Novo/Kennametal Tool Import Interface window without importing the
specified tool models.
687
VERICUT Help
Measurement Tool window

Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, (Analysis) icon
Features in the Measurement Tool window enable you to use X-Caliper like tools to measure
tool components in Tool Manager.
Measurement Tool window
Toolbar — The features in the Measurement Tool Toolbar are common to all options except as
noted below.
(Down to enable mouse tracking and picks, up to disable.) — Use this icon to
designate that the Measurement Tool window is the window that picks in the VERICUT
graphics area are to be applied to. When toggled “on”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse
Pick Highlight Color specified in the File menu > Preferences window.
or Set Unit — Toggle the icon between inch, and metric, to specify the units
that you want Measurement Tool data displayed in. The Unit feature is not active for the
Feature option. Units will be that of the selected tool component.
688
VERICUT Help
Measure — Computes measurements based on the current Measurement Tool

window configuration. This feature is useful to have Measurement Tool calculate
measurements based on data entered by keyboard, or data that has been edited in the
Measurement Tool window. The Measure feature is not active for the Feature option.
Clear Report — Clears the results from the Measurement Tool window.
Print Report — Displays a Page Setup window enabling you to format the page,
specify the printer, and print.
Save Report — Saves the results from the Measurement Tool window to a file. Use
the file selection window that displays to specify the /path/filename for the file to be
created.
Close — Closes the Measurement Tool window.
Options — Select the desired Measurement Tool option from the pull-down list. The following
options are available:
Feature — The Feature option enables you to obtain critical information related to a
selected tool component.
Distance/Angle — The Distance/Angle option enables you to measure the distance and/or
angle between two selected entities of a tool component.
Thickness — The Thickness option enables you to measure the thickness of a tool
component at a selected point.
Air Distance — The Air Distance option enables you to measure the air gap between two
tool components.
Coordinate System — The Coordinate System pull-down list enables you to select the
coordinate system that you want measurements reported relative to. The selected coordinate
system is displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area in the Foreground color.
Results Table — This is where the results from measurement operations are displayed.
Tip: You can select any part of a line in the Measurement Tool Results Table so that it becomes
highlighted, and then hold down the Ctrl key and click the C key (referred to as Ctrl-C) to copy
the highlighted text or value to the clipboard. The selected text or value can then be pasted
elsewhere.
689
VERICUT Help
Measurement Tool window, Feature
Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, Analysis pull-down menu > Feature option
The Feature option enables you to obtain critical information related to a selected tool
component.
Sample Measurement Tool window, Feature option:
Refer to Measurement Tool window, above, for information on the Toolbar features, the
Options and Coordinate System pull-down lists.
The Feature option enables you to obtain critical information related to a selected tool
component. As you move the mouse around Tool Manager's Tool Display area, a bounding box
will identify the tool component that will be picked at the current cursor location. Once a tool
component is picked, the measurement tool will display some critical information related to the
selected tool component as shown in the sample Measurement Tool window above.
If the tool component was created using a profile (Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution) the
profile will be displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area. Line segments in the profile will
be displayed in magenta and arc segments will be displayed in red. See the examples below.
690
VERICUT Help
The profile will remain displayed until you select another tool component, or remove them by
clicking with the right mouse button and selecting Clear Highlights from the menu that displays.
This enables you to measure the distance or angle between critical points of the profile.
To Measurement Tool window
691
VERICUT Help
Measurement Tool window, Distance/Angle
Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, Analysis pull-down menu > Angle Distance option
The Angle Distance option enables you to measure the distance and/or angle between any
combination of two tool component entities (points, planes, conic axes, coordinate system
origins or axes, or edges formed by intersecting planes).
In general, select the "From" entity, then select the "To" entity. The Measurement Tool
indicates what is being measured on the tool component by highlighting the "measure from"
point (+) and the "measure to" point (o) as well as a line representing the distance (or vectors
representing the angle) between them.
Sample Measurement Tool window, Angle Distance option:
692
VERICUT Help
From / To groups — Each group includes the Feature, Location and Direction used to specify
what to measure from and what to measure to. Use the From / To arrows , to control
which fields are filled in by screen pick data. You can select features on the VERICUT model, or
enter number values (separated by blank spaces) directly into the fields. After selecting the
From feature, VERICUT automatically transfers control to the To group. After selecting the To
feature the Measurement Tool window displays the measurement data.
Feature — Controls the types of features to measure between. Select the Feature type from
the pull-down list.
Feature descriptions:
Point — The X, Y, Z coordinates of the pick point or the X, Y, Z coordinates (separated by
blank spaces) entered the Location text field. A + character moves with the cursor as shown
in the picture below to indicate the current pick location. Once you pick a point the +
character will remain displayed.
Plane — A flat, unbounded surface. If a planar surface is selected, a triangle representing

the plane, and a vector representing the plane normal at the pick point, moves with the
cursor indicating the current location as shown below in the picture on the left. Once you
pick a point, only the vector at the pick point will remain displayed.
If a curved surface is selected, a triangle representing a plane tangent to the surface at the
pick point, and a vector representing the surface normal at the pick point, moves with the
cursor indicating the current location as shown below in the picture on the right. Once you
pick a point, only the vector at the pick point will remain displayed.
693
VERICUT Help
Axis — Creates a vector normal to the surface at the pick point. A vector representing the
surface normal at the pick point, moves with the cursor, indicating the current location as
shown in the picture below. Once you pick a point, the vector at the pick point will remain
displayed.
Edge — Edge formed by two intersecting planes.
Vertices — Enables you to easily select one of the six key points associated with the
triangles representing the faces of the tool component. For each triangle, the points consist
of the three vertices and the midpoint of each of the triangle's three sides. VERICUT selects
the point closest to your mouse pick as shown in the picture on the left below.
694
VERICUT Help
Origin of coordinate system — Enables you to specify a point location by selecting the
origin of a coordinate system axis. Once you select the coordinate system in Tool Manager's
Tool Display area, Measurement Tool will display a + character when the cursor is at the
coordinate system’s origin. Once you select the origin, the + character will remain displayed
and the X, Y, Z coordinates of the origin will be displayed in the Location text field.
Use the Visible option in the right mouse button menu in the Tool Manager: Coordinate
Systems List Area or the Visible checkbox in the Tool Manager: Configure Coordinate
System window to turn on/off the display of available coordinate systems in Tool
Manager's Tool Display area.
Axis of coordinate system — Enables you to specify a vector by selecting the X, Y, or Z axis
of a coordinate system. A vector will display indicating the vector that will be created. Once
you select the axis, the vector will remain displayed and the X, Y, Z coordinates of the start
point of the vector (coordinate system’s origin) will be displayed in the Location text field.
Use the Visible option in the right mouse button menu in the Tool Manager: Coordinate
Systems List Area or the Visible checkbox in the Tool Manager: Configure Coordinate
System window to turn on/off the display of available coordinate systems in Tool
Circle Center — Enables you to specify a circle center point to be used as a From, or To,
feature.
1. Choose Circle Center from the pull-down list, and then click the arrow to enable
selecting geometry in the Tool Manager’s Tool Display area.
Follow the prompts in the temporary message area at the bottom of the Tool Manager
window to define the circle center point.
695
VERICUT Help
2. Pick the XY plane of the circle.
3. Pick the cylinder/cone face that contains the circle.
The circle center point will display in the Tool Display area and the coordinates of the
center point will display in the Location text field in the Measurement Tool window.
696
VERICUT Help
Bounding Plane — Enables you to create a vector at the center, and normal to a tool
components bounding plane. The bounding plane represents the maximum and minimum X
and Y values, X and Z values, or Y and Z values of the tool component. As the cursor is move
over the tool component, the bounding plane of the component is displayed as shown in
the picture on the left below. Once you select the tool component, a vector is displayed at
the center, and normal to the bounding plane as shown in the picture on the right below.
Driven Point — Enables you to select a Driven Point or the Gage Point. Measurement Tool
will select either a Driven Point or the Gage Point depending on which one is closest to your
pick point.
Profile Point — The profile previously created using the Tool Measurement window,
Feature option can be used by the Angle Distance, Profile Point option. All of the profile’s
critical points (endpoints of each segment and the center point of each arc) as shown in the
pictures below, are selectable by the Profile Point option.
Location — Represents the XYZ coordinates of the screen pick.

Direction — Represents IJK of the normal vector at the location of the screen pick.
697
VERICUT Help
Data from the screen pick fills the Location and Direction data fields in the active From or To
group. If needed, you can edit data in these fields, and then press the Measure icon to
obtain a measurement
Measurement results are displayed in the Measurement Tool window. Data output includes the
From / To values input and the measured distance and/or angle.
698
VERICUT Help
Measurement Tool window, Thickness
Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, Analysis pull-down menu > Thickness option
The Thickness option is used to measure the thickness of a tool component.
Sample Measurement Tool window, Thickness option:
Location — Represents the XYZ coordinates of the point to measure from.

Direction — Represents IJK of the measurement direction vector into material.
699
VERICUT Help
Data from the screen pick fills the Location and Direction data fields. If needed, you can edit
data in these fields, and then use the Measure icon to obtain a measurement.
Location and Direction values input, the XYZ point where the direction vector exits the material
and the measured thickness between the Location and Exit points.
Example:
1. Move the cursor to the location where you want to measure.
2. Make sure that the vector that displays is pointing in the direction that you want to
measure.
3. Pick with the left mouse button to take the measurement.
Measure the Insert thickness. Measure the Holder thickness.
700
VERICUT Help
Measurement Tool window, Air Distance
Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, Analysis pull-down menu > Air Distance option
The Air Distance option is used to measure air gap between two solid surfaces.
Sample Measurement Tool window, Air Distance option:

Direction — Represents IJK of the measurement direction vector away from solid material.
701
VERICUT Help
data in these fields, and then use the Measure icon to obtain a measurement.
Location and Direction vector values input, the XYZ point where the direction vector re-enters
solid material and the measured air distance between the Location and Entry points.
Example:
1. Move the cursor to the location where you want to measure.
2. Make sure that the vector that displays is pointing in the direction that you want to
measure as shown in the picture on the left below.
3. Pick with the left mouse button to take the measurement. Measurement Tool will visually
indicate the air distance that was measured as shown in the picture on the right below.
702
VERICUT Help
Turret Setup window

Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, (Turret Setup) icon
The features in the Turret Setup window enable you to load or change tools, or change tool
positions in a turret.
Turret Setup Table

Each record in the Turret Setup Table represents a position on a turret.
Turret — Indicates the name of the turret component. Records for all turrets in the machine
configuration will be displayed in the Turret Setup Table.
Index — Indicates the Index number of a turret tool position.
Tool ID — Indicates the Tool ID of the tool loaded in that position in the turret. A blank field
indicates that no tool is currently loaded in the position.
703
VERICUT Help
When you select a record in the Turret Setup Table, the record becomes highlighted. The Tool
Display area in Tool Manager updates to display the turret with all tools currently loaded in it.
The tool represented by the selected record is marked in the turret display as well as becomes
highlighted in the Tool Manager Tool Table. See the picture that follows.
To add or change a tool associated with the highlighted turret record, click in the Tool ID field
for that record and select the desired tool from the pull-down list. The list will contain all tools
in the current Tool Library and a blank field.
Use the Position button, described below, to display the tool positioning window and use it to
orient the tool correctly on the turret.
OK — Use OK to accept your changes and close the Turret Setup window.
Position — Displays the Turret Tool Positioning window enabling you to correctly position a
tool on the turret.
Cancel — Closes the Turret Setup window without accepting your changes.
704
VERICUT Help
Turret Tool Positioning window

Use the Turret Setup window: Position button to access the Turret Tool Positioning window.
The features on the Turret Tool Positioning window, enable you to correctly orient a tool (or
tool assembly) on a turret, similar to orienting models. The features on the Turret Setup
window tabs work the same as the features on the corresponding tab on the Tool Definition
window: Assembly tab.
Translate tab — Features on this tab are used to translate the selected tool via indicating
"from" and "to" points to move the tool.
Rotate tab — Features on this tab are used to rotate the selected tool about a rotation center
point.
Assemble tab — The features on this tab enable you to assemble tools on a turret, by mating,
or aligning, one to three planar surfaces with surfaces on the turret, similar to assembling tool
assemblies or models.
Matrix tab — Features on this tab move the selected tool via a twelve parameter
transformation matrix.
Close — Closes the Turret Tool Positioning window.
705
VERICUT Help
Turret Tool Positioning window, Translate tab
Features on this tab enable you to translate the selected tool (or tool assembly) via indicating
"from" and "to" points to move the tool, similar to translating models. Movement occurs each
time you press the Move button. If the applied movement is incorrect, press Undo (in the
Turret Positioning window) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Translate tab features on the Tool Definition
Translate tab features:

From / To — Use to specify a "From" point and "To" point that are used to calculate the
distance that the tool is to be moved, relative to the tool origin. XYZ values can be entered
(separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the field then clicking on the tool in the Turret
Display area. As you move the mouse over the tool, a crosshair and vector show you the
pending pick-point location.
Move — Moves the selected object by the incremental distance, as calculated from the "From"
point to the "To" point location.
To Turret Tool Positioning window
706
VERICUT Help
Turret Tool Positioning window, Rotate tab
Features on this tab are used to rotate the selected tool (or tool assembly) about a rotation
center point, similar to rotating models. Movement occurs each time you press one of the
rotation direction buttons: X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-. If the applied rotation is incorrect, press Undo
(in the Turret Positioning window) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Rotate tab features on the Tool Definition window:
Assembly tab.
Rotate tab features:

Center of Rotation — Specifies XYZ point location about which to rotate the tool. XYZ values
can be entered in the Center of Rotation text field (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking
in the Center of Rotation text field, then clicking on a tool in the Turret Display area. To see the
center of rotation, press . To remove the center of rotation symbol press the button
again, or close the window.
Increment — Specifies incremental degrees of rotation to apply when one of the rotation
direction buttons are pressed.
Rotation buttons — (X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-) Applies the incremental degrees of rotation specified
in the Increment field. Rotation occurs about the Center of Rotation relative to the tool origin.
707
VERICUT Help
Turret Tool Positioning window, Assemble tab

The features on this tab enable you to orient a tool (or tool assembly) on a turret, by mating, or
aligning, one to three planar surfaces with surfaces on the turret, similar to assembling models.
If a non-planar surface is selected, VERICUT constructs a tangent plane at the pick point. The
relationship of surfaces being mated or aligned is known as a "constraint". If the applied
movement is incorrect, press Undo (in the Turret Positioning window) to return the tool to its
previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Assemble tab features on the Tool Definition
Follow these general steps to define a constraint for assembly:
1. Choose the constraint type.
2. In the Turret Display area, select a surface on the tool to move.
3. Select the surface to move the tool relative to on the turret.
Assemble tab features:

Constraint Type — Specifies how to constrain selected surfaces during tool movement. After
selecting two surfaces in the Turret Display area to define a constraint, VERICUT moves the tool
and highlights the satisfied constraint with a checkmark.
Options:
Mate — Moves the tool so the selected surface opposes the surface selected on the turret
(surface normals oppose each other).
Align — Moves the tool so the selected surface is aligned with the surface selected on the
turret (surface normal point in the same direction).
Offset — Distance and direction in which to offset constrained surfaces, applied normal to the
surface.
708
VERICUT Help
Reset — Resets constraints to receive new data.
709
VERICUT Help
Turret Tool Positioning window, Matrix tab

Features on this tab enable you to orient the selected tool (or tool assembly) via a twelve
parameter transformation matrix, similar to orienting models with a matrix. If the applied
movement is incorrect, press Undo (in the Turret Positioning window) to return the object to its
previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Matrix tab features on the Tool Definition window:
Assembly tab.
Matrix tab features:

Matrix table — The transformation matrix table is similar to the matrix used in programming
APT tool paths. Its twelve parameters reveal the geometric attributes of the local (transformed)
coordinate system (CSYS) in terms of the machine origin.
The format of the matrix table is as follows:
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
Each row represents an axis of the local CSYS. The first three columns represent the vector
associated with each axis: I1, J1, K1 as the positive X-axis vector; I2, J2, K2 as the positive Y-axis
710
VERICUT Help
vector; and I3, J3, K3 as the positive Z-axis vector. The fourth column values D1, D2, D3
represent the coordinates of the origin point of the local CSYS.
NOTE: If you prefer to see the Matrix Table displayed with the I, J, K along the vertical axis and
the X, Y, Z along the horizontal axis, set the environment variable,
CGTECH_MATRIX_FORMAT=VERTICAL.
Update — Updates the tool location to reflect the matrix table transformation.
Apply Inverse On Update — When selected, inverts the matrix so that its twelve parameters
reveal the geometrical attributes of the machine origin in terms of the local (transformed)
coordinate system.
711
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager View Orient window

Location:
Tool Manager Tool Bar, Orient pull-down menu > Orient option
The Orient option opens the Tool Manager View Orient window enabling you to orient the tool,
or tool assembly, displayed in the Tool Manager Tool Display area. You can view the tool from
any angle or distance, and change the tool view orientation at any time.
The behavior of most of the features in the Tool Manager View Orient window is identical to
those in the View Orient window accessed from the VERICUT main menu bar except that they
apply to the Tool Manager Tool Display area instead of the views in the VERICUT graphics area.
Any differences are described below.
712
VERICUT Help
Dynamic Viewing Options:

These options use mouse actions to dynamically orient the tool in the Tool Display area. Mouse
actions required differ, depending on the active option. See below for details.
(Dynamic X Rotation) — Rotate the tool around the X axis. Drag the mouse up/down to
rotate.
(Dynamic Y Rotation) — Rotate the tool around the Y axis. Drag the mouse left/right to
rotate.
(Dynamic Z Rotation) — Rotate the tool around the Z axis. Drag the mouse left/right to
rotate.
(Dynamic XY Rotation) — Rotate the tool around the X and Y axes at the same time. Drag
the mouse up/down/left/right to rotate.
(Dynamic Pan) — Pan/translate the tool in the plane if the screen. Drag the mouse in the
direction to pan.
(Dynamic Zoom) — Zoom/magnify the tool. Drag mouse up to zoom in, down to zoom out
Shortcuts:
1. Use the following mouse features to manipulate the tool display with a single mouse
button.
Dynamic Rotate — Left mouse button, drag.
Dynamic Pan — Right mouse button, drag.
Dynamic Zoom — Rotate the thumbwheel toward you to make the displayed image
larger, away from you to make the displayed image smaller.
You can use View menu > Dynamic Controls > Reverse mouse wheel in the VERICUT
main menu bar to reverse this action.
NOTE: Dynamic Controls (View menu > Dynamic Controls) must be set to VERICUT.
713
VERICUT Help
2. The following keys provide instant access from the keyboard to dynamic viewing options
(press and hold keys while dragging):
Dynamic Zoom — <Ctrl>, drag
Dynamic Pan — <Shift>, drag
Dynamic XY — <Ctrl> + <Shift>, drag
Mouse actions are the same as described above.
Standard drawing view buttons- XY, YX, YZ, ZY, ZX, XZ, V-ISO, H-ISO — Orients the tool in the
selected standard drawing view and automatically fits the object in the Tool Display area..
Rotation Options:
Angles — Absolute rotation about the tool coordinate system X Y Z axes, respectively. The
three values are separated by spaces.
Increment — Degrees of incremental rotation to apply when a rotation button is pressed (see
below).
Rotation buttons (X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-) — axis and direction in which to apply incremental
rotation specified by the Increment value described above.
Set Spin Center — Specify a point to be used as the center of rotation during dynamic rotations.
Click in the Set Spin Center text field so that it becomes active, then enter the XYZ coordinates
(separated by spaces) in the text field and then click on the Apply button to specify the spin
center point. The values are applied to the Tool Display area.
NOTE: You cannot click in the Set Spin Center text field and then pick a spin center location in
the Tool Display area like you can pick the spin center location in the view when the View
Orient window is accessed from the VERICUT main menu bar.
Press icon to display the Spin Center marker and activate the Spin Center point in the
Tool Display area.. To de-activate Spin Center point and clear the Spin Center marker, press the
button again. When you close the View Orient window, the Spin Center marker will no longer
be displayed but the activated Spin Center will remain active. When you use one of the dynamic
rotation features described above in a view with an active Spin Center, the Spin Center point
will be used as the center of rotation instead of the tool coordinate system origin.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the spin center location by right-clicking on the position on
tool assembly in the Tool Display area where you want the spin center located, and then left-
click on Spin Center in the menu that displays. The spin center will be located at your pick
point.
714
VERICUT Help
Static Viewing Options:

These buttons use various mouse actions to zoom, fit, and reverse the tool displayed in the Tool
Display area. See below for details.
Dynamic Zoom — Left-click and drag mouse to trap a rectangular area to zoom in on. Press
<Esc> to interrupt the rubber-banding action.
Pan — Click on the tool and then drag the cursor the distance and direction that you want the
tool to move within the Tool Display area.
Zoom In — Zooms in approximately 20% each time the button is clicked.
Zoom Out — Zooms out approximately 20% each time the button is clicked.
Fit — Fits the tool in the Tool Display area.
Reverse — Reverses the viewing direction, as if you were looking from behind the tool.
Shortcuts:
1. You can quickly fit, reverse, or orient the tool in one of the defined views by right-
clicking on the tool in the Tool Display area and then selecting Fit, Reverse, or Select
View from the menu that displays.
2. Use the thumb wheel on the mouse to Zoom to Box. Click on the thumb wheel and drag
the mouse to define the box to zoom to. The zoom takes place when you release the
thumb wheel.
Reset — Resets the tool displayed in the Tool Display area to the last orientation accepted by
pressing Apply, or as it was when the Orient window was opened.
Apply — Use the Apply button to accept the current window settings and leave the View Orient
window open for additional work.
Close — Use to close the View Orient window.
715
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool List Area and Coordinate Systems

Area
The Tool List Area of of the Tool Manager window contains a list of all tool assemblies and the
components that make up each tool assembly for all of the tools contained in the current tool
library file.
The Coordinate Systems Area of the Tool Manager window enables you to create and modify
coordinate systems that can be used to orient tools and tool assemblies from within the Tool
Manager. Both of these features are located on the left side if the Tool Manager window.
716
VERICUT Help
(Expand/Collapse the Csys Window) — Click on the Expand/Collapse the Csys Window
icon to hide the Coordinate Systems area from being displayed in the Tool Manager window.
Click on the Expand/Collapse the Csys Window icon again to re-display the Coordinate Systems
area in the Tool Manager window.
Coordinate System area displayed Coordinate System area not displayed
717
VERICUT Help
(Expand/Collapse All Tool Components) — Click on the Expand/Collapse All Tool

Components icon to display the tool components in the Tool List. Click on the Expand/Collapse
All Tool Components icon again to remove the display of tool components in the Tool List.
Tool components not displayed Tool components displayed
(Sort by Tool ID) — Use this feature to sort the tools in the Tool List Area.
Click on the Sort by Tool ID) icon to list the tools in the Tool List Area by Tool ID from lowest to
highest. Click on the Sort by Tool ID) icon again to list the tools in the Tool List Area in the
reverse order.
718
VERICUT Help
Click on the to display a menu with the following options.
Sort by Tool ID — This feature provides the same functionality described above for the Sort
icon.
Select Sort by Tool ID to list the tools in the Tool List Area by Tool ID from lowest to highest.
Select Sort by Tool ID again to list the tools in the Tool List Area by Tool ID in the reverse order.
Description — Use this feature to sort the tools in the Tool List Area by the tool descriptions.
Select Description to list the tools in the Tool List Area by description. Select Description again
to list the tools in the Tool List Area in the reverse order.
Tool Usage Type — Use this feature to sort the tools in the Tool List Area by the tool usage
type (Mill, Hole Making, Turn, Probe, etc.).
Select Tool Usage Type to list the tools in the Tool List Area by tool usage type. Select Tool
Usage Type again to list the tools in the Tool List Area in the reverse order.
Search Forward — Searches forward in the Tool List for the text string specified in the
Search Text field.
Search Backward — Searches backward in the NC program listing for the text string
specified in the Search Text field.
719
VERICUT Help
Tool List Area
The Tool List Area provides a list of the tools/tool assemblies contained in the Tool Library.
Each tool/tool assembly has a unique alpha-numeric text identifier (ID).
IDs typically correspond to tool or pocket numbers referenced by the tool change record that
will call the tool from the library. For example, ID " " would normally be used for a tool
called by a G-Code data block "T1M6", or an APT tool change record "LOADTL/1". However, you
can use a tool list to cross-reference tools having IDs in a library that are different from those in
the tool change record.
See Tool Change List panel, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for details.
Hint: Use IDs and descriptions that make it easy for others to find the tools they need.
Each tool/tool assembly in the Tool Table includes information about the tool/tool assembly,
tool components (cutters, holders, etc.) and other tool related records (OptiPath, Driven Point,
and Cutter Compensation) associated with it.
Tools
The following tool types are valid in a VERICUT tool library file.
Mill Tool — Mill tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool Components
associated with it: Insert Cutters, Revolved Cutters, and Holders. Mill tools can also have
one, or more, of the following tool related records associated with it: OptiPath, Driven
Point, and Cutter Compensation.
Hole Making — Hole Making tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool
Components associated with it: Revolved Cutters, Insert Cutters, and Holders. Hole Making
tools can also have one, or more, of the following tool related records associated with it:
Driven Point, and Cutter Compensation.
Turn Tool — Turn tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool Components
associated with it: Insert Cutters and Holders. Turn tools can also have one, or more, of the
following tool related records associated with it: Driven Point, and Cutter Compensation.
720
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool — Probe tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool Components
associated with it: Probe Tips and Holders. Probe tools can also have one, or more, of the
Water Jet Tool — Water Jet tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool
Components associated with it: Water Jet cutter and Holders. Water Jet tools can also have
one, or more, of the following tool related records associated with it: Driven Point, and
Cutter Compensation.
Knife Tool — Knife tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool Components
associated with it: Knife cutter and Holders. Knife tools can also have one, or more, of the
Polisher Tool — Polisher tools can have one, or more, of the following Tool
Components associated with it: Polish Limits component, Polisher component and Holders.
Polisher tools can also have one, or more, of the following tool related records associated
with it: Driven Point, and Cutter Compensation.
Tool Components
Insert Cutter — Insert Cutters can be either mill inserts for Milling Tools or turn inserts
for Turn Tools.
See Tool Component tab (Mill Insert), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about milling inserts.
See Tool Component tab (Turn Insert), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about turning inserts.
Revolved Cutter — Revolved Cutters are tools like end mills.

See Tool Component tab (Revolved Cutter), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help
for additional information about revolved cutters.
Probe Tip — Probe Tip components are used to define the stylus portion of a probing
tool or probe tool assembly.
721
VERICUT Help
See Tool Component tab (Probe Tip), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about probe tips.
Hole Making Tool — Hole Making Tool components are are tools like drills, reamers,
center drills and taps.
See Tool Component tab (Hole Making Tool), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help
for additional information about taps.
Water Jet Cutter — Water Jet Cutter components are used to define the cutting portion
of a water jet tool assembly.
See Tool Component tab (Water Jet), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about water jet cutters.
Knife — Knife components are used to define ultrasonic knife tools.

See Tool Component tab (Knife), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about taps.
Polisher tool — Two components are used to define Polisher tools.
Polish Limits — The "inner" portion of the Polisher tool assembly that is used to
detect areas where the tool applied too much pressure on the part (penetrates the part
too deep).
Polisher — The "outer" portion of the Polisher tool assembly that is used to polish or
deburr the part.
See Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab (Polisher), also in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help for additional information about taps.
Holder — Holder components are used to define a tool holder or the components of a
tool holder assembly.
See Tool Component tab (Holder), also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
additional information about tool holders.
722
VERICUT Help
Tool Related Records
OptiPath Record — Used by VERICUT to determine how to optimize feed rates and/or
spindle speeds for the specific tool under various cutting conditions. Both “active” and
“inactive” OptiPath records for a particular tool are displayed in the Tool Table. The “active”
or “inactive” state is determined by the Material and Machine settings on the Optimize
Control window, OptiPath Settings tab (ref. Optimize Control window, OptiPath Settings
tab, in the Optimize menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
Active OptiPath Record — When the Material and Machine values for a particular
OptiPath record in the Tool List Area, both match the Material and Machine settings on
the Optimize Control window, OptiPath Settings tab, the OptiPath record is considered
to be “active”. Active OptiPath records are identified by colored symbols.
Inactive OptiPath Record — When the Material and Machine values for a particular
OptiPath record in the Tool List Area, do not both match the Material and Machine
settings on the Optimize Control window, OptiPath Settings tab, the OptiPath record to
be considered “inactive”. Inactive OptiPath records are identified by gray symbols.
Qualified Dimensions Record —
See Specify Other Tool Properties, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information on using OptiPath and other tool related records.
Shortcuts:
1. Double click a tool component in the Tool List Area to display the Tool Component tab
to enable modification of the tool component.
2. Right-click in the Tool List Area to display a menu with the following features. The
features that are available will vary slightly depending on the item that is highlighted.
723
VERICUT Help
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted object in the Tool List Area.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted object from the Tool List Area.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted object in the Tool List Area and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted o in the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted object in the Tool List Area.
The Paste feature only becomes active after the Cut or Copy feature has been used.
Add Tool — Use to add a new tool assembly to the Tool List Area. Select the tool type from the
menu that displays. VERICUT will add a unique Tool ID but you can change it if you wish.
Mill — Adds a Mill Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List and displays
the Tool Component tab for Mill Tools enabling you to define the tool component in the
new tool assembly.
Hole Making — Adds a Hole Making Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool
List and displays the Tool Component tab for Hole Making Tools enabling you to define the
tool component in the new tool assembly.
724
VERICUT Help
Turn — Adds a Turning Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List and
displays the Tool Component tab for Turn Inserts enabling you to define the tool insert in
the new tool assembly.
Probe — Adds a Probe Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List and
displays the Tool Component tab for Probe Tips enabling you to define the probe
component in the new tool assembly.
Water Jet — Adds a Water Jet Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List
and displays the Tool Component tab for Water Jet cutters enabling you to define the water
jet cutter in the new tool assembly.
Knife — Adds a Knife Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List and
displays the Tool Component tab for Knife cutters enabling you to define the knife cutter in
the new tool assembly.
Polisher — Adds a Polisher Tool tool assembly after the highlighted tool in the Tool List and
displays the Tool Component tab for Polisher tools enabling you to define the polisher tool
in the new tool assembly.
Mill Tool with Cutter Body — Displays the Mill Tool with Cutter Body window enabling you
to quickly and easily define inserted milling tools. After defining the insert(s) and the cutter
body, an inserted mill tool assembly will be added after the highlighted tool in the Tool List.
Search Tool — Displays the Search Tool window enabling you to search existing tool
libraries for tools with specific attributes.
Add Tool Component — Use to add a new tool component to an existing tool in the Tool List
Area. Select the component type from the menu that displays.
Holder — Adds a Holder component to the highlighted Tool and displays the Tool
Component tab for Holders enabling you to define the new holder component.
Cutter — Adds a Cutter component to the highlighted Tool and displays the appropriate
Tool Component tab enabling you to define the cutte.
Cutter Body — Displays the Mill Tool with Cutter Body window enabling you to define a
cutter body.
Add OptiPath —
New — Displays the OptiPath window enabling you to define a new OptiPath record for the
highlighted tool.
Find Existing — Displays the Search OptiPath Record window.
NOTE: This feature is not available for VERICUT Composite Simulation.
Add Driven Point — Displays the Tool Information tab enabling you to add one or more a
Driven Point records for the highlighted tool.
Add Cutter Compensation — Displays the Tool Information tab enabling you to add one or
more Cutter Compensation records for the highlighted tool.
725
VERICUT Help
Add Qualified Dimensions — The Qualified Dimensions feature is only available for turning
tools that use inserts created in a CAD system or STL inserts. This feature enables VERICUT to
correctly position and project the turning insert cutting faces on the turning plane.
Click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted. Then select Add menu > Qualified
Dimensions to add a Qualified Dimensions record to the tool as shown in the picture below.
You can also right-click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted and then select Add
Qualified Dimensions in the menu that displays to add the Qualified Dimensions record.
The qualified dimension and driven point location are often coincident. When adding a
Qualified Dimension record, it will default to the same 3 values as the first driven point if one
exists. When adding the first driven point it will default to the same 3 values as the Qualified
Dimension if one exists.
The Qualified Dimension can be modified as need by editing the values in the Description
column of the Qualified Dimensions record.
When a Qualified Dimension Record is added a turning plane is also created. The turning plane
defaults to the ZX plane of the “orientation” of the tool (how it is mounted in the tool
component). When orientation is 0,0,0, then it is the same as the ZX plane of the tool origin.
The turning plane direction is indicated to be the Y-axis of the tool orientation axis by the
presence of a Y in the Units column of the Qualified Dimensions record. Another axis can be
specified by selecting the desired axis from the pull-down list in the Units column.
Examples
For the tool in the picture below, the X-Y For the tool in the picture below, the X-Z
plane goes through the Qualified plane goes through the Qualified
Dimensions point, and the cutting plane Dimensions point, and the cutting plane
direction will be along the tool’s Z-axis. direction will be along the tool’s Y-axis.
726
VERICUT Help
Search Tool — Displays the Search Tool window enabling you to search existing tool libraries
for tools with specific attributes.
Search OptiPath — Displays the Search OptiPath Record window enabling you to search
existing tool/OptiPath libraries for records with specific attributes.
Spin Around — The Spin Around feature is only available for inserted tools. It enables you to
specify whether to spin the tool around the Tool Axis (for example a right angle holder), or
around the Machine Spindle axis.
Shift Component Z — The Shift Component Z feature displays the Z Offset window enabling
you to specify an offset value for moving the highlighted tool component in the Z direction.
The Shift Component Z feature is not available under the following conditions:
 The highlighted tool component is part of a Turn tool assembly.
 When the highlighted item is an OptiPath record.
727
VERICUT Help
Expand/Contract All — Click on this feature to Expand (display all tool components) for all
Tools in the Tool List Area. Click on it again to Contract (not display all tool components) for all
Tools in the Tool List Area.
Show Tool Components — Use this feature to show all tool components for the highlighted
tool in the Tool List Area.
Hide Tool Components — Use this feature to hide all tool components for the highlighted tool
in the Tool List Area.
Visible — in the right mouse button menu indicates that the highlighted tool
component is currently visible. Clicking on in the right mouse button menu will
turn off the visibility of the highlighted tool component.
in the right mouse button menu indicates that the highlighted tool component is
currently not visible. Clicking on in the right mouse button menu will turn on the
visibility of the highlighted tool component.
Changes to tool component visibility is not saved in the Tool Library.
728
VERICUT Help
Z Offset window
The Z Offset window, accessed from the Tool Manager: Tool List Area right mouse button
menu: Shift Component Z feature, enables you to specify an offset value for shifting the
highlighted tool component in the Z direction.
Z Offset — Use to specify an offset distance for shifting the tool component in the Z direction.
Enter the offset distance in the Z Offset text field.
OK — Use OK to apply the specified Z offset distance and close the Z Offset window.
Close — Use to close the Z Offset window without applying the specified Z offset distance.
729
VERICUT Help
Coordinate Systems List Area
The features in the Coordinate Systems List Area enable you to create and modify coordinate
systems that can be used to orient tools and tool assemblies from within the Tool Manager.
The Coordinate Systems area, located below the Tool List Area and above the Message area, is
initially displayed empty as shown in the picture below.
Once one or more coordinate systems are added, the Coordinate System area changes so that it
is displayed in the following picture.
The Coordinate System area shows a list of all of the coordinate systems that have been
created in Tool Manager.
Shortcut:
Right-click in the Coordinate System List area that has no coordinate systems defined to display
a menu with the following features:
730
VERICUT Help
Right-click in the Coordinate System List area that has one or more coordinate systems defined
to display a menu with the following features:
Add New CSYS — Adds a new CSYS to the Tool Manager, Coordinate Systems list. VERICUT
automatically provides a unique name for the CSYS. You can right-click on the default name and
select Rename from the menu that displays to rename the CSYS if desired.
the Tool origin. The newly added coordinate system is automatically selected in the Coordinate
Systems list. Use the Configure Coordinate System menu to make any necessary modifications
to the newly added CSYS.
VERICUT will read the file and creates a CSYS attached to the selected tool.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted coordinate system in the Coordinate System list and puts it in the
paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted coordinate system in the Coordinate System list to the paste
buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted coordinate system in the
Coordinate System list.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted coordinate system from the Coordinate System list.
731
VERICUT Help
Rename — Use to rename the highlighted setup.

Visible — Use to make the highlighted coordinate system from the Coordinate System list
visible, or not visible in the Tool Manager, Tool Display area. The Visible icon will indicate the
visibility status of the coordinate system. indicates "visible", indicates "not visible".
Click on Visible to toggle between the two modes.
See Creating Coordinate Systems for Use in Tool Manager, also in the Project Tree section of
Help for information about using the Coordinate Systems area features.
732
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Parameter Definition Area

The Tool Parameter Definition Area, located in the center of the Tool Manager window
between the Tool List Area/Coordinate Systems List Area and the Tool Display Area, will display
various windows depending on what is currently selected in the Tool List Area . These windows
will enable you to define/edit tool components, define Coordinate Systems, and define other
tool properties like Driven Point, Cutter Compensation values, etc. Each of the windows and the
features contained on them are described in the sections that follow.
Tool Information tab — The Tool Information tab is displayed when a tool record in the Tool List
Area is highlighted or whenever a new tool assembly is added.
Tool Report tab — The Tool Report tab has features that enable you to create Tool Report
images that can be added to a VERICUT report.
Tool Force Data tab — The features on this tab enable you to specify Cutter and Feed
Optimization characteristics for tools to be used by the VERICUT Force NC program
optimization tool.
Tool Definition window — The Tool Definition window enables you to define tool component
shape, color, location, and other attributes.
733
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System window — The Configure Coordinate System window is displayed
when a Csys record in the Coordinate Systems Area is highlighted or whenever a new
coordinate system is added.
734
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab

The Tool Information tab is displayed when a tool record in the Tool List Area is highlighted or
whenever a new tool assembly is added.
Description — Use to enter, and display a description for a tool/tool assembly record. Any
alpha-numeric text can be entered in this field. Special characters are not recommended.
735
VERICUT Help
The Description field is also used to enter, and display, the cutter compensation value for Cutter
Compensation records and to enter, and display, the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the driven point
for Driven Point records.
Units — Use to enter, and display, the unit measurement system (Inch or Millimeter) in which
the tool is defined. If the tool units are different from the VERICUT session units when loaded,
then tool description values are converted appropriately.
Gage Point — Use to enter, and display, the location of the tool assembly gage point. By
default, the gage point is located at the tool origin. Values entered move the gage point relative
to the tool origin, or you can select a gage point by clicking in the Gage Point field then clicking
on the tool in the Tool Display Area (ref. Tool Manager, Tool Display Area, also in the Tool
Manager window section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help). As you move the mouse over the tool, a point and normal vector
show you the pending pick-point location.
When processing G-Code NC programs, VERICUT uses the gage point in the following two ways:
1. Controls how the tool loads in the NC machine — When a tool is loaded for cutting, the
Gage Point is located at the NC machine's Tool component origin.
2. When a Gage Offset Table (ref. Gage Offset Table in the Tables for Processing G-Codes
section, in the CGTech Help Library) is used to calculate the driven point needed to drive
the tool in Tool Tip and Tool Length Compensation" programming methods, VERICUT
uses the Gage Point to determine where the driven point (a.k.a. "control point") is
located, relative to the gage point.
Missing or incorrect gage point values will cause a tool to load incorrectly on a 3-D machine and
cause improper cutting.
Sample gage points for milling tools:
736
VERICUT Help
Sample gage points for turning tools:
The "Gage Point" view attribute displays a hollow target symbol , at the gage point
location (ref. Tool Manager: Tool Display Area right mouse button menu, also in the Tool
Manager window section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help).
NOTE: While a Gage Offset Table can still be used to specify the gage offset values required
to calculate the driven point (ref. Gage Offset Table in the Tables for Processing G-Codes
section, in the CGTech Help Library), the recommended method of specifying the driven point is
to add one, or more, Driven Point records to the tool in Tool Manager. Then use the
GageOffsetDrivenPoint macro to specify the Driven Point record to use for the tool motion.
This method does not use a Gage Offset Table.
For more information on the GageOffsetDrivenPoint macro, and all VERICUT macros, see the
VERICUT Macros section, in the CGTech Help Library.
When using a Gage Offset Table, VERICUT uses the gage offset to calculate where the driven
point (aka "control point") is located relative to the gage point. When using Driven Point
records, VERICUT uses the driven point offsets in the Driven Point record to calculate the driven
point relative to Tool Tip Zero.
Orientation — Use to specify, and display, the orientation of the tool assembly when loaded for
cutting. Three values are entered (separated by spaces) to define the X, Y, Z rotation angles,
737
VERICUT Help
respectively. Angle values are in degrees, relative to the tool origin. Rotation occurs about the
tool's gage point.
NOTE: This feature is only applicable when NC Program Type is G-Code Data.
Teeth — The number of teeth for the tool is automatically entered based on the Teeth value in
the “active” OptiPath record associated with the tool/tool assembly.
NOTE: You have the ability to manually edit the number of teeth by typing in a value but be
aware that if the number of teeth entered does not match the number of teeth specified in the
OptiPath record, the tool will not be optimized.
Comments — This field enables you to add comments related to the tool/tool assembly. The
comment text is stored with the tool ID.
See Specify Other Tool Properties, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information on using the features described above.
Qualified Dimensions — The Qualified Dimensions feature is only available for turning tools
that use inserts created in a CAD system or STL inserts. When a turning tool is created with this
type of insert two things take place. First, a Qualified Dimension field is added to the Tool
Information tab for the tool as shown in the Tool Information tab picture on the following page.
Second, a Qualified Dimensions record is added to the tool assembly in the Tool List Area as
shown in the picture below. Holding the cursor over the Qualified Dimensions record will
display a tip with the current values of the record as shown in the picture below.
This feature enables VERICUT to correctly position and project the turning insert cutting faces
on the turning plane.
Click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted. Click on the part of the
(Add a Component to the Selected Tool) icon in the Tool Manager window Tool Bar to display a
menu. Select Qualified Dimensions in the menu to display the Tool Information tab.
You can also right-click on the turning tool so that it becomes highlighted and then select Add
Qualified Dimensions in the menu that displays to display the Tool Information tab.
738
VERICUT Help
Tool Information tab
The qualified dimension and driven point location are often coincident. When adding a
Qualified Dimension record, it will default to the same 3 values as the first driven point if one
exists. When adding the first driven point it will default to the same 3 values as the Qualified
Dimension if one exists.
The Qualified Dimension can be modified as need by editing the values in the Qualified
Dimensions field.
When a Qualified Dimension is added, a turning plane is also created. The turning plane
defaults to the ZX plane of the “orientation” of the tool (how it is mounted in the tool
component). When orientation is 0,0,0, then it is the same as the ZX plane of the tool origin.
The turning plane direction is indicated to be the Y-axis of the tool orientation axis by the
presence of a Y in the pull-down list next to the Qualified Dimensions field. Another axis can be
specified by selecting the desired axis from the pull-down list.
739
VERICUT Help
Examples
For the tool in the picture below, the X-Y For the tool in the picture below, the X-Z
plane goes through the Qualified plane goes through the Qualified
Dimensions point, and the cutting plane Dimensions point, and the cutting plane
direction will be along the tool’s Z-axis. direction will be along the tool’s Y-axis.
Driven Point — Use to add one or more Driven Point records to the highlighted tool. Click on
the icon to add Driven Point records to the list.
To remove a record from the list, select the record that is to be removed so that it becomes
highlighted and then click on the icon.
740
VERICUT Help
VERICUT assigns a default ID but you can modify it if you choose by double clicking on the
current ID value so that it becomes highlighted and then edit the value as desired. VERICUT
assigns a default Driven Point value of 0 0 0 but you can modify it by double clicking on the
current value so that it becomes highlighted and then edit it as desired.
This feature is used to specify an offset for the tool control point, or "driven point". Material is
removed based on motion commands and the tool shape relative to the control point. For
milling tools, a positive value moves the control point in the positive tool axis direction (closer
to the spindle), while a negative value moves the control point in the opposite direction.
NOTE: VERICUT material removal for milling tools does not support driven points with X- or Y-
offsets, only Z-offsets are allowed. If you wish to drive the machine with an X, or Y, offset driven
point, and to have the correct material removal, you should define 2 driven points for the tool.
For example, to drive the machine with an X offset, create the 1st driven point (0,0,0) and the
2nd (6,0,0).
For turning tools, XYZ values (separated by spaces) are entered relative to the spindle axis (Z),
and cross-slide axis (X).
Sample Driven Point values for a milling tool:
Sample Driven Point values for a turning tool:
When defined, the "Driven Point" view attribute displays as a hollow target symbol at the
control point location. (ref. Tool Manager: Tool Display Area right mouse button menu, also in
741
VERICUT Help
the Tool Manager window section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
Cutter Compensation — Use to add one or more Cutter Compensation records for the
highlighted tool. Click on the icon to add Cutter Compensation records to the list.
To remove a record from the list, select the record that is to be removed so that it becomes
highlighted and then click on the icon.
VERICUT assigns a default ID but you can modify it if you choose by double clicking on the
current ID value so that it becomes highlighted and then edit the value as desired. To modify
the current Cutter Compensation value, double clicking on the current value so that it becomes
highlighted and then edit it as desired.
742
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Report tab

The Tool Report tab has features that enable you to create a Tool Report images that can be
added to a VERICUT report.
743
VERICUT Help
that the Tool Report window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics area are to be
in the VERICUT File menu > Preferences window.
Tool Report Table

Each record in the Tool Report Table represents a Tool Report image that can be added to a
VERICUT report. Each record consists of the following columns of data:
Measurement ID —
Plan Size — Sets the size of the "plan rectangle" drawn on the glass. Choose (A, B, C, A1, A2,
A3 or A4) from the pull-down list. (Default = A for inch, A1 for mm)
Tool ID — The Tool ID of the tool that the tool record represents.
Orient — Sets the orientation of the "plan rectangle" drawn on the glass. Choose (Portrait,
or Landscape) from the pull-down list. (Default = Landscape)
View — Defines the orientation of the Tool Report image in VERICUT's 3D space. Select the
desired view from the pull-down list. The list contains all views defined in the View menu >
Select/Store View window for the current setup.
Csys — Used to define the dimension plane, represented by the XY plane of the Csys, and
the meaning of "horizontal" (X-axis of the Csys) and "vertical" (Y-axis of the Csys). The
default is View Csys, the coordinate system that defines the view for the current Tool
Report record.
Scale — Sets the size of the "plan rectangle" relative to VERICUT's 3D space. Enter the
desired scaling factor in the number field. (Default = 1)
Clip — Use to activate the "clip image rectangle" that will be used to determine what will be
displayed in the Tool Report image in the Tool Report report.
When toggled "On", (checkmark displayed) a re-sizable "clip image rectangle" is displayed
on the on the glass is drawn on the glass in the Clip Box color specified on the Tool Report
tab, Settings tab. The image that appears in the Tool Report report is clipped (contained) by
this rectangle.
744
VERICUT Help
To change the size and location of the "clip image rectangle, hold the cursor over any of the
four corners, or over the midpoint of any of the rectangle's sides so that a red dot displays
as shown in the picture below. Also notice that the rectangle changes to the Selection color
defined on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
745
VERICUT Help
Left click on the dot and drag it to modify the "clip image rectangle". Repeat the "click and
drag" using the other available red dot control points until the desired "clip image
rectangle" size, shape, and location is achieved.
746
VERICUT Help
Tool Report Table Right Mouse Button Menu

Right-click in the Tool Report Table to display the following menu:
Set as active measurement —
VERICUT view before using Fit To Paper
747
VERICUT Help
VERICUT view after using Fit To Paper
Fit to View — Use to “fit” the Plan Rectangle to the size of the current view. See the
pictures below.
748
VERICUT Help
VERICUT view before using Fit To View
VERICUT view after using Fit To View
When a record is selected in Tool Report Table:

1. The selected record becomes highlighted.
749
VERICUT Help
2. The Tool Display Area display in Tool Manager switches to the view associated with
the selected record.
3. A rectangle representing the plan size, and its scale in the view, is drawn on the glass
in the Clip Box color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
4. If the Clip checkbox in the in the Tool Report record is toggled "On" (checked) a re-
sizable "clip image rectangle" is drawn on the glass in the Clip Box color specified on
the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
5. Dimensions/notes associated with the record are drawn on the glass.
Add — Adds a Tool Report record to the Tool Report Table.

Delete — Deletes the highlighted Tool Report record from the table.
Fit To View — Use to “fit” the Plan Rectangle to the size of the current view.
Restored View — This feature enables you to easily return a rotated view in the VERICUT
graphics area to the view orientation specified in the highlighted Tool Report record.
Modify View — — Modifies the View Type and orientation of the view in the highlighted record
in the Tool Report Table to match those of View 1 in the VERICUT graphics window. This feature
provides the same functionality as Modify in the Select/Store View window.
Linear tab — Use the features on this tab to add, or modify, linear dimensions in the highlighted
Tool Report record.
Radial tab — Use the features on this tab to put radial dimensions on the highlighted Tool
Report record.
Angular tab — Use the features on this tab to put angular dimensions on the highlighted Tool
Report record.
Note tab — Use the features on this tab to put notes on the highlighted plan record.
Settings tab — Use the features on this tab to define characteristics to be used for notes and
dimensions (number format, font, font size, etc.).
OK — Saves all Tool Report records and closes the Tool Report window.
Apply — Saves all Tool Report records and leaves the Tool Report window open for additional
work.
Cancel — Closes the Tool Report window without saving Tool Report records.
750
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. Tool Report data is saved per setup in the project file.
2. Image (not glass) is clipped in HTML/PDF output based on the status (checked/ not
checked) of the Clip checkbox in the Tool Report record, and "clip image rectangle" size
and position.
3. See the Adding a Tool Report Image to a Report topic below for information about
adding Tool Report information to VERICUT Reports.
751
VERICUT Help
Tool Report tab, Linear tab
The features on the Linear tab enable you to add linear dimensions to, or modify existing linear
dimensions in, the Tool Report record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of linear dimension that you want to create.
Horizontal — Dimensions the horizontal distance between From Position and To Position.
Vertical — Dimensions the vertical distance between From Position and To Position.
In the following picture, all three dimensions were defined using the same two points (the mid-
points of the edges). Each of the three dimensions was created using a different Dimension
Type as shown in the picture.
752
VERICUT Help
Inside — Place the arrows between the two points.
Outside — Place the arrows outside of the measured points.
The following picture illustrates the difference between Outside and Inside.
753
VERICUT Help
From Position — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click
to define the point. The following construction methods are available:
Axis —
Vertices —
Origin of coordinate system — Define a point represented by the origin of a coordinate
system (CSYS).
Axis of coordinate system —
Driven Point —
Profile Point —
method, VERICUT will display the point in the Tool Display Area and display a red check next to
FromPosition on the Linear tab, as shown in the Linear tab picture above, to indicate that From
Position has been selected. VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for To
Position.
If you want to re-select From Point, repeat the above steps.
To Position — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click the
define the point. The following construction methods are available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Driven Point —
Profile Point —
method, VERICUT will display the point in View 1 and display a red check next to To Position on
the Linear tab, as shown in the Linear tab picture above, to indicate that the To Position has
been selected. VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Text.
754
VERICUT Help
If you want to re-select the To Position, repeat the above steps.
Text — VERICUT will automatically fill in the dimension in the Text text field after you select the
From Point and the To Point. Pick the position in The Tool Display Area where you want the
dimension text placed.
new location in the Tool Display Area.
that you add is typical of all linear dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Tool
Report tab, Settings tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all linear
dimensions.
dimension.
pick the position in the Tool Display Area where you want the dimension text placed.
Add — Use to add the dimension to the Tool Report record. The dimension will display in the
Tool Display Area in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
your changes to the Tool Report record.
highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab. VERICUT will
automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected dimension or note. Use the tab
features to change the dimension as desired. When finished with your changes, use the Modify
button to add the changes to the Tool Report record and display the modified dimension in
View 1 in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
See the Tips on Editing Tool Report Dimensions topic below for additional information.
Tool Report record.
Steps for creating a linear dimension

3. Pick the start point of the linear dimension (From Position).
755
VERICUT Help
4. Pick the end point of the linear dimension (To Position).

6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the linear dimension to the Tool
Report record.
To Tool Report window
756
VERICUT Help
Tool Report tab, Radial tab

The features on this tab enable you to add new radial dimensions to, or edit existing radial
dimensions in, a Tool Report record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of radial dimension that you want to create.
Radius — Display the dimension using the radius value.
Diameter — Display the dimension using the diameter value.
Inside — Places the arrow inside of the radial entity being dimensioned.
Outside — Places the arrow outside of the radial entity being dimensioned.
None — Do not use arrows for the dimension. Only display a line outside of the radial entity
being dimensioned.
757
VERICUT Help
creating Radius dimensions.
creating Diameter dimensions.
758
VERICUT Help
define the point representing the center of the circle/arc being dimensioned. The following
construction methods are available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Driven Point — Define a point represented by the tool’s Driven Point.
Profile Point —
Center Point on the Radial tab, as shown in the Radial tab picture above, to indicate that the
center point has been selected. VERICUT will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Point
on Radius.
If you want to re-select the From Point, repeat the above steps.
Point on Radius — Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click
to define a point on the circle/arc being dimensioned. The following construction methods are
available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Profile Point —
Point on Radius on the Radial tab, as shown in the Radial tab picture above, to indicate that the
759
VERICUT Help
point on the circle/arc being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT will also automatically
activate "pick" mode for Text.
If you want to re-select the To Point, repeat the above steps.
Center Point and Point on Radius. Pick the position in the Tool Display Area where you want
the dimension text placed.
that you add is typical of all radial dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Tool
Report tab, Settings tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all radial
dimensions.
dimension.
Tool Display Area in the Dimension color specified on theTool Report tab, Settings tab .
highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab. VERICUT will
automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected dimension or note. Use the tab
features to change the dimension as desired. When finished with your changes, use the Modify
button to add the changes to the Tool Report record and display the modified dimension in
View 1 in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
Tool Report record.

760
VERICUT Help
3. Pick the center point of the circle/arc being dimensioned (Center Point).
4. Pick a point on the circle/arc being dimensioned (Point on Radius).
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the radial dimension to the Tool
Report record.
761
VERICUT Help
Tool Report tab, Angular tab

The features on this tab enable you to add new angular dimensions to, or edit existing angular
dimensions in, a Tool Report record.
Dimension Type — Use to specify the type of angular dimension that you want to create.
Smaller — Displays the smaller of the two angles defined using the three points specified
angle. Use Smaller to dimension the 30 degree angle.
Larger — Displays the larger of the two angles defined using the three points specified
angle. Use Larger to dimension the 150 degree angle.
762
VERICUT Help
The following picture illustrates the difference between Smaller and Larger.
Inside — Place the arrows between the lines defining the angle.
Outside — Place the arrows outside of the lines defining the angle.
None — Do not use arrows for the dimension. Only an arc displays between the lines
defining the angle.
763
VERICUT Help
point on the line representing one side of the angle. The following construction methods are
available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Profile Point —
Point 1 on the Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that a point
on a line representing the first side of the angle being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT
will also automatically activate "pick" mode for Point 2.
point on the line representing the other side of the angle. The following construction methods
are available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Profile Point —
764
VERICUT Help
Point 2 on the Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that a point
on a line representing the second side of the angle has been selected. VERICUT will also
automatically activate "pick" mode for Center Point.
define the point representing the vertex of the angle. The following construction methods are
available:
Axis —
Vertices —
system (CSYS).
Profile Point —
on the Angular tab, as shown in the Angular tab picture above, to indicate that point
representing the vertex of the angle being dimensioned has been selected. VERICUT will also
automatically activate "pick" mode for Text.
If you want to re-select Center Point, repeat the above steps.
Point 1, Point 2, and Center Point. Pick the position in the Tool Display Area where you want
the dimension text placed.
that you add is typical of all angular dimensions, use the Number Label feature on the Tool
Report tab, Settings tab to have VERICUT automatically add the additional text to all angular
dimensions.
765
VERICUT Help
dimension.
Tool Display Area in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
To enter "edit" mode, simply select an existing dimension or note in the Tool Display Area so
that it becomes highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
VERICUT will automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected dimension or note.
Use the tab features to change the dimension as desired. When finished with your changes, use
the Modify button to add the changes to the Tool Report record and display the modified
dimension in the Tool Display Area in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab,
Settings tab.
Tool Report record.

3. Pick a point on a line representing one side of the angle (Point 1).
4. Pick a point on a line representing the second side of the angle (Point 2).
5. Pick the point representing the vertex of the angle being dimensioned (CenterPoint).
7. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the radial dimension to the Tool
Report record.
766
VERICUT Help
Tool Report tab, Note tab

The features on this tab enable you to add new notes to, or edit existing notes in, a Tool Report
record.
Note — Select the style of note that you want to add from the pull-down list. Select one of the
following styles:
Text — Use to add a text only note to the Tool Report.
Text with Leader — Use to add a text note with a leader to the Tool Report.
Text File — Use to add text from a text file as a text only note to the Tool Report. Enter the
/path/filename of the text file in the File Name text field or click on the (Browse) icon
to display the Text File file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
Text File with Leader — Use to add text from a text file as a text note with a leader to the
Tool Report. Enter the /path/filename of the text file in the File Name text field or click on
the (Browse) icon to display the Text File file selection window and use it to specify the
/path/filename.
767
VERICUT Help
Symbol — Use to add a symbol to the Tool Report. Enter the /path/filename of the file
containing the symbol image in the File Name text field or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Image File file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
Symbol with Leader — Use to add a symbol with a leader to the Tool Report. Enter the
/path/filename of the file containing the symbol image in the File Name text field or click on
the (Browse) icon to display the Image File file selection window and use it to specify
the /path/filename.
Section Indicator — Use to add a section indicator with label to the Tool Report.
The following picture illustrates the difference between Text, Text with Leader, and Section
Indicator when creating notes.
Text — Use the text field to specify the text associated with the note, or section indicator label.
Then click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode, and pick the location in the Tool Display Area
where you want the note/section indicator text placed.
Leader Start — Click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode, then pick the location in the Tool
Display Area where you want the note leader to start. This is the end of the leader with the
arrow.
When creating Section Indicators, this feature is used to specify the start location of the section
indicator. The relationship between this location and the one specified using Leader End
768
VERICUT Help
(described below) are used to indicate the length and orientation if the linear portion of the
section indicator.
Leader End — Click the arrow , to enter "pick" mode then pick the location in the Tool
Display Area where you want the note leader to end. This is the straight end of the leader.
When creating Section Indicators, this feature is used to specify the end location of the section
indicator. The relationship between this location and the one specified using Leader Start
(described above) are used to indicate the length and orientation if the section indicator.
Add — Use to add the note/section indicator to the Tool Report record. The notes will display in
the Tool Display Area in the Text color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab. The note
leader, or section indicator will display in the Dimension color specified on the Tool Report tab,
Settings tab .
To enter "edit" mode, simply select an existing note, or section indicator, in the Tool Display
Area so that it becomes highlighted in the Edit color specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings
tab. VERICUT will automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected note. Use the tab
features to change the note/section indicator as desired. When finished with your changes, use
the Modify button to add the changes to the Tool Report record and display the modified
dimension in the Tool Display Area in the colors specified on the Tool Report tab, Settings tab.
Tool Report record.
Steps for creating a note:
1. Choose the Note type (Text or Text with Leader).

2. Enter the note text in the text field.
769
VERICUT Help
3. Click on , then pick the position in View 1 where you want the note placed.
If you are creating a Text with Leader note, continue with the following:
4. Click on the Leader Start , and then pick the start point of the Note leader.
5. Click on the Leader End , and then pick the end point of the Note leader.
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the note to the Tool Report record.
Steps for creating a section indicator:
1. Set Note type to Section Indicator.

2. Enter the text associated with the section indicator in the text field.
3. Click on , then pick the position in View 1 where you want the section indicator text
to be placed.
4. Click on the Leader Start , and then pick the location in View 1 where you want the
section indicator to start.
5. Click on the Leader End , and then pick the location in View 1 where you want the
section indicator to end.
6. Select Add to accept the current selections and add the note to the Tool Report record.
770
VERICUT Help
Tool Report, Settings tab

The features on this tab enable you to specify, or edit existing, text characteristics (format, font,
color, etc.), to be used in the Tool Report.
Number Format — Use the Number Format features to specify how numbers are to be
displayed in the Tool Report.
Decimal Places — Use to specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Trailing Zeros — When toggled "On" trailing zeros will be displayed.
Number Label — Enables you to append the specified characters to the end of a number
(i.e., in, mm. TYP, etc.). This feature only appends to VERICUT calculated values. They will
not append to user entered values (for example, when creating "not to scale" dimensions).
Linear — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of linear dimensions.
Radial — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of radial dimensions.
Angular — Use to specify the characters to be added at the end of angular dimensions.
771
VERICUT Help
Fonts — Use the Fonts features to specify the font characteristics (font, style, and size) to be
displayed in the Tool Report.
Note — Use the following to specify font characteristics to be used for Notes.
Dimension — Use the following to specify font characteristics to be used for Dimensions.
Colors — Use to specify colors for specific Tool Report entities. Click on the color pallet icon,
associated with each entity type (Selection, Edit, etc.) to display a color selection pallet.
Use it to select the desired color for the entity type. The Color pallet icons on the Settings tab
will display in the currently selected color so that you can tell at a glance what the current
setting is.
Selection — Use to specify the selection (highlight) color to display dimensions and notes
when you hold the cursor over them, to assist in selecting existing entities editing.
Edit — Use to specify the color to display dimensions and notes when they are in edit mode.
Clip Box — Use to specify the color to display the clip box (ref. "Clip" in the Tool Report
window).
Dimension — Use to specify the color to display dimension lines, note leaders, and section
markers.
Text — Use to specify the color to display the text in dimensions, notes and section
indicators.
772
VERICUT Help
Things to Remember When Working With Tool Report

The following things should be kept in mind when working with Tool Report.
 Tool Report image always displays in the the Tool Display Area.
 A Tool Report image is always controlled by a stored view. You either select one that
exists, or one is automatically created for you.
 If you choose Active View, or one of the internal views (XY, YX, etc.), from the first
dialog, then a stored view is automatically created. The content of the currently
highlighted view determines the Tool Report's view type and attributes for
automatically created stored view.
 All dimensions are 2D, projected into a dimension plane. They are either projected into
the stored view's plane, or they are projected into the XY place of a selected CSYS.
Depends on your choice in the CSYS column of the Tool Report table.
 All dimensions are point-to-point. They do not dimension "features". They are all
constructed from points projected into the dimension plane. Each dimension type has
point-constructor choices.
 The dimension text field is text, not numeric. You can enter any text string you want to
into a dimension text field. When the dimension is initially created the text field is filled
by a calculated number. The text field is re-calculated during modification if:
a. the text field is blanked
b. an end-point is moved
Tool Report "settings" are saved in the preferences file (cgtech_xx_user.prefs, where xx is the
VERICUT version number).
773
VERICUT Help
Tips on Editing Tool Report Dimensions

The following is intended to get you started with using Tool Report window "Edit" mode.
To enter edit mode:

Select an existing dimension or note in the view so that it becomes highlighted. VERICUT will
automatically display the correct tab for editing the selected dimension.
Use the tab features to change the dimension as desired. Most of the features just required
selecting a different option from the pull-down list. The ones shown below may be slightly less
obvious.
Editing a point:
Changing a point in a dimension is just like creating it initially. For the point that you want to
edit:
Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down list, then click the arrow
and follow the prompts in the message area to define the new point.
Changing the position of the dimension text:

Click the arrow next to Text, and then pick the location in the view where you want the
dimension moved to. You can move the location of the dimension closer, or further away,
than its current position depending on the new location that you pick. You can also move
just the text associated with the dimension to another position along the current dimension
line.
Add changes to the Tool Report record:

When finished with your changes for a dimension, use the Modify button to add the changes to
the Tool Report record.
Use OK or Apply in the Tool Report window to save the Tool Report to the project file.
774
VERICUT Help
Adding a Tool Report Image to a Report
The following provides an overview of the steps needed to add a Tool Report to a report.
1. Use View menu > Select/Store to display the Select/Store View window and use it to
create the views that you want in the Tool Report.
2. Use Project menu > Report > Tool Report, or click on (Tool Report) in the toolbar,
to display the Tool Report window and use it's features to create the Tool Report
record(s) (images) that you want in the Tool Report report.
3. Use Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit to display the Report Template
window and use it's features to create a new, or modify an existing report template, to
include the Tool Report image, or images.
Single Image Tool Report
 On the Report Template window: Page Layout tab select the record that you
want the Tool Report added after so that it becomes highlighted.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Picture to display
the Picture window.
 In the Picture window, select Tool Report from the pull-down list, then OK. The
Tool Report record will be added to the report template.
NOTE: If you use this approach for a multiple image Tool Report, only the first
record in the Tool Report table will be included in the report.
Multiple Image Tool Report

 On the Report Template window: Page Layout tab select the record that you
want the Tool Report added after so that it become highlighted.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Start View Loop to
add the Start View Loop record to the report template.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > Picture to display
the Picture window.
 In the Picture window, select Tool Report from the pull-down list, then OK. The
Tool Report record will be added to the report template.
 In the Report Template window menu bar select Edit > Add > End View Loop to
add the End View Loop record to the report template.
775
VERICUT Help
4. Use File menu > Create Report > (format) to generate the report.
776
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Force Data tab

The features on this tab enable you to specify Cutter and Feed Optimization characteristics for
tools to be used by the VERICUT Force NC program optimization tool.
Cutter
Units — Choose Inch or Millimeter. The remainder of the window will update based on the
selected units.
Input Lead — Use to specify that the tool’s lead distance is to be input.
Input Helix Angle — Use to specify that the tool’s helix angle is to be input.
777
VERICUT Help
Lead (PSIR)— Enter the Lead value in the text field. This feature is only applicable when Input
Lead is selected.
Helix Angle (FHA) — Enter the Helix angle in the text field. This feature is only applicable when
Input Helix Angle is selected.
Radial Rake (GAMF) — Enter the radial rake angle (in degrees) in the Radial Rake text field.
Rake at ball (GAMP) — Use to specify the rake angle (in degrees) at the ball of the current
cutter. Enter the rake angle value in the Rake at ball text field.
NOTE: In the case of straight end mills, with no ball, enter the same angle value in the Radial
Rake and Rake at ball text fields.
Material — Use to specify the material that the cutter is made of. Select the material type from
the pull-down list.
Tool Edge Type — Use to specify the type of cutting edge that the cutter has from the pull-
down list. Choose Serrated or Straight.
Feed Optimization
Method — Choose one of the following Feed Optimization methods from the pull-down list.
None — None indicates that this tool is to be ignored (not to be optimized).
Force and Chip thickness — Selecting the Force and Chip thickness based feed optimization
method requires you to use the Force limit specified feature to specify the force limit value
and the Chip Thickness limit feature to specify the chip thickness limit value.
Power and Chip thickness — Selecting the Power and Chip thickness based feed
optimization method requires you to use the Power limit specified feature to specify the
power limit value and the Chip Thickness limit feature to specify the chip thickness limit
value.
Chip thickness Only — Selecting the Chip thickness Only based feed optimization method
requires you to use the Chip thickness limit feature to specify the chip thickness limit value.
Feed limit specified (IPM or mm/min) — Use to specify the maximum feedrate to be used.
Chip Thickness limit (Inch or mm) — Use to specify the maximum chip thickness to be used.
Force limit specified (lbs or newtons) — Use to specify the maximum force to be used when
using the Force and Chip thickness Feed Optimization method.
Power limit specified (HP or kW) — Use to specify the maximum power to be used when using
the Power and Chip thickness Feed Optimization method.
Inch units => horsepower required to remove 1 cubic inch of material per second.
Metric units => kilowatts required to remove 1 cubic centimeter of material per second.
778
VERICUT Help
Plunge Feed Adjustment — When the Plunge Feed Adjustment feature is toggled on (checked),
VERICUT Force will calculate the maximum feedrate drop output as a percent of the feedrate.
The intention of this feature is to reduce the feed rate based upon the amount of material
being forced into the center of the cutter. The plunge feed adjustment determines the angle of
the tool vector and the tool path vector.
Start Angle (deg) — Use the Start Angle text field to enter the starting angle in degrees. The
Start Angle is the angle at which you want the software to start reducing the feedrate based
on the detected angle. The angle at a perpendicular position is 90 deg.
If the tool is in a plunging condition then the Plunge Feed Adjustment feature will start
reducing the feed rate. As the angle increases the feed will decrease up to the limit of
reduction specified. A typical Starting Angle would be any value greater than 90 degrees.
Max Feed Drop % — Displays the maximum feedrate drop calculated by VERICUT Force
output as a percent of the feedrate.
Channel Cut Adjustment — When the Channel Cut Adjustment feature is toggled on (checked),
VERICUT Force will calculate the maximum feedrate drop output as a percent of the feedrate.
The intention of this feature is to monitor the radial tool engagement in the material and
reduce the feed rate as that engagement increases. This feature was implemented for slotting
operations where chip evacuation is problematic.
Start Angle (deg) — Use the Start Angle text field to enter the starting angle in degrees. The
Start Angle is is the angle at which this feature starts to determine the angle of contact and
reduces the feed rate as the engagement increases up to the reduction limit specified.
779
VERICUT Help
Max Feed Drop % — Displays the maximum feedrate drop calculated by VERICUT Force
output as a percent of the feedrate.
Force Output
Modify Existing Cuts Only — When selected, this option calculates the most efficient feed
rate for each motion. VERICUT uses the Resolution value (see below) to divide each motion
into samples and calculates an optimum feed rate for each sample. The feed rate calculated
for the sample with the most severe cutting conditions is retained as the optimized feed
rate for that motion. This option is recommended when disk space is limited for storing
optimized tool path data, or when tool positions are relatively close together. A tool path
optimized with this choice has more efficient feed rates and the same or slightly more
records than the original.
780
VERICUT Help
Sample optimization results using the Modify Existing Cuts Only option:
Add More Cuts — Similar to Modify Existing Cuts Only except motions are divided up when
cutting conditions warrant feed rate changes. A tool path optimized with this choice has
very efficient feed rates, but many more records than the original. The Minimum Feedrate
Change value (see below) controls the quantity of feed rates output to the optimized tool
path file. This option is recommended when disk space is ample, or when optimizing widely
varying cutting conditions, such as: intermittent cutting, deep versus shallow cuts, etc.
781
VERICUT Help
Sample optimization results using the Add More Cuts option:
Resolution — Controls the frequency or "sampling distance" used to analyze each tool path
motion. Each feed rate controlled motion is partitioned into samples based on this distance.
The samples are then analyzed during feed rate calculation.
Auto — Automatically calculates the resolution distance based on the size of the cutting
tool relative to the displayed model. This choice is recommended when little or no
knowledge of cutting methods or feed rates is available.
Distance — Uses the sampling distance in the corresponding data field. Distance is
measured along the tool motion. Using a resolution equal to 1/2 to 1/4 of the tool diameter
is recommended.
Example of Resolution applied when optimizing tool path motions:
782
VERICUT Help
Minimum Feedrate Change (IPM or mm/min) — Specifies the minimum change from the
current optimized feed rate that will cause a new optimized feed rate to be output. This feature
controls the quantity of feed rates output to the optimized tool path file. A small value causes
more optimized feed rates to be output than when a larger value is entered.
Default option — When toggled “on” (checked), sets the default minimum feed rate = 1 IPM or
25 MMPM, whichever applies.
To specify a Minimum Feedrate Change value, clear the Default checkbox and enter a value in
the Minimum Feedrate Change text field.
Minimum Cut Feedrate (IPM or mm/min) — Specifies the minimum optimized feed rates that
can be output when removing material.
To specify a Minimum Cut Feedrate value, clear the Default checkbox and enter a value in the
Minimum Cut Feedrate text field.
Air Cut Feed Rate — This option is useful for reducing time of proven tool paths, without
See Notes about VERICUT Force in Notes about Special Topics located in the CGTech Help
Library for additional information.
783
VERICUT Help
Using the Tool Force Data tab
1. In the Tool Manager Tool List Area select the tool that you are going to add Force data
to so that it becomes highlighted.
2. In the Tool Manager Tool Force Data tab, specify the units that you are working in
selecting either Inch or Millimeter.
784
VERICUT Help
3. In the Tool Manager Tool Force Data tab, specify whether you are going input the tool’s
lead distance or tool’s helix angle by selecting either Input lead or Input helix angle.
4. If you selected Input lead in Step 1, enter the lead distance (inch or millimeter) in the
Lead (PSIR) text field.
If you selected Input helix angle, enter the helix angle (in degrees) in the Helix angle
(FHA) text field.
5. Enter the radial rake angle (in degrees) in the Radial Rake (GAMF) text field.
6. Enter the rake angle (in degrees) at the ball of the cutter in the Rake at Ball (GAMP) text
field.
NOTE: In the case of flat end mills, with no ball, enter the same angle value in the
Radial Rake (GAMF) and Rake at Ball (GAMP) text fields.
7. Select the appropriate tool material from the Material pull-down list.
8. Select the appropriate tool edge type from the Tool Edge Type pull-down list.
Choose Serrated or Straight.
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional tools that will be used for the Force optimization.
At this point, run Force in Analyze mode in the Optimize Control window: Force Settings tab
(Optimize menu > Optimize Control). Review the resulting Force Charts to determine
appropriate settings (Chip Thickness Limit, Force Limit Specified, and Power limit specified)
for the Feed Optimization section of the Tool Force Data tab.
9. In the Feed Optimization section of the Tool Force Data tab, specify the feed
optimization method that you want to use by selecting the desired method from the
Method pull-down list.
Choose None (ignore this tool), Force and Chip thickness, or Power and Chip thickness
or Chip thickness only.
10. Specify the limit values in the appropriate field as described below.
If you selected Force and Chip thickness based optimization in Step 9, enter the
following limit values:
Enter the maximum feedrate (IPM or mm/min) to be used in the Feed limit specified
field.
Enter the maximum chip thickness (inch or mm) to be used in the Chip Thickness
limit field.
Enter the maximum force (lbs or newtons) to be used in the Force limit specified
field.
785
VERICUT Help
If you selected Power and Chip thickness based optimization in Step 9, enter the
field.
limit field.
Enter the maximum power (HP or kW) to be used in the Power limit specified field.
If you selected Power and Chip thickness based optimization in Step 9, enter the
field.
limit field.
11. If you choose to use the plunge feed adjustment feature, toggle on (checked) Plunge
Feed Adjustment and then enter the following value:
Enter the starting angle (degrees) in the Start angle (degree) field.
VERICUT Force will calculate the maximum drop in feedrate and then display the result
in the Max Feed Drop % text field as a percentage of the feedrate.
12. If you choose to use the channel cut adjustment feature, toggle on (checked) Channel
Cut Adjustment and then enter the following value:
Enter the starting angle (degrees) in the Start angle (degree) field.
VERICUT Force will calculate the maximum drop in feedrate and then display the result
in the Max Feed Drop % text field as a percentage of the feedrate.
13. Specify whether you want the Force output to Modify Existing Cuts Only or Add More
Cuts.
14. If you selected Modify Existing Cuts Only in Step 13, specify the resolution to be used
to analyze each tool path motion. Select the desired method from the Resolution pull-
down list. If you select Distance, enter the value in the Resolution text field. If you select
Auto, no value is required.
If you selected Add More Cuts in Step 13, specify the minimum feedrate change value in
the Minimum Feedrate Change text field.
15. Specify a Minimum Feedrate Change value (IPM or mm/min) by entering a value in the
Minimum Feedrate Change text field or toggle “on” (checked) Default.
16. Specify a MinimumCut Feedrate value (IPM or mm/min) by entering a value in the
Minimum Cut Feedrate text field or toggle “on” (checked) Default.
786
VERICUT Help
17. Specify an Air Cut Feedrate value (IPM or mm/min) by entering a value in the Air Cut
Feedrate text field or toggle “on” (checked) Default.
Repeat Steps 9 through 17 for additional tools that will be used for the Force optimization.
787
VERICUT Help
Tool Definition window

Locations:
Project menu > Tools: Tool Library tab > Tool Bar > (select the tool assembly to add
from the pull -down list)
Project menu > Tools: Tool List Area > Right mouse button menu > Add Tool option
Project menu > Tools: Tool List Area (select the tool component to modify)
The Tool Definition window enables you to define tool component shape, color, location, and
other attributes. The features displayed on the Tool Component tab will vary, depending on the
tool/tool component type that you selected to add/modify. Each of the Tool Definition window
variations will be defined in detail in the sections below. The Tool Definition window for Mill
Cutters is shown in the picture below.
788
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab — Features on this tab are used to define the shape of a tool component
in a tool assembly. Features displayed on the Tool Component tab vary, depending on the
tool/tool component type that you selected to add/modify.
Assembly tab — Features on this tab are used translate or rotate a component in a tool
assembly, or to move the selected component by assembling (mating or aligning) it with other
objects in the tool assembly.
Also see: Tool Component tab, Common Features
See Adding a Tool to a Tool Library, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information about creating tool components.
789
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab

Accessed from the Tool Definition window, the features on this tab are used to define the
shape of a tool component in a tool assembly. Features displayed on the Tool Component tab
vary, depending on the tool/tool component type that you selected to add/modify.
Common Features
Revolved Cutter
Mill Insert
Mill Tool with Cutter Body
Hole Making Tool
Turn Insert
Probe Tip
Water Jet
Knife
Polisher Tool
Holder
See Adding a Tool to a Tool Library, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information about creating tool components.
To Tool Definition window
790
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Common Features)

The following features are common to most of the Tool Component tab tool types.
Reference Features — The Reference Features enable you to "reference" a tool component in
another tool library file for use in the current tool library file.
Model File Features — The Model File Features enable you to use an existing model or create a
new Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution using the Profile Sketcher to define a tool component.
Tool Display Colors — The Tool Display Colors feature enable you to specify the display color
for tool components (cutters, inserts, and holders) in Tool Manager
To Tool Component tab
791
VERICUT Help
Reference Features
The Reference Features enable you to "reference" a tool component in another tool library file
for use in the current tool library file.
The Reference feature is accessed using the (Reference) icon on the Tool Component
tab for Revolved Cutters, Hole-Making Tools, Waterjet tools, Ultrasonic Knife tools, Polisher
tools, and Holders.
tab for Mill Inserts and Turning Inserts
tab for Probe Tips.
Revolved Cutter, Mill Inserts, Probe Tools, Waterjet Tools, Ultrasonic Knife Tools and
Holders
792
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tools, Turn Inserts and Polisher Tools
Reference features:
Pick — Pressing the Pick button displays the Search Tool window enabling you to search
existing tool libraries for tools with specific attributes that you want to "reference". See Search
Tool window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
Reference File — Enter the /path/filename of the tool library file containing the tool
component to be referenced in the text field or use the Pick button to display the Search Tool
window and use it to select the tool library file.
Reference Tool ID — Enter tool ID of the tool component to be referenced in the text field or
use the Pick button to display the Tool Search window and use it to select the tool component
to be referenced. In the sample tool record in the picture below, the Reference Tool ID is 6
Reference Tool Component ID — Enter tool component ID of the tool component to be
referenced in the text field or use the Pick button to display the Tool Search window and use it
to select the tool component to be referenced. In the sample tool record in the picture below,
the Reference Tool Component ID is Cutter1
Alternate — When toggled "on" (checked) this feature designates the cutter that is being
created as an "alternate" or "secondary" cutter for a particular tool assembly. This feature
enables you to switch between a "primary" and "alternate" cutter shape, in order to support
tools such as back-boring tools.
The AlternateTool macro is used to specify whether to use the "primary" (Override Value = 0)
cutter shape or to use the "alternate" (Override Value = 1) cutter shape. See Create and Use
Tools with Alternate Cutters in the Using the Tool Manager section, also in the Project Tree
793
VERICUT Help
Simulation Help for additional information and examples.
OK to Mill — When toggled “on” (checked), the OK to Mill feature overrides the default check
for axial cuts only enabling you to machine with Hole Making Tools, Turn Inserts and Polisher
Tools other than along the tool axis.
To Tool Component tab (Common Features)
794
VERICUT Help
Model File Features
The Model File features enable you to use an existing model or create a new Sweep Solid or
Solid of Revolution using the Profile Sketcher to define a tool component. The features that
display will vary depending on the type of tool component. Each of the variations is illustrated
in the pictures below.
The Model File feature is accessed using the (Model File) icon on the Tool Component
tab for Mill Inserts, Turn Inserts, Hole Making Tools and Insert models created using the Import
CAD Tool window.
Mill Inserts
Turn Inserts, Hole Making Tools
795
VERICUT Help
Insert models created using the Import CAD Tool window
The Model File feature is accessed using the (Model File) icon on the Tool Component
tab for Revolved Cutters, Polisher tools, and Holders.
Revolved Cutters
Polisher Tool
796
VERICUT Help
Holder
Model File — Enter the /path/filename of the model file or click on the (Browse) icon to
display the Open file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename of the model
file.
Sketcher — Displays the Profile Sketcher window enabling you to edit or create a "swept solid
(.swp)" or "solid of revolution (.sor)" model file. This feature is only available the selected file is
a SOR or SWEEP file type. To create a new SOR or SWEEP model file, clear the Model File text
field and press Sketcher.
Normals — Select the normal direction from the pull-down list. Choose Outward or Inward.
This feature is only available for Holder components.
Color — Color that the tool component is to be displayed in VERICUT. For additional
information, see Tool Display Colors in the Tool Component tab, Common Features section.
Spindle Direction — Use to specify the spindle rotation direction. Choose CW (clockwise) or
CCW (counterclockwise).
Do Not Spin with Spindle — When toggled "on" (checked), indicates that the holder
component does not spin.
NOTE: The Do Not Spin with Spindle feature is only available for Holder components.
Tool Nose Compensation —
Driven Point — Use to specify the driven point position relative to radius center (9 compass
position).
Specify the Driven Point ID from the number list.
Specify the center of the tool nose radius by clicking in the text field and entering the
coordinates of the center point or selecting the center point in the Tool Display area.
Select the the driven point position from the pull-down list.
797
VERICUT Help
Tool Nose Radius — Enter the tool nose radius value in the Tool Nose Radius text field.
NOTE: VERICUT will create driven point, cutter comp and tool nose comp offsets from the
Qualified Dimensions, Driven Point and Tool Nose Radius settings.
798
VERICUT Help
Tool Display Colors
The display color for tool components (cutters, inserts, and holders) in Tool Manager and all
VERICUT views is determined by the conditions described below:
1. Tool components (Cutter or Holder) with Color set to a specific color (Inherit toggled “off”)
on the Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab are displayed in the specified color
both in Tool Manager and in all views in the VERICUT graphics area when the component(s)
are loaded in the “active” Spindle.
Color — Use the (Color Pallet) feature to specify a color for the tool component.
The right side of the (Color Pallet) icon shows the current color for the component. To
change the color for the tool component, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the
color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the tool component. The
color pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Tool Definition
window: Tool Component tab will update to reflect the selected color.
To close the color pallet window without changing the color, click on the in the upper
right corner of the color pallet.
The cuts made by cutter or insert components are also shaded with this color when Color
Method, on the Color window: Cut Colors tab, is set to "Tool Color".
Available colors are defined in the Shade Colors list on the Color window: Define tab.
2. Tool Holders with Color set to Inherit on the Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab
will always be displayed with color number 5 from the Shade Color list on the Color
window: Define tab. This applies both to holders displayed in Tool Manager and holders
displayed in the VERICUT graphics area when the tool is loaded in the “active” Spindle.
799
VERICUT Help
3. Cutters or Inserts with Color set to Inherit on the Tool Definition window: Tool Component
tab will be displayed with the "current" cut color, from the Cut Color Table on the Color
window: Cut Colors tab, in the VERICUT graphics area when the tool is loaded in the “active”
Spindle.
See Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
Also see Color window in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
800
VERICUT Help
Turrets and Tool Chains

The display color for tool components in turrets and tool chains are displayed is determined by
the conditions described below:
1. Tool components (Cutter or Holder) with Color set to a specific color on the Tool Definition
window: Tool Component tab are displayed in the specified color. This applies both to tool
components displayed in Tool Manager and tool components displayed in the VERICUT
graphics area when on a turret or tool chain.
Color — Use the (Color Pallet) feature to specify a color for the tool component.
The right side of the (Color Pallet) icon shows the current color for the component. To
change the color for the tool component, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the tool component. The
color pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Tool Definition
window: Tool Component tab will update to reflect the selected color.
2. Tool Holders with Color set to Inherit on the Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab
will always be displayed with color number 5 from the Shade Color list on the Color
window: Define tab. This applies both to holders displayed in Tool Manager and holders
displayed in the VERICUT graphics area when the tool is on a turret or tool chain.
tab will be displayed with color number 7 from the Shade Color list on the Color window:
Define tab when initially loaded into a turret or tool chain or in Tool Manager.
801
VERICUT Help
tab will be displayed with the "current" cut color, from the Cut Color Table on the Color
window: Cut Colors tab, when the tool is used to cut. VERICUT does not know the tool's
sequence until it is used to cut. The tools will then be displayed in this color when on a
turret or tool chain.
See Tool Definition window: Tool Component tab also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help.
Also see Color window in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
802
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Revolved Cutter)
Opened via adding, or modifying, a Revolved Cutter tool component, this tab is used to describe
the shape of a selected "Cutter" component in a mill tool assembly. Options are available to
define the cutter via parametric shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a cutter in another tool
assembly.
Component Type — Use to specify the type of component you are creating. In this case a
Revolved Cutter.
Tool shape icons — Selecting an icon configures the bottom half of the window to define the
selected cutter shape.
Options:
803
VERICUT Help
(Flat Bottom End Mill) — Opens the Flat Bottom End Mill feature definition panel
enabling you to specify the cutter’s characteristics.
(Ball Nose End Mill) — Opens the Ball Nose End Mill feature definition panel enabling
you to specify the cutter’s characteristics.
(Taper Ball Nose End Mill) — Opens the Taper Ball Nose End Mill feature definition
panel enabling you to specify the cutter’s
characteristics.
(Bull Nose End Mill) — Opens the Bull Nose End Mill feature definition panel enabling
(7 Parameter) — Opens the 7 Parameter cutter feature definition panel enabling you
to specify the cutter’s characteristics.
(10 Parameter) — Opens the 10 Parameter cutter feature definition panel enabling
(Revolve Profile) — Opens the Profile Sketcher window in “solid of revolution”mode

enabling you to create Revolved Cutter components by rotating a
defined profile around the Z- axis.
See Profile Sketcher window in the Configure Model menu
section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
(Reference) — Displays the Reference Features enabling you to "reference" a tool

component in another tool library file for use in the current tool library
file.
See Reference Features in the Tool Component tab (Common
Features) section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
804
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener

Simulation Help.
(Model File) — The Model File Features enable you to use an existing model or create
a new Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution using the Profile Sketcher to
define a tool component.
See Model File Features in the Tool Component tab (Common
Simulation Help.
Tips for defining milling cutters:

1. Diameter is measured from the intersection points of the cutter side with the bottom flat or
angle.
2. D is automatically calculated when D=0, and the corner radius (R) and side angle (B) are
specified. (Good tip for defining tapered endmills.)
3. E and F are automatically calculated when diameter and corner radius are specified.
See Define a Revolved Cutter, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
creating revolved cutters.
See Tool Definition window, Assembly tab, also in this section, for information on positioning,
and orienting, a revolved cutter component in a milling tool assembly.
805
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, Flat Bottom End Mill
TIP: Hold the cursor over a number field in the tool diagram to see a tip indicating what value
the field represents.
Height (H)— Use to specify the height of the tool.

Flute Length — Use to specify the length of the portion of the cutter having flutes, or teeth that
can remove material. This value is measured from the bottom-most portion of the cutter. Zero
806
VERICUT Help
assumes the entire cutter length has flutes, or teeth that can cut material. An error similar to
"SHANK removed material..." is reported when the non-cutting portion of the cutter removes
material. Material removed is shaded using the red Error color.
Shank Diameter — Use to specify the diameter of the tool shank.
Stick-out Length — Use to specify the length of the tool that sticks out from the holder. This
value is measured from the bottom-most portion of the cutter to the bottom-most portion of
the holder.
Diameter (D) — Use to specify the diameter of the tool.
Spindle Direction — Use to specify the appropriate spindle rotation direction for the tool.
Choose either CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise).
NOTE: For revolved milling cutters, CW/CCW is defined looking down (negative Z) the tool
axis.
cutter shape or to use the "alternate" (Override Value = 1) cutter shape.
See Create and Use Tools with Alternate Cutters in the Using the Tool Manager section, also in
the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information and examples.
To Tool Component tab (Revolved Cutter)
807
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, Ball Nose End Mill
808
VERICUT Help
Height (H) — Use to specify the height of the tool.

the holder.
Diameter (D) — Use to specify the diameter of the tool
axis.
809
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, Taper Ball Nose End Mill

810
VERICUT Help
Nose Radius (R) — The radius of the ball at the end of the cutter.

Automatic Shank Diameter —
the holder.
B — The taper angle of the tool.
Diameter (D) — Use to specify the diameter of the tool
axis.
811
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, Bull Nose End Mill
812
VERICUT Help
Corner Radius — Use to specify the corner radius of the tool.
the holder.
axis.
813
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, 7 Parameter
D, R, E, F, A, B, H — Use the associated text fields to specify the parameters shown in the
picture above.
the holder.
814
VERICUT Help
axis.
Examples of cutter shapes that can be defined via the 7 Parameter option:
815
VERICUT Help
Revolved Cutter, 10 Parameter
D, R1, E1, F1, A, B, H, R2, E2, F2 —Use the associated text fields to specify the parameters
shown in the picture above.
the holder.
816
VERICUT Help
axis.
817
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Mill Insert)
Opened via adding or modifying a Milling Insert tool component, this tab is used to describe the
insert shape for the "Cutter" component in a Mill tool assembly. Options are available to define
the cutter insert via ISO standard shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a cutter insert in
another tool assembly.
Tool shape icons — Selecting an icon configures the bottom half of the window enabling you to
define the selected cutter shape. Options:
818
VERICUT Help
(General Insert) — Displays the General Insert Features window enabling you to
define ISO standard insert shapes.
See General Insert features window in the Tool Component tab
(Sweep Profile) — Displays the Profile Sketcher window in “sweep solid”mode

enabling you to create Cutter components by defining a profile to
be swept a specific distance to create the cutter insert.
(Reference) — Displays the Reference Features window enabling you to "reference"

a tool component in another tool library file for use in the current
tool library file.
Simulation Help.
(Model File) — Displays the Model File Features window enabling you to use an
existing model or create a new Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution
using the Profile Sketcher to define a tool component.
Simulation Help.
NOTES:
1. For inserted milling cutters, tool spinning direction is determined by the insert thickness
direction.
2. VERICUT uses a pre-defined "Relief Angle" of 5 degrees for all tool inserts created with Tool
Manager.
819
VERICUT Help
See Define Inserts for a Mill Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
creating inserted milling tools.
and orienting, a mill insert component in a milling tool assembly.
820
VERICUT Help
General Insert Features
Accessed using the (General Insert) icon on the Mill Insert Tool Component tab, or by
adding a Mill Tool with Cutter Body tool assembly tool definition window, the General Insert
features enable you to define "ISO standard", as well as "custom" tool insert shapes.
General Insert Features for Mill Inserts
The parameters and diagram displayed in the General Insert panel will vary depending on the
insert type selected from the pull –down list. Only the parameters required to describe a
particular insert type will be displayed. Select the desired insert type from the pull-down list.
NOTE: VERICUT uses a pre-defined "Relief Angle" of 5 degrees for all tool inserts created with
Tool Manager.
821
VERICUT Help
Insert Type Parameter Description
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
A - 85 degree R - Corner Radius
parallelogram A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
B - 82 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
D – Inscribed Diameter (in)

L – Length (mm) Inch Millimeter
Thickness
C - 80 degree
R - Corner Radius
diamond
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
822
VERICUT Help

Thickness
C - 100 degree R - Corner Radius
diamond A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
D - 55 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
E - 75 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
823
VERICUT Help

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
H - Hexagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
K - 55 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
L - Rectangle
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
824
VERICUT Help

Thickness
M - 86 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
O - Octagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
P - Pentagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
825
VERICUT Help
D - Inscribed Diameter
Thickness
R - Round Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
S - Square
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
T - Triangle
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
826
VERICUT Help

Thickness
V - 35 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
Location Aids

Thickness
W - 80 degree R - Corner Radius
trigon A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
D – Inscribed Diameter
Thickness Inch Millimeter
R - Corner Radius
Custom A - Lead Angle
diamond T - Tip Angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
827
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Custom
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
T – Tip angle
Color
Alternate
Location Aids
Location Aids
These features are only available for mill Inserts. They enable you to easily position the insert
with respect to the tool diameter.
(Diameter) — Use this text field to specify the diameter of the tool. This feature is not
available on the Mill Tool with Cutter Body
(Locate by nominal diameter) — Positions the center of the insert corner radius on the
tool diameter.
(Locate by outside diameter) — Positions the outside edge of the insert on the tool
diameter.
To Tool Component tab, Mill Insert Cutter
828
VERICUT Help
Mill Tool with Cutter Body window
Opened via adding a Mill Tool with Cutter Body tool assembly, this tool definition window
enables you to quickly and easily define inserted milling tools for your tool library.
General Insert — The General Insert portion of the Mill Tool with Cutter Body tool definition
window enable you to easily define "ISO standard", as well as "custom" tool insert shapes.
829
VERICUT Help
Cutter Body — The Cutter Body portion of the Mill Tool with Cutter Body tool definition
window enables you to define a cutter body for the specified insert(s).
Add — Adds the defined inserts and cutter body to the tool library and closes the Milling Insert
window.
Close — Closes the Milling Insert window without adding inserts/cutter body to the tool library.
See Define Inserts for a Mill Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
using the Milling Insert window.
830
VERICUT Help
General Insert Features

The General Insert features enable you to easily define "ISO standard", as well as "custom" tool
insert shapes. The parameters and diagram will vary depending on the Insert Type selected
from the pull-down list. Only the parameters required to describe a particular insert type will be
displayed. Use the diagram to identify what measurement each parameter represents.
The parameters and diagram displayed in the General Insert panel will vary depending on the
insert type selected from the pull –down list. Only the parameters required to describe a
particular insert type will be displayed. Select the desired insert type from the pull-down list.
Tool Manager.
831
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
A - 85 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
B - 82 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate

Thickness
C - 80 degree
R - Corner Radius
diamond
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
832
VERICUT Help

Thickness
C - 100 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate

Thickness
D - 55 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate

Thickness
E - 75 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
833
VERICUT Help

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
H - Hexagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
K - 55 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
L - Rectangle
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
834
VERICUT Help

Thickness
M - 86 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
O - Octagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
P - Pentagon
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
835
VERICUT Help
Thickness
R - Round Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
S - Square
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
T - Triangle
A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
836
VERICUT Help

Thickness
V - 35 degree R - Corner Radius
Color
Alternate

Thickness
W - 80 degree R - Corner Radius
trigon A - Lead Angle
Color
Alternate
R - Corner Radius
diamond T - Tip Angle
Color
Alternate
837
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Custom
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
T – Tip angle
Color
Alternate
To Tool Component tab ( Mill Tool with Cutter Body)
838
VERICUT Help
Cutter Body Features
The Cutter Body features enable you to easily define the cutter body and position the inserts.
Enter the desired value in the text field for each parameter. Use the diagram to identify the
measurement that each parameter represents. Use the Location Aids described below to
position the inserts.
Locate by nominal diameter — Positions the center of the insert corner radius on the
tool diameter.
Locate by outside diameter — Positions the outside edge of the insert on the tool
diameter.
To Tool Component tab ( Mill Tool with Cutter Body)
839
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Hole Making Tool)
Opened via adding or modifying a Hole -Making tool, this tab is used to describe the shape for
the "Cutter" component in a Hole-making tool assembly. Options are available to define the
cutter via parametric shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a cutter in another tool assembly.
840
VERICUT Help
(Drill) — Opens the Drill feature definition panel enabling you to specify the cutter’s
characteristics.
(Reamer) — Opens the Reamer feature definition panel enabling you to specify the
cutter’s characteristics.
(Center Drill) — Opens the Center Drill feature definition panel enabling you to
specify feature definition panel enabling you to specify the cutter’s
characteristics.
(Tap) — Opens the Tap Tool feature definition panel enabling you to specify the
cutter’s characteristics.

(General Insert) — Displays the General Insert features panel enabling you to define
ISO standard insert shapes.

file.
841
VERICUT Help

Simulation Help.
Simulation Help.
See Define a Hole Making Cutter, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
842
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tool, Drill
843
VERICUT Help

Drill Point Angle — Use to specify the angle of the drill point.
the holder.
Standard Tool Library — Displays the Standard Tool window enabling you to select a drill from
a Standard Tool Library of drills. Selecting a drill from the Standard Tool Library will
automatically enter all of the parameters required to define the drill.
NOTE: For drills, CW/CCW is defined looking down (negative Z) the tool axis.
for axial cuts only (hole making) enabling you to machine with a drill other than along the tool
axis, for example using a drill tool to chamfer.
844
VERICUT Help
To Tool Component tab (Hole Making Tool)
845
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tool, Reamer
846
VERICUT Help

Chamfer Height (CH) — Use to specify the height of the chamfer at the end of the tool.
the holder.
Standard Tool Library — Displays the Standard Tool window enabling you to select a reamer
from a Standard Tool Library of reamers. Selecting a reamer from the Standard Tool Library
will automatically enter all of the parameters required to define the reamer.
Maximum Material Removal — Use to specify the maximum amount of material that can be
removed by the reamer.
NOTE: For reamers, CW/CCW is defined looking down (negative Z) the tool axis.
for axial cuts enabling you to machine with a Hole Making Tool other than along the tool axis.
847
VERICUT Help
848
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tool, Center Drill
849
VERICUT Help

Chamfer Angle — Use to specify the angle of the countersink portion of the tool.
Pilot Length — Use to specify the length of the pilot drill.
the holder.
Pilot Angle (A) — Use to specify the angle at the end of the pilot drill.
Standard Tool Library —
NOTE: For center drills CW/CCW is defined looking down (negative Z) the tool axis.
for axial cuts only enabling you to machine with a Hole Making Tool other than along the tool
axis.
850
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tool, Tap
851
VERICUT Help
Overall Length — Use to specify the overall length of the tool.

Neck Length — Use to specify the distance between the shank and the threaded portion of the
tap.
Thread Length — Use to specify the length of the threaded portion of the tool.
Neck Diameter — Use to specify the diameter of the tool’s neck area.
Minor Diameter — Use to specify the minor diameter of the thread
Major Diameter — Use to specify the major diameter of the thread.
Screw Thread Size — Use to specify the major diameter using the “Numeric Size” of the thread,
for example #6.
the holder.
Tip Diameter — Use to specify the diameter if the tool at the tip of the threaded portion of the
tool.
Thread — Use to specify the distance between adjacent threads. Enter either the number of
threads per threads/inch or by the thread’s Pitch (distance between adjacent threads in mm).
Style — Use to specify the style of tap. Choose Taper, Plug or Bottom from the pull-down list.
Direction — Use to specify the direction (hand) of the thread. Choose Right or Left.
Optional Parameters — The following parameters are optional when defing a tap tool.
Lead Tolerance — Use to specify the lead tolerance as a percent.
852
VERICUT Help
Forms — Use to specify the thread form. Select the thread form from the pull-down list.
Choose one of the following: Unified (Inch), ISO (Metric), Whitworth (British standard),
Acme or Buttress.
Standard Tool Library —
853
VERICUT Help
Standard Tool window
The Standard Tool Library feature, in the Hole Making tool definition windows, displays the
Standard Tool window enabling you to display a Standard Tool Library file containing a list of
"standard" tools.
Selecting a tool from the Standard Tool Library will automatically enter all of the parameters
required to define the tool in the Hole Making Tool definition window.
The following Standard Tool libraries are included in the Library folder of your VERICUT
installation.
centerdrill_inch.csv
centerdrill_metric.csv
drill_inch.csv
drill_metric.csv
straight_shank_reamer_inch.csv
straight_shank_reamer_Metric.csv
Taps-Inch.csv
Taps-Metric.csv
You can also create your own Standard Tool library. Standard Tool list is populated from
information provided in CSV (Comma Separated Values) formatted files.
A tool record, populated with the necessary fields, must be included for each "standard" tool
that is to appear in the tool list. Use the included Tool Library files as a guide.
854
VERICUT Help
(Add Tool Library File) — Use to display the Open file selection window enabling you to
select the Standard Tool Library file to be added to the Standard Tool window.
(Remove Tool Library File) — Use to remove the highlighted Standard Tool Library file
from the Standard Tool window.
Tool Type — Use to specify the type of Standard Tool. Select one of the following (Drill,
Reamer, Center Drill, Tap) from the pull-down list.
Unit — Use to specify the units for the tool. Select Inch or Millimeter from the pull-down list.
855
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tool, General Insert Features
Accessed using the (General Insert) icon on the Hole Making Tools Tool Component
tab, the General Insert features enable you to define "ISO standard", as well as "custom" tool
insert shapes.
General Insert Features for Hole Making Tools
The parameters and diagram will vary depending on the Insert Type selected from the list. Only
the parameters required to describe a particular insert type will be displayed. Select the desired
insert type from the pull-down list.
Tool Manager.
856
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
A - 85 degree
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
B - 82 degree A - Lead Angle
parallelogram Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
857
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C - 80 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C - 100 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
D - 55 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
858
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
E - 75 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
H - Hexagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
K - 55 degree
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
859
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
L - Rectangle A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
M - 86 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
O - Octagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
860
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
P - Pentagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
Thickness
Driven Point
R - Round
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
S - Square A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
861
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
T - Triangle A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
V - 35 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
W - 80 degree
A - Lead Angle
trigon
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
862
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
R - Corner Radius
A - Lead Angle
Custom diamond
T - Tip Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
parallelogram T – Tip angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
Driven Point — Use to specify the driven point for the insert. You can specify multiple driven
points. Use the number box to specify which driven point that you are defining. In the picture
below, driven point 2 is being defined. Select the desired driven point location for each driven
point from the pull-down list. This feature is only available for Turn inserts.
863
VERICUT Help
axis.
864
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Turn Insert)
Opened via adding or modifying a turning Insert Cutter tool component, this tab is used to
describe the insert shape for the "Cutter" component in a turning tool assembly. Options are
available to define the cutter insert via ISO standard shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a
cutter insert in another tool assembly.
Component Type — Use to specify the type of component you are creating. In this case an
Insert Cutter for a turning tool.
ID — Use to specify the ID for the component you are creating. If not specified, VERICUT will
assign a unique default ID.
865
VERICUT Help
Options:
(General Insert) — Displays the General Insert features enabling you to define
ISO standard insert shapes.
(Groove Insert) — Displays the Groove Insert features enabling you to define
ISO standard groove insert shapes.
(Thread Insert) — Displays the Thread Insert features enabling you to define
ISO standard thread insert shapes.
(Sweep Profile) — Opens the Profile Sketcher window in “sweep solid”mode


file.
Simulation Help.
(Model File) — The Model File Features enable you to use an existing model or
create a new Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution using the Profile
Sketcher to define a tool component.
866
VERICUT Help
Simulation Help.
Tool Manager.
See Define an Insert for a Turn Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
creating turning inserts.
and orienting, a turn insert component in a turning tool assembly.
867
VERICUT Help
Turn Insert, General Insert Features
Accessed using the (General Insert) icon on the Turn Insert Tool Component tab, the
General Insert features enable you to define "ISO standard", as well as "custom" tool insert
shapes.
General Insert Features for Turn Tools
the parameters required to describe a particular insert type will be displayed. Select the desired
insert type from the pull-down list.
Tool Manager.
868
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
A - 85 degree
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
B - 82 degree
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C - 80 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
869
VERICUT Help

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C - 100 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
D - 55 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L - Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
E - 75 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
870
VERICUT Help
L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
H - Hexagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
K - 55 degree
A - Lead Angle
parallelogram
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
L - Rectangle A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
871
VERICUT Help

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
M - 86 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
O - Octagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
P - Pentagon A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
872
VERICUT Help
Thickness
Driven Point
R - Round
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
S - Square A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
T - Triangle A - Lead Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
873
VERICUT Help

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
V - 35 degree
A - Lead Angle
diamond
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
W - 80 degree
A - Lead Angle
trigon
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill

L – Length (mm)
R - Corner Radius
A - Lead Angle
Custom diamond
T - Tip Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
874
VERICUT Help
L - Length
W - Width
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
parallelogram T – Tip angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
OK to Mill
875
VERICUT Help
axis.
To Tool Component tab (Turn Insert)
876
VERICUT Help
Turn Insert, Groove Insert Features
Accessed using the (Groove Insert) icon on the Turn Insert Tool Component tab, the
Groove Insert features enable you to define "ISO standard" groove insert shapes.
the parameters required to describe a particular insert type will be displayed. Groove Insert
features are only available for defining Turning cutters.
Tool Manager.
877
VERICUT Help
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Square, double end C
D
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Radius, double end
D
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
40 degree V, double end C
D
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
878
VERICUT Help
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
45 degree chamfer, double
C
end
D
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Square, single end C
D
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C
Chamfer, single end
D
A - Chamfer Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
879
VERICUT Help
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Round, single end C
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
C
Radius, single end
B – Side Angle
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
880
VERICUT Help
881
VERICUT Help
Turn Insert, Thread Insert Features
Accessed using the (Thread Insert) icon on the Turn Insert Tool Component tab, the
Thread Insert features enable you to define "ISO standard" thread insert shapes.
the parameters required to describe a particular insert type will be displayed. Thread Insert
features is only available for defining turning cutters.
Tool Manager.
882
VERICUT Help

Inch Millimeter
L – Length (mm)
Thickness
55 degree, R - Corner Radius
triangle E
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
D- Inscribed Diameter (in)

Inch Millimeter
L – Length (mm)
Thickness
triangle E
Driven Point
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
30 degree,
E
trapeze triangle
F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
883
VERICUT Help

L – Length (mm)
Inch Millimeter
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
ACME, triangle E
F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Buttress,
triangle, right E
hand F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate

Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Buttress,
triangle, left E
hand F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
884
VERICUT Help
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
double end,
asymmetric E
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
double end,
symmetric E
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
ACME, double
E
end
F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
885
VERICUT Help
W - Width
L - Length
Thickness
R - Corner Radius
Buttress,
E
double end
F – Flat
Driven Point
Color
Alternate
886
VERICUT Help
887
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Probe Tip)
Opened via adding or modifying a probe tip tool component, this tab is used to describe the
shape of a probe tip component in a probe tool assembly.
888
VERICUT Help
Options:
(Probe) — Opens the Probe Tip feature definition panel enabling you to specify the
probe’s characteristics.
(Cylinder Probe) — Opens the Cylinder Probe Tip feature definition panel enabling
you to specify the probe’s characteristics.
(Hemisphere Probe) — Opens the Hemisphere Probe Tip feature definition panel
enabling you to specify the probe’s characteristics.
(Disk Probe) — Opens the Disk Probe Tip feature definition panel enabling you to
specify the probe’s characteristics.
(Extension Probe) — Opens the Extension Probe Tip feature definition panel enabling
you to specify the probe’s characteristics.

component in another tool library file for use in the current tool
library file.
Simulation Help.
NOTE: Probe assemblies containing multiple probe tips cannot be referenced.
See Define a Probe Tip, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on creating
turning inserts.
889
VERICUT Help
and orienting, a probe tip component in a probe tool assembly.
890
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool, Probe Tip
Probe Length — Use to specify the length of the probe.

Stem Diameter — Use to specify the diameter of the probe tip stem.
891
VERICUT Help
value is measured from the bottom-most portion of the probe tip to the bottom-most portion
of the holder.
Diameter (D) — Use to specify the diameter of the sphere at the end of the probe tip.
Maximum RPM — The maximum speed that a probe tool can spin before a spindle On/Off
error is output. The default value is 0.
Tip Color — Use to specify the color for the probe tip.
Stem Color — Use to specify the color for the probe stem.
NOTE: For additional information on Tip/Stem Color, see Tool Display Colors in the Tool
Component tab, Common Features section.
turning inserts.
To Tool Component tab (Probe Tip)
892
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool, Cylinder Probe Tip
893
VERICUT Help

Height (H) — Use to specify the height of the probe tip.
of the holder.
turning inserts.
894
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool, Hemisphere Probe Tip
895
VERICUT Help
of the holder.
turning inserts.
896
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool, Disk Probe Tip

Pin Offset — Use to specify the distance from the centerline of the roller to the centerline of
the probe tool.
897
VERICUT Help
A disk probe can optionally have "rollers" - two small hemispheres attached to the top and the
bottom of the disk. These are used to correctly position the probe vertically, before probing in
the horizontal direction, e.g. in a tight horizontal slot. The roller size is specified by the Roller
Depth parameter, which is the maximum vertical size of the probing tip.
Roller Depth — Use to specify the roller depth. The roller depth is equal to the Disk Height (H)
increased by twice the roller radius. For example if H=0.3 and the roller radius is 0.05, then the
roller depth becomes 0.4.
of the holder.
Disk Diameter (D) — Use to specify the diameter of the disk at the end of the probe tip.
Disk Height (H) — Use to specify the height of the probe tip.
Pin Diameter — Use to specify the diameter of the roller.
turning inserts.
898
VERICUT Help
Probe Tool, Extension Probe Tip
899
VERICUT Help

of the holder.
turning inserts.
900
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Water Jet)
Opened via adding or modifying a water jet tool component, this tab is used to describe the
shape of a water jet component in a water jet tool assembly.
901
VERICUT Help
Options:
(Water Jet) — Opens the Water Jet Cutter feature definition panel enabling you to
specify the water jet cutter’s characteristics.

library file.
Simulation Help.
See Add a Water Jet Cutter to a Water Jet Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
information on creating water jet cutters.
and orienting, a water jet component in a water jet tool assembly.
902
VERICUT Help
Water Jet Cutter
D - Diameter — Use to specify the cylindrical diameter of the water jet when the jet is on.
L - Length — Use to specify the maximum length of the water jet.
Z1 - Minimum Cutting Zone — Use to specify the minimum distance from the Water Jet
component origin, along the component's Z axis, where cutting is desired.
Z2 - Maximum Cutting Zone — Use to specify the maximum distance from the Water Jet
component origin, along the component's Z axis, where cutting is desired.
903
VERICUT Help
See Define a Water Jet Cutter, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
creating water jet cutters.
and orienting, a water jet component in a water jet tool assembly.
To Tool Component tab (Water Jet)
904
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Knife)
Opened via adding, or modifying, a Knife tool component, this tab is used to describe the shape
of an ultrasonic knife tool component in an ultrasonic knife tool assembly.
905
VERICUT Help
Options:
(Knife) — Opens the Knife feature definition panel enabling you to specify the
ultrasonic knife’s characteristics.

library file.
Simulation Help.
See Define a Knife Cutter, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on creating Knife
Cutters.
and orienting, a knife tool component in a Knife tool assembly.
906
VERICUT Help
Knife
Length (L) — Length of the knife blade. This measurement does not include the shank.
Width (W) — Total width of the knife tool.
Tip Width (D) — Width if the knife tool at its tip.
Shank Height (H) — Height of the shank portion of the knife tool.
Blade Taper Angle (E: degree) — Taper angle of the knife tool.
Thickness (T) — Thickness of the knife tool.
Maximum Steering Angle — Maximum steering angle for the knife tool. If the knife orientation
deviates from the direction of cut by more than this value, an error is output to the logger and
the cut trace is colored red. The default value is 2 degrees.
907
VERICUT Help
One-sided knife — When toggled "on" (checked) this feature designates the cutter that is being
created as a one-sided, or asymmetric, knife. A one-sided, or asymmetric, knife is flat on one
side.
Side 1 Side 2
One-sided or Asymmetric
Knife
Side 1 Side 2
Two-sided or Symmetric
Knife
908
VERICUT Help
See Define a Knife Cutter, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on creating Knife
Cutters.
and orienting, a knife tool component in a Knife tool assembly.
To Tool Component tab (Knife)
909
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Polisher)
Opened via adding, or modifying, a Polisher tool component, this tab is used to describe the
shape of a selected tool component in a Polisher tool assembly. Options are available to define
the polisher tool via parametric shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a polisher tool in another
tool assembly.
910
VERICUT Help
Polisher Tool Assembly
selected Polisher tool shape.
Options:
(Flat Bottom Polisher) — Opens the Flat Bottom Polisher feature definition panel
enabling you to specify the polisher tool’s characteristics.
(Ball Nose Polisher) — Opens the Ball Nose Polisher feature definition panel enabling
you to specify the polisher tool’s characteristics.
(Taper Ball Nose Polisher) — Opens the Taper Ball Nose Polisher feature definition
panel enabling you to specify the polisher tool’s
characteristics.
(Bull Nose Polisher) — Opens the Bull Nose Polisher feature definition panel enabling
you to specify the polisher tool’s characteristics.
(7 Parameter Polisher) — Opens the 7 Parameter Polisher feature definition panel

enabling you to specify the polisher tool’s characteristics.
911
VERICUT Help
(10 Parameter Polisher) — Opens the 10 Parameter Polisher feature definition panel
enabling you to specify the cutter’s characteristics.


library file.
Simulation Help.
Simulation Help.
See Define a Polisher Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Polisher tools.
See Tool Definitiion window, Assembly tab, also in this section, for information on positioning,
and orienting, a Polisher tool component in a Polisher tool assembly.
912
VERICUT Help
Polisher, Flat Bottom Polisher
Flute Length — Use to specify the length of the portion of the polishing tool that can be used
for polishing. This value is measured from the bottom-most portion of the cutter. Zero assumes
the entire polishing tool that can be used for polishing. An error similar to "SHANK contacted
material..." is reported when the non-polishing portion of the polishing tool contacts material.
Contact area is shaded using the red Error color.
913
VERICUT Help
the holder.
information, see Tool Display Colors in the Tool Add/Modify window, Common Features
section.
Polish Limits — When toggled "On" (checked), the component is designated as a Polish Limits
component and is used to detect areas where the tool applied too much pressure on the part
(penetrates the part too deep). These areas are displayed in the error color and an error
message like the following is output.
Error: Exceeded limit of polishing tool "10" loaded in component "Tool" at line (7) N006 G01
X8.439 Y0. Z130.022 I0.7071068 J0.0000000 K0.7071068 F6000.. Collision volume: 0.7198
Polisher tools.
To Tool Component tab (Polisher)
914
VERICUT Help
Polisher, Ball Nose Polisher
the holder.
915
VERICUT Help
Polisher tools.
916
VERICUT Help
Polisher, Taper Ball Nose Polisher

Automatic Shank Diameter — When toggled “on” (checked) the shank diameter will calculated
cased on the other toll parameters entered.
917
VERICUT Help
Nose Radius (R) — Use to specify the nose radius.

B — Use to specify the taper angle.
the holder.
Polisher tools.
918
VERICUT Help
Polisher,Bull Nose Polisher
Corner Radius (R) — Use to specify the corner radius.
919
VERICUT Help
the holder.
Polisher tools.
920
VERICUT Help
Polisher, 7 Parameter Polisher
D, R, E, F, A, B, H — Use the associated text fields to specify the parameters shown in the
picture above.
the holder.
921
VERICUT Help
Examples of polisher shapes that can be defined via the 7 Parameter option:
922
VERICUT Help
Polisher tools.
923
VERICUT Help
Polisher, 10 Parameter Polisher
D, R1, E1, F1, A, B, H, R2, E2, F2 —Use the associated text fields to specify the parameters
shown in the picture above.
the holder.
924
VERICUT Help
Polisher tools.
925
VERICUT Help
Tool Component tab (Holder)

Opened via ading or modifying a Holder tool component, this window is used to describe the
shape of a selected "Holder" component in a tool assembly. Options are available to define the
holder via parametric shapes, profile sketcher, or reference a holder in another tool assembly.
More than one holder can be used in a tool assembly. An error similar to "HOLDER removed
material..." is reported when the non-cutting portion of the cutter removes material. Material
removed is shaded using the red Error color.
926
VERICUT Help
Holder icons — Selecting an icon configures the bottom half of the window with the
parameters required to define the holder shape.
Options:
(Block) — Opens the Block feature definition panel enabling you to specify a block as
a holder and specify the holders’s other characteristics.
(Cylinder) — Opens the Cylinder feature definition panel enabling you to specify a
cylinder as a holder and specify the holders’s other characteristics.
(Cone ) — Opens the Cone feature definition panel enabling you to specify a cone as
a holder and specify the holders’s other characteristics.

(Sweep Profile) — Opens the Profile Sketcher window in “sweep solid”mode


library file.
927
VERICUT Help

Simulation Help.
(Model File) — The Model File Features enable you to use an existing model or
create a new Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution using the Profile
Sketcher to define a tool component.
Simulation Help.
See Define a Tool Holder, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on creating tool
holders.
and orienting, a holder component in a tool assembly.
928
VERICUT Help
Holder, Block Holder
Length (L) — Use to specify the length of the block.
Width (W) — Use to specify the with of the block
Height (H) — Use to specify the height of the holder component.
929
VERICUT Help
Alternate — When toggled "on" (checked) this feature designates the holder that is being
created as an "alternate" or "secondary" holder for a particular tool assembly. This feature
enables you to switch between a "primary" and "alternate" holder shapes.
holder shape or to use the "alternate" (Override Value = 1) holder shape.
holders.
To Tool Component tab, Holder
930
VERICUT Help
Holder, Cylinder Holder
Radius (R) — Use to specify the radius of the cylinder.
enables you to switch between a "primary" and "alternate" holder shapes.
931
VERICUT Help
holders.
932
VERICUT Help
Holder, Cone Holder
Top Radius (R2) — Use to specify the radius at the top of the cone.
Bottom Radius (R1) — Use to specify the Radius at the bottom of the cone.
933
VERICUT Help
enables you to switch between a "primary" and "alternate" holder shape.
holders.
934
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab
Accessed from the Tool Definition window, the features on this tab are used translate or rotate
a component in a tool assembly, or to move the selected component by assembling (mating or
aligning) it with other objects in the tool assembly.
Translate tab — Features in this group translate the selected tool component via indicating
"from" and "to" points to move the tool component.
Rotate tab — Features on this tab rotate the selected tool component about a rotation center
point.
Assemble tab — Features on this tab enable you to assemble tools by mating or aligning one to
three planar surfaces with surfaces on other tool components, similar to assembling models.
Matrix tab — Features on this tab move the selected tool component via a twelve parameter
Csys tab — Features on this tab enable you to move the selected tool component "from" one
selected coordinate system "to" a second selected coordinate system.
935
VERICUT Help
Position — Specifies the absolute XYZ position of the tool component relative to the tool origin.
Values in this field are separated by spaces.
Angles — Specifies the absolute XYZ rotation of the tool component relative to the tool origin.
Values in this field are separated by spaces.
To Tool Definition window
936
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab, Translate tab
Accessed from the Assembly tab, the Translate tab features enable you to translate the
selected tool component via indicating "from" and "to" points to move the object. Movement
occurs each time you press the Move button. If the applied movement is incorrect, press Undo
(on the Assembly tab) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Translate tab features for modeling.
Translate tab features:

From / To — Use to move the tool component by specify the From and To locations, relative to
the tool origin. XYZ values can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the
field then clicking on a tool component shape. As you move the mouse over the tool, a
crosshair and vector show you the pending pick-point location.
Back — Moves the selected object by the incremental distance, as calculated from the "To"
point to the "From" point location.
To Assembly tab
937
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab, Rotate tab

Accessed from the Assembly tab, the Rotate tab features enable you to rotate the selected tool
component about a rotation center point. Movement occurs each time you press one of the
rotation direction buttons: X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-. If the applied rotation is incorrect, press Undo
(on the Assembly tab) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Rotate tab features for modeling.
Rotate tab features:

Center of Rotation — Specifies XYZ point location about which to rotate the tool component.
XYZ values can be entered in the Center of Rotation text field (separated by spaces), or selected
by clicking in the Center of Rotation text field, then clicking on a tool component in the Tool
Display area. To see the center of rotation, press . To remove the center of rotation
symbol press the button again, or close the window.
Rotation buttons (X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-) — Use to apply the incremental degrees of rotation
specified in the Increment field about the selected axis. Rotation occurs about the Center of
Rotation relative to the tool origin.
To Assembly tab
938
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab, Assemble tab
Accessed from the Assembly tab, the Assemble tab features enable you to assemble tool
components, by mating or aligning one to three planar surfaces with surfaces on other tool
components, similar to assembling models. If a non-planar surface is selected, VERICUT
constructs a tangent plane at the pick point. The relationship of surfaces being mated or aligned
is known as a "constraint". If the applied movement is incorrect, press Undo (on the Assembly
tab) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Assemble tab features for modeling.
1. Choose the constraint type.
2. Select a surface on the object to move.
3. Select the surface to move the object relative to.
Assemble tab features:

Constraint Type — Specifies how to constrain selected surfaces during tool component
movement. After selecting two surfaces to define a constraint, VERICUT moves the tool
component and highlights the satisfied constraint with a checkmark.
Options:
Mate — Moves the tool component so the selected surface opposes the surface selected on
the second tool component (surface normals oppose each other).
Align — Moves the tool component so the selected surface is aligned with the surface
selected on the second tool component (surface normals point in the same direction).
Offset — Distance and direction in which to offset constrained surfaces, applied normal to
the surface.
Reset — Resets constraints to receive new data.
To Assembly tab
939
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab, Matrix tab
Locations:
Project menu > Tools: Add menu > Add Tool Component: Assembly tab
Project menu > Tools: Edit menu > Modify: Assembly tab
Accessed from the Assembly tab, the Matrix tab features enable you move the selected
component via a twelve parameter transformation matrix. If the applied movement is incorrect,
press Undo (on the Assembly tab) to return the object to its previous location.
Features on this tab work the same as the Matrix tab features for modeling.
Matrix tab features:

APT tool paths. Its twelve parameters reveal the geometric attributes of the local (transformed)
coordinate system (CSYS) in terms of the machine origin.
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
940
VERICUT Help
Update — Updates the tool component location to reflect the matrix table transformation.
reveal the geometrical attributes of the machine origin in terms of the local (transformed)
coordinate system.
To Assembly tab
941
VERICUT Help
Assembly tab, Csys tab

Accessed from the Assembly tab, the Csys tab features enable you translate the selected tool
component from one coordinate system (Csys) to another. Select the "From" Csys and the "To"
Csys to move the tool. Movement occurs each time you press the Move button.
From — Use to specify the coordinate system to move the tool "from". Select the appropriate
Csys from the pull-down list. The list contains all of the coordinate systems defined in the
Coordinate Systems area of the Tool Manager.
To — Use to specify the coordinate system to move the tool "to". Select the appropriate Csys
from the pull-down list. The list contains all of the coordinate systems defined in the Coordinate
Systems area of the Tool Manager.
Move — Use to move the selected tool from the "From" Csys to the "To" Csys orientation.
To Assembly tab
942
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Configure Coordinate System window

The Configure Coordinate System window is displayed when a Csys record in the Coordinate
Systems Area is highlighted or whenever a new coordinate system is added.
The Configure Coordinate System window provides features that enable you to define, or
modify a coordinate system, also known as a "CSYS". Changes made in the Configure
Coordinate System window are applied to the coordinate system that is highlighted in the
Coordinate Systems Area. The Name of the coordinate system that the changes will be applied
to is also shown at the top of the Configure Coordinate System menu. In the picture above, all
changes will be applied to Csys 1.
All of the features found in the Configure Coordinate Systems window and its tabs are identical
to those found on the Project Tree, Configure Coordinate Systems menu and are described in
detail in that section, also located in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
A few of the features found in the Project Tree, Configure Coordinate Systems menu are not
applicable for use in the Tool Manager and are not included in the Tool Manager, Configure
Coordinate System window. These few items will be noted in each of the feature descriptions.
943
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Tool Display Area
The Tool Display Area displays the tool selected in the Tool List. Colors distinguish holders from
cutter components. Target symbols indicate the tool's driven point and gage point. Use the
View Orient functions to visually manipulate the tool in the display area.
944
VERICUT Help
Milling Tool
CAD/STL Insert Turning Tool
945
VERICUT Help
Shortcuts:
1. Double click a tool component in the Tool Display area to display the appropriate Tool
Component tab enabling you to make modifications to the tool component.
2. Right-click in the Tool Manager Tool Display area to display a menu with the following
features:
Fit — Fits the tool in the Tool Display area.

Reverse — Reverses the viewing direction, as if you were looking from behind the tool.
Select View — Select the view that you want from the pull-down list and the tool in the Tool
Display area will re-orient to the selected view.
Snap to Orthogonal View — Snaps the current tool in the Tool Display area to the closest
orthogonal view. Orient the tool so that it is close to the orthogonal view that you want and
then select Snap to Orthogonal View in the menu and the tool will re-orient to the exact
orthogonal view.
Set Spin Center — You can quickly change the spin center location by right-clicking on the
position on tool assembly in the Tool Display area where you want the spin center located, and
then left-click on Spin Center in the menu that displays. The spin center will be located at your
pick point.
Driven Point — Use to toggle the display of the driven point symbol , which represents
the location of the driven point, “on” (checked) and “off”.
946
VERICUT Help
Gage Point — Use to toggle the display of the gage point symbol , which represents the
location of the gage point, “on” (checked) and “off”.
Axes — Use to toggle the display of the axis, representing the tool origin, “on” (checked) and
“off”.
Qualified Dimensions — Use to toggle the display of the qualified dimensions symbol
, which represents the qualified dimension location, “on” (checked) and “off”.
Coordinate Systems — Use to toggle the display of coordinate systems available in the Tool
Manager, Coordinate Systems list, “on” (checked) and “off”.
Clear Highlights — Use to remove “highlights” from the Tool Display Area.
Example:
When using the Measurement Tool window, Feature option, if a tool component was created
using a profile (Sweep Solid or Solid of Revolution) the profile will be displayed in the Tool
Manager Tool Display area as shown in the picture below.
Use Clear Highlights to remove the profile when you are finished with it. The profile will
automatically be removed when you change tool components.
947
VERICUT Help
Tool Manager window, Message Area
The message area, also known as the "message logger", is located at the bottom of the Tool
Manager window, and by default displays the most recent message VERICUT has provided.
VERICUT provides error, warning, and informational messages to assist you while working in the
Tool Manager.
To review previous messages, click on the message line-the most recent message is listed last.
Click again to close the message logger.
948
VERICUT Help
Using the Tool Manager
949
VERICUT Help
About Describing Tools for VERICUT
VERICUT requires descriptions of the tools used to machine the workpiece to accurately
simulate the material removal process. VERICUT can process all standard APT CUTTER records
to obtain descriptions of the cutting tools, or you can define cutting tools via VERICUT's Tool
Manager and store them in a Tool Library file. When non-cutting tool holders are defined and
used in the simulation, VERICUT detects collisions that would occur with tool holder(s) and the
workpiece or holding fixtures. A summary of the tools used during the simulation and machine
cycle time elapsed for each tool is written to the Log file.
If VERICUT does not have a description of the tool when NC program processing begins, the
previous tool is used. If a previous tool has not been defined, an error similar to "Tool not
defined - motion ignored" is issued.
VERICUT supports a variety of tools, depending on the type of machining they will perform:
Milling Tools
Turning Tools
While not a "cutting tool", VERICUT also supports the use of Probe Tools.
Hole Making Tools
Water Jet Tools
Knife Tools
Polisher Tools
950
VERICUT Help
Milling Tools
A milling tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The Holder component grips the cutter and holds it in the NC machine for cutting and
is described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in Tool Manager.
The holder component is also used for collision detection. VERICUT enables using multiple
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in milling tool assemblies, such as:
chucks, extensions, adapters, etc. are described using "Holder" components in VERICUT.
Cutter — Cutting portion of the tool assembly-has flutes, or teeth, that remove material and is
described using the Tool Component tab (Revolved Cutter) features in Tool Manager. The
cutting portion of the tool assembly can also be described as one or more cutter inserts using
the Tool Component tab (Mill Insert) features or the features in the Mill Tool with Cutter Body
window in Tool Manager.
Shank — the portion of the tool assembly that extends above the cutter, and into the holder. It
does not have flutes and can not effectively remove material. VERICUT offers the following
methods of defining a non-cutting shank:
Cutter + Flute Length method — using the Tool Manager, define a Cutter which includes the
shank portion of the tool, then specify its cutting Flute Length and Shank Diameter.
Holder method — in addition to defining the Cutter, you also define a separate Holder (see
below) which describes the shank portion of the tool. Flute Length is not used with this
method.
Shank method — in addition to defining the Cutter, use special Cutter or VERICUT-TC records
to describe the shank profile. Flute Length is not used with this method.
951
VERICUT Help
Milling tool control point

The tool control point, or "driven point" is a point relative to the tool assembly that the NC data
is commanding to move. Material is removed based on motion commands and the tool shape,
relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the mill tool tip (bottom center of
the tool) is being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by including a Driven Point
record for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
In cases where a gage point is driven, such as with G-Code data for a machine expecting to drive
the spindle face or rotary pivot point, a gage length or "gage offset" value is often used. A gage
offset value establishes the expected length for the tool to be extended from the holder.
VERICUT realistically simulates this programming method by allowing you to enter these values
in a Gage Offset table(ref. Configure Tool Offsets in the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab,
or by including a Gage Point location for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool
Information tab.
952
VERICUT Help
Turning Tools
A turning tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder —The Holder component grips the Cutter and holds it in the NC machine for cutting and
is described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in Tool Manager.
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in Turning tool assemblies, such as:
backup blocks, extensions, adapters, etc. are described using "Holder" components in VERICUT.
Cutter — Cutting portion of the tool, sometimes referred to as a turning "insert" is used to
remove material and is described using the Tool Component tab (Turn Insert) features in Tool
Manager.
Turning tool control point

relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the center the turning tool tip is
being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by including a Driven Point record for
the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
the turret face or center, gage offset values are often used. These values establish where the
953
VERICUT Help
NC data control point is, relative to the actual machine driven point. VERICUT realistically
simulates this programming method by allowing you to enter these values in a Gage Offset
table (ref. Configure Tool Offsets in the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab, or by including
a Gage Point location for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
954
VERICUT Help
Probe Tools
A Probe tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The Holder grips the probe tip and holds it in the NC machine for probing and is
described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in Tool Manager. The holder
component is also used for collision detection.
Other non-cutting components found in Probe tool assemblies, are described using "Holder"
components in VERICUT.
Probe Ball — The probe consists of a "tip" of specified shape (Ball, Cylinder, Hemisphere, Disk
and Extension), a shank/stem with a specified diameter, and an overall length. It is described
using the Tool Component tab (Probe Tip) features in Tool Manager.
A probe tool does not cut. In fact, VERICUT's material removal logic is never used for a probe
tool. This is mainly because a probe tool, unlike a milling tool, does not have to be symmetric
about an axis of rotation. Thus VERICUT can support multiple tip probe tool configurations like a
"star" probes. This design also positions us to be able to support asymmetric probe tips in some
future release.
VERICUT's collision logic for a probe tool is more like that of a turning tool. As with a turning
tool, a probe tool uses machine simulation's collision algorithm to detect collisions. No material
is removed, but errors are reported in the logger and log file, and the error counter is
955
VERICUT Help
incremented. If a machine simulation view is open and simulation and collision checking is on,
you will see the usual error color display.
956
VERICUT Help
Hole Making Tools
A Hole Making tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The Holder component grips the Cutter and holds it in the NC machine for cutting
and is described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in Tool Manager.
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in Hole Making tool assemblies, such
as: extensions, adapters, etc. are described using "Holder" components in VERICUT.
Cutter — The Cutter component of the tool assembly (Drills, Reamers, Center Drills and Taps) is
used to remove material and is described using the Tool Component tab (Hole Making Tool)
features in Tool Manager.
Hole Making Tool control point

957
VERICUT Help
relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the Hole Making tool tip (bottom
center of the tool) is being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by including a
Driven Point record for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
in a Gage Offset table (ref. Configure Tool Offsets in the Settings window: G-Code Advanced
tab, or by including a Gage Point location for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool
Information tab.
958
VERICUT Help
Water Jet Tools
A Water Jet tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The holder, or nozzle, grips the water jet cutter and holds it in the NC machine for
water jet cutting and is described using the Tool Component tab, Holder features in Tool
Manager.
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in Water Jet tool assemblies, such
as: mixing tubes, guards, etc. are described using tool "Holder" components in VERICUT. The
holder component is also used for collision detection.
Water Jet — The portion of the tool assembly that is used to form the water jet stream that is
used is used to remove material and is described using the Tool Component tab (Water Jet)
features in Tool Manager.
Water Jet tool control point

is commanding to move. Material is removed based on motion commands and the water jet
tool configuration, relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the water jet tool
tip (bottom center of the tool) is being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by
including a Driven Point record for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
959
VERICUT Help
tab, or by including a Gage Point location for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool
Information tab.
960
VERICUT Help
Knife Tools
A Knife tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The holder grips the knife cutter and holds it in the NC machine for ultrasonic knife
cutting and is described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in Tool Manager.
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in polisher tool assemblies, such as:
extensions, adapters, etc. are described using tool "Holder" components in VERICUT.
Knife — The Kinife portion of the tool assembly that is used for cutting and is described using
the Tool Component tab (Knife) features in Tool Manager.
Knife tool control point

is commanding to move. Material is cut based on motion commands and the knife tool
configuration, relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the knife tool tip
961
VERICUT Help
(bottom center of the tool) is being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by
tab, or by including a Gage Offset location for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool
Information tab.
962
VERICUT Help
Polisher Tools
A Polisher tool assembly consists of these components:

Holder — The holder, or nozzle, grips the Polisher tool and holds it in the NC machine for
polishing and deburring and is described using the Tool Component tab (Holder) features in
Tool Manager.
holder components. Other non-cutting components found in polisher tool assemblies, such as:
extensions, adapters, etc. are described using tool "Holder" components in VERICUT.
Polisher — The "outer" portion of the Polisher tool assembly that is used to polish or Deburr
the part and is described using the Tool Component tab (Polisher) features in Tool Manager.
The Polisher component is described using the Add Tool Component feature in the Tool
Manager.
Polisher Limits — The "inner" portion of the Polisher tool assembly that is used to detect areas
where the tool applied too much pressure on the part (penetrates the part too deep). A
negative near-miss value could be used instead of a Polish Limits component but using a Polish
Limits component might be preferable because the allowable deflection can vary with the tool
contact point. The Polish Limits component is described using the Tool Component tab
(Polisher) features in Tool Manager.
963
VERICUT Help
Polisher tool control point

is commanding to move. Material is polished based on motion commands and the polisher tool
configuration, relative to the control point. By default, VERICUT assumes the polisher tool tip
(bottom center of the tool) is being driven. However, this relationship can be changed by
Information tab.
964
VERICUT Help
Defining Profile Tool Shapes
Using profile tool shapes, also known as "special cutters", extends the ability to describe tool
shapes to include cutters having almost any cutting shape and differentiate the non-cutting
portions of the tool assembly, such as: shanks, extensions and holders. Material is not removed
by the non-cutting portion of a tool assembly but is immediately flagged as an error, and
shaded using the red Error color.
965
VERICUT Help
Tools defined from profile shapes are typically created using VERICUT's Tool Manager.
However, they can also be described using special tool path record formats (see below).
CUTTER record profile tool definition formats:

CUTTER/XCUT, ...profile description
CUTTER/SHANK, ...profile description
CUTTER/HOLDER, ...profile description
APT/CLS version of VERICUT-TC record profile tool definition formats:

PPRINT/VERICUT-TC XCUT, ...profile description
PPRINT/VERICUT-TC SHANK, ...profile description
PPRINT/VERICUT-TC HOLDER, ...profile description
G-Code version of VERICUT-TC record profile tool definition formats (Fanuc control example):
(VERICUT-TC XCUT, ...profile description)
(VERICUT-TC SHANK, ...profile description)
(VERICUT-TC HOLDER, ...profile description)
Special cutter profiles are defined differently, depending on the tool type. Consult the following
sections for specific information.
Milling tool profiles

Milling tool profiles are defined using a 2-D profile composed of line and arc segments in the ZX
plane, which are then revolved by VERICUT to create the spinning tool shape. The profile of
each tool component (cutter or holder) is described in its own local coordinate system where
the Z-axis is the tool centerline. See Profile Sketcher window, also in the Project Tree section of
Help for additional information on profile sketcher features.
VERICUT can also be configured to use profile holders with standard cutters that appear in the
NC program file.
VERICUT assumes the origin of the cutter component is being driven. However, this relationship
can be changed via the Control Point feature on the Configure Tooling menu (ref. Control Point
in the Configure Tooling menu, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help), or by including a Driven Point
record for the tool in the Tool Manager window, Tool Information tab.
966
VERICUT Help
Information tab.
Sample milling tool assembly with profiles:
Milling tool profile entities

The entities used to define milling tool profiles are listed below. The profile for each tool
component is defined relative to its own local coordinate system.
Point X,Z — Defines a point on the profile. When a point follows a previous point, a line
segment is created connecting the points. When a point follows an arc, the point is used to limit
the arc.
Points X,Z, X,Z, ... X,Z — Used only with special tool path record formats, this entity defines a
series of points on the profile, each connected with a line segment.
Arc Xcenter,Zcenter,Radius [CW, CCW, Shortest] — Defines an arc segment. Control the Arc
direction using the "CW", "CCW", or "Shortest" options. An Arc must be limited by a preceding
and trailing point. Tool profiles can not begin with, end with, or have two successive Arc
entities.
967
VERICUT Help
Rules for defining milling tool profiles

1. The profile definition must begin with a Point at X=0, and may begin anywhere on the Z-axis
(tool axis). Recall that the origin (X0Z0) of a cutter profile is assumed by VERICUT as the
control point.
2. The profile must have at least three points.
3. In general, the profile definition is continues in a counter-clockwise direction, and ends with
a point that is higher in Z than the beginning point. VERICUT automatically closes any profile
that does not end on the Z-axis by supplying an ending point at X=0 and perpendicular to
the tool axis.
4. The only profile restriction is that it cannot be self-intersecting (cross over on itself).
VERICUT checks for valid profiles when:
1. The tls file is opened, either directly in tool manger or when the .usr file is opened
2. You are creating the profile in the sketcher
3. If VERICUT detects an invalid profile when the .tls file is opened or while you are creating it
in the sketcher, VERICUT will attempt to fix a bad profile if possible but sometimes it is not
possible.
4. VERICUT is cutting.
5. If VERICUT detects an invalid cutter profile while cutting, a message is output, the error
count is incremented, and the tool is not used. If it detects an invalid holder profile, a
message is output, the error count in incremented, and the holder is turned-off.
Examples of defining a milling cutter profile:
968
VERICUT Help
Examples of defining a shank profile:
969
VERICUT Help
Examples of defining a holder profile:
970
VERICUT Help
Examples of "Negative Z" profiles:
971
VERICUT Help
Example of a cutter profile with a "Negative Z" turn:
Turning tool profiles

Turning tool profiles are used to describe both the cutter (insert) tool component and holder
components. Turning cutter components are defined using a "closed" 2-D profile composed of
line and arc segments in the ZX plane and used to create a "sweep" solid of the specified
Thickness by sweeping the profile along the Y-axis. The profile is described in a local coordinate
system where the origin of the cutter component is assumed as the tool control point.
Turning holder components can be described as either a closed 2-D "sweep" profile composed
of line and arc segments in the ZX plane and used to create a "sweep" solid of the specified
Thickness, the same as the cutter component described above. Turning holder components can
also be described as an "open" 2-D SOR (solid of revolution) profile, composed of line and arc
972
VERICUT Help
segments in the ZX plane used to create a solid by revolving the profile around the Z-axis. See
Profile Sketcher for additional information on profile sketcher features.
VERICUT assumes the origin of the cutter component is being driven. However, this relationship
can be changed by including a control point offset ("Ctrl Pt") with the tool in the Tool Manager.
Sample turning tool profile:
Turning tool profile entities

The data elements used to define turning tool profiles are listed below. The profile is defined
relative to its local coordinate system. Note that Z=spindle axis and X=cross-slide axis.
Point Z,X — Defines a point on the profile. When a point follows a previous point, a line
segment is created connecting the points. When a point follows an arc, the point is used to limit
the arc.
Points Z,X, Z,X, ... Z,X — Used only with special tool path record formats, this entity defines a
series of points on the profile, each connected with a line segment.
Arc Zcenter,Xcenter,Radius [CW, CCW, Shortest] — Defines an arc segment. Control the Arc
direction using the "CW", "CCW", or "Shortest" options. An Arc must be limited by a preceding
and trailing point. Tool profiles can not begin with, end with, or have two successive Arc
entities.
Rules for defining turning tool profiles

1. The profile definition must begin with a Point, and may begin anywhere in X and Z. Recall
that the origin (X0Z0) of a cutter profile is assumed by VERICUT as the control point.
2. The profile must have at least three points.
973
VERICUT Help
3. In general, the profile definition is continues in a counter-clockwise direction, and ends with
a point at the same location as the beginning point (creates a closed profile shape). VERICUT
automatically closes any profile that does not end on the beginning point by supplying an
ending point at that location.
4. The only profile restriction is that it cannot be self-intersecting (cross over on itself).
Examples of defining turning cutter profiles:
974
VERICUT Help

The Tool Manager enables you to create and maintain VERICUT Tool Library files containing
descriptions of cutting tools, or tool assemblies, OptiPath records and other tool related
information used by VERICUT. VERICUT provides a variety of ways to access the Tool Manager
enabling you to choose the method that works best for you. Choose from the following
methods:
Accessing Tool Manager from the Project Tree:
1. Double-click with the left mouse button on a Tooling branch.

2. Right-click on a Tooling branch and select Tool Manager from the menu that displays.
Accessing Tool Manager from the VERICUT main menu:
1. In the VERICUT main menu select Project menu > Tools.
Accessing Tool Manager from the VERICUT toolbar:
1. Click on , the Tools icon .
Accessing Tool Manager outside of VERICUT:
You can access a stand-alone Tool Manager outside of VERICUT using the toolman.bat file
located in the \commands\ folder of your VERICUT installation.
975
VERICUT Help
Create a New Tool Library File

Tool Library files contain descriptions of cutting tools, or tool assemblies. Tool Library data is
used by VERICUT when a setup’s Tooling Branch in the Project Tree is configured to do so. Use
the procedure below to create a new Tool Library.
To create a new (blank) Tool Library file:
1. Open the Tool Manager window using one of the methods described above in the Accessing the
Tool Manager section.
2. Click on the (New File) icon in the Tool Manager Tool Bar. All data is cleared from the
Tool Manager.
3. Use the Tool Manager features to add new tools or the features to add
new tool components. Both are located in the Tool Manager Tool Bar.
4. See Adding a Tool to a Tool Library, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
5. To save the new Tool Library file, click on the icon in the Tool Manager Tool Bar. If you
don’t see the Save as File icon, click on the icon with the right mouse button. Clicking with
the right mouse button on either of these icons toggles between the two modes.
In the file selection window that opens, select or type the \path\filename for the new tool
library file and then click Save.
976
VERICUT Help
the procedures below to open an existing Tool Library file.
To open an existing Tool Library file:
1. Open the Tool Manager window using one of the methods described above in the Accessing the
Tool Manager section.
2. Click on the icon in the Tool Manager Tool Bar.

3. In the file selection window that opens, select or type the /path/filename of the tool library file
that you want to open and then click Open.
4. The Tool Library file is opened. The first tool in the library is selected and displayed in the Tool
Tip: If errors occur during opening, visit the VERICUT Users’ Forum or contact CGTech technical
support via our website.
977
VERICUT Help
Save a Tool Library File

Save a New Library File
To save a new Tool Library file, click on the icon in the Tool Manager Tool Bar. If you
don’t see the Save as File icon, click on the icon with the right mouse button. Clicking with
the right mouse button on either of these icons toggles between the two modes.
Save an Existing Library File
To save an existing Tool Library file, click on the icon in the Tool Manager Tool Bar. If you
don’t see the Save as File icon, click on the icon with the right mouse button. Clicking
with the right mouse button on either of these icons toggles between the two modes.
978
VERICUT Help
Merging Tool Libraries
Use the procedures below to merge the contents of two Tool Library files. The following
assumes the Tool Manager window is already open. If not, open the Tool Manager window
using one of the methods described above in the Accessing the Tool Manager section.
1. In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the icon and select Merge fro the menu
that displays to display the Merge Tool Library window.
2. Enter the /path/filename of the "master" Tool Library file in the Master Tool Library text
field, or click on the ( Browse) icon and use the file selection window that displays to
select it.
3. Enter the /path/filename of the Tool Library file containing the updated tool information, in
the Update Tool Library text field, or click on the ( Browse) icon and use the file
selection window that displays to select it.
4. Specify how you want duplicated Tool IDs in the updated Tool Library file handled during
the merging process. Choose to Discard All duplicate IDs in the Update Library file,
Overwrite All duplicate IDs in the "master" Library file with those in the "update" Tool
Library file, or have VERICUT Prompt you, for each duplicate ID, to specify what action
should be taken.
5. Enter the /path/filename for the Tool Library file to receive the merged tool information, in
the Merged Tool Library text field, or click on the ( Browse) icon and use the file
selection window that displays to select it.
6. Select OK to merge the library files and close the Merge Tool Library window, or Apply to
merge the library files and leave the Merge Tool Library window open to merge other Tool
Library files.
Select Cancel to close the Merge Tool Library window without merging the tool ibrary files.
See the Tool Manager window, Tool Bar and Merge Tool Library window sections, also in the
979
VERICUT Help
Adding a Tool to a Tool Library
the procedures below to add new tools to a Tool Library.
finish. If necessary, refer to Save a Tool Library File above.
For ease of understanding, this section is divided into the basic tasks required to add individual
tool components as described below. Consult the appropriate task to describe specific tool
components, or follow the tasks in the order that they are presented to describe a complete
tool assembly.
All tasks assume the Tool Manager window has already been opened using one of the methods
described above in the Accessing the Tool Manager section.
Features used to add tool assemblies can be accessed using the icon in the Tool
Manager Tool Bar.
Similarly, features used to add tool assemblies can be accessed by right clicking in the Tool List
Area and using the Add Tool feature in the menu that displays.
980
VERICUT Help
Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related Information
1. In the Tool List Area, select the tool that you want the new tool assembly added after so
2. In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the in the (Add New Tool after Current
Tool) icon and select the type of tool assembly that you want to add from the list.
Similarly you can specify the type of tool assembly that you want to add by right clicking in
the Tool List Area and using the Add Tool feature in the menu that displays. (Ref. Add New
Tool after Current Tool for information related to what components are created for each
tool assembly type.
3. When the tool assembly is added, VERICUT creates a default tool ID but you can change it
by right-clicking on the tool in the Tool List Area and select Rename from the menu that
displays. Modify the tool ID as desired.
4. When the tool assembly is added, the tool_manager_tool_information_tab automatically
displays in the center of the Tool Manager window enabling you to specify tool information
like Description, Units, Gage Point, Driven Point, Cutter Compensation, etc. Use these
features to define the information for the tool that you just added.
Continue by defining the tool’s Holder component(s).
981
VERICUT Help
Define a Tool Holder

1. If you just created a tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related
Information above, click on the holder component in the Tool List Area so that it becomes
highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be displayed in the center
of the Tool Manager window.
2. In the Tool Definition window, select the Tool Component tab.
3. Select the appropriate holder shape/type icon for the holder. Placing the cursor over an
icon displays a description of the kind of holder that the icon represents. After selecting the
icon the lower part of the tab will update to display the features appropriate for the chosen
holder shape. (Ref. Tool Component tab (Holder) for additional information).
4. Enter supporting data to describe the holder. Press the Enter key after adding a parameter
to see the affect it has on the holder.
If the added component is larger than the display area, right-click in the Tool Manager's
Tool Display Area and select Fit in the menu that displays to see the entire tool assembly.
5. If desired, choose a Color for the holder. Components in a tool assembly have the option to
"Inherit", or override, the Tool component's defined color.
6. Toggle Do Not Spin with Spindle on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or
not the holder should spin with the spindle.
7. Toggle Alternate on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or not the holder is
an "alternate" or "secondary" holder. (Ref. Create and Use Tools with Alternate Cutters for
additional information.)
8. Click on the Assembly tab. Use the features on the Translate and Rotate tabs to translate or
rotate the Holder to the correct position in the tool assembly. You can also use the features
on the Assemble tab to position the holder by assembling (mating or aligning) it with other
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to define additional tool holder components or used
to modify existing tool holder components.
For information about defining Profile tool shapes, see "Defining Profile Tool Shapes", also in
and Fastener Simulation Help.
Continue by defining the tool’s Cutter Component.
982
VERICUT Help
Add Additional Tool Holder Components
1. Select the Holder that you want the new Holder added after so that it becomes
highlighted.
2. Add the additional Holder component by right clicking in the Tool List Area and using
the Add Tool Component feature in the menu that displays.
3. Use the procedure in the Define a Tool Holder section above to define the
characteristics for the new tool holder.
Repeat the above steps as needed to add additional holder components to a tool assembly.
983
VERICUT Help
Define a Cutter Component

The following sections describe the process for defining the cutter component in a tool
assembly. While Probe Tips and Pollisher Tools are not technically “cutter” components, they
are included in this section beause the process of defining them is similar.
The following “cutter” component types are available:
Define a Revolved Cutter

Define Inserts for a Mill Tool
Define a Mill Tool with Cutter Body
Define a Hole Making Cutter
Define an Insert for a Turn Tool
Define a Probe Tip
Define a Water Jet Cutter
Define a Knife Cutter
Define a Polisher Tool
984
VERICUT Help
Define a Revolved Cutter
1. If you just created a mill tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related
Information section above, click on the cutter component in the Tool List Area so that it
becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be displayed in
the center of the Tool Manager window.
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the Revolved Cutter tab
4. On the Revolved Cutter tab, select the appropriate cutter shape/type icon for the cutter
component that you are defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of
the kind of cutter that the icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab
will update to display the features appropriate for defining the chosen cutter shape. (Ref.
Tool Component tab (Revolved Cutter) for additional information)
5. Enter supporting data to describe the cutter. Press the Enter key after adding a parameter
to see the affect it has on the cutter.
6. If desired, choose a Color for the cutter. Components in a tool assembly have the option to
7. Specify the Spindle Direction. Choose either CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter clockwise.
8. Toggle Alternate on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or not the cutter is an
"alternate" or "secondary" cutter. (Ref. Create and Use Tools with Alternate Cutters for
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing revolved cutter components.
Continue by specifying other tool properties.
985
VERICUT Help
Define Inserts for a Mill Tool
1. If you just created a mill tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related
Information section above, click on the cutter component in the Tool List Area so that it
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the Insert Cutter tab.
4. On the Insert Cutter tab, select the appropriate insert type icon for the insert. Placing the
cursor over an icon displays a description of the kind of insert that the icon represents. After
selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will update to display the features appropriate
for defining the chosen insert type. (Ref. Tool Component tab (Mill Insert) for additional
information).
5. Enter the supporting data to describe the insert shape. Press the Enter key after adding a
parameter to see the affect it has on the insert.
6. If desired, choose a Color for the insert. Components in a tool assembly have the option to
7. Toggle Alternate on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or not the holder the
holder is an "alternate" or "secondary" holder. (Ref. Create and Use Tools with Alternate
Cutters for additional information.)
8. Use the Location Aids features, to specify the diameter of the tool and whether the center
of the insert corner radius (Locate by nominal diameter), or the outside edge of the insert
(Locate by outside Diameter) is positioned on the tool diameter.
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing mill insert components.
986
VERICUT Help
Define a Mill Tool with Cutter Body
The Mill Tool with Cutter Body window consists of two separate sections. The General Insert
section at the top of the window enables you to define the insert that is to be used. The Cutter
Body section in the lower part of the window enables you to define the cutter body and
position the inserts.
1. Use one of the following methods to display the Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition
window in the center of the Tool Manager window.
In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the in the (Add New Tool after
Current Tool) icon and select Mill Tool with Cutter Body in the list that displays.
Right click in the Tool List Area and using the Add Tool > Mill Tool with Cutter Body
feature in the menu that displays.
The Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition window should now be displayed in the
center of the Tool Manager window.
2. In the General Insert section at the top of the Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition
window, select the desired insert type from the pull-down list. After selecting the insert
type, the lower part of the General Insert Section will update to display the features
appropriate for defining the chosen insert type. (Ref. General Insert Features for additional
information)
3. Enter the supporting data to describe the insert. Press the Enter key after adding a
4. If desired, choose a Color for the insert. Components in a tool assembly have the option to
“Inherit”, or override, the Tool component’s defined color.
holder is an “alternate” or “secondary” holder. (Ref. Create and Use Tools with Alternate
6. Use the features in the Cutter Body section of Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition
window to define the the characteristics of the cutter body (Ref. Cutter Body Features for
additional information). Press the Enter key after adding a parameter to see the affect it has
on the insert.
987
VERICUT Help
7. Highlight the tool in the Tool List Area that you want the new tool added after.
8. In the Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition window, select Add to add the new tool to
the Tool list Area and display the tool in Tool Manager’s Tool Display Area.
If the added component is larger than the display area, right-click in the Tool Display Area
and select Fit in the menu that displays to see the entire tool holder.
Select Close in the Mill Tool with Cutter Body Tool Definition window at any time to close the
window without adding a tool.
988
VERICUT Help
Define a Hole Making Cutter

1. If you just created a Hole Making Tool tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify
Tool Related Information section above, click on the cutter component in the Tool List Area
so that it becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be
displayed in the center of the Tool Manager window.
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the appropriate shape/type icon for the the hole making
cutter that you are defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of the
kind of cutter that the icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will
update to display the features appropriate for defining the chosen cutter shape. (Ref. Tool
Component tab (Hole Making Tool) for additional information)
4. Enter the supporting data to describe the Cutter. Press the Enter key after adding a
6. Specify the Spindle Direction. Choose either CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter clockwise.
8. Toggle OK to Mill on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or not to override
the default check for axial cuts enabling you to machine with a Hole Making Tool other than
along the tool axis. For example, using a drill to create a chamfer.
rotate the cutter to the correct position in the tool assembly. You can also use the features
on the Assemble tab to position the cutter by assembling (mating or aligning) it with other
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing hole making tool components.
989
VERICUT Help
Define an Insert for a Turn Tool
1. If you just created a turn tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related
Information section above, click on the insert component in the Tool List Area so that it
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the appropriate insert type icon for the insert you are
defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of the kind of insert that the
icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will update to display the
features appropriate for defining the chosen insert type. (Ref. Tool Component tab (Turn
Insert) for additional information).
4. Enter the supporting data to describe the insert. Press the Enter key after adding a
holder is an "alternate" or "secondary" holder. (Ref. Create and Use Tools with Alternate
7. Toggle OK to Mill on (checked) or off (not checked) to specify whether or not to override
the default check for axial cuts enabling you to machine with a Turn Tool other than along
the tool axis.
rotate the insert to the correct position in the tool assembly. You can also use the features
on the Assemble tab to position the insert by assembling (mating or aligning) it with other
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing turn insert components.
990
VERICUT Help
Define a Probe Tip
1. If you just created a probe tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool
Related Information section above, click on the probe component in the Tool List Area so
that it becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the appropriate probe shape/type icon for the probe
component that you are defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of
the kind of probe that the icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab
will update to display the features appropriate for defining the chosen probe shape/type.
(Ref. Tool Component tab (Probe Tip) for additional information)
4. Enter supporting data to describe the probe. Press the Enter key after adding a parameter
to see the affect it has on the insert.
5. Specify the Maximum RPM value.
6. If desired, choose a Tip Color for the probe. Components in a tool assembly have the option
to "Inherit", or override, the Tool component's defined color.
7. Choose a Stem Color for the probe.
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing revolved cutter components.
991
VERICUT Help
Define a Water Jet Cutter
1. If you just created a Water Jet tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool
Related Information section above, click on the Water Jet component in the Tool List Area
so that it becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the type icon for the water Jet cutter that you are
defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of the kind of cutter that the
icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will update to display the
features appropriate for defining the chosen cutter shape. (Ref. Tool Component tab (Water
Jet) for additional information)
4. Enter the supporting data to describe the Cutter. Press the Enter key after adding a
parameter to see the affect it has on the water jet cutter.
NOTE: The above steps can also be used to modify existing water jet cutter components.
992
VERICUT Help
Define a Knife Cutter

1. If you just created a Knife tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool Related
Information section above, click on the Knife component in the Tool List Area so that it
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the type icon for the knife cutter that you are defining.
Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of the kind of cutter that the icon
represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will update to display the
features appropriate for defining the chosen cutter type. (Ref. Tool Component tab (Knife)
for additional information)
4. Enter the supporting data to describe the knife component. Press the Enter key after adding
a parameter to see the affect it has on the knife cutter.
8. Toggle One-sided Knife on (checked) or off (not checked) depending on whether or not the
knife component you are defining is a one-sided knife.
993
VERICUT Help
Define a Polisher Tool

A Polisher tool is composed of two components. The Polish Limits component is the "inner"
component of the Polisher tool and is used to detect areas where the tool applied too much
pressure on the part (penetrates the part too deep). A negative near-miss value could be used
instead of a Polish Limits component but using a Polish Limits component might be preferable
because the allowable deflection can vary with the tool contact point. The method of using a
Polish Limits component and a Polisher component is described below.
1. If you just created a Polisher tool assembly as described in the Add a Tool, Specify Tool
Related Information section above, click on the Polisher component in the Tool List Area so
that it becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window should now be
3. On the Tool Component tab, select the shape/type icon for the polisher that you are
defining. Placing the cursor over an icon displays a description of the kind of polisher that
the icon represents. After selecting the icon the lower part of the tab will update to display
the features appropriate for defining the chosen polisher type. (Ref. Tool Component tab
(Polisher) for additional information)
4. Enter the supporting data to describe the knife component. Press the Enter key after adding
a parameter to see the affect it has on the polisher.
6. Toggle Polish Limits on (checked) or off (not checked) to indicate whether or not the
polisher component is of the polish limits type.
994
VERICUT Help
Specify Other Tool Properties

All of the following procedures apply to the tool record that is currently highlighted in the Tool
Manager, Tool List Area and the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab has been automatically
displayed in the center of the Tool Manager window enabling you to specify a variety of tool
information.
To enter a gage offset for a tool used in a G-Code NC program simulation —

In the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab, click in the Gage Point field so that it becomes
highlighted, and then enter data in the field, or use Tool Manager's Tool Display Area to select a
position on the tool assembly to supply the gage offset values. Note that selecting gage offset
points with the left mouse button supplies 3-dimensional offset data, however, milling tool
gage offsets typically should only have a "Z" value, for example: 0 0 6.5. Selecting the gage
offset point with the center mouse button will only update the "Z" value.
Use the Orient feature in Tool Manager’s Tool Bar to display the View Orient window (ref. View
Orient window, also in the Tool Manager section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, and use its features to re-orient
the tool assembly in the Tool Display Area as needed to select the gage offset point.
To orient the tool in a direction other than defined —

In the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab, click in the Orientation field so that it becomes
highlighted, then enter X, Y, and Z rotation angle values (separated by spaces) to orient the tool
assembly relative to the tool origin. Angle values are in degrees, relative to the tool origin.
Rotation occurs about the tool's gage point.
To move the tool control point (driven point) —
1. In the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab, click on the Driven Point icon to add a
driven point record to the Driven Point table.
2. VERICUT adds a default ID but you can change it by clicking in the ID field of the driven point
record and enter another ID for the driven point record. Click in the Value field of the driven
point record and enter the coordinates of the driven point, or use Tool Manager's Tool
Display Area to select a position on the tool assembly to supply the driven point values.
Use the Orient feature in Tool Manager’s Tool Bar to display the View Orient window (ref.
View Orient window, also in the Tool Manager section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
995
VERICUT Help
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, and use its features to re-
orient the tool assembly in the Tool Display Area as needed to select the gage offset point.
NOTE: You can remove a driven point record from the Driven Point table by clicking on the
record so that it becomes highlighted and then click on the icon to remove the record.
To copy an existing OptiPath record —

See Copy an existing OptiPath Record, in the Using the OptiPath window section, also in the
Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
To create a new OptiPath record —

See Add a New OptiPath Record to a Tool in the Tool Library, in the Using the OptiPath window
section, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
To add a cutter compensation value —
1. In the Tool Manager, Tool Information tab, click on the Cutter Compensation icon to
add a cutter compensation point record to the Cutter Compensation table.
2. VERICUT adds a default ID but you can change it by clicking in the ID field of the cutter
compensation record and enter another ID for the driven point record. Click in the Value
field of the cutter compensation record and enter the cutter compensation value
NOTE: You can remove a cutter compensation record from the Cutter Compensation table by
clicking on the record so that it becomes highlighted and then click on the icon to remove
the record.
See Tool Manager, Tool List Area, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
996
VERICUT Help
Create and Use Tools with Alternate Cutters
The “Alternate” cutter feature enables you to switch between a "primary" and "alternate"
cutter shape, in order to support tools such as back-boring tools that have a mechanism that
extends, and retracts, the cutter using some kind of trigger mechanism.
The following assumes the Tool Manager window is already open and that a new, or existing,
tool library has been selected to add the new tool assembly to. If necessary, refer to the
following topics above:
Create a New Tool Library
The following procedures describe how to create and use these types of tools.
Create the tool assembly

1. Add a Tool assembly and specify tool related information. (ref. Add a Tool, Specify Tool
Related Information, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
2. Define the Tool Holder (ref. Define a Tool Holder, also in the Project Tree section of
Help).
3. Add additional Holder components as necessary (ref. Add Additional Tool Holder
Components, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
4. Define the “primary” cutter (ref. Define a Cutter Component, also in the Project Tree
Simulation Help).
5. Highlight the “primary” cutter in the Tool List Area and then right click in the Tool List Area
and select Add Tool Component > Add Cutter from the the pull-down menu that displays to
add the "alternate" cutter to the tool assembly.
6. Define the “alternate” cutter. Make sure that the Alternate feature is toggled "on"
(checked) on the Tool Definition window, Tool Component Tab (ref. Tool Component tab,
also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
997
VERICUT Help
7. Save the tool library.

If necessary refer to Adding a Tool to a Tool Library also in the Project Tree section of
See the tool assemblies in the examples that follow.
Using the "alternate" cutter tool assembly

1. In the Word Format window, define the word that will be used to designate whether to
display the "primary" cutter or the "alternate" cutter.
If necessary see Word Format window, and Using the Word Format window, in the
Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
2. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, specify the Word/Range that represents the
display of the "primary" cutter. The Word/Range should call the AlternateTool macro with
an Override Value of "0".
Refer to the following as necessary:
Add/Modify Word/Address window in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help,
Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Groups, in the Using the G-Code Processing
window section, in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library.
3. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, create the Word/Range that represents the
display of the "alternate" cutter. The Word/Range should call the AlternateTool macro with
an Override Value of "1".
4. In the NC program, call the Word/Range values specified above at the appropriate times to
tell VERICUT whether to display the "primary" cutter, or the "alternate cutter.
See the examples that follow for additional information.
998
VERICUT Help
Example 1: Back boring with manual tool load/unload

The following example shows how to use the "alternate" cutter feature when manually loading,
and unloading, a back boring tool.
The following is the tool record in Tool Manager for a tool assembly that uses an "alternate"
cutter. The "primary" and "alternate" cutter displays are also shown.
Tool 11: Cutter1 (primary cutter) Tool 11: Cutter11 ("alternate" cutter)
The following shows the Word Format window entry for the word "M" that is used to specify
whether to display the "primary or "alternate" cutter.
999
VERICUT Help
The following shows the G-Code Processing window configuration used for the example NC
program that follows. M401 is used to display the "primary" cutter and M301 is used to display
the "alternate" cutter.
1000
VERICUT Help
The following NC program shows how M401 and M301 are used to change between the
"primary" cutter display and the "alternate" cutter display.
1001
VERICUT Help
Example 2: Back boring using spindle direction to extent/retract the cutter

A common mechanism is to use the spindle direction to extend and retract the cutter. When
the spindle is running in the CW (M03) direction the cutter is extended for cutting. When
running in the CCW (M04) direction the cutter is retracted.
The following example shows how to use the "alternate" cutter feature when using spindle
direction to extend and retract the cutter.
The following is the tool record in Tool Manager for a tool assembly that uses an "alternate"
cutter. The "primary" and "alternate" cutter displays are also shown.
Tool 14: Insert1 - retracted Tool 14: Insert11 - extended

(primary cutter) ("alternate" cutter)
The following shows the Word Format window entry for the word "M" that is used to specify
whether to display the "primary or "alternate" cutter.
1002
VERICUT Help
The following shows the G-Code Processing window configuration used for the example NC
program that follows. M4 is used to display the "primary" cutter and M3 is used to display the
"alternate" cutter.
1003
VERICUT Help
The following NC program shows how M4 and M3 are used to change between the "primary"
cutter display and the "alternate" cutter display.
1004
VERICUT Help
Import CAD Tool Component Models Using the CAD Geometry

window
Use the procedure described below to read, extract, identify, and import tool insert and holder
solid models from a CAD system into VERICUT's Tool Manager. Currently, only STEP and CATIA
V5 files are supported.
The following assumes the Tool Manager window is already open and that a new, or existing,
tool library has been selected to add the new tool assembly, or tool component to. If necessary,
refer to the following topics above:
Create a New Tool Library
1. In the Tool Manager window, select the tool ID (in the Tool List Area) that the new tool is to
be added after, or the existing tool that the imported tool component(s) are to be added to,
so that it becomes highlighted.
2. In the Tool Manager Tool Bar, click on the in the (Add New Tool after Current
Tool) icon and select CAD Tool from the list to display the Import CAD Tool window.
3. Use the features in the CAD Geometry window to import a tool component(s) or tool
assembly.
4. In the CAD Geometry window, enter the \path\filename of the file containing the CAD
model data in the CAD File text field, or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Select
CAD File file selection window and use it to specify the \path\filename of the file containing
the CAD model data.
5. In the CAD Geometry window, specify the Tool Type of the component(s) that you are
importing. Choose either Mill or Turn.
6. Specify the Units that you want the tool components imported in. Choose either Inch or
Millimeter.
7. Specify the Normals (surface normals) direction that you want use for the tool components
imported in. Choose either Inward or Outward.
1005
VERICUT Help
8. Press the Load button to read the specified CAD File, identify and extract all solid bodies
and then populate the table. VERICUT also displays all solid bodies found in the CAD model
file in Tool Manager Tool Display area.
9. When the Load process finishes, the solid bodies found in the CAD model file should be
listed in the CAD Geometry window, Component Table and displayed graphically in the Tool
Manager, Tool Display Area.
10. Click on the first record in the Component Table so that it becomes highlighted. A box will
be drawn around the component in the Tool Manager, Tool display area. Use the Blank
toggle for the record in the Component Table to turn on/off the graphic display in the Tool
Display area to help determine what is, and is not, represented by the tool component
record.
11. Once you have determined what the component is, click in the Type field of the component
record and select the appropriate Type from the pull-down list. Select None, Insert, Holder,
or Revolved. None means that the solid body is not a tool component and will be ignored
by VERICUT.
12. If you identified the solid body as a Holder, or None, go on to Step 13.
If you identified the solid body as an Insert, the Select Cutting Face icon will become
activated. Click on the Select Cutting Face icon so that it becomes highlighted, and then
in the Tool Display Area select the loop (or edge) representing the cutting face of the insert
represented by the component record.
If you identified the solid body as Revolved, the Select Revolved Axis icon will become
activated. Click on the Select Revolved Axis icon to display a coordinate system on the
tool in the Tool Display Area enabling you to specify the revolved cutter's axis of revolution.
Click on the axis of the coordinate system displayed on the tool that represents the revolved
axis.
13. Repeat Steps 9 through 11 for each of the records in the Component Table.
14. When you have finished identifying the components in the Component Table, use the
Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool feature to specify whether to save the tool
components in the imported CAD format (un-checked), or saved as a VERICUT Polygon file
(checked).
15. Continue with one of the following actions:
 Press the Add New Tool button and VERICUT will create a new tool in Tool Manager
after the tool that you selected in Step 1. All of the components of Type: Insert and/or
Holder will be added to the new tool.
 Press the Append To Tool button and VERICUT will add all components of Type: Insert
and/or Holder to the existing tool that you selected in Step 1.
1006
VERICUT Help
16. Use the Close button at any time to stop the process and close the CAD Geometry window.
Examples:
Example 1 – Create a revolved profile cutter

1. Pick a CAD file.
2. Press Load.
3. In the component table, pick the element and change its type to Revolved.
4. Pick Select Revolved Axis and select an axis vector in the Tool Manager Tool Display
graphic. Tool Manager will create a revolved profile through the axis plane you picked.
5. Press Add New Tool or Append to Tool. A SOR profile cutter is created in Tool Manager.
If you open the Add/Modify window for that cutter, it is shown as a Revolved Cutter
(SOR). There is no reference to the original CAD geometry, regardless of whether the
Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool checkbox, in the Import CAD tool window,
is selected or not.
Example 2 – Create a revolved polygon cutter

1. Pick a CAD file.
2. Press Load.
3. In the component table, pick the element and change its type to Revolved.
4. Do not pick Select Revolved Axis.
5. Press Add New Tool or Append to Tool directly. Tool Manager will create a revolved
polygon cutter using the triangles from the CAD geometry. In the Tool Manager
Add/Modify window, the cutter is shown as a Revolved Cutter (Model file).
6. If you have the Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool checkbox toggled “on”
(checked) before the cutter is created, the referenced model file is the VERICUT polygon
file that is created from the CAD geometry.
7. Otherwise the reference model file is the CAD file itself. This is essentially the same as if
you add a tool from Tool Manager, Add Tool Component > Revolved Cutter > Model file
> select CAD file, except that the latter will import the whole assembly from the file.
1007
VERICUT Help
Example 3 – Create a CAD insert cutter

1. Pick a CAD file.
2. Press Load.
3. In the component table, pick the element and change its type to Insert.
4. Pick faces via Select Cutting Face.
5. Press Add New Tool or Append to Tool. A CAD insert is created in Tool Manager. If you
open the Add/Modify window for that cutter, it is shown as an Insert Cutter (CAD). If
you have the Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool checkbox toggled “on”
(checked), in the Import CAD tool window, the description column in Tool Manager will
show reference to the VERICUT polygon file created. Otherwise the description has the
reference to the original CAD file.
Example 4 - Create a polygon insert cutter

1. Pick a CAD file.
2. Press Load.
3. In the component table, pick the element and change its type to Insert.
4. Do not pick Select Cutting Face and press Add New Tool or Append to Tool directly.
Tool Manager will create a polygon insert using the triangles from the CAD geometry. In
Tool Manager Add/Modify window, the cutter is shown as an Insert Cutter (Model file).
5. If you have the Remove reference to CAD file in saved tool checkbox toggled “on”
(checked) before the cutter is created, the referenced model file is the VERICUT polygon
file that is created from the CAD geometry;
6. Otherwise, the reference model file is the CAD file itself. This is essentially the same as
you add a tool from Tool Manager, Add Tool Component > Insert Cutter > Model file >
select CAD file, except that the latter will import the whole assembly from the file.
See Import CAD Tool window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1008
VERICUT Help
Creating Coordinate Systems for Use in Tool Manager

The following procedure assumes that the Tool Manager window has already been opened
using one of the methods described above in the Accessing the Tool Manager section.
Add a New Coordinate System:
1. Right-click in the Coordinate Systems List Area and select Add New CSYS from the menu
that displays. A new coordinate system will be added to the Coordinate Systems List Area
of the Tool Manager, and the Configure Coordinate System window will display in the
center of the Tool Manager window enabling you to define the coordinate system.
2. Right-click on the default coordinate system name and select Rename in the menu that
displays to rename the coordinate system.
3. Use the features on the Configure Coordinate System window’s tabs to position and orient
the newly created coordinate system.
4. Select Add New CSYS in the Configure Coordinate System menu to add addition coordinate
systems.
Any changes made on any of the Configure Coordinate System window’s tabs are applied to
the coordinate system that is highlighted in the Tool Manager Coordinate Systems List Area.
You can also use the Configure Coordinate System window to modify existing coordinate
systems.
See Coordinate Systems List Area, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
Add a New Coordinate System From a File:
1. Right-click in the Coordinate Systems List Area and select CSYS from File from the menu
that displays.
A file selection window will display enabling you to specify the CSYS file to be used.
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about the file’s format.
2. Once you select the CSYS file and press OK in the file selection box, a new coordinate
system is added to the Coordinate Systems List Area of Tool Manager, and the Configure
Coordinate System window will display in the center of the Tool Manager window enabling
you to modify the coordinate system or create additional coordinate systems.
1009
VERICUT Help
3. Right-click on the coordinate system name and select Rename in the menu that displays to
rename the coordinate system.
Any changes made on any of the Configure Coordinate System window’s tabs are applied to
the coordinate system that is highlighted in the Tool Manager Coordinate Systems List Area.
You can also use the Configure Coordinate System window to modify existing coordinate
systems.
See, Coordinate Systems List Area also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1010
VERICUT Help
Modifying, Copying, or Deleting a Tool in the Library
Use the procedures below to modify, copy, or delete tools in a Tool Library file. All tasks assume
that the Tool Manager window is already open and that an existing tool library has been
opened. If necessary, refer to the following topics above:

Tips:
Right mouse button shortcut menus:
1. Features used to manipulate tools are displayed in a shortcut menu when a tool record
is selected (highlighted) and the right mouse button is clicked in the Tool List Area.
2. Similarly, features used to manipulate tool components are displayed when a tool
component is selected (highlighted) and the right mouse button is clicked In the Tool
List Area.
Use Cut, Copy and Paste in the right mouse button shortcut menu described above to use
previously defined tool components in another assembly.
1011
VERICUT Help
Modify an Existing Tool Component in the Library:
1. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, ensure the tool table shows the cutter, insert and holder
components for the tool assembly. If you cannot see them, double-click the tool ID, or click
on the "+" sign to expand the tool assembly in the table. You can also right-click in the Tool
List Area and select Expand All in the menu that displays to expand all of the tool
assemblies at one time.
2. In the Tool List Area, select the cutter, insert or holder that you want to modify so that it
becomes highlighted. The appropriate Tool Definition window will display in the center of
the Tool Manager window.
3. Edit the data in the table as required.
See Tool Definition window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1012
VERICUT Help
Copy an Existing Tool Assembly in the Same Library:
1. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, select the tool ID of the tool assembly that you want to
copy so that it becomes highlighted.
2. Right-click on the tool and select Copy from the menu that displays.
3. Right-click the tool ID of the tool assembly that you want to paste the copied tool assembly
after and then select Paste from the menu that displays.
4. A copy of the tool assembly is added to the Tool List Area after the highlighted Tool and
Tool Manager assigns a default tool ID number.
Right-click on the Tool and select Rename from the menu that displays.
5. Enter a unique tool ID. It is recommended that you also supply a unique Description in the
Tool Manager, Tool Information tab for the new tool assembly to distinguish it from the
copied tool assembly.
6. Modify the tool components in the tool assembly as required. (See "To modify an existing
tool component in the library" described above)
NOTE: You can also use the procedure described above to copy individual tool components
(cutter, insert, or holder) from one tool assembly to another within the same tool library.
1013
VERICUT Help
Delete an Existing Tool/Tool Component from the Library:

1. In Tool Manager’s Tool List Area, right-click on the tool assembly or tool component that is
to be deleted and select Delete from the menu that displays.
2. The tool assembly, or tool component, is deleted. If you deleted a tool assembly, or tool
component by mistake, click on the (Undo) icon above the Tool List Area.
See Tool Manager window and Tool Definition window also in the Project Tree section of
1014
VERICUT Help
NC Programs Branch
Double clicking on an NC Programs branch in the Project Tree panel will display the NC
Programs file selection window enabling you to add one, or more, NC programs to the setup.
Right-click on an NC Programs branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Active — When toggled “on” (checked), all NC program files in the NC Programs branch are
designated “active”. When toggled “off”, all NC program files in the NC Programs branch are
designated as “inactive”. Only NC program files designated as “active” are processed by
VERICUT. "Inactive" NC program files are indicated by red text in the Project Tree panel.
Add NC Program Files — Displays the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
one, or more, NC programs to the setup.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer to the highlighted NC Program branch in the
Project Tree.
Delete All — Deletes all NC Programs from the NC Program branch.
Expand All Children — Expands the NC Programs branch so that all of the NC Program files are
shown.
Collapse All Children — Collapses the NC Programs branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure NC Programs Branch menu displays at the
1015
VERICUT Help
NC Program File
Right-click on an NC Program file highlighted in the Project Tree to display the following menu:
Active — When toggled “on” (checked), the highlighted NC program file is designated as
“active”. When toggled “off”, the highlighted NC program file is designated as “inactive”. Only
NC program files designated as “active” are processed by VERICUT. "Inactive" NC program files
are indicated by red text in the Project Tree panel.
Assign CSYS — Use to assign a coordinate system (CSYS) to the highlighted NC program file.
Select the desired CSYS from the pull-down list. VERICUT will append the selected CSYS to the
NC program file in the Project Tree as shown in the picture following picture.
Curve Fit — Use to access the NC Program Curve Fitting Control window enabling you to set
curve fit parameters and start the curve fit process for the highlighted NC program file.
Edit — Opens the highlighted NC program in the NC Program Editor window.
Replace — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you select one, or more NC
programs to replace the NC program highlighted in the Project Tree.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted NC Program file from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste
buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted NC Program file from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Replaces the highlighted NC Program file, with the NC Program file contained in the
paste buffer.
1016
VERICUT Help
Delete — Deletes the highlighted NC Program file from the Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on an NC Program file in the Project Tree panel will open the NC
program in the NC Program Editor window.
Right-click with multiple NC Program files highlighted in the Project Tree to display the
following menu:
To use the above features for multiple NC program files at the same time, select the desired NC
program files using one of the following methods:
Select multiple files in sequence — Click first file name in the sequence, then press and hold
the <Shift> key while clicking the last file name
Select additional or non-sequential files — Press and hold the <Control> key while selecting
each additional file.
With either method, selecting a file name a second time while holding down the <Control> key
unselects the file.
Each of the features in the above menu behave exactly as described for a single highlighted NC
program file except that the selected feature is applied to all of the highlighted NC program
files.
Active — makes all of the highlighted NC programs active/inactive.
Add NC Program Files — Displays the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
one, or more, NC program files to the setup.
Assign CSYS — assigns the selected coordinate system to all of the highlighted NC programs.
Curve Fit — starts the curve fit process for all of the highlighted NC program files.
1017
VERICUT Help
programs to replace the NC programs highlighted in the Project Tree.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted NC Program files from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste
buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted NC Program files from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Replaces the highlighted NC Program files, with the NC Program files contained in the
paste buffer.
Delete — deletes all of the highlighted NC program files.
1018
VERICUT Help
NC Program Curve Fitting Control window
Accessed from the Project Tree right mouse button shortcut menu when one or more NC
program files are highlighted, the features on this window are targeted at 3-axis G-Code NC
programs containing long sequences of relatively short cutting motions. VERICUT detects
sequences of planar motion and fits arcs (or NURBS) whenever the motion can conform to a
specified tolerance. Arcs are only replaced along the machine's major axes (XY, YZ and XZ). The
resulting NC program files may be smaller, produce an improved surface finish, and process
faster in VERICUT than the original NC program file.
Curve fitting makes a single pass through the G-Code NC program(s) and writes new NC
program file(s) containing the modified motions. The original NC program files are not changed.
Curve fitting may be selectively applied to NC programs by checking the curve fit box in the NC
Program list.
The "Curve Fit" button brings up the NC Program Curve Fitting Control window enabling
parameters to be set and the curve fitting process to be executed.
1019
VERICUT Help
Arc Fitting — Select this feature to fit arcs during Curve Fit processing. Selecting this feature
also activates the Arc Fit Parameters described below.
NURBS Fitting — Select this feature to fit NURBS during Curve Fit processing. Selecting this
feature also activates the NURBS Fit Parameters described below. NURBS Curve Fitting is
supported for the Fanuc G6.2 (Generic control), the Siemens (BSPLINE format), and the Toshiba
G6 machine controls.
Output NC Program — Use to specify the name of the new G-Code NC program file to receive
the results of the curve fitting process. Enter the /path/filename of file in the Output NC
1020
VERICUT Help
Program text field or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Output NC Program file
selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename.
The Output NC Program file name must be different from that of the original NC program file
name. Curve Fitting will not permit the original NC program file to be overwritten. When curve
fitting multiple NC program files, a modified NC program file is output for each NC program file
processed. Each output file has an ascending sequence number appended to the end of the
base file name. For example: assume Output NC Program ="path.mcd" is entered (without the
quotes). Curve Fit processing of 2 NC programs outputs the following files:
path001.mcd => modified NC program from NC program 1

path002.mcd => modified NC program from NC program 2
If a dot "." is the last character of the output NC program file name, then three digits are
appended to the file name as the extension. Continuing with the above example: assume
Output NC Program ="path." is entered. Curve Fit processing of the same 2 NC programs
outputs the following files:
part.001 => modified NC program from NC program 1

part.002 => modified NC program from NC program 2
If an asterisk "*" is used in the output NC program file name, the original NC program file name
is used as the output file name in place of the asterisk. If characters follow the asterisk, the
input NC program file name extension is replaced with the characters following the asterisk.
1021
VERICUT Help
Examples follow:
Original NC program file: Output NC Program file name: Output file name:
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/* dir2/filename.mcd
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/*.filter dir2/filename.filter
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/*cf dir2/filenamecf
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/*cf.mcd dir2/filenamecf.mcd
filename.mcd *.cf filename.cf
Only a single asterisk is acted on in the optimized NC program file name, with one exception:
asterisk dot asterisk ("*.*"). This case behaves exactly like the single asterisk file name
described above. This is NOT a regular expression replacement; therefore any characters before
the asterisk are ignored and lost. When there is more than one asterisk, only the first one is
replaced
Examples follow:
Original NC program file: Optimized NC Program file Output file name:

name:
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/*.* dir2/filename.mcd
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/cf* dir2/filename.mcd
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/cf*.ext dir2/filename.ext
dir1/filename.mcd dir2/*cf.* dir2/filenamecf.*
Arc Plane Selection:
Select one, or more, of the following major planes where you want to fit arcs during Curve Fit
processing.
XY Plane — When toggled "on" (checked), arc fitting will take place in the XY plane.
YZ Plane — When toggled "on" (checked), arc fitting will take place in the YZ plane.
XZ Plane — When toggled "on" (checked), arc fitting will take place in the XZ plane.
1022
VERICUT Help
Arc Fit Parameters:

The following options are only active when Arc Fitting has been selected above.
Fit Tolerance — Maximum deviation allowed for the fitted arc from the NC program points
being fitted. All points replaced by a circular motion must be within this distance from the arc.
In addition, the midpoint of all motion segments being replaced must be within this distance
from the arc.
Planar Tolerance — Maximum deviation from the plane formed by the motions being tested.
Points within this tolerance are adjusted to the plane defined by the sequence.
Minimum number of arc points — Lower limit on the number of points required to define an
arc.
Smallest Arc Radius — Lower limit on radius of arcs created. Smaller arcs will remain a
sequence of points.
Largest Arc Radius — Upper limit on radius of arcs created. Larger arcs will remain a sequence
of points.
NURBS Fit Parameters:

The following options are only active when NURBS Fitting has been selected above.
NURBS Tolerance — Maximum amount that the NURBS interpolated curve can deviate from
the from the linear cut segments being replaced.
Minimum number of NURBS points — Minimum number of linear cut segments required
before a NURBS curve fit is attempted.
NURBS Order (3or4) — Use to specify the "order of the NURBS. Select 3 or 4 depending on
what "order of NURBS" is supported by the machine controller.
Accel/Decel — This feature applies Accel/Decel settings from the NC machine configuration to
adjust optimized feed rates. VERICUT looks ahead in the NC program file and slows the machine
prior to direction changes, as well as changes feed rates based on the machine axes ability to
accelerate and decelerate. For more information on the individual options, see Accel/Decel
options on the OptiPath window.
Remove Collinear Points — When toggled "On", this feature eliminates collinear points during
Curve Fit processing.
G-Code Output Options — Displays the General and OptiPath & Curve Fit tabs of the Control
Settings window.
1023
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. If you happen leave the 12 tab Configuration menu > Control Settings window open and it
gets hidden behind other windows then use G-Code Output Options you may see all 12
tabs instead of just 2 tabs. This is because it is the same window, displayed differently
depending on where it is called from.
2. When you use F1 Help on the 2 tab G-Code Output Options window, the documentation for
the 12 tab Configuration menu > Control Settings window will display. The information for
the General and OptiPath & Curve fit tabs is the same for both cases.
OK — Updates the settings saved with the job and dismisses the NC Program Curve Fitting
Control window.
Process — Updates the parameters and processes the files selected for curve fitting. Processing
multiple NC programs may require running the Curve Fit process more than once if the NC
programs require different Curve Fit tolerances. For example, one pass might be used for
roughing NC programs and use a larger tolerance. A second pass would then be used for finish
NC programs using a smaller tolerance.
NOTE: When using Curve Fit, you must take into account the tolerances used by the CAM
system to create the original NC program(s). Using large Curve Fit tolerances may cause the tool
to deviate an unacceptable amount from the intended surface.
Upon completion of processing, the curve fit results are displayed in the following message:
Number of arcs created = xxx
Number of moves replaced = yyy
Blocks read = nnn
Blocks output = zzz
Do you wish to use the new file(s) as the active NC program file(s)?
A "Yes" answer will replace the list of NC programs for the current job with the modified NC
program files produced by Curve Fit. A "No" answer will not replace the NC programs in the list.
Cancel — Dismisses the NC program Curve Fitting Control window without executing Curve
Fitting or saving Curve Fit parameters.
Curve Fitting with a Tool List

When Tool Change By is set to List, the Use Tool List button is becomes active. The Tool Change
List window will contain a Curve Fit column of check boxes. One or more of these boxes must
be checked for the appropriate curve fitting to be processed. If the Curve Fit column is hidden,
adjust the width of the visible columns.
1024
VERICUT Help
Arc Quadrant Output

Some machines require that circular blocks do not cross quadrant boundaries. To output this
type of circular blocks, the macro CircleCurveFitQuadrants should be used as a Start of
Processing Event macro. The default allows blocks to cross quadrant boundaries.
1025
VERICUT Help
NC Program CSYS
Right-click on a coordinate system (CSYS) assigned to an NC program file in the Project Tree to
display the following menu:
Delete — Deletes the highlighted CSYS from the Project Tree.
1026
VERICUT Help
NC Program Editor
Locations:
Project Tree >NC Programs Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Edit
Edit menu > NC Program
Toolbar short cut:
Selecting Edit menu > NC Program displays a list of all NC programs and subroutines in the
project file. Choosing one of the NC program files/subroutines opens a text editor window with
the selected NC program file/subroutine file loaded and ready for editing. Standard text editing
features are provided, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc.
1027
VERICUT Help
WARNING: Editing the NC program file can cause undesirable results, especially when edits
are made to portions of the NC program which have already been processed by VERICUT. These
edits can cause the NC program record number pointer to be out of sync with the edited NC
program file. In these cases it is recommended that you rewind the NC program file after
editing, and restart the simulation with the last unedited record prior to the first
addition/deletion.
Menu Bar:
The menu bar located at the top of the window provides easy access to major functions. Each
menu contains groups of related functions. Left-click on any menu name in the menu bar to
display the list of functions that are available in that menu. Click on the function in the menu
you want to use. The name of the current file is also displayed in this area.
File:
Open — Open a file.

Save — Save the current file.
Save As — Save the current file under a different name.
Exit — Close the window.
Edit:
1028
VERICUT Help
Cut — Cuts the highlighted text in the file listing and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted text in the file listing to the paste buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer at the location of the cursor in the file listing.
Restore — Restores the NC program to its un-edited state.
Icon Bar:
Open File — Opens a file selection window enabling you to select another file.
Save File — Save the current file.

search for.
1029
VERICUT Help
Undo Highlighted Changes — Restores the highlighted changes to the original state.
Close— Closes the NC Program Editor window.
Shortcut: Right-click in the NC Program Edit window to display the following menu:
Cut, Copy, Paste and Restore provide the same functionality as those available under Edit in
the menu bar.
TIP: The NC Program Editor also supports Windows-like shortcuts for the up/down/left/right
arrows, Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys with optional Control key and/or Shift key
modifiers. The following describes the behavior for each action.
No modifier key:
Up arrow key — moves the cursor to the previous line.

Down arrow key — moves the cursor to the next line.
Left arrow key — moves the cursor left 1 character. The cursor wraps to the previous line if the
cursor is at the beginning of the current line.
Right arrow key— moves the cursor right 1 character. The cursor wraps to next line if the
cursor is at the end of the current line.
Home key — moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
End key — moves the cursor to the end of the current line.
Page Up key — moves the cursor up about a window's worth of text.
Page Down key — moves the cursor down about a window's worth of text.
1030
VERICUT Help
Shift key:
Holding down the Shift key while using any of the above keys produces the same behavior
described above for no modifier key except that it highlights the text from the previous cursor
position (or start of highlighting) to the current cursor position.
Control key:
Holding down the Control (Ctrl) key while using any of the keys below produces the behavior
described.
Up arrow key — if not at the beginning of the current line, acts like home key. Else, works like
up
Down arrow key — equivalent to pressing down and then home
Left arrow key — jumps to the start of the previous word on the current line or to the end of
the previous line if at the beginning of the current line
Right arrow key — jumps to the start of next word on the current line or the beginning of the
next line if at the end of the current line
Home key — jumps to the first character of the first line of the document
End key — jumps to the last character of the last line of the document
Page Up key — jump to the first character of the first line in the current window
Page Down key — jump to the last character of the last line in the current window
Control + Shift keys:

Holding down both the Control (Ctrl) key and the Shift key while using any of the above keys
produces the same behavior described above for Control key except that it highlights the text
from the previous cursor position (or start of highlighting) to the current cursor position.
1031
VERICUT Help
Editing an NC Program File
VERICUT provides a fast and easy way to edit your NC program files. All standard text editing
features are supported, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc.
To edit an NC program file in the current Project file:
The procedure described below assumes you have already specified the NC program file(s) for
VERICUT to process.
(Ref. Configure NC Programs Branch menu also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help).
1. Use one of the following methods to display the desired NC program file in the NC Program
editor:
 The easiest and fastest way is to double click on the NC program file in the Project Tree.
 You can also right-click on the NC program file in the Project Tree and select Edit from
the menu that displays.
 You can also click on the NC program file in the Project Tree so that it becomes
highlighted and then click on the (Edit NC Program) icon on the Toolbar.
 Finally, you can select Edit menu > NC Program in the VERICUT main menu bar and
select the desired NC program from the pull-down list.
Edit the file as desired.
When finished editing the file, select File menu > Save in the NC program editor window menu
bar to save the changes in the existing NC program file or select File menu > Save As in the NC
program editor window menu bar to display the Save As file selection window and use it to
specify the /path/filename of a new NC program file where you want the modified NC program
file saved.
Select File menu > Exit in the NC program editor window menu bar, or click on the (Close)
icon in the NC program editor window toolbar to close the NC program editor window.
See NC Program Editor, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
WARNING: Editing the NC program file can cause undesirable results, especially when edits
are made to portions of the NC program which have already been processed by VERICUT. These
1032
VERICUT Help
edits can cause the NC program record number pointer to be out of sync with the edited NC
program file. In these cases it is recommended to rewind the NC program file after editing, and
restart the simulation with the last unedited record prior to the first addition/deletion.
1033
VERICUT Help
NC Subroutines Branch
Double clicking on an NC Subroutines branch in the Project Tree panel will display the NC
Programs file selection window enabling you to add one or more external subroutine files.
Right-click on an NC Subroutines branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following
menu:
Add NC Subroutine Files — Displays the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
one or more external subroutine files.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer to the highlighted NC Subroutines branch in the
Project Tree.
Delete All — Deletes all NC Subroutines from the NC Subroutines branch.
Expand All Children — Expands the NC Subroutines branch so that all of the NC Subroutine files
are shown.
Collapse All Children — Collapses the NC Subroutines branch.
If the Configure icon is toggled “on”, the Configure NC Subroutines Branch menu displays at the
1034
VERICUT Help
NC Subroutine File
Right-click on an NC Subroutine file in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu.
Edit — Opens the highlighted NC Subroutine in the NC Program Editor window.

Replace — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you select one, or more
external subroutine files to replace the NC subroutine files highlighted in the Project Tree.
Add NC Subroutine Files — Displays the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
Cut — Cuts the highlighted NC Subroutine file from the Project Tree and puts it in the paste
buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted NC Subroutines file from the Project Tree to the paste buffer.
Paste — Replaces the highlighted NC Subroutines file, with the NC Subroutines file contained in
the paste buffer.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted NC Program file from the Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on an NC Subroutine file in the Project Tree panel will open the
highlighted NC Subroutine in the NC Program Editor window.
Right-click with multiple NC subroutine files highlighted in the Project Tree to display the
following menu:
1035
VERICUT Help
To use the above features for multiple NC subroutine files at the same time, select the desired
NC subroutine files using one of the following methods:
Select multiple files in sequence — Click first file name in the sequence, then press and hold
the <Shift> key while clicking the last file name
Select additional or non-sequential files — Press and hold the <Control> key while selecting
each additional file.
With either method, selecting a file name a second time while holding down the <Control> key
unselects the file.
Each of the features in the above menu behave exactly as described for a single highlighted NC
subroutine file except that the selected feature is applied to all of the highlighted NC
subroutine files.
1036
VERICUT Help
Saved IP Files branch
Right-click on a Saved IP Files branch in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Expand All Children — Expands the Saved IP Files branch so that all of the IP files are shown.
Collapse All Children — Collapses the Saved IP Files branch.
Refresh — Updates the status of IP files in the list enabling you to see the status of IP files that
have been manipulated (deleted, moved, renamed, etc.) outside of VERICUT. IP files in the list
that cannot be found are displayed with red text.
Delete All — Deletes all IP files from the Saved IP Files branch.
Save As — Opens the Save In-Process As window enabling you to save an IP file at the "current"
state of processing.
Shortcut: Double clicking on a Saved IP Files branch in the Project Tree panel to expand the
Saved IP Files branch so that all of the IP files are shown.
1037
VERICUT Help
IP File
Right-click on an IP file in the Project Tree panel to display the following menu:
Open IP File — Opens (loads) the highlighted IP file.

Merge IP File — Merges the highlighted IP file into the current session. (ref. Merge (In Process
file), in the File Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Help)
Delete — Deletes the highlighted IP file from the Project Tree.
Shortcut: Double clicking on an IP file in the Project Tree panel will open (load) the IP file in
VERICUT.
1038
VERICUT Help
Configure Panels
When the Configure icon, , at the top of the Project Tree is depressed (toggled “on”), the
appropriate Configure menu for the selected item in the Project Tree will be displayed at the
bottom of the Project Tree. The picture below shows that a Project branch has been selected
and the Configure Project menu is displayed at the bottom of the Project Tree.
Each of the Configure menus, with all of its features, is described in detail in the sections that
follow.
The Configure menus are all displayed a consistent size, but are resizable by the user for better
Project Tree navigation.
Resizing a Configure menu

Click on the upper border of the Configure menu and while holding the mouse button down
drag the cursor to the desired location as shown in the picture below.
1039
VERICUT Help
1040
VERICUT Help
Configure Project menu
Location:
Project Tree > Project branch (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure Project menu, Files tab enable you to open and save VERICUT
project (.VcProject) files and save, view and reset the VERICUT Log file.
Project File — Use the Project File features to open and save project files (ref. Project File in
the Getting Started with VERICUT section of VERICUT Help).
(Open File) — Displays the Open Project file selection window enabling you to open
VERICUT project (.VcProject) files.
(Save File) — Use Save Project to save existing VERICUT project (.VcProject) files with the
current session settings.
(Save As File) — Displays Save Project As window enabling you to save a new VERICUT
project (.VcProject) file or save existing project files with a different name or in a different
location.
1041
VERICUT Help
Log File — Use the Log File features to save, view and clear log files (ref. Log File in the Getting
Fastener Help).
(Open File) — Opens a file selection window enabling you to save the VERICUT Log file.
View Log File — Opens the VERICUT Log window enabling you to view the log file.
Reset Log File — Use to clear the contents of the VERICUT Log file.
Add New Setup — Add New Setup appends a new setup after the current setup. All settings
from the current setup are copied to the new setup. Once the new setup is added, it becomes
the current setup.
1042
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Log window
Locations:
Info menu > VERICUT Log
Toolbar short cut:
The VERICUT Log window displays the VERICUT Log file. This file contains session information,
such as error, warning and informational messages about the verification session. In this
window, you can view, print, change then name, or reset Log file contents.
1043
VERICUT Help
Menubar
File menu
Open — Opens a file selection window enabling you to open an existing log file.
Save As — Opens a file selection window enabling you to save the VERICUT Log file.
Print — Opens a window enabling you specify page setup preferences, select a printer and print
the VERICUT Log file.
Exit — Closes the VERICUT Log window.
Edit menu
Copy — After highlighting the desired text in the VERICUT Log file, use this feature to copy the
highlighted text to a paste buffer which can then be pasted to a text file, email, etc.
Toolbar
search for.
1044
VERICUT Help
Search Backward — Searches backward in the file listing for the text string specified in
Print — Print the VERICUT Log file.
Close — Closes the VERICUT Log window.
Click here to see a sample VERICUT Log file.
NOTE: In the VERICUT Logfile "Cutter Stick Out" column of the Tool Summary Table, in cases
where no holder has been defined, or in the case of an APT tool, the "Cutter Stick Out" column
will display the length of the cutter instead of the Cutter Stick Out value.
1045
VERICUT Help
Configure Setup menu
Location:
Project Tree > Setup branch (Configure “on”)
Motion tab — Features on the Motion tab enable you to provide important settings related to
the motion displayed during the simulation, such as how often the display is updated (to reduce
processing time), setting the minimum and maximum range of the Animation Speed slider, etc.
G-Code tab — Features on the G-Code tab provide important settings for G-Code simulation,
such as: the G-Code programming method, when cutter compensation (CDC) codes are
processed, NC program scanning, etc.
Active — When toggled "on" (checked), the setup is set as "active". When toggled "off" (not
checked) the setup is set as "inactive".
1046
VERICUT Help
Add New Setup — Add New Setup appends a new setup aftr the current setup. All settings
from the current setup are copied to the new setup. Once the new setup is added, it becomes
the current setup.
1047
VERICUT Help
Configure Setup menu, Motion tab
Location:
Features on the Motion tab enable you to provide important settings related to the motion
displayed during the simulation, such as how often the display is updated (to reduce processing
time), setting the minimum and maximum range of the Animation Speed slider, what checks
are made during cutting, and turning FastMill mode on/off.
Fast Feed (FPM) — Feed rate threshold at which material removal is unsafe (likely to cause tool
breakage, machine malfunction, or part damage). For example, if the maximum feedrate
allowed is 180, Fast Feed should be set to 181 or greater. Material removed under these
conditions is shaded in the Error color (typically red) and causes a "Fast feed rate" error.
1048
VERICUT Help
Fast Feed (FPR) — When in FPR mode and the Fast Feed (FPR) value is non-zero, the fast feed
rate will be checked against the Fast Feed (FPR) value. Otherwise: The fast feed rate will be
checked against the Fast Feed (FPM) value.
For Tapping and Threading, the fast feed will be checked against the Fast Feed (FPM) value.
NOTES:
1. Tapping and Threading (although in FPR mode), will not use the FPR value because this
setting is typically much higher than normal FPR settings.
2. The default for the Fast Feed (FPR) is zero. If zero, it will not be used allowing existing
jobs to continue running.
Skip Motions — Use to specify the number of animated tool motions that VERICUT should skip
before updating the display. Enter "0" to display each tool motion. Enter a value between "1"
and "1024" to represent the number of cuts to skip before display updates. Skipping cuts
increases animation speed since the display is not constantly updated. The cut model is
unaffected.
Tip: You can also use the Animation Speed Slider to set, or modify, the Skip Motion value. See
Animation Speed Slider in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Drill Cycle — Controls when and how to simulate canned tool axis cycles (e.g. G8n, "CYCLE").
While VERICUT simulates most popular cycle motions, there are also capabilities to add more
and change how existing cycles are interpreted.
1049
VERICUT Help
Options:
Ignore — Ignores cycle motions- the tool moves to each cycle position without performing cycle
motions.
Bottom Only — Simulates cycle motions for a hole with one full depth motion- pecking or chip-
breaking motions are not simulated.
Full Motion — Simulates all cycle motions, including pecking or chip-breaking motions.
No Motion — Processes drill cycles and displays material removal without any tool animation.
NOTE: When the "Bottom Only" or "Ignore" options are used, certain motions (and checks)
are ignored. This means that there will be no RAPID checks, no material removal, no limit
checks, no collision checks, no redraws, etc. Because of it's importance, checks related to
"RAPID to the R-plane" motions are included when "Bottom Only" is selected, but not when
"Ignore" is selected.
Need help troubleshooting cycle motion errors? For assistance with diagnosing error
messages and conditions, visit the VERICUT Users’ Forum or contact CGTech technical support
via our website, just click on the support link.
Min. Motion Dist. — Use to specify a minimum motion distance value to be used for defining
the range of the Animation Speed Slider (ref. Animation Speed Slider in the Getting Started
section of VERICUT Help for additional information).
VERICUT interpolates between the Min. Motion Dist. value, and the Max. Motion Dist. value,
to determine the value of the Animation Speed Slider at the selected slide bar position. The
Animation Speed value is expressed as a percentage of the total range.
Max. Motion Dist. — Use to specify a maximum motion distance value to be used for defining
the range of the Animation Speed slider (ref. Animation Speed Slider in the Getting Started
section of VERICUT Help for additional information).
VERICUT interpolates between the Min. Motion Dist. value, and the Max. Motion Dist. value,
to determine the value of the Animation Speed Slider at the selected slide bar position. The
Animation Speed value is expressed as a percentage of the total range.
No Animation — Enables you to reduce processing time. When toggled "on" (checked), the
graphics display is not updated until either processing is complete or you Stop the processing.
At that time the cut model is displayed in it "final" state or the state that it was in when
processing was stopped. You can also toggle No Animation on/off using the No Animation icon,
, in the VERICUT toolbar.

Tool Spindle Always On — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will assume that the spindle
is always on and will not check for spindle status (on/off) or output error messages related to
cutting with the spindle off.
1050
VERICUT Help
Check Spindle Direction — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT check for spindle direction
against the "valid" direction of the tool.
For turning tools, "valid" direction is based on the turning tool orientation. Spindle direction,
(CW or CCW), is determined looking down the Z-axis of the spindle. It is assumed that revolving
stock material should come onto the insert in the direction of positive Y-axis of the tool
component. If spindle direction is wrong, or spindle speed is not defined, an error is reported to
VERICUT logger. Only one error per spindle is reported for each operation turning the spindle
on or off.
The error is reported only if turning tool removes material from stock. For air moves, no errors
are reported. Also, if an insert removes material in a motion that crosses the spindle Z-axis, no
error is reported (in this case, one part of the insert is always on the correct side, while the
other part is on the wrong side, therefore there is no preferable spindle direction).
For milling tools, the direction of the tool spindle (either spindle component or tool component
attribute) is checked with the "valid" direction of the tool in the spindle. Tool spindle direction
(CW / CCW) is defined looking down (negative Z) the tool axis. For revolved milling cutters,
"valid" direction is based on the setting of Spindle Direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in
the tool definition. For inserted milling cutters, "valid" direction is based on the insert thickness
direction.
If the direction of the spindle does not match the direction of the tool, then an error is reported
whenever the tool removes material. The tool removes material in the error color (similar to
the behavior for turning spindle direction error). The check is done and the error reported only
when the tool removes material. Motion that does not remove material does not report an
error.
The check is done for G-Code only.
Check Cutting Limits — Toggle “on” (checked), to have VERICUT do the cutting limit checks
during simulation. Cutting limit values are set in the OptiPath window: Limits tab (ref. OptiPath
window: Limits tab, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help).
NOTE: Turning on the Check Cutting Limits option internally turns on OptiPath logic. Running
OptiPath in the background leads to a certain performance slow-down. Typically, with No
Animation and without any collision checking and other costly options, the slow-down is in the
range of 15-30%.
Using OptiPath enables VERICUT to calculate more “true” values for the Tool Cutting Time and
Tool Cutting Distance. Specifically, if a tool's motion starts in the air and then goes into the
material, only the portion of the time/distance tool spends in the material will be added to
these values. The accuracy of calculating the “in-material” values is mostly determined by the
Resolution setting on the OptiPath window, Settings tab.
1051
VERICUT Help
FastMill — Toggle "on" (checked) to process the NC program in FastMill mode. You can also use
the FastMill icon , in the Toolbar to turn on FastMill mode.
NOTES:
1. FastMill:
 does "fixed axis" material removal in any tool orientation.
 does not do "undercuts". FastMill automatically switches to standard material removal
when required.
 can be turned On/Off at any time.
 can be used with/without tool animation. Toggle No Animation, described above, "On"
for fastest processing.
 is compatible with OptiPath, AUTO-DIFF, Model Export, as well as X-Caliper and any
other feature that uses the cut model database.
2. FastMill is not effective when:
 The tool axis changes frequently.
 The cutter "undercuts", such as when using a dovetail or wheel cutter.
 Cutter height is less than the cut depth resulting in an undercut condition.
3. Replace Material When Stepping Back (ref. Replace Material When Stepping Back, on the
Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings) and FastMill mode are
mutually exclusive.
When Replace Material When Stepping Back is toggled "on", VERICUT will turn FastMill
"off" Conversely, if FastMill is toggled "on", VERICUT will turn Replace Material When
Stepping Back "off”. VERICUT will display a pop-up notification when these situations occur.
Ignore Undercuts — Works in conjunction with FastMill, described above. When toggled "on"
(checked), VERICUT does not check each motion for "undercut" conditions allowing for faster
processing in those cases where you are sure that there are no "undercut" conditions in the NC
program. Toggle "off" when you want VERICUT to check for "undercut" conditions as it
processes each motion.
NOTE: This feature is only active when FastMill is toggled "on".
TIP: Place the cursor over the text field, pull-down menu, or checkbox, for any of the options
in the Motion Group to see a summary of its function.
1052
VERICUT Help
Automatically Load Stocks On Rewind— When toggled “on” (checked), this feature executes
the LoadStocks macro when the (Rewind NC Program) button is pressed.

Automatically Load Stocks For New Setup— This feature automatically provides the same
function as Project menu > Stock >Load Stocks. After cutting, this feature causes VERICUT to
automatically load new stock models for Stock components that have models defined, but no
cut stock model exists.
This capability is used when simulating a series of parts being machined through multiple
machining stages. This type of manufacturing is often referred to as "staged machining".
See Load Stocks in the Project Menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
To Configure Setup menu
1053
VERICUT Help
Configure Setup menu, G-Code tab
Location:
Features on the G-Code tab provide important settings for G-Code simulation, such as: the G-
Code programming method, when cutter compensation (CDC) codes are processed, and NC
program scanning.
Programming Method — Describes the relationship between cutting tools and what is being
driven by tool path file motion commands. (Take care NOT to describe the relationship
between cutting tools and the driven point controlled by a CAM system.)
Options:
Tool Tip — XYZ values represent tool tip positions (center of the tool tip) at all times.
1054
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Tool length compensation codes (G43ZnHn/G49) do not appear in tool tip
programmed tool paths. If these codes are present, use the Tool Length Compensation
programming method.
Gage Length — XYZ values represent gage point positions. The gage point is typically the
spindle face, where the centerline of the tool intersects the machine gage line. Gage length
values must be supplied using Gage Offset in Tool Manager, or via entries in a Gage Offset
table.
Tool Length Compensation — With comp. active (e.g. G43ZnHn) XYZ values represent tool
tip positions relative to program zero. With comp. cancelled XYZ values represent machine
gage point positions relative to machine zero. Use an Input Program Zero table to describe
where the part zero is. VERICUT automatically calculates "H" offset values, or enters values
in a Tool Length Compensation table. For proper tool loading on a 3-D machine supply gage
offset values as described above for Gage Length programming method.
Process Cutter Comp. — When active, applies cutter compensation, or "CDC" offsets to the
programmed tool path. Enter CDC offset values in a Cutter compensation table, as described
under Cutter Compensation Table in the Tables for Processing G-Codes section in the CGTech
Help Library. Output Precision (refer to Control Settings window: Motion tab for more
information) is used to specify the accuracy for calculating CDC offset tool positions.
Options:
Off — Ignore CDC related codes in the NC program file.
On – Default to Zero — Process CDC related codes in the NC program file. Default to zero if
no Cutter compensation value is specified.
On – Default to Full Radius — Process CDC related codes in the NC program file. Default to
the full tool radius value if no cutter compensation value is specified.
1055
VERICUT Help
NOTE: NC programs cannot be optimized when CDC offsets are being simulated.
Scan NC Program Files — When toggled “On” (checked), performs a "scan pass" on NC program
files to identify jump destinations for looping-branching logic. NC programs with this type of
logic must be scanned for proper simulation in VERICUT.
Check Syntax — When toggled “On” (checked), Check Syntax automatically runs at the start of
processing.
Scan NC Project Subroutine Files — When toggled “On” (checked), VERICUT will scan NC
Project Subroutine Files. This is the default in order to maintain compatibility with existing jobs.
When toggled "Off" (not checked), VERICUT will not scan NC Project Subroutine Files.
NOTES:
1. VERICUT will still scan the machine and control subroutine files.
2. It is only valid to toggle this field Off when the file contains no branching (IF, DO, FOR,
WHILE, GOTO, ...) and the name of the subroutine is the same as the name of the file.
Ignore Data after Column — When toggled "On"(checked), specifies the G-Code data column
number to begin ignoring remaining data in the block. Use this feature when unmarked
comments are permitted in designated columns of the G-Code data. Enter the number of the
last valid G-Code data column in the text field next to this feature.
Apply Acceleration to Cycle Time — When toggled "On", uses the Accel/Decel parameters, as
set on the Accel/Decel tab in the Configure Component menu for Component Type: All Motion
Axes (ref. Accel/Decel tab in the Configure Component menu, Component Type: All Motion
Axes, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help) when calculating the Time value
displayed in the Status window.
Initialize Machine/Control between NC Programs — Enables you to specify whether or not to
reset the control's states, variables, etc. between NC program files during processing. When
toggled "On" (the default), VERICUT resets these values between NC program files. This
condition is consistent with prior releases. Toggle "Off" to retain these values between NC
program files.
Machine Simulation On — When toggled "On", simulates machine tool motions when a 3-D
machine is displayed in a machine view.
Shortcut: You can quickly toggle Machine Simulation On, "on" or "off" by clicking on the No
Machine Simulation icon in the toolbar.
Initialization File — Use this feature to specify the Setup Initialization File to be used. A Setup
Initialization File is a text, or subroutine, file used to initialize variables used in the setup. The
Setup Initialization File is processed at the same time as the "Start of Processing" event.
1056
VERICUT Help
Click on the (Add Setup Initialization File) icon to display the Setup Initialization Files file
selection window and use it to specify the \path\filename of the Setup Initialization File to be
used.
Use the (Clear Setup Initialization File) to clear the Initialization File text field.
Use the (Edit Setup Initialization File) to open the specified Setup Initialization File in a
text editor window (ref. Text File in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help for information on
the text editor's features) to enable viewing and/or modifying it.
See Variables window, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on
monitoring and tracking Setup Variables.
See Initialization File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional information
on Initialization Files.
To Configure Setup menu
1057
VERICUT Help
Configure CNC Machine menu
Location:
Project Tree > CNC Machine branch (Configure “on”)
The Configure CNC Machine menu enables you to select the Machine and Control file to use for
the current setup.
Machine File — Use the Machine File features to open and save machine files which contain
data that describes NC machine construction, kinematics, and other properties (ref. Machine
File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
(Open Machine) — Displays the Open Machine window enabling you to open machine
(.mch, .xmch) files.
(Save Machine) — Saves (updates) an existing machine file (.mch, .xmch) with the current
NC machine settings. VERICUT will save the machine file if you have sufficient permissions to
save the file in its present folder. Otherwise, the Save Machine File window will display enabling
you to specify a location to save where you have write permissions.
1058
VERICUT Help
(Save Machine As) — Displays the Save Machine File window enabling you to save a new
control (.ctl, .xctl) file or save an existing control file with a different name or in a different
location.
NOTE: In some environments, the Save File and Save As File icons will not be displayed. This is
because the CGTECH_MACHINE_CONFIG environment variable has been set in the vericut.bat
file to restrict access to VERICUT’s machine configuration features.
Machine File Pull-down List — Click on the arrow button at the end of the Machine File
text field to display a list of all of the Machine files contained in the /library/ folder of your
VERICUT installation and select the desired machine file from the list.
Control File — Use the Control File features to open and save control files which contain data
that describes how the NC control processes machine code data (ref. Control File in the Getting
(Open Control) — Displays the Open Control window enabling you to open control (.ctl,
.xctl) files.
(Save Control) — Saves (updates) an existing Control file with the current NC control
settings. VERICUT will save the control file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in
its present folder. Otherwise, the Save Control File window will display enabling you to specify a
location to save where you have write permissions.
(Save Control As) — Displays the Save Control File window enabling you to save a new
control (.ctl, .xctl) file or save an existing control file with a different name or in a different
location.
Control File Pull-down List — Click on the arrow button at the end of the Control text field
to display a list of all the Control files contained in the "library" folder of your VERICUT
installation and select the desired Control file from the list.
Back to the Project Tree Menu table
1059
VERICUT Help
Save Machine File window
Locations:
Project Tree > Configure Machine menu
Configuration menu > Machine > Save As
Toolbar short cut:
Right click on the icon to toggle between (Save Machine) and (Save Machine As)
modes.
Opening the Save Machine File window enables you to save a Machine file (ref. Machine File in
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). Machine files contain data that describes NC machine
construction, kinematics, and other properties.
features specific to VERICUT products can be found in the Introduction to VERICUT File
Selection Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1060
VERICUT Help
Units to Save — Controls the units (Inch or Millimeter) in which to store machine configuration
data. If the session units are different than the units to save, then values are converted
accordingly when stored in the new file.
Save Encrypted — Saves the Machine file as a standard encrypted (X-File) with an .xmch
extension.
A "standard" encrypted machine file:
 works with a standard VERICUT license.
 simulates exactly the same as a standard machine file (.mch)
 can not be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech so retain your original machine (.mch)
file
Customer ID — Enables you to add a customer id when creating an encrypted file. Enter the
Customer ID in the Customer ID text field. This feature is only available when the Save
Encrypted feature, described above, is active (checked).
1061
VERICUT Help
Save Control File window
Locations:
Project Tree > Configure Control menu
Configuration menu > Control > Save As
Toolbar short cut for saving Control files:
Right click on the icon to toggle between (Save Control) and (Save Control As)
modes.
Opens the Save Control File window enabling you to save a Control file (ref. Control File in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help). Control files contain data that describes how the NC control
processes machine code data.
1062
VERICUT Help
Units to Save — Controls the units (Inch or Millimeter) in which to store control configuration
data. If the session units are different than the units to save, then values are converted
accordingly when stored in the new file.
Save Encrypted — Saves the control file as a standard encrypted (X-File) with an .xctl extension.
A "standard" encrypted control file:
 works with a standard VERICUT license.
 simulates exactly the same as a standard control file (.ctl)
 can not be decrypted/expanded except by CGTech so retain your original control (.ctl) file.
Customer ID — Enables you to add a customer id when creating an encrypted file. Enter the
Customer ID in the Customer ID text field. This feature is only available when the Save
Encrypted feature, described above, is active (checked).
See Saving or Opening an NC Control Configuration, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
1063
VERICUT Help
Configure Control menu
Location:
Project Tree > Control branch (Configure “on”)
The Configure Control menu enables you to select the Control file to use for the current setup.
The features in the Configure Control menu provide exactly the same functionality as the
Control File features in the Configure CNC Machine menu described above.
1064
VERICUT Help
Saving or Opening an NC Control Configuration
The NC control configuration, including rules for how machine codes are interpreted,
associated subroutines, and more, are saved in a Control file. When combined with a Machine
file, VERICUT can simulate how an NC machining center will respond to G-Code NC program
files.
Use the procedures below to save and open Control files. Note that many control
configurations are available in the CGTech library. See Library Control Files in the in the Getting
Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for more information.
See Library Control Files in the in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more
information.
To save a new Control file:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Save Control File" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Control branch and select Save As from the menu
that displays. You can also left-click on a Control branch to display the Configure Control
menu and click on the (Save Control As) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Control As) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Control As) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Control) icon
to switch to Save Control As mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Control > Save As.
In the "Save Control File" file selection window that opens, select (Folder) in the upper
left corner to display the “standard” file selection Folder Tree structure in the left panel.
Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window that you want to save the file to. Use
the (Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file selection window, to
quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
1065
VERICUT Help
Once you select the folder in the folder tree, the files in that folder are displayed in the center
section of the file selection window. Use the Filter feature to specify the type of files that you
want displayed.
Enter the name of the file that you want to save in the File text field, or select a file from those
displayed in the center section of the file selection window if you want to replace it.
Click on Save in the lower right corner of the window to save the file and close the file selection
window.
You can click on Cancel in the lower right corner of the window to close the file selection
window without saving the file.The Control file is saved. You can open saved Control files as
described below to reload the NC control configuration.
To save a new Control file to a Favorite Folder:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Save Control File" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Control branch and select Save As from the menu
that displays. You can also left-click on a Control branch to display the Configure Control
menu and click on the (Save Control As) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Control As) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Control As) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Control) icon
to switch to Save Control As mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Control > Save As.
In the "Save Control File" file selection window that opens, select (Favorite) in the upper
left corner to display the Favorites Listing Area section of your Favorites panel in the left panel.
See Favorites panel in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, where you want
to save the file.
Once you select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, the files in that folder are displayed in
the center section of the file selection window, filtered according to the setting of the Filter
feature when the “favorite” folder was created.
1066
VERICUT Help
window.
To open an existing Control file:
1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Open Control" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Control branch and select Open from the menu that
displays. You can also left-click on a Control branch to display the Configure Control
menu and click on the (Open Control) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Open Control) icon.

 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Control > Open.
In the "Save Control File" file selection window that opens, select (Folder) in the upper
Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window containing the file you want to open.
Use the (Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file selection
want displayed.
Select the file that you want to open from those displayed in the center section of the file
Click on Open in the lower right corner of the window to open the file and close the file
selection window.
Hints:
 Use the LIBRARY shortcut to see control files available in the CGTech library.
 Use the Help on Samples feature to go to a Help section that provides information on the
Control files that are available to you.
1067
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Always reset VERICUT, press (Reset Model), after opening or changing Machine or
Control files.
To open an existing Favorite Control file:
1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Open Control" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Control branch and select Open from the menu that
menu and click on the (Open Control) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Open Control) icon.

 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Control > Open.
In the "Save Control File" file selection window that opens, select (Favorite) in the upper
Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, containing the
file you want to open.
selection window.
Control files.
To Save an existing Control file:
1. Use one of the following methods to save an existing Control file:
1068
VERICUT Help
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Control branch and select Save from the menu that
menu and click on the (Save Control) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Control) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Control) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Control As) icon to
switch to Save Control mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Control > Save.
For details about CGTech library machines and controls, and other sample files you can
reference when simulating G-Code NC program files, see Library Control Files and Library
Machine Files in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help.
1069
VERICUT Help
Configure Machine menu
Location:
Project Tree > Machine branch (Configure “on”)
The Configure Machine menu enables you to select the Machine file to use for the current
setup.
The features in the Configure Machine menu provide exactly the same functionality as the
Machine File features in the Configure CNC Machine menu described above.
file to restrict access to VERICUT's machine configuration features.
1070
VERICUT Help
Saving or Opening an NC Machine Configuration
The NC machine configuration, including machine construction, kinematics, and other

properties, is savable in a Machine file. When combined with a Control file, VERICUT can
simulate how an NC machine will respond to G-Code NC program files.
Use the procedures below to save and open Machine files. Note that many machine
configurations are available in the CGTech library.
See Library Machine Files in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more information.
To save a new Machine file:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Save Machine File" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Machine branch and select Save As from the menu
that displays. You can also left-click on a Machine branch to display the Configure
Machine menu and click on the (Save Machine As) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Machine As) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Machine As) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Machine)
icon to switch to Save Machine As mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Machine > Save As.
In the "Save Machine File" file selection window that opens, select (Folder) in the upper
Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window that you want to save the file to. Use
the (Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file selection window, to
quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
1071
VERICUT Help
want displayed.
window.
window without saving the file.The Machine file is saved. You can open saved Machine files as
described below to reload the NC Machine configuration.
To save a new Machine file to a Favorite Folder:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Save Machine File" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Machine branch and select Save As from the menu
that displays. You can also left-click on a Machine branch to display the Configure
Machine menu and click on the (Save Machine As) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Machine As) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Machine As) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Machine)
icon to switch to Save Machine As mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Machine > Save As.
In the "Save Machine File" file selection window that opens, select (Favorite) in the upper
See Favorites panel in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, where you want
to save the file.
window.
1072
VERICUT Help
To open an existing Machine file:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Open Machine" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Machine branch and select Open from the menu that
displays. You can also left-click on a Machine branch to display the Configure Machine
menu and click on the (Open Machine) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Open Machine) icon.

 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Machine > Open.
In the "Save Machine File" file selection window that opens, select (Folder) in the upper
Select the folder in the tree on the left side of the window containing the file you want to open.
Use the (Up One Level) icon, located in the upper right corner of the file selection
want displayed.
selection window.
Hints:
 Use the LIBRARY shortcut to see Machine files available in the CGTech library.
 Use the Help on Samples feature to go to a Help section that provides information on the
Machine files that are available to you.
Machine files.
1073
VERICUT Help
To open an existing Favorite Machine file:

1. Use one of the following methods to display the "Open Machine" file selection window:
 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Machine branch and select Open from the menu that
menu and click on the (Open Machine) icon.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Open Machine) icon.

 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Machine > Open.
 In the "Save Machine File" file selection window that opens, select (Favorite) in the
upper left corner to display the Favorites Listing Area section of your Favorites panel in
the left panel.
Select the “favorite” folder in the Favorites List, on the left side of the window, containing the
file you want to open.
selection window.
Control files.
To Save an existing Machine file:
1. Use one of the following methods to save an existing Machine file:

 In the Project Tree, right-click on a Machine branch and select Save from the menu that
menu and click on the (Save Machine) icon.
1074
VERICUT Help
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Save Machine) icon. If you do not see the
(Save Machine) icon in the tool bar, right click on the (Save Machine As)
icon to switch to Save Machine mode.
 In the main menu bar, click on Configuration menu > Machine > Save.
Control files.
For details about CGTech library machines and controls, and other sample files you can
reference when simulating G-Code NC program files, see Library Control Files and Library
Machine Files in the Getting Started Section of VERICUT Help.
1075
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Common Features
The following sections describe the features that are common to the Configure Component
menus for all component types. The differences for specific component types will be described
below under the Configure Component menu topic.
The following picture shows the features that appear on all Configure Component menus.
If the applied movement is incorrect, press the (Undo) icon in the Project Tree Top Icon
Bar to return the object to its previous location.
Component tab — Features on the Component tab are used to define the attributes of a
component. VERICUT handles components and their solid models differently depending on the
component's type and attributes. Most attributes apply to components used in building NC
machines.
Translate tab — Features on the Translate tab translate the selected object via indicating
"from" and "to" points to move the object. Movement occurs each time you press the Move
button.
Rotate tab — Features on the Rotate tab rotate the selected object about a rotation center
point.
Assemble tab — Features on the Assemble tab move the object by assembling (mating or
aligning) it with other objects.
Matrix tab — Features on the Matrix tab enable you to move a selected component/model
from one coordinate system to another.
Csys tab — Features on the Csys tab enable you to move a selected component/model from
one coordinate system to another.
Append Component — The items displayed in the Append Component pull-down list will differ
depending on the component type currently selected (highlighted) in the Project Tree.
When an Attach component, or a project component (those component types displayed when
the Show Machine Components feature is toggled "off") is selected, only the component types
that are valid “project” components will be displayed in the list. Click on the arrow button
and select from the following "project" component types:
Deflector — The Deflector component represents the deflectors used for water jet machining.
Design — The Design component represents a solid or surface representation of the theoretical
designed part.
Design Point — The Design Point component represents a point representation of the
theoretical designed part.
1076
VERICUT Help
Electrode — The Electrode component represents the electrodes used for Die Sinking
Simulation (EDM machining).
Fixture — When using VERICUT, the Fixture component represents the hardware used to hold
the workpiece for machining, such as: base plates, clamps, bolts, vises, pallets, etc. VERICUT
assumes fixtures are not to be machined unless the OK To Cut Into Fixture feature has been
toggled "on" in the Configure Component: Fixture menu > Component tab. Cuts into a fixture
are shaded using the red Error color and an error is issued to the Log file and in the Logger.
When using VERICUT Composite Simulation, the Fixture component represents the hardware
used to hold the Form during the tape laying operation.
When using VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation, the Fixture component represents the
hardware used to hold the Skin and Structure during the drilling and fastener installation
operation.
Form — The Form component represents the surface on which composite material is laid. It
may be mounted on a rotisserie which enables it to be indexed so that different areas of the
surface are presented to a head for painting, or the rotisserie can spin while tows are laid.
Mold, mandrel and tool are alternative terms for a form. This component is only used for
VERICUT Composite Simulation.
Skin — The Skin component is where holes are drilled. Only one skin component is allowed for
each setup. If multiple skin components exist, only the first one is used and the rest are
ignored. This component is only used for VERICUT Drilling and Fastener Simulation.
Stock — The Stock component represents the workpiece that is to be machined. This
component type must be present in all simulations. This component is only used for VERICUT
Simulation.
Structure — The Structure component defines the structure that the skin component is
fastened to. Only the Skin component and the Structure components are used for stack
analysis. All other component types are ignored. Structure component and its models have
"Material" settings that are checked against the material specified in the NC program. This
component is only used for VERICUT Drilling and Fastener Simulation.
X Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like an X Linear component.
Y Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like a Y Linear component.
Z Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like a Z Linear component.
The selected component is added to the Project Tree after, and as a child of, the highlighted
component.
When a "machine" component (those component types displayed only when the Show
Machine Components feature is toggled "on") is selected, only the component types that are
valid "machine" components will be displayed in the list. Click on the arrow button and
select from the following “machine” component types:
1077
VERICUT Help
X Linear, Y Linear, Z Linear — Linear motion axes on an NC machine. Motion axes are parallel to
X, Y, Z axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
A Rotary, B Rotary, C Rotary — Rotary motion axes on an NC machine. The component origin is
the pivot point of rotation. By default, rotation occurs about the X, Y, Z axes, respectively-but
this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
U Linear, V Linear, W Linear — Co-linear motion axes on an NC machine. Motion axes are
parallel to X, Y, Z axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component
attribute.
A2 Rotary, B2 Rotary, C2 Rotary — Secondary rotary motion axes on an NC machine. The
component origin is the pivot point of rotation. By default, rotation occurs about the X, Y, Z
axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
A Turret, B Turret, C Turret — Indexing tool turret that rotates about X, Y, or Z axes. Like rotary
components, the turret component origin is the pivot point for rotary indexing. The presence of
these components cause all connected tools to be displayed making it possible to detect
collisions resulting from turret indexing. A Turret component is commanded to move using a
tool change command (e.g. Tn). The turret indexes based upon activating a Tool component
connected to the turret. Tool component orientation determines the tool index position in the
turret. Rotary control settings determine how turrets rotate, e.g.: rotation direction, etc.
Turret — The Turret component does not use an axis and is intended to replace the A Turret, B
Turret and C Turret components.
Gang Tooling Post — A Gang Tooling Post component is a component that holds several cutting
tools in a row. The Gang Tooling Post is not a motion component; it does not index/rotate into
position. Use a Gang Tooling Post component to:
 To define a component that holds tools. A Gang Tooling Post component does not use a
turret enabling you to directly configure a gang tooled machine. The Gang Tooling
component does not rotate (only carries tools).
 To define the subsystem associated with tools.
NOTE: Tools inherit their subsystem id from a parent component where the subsystem
is defined).
 To assist in defining offsets. The Gage Pivot offset (or in old controls, the turret offset)
can be used to define the offset from the active tool to the Gang Tooling Post origin. A
Program Zero offset (or a Work Offset) can then be defined from the Gang Tooling Post
to the Program Zero point on the part.
Spindle — Spindle on an NC machine. The function of this component is different, depending
on the machine type: milling or turning.
Milling machine spindle — The rotating component of the machine where cutting tools are
loaded.
Turning machine spindle — The rotating component that turns the work piece about the
machine Z-axis.
1078
VERICUT Help
Tool — The location where cutting tools are loaded in an NC machine. Every NC machine
definition must include one or more of these components.
Roller — The Roller component represents the part of a composite tape laying machine's head
which presses tows onto a form. This component is only used for VERICUT Composite
Simulation.
Guide — Wire guides on a wire EDM machine.
Tool Chain — The Tool Chain component is used to define and model large tool handling
mechanisms associated with machining centers.
NOTE: The ToolChain component's location, in the component tree, must not precede any
tool component(s). An error message will be displayed during loading, and during resets, if the
ToolChain component precedes tool component(s).
Attach — The Attach component is used to connect "setup" components in the project file to
the machine.
 Setup components are saved in the project file, not the machine file.
 Stock/fixture/design components are "setup" components
 "Setup" components can be axes and have kinematics relationships
 Auxiliary devices can be connected to the Attach component
How does the "Attach" component work?
 A machine must have at least one Attach component, but multiple Attach components
are allowed. If none is found, one is automatically created at the end of the first non-
tool branch of the machine kinematics tree.
 Components are contained in both in the machine, and in the setup.
 A parent component in a "setup" references an Attach component in a machine.
Other — Any non-moving component not represented by one of the preceding types. This
component type is often used to define housings, gear boxes, shields, etc.
NOTE: The Base component is not available to append, since it is automatically added and
there can only be one Base component per machine.
Y Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like an Y Linear component.
Z Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like an Z Linear component.
Link — Use to define Link components. A Link component is a passive component without any
mechanical means to make a motion. Its motion is caused by its parent component and type of
linkage with its linked component.
See Component Type:Link, also in also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1079
VERICUT Help
Tripad — Use to support tripod type kinematic heads (Parallel Kinematics Machines (PKM))
using Link components. The new kinematic is activated by setting Ijk2AbcType to value 33. The
LINK type components have been enhanced to support TRIPAD logic. For now only reverse
kinematic is supported.
The selected component is added to the Project Tree after, and as a child of, the highlighted
component.
Add Model — The Add Model pull-down list contains the model types that can be added to a
component. Click on the arrow button and select from the following model types:
Block — Selecting Block adds a default block model to the Project Tree and displays the
Configure Model menu with Type set to "Block" enabling you to define the block's attributes
and position.
Cone — Selecting Cone adds a default cone model to the Project Tree and displays the
Configure Model menu with Type set to "Cone” enabling you to define the cone's attributes
and position.
Cylinder — Selecting Cylinder adds a default cylinder model to the Project Tree and displays the
Configure Model menu with Type set to "Cylinder" enabling you to define the cylinder’s
attributes and position.
Model File — Selecting Model File displays the Open file selection window enabling you to
specify the model file to add to the Project Tree. Once the model file is added to the Project
Tree the Configure Model menu displays with Type set to "Model File" model's position.
See Model Type: Model File in the Configure Model menu, Model tab section, also in the
Fastener Simulation Help for information on the various model file types that can be used in
VERICUT.
Create Revolve — Selecting Create Revolve opens the Profile Sketcher window in "solid of
revolution" mode.
Create Sweep — Selecting Create Sweep opens the Profile Sketcher window in "sweep solid"
mode.
Create Sweep and Create Revolve open the appropriate sketcher dialog. Once the sketch is
created, the file saved, the model is added and selected in the tree when the sketcher dialog is
closed.
NOTE: Add Model is not available when an Attach component is selected in the Project Tree
and the Show Machine Components feature is toggled "off" or not available at all.
1080
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Component tab
The features on the Component tab enable you to define the attributes of a component.
VERICUT handles components and their solid models differently depending on the component's
type and attributes. Most attributes apply to components used in building NC machines. The
following features are common to all Component Types. Features specific to a particular
component type will be described below in the Configure Component menu section.
Component tab features

Component Type — Enables you to edit the component's "Type" setting which determines the
component's function in the simulation. Select the desired "Type" from the pull-down list. The
following Component Types are available in the list:
X Linear, Y Linear, Z Linear — Linear motion axes on an NC machine. Motion axes are parallel to
X,Y,Z axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
See Component Type: All Motion Axes, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
A Rotary, B Rotary, C Rotary — Rotary motion axes on an NC machine. The component origin is
the pivot point of rotation. By default, rotation occurs about the X, Y, Z axes, respectively-but
this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
1081
VERICUT Help
U Linear, V Linear, W Linear — Co-linear motion axes on an NC machine. Motion axes are
parallel to X,Y,Z axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component
attribute.
A2 Rotary, B2 Rotary, C2 Rotary — Secondary rotary motion axes on an NC machine. The
component origin is the pivot point of rotation. By default, rotation occurs about the X, Y, Z
axes, respectively-but this can be changed via the Motion Axis component attribute.
A Turret, B Turret, C Turret — Indexing tool turret that rotates about X, Y, or Z axes. Like rotary
components, the turret component origin is the pivot point for rotary indexing. The presence of
these components cause all connected tools to be displayed making it possible to detect
collisions resulting from turret indexing. A Turret component is commanded to move using a
tool change command (e.g. Tn). The turret indexes based upon activating a Tool component
connected to the turret. Tool component orientation determines the tool index position in the
turret. Rotary control settings determine how turrets rotate, e.g.: rotation direction, etc.
See Component Type: Turret, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Spindle — Spindle on an NC machine. The function of this component is different, depending
on the machine type: milling or turning.
Milling machine spindle — the portion of the machine where cutting tools are loaded.
Turning machine spindle — the rotating component that turns the workpiece about the
machine Z-axis.
See Component Type: Spindle, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Tool — The location where cutting tools are loaded in an NC machine. Every NC machine
definition must include one or more of these components.
NOTE: A Tool component's SubsystemID is inherited from its parent motion component and
cannot be configured.
See Component Type: Tool, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Guide — Wire guides on a wire EDM machine.
See Component Types: Base, Stock, Design, Design Points, Deflector, Guide, Electrode, and
Other, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
1082
VERICUT Help
Tool Chain — The Tool Chain component is used to define and model large tool handling
mechanisms associated with machining centers.
NOTE: The ToolChain component's location, in the component tree, must not precede any
tool component(s). An error message will be displayed during loading, and during resets, if the
ToolChain component precedes tool component(s).
See Component Type: Tool Chain, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
Attach — The Attach component is used to connect "setup" components in the project file to
the machine.
 A machine must have at least one Attach component, but multiple Attach components
are allowed. If none is found, one is automatically created at the end of the first non-
tool branch of the machine kinematics tree.
See Configure Attach Component menu, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
Other — Any non-moving component not represented by one of the preceding types. This
component type is often used to define housings, gear boxes, shields, etc.
Y Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like a Y Linear component.
Z Track — Used for Electroimpact FlexTrack machines. Behaves like a Z Linear component.
See Component Type:Track, also in also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
Link — Use to define Link components. A Link component is a passive component without any
mechanical means to make a motion. Its motion is caused by its parent component and type of
linkage with its linked component.
See Component Type:Link, also in also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
1083
VERICUT Help
Tripad — Use to support tripod type kinematic heads (like the Ingersoll PKM machine) using
Link components. The new kinematics is activated by setting the Ijk2AbcType macro to value
33. The LINK type components have been enhanced to support TRIPAD logic. For now only
reverse kinematic is supported.
Base — A non-moving component to which other components are connected. Every machine
definition begins with this component.
Stock — Workpiece to be machined. This component type must be present in all simulations.
Fixture — Hardware used to hold the workpiece for machining, such as: base plates, clamps,
bolts, vises, pallets, etc. VERICUT assumes fixtures are not to be machined. Cuts in a fixture are
shaded using the red Error color and an error is issued to the Log file.
See Component Type: Fixture, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Design — Solid or surface representation of the theoretical designed part.
Design Point — Point representation of the theoretical designed part.
Electrode — Electrodes for Die Sinking Simulation (EDM machining).
Deflector — Deflectors used for water jet machining.
1084
VERICUT Help
Color — Use this feature to specify a color for the component. The right side of the (Color
Pallet) icon shows the current color for the component. To change the color for the component,
click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the component. The color
pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Configure Component
menu: Component tab will update to reflect the selected color.
Visibility — Controls the views in which the component is visible. Options:
Blank — Component is blanked from all views and cannot be seen.
Workpiece View — Component is seen in the workpiece view.
Machine View — Component is seen in the machine view.
Both Views — Component is seen in both the workpiece and machine views.
NOTE: The Visibility feature is not available for Tool Components. See Holder Visibility and
Cutter Visibility, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on controlling
tool component visibility.
Mixed Mode — Controls how the component is displayed when displayed in Mixed draw mode.
Shade — The component models are displayed as shaded solids.
Lines — The component models are displayed as wireframe
Hidden — The component models are displayed as wireframe with back-facing lines hidden
Translucent — The component models are displayed as translucent (can be seen through).
To Configure Component menu, Common Features
1085
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Translate tab

The features on the Translate tab enable you to translate the selected object via indicating
button. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon
Translate tab features

From / To — Use to specify the locations to move the object from and to, relative to the
machine origin. XYZ values can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the
field then clicking on a model. As you move the mouse over the VERICUT model, a crosshair and
vector show you the pending pick-point location. Graphical selection supports picking corner
points and midpoints of uncut model geometry, or virtually any point on machined features.
The remaining features on the Translate tab, referred to as “location features”, are common to
all of the following Configure Component menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, and Csys) and
1086
VERICUT Help
show the selected object's position and angle, and can be used to move the object or verify its
current location. Values are shown relative to the parent component or machine origin,
depending on the feature that is selected.
Show Location Relative to Parent — When selected, it indicates that the object location is
shown relative to the parent component origin. Example follows.
Positioning a component — the component is moved relative to the parent component’s
origin.
Show Location Relative to Csys — When selected, it indicates that the object location is shown
relative to the "active" Csys. The “active” coordinate system is shown in parenthesis.
If no active coordinate systems are defined, this feature will be shown as Show Location
Relative to Machine Origin.
Position — Specifies the absolute XYZ position of the object, separated by spaces.
Angles — Specifies the absolute XYZ rotation of the object, separated by spaces.
1087
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Rotate tab
The features on the Rotate tab enable you to rotate the selected object about a rotation center
point. Movement occurs each time you press one of the rotation direction buttons: X+/X-, Y+/Y-
, Z+/Z-. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon
Rotate tab features

Center of Rotation — Specifies XYZ point location about which to rotate the object. XYZ values
can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the field then clicking a position
on a model. To see the center of rotation, press . To remove the center of rotation
Rotation direction buttons — (X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-) When pressed, applies the incremental
rotation specified in the Increment field. Rotation occurs about the Center of Rotation, relative
to the machine origin.
1088
VERICUT Help
The remaining features on the Rotate tab, referred to as "location features", are common to all
of the following Configure Component menu tabs (Translate, Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, and
Csys). They are described above in the Configure Component menu, Translate tab section.
1089
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Assemble tab
The features on the Assemble tab enable you to move the selected object by assembling
(mating or aligning) it with other objects. Objects are assembled by mating or aligning one to
three planar surfaces with surfaces on other models. If a non-planar surface is selected,
VERICUT constructs a tangent plane at the pick point. The relationship of surfaces being mated
or aligned is known as a "constraint". If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon
in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous location.
Assemble tab features

Constraint Type — Specifies how to constrain selected surfaces during object movement.
Options:
Mate — Moves the object so the selected surface opposes the surface selected on the second
object (surface normals oppose each other).
Align — Moves the object so the selected surface is aligned with the surface selected on the
second object (surface normals point in the same direction).
Align Cylinder — This feature can be used to align a component, or model, by the axis of a
cylinder. The cylinder can be an STL model (if well defined) or a cut model. The cylinder surface
can be either an inner surface (hole) or an outer surface (pin).
1090
VERICUT Help
Follow the prompts in the logger to pick a common plane and two cylinders to align. Note that
plane orientation must be same as the cylinder axis.
When second constraint is also Align Cylinder the component or model is rotated about
satisfied constraint to achieve closest position of new constraint. The second constraint can not
be satisfied if the distances between holes or pins are different.
Offset — Use to specify a distance and direction (+ or -) in which to offset the constrained
surfaces. The offset is applied normal to the surface.
Reset — Use to reset constraints to receive new data.
1. For each constraint, click on , and then select the desired Constraint Type (Mate or
Align) from the pull-down list.
2. Specify an offset for the constraint if desired.
3. Click on to put the constraint in pick mode so that you can select the surfaces to be
constrained. The arrow will become highlighted as shown in the above picture for the
second constraint.
4. In the graphics area, select a surface on the object to be moved.
5. In the graphics area, select the surface to move the object relative to.
6. After selecting the two surfaces to define a constraint, VERICUT moves the object and
indicates the satisfied constraint with a checkmark as shown in the picture above for the
first constraint.
Consider the starting condition below for the examples that follow.
Mated surfaces — the left side of the magenta model is mated with the right side of the yellow
model.
1091
VERICUT Help
Aligned surfaces — the left side of the magenta model is aligned with the left side of the yellow
model.
The remaining features on the Assemble tab, referred to as "location features", are common to
all of the following Configure Component menu tabs (Translate, Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, and
1092
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Matrix tab
The features on the Matrix tab enable you to move the selected object via a twelve parameter
transformation matrix. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project
Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous location.
Matrix tab features

APT NC programs. Its twelve parameters reveal the geometric attributes of the local
(transformed) coordinate system (CSYS) in terms of the machine origin.
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
1093
VERICUT Help
associated with each axis: I1, J1, K1 as the positive X-axis vector; I2, J2,K2 as the positive Y-axis
Update — Updates the object location to reflect the matrix table transformation. After
updating, press OK or Apply to move the object.
Apply Inverse — When selected, inverts the matrix so that its twelve parameters reveal the
geometrical attributes of the machine origin in terms of the local (transformed) coordinate
system.
The remaining features on the Matrix tab, referred to as "location features", are common to all
of the following Configure Component menu tabs (Translate, Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, and
1094
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu, Csys tab
The features on the Csys tab enable you to translate the selected object from one coordinate
system (CSYS) to another. Select the "From" CSYS and the "To" CSYS to move the object.
Movement occurs each time you press the Move button. If the applied movement is incorrect,
press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous
location.
Csys tab features

From / To — Specifies the coordinate system to move the object from, and to. Select the
appropriate CSYS from each of the pull-down lists.
Move — Moves the selected object from the "From" CSYS to the "To" CSYS orientation.
The remaining features on the Csys tab, referred to as "location features", are common to all of
the following Configure Component menu tabs (Translate, Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, and Csys).
They are described above in the Configure Component menu, Translate tab section.
1095
VERICUT Help
Configure Attach Component menu
Location:
Project Tree > Attach Component branch (Configure “on”)
An Attach Component is a special case since it is contained in the machine configuration but is
displayed in the Project Tree, even when the Show Machine Components feature is toggled
"off".
The Attach component is used to connect "setup" components in the project file to the
machine.
 A machine must have at least one Attach component, but multiple Attach components are
allowed. If none is found, one is automatically created at the end of the first non-tool
branch of the machine kinematics tree.
The Configure Attach Component menu will display differently depending on whether the
Show Machine Components feature is toggled "on" or "off".
1096
VERICUT Help
Show Machine Components toggled “off”
When the Show Machine Components feature in the Project Tree is toggled "off" or not
available at all:
 Components can be appended to the Attach Component.
 Models under the Attach Component are not displayed in the tree.
 Models cannot be added to the Attach Component.
 Attach Component attributes are not displayed in the Configure Attach Component menu.
Append Component — The Append Component pull-down list contains all of the component
types that are valid "setup" components. Select from the following component types: Stock,
Fixture, Design, Design Point, Electrode, or Deflector. Each of these "project" component types
is described above in the Configure Component menu, Common Features section.
1097
VERICUT Help
Show Machine Components toggled “on”
When the Show Machine Components feature in the Project Tree is toggled "on":
 Components can be appended to the Attach component.
 Models under the Attach component are displayed in the tree.
 Models can be added to an Attach component.
 Attach component attributes are displayed in the Configure Component: Attach menu.
All tabs, for Component Type: Attach, are identical to those for all other Component Types. See
the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for complete information on
all of these and tabs.
Features: Component Type, Color, Visibility and Mixed Mode are common to all component
types and are described in detail in the Configure Component menu: Component tab section
above.
1098
VERICUT Help
Configure Component menu
Location:
Project Tree > Component branch (Configure "on")
Many of the features and tabs on the Configure Component menu are common to all
Component Types and are described above in the Configure Component menu, Common
Features section. Some Component Types have additional features on the Component tab, or
additional tab. These differences will be described in the following sections.
If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to
return the object to its previous location.
1099
VERICUT Help
component. The features that are available on the Component tab will vary depending on the
Component Type. Each of the variations is described in the sections that follow.
VERICUT handles components and their solid models differently depending on the component's
type and attributes. Most attributes apply to components used in building NC machines.
Translate tab — Features on this tab translate the selected object via indicating "from" and "to"
points to move the object. Movement occurs each time you press the Move button.
point.
Append Component — The items displayed in the Append Component pull-down list will differ
depending on the component type currently selected (highlighted) in the Project Tree.
When an Attach component, or a project component (those component types displayed when
the Show Machine Components feature is toggled “off”) is selected, only the component types
that are valid “project” components will be displayed in the list. When a “machine” component
(those component types displayed only when the Show Machine Components feature is
toggled “on”) is selected, only the component types that are valid “machine” components will
be displayed in the list. Click on the arrow button and select the desired component.
Add Model — The Add Model pull-down list contains the model types that can be added to a
component. Click on the arrow button and select the desired model type.
See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for complete
information on all of these features and tabs.
1100
VERICUT Help
Component Types: Base, Stock, Design, Design Points,

Deflector, Guide, Electrode, and Other
The following picture shows the Component tab that applies directly to the following
Component Types: Base, Stock, Form, Design, Design Points, Deflector, Guide, Electrode, and
Other.
The features and tabs for these Component Types are identical to those available for all other
Component Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for
complete information on all of these features and tabs.
To Configure Component menu
1101
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Design

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to Design components.
above.
The following feature is specific to Design components.
Use With Constant Gouge/Excess Check — Toggle this feature "On" (checked) to specify that
the current Design component is to be used for Constant Gouge/Excess Check, regardless of
the component's visibility state. The default value is "On".
Use With Constant Gouge/Excess Check can be toggled On/Off at any time during the
simulation.
When a pre-V7.2 project file is loaded, the Use With Constant Gouge/Excess Check check-box
state is set based on the Visibility setting of the Design Components in the Workpiece view. If
the Design component is visible, the Use With Constant Gouge/Excess Check will be toggled
"On" (checked). If the Design component is not visible, the Use With Constant Gouge/Excess
Check will be toggled "Off" (not checked).
1102
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Fixture

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to Fixture components.
machines.
above.
The following features are specific to Fixture components.

OK To Cut Into Fixture — Use this feature to specify when it is acceptable to cut into a fixture.
This feature is only active when Component Type is Fixture. When toggled "On" (checked),
cutter/fixture collisions are reported as described below:
Milling and Tapping Cuts
When OK to Cut Fixture is toggled "On" (checked), and the Maximum Milling Depth
checkbox (described below) is toggled "Off" (not checked), all cutter/fixture collisions
are ignored, no matter what value Maximum Milling Depth is set to.
1103
VERICUT Help
When OK to Cut Fixture is toggled "On" (checked), and the Maximum Milling Depth
checkbox (described below) is toggled "On" (checked), cutter/fixture collisions are only
reported if the collision depth is greater than the specified Maximum Milling Depth
value, as measured along the tool axis.
Turning Cuts
For turning cuts, cutter/fixture collisions are not reported regardless of collision depth.
When OK To Cut Into Fixture is toggled "Off" (not checked), any cutter/fixture contact produces
an error.
Maximum Milling Depth — Use this feature to specify the maximum depth, as measured along
the tool axis, that a mill or tap cutter can cut into the fixture. Use the checkbox to toggle the
Maximum Milling Depth feature "On" (checked) and "Off" (not checked).
Note that a Maximum Milling Depth value of 0 is no longer invalid. A value of 0 will result in a
"Maximum Milling Depth must be positive" message in the Logger and if you press Play, the
Maximum Milling Depth feature will toggle itself off.
This feature is only available when OK To Cut Into Fixture is toggled "On".
The Maximum Milling Depth feature is only applicable to milling, or tapping cuts. For turning
cuts, the Maximum Milling Depth setting is ignored.
NOTES:
1. The OK To Cut Into Fixture feature is only relevant for valid milling, tapping, or turning cuts.
For instance, if a milling cutter collides with the fixture while in an invalid spindle state, this
option will be ignored and the collision will be reported as usual.
2. The behavior described above applies only for cutter/fixture collisions. Holder collisions and
other machine component collisions are not affected by the above check box states.
3. Both settings are saved in the fixture component.
4. Depth is measured along the tool axis.
5. When a pre-V7.2 project is opened, the Maximum Milling Depth checkbox is set to "On"
(checked) if, and only if, the Maximum Milling Depth value is positive (greater than zero).
Opening a pre-V7.2 project with Maximum Milling Depth = 0 will result in the Maximum
Milling Depth checkbox to be set to "Off" and all cutter/fixture collisions will be ignored as
it was prior to V7.2.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Fixture, are identical to those for all other Component
Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for complete
information on all other tabs.
1104
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Tool

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to Tool components.
machines.
Features: Component Type and Color, are common to all component types and are described
in detail in the Configure Component menu: Component tab section above.
The following Tool feature is specific to Tool components.

Tool Index — The Tool Index feature enables you to specify the index number for a Tool
component. When defining machines with multiple tool load positions, such as a multi-spindle
mill or a turret lathe machine with tools loaded in a turret, the Tool Index feature enables you
to define additional Tool components with different index numbers for each tool load position.
Values entered are integer numbers. Use the "ActiveTool" macros to activate each Tool
component for tool changes. For example, call "ActiveTool2" to activate the Tool component
with Tool Index=2, and so on.
1105
VERICUT Help
The Tool features (Motion Axis and Reverse Direction) provide the same functionality described
below for Motion Axes components.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Tool, are identical to those available for all other
complete information on all other tabs.
NOTE: A Tool component's SubsystemID is inherited from its parent motion component and
cannot be configured.
1106
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Tool Chain

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to Tool Chain components. Notice
that there is also an additional tab: Tool Chain. Both of these tabs are described below.
machines.
types and are described in detail in the Configure Component menu, Component tab section
above.
The following feature is specific to Tool Chain components.

SubSystem — Subsystem which commands a linear or rotary motion type component to move.
Any alpha-numeric sub-system name can be entered (may include spaces) and is always
considered as text. Enter "*" (without the quotes) for motion axes included in all machine
subsystems. Subsystems are used in machines with multiple motion components that are
1107
VERICUT Help
commanded to move via the same G-Code word, for example "X". By default, a machine uses
one subsystem for all motion components, assuming they are commanded to move via unique
G-Code words.
When multiple motion components are driven by the same G-Code word, such as can occur
in 4-axis lathes or mills with multiple independently controlled heads, define different
subsystems to control which component moves when the motion command is processed.
Then, configure the control so that other codes in the tool path activate the appropriate
subsystem for movement. A full set of tables are available to support each machine
subsystem.
Tool Chain tab — Features on the Tool Chain tab are used to define tool chain characteristics.
All other features and tabs, for Component Type: Tool Chain, are identical to those for all other
complete information on all of these features and tabs.
1108
VERICUT Help
Tool Chain tab

The features on the Tool Chain tab are used to define tool chain characteristics.
Number of Pockets — Use to define the number of tools in the tool chain. Then VERICUT will
automatically create this number of equally spaced tool components along the tool chain's
perimeter geometry. The tool chain perimeter is defined by the first sweep model file attached
to the tool chain component. This file is normally not displayed except for debugging purposes.
Other models may be used to define the associated tool chain machine structure.
These tool components are named Pocket1, Pocket2, ..., PocketN. They are created each time
the machine definition file is loaded, are not saved, and may not be edited. The position of
Pocket1 is defined by the start point of the first boundary geometry segment (line or arc).
Pocket1 is also defined as the "select" or "exchange" position. The perimeter geometry is scaled
about Pocket1 to achieve the pocket-to-pocket spacing entered in the GUI. Normally this
adjustment should be small.
Pocket order — Use to define the direction for pocket numbering. Select Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise from the pull-down list.
1109
VERICUT Help
Pocket-to-pocket time — Defines the time (in seconds) required to move the tool chain one
position.
Tool exchange time — Use to define the time (in seconds) required to move the selected tool
into the machine's spindle and return the unloaded tool to the tool chain.
Pocket-to-pocket distance — Use to specify the distance between adjacent tool centers, along
the tool chain's perimeter.
Replace tool in its original pocket — Use to specify where the tool being unloaded from the
spindle is to be placed in the tool chain. When toggled "On", the unloaded tool is returned to its
original pocket position. Otherwise, the tool being unloaded is placed in the pocket emptied by
the tool being loaded.
Display pockets in project tree — Use to specify whether or not the tool chain's associated tool
components are displayed in the project tree. When toggled "On", tool components will be
displayed in the project tree. The default is not to display the tools components since large tool
chains can contain a hundred or more tools.
Tool-to-tool collision checking — Use to specify collision checking when a tool is placed in the
tool chain during a tool exchange. When toggled "On", the tool being unloaded and returned to
the tool chain is checked for collisions with the tools in adjacent pocket positions.
Tool length checking — When toggled "On", tool lengths are checked against the Maximum
tool length value when they are initially put in the tool chain. If the tool length exceeds the
Maximum tool length value, an error is output.
Maximum tool length — Use to specify the maximum tool length value used for Tool length
checking.
Create Pockets — Use to add pockets to the tool chain.
NOTE: Before using the Create Pockets feature, the Tool Chain component must have a sweep
model file representing the tool chain attached.
1110
VERICUT Help
Component Type: All Motion Axes

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to all Motion Axis (X Linear, Y
Linear, Z Linear, A Rotary, B Rotary, C Rotary, U Linear, V Linear, W Linear, A2 Rotary, B2 Rotary,
C2 Rotary) components. Notice that there is also an additional tab: Accel/Decel. Both of these
tabs are described below.
machines.
above.
The following features are specific to Motion Axes components, Turret components, and Track
components.
1111
VERICUT Help
Motion Axis — Specifies the axis of motion for a linear, rotary or turret type component,
relative to the component coordinate system. Use a "moving tool philosophy" to specify the
motion axis and direction, even though the component may actually move on the machine
instead of the tool.
Linear motion component — the motion axis is the axis in which linear motion occurs.
Rotary and turret components — the motion axis is the axis about which rotation occurs.
The positive rotation direction is counterclockwise when viewed from the positive end of
the motion axis towards the component origin.
Tool and spindle components — the motion axis is the axis aligned with the tool’s axis,
typically "Z".
Part Side — This feature enables you to specify whether you want VERICUT to automatically
calculate whether a component is "part side" or whether you want to manually specify whether
or not a component is "part side".
A component is considered "part side", when one of its child components is a Stock component.
If the component is "part side", based on VERICUT's sense of the "moving tool philosophy",
VERICUT automatically reverses the direction of motion.
Auto — When Part Side is set to Auto (the default), VERICUT automatically calculates
whether or not the component is "part side" at "Reset".
Yes — Use this feature to manually specify that the particular component is "part side".
No — Use this feature to manually specify that the particular component is not "part side".
Reverse Direction — When toggled "On" (checked), reverses the component motion direction.
Rapid Rate — Feed rate for motion-type components moving in rapid positioning mode (e.g.
G0). For linear motion components the value entered is units/minute where "units" reflect the
units of the NC program file. For rotary motion components the value entered is
degrees/minute.
SubSystem — Subsystem which commands a linear or rotary motion type component to move.
Any alpha-numeric sub-system name can be entered (may include spaces) and is always
considered as text. Enter "*" (without the quotes) for motion axes included in all machine
subsystems. Subsystems are used in machines with multiple motion components that are
commanded to move via the same G-Code word, for example "X". By default, a machine uses
one subsystem for all motion components, assuming they are commanded to move via unique
G-Code words.
When multiple motion components are driven by the same G-Code word, such as can occur in
4-axis lathes or mills with multiple independently controlled heads, define different subsystems
to control which component moves when the motion command is processed. Then, configure
the control so that other codes in the tool path activate the appropriate subsystem for
movement. A full set of tables are available to support each machine subsystem.
1112
VERICUT Help
Accel/Decel tab — The features on the Accel/Decel tab are used to define the settings used by
VERICUT when calculating the Time value displayed in the Status window.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Motion Axes are identical to those available for all other
complete information on all of these other tabs.
1113
VERICUT Help
Accel/Decel tab
Features on the Accel/Decel tab are used to define the settings used by VERICUT when
calculating the Time value displayed in the Status window.
Acceleration — Velocity at which the NC machine component can accelerate. Values entered
are units per second per second, where units could be inches or millimeters for linear axes,
depending on the machine units, or degrees for rotary axes.
Deceleration — Velocity at which the NC machine component can decelerate. Values entered
are units per second per second, where units could be inches or millimeters for linear axes,
depending on the machine units, or degrees for rotary axes.
Max Feed Velocity — Maximum speed axes can travel while in feed mode. The value entered is
in units per minute, where units could be inches or millimeters for linear axes, depending on
the machine units, or degrees for rotary axes.
NOTE: For RAPID motion, the component’s Rapid Rate will be used.
Max Velocity for Direction Change — Maximum feed rate for motions that cause an axis to
decelerate to zero velocity, such as occurs when turning at a corner.
1114
VERICUT Help
NOTE: These Accel / Decel settings are used when calculating the Time displayed in the Status
window if the “Apply Acceleration to Cycle Time” field is checked. These settings for the X, Y,
and Z components are also used in the Accel/Decel calculations within OptiPath if Accel/Decel is
being applied for the current tool.
1115
VERICUT Help
Moving Tool Philosophy
VERICUT uses a "moving tool philosophy" to describe motion directions, and reflect how the
machine maintains the tool-to-workpiece relationship. This philosophy is used regardless of
whether the Tool or Stock component is actually moving. Examples follow.
Consider a standard 3-axis vertical milling machine where the Z-axis moves the tool up/down,
and the X or Y-axis moves the workpiece.
Example 1
Z+ command causes the Z-axis to carry the tool in the Z+ direction relative to the workpiece.
Therefore, using the "moving tool philosophy" describes positive motion direction as "Z+".
Example 2
X+ command causes the X-axis to carry the workpiece in the X- direction relative to the tool.
In this case, the tool is considered to move in the X+ direction relative to the workpiece.
Therefore, using the "moving tool philosophy" describes positive motion direction as "X+",
even though the workpiece is moving in the X- direction.
1116
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Spindle

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies Spindle components.
machines.
above.
The Spindle features (Part Side and Reverse Direction) provide the same functionality described
above for Motion Axes components.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Spindle, are identical to those available for all other
complete information on all of these tabs.
1117
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Turret

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to all Turret (Turret, A Turret, B
Turret, C Turret) components.
machines.
above.
The Motion features (Motion Axis, Part Side, Reverse Direction, and SubSystem) provide the
same functionality described above for Motion Axes components.
1118
VERICUT Help
Time to Index (Seconds) — Use to specify the amount of time that it takes the turret to index.
This value will be used in time calculations.
Turret Aid — Displays the Turret Aid window enabling you to specify turret component
characteristics.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Turret, are identical to those available for all other
1119
VERICUT Help
Turret Aid window

The features on this window are used to define turret characteristics.
The features in the upper portion of the Turret Aid window enable you to easily create a swept
solid model of a turret.
Number of Faces — Use to specify the number of faces on the perimeter of the turret.
Inscribed Circle Radius — Use to specify the radius of the inscribed circle that will be used to
determine the size of the turret.
Zmin — Used to specify the starting location, along the Z-axis, to be used when creating a
"swept" solid model of the turret. The distance between Zmin and Zmax determine the
thickness of the turret.
Zmax — Used to specify ending location along the Z-axis to be used when creating a "swept"
solid model of the turret. The distance between Zmin and Zmax determine the thickness of the
turret.
File Name — Use to specify the file name for swept solid model file to be created. Enter the
\path\filename in the File Name text field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save
As file selection window that displays to specify the \path\filename.
1120
VERICUT Help
Add Sweep Model — Creates a swept solid model using the above information and adds it to
the Component Tree.
The features in the lower portion of the Turret Aid window enable you to easily create tool
components for the turret.
Tool Component Name — Use to specify the base name for tool components to be created for
the turret.
Starting Tool Index — Use to specify the starting index number to be used for the tool
components created.
Starting Index Origin — The following features are used to describe the position of the first tool
component on the turret. Think of the Starting Index origin as a polar location.
R — Use to specify the radial distance from the turret origin that the tool components will be
placed.
A degrees— Use to specify the starting location polar angle, at which the first tool component
is positioned. By default, if the number of faces is even, the starting location polar angle
defaults to 0. If the number of faces is odd, the polar angle is .5(360/number of faces). That
puts the default tool location at the center of a face in XY.
Z — Use to specify the Z location for the tool components. The default Z location is .5 (Zmax-
Zmin).
1121
VERICUT Help
Index Direction — Use to specify the direction around the turret that subsequent tool
components will index from the first position. Choose Clockwise or Counterclockwise.
Add Tool Component — Creates the tool components and adds them to the Component Tree.
A tool component will be created for each face on the turret. The tool component positions will
be rotated around the turret origin by "number of faces"/360, and positioned the radial
distance (R) away from turret origin and indexed in the specified direction from the Starting
Index Origin angle (A). Components will be named "tool component name"1, "tool component
name"2, etc., depending on the Starting Tool Index number chosen.
The turret model and tool components in the following Project Tree were created using the
information in the Turret Aid window shown at the top of this section.
Close — Close the Tool Aid window.
To Component Type: Turret
1122
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Track

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies to all Track (X Track, Y Track and Z
Track) components. Notice that there is also an additional tab: Accel/Decel. Both of these tabs
are described below.
machines.
above.
1123
VERICUT Help
The following Motion features are specific to Track components:

Motion Plane — Use this feature to define the motion plane for the Track component. Select
XY, ZX, or YZ from the pull-down list.
Offset —Use to define the offset (the distance from the component that the Track component
sits on to a reference point on the component that travels on the track.
From Component — Use to specify the component that the Track component sits on.
The picture below shows the relationship of the above features for an X Track component.
The Motion features (Part Side, Reverse Direction, Rapid Rate, and SubSystem) provide the
same functionality described above for Motion Axes components.
Accel/Decel tab — Features on the Accel/Decel tab are used to define the settings used by
VERICUT when calculating the Time value displayed in the Status window.
All other tabs, for Component Type: Track, are identical to those available for all other
1124
VERICUT Help
Component Type: Link

The following picture shows the Component tab that applies Link components.
machines.
above.
The following features are specific to Link components.

Link to Component — The Link To Component feature enables you to specify another Link
Component which this Link Component is connected to. Link components always exist in pairs.
1125
VERICUT Help
Link Type — This feature enables you to define the link type between two links. Supported link
types are Linear, Rotary, and Slider.
Linear Links
Linear type Links move parallel to its axis preserving direction between the link’s origin
points.
In the following picture, the link components are shown in the red rectangle. Detailed
information about configuring Linear Links can be found in the Using Link Components
section of this document.
Linear Link Motion
Position 1
1126
VERICUT Help
Position 2
Rotary Links
Rotary type Links rotate about specified rotary axis preserving their common
intersection point established by link’s length.
information about configuring Rotary Links can be found in the Using Link Components
1127
VERICUT Help
The following strict rules must be adhered to make link motions work correctly:
1. The link's rotation axis must cross a point on the parent component.
2. The link's component origin must be located on the link rotation axis.
3. The link's secondary axis must be oriented toward:
The linked component's origin for "Linear" links.
The intersection point of linked components for Rotary links
4. The Link Component can be attached to another link component (parent) only
when parent component is linked.
Slider Links
information about configuring Slider Links can be found in the Using Link Components
Slider type Links are similar to a Rotary type link component but it does not rotate about its
rotation axis. Instead, it slides along the linear axis to preserve the distance between its
rotary joint (with rotary link) and rotary link component center (rotary link length). The
Slider link can only be paired with a rotary link. The coordinate system of a slider link should
be placed in its joint with the rotary link. The Rotation axis must be same as the paired
rotary link. TheMotion axis is the next axis of the component matrix after the Rotation axis
(note: next of Z is X).
1128
VERICUT Help
Slider Link Motion
Position 1
Position 2
1129
VERICUT Help
Rotation Axis — This feature specifies an axis about which a link component can rotate (in link
coordinate system). Select the axis from the pull-down list. Option Point is not supported yet.
Motion Axis — This feature specifies a linear axis along which a link component can move (in
link coordinate system). Select the axis from the pull-down list.
NOTES: Link Component is a passive component without any mechanical means to make a
motion. Its motion is caused by its parent component and type of linkage with its linked
component. The following strict rules must be satisfied to make links motions correct:
1. Link’s rotation axis must cross a point on the parent component where link is attached
to.
2. Link’s Component matrix origin must be located on the link rotation axis.
3. Link’s secondary axis must be oriented toward (or opposite) to:
for Linear links - linked link origin
for Rotary links - intersection point of linked links.
4. Link Component can be attached to another link component (parent) only when parent
is linked.
All other features and tabs, for Component Type: Link, are identical to those available for all
other Component Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above
for complete information on all of these features and tabs.
See the examples in the Using Link Components, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
1130
VERICUT Help
Using Link Components

The following examples illustrate how Link Components can be used.
Example 1 – Linear Link Components

In the following picture, the link components are shown in the red rectangle.
Refer to the picture above and the Project Tree panels shown below to see how the linear link
components are configured.
1131
VERICUT Help
In the above example notice that link component "cylinder" and link component "rod" make up
the required link component pair.
1132
VERICUT Help
Example 2 – Rotary Link Components
Refer to the picture above, and the Project Tree panels shown below to see how configure
rotary link components and how multiple rotary link component pairs can also be linked
together.
1133
VERICUT Help
1. The following Project Tree images show how link component "bar" and link component
"crank" are configured to create "Link Pair 1".
1134
VERICUT Help
2. The following Project Tree images show how link component "crank1" and link component
"crank2" are configured to create "Link Pair 2".
1135
VERICUT Help
3. The following Project Tree image shows how multiple link component pairs can be
configured so that they can be linked together. Notice that link component "bar" from Link
Pair 1 is the "parent" of link component "crank2". This relationship creates a link between
Link Pair 1 and Link Pair 2.
1136
VERICUT Help
Example 3 – Slider Link Components
Refer to the picture above and the Project Tree panels shown below to see how the slider link
components are configured.
1137
VERICUT Help
In the above example notice that link component "cylinder" and link component "rod" make up
the required link component pair.
See Component Type: Link, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional
information on link components.
1138
VERICUT Help
Configure Models Branch menu

Location: Project Tree > Models branch (Configure “on”)
The following Configure menu displays when a Models Branch is highlighted in the Project Tree.
The Add Model feature provides the same functionality described above in the Configure
Component menu, Common Features section.
1139
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu
Locations:
Project Tree > Model (Configure “on”)
Project Tree > Cut Stock (Configure “on”)
The Configure Model menu is used to define the models that represent the solid objects used in
the simulation.
The features that appear on the Model tab will vary depending on the Model Type. These
differences will be described in the following sections.
The Configure Model menu displays when a Model or Cut Stock is highlighted in the Project
Tree.
Configure Model menu when a Model is highlighted
1140
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu when a Cut Stock is highlighted
Model tab — Features on the Model tab are used to add and modify models that are attached
to components to provide 3-D shape. This tab is only available when a model is highlighted.
Translate tab — Features on this tab translate the selected object via indicating "from" and "to"
points to move the object.
point.
Mirror tab — Features on the Mirror tab enable you to mirror a model about a specified axis
(plane). This tab is only available when a model is highlighted.
1141
VERICUT Help
Add Model — Selecting Model File displays the Open file selection window enabling you to
specify the model file to add to the Project Tree. Once the model file is added, the to the
Project Tree, the Configure Model menu displays with Type set to “Model File” model’s
position.
See Model Type: Model File in the Configure Model menu, Model tab section, also in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on the various model file types that can be
used in VERICUT.
1142
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Model tab
The features on the Model tab are used to add and modify models that are attached to
components to provide 3-D shape. The models can be simple parametric shapes, or refer to
external model files.
The following features are common for all Model Types:

Type — Use to specify the type of model being defined. The active choice determines the
features that will appear on the Model tab.
Model type: Appears in the Project Tree:
Block
Cone
1143
VERICUT Help
Cylinder
Model File
Visible — Toggles "on" (checked) or "off" to indicate whether or not the model should be
displayed in the VERICUT graphics area.
When toggled “on”, the model icon will indicate the visibility status of the model. For
example, in the Project Tree indicates that the model will be "visible" in the
VERICUT graphics area. in the Project Tree indicates that the model is "not
visible" and will not be displayed in the VERICUT graphics area.
NOTE: This feature is not available when a Cut Stock or Laminate is highlighted.
Material — This feature is used to specify the type of material that the model is made of.
NOTE: This feature is specific to models associated with Skin and Structure components in
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
Color — Use this feature to specify a color for the model. The right side of the (Color
Pallet) icon shows the current color for the model. To change the color for the model, click
on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
1144
VERICUT Help
Click on a color in the color pallet window to specify the color for the model. The color
pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Configure Model
menu: Model tab will update to reflect the selected color.
Models connected to the component have the option to "Inherit" or override the
component's defined color. Then the Inherit option is toggled “on” (checked), the model
will inherit the color from the component that it is attached to. In this case the Color
feature will display the color that will be inherited as shown in the picture below.
When the Inherit feature is toggled “off” (not checked), the (Color Pallet) icon will be
displayed enabling you tp specify a color for the model as shown in the picture below.
The other features that are available on the Model tab will vary depending on the Model
Type. Each of the variations is described in the sections that follow.
1145
VERICUT Help
Model Type: Block

The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Block models.
The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Block models that are associated
with Skin and Structure components in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
1146
VERICUT Help
to components to provide 3-D shape. The models can be simple parametric shapes, or refer to
Features: Type, Visible, and Color are common to all model types and are described in
detail in the Configure Model menu: Model tab section above.
Feature: Material is specific to VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation and is described in the
Configure Model menu: Model tab section above.
The following features are specific to Block models.

Length (X) — Use the text field to specify the length (along the X-axis of the Model
coordinate system) dimension of the block.
Width (Y) — Use the text field to specify the width (along the Y-axis of the Model
Height (Z) — Use the text field to specify the height (along the Z-axis of the Model
Block from Model File Extent — This feature enables you to select a model file representing
the design model and have VERICUT create a stock block enclosing the selected model.
Selecting Block from Model File Extent displays the Block from Model File Extent file
selection window enabling you to select the model file. Use the Units pull-down to specify
the units (Inch or Millimeter) to be used.
Block from NC Program Extent — When defining a Block type model, this feature
automatically defines and locates a stock block based on tool positions in the current NC
1147
VERICUT Help
program file(s). Rapid and APT-CLS "FROM" tool positions are ignored during this
calculation. The block size and location guarantee that the NC program will cut the block.
Offset — Use the Offset text field to specify the offset to be applied to the block created
using Block from Model File Extent or Block from NC Program Extent (see above). The
offset is applied to all dimensions.
(plane). See the Configure Model menu: Mirror tab section below for complete information.
To Configure Model menu
1148
VERICUT Help
Model Type: Cone

The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Cone models.
The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Cone models that are associated with
Skin and Structure components in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
1149
VERICUT Help
The following features are specific to Cone models.

coordinate system) dimension of the cone.
Base Radius — Use the text field to specify the radius dimension at the base of the cone.
Top Radius — Use the text field to specify the radius dimension at the top of the cone.
All other tabs, for Model Type: Cone, are identical to those for all other Component and Model
Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for complete
information on all of these tabs.
1150
VERICUT Help
Model Type: Cylinder

The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Cylinder models.
The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Cylinder models that are associated
with Skin and Structure components in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation.
1151
VERICUT Help
section above. Configure Model menu: Model tab
The following features are specific to Cylinder models.

coordinate system) dimension of the cylinder.
Radius — Use the text field to specify the radius dimension of the cylinder.
All other tabs, for Model Type: Cylinder, are identical to those for all other Component and
Model Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for
1152
VERICUT Help
Model Type: Model File

The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Model File (STL, VERICUT Polygon,
VERICUT Solid, Sweep, SOR, IGES, CATIA V4, CATIA V5, STEP, ACIS, NX) models.
The following picture shows the Model tab that applies to Model File (STL, VERICUT Polygon,
VERICUT Solid, Sweep, SOR, IGES, CATIA V4, CATIA V5, STEP, ACIS, NX) models that are
associated with Skin and Structure components in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation .
1153
VERICUT Help
The following features are specific to Model File models.

Model File — Use the Model File feature to specify the file containing the model data. Click
on the (Open File) icon and use the Open file selection window that displays to select
the model file.
The following model file formats are supported in VERICUT:
VERICUT Polygon — A VERICUT Polygon file, or "Polygon file" for short, is an ASCII text
file that describes virtually any shape open surface or enclosed shape. Typical file
extensions: design- .dsn, fixture- .fix, stock- .stk, any- .ply
See VERICUT Polygon File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
VERICUT Solid — A VERICUT Solid file is a binary file containing data representing a cut
stock model. Typical File extension: .vct
See Save or Load a VERICUT Solid (.vct file) also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Also see VERICUT Solid File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
STL — A Stereolithography model file, also known as an "STL" or "SLA" file, is an ASCII
text or binary file which describes virtually any surfaced or solid model shape. Typical
file extension: .stl
See Stereolithography (STL) Model File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
1154
VERICUT Help
IGES — An IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) model file, also known as an
"IGES file", is an ASCII text file which describes virtually anything that can be modeled in
a CAD system. Typical file extension: .igs
See IGES Model File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional
information.
Sweep — A VERICUT Linear-sweep file, or "Linear-sweep file" for short, is an ASCII text
file that describes an extruded shape. A 2-D profile is defined in the XY plane, and then
swept (extruded) along the model's Z axis. Typical file extension: .swp
See VERICUT Linear Sweep File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
SOR — A VERICUT Solid-of-revolution file, or "Solid-of-revolution file" for short, is an

ASCII text file that describes a revolved shape. A 2-D profile is defined in the ZX plane,
and then revolved around the model's Z axis. Typical file extension: .sor
See VERICUT Solid-of-Revolution File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
CATIA V4 — A CATIA V4 model file is a binary file created using CATIA V4 Release 2.5.
This is the final release of CATIA V4. Typical file extension: .model
Use of these files in VERICUT requires a CATIA V4 Model Interface license, and the
installation of the CAD Model Interface files (aka the \"Spatial Technologies\" libraries).
See the CGTech web site for additional information.
CATIA V5 — A CATIA V5 file is a binary file created using CATIA V5 (requires CATIA V5
version R19 with VERICUT 7.1). Typical file extension: .CATPart
STEP — A STEP model file is a 3D model file formatted in STEP (Standard for the
Exchange of Product Data), an ISO standard exchange format; used for representing
three-dimensional data in a format that can be recognized by multiple programs. A STEP
model file is an ASCII text file.
1155
VERICUT Help
ACIS — An ACIS model file is model file created using the 3D ACIS Modeler (ACIS) owned
by Spatial Corporation (formerly Spatial Technology). An ACIS model file is an ASCII text
file. Typical file extension: .sat
Use of these files in VERICUT requires an ACIS Model Interface license, and the
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the ACIS Model Interface.
NX — An NX model file is a binary file created using Siemens NX CAD system (requires
NX6, NX7, NX7.5, NX8, or NX8.5 with VERICUT 7.3). An NX part file can be opened
directly in VERICUT if the following requirements are met.
1. NX6, NX7, NX7.5, NX8, or NX8.5 must be installed on the computer that's
running VERICUT.
2. 32 bit NX must be run with 32 bit VERICUT or 64 bit NX with 64 bit VERICUT.
3. An NX license must be available.
4. The following environment variables need to be set in VERICUT's environment:
UGII_BASE_DIR
UGII_BASE_DIR is setup by an NX installation in the system environment
space and typically points to the place where NX is installed, for example
C:/Program Files/UGS/NX 6.0/.
UGII_ROOT_DIR
UGII_ROOT_DIR is setup by an NX installation in the system environment
space and typically points to the location of the NX executable files, for
example C:/Program Files/UGS/NX 6.0/UGII/.
Also, UGII_ROOT_DIR must be set in the execution path (the "path"
environment variable).
Since a NX part file can contain multiple models, a pop-up window displays with a list of
models contained in the NX part file. If a model was named in NX, it is listed by name in
the window. If the model was not named in NX, it is displayed in the list as "Unnamed"
followed by a number as shown in the picture below.
You can select multiple models that are in a group by selecting the first model in the
group and the hold down the Shift key and select the last model in the group. You can
select multiple individual models by selecting the models while holding down the
Control (Ctrl) key.
1156
VERICUT Help
See the CGTech web site for additional information on the NX Model Interface.
Also see Installing the Model Interface Modules in the Installing CGTech Products
section of the CGTech Help Library.
Design Points — An ASCII text file, also known as an "inspection point file" that contains
point locations used to inspect the VERICUT model when performing an AUTO-DIFF Point
comparison operation. Typical file extension: .pts
See Design Points File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
Sketcher — Displays the Profile Sketcher window enabling you to edit or create a "Sweep
solid (.swp)" or "Revolve (.sor)" model file.
Selecting Sketcher with a Model Type: SOR highlighted in the Project Tree opens the Profile
Sketcher window in "Revolve" mode.
Selecting Sketcher with a Model Type: Sweep highlighted in the Project Tree opens the
Profile Sketcher window in "Sweep" mode.
1157
VERICUT Help
Selecting Sketcher with any other Model Type highlighted in the Project Tree displays the
Profile Type window enabling you to specify whether you want to open the Profile Sketcher
window in “Revolve” mode or “Sweep” mode.
Select the profile type (Revolve or Sweep), then OK to display the Profile Sketcher window
in the selected mode.
Use the Profile Sketcher window to create a new "Sweep solid (.swp)" or "Revolve solid
(.sor)" model file.
Cancel dismisses the Profile Type window without opening the Profile Sketcher window.
All other tabs, for Model Type: Model File, are identical to those for all other Component and
Model Types. See the Configure Component menu, Common Features section above for
1158
VERICUT Help
Open window for Models
Locations:
Project Tree > Configure Models branch menu
Project Tree > Configure Model menu
Project Tree > Models Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu >Add Model
> Model File
Project Tree > Model Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Add Model > Model File
The Open file selection window for models enables you to add one or more model files files
(ref. VERICUT File Descriptions in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for information
about supported model types.).
1159
VERICUT Help
The file selection window for models has some additional features on the right side of the file
selection window. Those features are described below.
Normals — This feature applies to STL file models only and indicates the direction in which
surface normals defined in the STL data point, relative to the model. Select Inward, Outward,
or Computed (let VERICUT determine the direction of the surface normals).
Units — Units (Inch or Millimeter) of the model file.
IGES Type — Use to specify whether the IGES file contains Profile, or Surface, data.
Assembly — Use this feature to specify whether you want a STEP model loaded as individual
components or as an assembly. This feature is only applicable to STEP files.
When toggled "off" (unchecked), the STEP file is loaded as a single model. When toggled "on"
(checked) the STEP file is loaded as individual components. A model will be created for each
component found in the STEP file.
Remove Reference — When toggled "on" (checked), an ASCII VERICUT Polygon File will be
created for CATIA V5, NX and STEP files. The reference to the CATIA V5, NX or STEP file will be
severed and the model is referenced by the newly created ASCII VERICUT Polygon File.
1160
VERICUT Help
Profile Sketcher window
Locations:
Project Tree > Configure Component menu > Add Model > Create Revolve
Project Tree > Configure Component menu > Add Model > Create Sweep
Project Tree > Configure Model menu: Model tab (Model File) > Sketcher
Project Tree > Configure Model menu > Add Model > Create Revolve
Project Tree > Configure Model menu > Add Model > Create Sweep
Project menu > Tools > Add(Modify) Cutter >Tool

Component tab:
Project menu > Tools > Add(Modify) Insert >Tool

Component tab:
(Revolve Profile)
Project menu > Tools > Add(Modify) Holder >Tool
Component tab:
Project menu > Tools > Add(Modify) Holder >Tool

Component tab:
(Sweep Profile)
The Profile Sketcher provides an easy graphical means of describing a profile in 2-D drawing
space. Profiles are sketched by connecting a series of lines and arc segments. You can select
points, enter point/arc data into the Profile entity list, or pick then edit entity values in the list.
You can also import the 2-D geometry from a DXF file. The profile displayed in the sketcher
window is constantly updated regardless of how you supply profile entity data, making it easy
to see what you've defined.
1161
VERICUT Help
The Profile Sketcher can be opened in either "Revolve" mode, where an "open" 2D profile is
rotated about the Z-axis to create a solid model or cutter/holder.
or in "Sweep" mode, where a "closed" 2-D profile is "swept" a specified distance along the Z-axis
to create a solid model or a cutter insert/holder.
1162
VERICUT Help
The Profile Sketcher is accessible from the Project Tree > Configure Component menu > Add
Model > Revolve/Sweep, from the Project Tree > Configure Model menu: Model tab (Model
File) > Sketcher and from Project Tree > Configure Model menu > Add Model >
Revolve/Sweep to create profiles that can be rotated about an axis, or swept along an axis to
create solid models. It is also accessible in Tool Manager to Add/Modify cutters, inserts and
holders.
The options available in the Profile sketcher will vary slightly depending on whether it was
accessed from one of the Model menu windows or from Tool Manager. Most of the features
are common regardless of where the window was accessed from and have identical
functionality. Those features that are specific to a particular function are located at the bottom
of the window are described in the Special Features section below.
Common Features
Entity list — Lists the point/arc entities that define the profile. The list is created by graphical
selection, or by pressing Add to add entities to the list. Existing data can be edited directly in
the Entity list.
Add — Adds a single entity to the Entity list. Once added, the entity type (Point or Arc) can be
changed, or data values edited.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted entity from the Entity list.
Delete All — Deletes all entities in the Entity list.
Import DXF — Opens the DXF Geometry window enabling you import two dimensional tool
geometry from files which comply with a de facto CAD system standard, the Data eXchange
Format (DXF) to add (or modify) individual cutter (or holder) components in existing tool
records.
1163
VERICUT Help
DXF File — Enter the /path/filename in the text field, or select (Browse) and use the
file selection window that displays, to select the DXF file containing the desired profile.
Import — Use to import the selected profile into the profile sketcher.
Cancel — Use to close the DXF Geometry window without importing the profile.
Fillet
Radius — Use this text field to specify the radius of the fillet to be created or modified. Use
with Create and Modify described below.
Create — Use to create a fillet at the selected point. Use Radius described above, to specify
the size of the fillet.
Modify — Use to modify a fillet. Select the fillet in the Entity List and then set Radius to the
new value. Finally, click on Modify to update the fillet.
Remove — Use to remove the highlighted fillet from the Entity List.
Chamfer
A chamfer can be defined at a corner between two line segments. To create a chamfer you
need to select a corner point, and then define two length parameters: (leg1 + leg2), or a
length and an angle parameter, e.g. (leg1 + angle2). See the picture on the following page.
If you specify two angle elements the chamfer will not be created, since two angles are not
enough information to define a chamfer. A message wil be displayed in the lower right
corner of the Profile Sketcher window.
When a chamfer is defined it can be modified by selecting it and changing the type and/or
the value of its defining parameters.
For example, if you defined a chamfer by leg1 = 1, angle1 = 30, you can now modify it by
specifying angle1 = 35, leg2 = 1.2. While you are working on your sketch, each chamfer
construction method will be remembered, and can be modified. However when you save
the resulting profile all chamfers will be save just as line segments, the construction details
forgotten.
1164
VERICUT Help
Entity 1 — Select one of the following entities (Leg1, Angle2, Angle1) from the pull-down
list and then enter the value (distance or angle) for the selected entity in the in the text field
next to the selected entity.
Entity 2 — Select one of the following entities (Leg2, Angle1, Angle2) from the pull-down
list and then enter the value (distance or angle) for the selected entity in the in the text field
next to the selected entity.
Create — Use to create a chamfer using the information supplied for Entity1 and Entity2
described above. Select Entity1 from the pull-down list and then enter the value in the text
field.
Select Entity2 from the pull-down list and then enter the value in the text field. Finally, click
on Create to create the chamfer.
Modify — Use to modify a chamfer. Select the chamfer in the Entity List and then set the
new entity type and/or values. Finally, click on Modify to update the chamfer.
Remove — Use to remove the highlighted chamfer from the Entity List.
1165
VERICUT Help
Example 1 – Create a 45 degree chamfer using a leg and an angle

1. Set Entity 1 = Leg1 with a value of 0.5.
2. Set Entity 2 = Angle 1 with a value of 45.
3. In the Sketcher Entity List, select the intersection point of the 2 lines where you want
the chamfer.
4. Select Create to create the chamfer. See the diagram below.
Example 3 – Create a 30 degree chamfer using a leg and an angle

1. Set Entity 1 = Leg1 with a value of 1.
2. Set Entity 2 = Angle1 with a value of 30.
the chamfer.
1166
VERICUT Help
Example 3 – Create a chamfer using 2 legs

the chamfer.
1167
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Clicking with the right mouse button in the Sketcher window (Revolve Profile or
Sweep Profile) displays the following shortcut menu:
These features provide the same functionality as those described above under Common
Features.
Sketcher window — Displays the current defined tool profile (blue line), based on the entity
list. The profile in the window is constantly updated to reflect current list data. The following
symbols may be seen in the sketcher window:
Tool origin — The tool origin is assumed by VERICUT to be the control point, or driven
point, on the tool. Typically, tool profiles are sketched relative to the tool origin to provide
proper cutting by the tool. However, the tool origin can be relocated at any time via
dragging the origin point. Tool origin display is controlled by the Origin feature on the
sketcher Toolbar (see below).
(blue dot) Entity point — This symbol indicates a point on the profile or an arc center
point. You can change the profile shape by dragging entity points to different locations. The
corresponding entity in the list is automatically updated.
(green dot) Selected entity point — This symbol indicates the entity selected for
editing. The corresponding entity in the list is also highlighted for editing.
1168
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Selecting a line segment in the Sketcher window selects both end points for editing.
Drag the line segment to the desired location and both end points are automatically
updated in the Sketcher window as well as in the Profile Entity List.
(red dot) Target selection point — This symbol follows the mouse and is the target for
graphical selection. Values displayed with the Sketcher axes below the sketcher window
reflect the target selection point location.
Sketcher axes — Axes that depict the coordinate system in which the tool profile is being
constructed. Values displayed with the axes reflect the target selection point location,
relative to the tool origin.
(Arrow) — The arror on the profile indicates the direction.
Arc / Pt — Controls the profile entity type being defined via graphical selection.
Arc Direction — Controls the direction of an Arc being defined via graphical selection.
Grid Size — When selected, displays a grid in the sketcher window. When a grid is displayed,
target and selected points snap to the nearest grid line intersection. Grid spacing is specified in
the data field located right of the GridSize label, and can be changed at any time. Clear the
checkbox to remove the grid and select or drag points anywhere in the 2-D drawing space.
Sketcher Message area — Located below the sketcher window, this un-editable text field
displays error and informational messages to assist you with defining tool profiles. If actions in
the Tool Manager, and/or sketcher, window are not as expected, check the VERICUT main
window message area for additional relevant messages.
Sketcher Toolbar — The icons on this Toolbar zoom in/out, fit, and pan the tool profile in the
sketcher window. See the table below for details. Sketcher icons:
Shortcut: The following keys provide instant access from the keyboard to dynamic viewing
options (press and hold keys while dragging): Dynamic Zoom — <Ctrl>, Dynamic Pan — <Shift>.
Icon: Name: Action:
Pan Pan/translate- drag mouse in the direction pan
1169
VERICUT Help
Zoom In Zooms in approximately 20% each time it is clicked
Zoom Out Zooms out approximately 20% each time it is clicked
Fit Fits the tool in the sketcher window
Origin When selected, displays the tool origin point
Undo Select to "undo" the previous action(s).
Special Features
The following features are only available in the Sweep Profile window:
Create Inner Loop — Use to create "inner loops" within the main profile used for creating
"swept" solid models. The "inner loops" will result in open areas in the "swept" solid model.
This feature is not available when the Sweep Profile window is accessed from Tool Manager.
1170
VERICUT Help
Example:
The following Sweep Profile window shows a main profile with four different shaped "inner
loops".
1171
VERICUT Help
When profile shown above is saved as a "swept" solid model file and then brought into
VERICUT, the resulting "swept" solid model is shown in the picture below.
Zmin / Zmax — Used to specify the starting and ending location along the Z-axis when creating
a "swept" solid model.
The following features are only available when the Sweep or Revolve Profile window is
accessed from the Tool Manager. The specific features available will vary depending on the tool
type (Mill, Turn, or Probe) and the tool component type (Revolved Cutter, Insert Cutter, or
Holder) and the profile window type (Sweep or Revolve).
information, see Tool Display Colors in the Tool Add/Modify window, Common Features
section.
Do Not Spin with Spindle — Toggle On (checked), or Off (not checked), to specify whether or
not the holder component spins with the spindle. For example, a milling tool holder would spin
with the spindle, while a turning tool holder would not.
Flute Length — Used to specify the length of the cutter having flutes or teeth that can remove
material.
Spindle Direction — Use to specify spindle direction for a specific revolved cutter. Choose CW
(clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise).
Thickness — Used to specify the thickness of the insert or holder (sweep profile only).
1172
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. For additional information on these Tool Manager features, see the specific tool
component in the Tool Definition window.
2. Also see Defining Profile Tool Shapes, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
1173
VERICUT Help
DXF Geometry window
Locations:
Profile Sketcher window > Import DXF
Tool Manager window > Add Tool> DXF Tool
Opens the DXF Geometry window enabling you to import two dimensional geometry from files
which comply with a de facto CAD system standard, the Data eXchange Format (DXF).
The Profile Sketcher window is accessible Project menu > Setup Models > Create Model File >
Revolve/Sweep and from Project menu > Setup Models > Define: Model tab to create profiles
that can be rotated about an axis, or swept along an axis to create solid models. It is also
accessible in Tool Manager to Add/Modify cutters, inserts and holders.
The options available in the DXF Geometry window will vary slightly depending on whether it
was accessed from one of the Profile Sketcher windows,
1174
VERICUT Help
or from Tool Manager.
Accessed from File menu > Import > DXF Tool:
Accessed from Mill Tool > Revolved Cutter > Revolved Profile window:
1175
VERICUT Help
Accessed from all other cutter profile windows:
Accessed from all Holder Profile windows:
Many of the features are common regardless of where the window was accessed from and
have identical functionality, Those features that are specific to either of the Model menu
windows or Tool Manager windows are noted in the feature descriptions below.
1176
VERICUT Help
Importing DXF Profile Data:

DXF File — Use to specify the DXF file containing the tool data. Enter the /path/filename in the
DXF File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Select DXF File window to
specify the/ path/filename of the file.
Mill / Turn — (Tool Manager only) Select Mill, or Turn to specify, the "type" of tool data being
imported.
Inch / Millimeter — (Tool Manager only) Select Inch, or Millimeter, to specify the "units" of the
tool data being imported.
Control at tip/ Control at DXF (0,0) — (Tool Manager only) Select Control at tip, or Control at
DXF (0,0), to specify the "control point" to be used for the tool data being imported. Control at
tip puts the control point at the tip of the tool (the point on the profile with the lowest Z value
is assumed to be the tip of the tool). Control at DXF (0,0) puts the control point at the 0,0 point
of the profile.
Component Table —
After specifying the DXF file, a record is created in the Component Table for each layer
contained in the file. You can re-order the records in the table by clicking on the button in the
first column of the record and dragging it to the desired position.
DXF Layer — This column displays the name, or number, identifier of the layer.
Profile — (Create Model File only) This column is used to identify the profile that is to be used.
Cutter — (Tool Manager only) This column is used to identify the "cutter" geometry data to be
imported. Click on the box in the appropriate layer row to activate it (checkmark is visible).
Holder — (Tool Manager only) This column is used to identify "holder" geometry data to be
imported. Click on the box in the appropriate layer row(s) to activate it (checkmark is visible).
NOTE: When the DXF Geometry window is accessed from the Tool Manager, only layers that
have been indicated as "cutter" or "holder" will be imported. If the DXF window was accessed
using Add > DXF Tool in the Tool Manager, only one "cutter" component can be imported, but
multiple "holder" components can be imported for each tool record.
Import — Imports the geometry data into the appropriate Profile Sketcher window, or in the
case of Add > DXF Tool in the Tool Manager, into the appropriate tool record/tool component.
Cancel — Use to close the DXF Tool Geometry window.
1177
VERICUT Help
DXF File Requirements:

Only the ENTITIES section of a DXF file is scanned by VERICUT. The BLOCKS section is ignored, so
BLOCK references within the ENTITIES section will not be expanded. REPEAT entities are also
ignored. The only geometric entity types processed are LINE, ARC, CIRCLE, POLYLINE,
LWPOLYLINE, TRACE, SOLID, 3DLINE and 3DFACE.
For Creating Solid Models

Import "open" 2D profiles to be rotated about the Z-axis to create "revolved" solid models.
Putting the start and end points of the profile off of the Z-axis will result in a solid model that is
open in the center like the one shown in the "Revolved Solid Model" picture below. To create
the model with a solid center, make sure that the start and end points of the profile are on the
Z-axis.
Open Profile
1178
VERICUT Help
Revolved
Solid Model
Import "closed" 2-D profiles to be "swept" a specified distance along the Z-axis to create a solid
model or a cutter insert/holder.
Closed Profile
1179
VERICUT Help
Swept Solid
model
For Creating Cutters, Inserts and Holders

VERICUT expects only one tool per DXF file. Each component (cutter or holder) of the tool
should be on its own named or numbered layer. There can be no more than one cutter
component, but multiple holder components are permitted. The DXF file may contain other
layers which are unrelated to the definition of the tool's geometry. Within each component
layer, LINEs, ARCs, CIRCLEs, POLYLINEs, LWPOLYLINEs, TRACEs, SOLIDs, 3DLINEs and 3DFACEs
can be used to define the profile of the tool.
For a milling tool, the Y coordinate of the DXF data corresponds to the tool's axis of rotation,
known as the Z axis in VERICUT's Tool Manager. The X coordinate of the DXF data corresponds
to the Tool Manager's X axis. An exception to this is a DXF file recognized by its use of layer
names as being generated by TDM Systems', Tool Data Management (TDM) system. In such a
file, the X-axis is the tool's axis of rotation, with the tool tip on the right, and the Y coordinate is
the radial distance from the rotation axis.
1180
VERICUT Help
DXF Data In VERICUT
DXF Data from TDM
1181
VERICUT Help
For a turning tool, the X coordinate of the DXF data corresponds to the lathe's axis of rotation,
known as the Z axis in VERICUT's Tool Manager. The Y coordinate of the DXF data corresponds
to the Tool Manager's X axis.
DXF Data In VERICUT
Cutter on Layer 1
Holder on Layer2
1182
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Translate tab

The features on the Translate tab enable you to translate the selected object via indicating
button. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon
Translate tab features

From / To — Use to specify the locations to move the object from and to, relative to the
machine origin. XYZ values can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the
field then clicking on a model. As you move the mouse over the VERICUT model, a crosshair and
vector show you the pending pick-point location. Graphical selection supports picking corner
points and midpoints of uncut model geometry, or virtually any point on machined features.
all of the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror) and
1183
VERICUT Help
show the selected object's position and angle, and can be used to move the object or verify its
current location. Values are shown relative to the parent component or machine origin,
depending on the feature that is selected.
Show Location Relative to Parent — When selected, it indicates that the object location is
shown relative to the parent component origin. Example follows.
Positioning a model — the model is moved relative to the component’s origin.
Show Location Relative to Csys — When selected, it indicates that the object location is shown
relative to the "active" Csys.
Position — Specifies the absolute XYZ position of the object, separated by spaces.
Angles — Specifies the absolute XYZ rotation of the object, separated by spaces.
A label, Mirrored, may be displayed on the Configure Model menu, Translate, Rotate,
Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror tabs below the Angles field as shown in the picture below.
This label indicates that the an odd number of mirror operations have been performed on the
model and the model matrix stored in the project/machine file is left handed.
If Mirrored label is not displayed below the Angles field, it indicates that the model matrix
stored in the project/machine file is righ handed.
1184
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Rotate tab
The features on the Rotate tab enable you to rotate the selected object about a rotation center
point. Movement occurs each time you press one of the rotation direction buttons: X+/X-, Y+/Y-
, Z+/Z-. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon
Rotate tab features

Center of Rotation — Specifies XYZ point location about which to rotate the object. XYZ values
can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the field then clicking a position
on a model. To see the center of rotation, press . To remove the center of rotation
to the machine origin.
1185
VERICUT Help
The remaining features on the Rotate tab, referred to as “location features”, are common to all
of the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror). They
are described above in the Configure Model menu, Translate tab section.
1186
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Assemble tab
The features on the Assemble tab enable you to move the selected object by assembling
(mating or aligning) it with other objects. Objects are assembled by mating or aligning one to
three planar surfaces with surfaces on other models. If a non-planar surface is selected,
VERICUT constructs a tangent plane at the pick point. The relationship of surfaces being mated
or aligned is known as a "constraint". If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon
in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous location.
Assemble tab features

Constraint Type — Specifies how to constrain selected surfaces during object movement.
Options:
Mate — Moves the object so the selected surface opposes the surface selected on the
second object (surface normals oppose each other).
Align — Moves the object so the selected surface is aligned with the surface selected on the
second object (surface normals point in the same direction).
Align Cylinder — This feature can be used to align a component, or model, by the axis of a
cylinder. The cylinder can be an STL model (if well defined) or a cut model. The cylinder
surface can be either an inner surface (hole) or an outer surface (pin).
1187
VERICUT Help
Follow the prompts in the logger to pick a common plane and two cylinders to align. Note
that plane orientation must be same as the cylinder axis.
When second constraint is also Align Cylinder the component or model is rotated about
satisfied constraint to achieve closest position of new constraint. The second constraint can
not be satisfied if the distances between holes or pins are different.
Offset — Use to specify a distance and direction (+ or -) in which to offset the constrained
surfaces. The offset is applied normal to the surface.
Reset — Use to reset constraints to receive new data.
1. For each constraint, click on , and then select the desired Constraint Type (Mate or
Align) from the pull-down list.
2. Specify an offset for the constraint if desired.
3. Click on to put the constraint in pick mode so that you can select the surfaces to be
constrained. The arrow will become highlighted as shown in the above picture for the
second constraint.
4. In the graphics area, select a surface on the object to be moved.
5. In the graphics area, select the surface to move the object relative to.
6. After selecting the two surfaces to define a constraint, VERICUT moves the object and
indicates the satisfied constraint with a checkmark as shown in the picture above for the
first constraint.
Consider the starting condition below for the examples that follow.
1188
VERICUT Help
Mated surfaces — the left side of the magenta model is mated with the right side of the yellow
model.
Aligned surfaces — the left side of the magenta model is aligned with the left side of the yellow
model.
The remaining features on the Assemble tab, referred to as “location features”, are common to
all of the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror).
They are described above in the Configure Model menu, Translate tab section.
1189
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Matrix tab

The features on the Matrix tab enable you to move the selected object via a twelve parameter
transformation matrix. If the applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project
Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous location.
Matrix tab features

APT NC programs. Its twelve parameters reveal the geometric attributes of the local
(transformed) coordinate system (CSYS) in terms of the machine origin.
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
1190
VERICUT Help
Update — Updates the object location to reflect the matrix table transformation. After
updating, press OK or Apply to move the object.
Apply Inverse — When selected, inverts the matrix so that its twelve parameters reveal the
geometrical attributes of the machine origin in terms of the local (transformed) coordinate
system.
The remaining features on the Matrix tab, referred to as “location features”, are common to all
of the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror). They
are described above in the Configure Model menu, Translate tab section.
1191
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Csys tab

The features on the Csys tab enable you to translate the selected object from one coordinate
system (CSYS) to another. Select the "From" CSYS and the "To" CSYS to move the object.
Movement occurs each time you press the Move button. If the applied movement is incorrect,
press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to return the object to its previous
location.
Csys tab features

From / To — Specifies the coordinate system to move the object from, and to. Select the
appropriate CSYS from each of the pull-down lists.
Move — Moves the selected object from the "From" CSYS to the "To" CSYS orientation.
The remaining features on the CSYS tab, referred to as “location features”, are common to all of
the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror). They are
described above in the Configure Model menu, Translate tab section.
1192
VERICUT Help
Configure Model menu, Mirror tab

The features on the Mirror tab enable you to mirror a model about a specified axis (plane).
Mirror tab features

The Mirror tab features are enhanced. The limitations and restrictions for mirror operations of
Pre - V 7.3 releases are eliminated. Pre-7.3 Mirror About and Mirror Relative To values will be
read and converted to use the enhanced features.
Mirror About and Mirror Relative To are now transient operations and are no longer stored in
the project/machine file.
The Position and Rotation values are no longer written to the project/machine file. Instead the
model matrix is written.
<ModelMatrix>
<MatrixXAxis X="float#" Y="float#" Z="float#"/>
<MatrixYAxis X="float#" Y="float#" Z="float#"/>
<MatrixZAxis X="float#" Y="float#" Z="float#"/>
<MatrixOrigin X="float#" Y="float#" Z="float#"/>
</ModelMatrix>
Pre-7.3 Position and Rotation values will still be read and supported.
1193
VERICUT Help
Mirror About — Use the features in the pull-down list to specify the plane that the model is to
be mirrored about.
YZ Plane (X direction) — The Mirror attribute is set to mirror about the YZ plane.
Before After
ZX Plane (Y direction) — The Mirror attribute is set to mirror about the ZX plane.
Before
After
1194
VERICUT Help
XY plane (Z direction) — The Mirror attribute is set to mirror about the XY plane.
Before
After
Mirror Relative To — Use to specify the coordinate system that the plane that you want to
mirror about is related to. For example, the XY plane of the model origin. The pull-down list will
contain the model origin (the default) and all available coordinate systems.
Mirror — After specifying the plane, and the coordinate system that it is relative to, press the
Mirror button to make the mirror take place.
all of the following Configure Model menu tabs (Rotate, Assemble, Matrix, Csys and Mirror).
They are described above in the Configure Model menu, Translate tab section.
1195
VERICUT Help
Configure Collision menu
Location:
Project Tree > Collision branch (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure Collision menu enable you to turn on Machine Collision
Detection and to specify the Tool to Stock/Fixture collision conditions that you want VERICUT to
check during processing.
Machine Collision Detection — Use to turn Machine Collision Detection “On” and “Off”. When
toggled "On" (checked), detects collisions between components specified in the Collision and
Travel Limits window, Collision Detect tab.
Open — Displays the Collision and Travel Limits window, Collision Detect tab enabling you to
control when collisions between machine components are detected, which components are
protected, and specify the tolerances used for detecting collisions.
Visible Stock and All Active Tools’ Holders — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will check
for collisions between the “active” tool’s holder components and any visible stock components
during processing.
1196
VERICUT Help
Near Miss — Use to specify a value that controls how close two components are permitted to
get to each other before a collision is reported. Enter a positive value to be alerted if
components come near each other within the specified clearance distance, zero to indicate that
the two components may not touch. A negative value is treated like zero.
NOTE: When toggled “on” (checked) the above settings will override Stock/Tool records in the
Collision and Travel Limits window (Project Tree: Collision branch right mouse button menu >
Open) and Stock/Tool and Tool/Stock records in the Machine Settings window (Configuration
menu > Machine Settings).
See Collision and Travel Limits window, Collision Detect tab, also in the Project Tree section of
Also see Machine Settings window: Collision Detect tab in the Configuration menu section of
VERICUT Help.
Visible Fixture and All Active Tools’ Holders — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will
check for collisions between the “active” tool’s holder components and any visible fixture
components during processing.
NOTE: When toggled “on” (checked) the above settings will override Fixture/Tool records in
the Collision and Travel Limits window (Project Tree: Collision branch right mouse button menu
> Open) and Fixture/Tool and Tool/Fixture records in the Machine Settings window
(Configuration menu > Machine Settings).
VERICUT Help.
Visible Fixture and All Active Tools’ Cutters — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will
check for collisions between the “active” tool’s cutter components and any visible fixture
components during processing.
NOTE: When toggled “on” (checked) the above settings will override Fixture/Tool records in
the Collision and Travel Limits window (Project Tree: Collision branch right mouse button menu
> Open) and Fixture/Tool and Tool/Fixture records in the Machine Settings window
(Configuration menu > Machine Settings).
1197
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Help.
Constant Gouge/Excess Check — Enables you to specify a maximum gouge value, and a
minimum excess value, and turn Constant Gouge Check on and off. Gouge areas found by
Constant Gouge Check during NC Program processing are displayed in the assigned Error color.
Off — Turns Constant Gouge Check off.
Maximum Allowable Gouge — Select Maximum Allowable Gouge from the pull-down list
and enter the value in the text field. Then select Apply to turn Constant Gouge Check on.
Minimum Allowable Excess — Select Minimum Allowable Excess from the pull-down list
and enter the value in the text field. Then select Apply to turn Constant Gouge Check on.
Constant Gouge/Excess Check can be toggled On/Off at any time during the simulation.
NOTES:
1. A design model must be present in the component tree for Constant Gouge Check to
detect potential gouges.
2. Constant Gouge Check is not compatible with FastMill. When cutting in FastMill mode,
use one of the AUTO-DIFF comparison methods instead.
Use the Comparison Tolerance features, on the AUTO-DIFF window, Settings tab to specify
tolerance values for Constant Gouge Check. Only gouges, greater than the specified tolerance,
will be displayed. You can turn Constant Gouge Check "off", change the tolerance, and
reprocess the NC program at any time.
See AUTO-DIFF window, Settings tab in the Analysis Menu section of VERICUT Help for
NOTE: A VERICUT Solid (.vct) file can be used for a design model when using Constant Gouge
Check to find gouges during NC program processing.
See Collision Branch, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, for information on
specifying the collision conditions between machine components that you want VERICUT to
check during processing.
The sequence of events that takes place when a collision is detected is dependent on how the
Animation Speed Slider is set and whether Stop at Max Errors is toggled "On" or "Off". See
What Happens When a Collision is Detected? also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help and VERICUT Composites Simulation Help for
1198
VERICUT Help
Configure Travel Limits menu
Location:
Project Tree > Travel Limits branch (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure Travel Limits menu enable you to turn “on” and “off “ machine
Travel Limit errors and display the Collision and Travel Limits window, Travel Limits tab enabling
you to specify the valid range of travel for each machine axis, and control when travel limit
errors are detected
Log Error for Over Travel — Toggles Log Error for Over Travel “on” (checked), to start machine
travel limit checking, and “off”.
Open — Opens the Collision and Travel Limits window: Travel Limits tab enabling you to specify
the valid range of travel for each machine axis, and control when travel limit errors are
detected.
1199
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System branch menu
Location:
Project Tree > Coordinate System branch (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure Coordinate System branch menu enable you to add a new
coordinate system (CSYS) to a Coordinate System branch. All of the following features are also
available on the Configure Coordinate System menu and are described in detail in the next
section.
1200
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu
Location:
Project Tree > Coordinate System (Configure “on”)
The Configure Coordinate System menu enables you to define, or modify a coordinate system,
also known as a "CSYS". It also enables you to specify the "active" coordinate system.
To see axis representing the "active" CSYS in the VERICUT graphics area, select View menu >
View Axes and toggle Display Active Coord. Sys. "on" (checked).
1201
VERICUT Help
A user-defined CSYS is typically used to locate an APT or CLS NC program for proper relationship
to the workpiece. You can also use a user-defined CSYS for defining section planes, or for
gathering measurement data.
NOTES:
1. Defining a CSYS is not recommended for locating G-Code NC programs simulated on a 3-
D machine, as this can cause the workpiece to move in the machine view. Instead, use
an Input Program Zero table, or Work Offsets table if work offsets are present in the NC
program file.
2. VERICUT can also be configured to process the following APT-CLS NC program records to
set the NC program CSYS: CATIA0, MSYS, VERICUT-MATRIX.
CSYS tab —Features on the CSYS tab enable you to attach the selected coordinate system to a
component, designate that the coordinate system be used for cut stock transition, and override
“global” coordinate system visibility and colors for the coordinate system.
Translate tab — Features on the Translate tab enable you to translate the selected CSYS via
indicating "from" and "to" points to move the CSYS. Movement occurs each time you press the
Move button.
Rotate tab — Features on the Rotate tab enable you to rotate the selected CSYS about a
rotation center point.
Construct tab — Features on the Construct tab enable you to construct a CSYS via a point
representing the CSYS origin, and two direction vectors representing the axes of the CSYS. Each
can be defined using points, planes and vectors.
Matrix tab — Features on the Matrix tab enable you to move the selected CSYS via a twelve
parameter transformation matrix.
Location features
The Location features are common to all Configure Coordinate System menu tabs and show the
selected coordinate system's position and angle, reverse the direction of a specific axis, and
specify the active coordinate system. Values shown are relative to the workpiece origin. If the
applied movement is incorrect, press the Undo icon in the Project Tree Top Icon Bar to return
the object to its previous location.
Position — Specifies the absolute XYZ position of the CSYS, separated by spaces.
Angles — Specifies the absolute XYZ rotation of the CSYS, separated by spaces.
Reverse X — Reverses the X axis of the "active" coordinate system. (See note below)
Reverse Y — Reverses the Y axis of the "active" coordinate system. (See note below)
Reverse Z — Reverses the Z axis of the "active" coordinate system. (See note below)
1202
VERICUT Help
NOTE: In order to maintain a right handed csys, the following will occur when an axis is
reversed:
If the X axis is reversed, then the Z axis is also reversed.
If the Y axis is reversed, then the X axis is also reversed.
If the Z axis is reversed, then the Y axis is also reversed.
Active Coordinate System — Toggle "on" (checked) the Active Coordinate System feature to
designate the coordinate system currently highlighted in the Project Tree to be the "active"
coordinate system. See Active Coordinate System below for additional information.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable to the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems
menu.
The following features are available on all Configure Coordinate system menu tabs and also on
the Configure Coordinate System branch menu.
Add New CSYS —
Project Tree, Configure Coordinate System menu —
When accessed in the Project Tree, Configure Coordinate Systems menu, adds a new
CSYS to the Coordinate Systems branch in the Project Tree. VERICUT automatically
provides a unique name for the CSYS. You can right-click on the default name and select
Rename from the menu that displays to rename the CSYS if desired.
New coordinate systems are created with zero translation and rotation values and
attached to the Base component. The newly added coordinate system is automatically
selected in the Project Tree. Use the Configure Coordinate System menu to make any
necessary modifications to the newly added CSYS.
If Add New CSYS was pressed in the Configure Coordinate System branch menu, the
Configure Coordinate System menu automatically displays enabling you to make any
necessary modifications to the newly added CSYS.
Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate System menu —
When accessed in the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems menu, adds a new
CSYS to the Coordinate Systems list in Tool Manager. VERICUT automatically provides a
unique name for the CSYS. You can right-click on the default name and select Rename
from the menu that displays to rename the CSYS if desired.
New coordinate systems are created with zero translation and rotation values and
attached to the tool origin. The newly added coordinate system is automatically
selected in the Coordinate Systems list. Use the Configure Coordinate System menu to
make any necessary modifications to the newly added CSYS.
1203
VERICUT Help
When accessed in the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems menu, VERICUT will read
the file and creates CSYS's attached to the selected component.
The Create CSYS While Simulating feature (described below) must be toggled Off when using
CSYS from File. This functionality is also available via the csys_file command line option.
When accessed in the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems menu, VERICUT will read
the file and create a CSYS attached to the selected tool.
Create CSYS While Simulating — When toggled "on" (the default), coordinate systems are
unconditionally created when a matrix statement is encountered in the NC program being
simulated. The coordinate systems are attached to the stock's parent (the "attach"
component). This feature must be toggled "off" when creating them on your own or using the
CSYS from File feature (described above).
NOTE: This feature is not applicable to the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems menu
1204
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu, CSYS tab

The features on the Csys tab enable you to attach a coordinate system to a component,
designate a coordinate system used for cut stock transition, and override "global" coordinate
system visibility and colors.
Attach Coordinate System To — Enables you to attach a CSYS to a particular component so that
if the component gets repositioned, the CSYS also gets repositioned, maintaining the defined
relationship. Select the component from the pull-down list.
menu.
Use for Cut Stock Transition — Use to designate that the coordinate system is used for
transitioning the cut stock(s) from one setup position to another. Stock transition coordinate
systems can be created for each Stock component.
The following features enable you to override the "global" visibility and color characteristics, set
with View menu > View Axes window: Coordinate Systems, for the individual coordinate
system currently selected in the Project Tree.
1205
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. This feature is not applicable to VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation and will be grayed out.
2. This feature is not applicable to the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate Systems menu.
Visible — When coordinate systems are set to be displayed using View menu > View Axes
window: Coordinate Systems, the Visible feature on the CSYS tab enables you to toggle the
display of an individual coordinate system "Off" or "On" (checked).
(Color Pallet)— The Color Pallet icon enables you to override the "global" coordinate
system display color. The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color for the
coordinate system. To change the color for the coordinate system, click on the (Color
Pallet) icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on the color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the coordinate system. The
color pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Configure
Coordinate System menu: CSYS tab will update to reflect the selected color.
The remaining features are common to all Configure Coordinate System menu tabs and are
described in detail in the Configure Coordinate System menu section above.
To Configure Coordinate System menu
1206
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu, Translate tab
The features on the Translate tab enable you to translate the selected CSYS via indicating
"from" and "to" points to move the CSYS. Movement occurs each time you press the Move
button.
From / To — Use the From and To text fields to specify the "from" point, and the "to" point, to
be used for moving the CSYS. XYZ values can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by
clicking in the field then clicking on a model. As you move the mouse over the VERICUT model,
a crosshair and vector show you the pending pick-point location. Graphical selection supports
picking corner points and midpoints of uncut model geometry, or virtually any point on
machined features or tool assembly features.
When working in the Project Tree, Configure Coordinate System menu the From and To points
are relative to the workpiece origin.
When working in the Tool Manager, Configure Coordinate System menu, the From and To
points are relative to the tool origin.
Move — Moves the selected CSYS by the incremental distance, as calculated from the "From"
Back — Moves the selected CSYS by the incremental distance, as calculated from the "To" point
to the "From" point location.
Local Translation — When toggled "on", From/To values are relative to the current CSYS.
1207
VERICUT Help
NOTE: This feature is useful when trying to align a CSYS to the center of a machined hole.
Position CSYS at Component Origin — Enables you to position the origin of the coordinate
system currently selected in the Project Tree at the origin of the selected component.
Click on the icon to enable you to pick a component in the graphics area. Once you have
clicked on the icon, the Position field becomes highlighted in yellow and the component origin
will display in the graphics area when the mouse pointer is held over a component. Selecting a
component in the graphics area sets the Position field to the coordinates of the selected
component’s origin and the origin of coordinate system that is selected currently selected in
the Project Tree will be repositioned to the coordinates.
menu.
1208
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu, Rotate tab

The features on the Rotate tab enable you to rotate the selected CSYS about a rotation center
point. Movement occurs each time you press one of the rotation direction buttons: X+/X-,
Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-.
Center of Rotation — Specifies XYZ point location about which to rotate the CSYS. XYZ values
can be entered (separated by spaces), or selected by clicking in the field then clicking on a
model. To see the center of rotation, press . To remove the center of rotation symbol
press the button again, or close the Coordinate System window.
to the workpiece origin.
Local Rotation — When toggled "on", the incremental rotation values are relative to the
current CSYS.
NOTE: This feature is useful when trying to align a CSYS to the center of a machined hole.
1209
VERICUT Help
1210
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu, Construct tab
The features on the Construct tab enable you to construct a CSYS via a point representing the
CSYS origin, and two direction vectors representing the axes of the CSYS. Each can be defined
using points, planes and vectors.
While the Construct tab is active, a marker is displayed in the graphics area (see the picture
below) showing the current position/orientation of the axis being constructed based on the
Construct tab settings. The display is updated each time you change a value on the Construct
tab. The marker is automatically clears when you leave the Construct tab.
1211
VERICUT Help
Origin (XYZ) — Use these features to define a point representing the origin of the CSYS.
Primary Axis (IJK) — Use these features to define a point or vector representing the direction of
the CSYS primary axis.
Secondary Axis (IJK) — Use these features to define a point or vector representing the direction
of the CSYS secondary axis.
For each of the items above, you can either enter the coordinates of the point, separated by
spaces, in the text field or select one of the construction methods and pick geometry in the
graphics area to define the item. Choose one of the construction methods from the pull-down
list, then click the arrow and follow the prompts in the message area to define the item.
The following construction methods are available:
1. Choose Circle from the pull-down list, and then click the arrow to enable selecting
geometry in the graphics area.
Follow the prompts in the temporary message area at the bottom of the logger to
define the circle center point.
The circle center point will display in the graphics area and the coordinates of the
center point will display in the text field of the entity that you are currently
describing on the Construct tab.
CSYS Origin — Define a point represented by the origin of an existing coordinate system.
NOTE: When using one of the point construction methods to define the Primary or
Secondary Axis, the origin is subtracted from the generated point to define the direction
vector representing the axis.
Vector — Define the direction of a CSYS axis by selecting a vector. (not available for Origin)
Plane/Plane — Define the direction of a CSYS axis by a vector represented by the
intersection of two planes. (not available for Origin)
Axis Order — Choose from the pull-down list to assign X, Y or Z to the Primary and Secondary
axes of the CSYS.
XY — assigns the Primary Axis to be X and the Secondary Axis to be Y.
YZ — assigns the Primary Axis to be Y and the Secondary Axis to be Z.
1212
VERICUT Help
ZX — assigns the Primary Axis to be Z and the Secondary Axis to be X.
Update — Use the values selected above to update an existing CSYS, or create a new CSYS.
When the Update button is pressed the following occurs:
1. The Primary Axis and the Secondary Axis are crossed to determine the third axis.
2. The third axis is then crossed with the Primary Axis to ensure that the Secondary Axis is
orthogonal.
3. The CSYS currently active in the Coordinate System window is updated with the
resultant orthogonal coordinate system and the origin. If no CSYS is currently active,
VERICUT creates a new CSYS and automatically assigns it a unique name.
1213
VERICUT Help
Configure Coordinate System menu, Matrix tab

The features on the Matrix tab enable you to move the selected CSYS via a twelve parameter
Matrix Table — The transformation matrix table is similar to the matrix used in programming
APT tool paths. Its twelve parameters reveal the geometrical attributes of the local
(transformed) coordinate system (CSYS) in terms of the workpiece origin.
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
1214
VERICUT Help
Update — Updates the CSYS location to reflect the matrix table transformation.
reveal the geometrical attributes of the workpiece origin in terms of the local (transformed)
coordinate system.
1215
VERICUT Help
Active Coordinate System
Locations:
Project Tree > Configure Coordinate System menu: Active Coordinate System
Project Tree > Coordinate System Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > Active
Project menu > Active Coordinate System
VERICUT Graphics Area Right Mouse Shortcut menu > Active Coordinate System
You control the "active" coordinate system, or "CSYS", that VERICUT uses for simulating NC
program motions, X-Caliper measurements, and sectioning models. A user-defined coordinate
system is typically used to locate an APT or CLS NC program in the proper orientation to the
workpiece.
Use one of the features listed above to make an existing CSYS the "active" CSYS. The Project
Tree features will make the highlighted coordinate system the “active” coordinate system. The
Project menu and VERICUT graphics area right mouse button features will display a list of
available coordinate systems enabling you to select the desired CSYS from the list to be the
“active” coordinate system.
If Display Active Coord. Sys., in the View menu > View Axes window, is toggled "on" (checked),
a coordinate system with the name of the active coordinate system will display in the VERICUT
graphics area as shown in the picture below. Only the "active" coordinate system will have the
marker displayed at its origin as shown in the picture.
1216
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: You can also change the active coordinate system by right-clicking in the view, and
selecting Set Active Coord. Sys. and selecting the desired coordinate system from the
displayed list. See Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started
Use the Configure Coordinate System menu to create additional coordinate systems.
1217
VERICUT Help
Configure G-Code Offsets menu
Location:
Project Tree > G-Code Offsets branch (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure G-Code Offsets menu enable you to add a new G-Code Offsets
table to the Project Tree. G-Code Offset tables are used to store work offsets specific to the NC
program file(s) in the current setup. These G-Code Offsets tables are stored in the Project file
(.vcproject, .vcs project, .vdaf project) and will override those stored in the Machine file. All of
the following features are also available on the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu and are
described in detail in the next section.
1218
VERICUT Help
Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu
Location:
Project Tree > G-Code Offsets table (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu enable you to add a new G-Code
Offset table record to the offset table highlighted in the Project Tree. G-Code Offsets tables are
used to store work offsets specific to the NC program file(s) in the current setup. These G-Code
Offsets tables are stored in the Project file (.vcproject, .vcs project, .vdaf project) and will
override those stored in the Machine file. All of the following features are also available on the
Configure G-Code Offsets menu for adding new G-Code Offset tables to the Project Tree.
1219
VERICUT Help
Offset Name — Use to identify the type of offset table to be added, or modified, if it already
exists. Choose one of the following offset table types from the pull-down list.
Base Work Offset — The Base Work Offset table is used to specify the location from which
work offsets are based.
Machine Zero — The Machine Zero table, formerly Input Machine Zero table, is no longer
used. It is retained for legacy purposes only.
Work Offsets — The Work Offsets table is used to store the work coordinate system offset
(fixture offset) values.
Program Zero — The Program Zero table is used to specify the programmed zero location of
a G-Code NC program file taking Tool Length Compensation into consideration.
Input Program Zero (Special Z) — The Input Program Zero (Special Z) table is used to specify
the programmed zero location of a G-Code NC program file.
RTCP Pivot Offset — The RTCP Pivot Offset table is used to specify the offset between the
Tool component origin and the tilting head pivot point.
RPCP Pivot Offset — The RPCP Pivot Offset table is used to specify the offset between the
Stock component origin and the rotary table pivot point.
SubSystem ID — Use to specify ID of the machine subsystem for which the table is being
defined.
Register — The Register number that will be used by VERICUT to access corresponding table
data. The Register number may correspond to an offset register number, or an integer value, as
required by a particular table.
SubRegister — This feature is only available for Work Offsets tables. It is used for controls, like
Yasnac, that support the sub-register feature.
Add — The Add feature will behave slightly differently depending on whether it is used in the
Configure G-Code Offsets menu (G-Code Offsets branch highlighted in the Project Tree) or in
the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu (G-Code Table highlighted in the Project Tree).
When Add is used in the Configure G-Code Offsets menu, a new offset table is added to the
Project Tree with a default table record highlighted. The Configure G-Code Offsets Table Record
menu is automatically displayed enabling you to specify values for the record. If the offset table
of the same type already exists, an error message is output.
When Add is used in the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu, a new default offset table
record is added to the highlighted G-Code Table the Project Tree. The new default table record
is highlighted and the Configure G-Code Offsets Table Record menu is automatically displayed
enabling you to specify values for the record. If an identical offset table record already exists,
an error message is output.
1220
VERICUT Help
Configure G-Code Offset Table Record menu
Location:
Project Tree > G-Code Offset table record (Configure “on”)
The features on the Configure G-Code Offset Table Record menu enable you to specify values
for G-Code Offset table records.
Features Offset Name, Subsystem ID, Register, and SubRegister show the G-Code Offset table,
highlighted in the Project Tree, which the table record is associated with. These features are
described above in the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu section.
1221
VERICUT Help
VERICUT offsets enable the position of a simulated machine’s axes to be adjusted by a specified
distance in order to position the tool at the correct location commanded in the NC program.
VERICUT provides two ways to enter table values. Select From/To Locations method enables
the NC Part Programmer to select a “From” reference feature on his virtual machine’s “tool
side” of the kinematic stack, and a “To” reference feature on the “part side” of the kinematic
stack, and VERICUT automatically calculates each axis’ offset value. The Select From/To
Locations method values will automatically be updated if the machine configuration or the
location of the CSYS origin changes.
You can also use the Enter Offset method to specify the offset directly by selecting two points
in the graphics display area and have VERICUT will calculate the Offset values between the
selected points, or by entering specific offset amounts to be assigned to each axis. The Enter
Offset method does not automatically update the values when there are changes in the
machine’s configuration or the location of the CSYS origin. This method emulates how offsets
are set and used in CNC controls.
Select From/To Locations — Enables you to specify table values based on a "relational" offset
between a "from" point and a "to" point. The "from" and "to" points are designated by
specifying a particular component or CSYS. VERICUT will use the origin of the component/CSYS
as the point. You can also specify an offset from the specified component/CSYS origin point.
Once this relationship has been established, you can change the machine configuration or the
location of the CSYS origin and the table values will updated automatically during the initial
Single Step or during Play to End.
For example: After Input Program Zero has been defined to be the offset from the Tool
Component to the "Program Zero" CSYS, you can change the machine configuration, or change
the location of "Program Zero" CSYS, and the Input Program Zero offset values will be updated
automatically during the initial Single Step or during Play to End.
NOTE: The offsets are calculated based on where the corresponding origin points are located
when all linear axes are driven to machine zero (zero with no offsets in place).
When Select From/To Locations is toggled "On", the From/To Feature/Name lists and the
Offset text fields become activated. Use the From/To Feature lists to specify whether the point
is associated with a Component or a CSYS (coordinate system). Use the From/To Name lists to
specify a specific component or coordinate system.
NOTE: Only the coordinate systems that have been defined with reference to a machine
component (i.e., visible in a Machine or Machine/Cut Stock view when Coordinate System axis
is toggled "on") will appear in the CSYS/Names lists. See the discussion for Project menu >
Coordinate Systems for more information on VERICUT Coordinate Systems.
Use the Adjust From Location and Adjust To Location text fields to enter 3 values, separated by
spaces, representing the X, Y, and Z offset from the specified origin point. You can also click on
1222
VERICUT Help
the "select" button , then pick a point in the graphics display area. You can pick the point in
either a workpiece or machine view. VERICUT will calculate the Adjust From Location or Adjust
To Location value between the selected point and the designated Feature/Name origin point.
Calculate Relative to Location — This feature enables you to have a relational offset
recalculated in the machine position where the offset will be used. The new position is
immediately calculated and stored and therefore is not dependent on the machine position
when the offset is activated.
Additional Offset — Use this text field to specify an additional offset value.
See the example Select From/To Locations method on the next page.
1223
VERICUT Help
Example:
In this example the offset is calculated by measuring from the Spindle component to a
coordinate system at the part program origin:
1224
VERICUT Help
In the above example the “spindle” component is a special component that is automatically
adjusted when a tool is mounted in the spindle. The distance from the spindle origin to the
driven point on the tool is automatically added to the offset calculation. Of course the values
change with each tool change.
Both the From and To choices provide options to support a large variety of NC programming
styles. Today most NC programs are designed to position the tool’s “tip” at the coordinate
locations in the NC program. And the coordinate locations are relative to the workpiece being
machined. However, some companies with 5-axis machines choose to program from the
intersection of rotary axes on the tool-side. And some choose to reference a location on a
fixture rather than the workpiece on the part-side. The Select From/To Locations method is
flexible enough to adapt to many different needs of many different VERICUT users.
The Select From/To Locations method also sets-up a relationship between the tool-side
component and the part-side component. This is useful when the reference frame of the NC
program changes during the middle of the program. This programming technique is often used
in Siemens 840D controls. It is also implied when different heads with additional axes or other
orientations are mounted on the machine in the middle of the NC program.
Enter Offset (or select 2 points) — when toggled "On", the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field
is activated enabling you to enter one to twelve numeric values as required by the specific
table. Multiple value entries require spaces between the values.
You can also click on the "select" button , then pick two points in the graphics display area.
You can pick the points in either a workpiece or machine view. VERICUT will calculate the Offset
value between the selected points.
For all other tables, Select From/To and Enter Offset (or select 2 points) are both inactive.
Enter the values in the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field as described for Enter Offset (or
select 2 points) above.
1225
VERICUT Help
In the sample window shown above, the current table is the Work Offsets table. The current
table entry is register "54", and contains the values "-17 -8 -16.5". The table is applicable to
subsystem "1" of the machine.
VERICUT supports two ways to input values into these tables from the G-Code Table Record
menu. Both use the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field, but use a different syntax):
Traditional format: values are entered in the order specified (XYZABCUVWABC) and are
separated by spaces.
WORD/VALUE format: (X10 C45)
In either case, the resulting display of the axis values will be in the WORD/VALUE format. Only
non-zero values will be displayed. In the case of all zero's, X0 Y0 Z0 will be displayed.
The WORD/VALUE format has the following rules:
1. Valid Words are: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, AA, BB, CC
2. Mixed formats are not allowed. You can use either the Traditional format, or the
WORD/VALUE format.
3. The Words can be entered in any order.
4. You only need to specify words with non-zero values.
1226
VERICUT Help
5. If a word is specified twice, the last value specified will be used.

If all values are zero, you can leave the field blank. In this case, the display will be X0 Y0 Z0.
1227
VERICUT Help
Configure Tooling menu
Tool Library File — The Tool Library File features enable you to open an existing, and save the
current Tool Library file (ref. Tool Library Files in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). The
/path/filename of the current Tool Library file is displayed.
(Open File) — Use to open an existing Tool Library file. Use the file selection window
that displays to select the desired Tool Library file. Most features on this window are
standard file selection window features that enable you to navigate through directories,
filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. A description of features specific to VERICUT
can be found in the Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting Started
Simulation Help.
1228
VERICUT Help
(Save File) — Saves (updates) the current Tool Library file. VERICUT will save the Tool
Library file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its present folder. Otherwise,
the Save Project File As window will display enabling you to specify a location to save where
you have write permissions.
(Save As File) — Opens the Save As File window enabling you to save the current Tool
Library file with a new name or in a new location. Most features on this window are
standard file selection window features that enable you to navigate through directories,
filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. A description of features specific to VERICUT
can be found in the Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting Started
Simulation Help.
(Tools) — Opens the Tool Manager window enabling you to create and maintain
VERICUT Tool Library files containing descriptions of cutting tools, or tool assemblies.
Tool Change By — Controls how VERICUT receives descriptions of cutting tools.
Cutter Desc. — Process parametric cutter descriptions in the NC program file. Examples:
CUTTER and VERICUT-TC comment records.
VERICUT TC — Process by PPRINT/VERICUT-TC cutter statements in the NC program file.
Tool Number — Process NC program records that reference tool or pocket numbers and
retrieve associated tools from a Tool Library file. Examples: TnM6 (G-Code NC programs),
LOADTL or LOAD TOOL, and TURRET. When using Tool Change by Tool Number, The tool
number is matched with the pocket number (ex: tool #5 in pocket #5).
List — Tool changes are done by referring to a list of tool change event-to-tool ID references
that retrieve associated tools from the current Tool Library file. The list is accessed via the
Tool Change By List button, described later in this section.
File Name — Tool changes are done by a tool from the current Tool Library file as specified
for each NC program file in the list. The window used to create the list is accessed via the
Tool Change By File button, described later in this section.
Tool Name — This option is only applicable when NC Program Type is set to NX CLS. Tool
Name refers to the tool identifier in the TOOL PATH/ statement in the NX CLS file.
Tool Change By List —When Tool Change By, described above, is set to List, clicking on the Tool
Change By List button displays the Tool Change List panel enabling you to to create and
maintain a list of references that link tool change events to tools stored in the current Tool
Library file. You can use this list to supply tools from the library for sequential tool changes, or
to replace tools specified for use in the NC program file. See the Tool Change List panel topic,
below, for additional information.
Tool Change By File — When Tool Change By, described above is set to File Name, clicking on
the Tool Change By File button displays the Tool Change By File Name panel enabling you to to
create and maintain a list of references that link an NC program file to a single tool stored in the
1229
VERICUT Help
current Tool Library file that is to be used to cut the NC program. You can use this list to supply
a tool from the library to cut the NC Program, or to replace a tool specified for use in the NC
program file. See the Tool Change List panel topic, below, for additional information.
Initial Tool — When toggled on (checked), VERICUT loads an initial tool from the current Tool
Library file. This action occurs automatically when the Project file is loaded, the NC program is
rewound, or the model is reset. Choose the ID of desired tool from the Inial Tool pull-down list.
This feature is useful when simulating NC programs for machines that have a tool loaded at the
time tool processing is started, and therefore do not have information about the first tool.
You can also use this feature to preload multiple tools in a milling machine (e.g. tool change
carousel), via selecting Initial Tool, but leaving the corresponding field blank. If you specify a
tool number, then that tool is forced in to all tool component positions.
NOTES:
1. This feature should not be used if you are using multiple NC program files.
2. This action also occurs when a "Turret" type component is present, such as commonly
used with turret lathe setups.
Tool Override — When toggled on (checked), VERICUT overrides the current cutter description
with a specified tool from the current Tool Library file. This action occurs immediately. Choose
the ID of desired tool from the Tool Override pull-down list. VERICUT uses the override tool
until you select a different tool ID or clear the Tool Override checkbox. When cleared, the tool
that would have been in use becomes the active tool.
Min. Cutter Height — Default height used when the current tool description does not specify
height, or when specified height is less than this value. This feature only affects milling cutters.
Control Point — Controls how milling tools are driven. By default, VERICUT drives the tool tip.
Material is removed based on NC program motion commands and the tool shape, relative to
the control point.
Options:
Tool Tip — Point located at the bottom-center of the cutter.
Corner Radius — Point located a distance equal to the cutter corner radius up from the
tool tip. With ball nose end mills, this point is commonly referred to as the "ball center".
NOTE: The Corner Radius option is only applicable to APT.
1230
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. If Corner Radius is used with non-ball nosed end mills, the offset is calculated along the
tool axis, from the tool tip to the center of the first arc encountered in the tool profile.
Corner Radius is only applicable to APT.
2. To specify a milling tool control point other than the tool tip or corner radius, define
tools via the Tool Manager and specify a control point offset via the tool's Properties.
This feature is not applicable to turning tools. Instead, define tools via the Tool Manager
and specify a control point offset via tool Properties.
Calculate Min. Cutter Extension — When toggled on (checked), VERICUT calculates the
minimum height required to avoid shank/holder collisions with the stock and all fixtures in a
Workpiece view, for both standard VERICUT, and FastMill mode.
NOTE: This feature only applies to milling cuts. It cannot be used for turning cuts.
When toggled on, all holders move down to the bottom of the cutter. The first holder and any
holders above it are processed independently, so one sees both the first and subsequent
holders move down to the same location and the cutter will not be seen. As cutting starts, the
holders move up as needed to avoid a collision with stock.
If potential holder collisions are detected during the simulation, VERICUT extends the cutter to
avoid the collision and adds this amount to the calculated height. The calculated extension
amount is automatically applied to the existing Gage Point Z value.
Note that the calculated minimum cutter extension could end up being shorter that the cutter
height defined in Tool Manager. If this is not acceptable, use the Do Not Shorten Cutter feature,
described below, to prevent Calculate Min. Cutter Extension from calculating a minimum
cutter extension value that is shorter than the cutter length defined in Tool Manager.
1231
VERICUT Help
Note that when these calculations are being performed, tool holder collisions are not reported
since VERICUT extends the cutter to avoid the collision.
If desired, you can include additional clearance in the calculation via specifying Holder
Clearance (see below). The final calculated height for each tool is displayed in the Log file Tool
Summary section under the "Min" column heading.
Update — The Update button enables you to view and save tool values adjusted by Calculate
Min. Cutter Extension at any time in the simulation. When simulating with Calculate Min.
Cutter Extension toggled on (checked) pause the simulation at any time and press the Update
button. VERICUT will display all of the tools and their adjusted values, that have been calculated
to the current point in the simulation, in the VERICUT Logger.
A message window will also display giving you the opportunity to save the adjusted tool values
to the tool library file. Responding Yes will save the values to to the tool library file and close
the window. Responding No will close the window without saving.
In either case, press the Play button to resume the simulation and the calculation of Min.Cutter
Extension values from the point that that you paused the simulation. You will be given the
opportunity to save all of the adjusted tool values at the end of the simulation, the same as if
you had not used the Update button.
Holder Clearance — Use to specify a clearance value to be added when calculating the
minimum cutter extension (see above). The clearance value is also included in the Log file
minimum height values.
NOTE: This feature is only active when Calculate Min. Cutter Extension is toggled "On".
Do Not Shorten Cutter — This feature enables you to control the way that Calculate Min.
Cutter Extension works. When toggled "on" (checked), Calculate Min. Cutter Extension works
the way that it did prior to V6.2.
Minimum cutter extension calculations begin with the cutter height defined in Tool Manager. If
potential holder collisions are detected during the simulation, VERICUT extends the cutter to
avoid the collision and adds this amount to the defined height. Using this method prevents
VERICUT from changing the cutter height to be shorter than originally defined in Tool Manager.
Cutter Visibility — Use the Cutter Visibility features to specify whether or not cutters are
cutter components in the setup.
Blank — Cutters are not visible in any view.
Workpiece View — Cutters are only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — Cutters are only visible in a Machine View (Machine, or Machine/Cut
Stock).
Both — Cutters are visible in any view.
1232
VERICUT Help
Holder Visibility — Use the Holder Visibility features to specify whether or not holders are
visible, and in what views. A check indicates "visible" in the view. The setting applies to all
holder components in the setup.
Blank — Holders are not visible in any view.
Workpiece View — Holders are only visible in a Workpiece View.
Machine View — Holders are only visible in a Machine View (Machine, or Machine/Cut
Stock).
Both Views — Holders are visible in any view.
Translucent — When toggled "on" (checked), visible cutters and holders are displayed in
translucent mode. When toggled "off" visible cutters and Holders are displayed in solid mode.
Translucent mode Solid mode
1233
VERICUT Help
Tool Change List panel

Opened by clicking on the Tool Change By List button in the Configure Tooling menu, the
features on this window enable you to maintain a list of references that link tool change events
to tools stored in the current Tool Library file. You can use this list to specify tools to use with
sequential tool changes, or to replace tools specified for use in the NC program file.
1234
VERICUT Help
The Tool Change List panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
VERICUT main window if you choose. See Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
The Tool Change List panel may also appear as shown in the picture below when it is docked in
certain docking positions.
List Tool Change By — Specifies the tool change event used to build the tool list from. Select an
option, and then press Build Tool List to have VERICUT automatically create the tool change
event list.
Options are:
Cutter Desc. — Changes tools when parametric cutter description records in the NC
program file are encountered, for example: CUTTER and VERICUT-TC comment records.
1235
VERICUT Help
VERICUT TC — Changes tools when VERICUT-TC statements in the NC program file are
encountered.
Pocket Num. — Changes tools when NC program records that reference tool or pocket
numbers are encountered, for example: TnM6 (G-Code tool paths), LOADTL or LOAD TOOL,
and TURRET.
Prog. Stop — Changes when "program stop" codes are encountered, for example: M0 (G-
Code tool paths) and STOP.
Pocket Num per File — Similar to Pocket Num., except creates additional entries in the list
for duplicate tool numbers that appear in different NC program files.
(Undo) — Use this icon to “undo” changes made in the Tool Change List panel. The icon
will be grayed out until a change is made in the Tool Change List panel. Once a change is made
in the Tool Change List panel the icon will display as shown here. Click on the icon to “undo” the
last change made to the Tool Change List panel. Click on the icon again to “undo” the next to
the last change and so on. There is no limit to the number of changes that you can “undo”.
Tool Change Event/Tool ID list — List of tool change events expected to occur during the
simulation as indicated by the active List Tool Change By option (see above), and IDs of the
tools to use for each. Event text must match the tool change record text exactly as it appears in
the NC program file. Type or left-click and choose the tool ID from an option list. Right-click to
add and delete tool list entries. For the Cutter Desc. and Prog. Stop options, the list represents
the sequential order of tool changes found in the NC program file(s), and tools to use for each.
A Pocket Num. list is a cross-reference index between the tool or pocket numbers referenced in
the NC program file(s) to tool IDs in a VERICUT Tool Library. A Pocket Num per File list is similar
to Pocket Num., except creates additional entries in the list for duplicate tool numbers that
appear in different NC program files.
The Tool Change List consists of the following columns of information.

Event — Displays the tool change event.
Tool ID — Displays the ID of the tool associated with the tool change event.
Add — This feature enables you to add a new tool change Event/Tool ID to the Tool Change
List. Select the Tool ID from the Tool ID pull-down list.
Delete — This feature enables you to delete the highlighted Event/Tool ID from the Tool
Change List.
1236
VERICUT Help
Clear All — Clears all Event/Tool ID records from the from the Tool Change List.
NOTE: Always reset VERICUT (press (Reset Model) on the VERICUT main window) after
making changes.
OptiPath Setting — Displays the OptiPath Setting, if any, that is associated with the
Event/Tool ID highlighted in the Tool Change List.
File # — Displays the number of NC program file in the NC Program list that the Event/Tool
ID, highlighted in the Tool Change List, is associated with. NC program files are numbered in
the order in which the appear in the NC Program list.
Initial Pocket — This feature is related to the use of tool chains. It displays the number of
the pocket that the Event/Tool ID, highlighted in the Tool Change List, will initially be
located.
When using Tool Change by List, the default initial pocket numbers are assigned as follows.
The first called tool is assigned to pocket 1, regardless of the tool number. The second called
tool is assigned to pocket 2, and so on. You can then change the pocket number for each
tool as necessary. When you do a Reset, the tool will display in the assigned pocket.
This feature is useful when using large tools that could interfere with each other if located
in adjacent pockets. Change the pocket location to ensure that all the tool changes are
collision-free.
Another use would be to optimize the tool change time for very short operations by
minimizing the tool selection time.
Curve Fit — this column is only visible when NC Program Type in the Configure NC Programs
menu is set to G-Code Data and one or more of the NC programs in the NC Programs list has
Curve Fit toggled on.
Prompt for OptiPath Settings while building the tool list — When toggled on (checked), causes
VERICUT to prompt for OptiPath settings during interactive NC program optimization. At each
tool change event an Optimization Settings window opens. Configure this window as desired to
optimize the cutting sequence, or choose "Do not optimize this tool". An OptiPath Library file
is created as you go containing the optimization settings defined for each optimized tool.
Skip Duplicate Cutter Descriptions — When toggled on (checked), causes VERICUT to skip
duplicate cutter descriptions when building the tool change event list. This feature is useful for
suppressing redundant tool changes often output by CAM systems for different cutting
operations by the same cutter.
Build Tool List — Builds a tool list by scanning the files in the NC Program list and looking for
the tool change events specified by the List Tool Change By feature (see above). When multiple
1237
VERICUT Help
NC program files are listed, a comprehensive tool change events list is created with all tool
change activity from all listed NC programs. Sample output is shown in the following image.
If a Tool ID in the Tool Change List does not exist in the current tool library file, the Tool ID will
appear in red text and at the very top of the Tool ID’s pull-down list. This condition can result if
the tool library file is changed or if the specific tool has been deleted from tool library file.
1238
VERICUT Help
Shortcuts:
1. Right-click in the Tool Change List table area to display the following menu:
Add and Delete provide the same functionality as described above.

2. Right-click anywhere else in the Tool Change List panel to display one of the following
menus depending on its “docking” status:
Floating Panel Docked Panel Overlay Panel
Overlay Panel — Converts the Tool Change List Panel from its current docking status to
an “overlay” panel.
Stick — Causes an open “overlay” panel to return to the “overlay” state when the focus
is lost (click on the “overlay” tag or anywhere outside the open “overlay” panel).
Dock Panel — Converts the Tool Change List Panel from its current docking status to a
“docked” panel.
Floating Panel — Converts the Tool Change List Panel from its current docking status to
a “floating” panel.
Close — Closes the Tool Change List Panel.
See the Using Tool Lists, Building a New Tool List and Add, Modify, or Delete Events in a Tool
List topics below for additional information.
1239
VERICUT Help
Using Tool Lists
VERICUT can change tools based on a tool change event list, or "tool list" for short. You can use
a tool list to specify the tools to use with sequential tool changes, or to replace tools specified
for use in the NC program file. All tool lists contain references that link tool change events to
retrieve tools stored in a Tool Library file. Refer to Create a New Tool Library, also in the Project
Tree section, for information about defining a library of tools.
Conditions that require using a tool list:
 Tools manually changed when "program stop" codes are processed. These NC programs
typically do not have tool descriptions, or references to IDs, or pocket numbers, except
possibly in comments.
 Tools changed via processing parametric cutter description records in the NC program
file, however, descriptions do not reflect true cutter shape.
 Tools changed via processing tool path records that reference tool or pocket numbers,
however, pocket numbers do not match the desired IDs of tools in the Tool Library.
 Using OptiPath to optimize cutting sequences via specifying optimization records for use
at tool change events.
1240
VERICUT Help
Building a New Tool List
Tool lists can be manually built via adding references to an empty list. However, the Build Tool
List feature provides a fast and easy way to automatically build a tool list based on the active
List Tool Change By option, and current list of NC program files to simulate. The procedure
below uses this method.
To build a tool list:
1. If needed, click on the (Project Tree) icon in the Toolbar, or click Project menu >
Project Tree in the menu bar to display the Project Tree.
2. In the Project Tree, specify the NC program files to be simulated in the setup.
3. In the Project Tree Configure Tooling menu, choose the List option from the Tool
Change By pull-down list.
4. Click on the Tool Change By List button to open the Tool Change List panel.
5. In the Tool Change List panel, choose the option from the List Tool Change By pull-down
that you want to use to generate the tool list. See Tool Change List panel, also in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
6. Toggle on (checked), Skip Duplicate Cutter Descriptions to have VERICUT omit
subsequent cutter descriptions with the same shape. (Recommended for most APT-CLS
NC program files.)
7. Click on the Build Tool List button to have VERICUT search the NC program(s) listed for
simulation in the setup and build a list of tool change events.
For each tool change event in the list, VERICUT will add the Tool ID of the tool
associated with the tool change event. A Tool ID displayed in red text indicates that the
TOOL ID does not exist in the current Tool Library file.
VERICUT will also add any OptiPath Settings associated with the tool, the file number
associated with tool change event, the tool’s Initial Pocket, and whether or not Curve
Fit is active.
8. Click on the in the Tool Change List tab to close the Tool Change List panel.
1241
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Events in a Tool List
Once a tool list is built, it handles all tool change activity during the simulation. If edits are made
to NC program file(s), it may be necessary to edit the tool list. Use the procedures below to add,
modify, or delete tool change events in the tool list for proper tool change activity.
To add a tool change event to the tool list:
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more
information.
4. In the Tool Change List panel, click on the Add button below the Event/Tool ID table. A
new "blank" tool change event is added.
5. In the Event field, left-click then type the exact text corresponding to the new tool
change event as it appears in the NC program file.
6. Left-click in the Tool ID field then type the tool ID , or select it from the Tool ID pull-
down list, to assign the tool to the new event.
To modify an existing tool change event in the tool list:
1242
VERICUT Help
information.
4. In the Tool Change List panel, click on the tool change event that is to be modified so
5. Edit the tool change event as required.
To delete a tool change event from the tool list:
information.
4. In the Tool Change List panel, click on the tool change event that is to be deleted so that
it becomes highlighted, then click the Delete button below the Event/Tool ID table. The
tool change event is deleted from the list.
Alternatively, you can right-click on the event so that it becomes highlighted and then
click on Delete in the menu that displays to delete the tool change event from the list.
5. Use the Clear All button to clear all tool change events from the list at one time.
1243
VERICUT Help
Tool Change By File Name panel

Opened by clicking on the Tool Change By File button in the Configure Tooling menu, this
feature is used for machining operations that use multiple NC program files in a setup and each
NC program file only uses a single tool. The Tool Change By File Name panel is used to assign a
Tool ID from the current Tool Library file to each NC program file.
VERICUT will add the list of all NC program files listed for the setup. Use the Tool ID pull-down
list next to each NC program file to specify the tool that is to be used for the program. Each
pull-down list will contain all of the Tool IDs for all of the tools in the current Tool Library file.
VERICUT will change tools based on NC program file names and the Tool Id that you have
assigned. The tool is changed at the start of processing eac NC program file.
The Tool Change By File Name panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it
inside the VERICUT main window if you choose. See Personalizing the VERICUT Main Window in
the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
See the Changing Tools by NC Program File Names topic below for additional information.
1244
VERICUT Help
Changing Tools by NC Program File Names
Use the procedure below to have VERICUT change tools based on NC program file names.
NOTE: This option requires using a Tool Library. See "Create a New Tool Library", also in the
Using VERICUT section, for information about defining a library of tools referenced by tool
changes.
To change tools with tool path file names:
2. In the Project Tree, specify the NC program files to be simulated in the setup.
3. In the Project Tree Configure Tooling menu, choose the File Name option from the Tool
4. Click on the Tool Change By File button to open the Tool Change by File Name panel.
The Tool Change by File Name panel will display with a record for each NC program
listed for the setup.
See Tool Change by File Name panel, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
more information.
5. In the Tool Change by File Name panel, click on the first NC program in the list so that it
becomes highlighted.
6. Click in the Tool ID column and then select the tool ID of the tool that is to be used for
cutting the highlighted NC program.
7. Repeat Step 6 for every NC program in the list.
8. Click on the in the Tool Change List tab to close the Tool Change by File Name
panel.
1245
VERICUT Help
Configure NC Programs Branch menu
Location:
Project Tree > NC Programs branch (Configure “on”)
Opened by selecting an NC Programs Branch in the Project Tree, the Configure NC Programs
menu enables you to specify the NC Program Type and add NC programs to the NC Programs
branch. The Configure NC Programs menu will display differently depending on the selected NC
Program Type as shown below.
NC Program Type — Type of NC program file for VERICUT to simulate. By default, VERICUT
simulates G-Code or "machine code data" NC programs destined for a 3-axis mill machine with
a "Fanuc-like" control. Using this option, you can quickly configure VERICUT to simulate NC
programs from all popular CAM systems.
Options:
G-Code Data — G-Code NC program file. With this choice, VERICUT uses a Machine file,
Control file, and G-Code settings (ref. Project menu > Processing Options > G-Code >
Settings) to interpret codes present in the file.
1246
VERICUT Help
VERICUT APT — Generic ASCII APT NC program file from virtually any source, including ACL
format.
NX CLS — NX CLS NC program file.
CATIA APT — CATIA APT source NC program file. This file must be processed from CATIA
using the CATUTIL function and typically has a ".APTSOURCE" extension.
CV APT — ComputerVision APT NC program file.
CADRA APT — CADRA APT NC program file.
APT (RevPost) — ASCII APT NC program file created from reverse post-processing G-Code
data.
Pro/MFG APT — Pro/Manufacturing APT NC program file.
NCL APT — NCL APT NC program file.
The following picture is representative of the Configure NC Programs menu for all of the
above NC program types.
Add NC Program Files — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add one
or more NC program files to the list.
Siemens VNC 840D — Displays the following Configure NC Programs menu.
1247
VERICUT Help
VNCK Control File — Selects a DAT, ARC or INI file from the konfig.dir folder associated
with the machine and project being simulated. As described above, a SRAM (.dat) file is
recommended, however ARC and INI files can also be directly used.
Main NC Program (MPF) — Selects the NC program being simulated. The main program
must have an "mpf" extension and should reside in the "project.wpd" folder if it is not
an external MPF.
External MPF — Indicates the MPF does not reside in the WPD folder. The 840D has
additional restrictions regarding "external files" defined in Siemens’ documentation.
Working Project Directory — Select the WPD folder for the application being simulated.
Note that this folder must have a ".wpd" appended to its name and must have the same
parent folder as the "konfig.dir" folder.
Stop VNCK — This button will kill the VNCK process. It should only be used if
communications between VERICUT and the VNCK is lost.
See 840D Virtual NC Kernel and Interface (VNCK) in the Converters and CAD/CAM
Interfaces section of the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
In addition to the NC program types above, VERICUT's converters enable you to simulate NC
programs from various CAM systems. See the "Binary Converter" topic in the Converters and
CAD/Cam Interfaces section of the CGTech Help Library.
See Add, Modify, or Delete NC Programs, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or
1248
VERICUT Help
Configure NC Program menu
Location:
Project Tree > NC program (Configure “on”)
Opened by selecting an NC Program in the Project Tree, the Configure NC Program menu
enables you to make the highlighted NC program Active/Inactive, assign a CSYS, edit or replace
the highlighted NC program and add additional NC programs.
Active — When toggled “on” (checked), the highlighted NC program file is designated as
“active”. When toggled “off”, the highlighted NC program file is designated as “inactive”. Only
NC program files designated as “active” are processed by VERICUT. "Inactive" NC program files
are indicated by red text in the Project Tree panel.
Assign CSYS — Use to assign a coordinate system (CSYS) to the highlighted NC program file.
Select the desired CSYS from the pull-down list. VERICUT will append the selected CSYS to the
NC program file in the Project Tree.
Edit — Opens the highlighted NC program in the NC Program Editor window.
programs to replace the NC program highlighted in the Project Tree.
1249
VERICUT Help
Add NC Program Files — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add one
or more NC program files to the list.
1250
VERICUT Help
NC Programs File Selection Window
Location:
Project Tree > Configure NC Programs menu > Add NC Program Files
The NC Programs file selection window enables you to add one or more NC program files (ref.
NC Program File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help. NC program files are ASCII text files that
contain data describing cutting tool positions, machine information, and other information
required to operate NC machine tools.
You can select one, or more, files at the same time. To select multiple files, try these
techniques:
Select multiple files in sequence — Click the first file in the sequence so that it becomes
highlighted, then press and hold the <Shift> key while clicking the last file in the sequence. The
first, last and all files between will become highlighted and can then be moved as a group.
1251
VERICUT Help
Select additional individual files — Click the first file so that it becomes highlighted, then press
and hold the <Control> key while selecting each additional file so that they become highlighted.
All of the highlighted files can then be moved as a group.
With either method, selecting a file a second time, while holding down the <Control> key, un-
selects the file.
The files are added to the Project Tree in the order that they appear in the NC Programs file
selection window.
When the desired files are selected, click OK to add the file(s) to the appropriate place in the
Project Tree.
See Using the NC Programs File Selection Window and Add, Modify, or Delete NC Programs also
in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for additional information.
1252
VERICUT Help
Using the NC Programs File Selection Window
1. Select the folder in the folder tree on the left side of the window containing the NC
program file(s) that you want to open. Use the (Up One Level) icon, located above
the folder tree, to quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
You can also select the folder from the Shortcut pull-down list, located above the folder
tree, if it is found there.
center section of the file selection window. Use the Filter feature to specify the type of
files that you want displayed.
3. Select one, or more, files that you want to add to the current Setup from those
displayed in the center section of the file selection window so that they become
highlighted.
Use the <Shift> key to select a range of files. Select the first file in the range, and then
hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the last file in the range.
Press and hold the <Control> key while selecting multiple individual files.
4. Click on the OK at the bottom of the window to add all of the files in the Current NC
Program list to the Project Tree and close the file selection window.
5. You can click on Cancel at the bottom of the window to close the file selection window
without making any NC program file changes.
1253
VERICUT Help
Also see Add, Modify, or Delete NC Programs, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
1254
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete NC Programs
NC program files are ASCII text files that contain data describing cutting tool positions, machine
information, and other information required to operate NC machine tools.
To add an NC program file to the NC Programs branch:

1. To add an NC Program file, in the Project Tree click in the NC Programs branch to display the
Configure NC Programs menu, and then click on Add NC Subroutine Files to display the NC
Programs file selection window.
You can also right-click on the NC Programs branch and select Add NC Program Files in the
menu that displays, or double-click on the NC Subroutines branch, to display the NC
2. In the NC Programs file selection window that displays, select the NC program file(s) to be
added, then click OK. If needed, refer to Using the NC Programs File Selection Window, also
in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
The new NC program file name(s) are added to the NC Programs branch.
To replace an NC program file in the NC Programs branch with a different file:

1. To replace an NC program file with another, in the Project Tree right-click on the NC
program that is to be replaced and then select Delete from the menu that displays.
2. Click in the NC Programs branch to display the Configure NC Programs menu, and then click
on Add NC Program Files to display the NC Programs file selection window.
You can also right-click on the NC Programs branch and select Add NC Program Files in the
menu that displays, or double-click on the NC Subroutines branch, to display the NC
3. In the NC Programs file selection window, type, or select the /path/filename of the
replacement NC program file, and then click OK.
The replacement NC program file name is added to the NC Programs branch.
1255
VERICUT Help
To delete an NC program file from the NC Programs branch:

1. To delete an NC program from the NC Programs branch, in the Project Tree right-click on
the NC program that is to be deleted and then select Delete from the menu that displays.
The NC program is removed from the NC Programs branch.
To delete all NC programs from the NC Programs branch, in the Project Tree right-click on
the NC Programs branch and then select Delete All from the menu that displays. All
subroutine are removed from the NC Programs branch.
Note that deleting NC program files from the VERICUT configuration does not delete the
files from your computer.
To edit an NC Program from within VERICUT:

1. To edit an NC program, in the Project Tree right-click on the NC program to be edited and
then select Edit from the menu that displays.
2. The contents of the NC program file will display in a text editor window. (see NC Program
Editor in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about the text editor window).
Edit the contents of the NC program file as necessary. When finished editing, select File
menu > Save (or Save As) in the NC Program editor main menu to save your changes.
3. Select File menu > Exit in the text editor main menu to close the text editor window.
See Configure NC Programs Branch menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
Also see Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines tab and Add, Modify, or Delete
Control Subroutines, in the Configure menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about "control"
subroutines.
Also see Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab and Add, Modify, or Delete Machine
Subroutines, in the Configure menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about "machine"
subroutines.
1256
VERICUT Help
Configure NC Subroutines Branch menu
Location:
Project Tree > NC Subroutines branch (Configure “on”)
Add NC Subroutines Files — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
See Add, Modify, or Delete NC Subroutines, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
1257
VERICUT Help
Configure NC Subroutine menu
Location:
Project Tree > NC Subroutine file (Configure “on”)
Edit — Opens the highlighted NC Subroutine in the NC Program Editor window.

Replace — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you select one, or more
external subroutine files to replace the NC subroutine files highlighted in the Project Tree.
Add NC Subroutine Files — Opens the NC Programs file selection window enabling you to add
See Add, Modify, or Delete NC Subroutines, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
1258
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete NC Subroutines
Subroutines, or "subs" for short, contain additional programming or machine commands, and
can exist within a G-Code NC program file or reside in files separate from the main G-Code
program. (See About Simulating Subroutines, in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
To simulate data contained in external NC subroutine files, use the procedures described below
to make VERICUT aware of subroutine file names and locations.
To add a subroutine file to the NC Subroutines branch:

1. To add an NC subroutine file, in the Project Tree click in the NC Subroutines branch to
display the Configure NC Subroutines menu, and then click on Add NC Subroutine Files to
display the NC Programs file selection window.
You can also right-click on the NC Subroutines branch and select Add NC Subroutine Files in
the menu that displays, or double-click on the NC Subroutines branch, to display the NC
2. In the NC Programs file selection window that displays, select the NC subroutine file(s) to be
added, then click OK. If needed, refer to Using the NC Programs file selection window, also
in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
The new NC subroutine file name(s) are added to the NC Subroutines branch.
To replace a subroutine file in the NC Subroutines branch with a different file:

1. To replace an NC subroutine file with another, in the Project Tree right-click on the
subroutine that is to be replaced and then select Delete from the menu that displays.
2. Click in the NC Subroutines branch to display the Configure NC Subroutines menu, and then
click on Add NC Subroutine Files to display the NC Programs file selection window.
You can also right-click on the NC Subroutines branch and select Add NC Subroutine Files in
the menu that displays, or double-click on the NC Subroutines branch, to display the NC
3. In the NC Programs file selection window, type, or select the /path/filename of the
replacement NC subroutine file, and then click OK.
The replacement NC subroutine file name is added to the NC Subroutines branch.
To delete a subroutine file from the NC Subroutines branch:
1259
VERICUT Help
1. To delete an NC subroutine from the NC Subroutines branch, in the Project Tree right-click
on the NC subroutine that is to be deleted and then select Delete from the menu that
displays. The NC subroutine is removed from the NC Subroutines branch.
To delete all NC subroutines from the NC Subroutines branch, in the Project Tree right-click
on the NC Subroutines branch and then select Delete All from the menu that displays. All
subroutine are removed from the NC Subroutines branch.
Note that deleting subroutine files from the VERICUT configuration does not delete the files
from your computer.
To edit a subroutine from within VERICUT:

1. To edit an NC subroutine, in the Project Tree right-click on the NC subroutine to be edited
and then select Edit from the menu that displays.
2. The contents of the subroutine file will display in a text editor window. (see Text File in the
Edit menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill
and Fastener Simulation Help for information about the text editor window). Edit the
contents of the subroutine file as necessary. When finished editing, select File menu > Save
(or Save As) in the text editor main menu to save your changes.
See Configure NC Subroutines Branch menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
Control Subroutines, in the Configure menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about "control"
subroutines.
Subroutines, in the Configure menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about "machine"
subroutines.
1260
VERICUT Help
Configure Saved In Process Files menu
Location:
Project Tree > Saved IP Files branch (Configure “on”)
Save As — Opens the Save In-Process As window enabling you to save an IP file at the "current"
state of processing.
Shortcut: Double clicking on a Saved IP Files branch in the Project Tree panel to expand the
Saved IP Files branch so that all of the IP files are shown.
1261
VERICUT Help
Configure In Process File menu
Location:
Project Tree > IP File (Configure “on”)
Open IP File — Opens (loads) the highlighted IP file.

Merge IP File — Merges the highlighted IP file into the current session. (ref. Merge (In Process
file), in the File Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Help).
Shortcut: Double clicking on an IP file in the Project Tree panel will open (load) the IP file in
VERICUT.
1262
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Menus and Features
File Menu
1263
VERICUT Help
New Project
The New Project option sets VERICUT to a "new" condition, with no files loaded.
See New Project in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
1264
VERICUT Help
Open (Project)
The Open option enables you to open an existing Project file with the current VERICUT session
settings.
See Open Project window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1265
VERICUT Help
Save Project
The Save Project option enables you to save (update) an existing Project file with the current
VERICUT session settings.
See Save Project in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
1266
VERICUT Help
Save As
The Save As option opens the Save Project As window enabling you to save Project files.
See Save Project As window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1267
VERICUT Help
Save All
Location:
File menu > Save All
The Save All option saves (updates) the Project file, Machine Files and Control Files associated
with the current setup. It provides the combined functionality of File menu > Save Project,
Configuration menu > Control > Save and Configuration menu > Machine > Save. In the event
that a file cannot be saved (for example not having write permissions in the specified folder) a
window will open enabling you to Save As.
Single Setup Project File:

When you select Save All for a single setup project file, the following will happen:
1. VERICUT will save the project file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its
present folder. Otherwise, the Save Project As window will display enabling you to
specify a location to save where you have write permissions.
2. VERICUT will save the machine file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in
its present folder. Otherwise, the Save Machine File window (ref. Save As (Machine
File) in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) will display enabling you to specify a
3. VERICUT will save the control file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its
present folder. Otherwise, the Save Control File window (ref. Save As (Control File) in
the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) will display enabling you to specify a
Multiple Setup Project File:

When you select Save All for a multiple setup project file, the following will happen:
1. VERICUT will save the project file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its
present folder. Otherwise, the Save Project As window will display enabling you to
specify a location to save where you have write permissions.
2. VERICUT will save the machine file associated with the "current" setup (ref. Current
Setup, in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.) if you have sufficient permissions
to save the file in its present folder. Otherwise, the Save Machine File window (ref. Save
As (Machine File) in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
1268
VERICUT Help
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) will display
enabling you to specify a location to save where you have write permissions.
3. VERICUT will save the control file associated with the "current" setup if you have
sufficient permissions to save the file in its present folder. Otherwise, the Save Control
File window (ref. Save As (Control File) in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help) will display enabling you to specify a location to save where you have write
permissions.
1269
VERICUT Help
In Process
Open (In Process file)
Location:
File menu > In Process > Open
Toolbar short cut for opening IP files:
The Open option opens the Open In-Process window enabling you to open (load) an In Process
file, or "IP file" (ref. In-Process File, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
IP files contain all the data necessary to re-establish a VERICUT session, including the current
VERICUT model (with previous processing), user interface settings, and a copy of the Log file.
1270
VERICUT Help
Merge (In Process file)
Location:
File menu > In Process > Merge
The Merge option displays the MergeIPro window enabling you to select the In-Process (IP) file
(ref. In-Process File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help) to be merged.
Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help.
Use the Merge feature to load an In-Process (IP) file without removing the current project from
VERICUT session. This feature enables you to create multi-setup project files, one setup at a
time without the need to reprocess previous setups. This is especially useful for setups that
take a long time to process.
IP files can be successfully "merged" as long as they contain fewer processed setups than the
number of setups in the project file that they are being merged into. If the IP file has an equal
number, or greater number of setups than the number of setups in the project file that they are
being merged into, then the Merge operation is equivalent to File menu > In Process > Open.
1271
VERICUT Help
When a "merge" operation is successful, the current VERICUT project data remains unchanged,
but the setups in the IP file, replace an equal number of setups in the project file. Any setups in
the project file, as shown in the Project Tree, below the setups merged from the IP file remain
unchanged.
NOTE: There are no checks, or validation, to determine whether or not the IP file is related to
current project.
Simple Merge IP file example:

1. Create the project file containing the first setup.
2. Process the first setup. If the results are OK, save an IP file (File menu > In Process> Save).
Save the project file (File menu > Save Project). The Project Tree should now look
something like the picture below.
3. Add the next setup to the project file. The Project Tree should now look something like the
picture below.
1272
VERICUT Help
4. Before processing the second setup, merge the IP file you saved in step 2. (You can either
use File menu > In Process > Merge in the VERICUT main menu, or in the Project Tree, right
click on the IP file shown in Setup 1 and select Merge IP File from the pull-down menu.)
5. Once the "merge" is complete, you are ready to process Setup 2 without re-processing
Setup1. Setup 1 is restored to the state it was in when you saved the IP file, Setup 2 is
unchanged.
1273
VERICUT Help
Save (In Process file)
Location:
File menu > In Process > Save
Toolbar short cut:
Click on the icon with the right mouse button to toggle between (Save In-Process) and
(Save In-Process As) modes.
The Save option saves (or updates an existing) In-Process file, or "IP file" (ref. In-Process File in
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help), with the current VERICUT model, including all currently
processed data.
VERICUT will save the In-Process file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its
present folder. Otherwise, the Save In-Process As window will display enabling you to specify a
In Process (IP) files are by default compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read these
(ref. Environment Variables in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information).
1274
VERICUT Help
Save As (In Process file)
Location:
File menu > In Process > Save As
Toolbar short cut:
Click on the icon with the right mouse button to toggle between (Save In-Process) and
(Save In-Process As) modes.
The Save As option opens the Save In-Process As window enabling you to save (or update an
existing) In-Process file, or "IP file" (ref. In-Process File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help), with
the current VERICUT model, including all currently processed data.
IP files contain all the data necessary to re-establish a VERICUT session, including the current
VERICUT model (with previously processed data), user interface settings, and a copy of the Log
file (ref. Log File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
1275
VERICUT Help
In Process (IP) files are by default compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read these
(ref. Environment Variables in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information).
1276
VERICUT Help
Saving or Opening a VERICUT In Process File
The 3-D VERICUT model with all machine cuts intact is savable in an In Process file, or "IP file".
You can also save IP files to "backup" the VERICUT session, safeguarding against lost work if the
session is interrupted by computer or power failure.
To save a new IP file or save an existing IP file with a different name:
1. Click File menu > In Process > Save As in the VERICUT main menu bar, or click on the
(Save In-Process As) in the Toolbar to display the Save In-Process As file selection
window.
If necessary, click with the right mouse button on the (Save In-Process) icon in the
Toolbar, to change to (Save In-Process As) mode.

2. Use the Save In-Process As file selection window to type, or select the /path/filename of
the file to save and then click Save.
The IP file is saved. You can open saved IP files as described below to reload the VERICUT
model and continue working.
To save an existing IP file under the same name:
1. Click File menu > In Process > Save in the VERICUT main menu bar, or click on the
(Save In-Process) icon in the Toolbar.
If necessary, click with the right mouse button on the (Save In-Process As) icon in
the Toolbar, to change to (Save In-Process) mode.

2. The IP file is saved. You can open saved IP files as described below to reload the
VERICUT model and continue working.
1277
VERICUT Help
To open an existing IP file:
1. Click File menu > In Process > Open in the VERICUT main menu bar, or click on the
(Open In-Process) icon in the Toolbar to display the Open In-Process file selection
window.
2. Use the Open In-Process file selection window to type, or select the /path/filename of
the file to save and then click Open.
If the VERICUT model was cut, choose Yes to reset the model and load the IP file data.
The IP file is opened and the VERICUT model is restored.
Tip: You can save IP files in batch mode using the File menu > AutoSave: In-Process tab.
See AutoSave window also in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
For additional Information on VERICUT In-Process Files, see In-Process File in the Getting
1278
VERICUT Help
Save Cut Stock
VERICUT Solid
Location:
File menu > Save Cut Stock > stock name
The Save Cut Stock option opens the Save Cut Stock window enabling you to save the selected
Cut Stock model as a VERICUT Solid file (.vct). This option is only active after a Cut Stock model
has been created by VERICUT. The default file extension is .vct.
Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help.
A cut stock model can be saved as a VERICUT Solid file "with features" or "without features".
Toggle the Save with Features option, in the Save Cut Stock window, On (the default) or Off.
When the cut stock model is saved "with features", the cut database, the full feature (cylinder,
plane, torus, etc.) database, cut and stock colors are stored in the VERICUT Solid file in addition
to the geometry data. When the cut stock model is saved "without features", only the
geometry data is saved in the VERICUT Solid file.
1279
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Solid (.vct) files are by default compressed when they are saved. VERICUT can read
these compressed files directly.
To disable writing compressed VERICUT Solid files, set the environment variable
CGTECH_COMPRESS=VCT (ref. Environment Variables in the Getting Started section of VERICUT
Help for additional information).
See VERICUT Solid File, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more information.
Also see Save or Load a VERICUT Solid (.vct file) in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help.
1280
VERICUT Help
STL (STL Output window)
Location:
File menu > Save Cut Stock > STL
The STL option opens the STL Output window enabling you to save the specified Cut Stock
model as either a VERICUT polygon (.ply) or as an STL (.stl) file. The STL feature is only active
after a Cut Stock model has been created by VERICUT.
Output File — Enter the \path\filename of the file to receive exported model data in the
Output File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the STL Output File file selection
window to specify the \path\filename.
File Type — Type of file to export.
Options are: VERICUT and STL
File Format — Format in which STL or VERICUT model data is exported.
Options are: ASCII or Binary.
Reduce Triangles — When unchecked (the default), the STL file is created using the original STL
output (as found under Model Export), with no triangle reduction. A Model Export license is not
required. When checked, the STL file is created using the triangle reduction method as in V6.1.
The state is saved in the project file as a global project setting (not a setup setting).
1281
VERICUT Help
Stock — When multiple Stock components are defined, this option enables you to select which
one to export.
Coordinates — Coordinate system in which model data is exported.
Options are: Stock (stock component origin) or Active System (See Project menu > Coord.
System).
Units — Unit measurement system in which model data is exported.
Options are: Inch or Millimeter.
Apply — Saves the STL Output window settings.

Output — Processes and exports the VERICUT model according to the STL Output window
settings.
Close — Closes the STL Output window.
1282
VERICUT Help
CAD Model (Export Cut Stock window)
Location:
File menu > Save Cut Stock > CAD Model
The CAD Model Option opens the Export Cut Stock window enabling you to export the VERICUT
model. Export formats include: Stereo lithography (STL) or VERICUT Polygon model files, or IGES
data. A cut VERICUT model is exported with machine cuts intact. During the export operation a
Model Export Boundaries window may open enabling you to manually close ambiguous open
boundaries that VERICUT was unable to resolve, prior to completing the export. When the
model has been exported, a message informs you how many IGES surfaces (or model file
triangles) were created.
1283
VERICUT Help
Tips on exporting models:

1. Make sure that Model Export Cut Mode in the Settings window: Project Settings tab
(Project menu > Settings) is toggled "On" (checked).
2. Make sure that Display Holders in Workpiece View in the Project menu > Processing
Options > Motion window is toggled "Off".
3. Make sure that Visibility is set such that models of fixture components are not visible in
the Workpiece View. See Model menu > Model Definition > Component Attributes tab
for more information.
4. When you cut the model a message similar to "For best AUTO-DIFF, OptiPath and Model
Results, set Cut Tolerance to 0.XXXX, due to small tool features" will appear in the
logger. Use this information as a starting point for setting Cutting Resolution values
Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings).
5. To export a higher quality model, reduce the Cutting Resolution.
6. You can section cut models, then export what remains in the sectioned view. This can be
helpful to export portions of complex models on computers with limited resources.
7. Also see Notes about Using Model Export, in the Notes about Special Topics section, in
Settings tab — Features on this tab establish general properties for the model export.
Options tab — Features on this tab are used specify properties related to specific methods of
processing VERICUT model geometry.
Apply — Saves the Export Model window settings.

Output — Processes and exports the VERICUT model according to the Export Model window
settings. During the export operation a Model Export Boundaries window opens providing
control over small surfaces that may cause problems in your CAD system. When the model has
been exported, a message informs you how many IGES surfaces (or model file triangles) were
created.
Close — Closes the Export Model window.
1284
VERICUT Help
Export Cut Stock window, Settings tab
Location:
File menu > Export Cut Stock
The features on the Settings tab enable you to establish general properties for the model
export.
Output File — Use this feature to specify the file that is to receive exported model data. Enter
the \path\filename in the Output File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Export Model File selection window to specify the \path\filename.
File Type — Use to specify the type of file to export. Options are: VERICUT, STL, IGES, CATIA V5,
ACIS, CATIA V4 and STEP.
File Format — Use to specify the format in which STL or VERICUT model data is exported.
Options are: ASCII or Binary.
Output Color — Use to specify the color that is stored in the IGES file for the exported model.
(Only active when File Type = IGES)
1285
VERICUT Help
Output Solid — Use to export a solid model. (Only active when File Type = CATIA V5, ACIS,
CATIA V4, or STEP)
NOTE: When Output Solid is toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT will attempt to output a solid
(face/edge-matched BREP) model. If it succeeds the message "Exporting Solid" displays in the in
the VERICUT logger. If VERICUT is unable to output a solid model, then the message "Exporting
Surfaces" is displayed in the VERICUT logger instead.
Stock — When multiple Stock components are defined, this option enables you to select which
one to export.
Coordinates — Coordinate system in which model data is exported. Options are: Stock (stock
component origin) or Active System (See Project menu > Coord. System).
Units — Unit measurement system in which model data is exported. Options are: Inch or
Millimeter.
Method — Controls the method of processing VERICUT model geometry into the specified data
format. Features and Patches, Features Only and Turned Features Only are only active when
File Type = IGES, CATIA V5, ACIS, CATIA V4, or STEP. Slices is only active when File Type = IGES
Options:
Features and Patches — Builds synthetic features from several small adjacent features that
are difficult to resolve in 'Features Only' mode. Analyzes the cut model using UV grid logic
and group machined features by grid region. Grid Count specifies the number of grid
squares in U and V space, spread over the cut model surface. VERICUT attempts to create
one surface within in each grid, or as few surfaces as possible. This option is recommended
for cut models with smooth or transitioning surfaces, for example: mold and die cavities and
patterns, blended or sculptured surfaces, etc.
Features Only — Groups similar machined features into like IGES data entities. This option
is recommended for cut models with distinct differences between machined features, for
example: aerospace structural components, pocketed parts, parts with strengthening
ribs/walls and stepped floors, etc.
Turned Features Only — Exports the turned, or "revolved", representation of the cut
model. Turned models are exported as an IGES file and contain the 2-D turned profile and
surface of revolution.
Slices — Exports the cut model such that resulting IGES output is a set of composite curves
representing slice profiles of the cut stock.
To Export Cut Stock window
1286
VERICUT Help
Export Cut Stock window, Options tab
Location:
File menu > Export Cut Stock
The features on the Options tab enable you to specify properties related to specific methods of
processing VERICUT model geometry. The options displayed will vary depending on the method
of processing (either Features and Patches or Slices) selected on the Settings tab.
Process = Features and Patches

Global Angle — Angle which, if exceeded, divides the machined surface into multiple IGES
surfaces. Enter the angle in degrees. Increasing the angle decreases output file size and
decreases IGES data accuracy. On "Grid" processed models Global Angle affects the output of
all machined surfaces.
NOTE: When you increase the Grid Count (more grid sections), the Global angle can also
typically be increased since fewer features are considered for each grid.
1287
VERICUT Help
Tolerance — Use to specify the amount that the exported model surface can deviate from the
cut model surface. The smaller the value, the closer the output model will approximate the cut
stock.
NOTE: This tolerance value should be equal to, or greater than, the cut tolerance.
Group by Color — When toggled "On" (checkmark visible), patches will be created to only
contain data related to a single color.
Detect Scallop Planes — Toggle "On" to activate "scallop plane logic" to process. Processing is
faster when toggled "Off".
Feature Collection — Use to specify the size of the area to be taken into account when
differentiating between a "feature" and a "surface". Select the appropriate "feature" tab,
(Plane, Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Torus, Torus Sweep, or Ellipse Sweep) then use the slider to
specify the size of the area. The percent value, shown above the slider, represents the
percentage of the total slider distance of the current setting, where the More end of the slider
is 0% and the None end of the slider is 100%. The number in parenthesis, shown above the
slider, represents the actual size of the area (specified in inches2, or millimeters2) to be taken
into account for the feature. This value is comparable to those shown in the Size column in the
Preview and Combine window. The slider displays yellow as soon as it is moved off the None
position.
The More end if the scale is approximately equal to .0001 of the part size. None end of the
scale is approximately equal to .1 of the part size.
Process = Slices
Slice Direction — Use to specify the direction of the slices. Select X, Y, or Z based on the axes of
the cut stock model.
Number of Slices — Use to specify the total number of slices to create.
NOTE: If the specified number is greater than the number of grid planes internally stored in
the cut stock database, the number of slices output will automatically be reduced to this
smaller value.
Local Angle — determines the max angle between 2 adjacent pieces of one slice when they still
can be combined in one segment.
Tolerance — Use to specify the amount that the exported curves can deviate from the cut
model surface. The smaller the value, the closer the output curves will approximate the cut
stock surface.
NOTE: This tolerance value should be equal to, or greater than, the cut tolerance.
To Export Cut Stock window
1288
VERICUT Help
Export Cut Stock, Preview and Combine window
After VERICUT completes a preliminary analysis of the model, the model display changes to
show multi-colored patches (see below), and the Preview and Combine window displays
enabling you to:
 Preview the model before going through the entire model export process. This enables
you to cancel the current export and update settings before proceeding.
 Merge adjacent patches for smoother output, faster model export, and smaller model
sizes.
 Split patches for more efficient merges.
VERICUT display for Preview and Combine Patches
1289
VERICUT Help
Most of the features available, and how to use them, are described right in the window. The
others are described below.
that the Preview and Combine window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics area
are to be applied to. When toggled “on”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick Highlight Color
specified in the File menu > Preferences window.
1290
VERICUT Help
(Pick mode) — Use to toggle "pick mode" on and off.

Opened/Closed — Use to specify whether the points selected while in pick mode create an
open or closed boundary. Pick mode must be toggled "off" in order to select Opened or Closed.
Reverse — Use to reverse the order of the points that are picked in pick mode. The direction of
in which the points are picked will affect which part of a patch is retained and which part will be
removed. It also has an affect on the direction of the resulting surface normal.
Split — Use this feature split a patch. Use either an Opened or Closed pick mode boundary to
specify the location of the split.
Collect — Use this feature to enable the collection of patches based on Opened/Closed
boundary construction.
Feature to Patch — Use to convert the selected feature to a patch.
Fit Patch — Use to resize and center the graphics window display around the selected
feature/patch. Select the feature/patch in the table or by clicking on the feature/patch in the
graphics area.
Tip: Click on the column headings in the Feature Table to sort the table by that characteristic.
For example, sorting by Size enables small features to be quickly identified.
1291
VERICUT Help
Export Cut Stock, "Combine" Example
The following example shows the process of combining a number of smaller patches into a
single patch.
When Preview and Combine Patches is toggled "On", VERICUT completes a preliminary analysis
of the model, then displays the model as multi-colored patches as shown below.
To combine patches, start by selecting the "initial" patch (in this case patch # 1) using the left
mouse button. The initial patch will display as shown below.
NOTE: Patch boundaries and numbers have been added for illustration purposes and will not
be seen in the VERICUT display.
1292
VERICUT Help
Select the first patch to be merged (in this case patch #2) with the middle mouse button. Any
patch adjacent to the "initial" patch could have been selected for merging. The display updates
as shown.
Continue selecting adjacent patches to merge using the middle mouse button. The picture
below shows the display after all 12 of the numbered patches have been selected for merging.
1293
VERICUT Help
When finished selecting patches to be merged, click on the part with the left mouse button to
combine the selected patches into a single patch as shown in the picture below.
1294
VERICUT Help
Export Cut Stock, Preview and Combine Techniques

The following techniques are provided to assist you in maximizing the quality of the models you
create using the Export Cut Stock features.
1. Avoid long narrow strips.
The first image shows original patches.
The second image shows a resultant long

narrow patch which should be avoided.
The third image shows an ideal resultant

patch.
1295
VERICUT Help
2. Consider neighboring node propagation.
The first image shows original patches.
The second image shows a resultant patch

which will be split do to neighboring nodes.
The third image shows what should be done

to minimize unnecessary splits.
1296
VERICUT Help
3. Merge small patches.
Use the table to identify small patches by

sorting by the Size column. Once small
patches have been identified combine small
patch with larger patch or combine a group of
small patches to create one large patch. The
image at the right shows a small patch (in
red) that should be merged with one of the
two larger patches.
4. Merge all small plane anomalies.
All small anomalies within a plane should be

combined with the plane. The first image
shows a plane (in red) with several small
anomalies within the plane.
The second image shows the plane with the

small anomalies combined with the plane.
1297
VERICUT Help
5. Consider initial design intent.
When combining patches take into

consideration intended design feature. The
initial design intent of the images below is a
cylinder.
The first image shows the original patches.
The second image shows the combined

patches considering the initial design intent.
1298
VERICUT Help
6. Tabulated cylinder representation.
Patches should be combined to represent a

tabulated cylinder. The first image shows the
original patches.
The second image shows what should not be

done.
The third image shows the ideal patch

combination abiding by the tabulated
cylinder rule.
1299
VERICUT Help
7. Use Split and Merge to improve fillets.
The first image shows the patches from the

original collection.
The second image shows the patches after

using split and merge to improve fillet areas.
8. Use Split and Merge to improve jagged boundaries.
The first image shows the original patch

boundary.
1300
VERICUT Help
The second image shows the patch, after

using split and merge to improve
boundary.
1301
VERICUT Help
Model Export Boundaries window
The features on the Model Export Boundaries window enable you to close difficult or poorly
defined feature trimming edges before exporting the model.
that the Model Export Boundaries window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics
area are to be applied to. When toggled “on”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick Highlight
Color specified in the File menu > Preferences window.
Feature/Boundary Table — Contains a list of features. Each "feature" contains one or more
open edges that VERICUT was not able to close automatically. Click on the "+" sign to the left of
the feature to display a list of edges associated with it.
Construct Mode — These options enable you to manually close open feature edges prior to
exporting the model. To activate Construct Mode, select any option in the list other than "Off".
A red and white "cross-hairs" cursor indicates when Construct Mode is active.
Options:
Off — Turns off Construct Mode. (You can also use the "escape" key on the keyboard)
1302
VERICUT Help
Project Edge — Use to extend an edge along a feature/feature intersection, one point at
a time by projecting the "Begin / End" point of the highlighted edge to the selected
point on the intersection.
Trim Edge — Use to eliminate overlapping boundary curves by trimming the "Begin /
End" point of the highlighted boundary to the selected location.
NOTE: It is better to trim the boundary short, leaving a small gap that can then be
closed than to have an "overlap" condition in the boundary.
Add Edge — Use to connect two edges within the same feature. The "begin/end" point
of the highlighted edge is connected to the "end" or "begin" point on the selected edge.
NOTE: Highlight the edge by selecting it in the Feature/Edge table or by clicking on the
edge in the graphics area with the center mouse button.
Construct Patch — Use to construct a patch to fill an open area between features.
Delete Edge — Use to delete the highlighted edge.
Reverse Edge — Use to reverse the direction of the highlighted edge.

Fit Edge — Use to resize and center the graphics window display around the highlighted edge.
Select the edge in the Feature/Edge table or by clicking on the edge with the center mouse
button in the graphics area.
Fit Feature — Use to resize and center the graphics window display around the selected
feature. Select the feature in the Feature/Edge table or by clicking on the feature in the
graphics area.
Clear — Use to clear the graphics display of "persistent boundaries".
Do Not Output Open Boundaries — Toggle "on" to prevent the export of open boundaries.
Persistent Boundaries — When toggled "on", enables you to display multiple feature
boundaries. Use to display the feature boundaries adjacent to the edge that you are trying to
close. Use Clear, described above, to remove "persistent boundaries" from the graphics display.
(Color Pallet)— The Color Pallet icon enables you to specify a color for the specied object.
The objects are defined below. The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color
for the object. To change the color for the object, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display
the color pallet window shown below.
1303
VERICUT Help
Click on a color in the color pallet window to specify the color for the object. The color pallet
window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Model Export
Boundaries window will update to reflect the selected color.
You can specify colors for the following objects:
Begin Point Color — Use to specify the color to display the "begin" point of an open feature
boundary.
End Point Color — Use to specify the color to display the "end" point of an open feature
boundary.
Boundary Color — Use to specify the color to display "open" feature boundaries.
Projection Color — Use to specify the color to display the projected feature curve that
displays when using Construct Mode options Project, Trim or Extend are used.
Selected Color — Use to specify the color to display "selected" open boundary color (the
highlight color of the active boundary).
Closed Color — Use to specify the color to display "closed" feature boundaries.
Node Color — Use to specify the color to display "node" points (the point where two
adjacent edge segments connect on a feature boundary).
Orphan Color — Use to specify the color to display “orphan” edge segments. An orphan
edge segment is an edge that is not associated with any loop.
OK — Creates the export file and closes the Model Export Boundaries window.
Output — Creates the export file and leaves the Model Export Boundaries window open.
Cancel — Cancels the export of the model.
1304
VERICUT Help
Review
The VERICUT Review options (Open Review File and Save Review File) enable you to create
review files and view them in the VERICUT Reviewer. The VERICUT Reviewer features are
similar to the features are similar to the ones found in NC Program Review. The difference is
that VERICUT Reviewer can be used within VERICUT or as a stand alone tool outside of
VERICUT.
The VERICUT Reviewer enables you to quickly and easily view, replay a previously processed
VERICUT Project file. The input to the VERICUT Reviewer is a VERICUT Review file (.vcreview).
The VERICUT Review file contains all of the information required to replay the toolpath and
machine simulation that was created in VERICUT.
The Review file is a binary file that contains all of the information required to simulate a
VERICUT Project file. It contains the model information required to display machine, cut stock,
1305
VERICUT Help
settings and a copy of the Log file.
NOTE: VERICUT Reviewer files are not upward compatible. They are only compatible with
VERICUT and VERICUT Reviewer of the same version that the reviewer file was created in. For
example, a reviewer file created in V7.2 is only compatible with VERICUT and VERICUT Reviewer
versions V7.2 and V7.2.x. They will not work in V7.3.
For complete information about the VERICUT Reviewer, see VERICUT Reviewer Help in the
CGTech Help Library.
1306
VERICUT Help
Open Review File
Location:
File menu >Review > Open Review File
The Open Review File option opens the Open VERICUT Review File file selection window
enabling you to specify the review file that you want to view in the VERICUT Reviewer.
After selecting the \path\filename of the review file that you want to view, click on Open to
open the VERICUT reviewer with the specified review file displayed.
For complete information about the VERICUT Reviewer, see VERICUT Reviewer Help in the
1307
VERICUT Help
Save Review File
Location:
File menu >Review > Save Review File
The Save Review File option opens the Save VERICUT Review File file selection window
enabling you to save a review file (.vcreview) that can be viewed in the VERICUT Reviewer.
NOTE: The Enable NC Program Review option in the Settings window : Project Settings tab
(Project menu > Settings) must be toggled "on" (checked) to activate the Save Review File
feature.
See Creating a VERICUT Review File, also in the File Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1308
VERICUT Help
Creating a Review File
The VERICUT Review file is a binary file that contains all of the information required to simulate
a VERICUT Project file. It contains the model information required to display machine, cut stock,
settings and a copy of the Log file. The following assumes that you have a VERICUT session up
and running.
that displays.

In the Open Project file selection window that opens, select, or type the /path/filename of the
file to open.
Click Open.
The Project file is opened. The current Project file name and unit measurement system are
displayed in the VERICUT window title bar.
In the VERICUT Simulation Controls, press on the (Play / Start-Stop Options) icon to start
the simulation. You can save a part of the simulation, or the entire simulation in the VERICUT
Review file. Use the (Pause) simulation control to stop the simulation before the end.
When you have created the simulation data, select File Menu > Review > Save Review File in
the VERICUT main menu bar to display the Save VERICUT Review File file selection window.
NOTE: The Enable NC Program Review option in the Settings window: Project Settings tab
(Project menu > Settings) must be toggled "on" (checked) to activate the Save Review File
feature.
In the Save VERICUT Review File file selection window, specify the \path\filename\ for the
review file to be saved and then click Save to save the review file.
NOTE: If you are creating a review file for the iPad Reviewer App, see Creating a Review File for
the iPad Reviewer App on the following page.
1309
VERICUT Help
Creating a Review File for the iPad Reviewer App
The VERICUT Review file is a binary file that contains all of the information required to simulate
a VERICUT Project file. It contains the model information required to display machine, cut stock,
settings and a copy of the Log file. The following assumes that you have a VERICUT session up
and running.
This section describes the how to create a reviewer file in VERICUT for reviewing with the iPad
Reviewer App. The following items must to be considered when creating a reviewer file
(.vcreview) for reviewing in the iPad Reviewer App:
 The App requires a .vcreview file created by VERICUT 7.3 (or 7.3.x).
 The App is able to display both Workpiece and Machine/Cut Stock views.
 The App does not show “replace material” even if it is saved in the .vcreview file.
“Replace material” makes the file SIGNIFICANTLY LARGER. Since “replace material” is
not used in the App do not save it in the review file.
 If you save a VERICUT report .pdf before saving the .vcreview file, then the .pdf file will
be added to the .vcreview file. The App has a button enabling you to view the VERICUT
report .pdf embedded in the review file contents.
 The following are good settings to use when creating a reviewer file for use on the iPad
Reviewer App.
1310
VERICUT Help
Follow this general procedure when creating reviewer files for use on the iPad Reviewer App.
The following assumes that you have a VERICUT session up and running.
1. In VERICUT, make the appropriate settings in the Properties window (File menu >
Properties).
that displays.
3. In the Open Project file selection window that opens, select, or type the /path/filename
of the file to open and then click Open.
4. The Project file is opened. The current Project file name and unit measurement system
are displayed in the VERICUT window title bar.
5. If you are planning to include a VERICUT Report pdf file in the reviewer file, ensure that
VERICUT is configured to create the desired data for the report.
6. In the VERICUT Simulation Controls, press on the (Play / Start-Stop Options) icon
to start the simulation. You can save a part of the simulation, or the entire simulation in
the VERICUT Review file. Use the (Pause) simulation control to stop the simulation
before the end.
7. If you want to save a VERICUT Report pdf file in the reviewer file continue with Steps 8,
9 and 10. Otherwise go on to Step 11.
8. Select the report template file to be used.
9. Enter any job specific, User-Defined Tag values required by the selected user template.
10. Create the Report.
11. When you have created the simulation data, select File Menu > Review > Save Review
File in the VERICUT main menu bar to display the Save VERICUT Review File file
selection window.
12. In the Save VERICUT Review File file selection window, specify the \path\filename\ for
the review file to be saved and then select Save to save the review file.
1311
VERICUT Help
Favorites panel
Location:
File menu > Favorites
The Favorites panel enables you quickly access frequently used directories and files without
using a file selection window each time. The Favorites panel is completely configurable so that
it can be set up to be the most beneficial for your work process. The Favorites panel is stored in
your user preferences file so that it remains available when you change project files.
The Favorites panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
1312
VERICUT Help
NOTE: When the Favorites panel is docked, make sure that you click in the window so that it
becomes the "active" window before using F1 to get help specific to the window. Otherwise F1
will go to the CGTech Help Library.
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Favorites panel.
(Close) — Closes the Favorites panel. This icon is only displayed when the Favorites
Toolbar
(Add a Favorite) — Opens the Add a Favorite window enabling you to add a “favorite”
folder or “favorite” file to your Favorites panel. A ”favorite” is a link to a folder of files or a link
to an individual file.
(Add a Folder) — Opens the Add a Folder window enabling you to add a folder to your
Favorites panel. Unlike a “favorite”, a folder is not a link. Folders are used to organize the
“favorite” directories and “favorite” files in your Favorites panel. Folders can be used to group
similar favorites as shown with the “Tools” structure in the Favorites panel on the previous
page.
(Edit) — The Edit icon opens the Edit Favorite window enabling you to edit the
information related to the “favorite” folder or “favorite” file that is highlighted in your Favorites
panel.
It opens the Edit Folder window enabling you to edit the information associated with the folder
that is highlighted in your Favorites panel.
(Delete) — Enables you to delete the highlighted folder, “favorite” folder or “favorite”
file from your Favorites panel. Note that if a folder that is part of a structure that has child
entities associated with it is deleted, the child entities will also be deleted. The “Tools”
structure in the Favorites panel on the previous page is an example.
(Import Favorites from a file) — Displays the Import Favorites file selection window
enabling you to select the Favorites file that you want to use. You have the option of appending
to the current Favorites file or replacing the current Favorites file.
1313
VERICUT Help
(Save Favorites to a file) — This feature enables you to save the Favorites settings to an
external file. Selecting Save Favorites to a file displays the Save Favorites to a File file selection
box enabling you to specify the \path\filename for the file to be saved.
Favorites Listing Area
The Favorites Listing Area displays all of the “favorite” directories and “favorite” files that you
have defined.
Tips:
1. Hold the cursor over a “favorite” folder in the Favorites Listing Area to display the full
folder path and file extensions associated with the the “favorite” folder. Hold the cursor
over a “favorite” file to display the full folder path to the file.
2. You can change the order of the items in the Favorites Listing Area by clicking on the
item with the left mouse button and while holding the mouse button down, drag the
item to the desired location and release the mouse button.
Filter
The filter shows the file extension, or extensions, that you have associated with the highlighted
“favorite” folder.
For example, if the Controls “favorite” folder and the Machines “favorite” folder shown in the
Favorites Listing Area above are linked to the same location (like the library folder of a VERICUT
1314
VERICUT Help
installation). When the Controls “favorite” folder is highlighted, the Filter is set to only display
files with a .ctl extension in the File Information section of the Favorites panel. When the
Machines “favorite” folder is highlighted, the Filter is set to only display files with a .mch
extension in the File Information section of the Favorites panel.
File Information
The File Information section of the Favorites panel displays the files that are associated with the
highlighted “favorite” folder. It also shows the Names of the files, the Size of the files, and the
Time (date and time) when the file was last modified. The picture below shows the display
resulting from the Machines “favorite” folder described above in the Filter section.
Tips:
1. Holding the cursor over a machine or project file in the File Information section will
display a thumbnail picture of the machine described by the machine file or the machine
used in the project file.
1315
VERICUT Help
2. You can click on a file in the File Information section of the Favorites panel with the left
mouse button and while holding the mouse button down, drag the file to the
appropriate location in the Project Tree then release the mouse button.
3. You can double-click with the left mouse button on a project (.vcproject), machine
(.mch), control (.ctl) or tool library (.tls) file in the File Information section of the
Favorites panel to load the file.
4. Click with the right mouse button in the Favorites listing area to display the following
menu:
The options Add a Favorite, Add a Folder, Edit, and Delete provide the same functionality as
described in the Toolbar section above.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted “favorite” folder/file from the Favorites panel and puts it in the
paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted “favorite” folder/file from the Favorites panel to the paste
buffer.
Paste — Adds the contents of the paste buffer after the highlighted “favorite” folder/file in the
Favorites panel.
Expand All Children — Expands all branches below the highlighted folder. If no directories are
highlighted, all branches in the Favorites Listing Area will be expanded.
Collapse All Children — Collapses all branches below the highlighted folder. If no directories are
highlighted, all branches in the Favorites Listing Area will be collapsed.
1316
VERICUT Help
Add a Favorite window
The Add a Favorite window enables you to add a new “favorite” folder or “favorite” file to your
Favorites panel.
(Favorite Directory) — Toggle on (depressed), to add a new “favorite” folder to your

Favorites panel.
(Favorite File) — Toggle on (depressed), to add a new “favorite” file to your Favorites
panel.
Location — Enter the path to the “favorite” folder/file that you want to add or click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Add a Favorite file selection window that displays to specify the path
to the “favorite” folder/file.
Name — Enter a name in the text box for the “favorite” folder/file that you are adding.
Create In — Select the desired path from the pull-down list. The list will contain all “favorite”
folder/folder paths defined in your Favorites panel. The default folder path is the path of the
“favorite” folder or “favorite” file that is highlighted in your Favorites panel. Click on the
(Add a Folder) to add a folder to the end of the Create In path.
1317
VERICUT Help
Filter — Enter one or more file extensions, separated by commas, for the types of files
associated with a “favorites” folder.
Include sub directories — When toggled on (checked), sub-directories of the selected new
“favorite” folder that contain files that match the specified filter will be added to your Favorites
panel. If a sub-directory does not contain any files that match the specified filter, it will not be
added to your Favorites panel. This feature is only active when (Favorite Directory) is
selected.
Add — Adds the newly defined “favorite” folder/file to your Favorites panel and then closes the
Add a Favorite window.
Cancel — Closes the Add a Favorite window without adding anything to your Favorites panel.
1318
VERICUT Help
Add a Folder window

The Add a Folder window enables you to add a new folder to your Favorites panel.
Name — Enter a name in the text box for the folder that you are adding.
Create In —Select the desired path from the pull-down list. The list will contain all “favorite”
“favorite” folder or “favorite” file that is highlighted in your Favorites panel. The new folder will
be added to the end of the Create In path.
Add — Adds the newly defined folder to your Favorites panel and then closes the Add a Folder
window.
Cancel — Closes the Add a Folder window without adding anything to your Favorites panel.
1319
VERICUT Help
Edit Favorite window

The Edit Favorite window enables you to modify the information associated with an existing
“favorite” folder or “favorite” file in your Favorites panel.
(Favorite Directory) — Toggle on (depressed), to modify the information associated with

an existing “favorite” folder in your Favorites panel.
(Favorite File) — Toggle on (depressed), to modify the information associated with an

existing “favorite” file in your Favorites panel.
Location — Enter the modified path to the folder/file or click on the (Browse) icon and
use the Add a Favorite file selection window that displays to specify the modified path to the
folder/file.
Name — Use to enter a new name in the text box for the “favorite” folder/file that you are
modifying.
“favorite” folder or “favorite” file that is highlighted in your Favorites panel. Click on the
(Add a Folder) to add a folder to the end of the Create In path.
Filter — Use to modify, or add, one or more file extensions, separated by commas, for the types
of files associated with a “favorites” folder.
Add — Adds your modifications to the “favorite” folder/file to your Favorites panel and then
closes the Edit Favorite window.
Cancel — Closes the Edit Favorite window without adding the modifications to your Favorites
panel.
1320
VERICUT Help
Edit Folder window

The Edit Folder window enables you to modify the information associated with an existing
folder in your Favorites panel.
Name — Use the text field to modify the name of the folder.
“favorite” folder or “favorite” file that is highlighted in your Favorites panel.
OK — Applies the modifications to the folder in your Favorites panel and then closes the Edit
Folder window.
Cancel — Closes the Edit Folder window without adding anything to your Favorites panel.
1321
VERICUT Help
Import Favorites file selection window

The Import Favorites file selection window enables you to select the Favorites file that you
want to use in the Favorites panel.
Most features on this window are standard VERICUT file selection window features that enable
you to navigate through directories, filter files, and type, or select, /path/filenames. See
Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT,
VERICUT Composite Simulation or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for Complete
information.
The following features are specific to the Import Favorites file selection window.
Append — Select this option to append the favorites contained in the selected file to the
favorites currently displayed in the Favorites Listing Area in the Favorites panel.
Replace — Select this option to replace the favorites currently displayed in the Favorites Listing
Area in the Favorites panel with the favorites contained in the selected file.
1322
VERICUT Help
Working Directory
Location:
File menu > Working Directory
Toolbar short cut:
The Working Directory option opens the Working Directory file selection window enabling you
to set the Working Directory to a location where you can open and save VERICUT files. After
setting the Working Directory, VERICUT will look here by default whenever files are saved or
opened. You can also quickly access files in this folder via the Working Directory entry in the file
selection window Shortcut list.
navigate through directories, filter files, and type or select file names. In this case, all that is
required is to select a folder. For additional information on VERICUT file selection windows, see
Introduction to VERICUT File Selection Windows in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
See Setting a Working Directory, also in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1323
VERICUT Help
Setting a Working Directory
When a Working Directory is set, VERICUT will look there by default when files are saved or
opened.
To set a Working Directory:
1. In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the Working Directory icon .

Or, in the VERICUT Menu bar, click File menu > Working Directory.
2. In the "Working Directory" file selection window that opens, select or type the /path/name
of the folder that you want to use as your Working Directory. You must have "write"
privileges to the selected folder.
Tip: You can append to the path shown at the bottom of the "Working Directory" file
selection window to create a new sub-folder and then use it for the Working Directory.
3. Click OK.
The Working Directory is set. You can now quickly access files in this folder via the Working
Directory entry in the file selection window Shortcut list.
1324
VERICUT Help
Preferences (Preferences window)
Location:
File menu > Preferences
The Preferences option opens the Preferences window enabling you to specify the VERICUT
project file (.VcProject) that you want displayed when you start the next VERICUT session, the
number of "recent files" that you want VERICUT to remember, and the PDF reader/web
browser that you want VERICUT to use for online Help.
1325
VERICUT Help
Start-up tab — Use the features on this tab to specify the VERICUT project file (.VcProject) that
you want displayed when you start the next VERICUT session, the number of "recent files" that
you want VERICUT to remember.
PDF/HTM/EditorL tab — Use the features in this tab to specify the location of the Adobe Reader
and/or the location of the Internet Browser that you want VERICUT to use to display online
Help and/or the location of the NC program editor that you want to use.
Display tab — Use the features in this tab to specify display characteristics (Look & Feel, Font
Size, Icon Size, etc.) that you want to use.
View Cube tab — Use the features in this tab to turn the View Cube On/Off/, specify View Cube
window size and View Cube color settings.
Save Current Preferences — This feature enables you to save the current preferences file
settings to an external file. Selecting Save Current Preferences displays the Save File file
selection box enabling you to specify the \path\filename for the file to be saved.
OK — Saves the window settings and closes the Preferences window.
Apply — Apply the settings on the current tab.
Cancel — Closes the Preferences window without saving the window settings.
1326
VERICUT Help
Preferences window, Start-up tab

The features on the Start-up tab enable you to specify the VERICUT project file (.VcProject) that
you want displayed when you start the next VERICUT session, the number of "recent files" that
you want VERICUT to remember.
Open standard VERICUT project — When toggled "on", the standard VERICUT project is
displayed upon startup. The standard VERICUT project is either vericut.VcProject, or
vericutm.VcProject, in the "library'" folder of your VERICUT installation depending on the way
environment variable, CGTECH_DEFAULT_UNITS, is set.
Start a new project — When toggled "on", the VERICUT session opens and displays the New
VERICUT Project window enabling you to specify information related to the new project file to
be created. See New Project, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on the
Open last project — When toggled "on", the new VERICUT session opens with the same project
file that was open when you closed the previous VERICUT session.
Choose project file on startup — When toggled "on", VERICUT displays the Open Project
window at startup enabling you to select a project file.
1327
VERICUT Help
# of recent files remembered — Use this feature to specify the number of "Recent Files" that
you want VERICUT to remember and display.
Clear all lists of recent files — Use this feature to clear all "Recent Files" lists. This includes the
"Recent Files" lists in the File menu in the main VERICUT window, Report Template window,
and in the Inspection Sequence window.
Suppress save and display thumbnail image — When toggled “on” (checked), the saving of a
thumbnail image when the project file is saved, and the display of the thumbnail image in the
Open Project file selection box, are both suppressed.
Auto-set working directory to current project folder — When toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT
automatically sets the Working Directory to the folder that the “current” project file was
located in.
Clear Log File on reset — When toggled “on” (checked), the Log File will be cleared whenever
you do a Reset Model.
Mouse Pick Highlight Color — Use the (Color Pallet) icon to specify a color for the “Mouse
Pick” indicator .
The right side of the (Color Pallet) icon shows the current color for the “Mouse Pick”
indicator. To change the color of the “Mouse Pick” indicator, click on the (Color Pallet) icon
to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the “Mouse Pick” indicator.
The color pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the Preferences
window: Start –up tab will update to reflect the selected color.
Perform refine display in the background — When this feature is toggled “on” (checked),
VERICUT will process Refine Display in the background enabling you to continue working while
VERICUT is processing a Refine Display. There is an indicator spinning in the lower right corner
of the VERICUT main window indicating that Refine Display is running in the background as
1328
VERICUT Help
When this feature is toggled off (not checked), VERICUT will process Refine Display in the
foreground as it did in the past.
# of threads for refine display — Use this feature to specify how many threads are to be used
to do Refine Display. This value will be applied regardless of whether Refine Display is running
in the foreground or running in the background. Setting the value to 1 will process Refine
Display with the single thread method used previously. The default value is 2.
Model File Edge Display — When this feature is toggled “on” (checked), the models in a
Machine or Machine/Cut Stock view are displayed as solid models with the edges highlighted.
Angle of model edges for polygon model — Used in conjunction with the Model File Edge
Display feature above, this feature enables you to specify the angle that determines when
VERICUT is to create an “edge”.
To Preferences window
1329
VERICUT Help
Preferences window, PDF/HTML/Editor tab

The features on the PDF/HTML tab enable you to specify the Adobe Reader and/or Internet
Browser that you want VERICUT to use to display online Help.
Adobe Reader — Enter the path/filename in the Adobe Reader text field, or click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Open file selection window that displays, to specify the path/file
name of the Adobe Reader that VERICUT is to use to display online Help.
NOTE: This feature is only available on Windows computers.
Internet Browser — Enter the /path/filename in the Internet Browser text field, or click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Open file selection window that displays, to specify the
/path/filename of the internet browser that VERICUT is to use to display online Help.
1330
VERICUT Help
NC Program Editor —Enter the /path/filename of the NC program editor that you want to use
in the NC Program Editor text field , or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Open file
selection window that displays, to specify the /path/filename of the NC program editor that
you want to use. This feature replaces the environment variable CGTECH_TPEDITOR.
All three of the above settings are stored in the Preferences File. For more information on the
Preferences File, see VERICUT File Descriptions, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
1331
VERICUT Help
Preferences window, Display tab

The features on the Display tab enable you to specify display characteristics (Look & Feel, Font
Size, Icon Size, Color Theme, Dynamic Controls and Reverse mouse wheel) that you want to use.
Display Features
Look & Feel — The Look & Feel option enables you to change the appearance of VERICUT's
user interface. All windows are affected. The look and feel of VERICUT can be changed at any
time. Choose the desired option from the pull-down list. Choose from the following:
1332
VERICUT Help
Metal —
1333
VERICUT Help
Motif —
1334
VERICUT Help
Nimbus —
1335
VERICUT Help
Windows —
1336
VERICUT Help
Windows Classic —
1337
VERICUT Help
Font Size — The Font Size features enable you to change the size if the font for all text used
in VERICUT (menus, VERICUT logger, windows, screen tips, etc.) Select the desired text size
from the pull-down list. The following pictures show the difference text size displayed for
each of the Font Size choices.
Default —
Medium —
Large —
X-Large —
1338
VERICUT Help
(Text Larger) — Use the Text Larger icon to make the text in VERICUT menus,
VERICUT logger, windows, screen tips etc. larger. Each time you click on the Text Larger
icon, the text gets incrementally larger to a maximum font size of approximately “24
point”.
1339
VERICUT Help
(Text Smaller) — Use to make the text in VERICUT menus, message logger, windows,
etc. smaller. Each time you click on "Text Smaller", the text gets incrementally smaller to a
minimum font size of approximately "6 point".
1340
VERICUT Help
Icon Size — The icons used throughout VERICUT are available in three different sizes. The
following features enable you to select the icon size used in VERICUT. A checkmark next to the
feature indicates the current selection.
Icon Small — Use this feature to indicate that the small size icon set is to be used
throughout VERICUT. A sample of the small size icon set is shown below.
Icon Medium — Use this feature to indicate that the medium size icon set is to be used
throughout VERICUT. A sample of the medium size icon set is shown below.
Icon Large — Use this feature to indicate that the large size icon is set to be used
throughout VERICUT. A sample of the large size icon set is shown below.
Color Theme
The Color Theme feature enables you to select a “favorite” color for the display of the VERICUT
Main window and dialogs. Select the desired color from the Color Theme pull-down list.
NOTE: This feature is only available when the Look & Feel feature is set to Windows.
1341
VERICUT Help
Sample Results
VERICUT Main Window
1342
VERICUT Help
Sample Dialog
Dynamic Controls
The Dynamic Controls option enables you to use the same mouse actions while in
VERICUT, that are required to perform dynamic pan, zoom or rotate in each of the supported
CAD systems. This parameter is saved in the Preferences file.
CATIA — Use the CATIA mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
EdgeCAM — Use EdgeCAM mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
GibbsCAM — Use GibbsCam mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
hyperMILL— Use the hyperMILL mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
NX — Use Siemens NX mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
Power MILL — Use the Power Mill mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and
rotate.
Pro/E — Use the Pro/Engineer mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
Top Solid — Use the Top Solid mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
1343
VERICUT Help
VERICUT — Use the VERICUT standard mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and
rotate. See Dynamic Zoom, Pan and Rotate in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
Wildfire — Use the Pro/Engineer Wildfire mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom
and rotate.
The following table summarizes how each dynamic feature was implemented for each CAD
system.
CAD System Pan Zoom Rotate
Hold middle mouse Hold middle mouse Hold middle mouse

button, drag the button, click left or button, hold left or
mouse. right mouse button, right mouse button,
CATIA
drag the mouse: Up and drag the mouse.
for larger, down for
smaller
Hold the mouse Rotate the mouse Hold the right mouse
wheel down and wheel: Toward you button down and
EdgeCAM
drag the mouse. zooms out, away drag the mouse.
from you zooms in
Hold Ctrl key, the Rotate the mouse Hold down the
left mouse button, wheel to Zoom In / middle mouse
and drag the Zoom Out. button and drag the
GibbsCam mouse. mouse.
Left mouse button,
and drag the mouse
to Zoom – trap
region.
Hold Ctrl key, the Hold down Shift key, Hold down the right
right mouse button, the right mouse mouse button and
hyperMILL
and drag the button, and drag the drag the mouse.
mouse. mouse.
Hold Shift key, Hold Ctrl key, middle Hold down the
middle mouse mouse button, and middle mouse
button, and drag drag the mouse (or button and drag the
NX the mouse (or, left & middle mouse mouse.
middle & right button, and drag the
mouse button, and mouse).
drag the mouse).
1344
VERICUT Help
Hold down Shift Rotate the mouse Hold the mouse

key, the middle wheel: Toward you wheel down and
PowerMILL
mouse button, and zooms out, away drag the mouse.
drag the mouse. from you zooms in.
Hold Ctrl key, right Hold Ctrl key, left Hold Ctrl key, middle
mouse button, and mouse button, and mouse button, and
drag the mouse. drag the mouse: drag the mouse.
Pro/E
Down or left for
larger, up or right for
smaller.
Hold middle mouse Rotate the mouse Hold Ctrl key, the
Top Solid button, drag the wheel to Zoom In / left mouse button,
mouse. Zoom Out. and drag the mouse.
Right mouse Rotate the Left mouse button,

button, drag (or, thumbwheel: and drag the mouse
hold Shift key, any Toward you for (or, hold Shift & Ctrl
mouse button, and larger, away for keys, any mouse
VERICUT drag the mouse) smaller button, and drag the
(or, hold Ctrl key, mouse)
any mouse button,
drag: Up for larger,
down for smaller)
Hold down Shift Hold down Ctrl key, Hold down the
key, the middle the middle mouse middle mouse
Wildfire
mouse button, and button, and drag the button and drag the
drag the mouse. mouse vertically. mouse.
Reverse Mouse Wheel — Toggle On/Off to reverse the action of mouse wheel motion.
1345
VERICUT Help
Preferences window, View Cube tab

The features on the View Cube tab enable you to to turn the View Cube On/Off/, specify View
Cube window size and View Cube color settings.
Display Cube — Use this feature to turn the display of the View Cube On or Off.
Window Size — Use this feature to change the size of the View Cube window. Use the slide bar
to specify the size that you want the View Cube window. The left side of the slide bar is the
smallest View Cube window size and the right side is the largest View Cube window size.
Color Settings — The Color Settings feature enables you to specify a color for each of the View
Cube features described below.
1346
VERICUT Help
Use the (Color Pallet) icon next to each of the View Cube features to specify a color for the
particular feature.
The right side of the (Color Pallet) icon shows the current color for the View Cube feature.
To change the color of the feature, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the color
pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the new color for the feature. The color
pallet will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon next to the View Cube feature
will update to reflect the selected color.
Cube Edge — Use this feature to specify a color for the View Cube’s edges as shown in the
picture below.
Cube Vertex — Use this feature to specify a color for the View Cube’s vertices as shown in the
picture below.
1347
VERICUT Help
Cube Highlight — Use this feature to specify a highlight color for the View Cube’s edges and
vertices. Holding the cursor over an edge or vertex will change the color of the entity to the
highlight color so that you can see exactly which entity you are about to select as shown in the
pictures below.
Highlighted Edge Highlighted Vertex
Icon/Arrows — Use this feature to specify a color for the View Cube’s icons and arrows as
Icon/Arrows Highlight — Use this feature to specify a highlight color for the View Cube’s icons
and arrows. Holding the cursor over an icon or arror will change the color of the entity to the
highlight color as shown in the pictures below.
1348
VERICUT Help
Window Background — Use this feature to specify a background color for the View Cube
window as shown in the picture below.
Putting it all together you get a View Cube window that lookd like the picture below.
1349
VERICUT Help
Convert
See Converters and CAD/Cam Interfaces in the CGTech Help Library.
1350
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface
Location:
File menu > Custom Interface
Toolbar short cut:
The Custom Interface option opens the Select book’s folder file selection window that enables
you to select an existing custom VERICUT User Interface for use; or for editing an existing, or
creating a new custom interface with VERICUT Customizer.
Folder "tree"— Enables you to specify the location for new custom interface folder or select an
existing custom interface folder. All files related to the notebook and custom interface are
stored in this folder.
Shortcut — Displays the Shortcut option list providing quick access to files in your Working
Directory, or CGTech library and sample files. Use the "Folder Up" icon to move to the next
higher level in the Folder "tree".
Folder — Use this text field to enter a /path/folder name to open an existing custom interface
notebook, or to create a new custom interface folder and open a new "empty" custom
interface notebook. You can also use the Folder "tree" to specify the path then append the
name for the new custom interface folder in the text field,.
1351
VERICUT Help
OK — Opens an existing custom interface notebook or creates the new custom interface folder
and displays new "empty" custom interface notebook.
Cancel — Ends book selection and returns to VERICUT.
1352
VERICUT Help
Introduction to VERICUT Customizer

The VERICUT Customizer, or "Customizer", is a standard VERICUT feature that provides the
tools to create a custom simplified VERICUT User Interface. VERICUT Customizer is designed to
simplify VERICUT usage for specific jobs or classes of jobs.
Include only the VERICUT functionality that you need in a custom interface and eliminate the
need to search through the wide range of features that are presented in VERICUT's "full
function" standard user interface to find the ones you need to use.
VERICUT Customizer:
 Enables you to graphically arrange and label buttons, choice lists, check boxes, etc. in a
way that is most meaningful in your particular work environment.
 Enables you to include instructions and pictures within the interface to prompt or
explain to the user how to use VERICUT to accomplish their job.
 Enables you to produce a simplified user interface that will make "new" or "occasional"
VERICUT users productive with minimal training.
1353
VERICUT Help
What does a custom VERICUT interface look like?
A custom VERICUT interface consists of two main parts, the "notebook" and the VERICUT main
window.
1354
VERICUT Help
Notebook
This is a simplified VERICUT user interface. It has been designed for a particular type or class
jobs. It contains only the functionality essential to the particular job type without the
complexity of the standard "full functionality" VERICUT user interface. A notebook can be
created with both "feature" and "help" pages.
Feature Pages - Contain features (buttons, text fields, choice lists, etc.) that enable you to pass
necessary information to VERICUT for processing. Each of the features selected for use on the
feature pages can be labeled in the language and/or terminology that is most appropriate for
the intended end user. Feature pages use XML files to store feature information.
Help Pages - Help Pages are used to include instructions, explanations and pictures within the
custom interface to assist the user in providing the necessary information to VERICUT. Help
pages are HTML files and GIF or JPEG images to illustrate the instructions.
VERICUT Main Window

The VERICUT main window in a custom user interface is similar to the standard VERICUT main
window without the main menu bar and a lot less icons. This makes using VERICUT much easier
to use for those who do not need the full range of functionality provided by the standard
VERICUT user interface.
What is involved with creating a custom VERICUT interface?

Creating and deploying a custom interface for use by VERICUT users involves the following
seven steps. Each of the steps listed below is described in the following section.
1. Set up a default user file.
2. Creating the notebook.
3. Determining the size of the notebook.
4. Adding custom interface features.
5. Adding custom interface help.
6. Test the custom interface.
7. Make the custom interface available for use.
1355
VERICUT Help
Setting up the Custom Interface Default Project File
Each customized interface notepad references a default project file. This project file is retrieved
by VERICUT each time the notebook is opened. It is advisable to preset as many parameters as
possible in the default project file. By doing this you will minimize the number of features that
will be required in the customized interface notebook and make it much simpler to use.
It cannot be stressed too much that the key to creating a concise, easy to use custom interface
is attention to detail in the design of the default project file. While there are seven steps
involved in creating a custom interface, it is estimated that as much time will be spent on this
first step as the other six put together. If you get the default user file right, the remaining steps
to create the custom interface will be much easier and the resulting notebook will be much
simpler to use.
The following topics should be considered when setting up a default user file for use with a
specific notebook:
 Use of colors
 Cut mode (Standard or FastMill)
 Units
 Tolerances
 Conditions for AutoSave
 Layout, orientation and attributes of Views
 Configuration of status window
 Report, log and result file names
 Machine and fixture models
 Toolpath type
 Tool change technique
 Motion, G-Code and APT settings
 Location of stock model within stock component
 Tool and OptiPath library
 Control parameters
 Machine parameters
Many of the parameters associated with the above topics can be set using features displayed
on the feature pages of the notebook, but if they are not going to change, there is no reason to
include them in the notebook. Just set them in the default project file. After all, the purpose of
the custom interface is to simplify the use of VERICUT.
1356
VERICUT Help
In many instances, creating multiple notebooks that reference different default user files can
simplify the use of a custom interface. For example, if you are creating a notebook to lead a
machine operator through processing a toolpath in VERICUT before running it on the machine,
it could be beneficial to create a notebook and corresponding default user file for each
machine/controller combination on the shop floor. That way the operator does not have to
enter machine/controller information every time. Just call up the appropriate notebook enter
the toolpath information, then process.
Notebooks should be created in such a way that the user is can only save the user file with their
input under a different name. Default project files should also have permissions set as "read
only" and stored in "write protected" directories and folders so they do not accidentally get
modified.
Now that you have tailored a project file for the notebook you intend to create, it's time to
create the notebook.
1357
VERICUT Help
Creating the Custom Interface Notebook

Creating a custom interface notebook:
Select File > Custom Interface in the VERICUT main menu to display the Select book's folder
window shown below.
Folder "tree"— Enables you to specify the location for the custom interface folder. All files
related to the notebook and custom interface are stored in this folder.
Shortcut — Displays the Shortcut option list providing quick access to files in your Working
Directory, or CGTech library and sample files. Use the "Folder Up" icon to move to the next
higher level in the Folder "tree".
Folder — Use this text field to enter a /path/folder name, or use the Folder "tree" to specify the
path and append the name in the text field, for the new custom interface folder.
OK — Creates the folder and displays the new custom interface notebook.
Cancel — Ends book selection and returns to VERICUT.
1358
VERICUT Help
The notebook:
1359
VERICUT Help
Notice that when the notebook is created it contains no pages. Adding pages will be discussed
later. The custom interface notebook header shows the folder that the notebook is associated
with. The main menu bar contains the following options:
File:
Open — Displays the Select book's folder window allowing you to open another custom
interface notebook for editing or create a new notebook.
Recent — Displays a list of recently opened files. To open a file in the list, select the desired file.
Close Book — Closes the VERICUT custom interface and displays the standard VERICUT
interface.
Exit VERICUT — Ends the VERICUT session.
Layout:
BookWest — Positions the notebook on the left side of the VERICUT main window.
BookEast — Positions the notebook on the right side of the VERICUT main window.
BookOver — Overlays the notebook on top of the VERICUT main window. Left click on
the notebook's header and drag to any position.
1360
VERICUT Help
Minimize — Reduces the notebook size to only display the custom Interface header and
main menu bar.
One Page — Use to display the custom interface notebook as a single page.
Two Pages — Use to display the custom interface notebook as two pages.
Help:
On VERICUT — Starts VERICUT Help.

About VERICUT — Opens a window that displays information about the current VERICUT
session.
Notebook modes:
User mode:
When a notebook is in "user" mode it can only be used to interact with VERICUT. It cannot be
modified or edited in any way. When a notebook is opened, it is always in "user" mode, even
when it is new and empty. If password protection for "author" mode is in effect, the following
window will be displayed when the F7 key is used to enter "author" mode:
Password — Enter the correct password in the

text field and select Unlock to allow entry to
"author" mode.
Unlock — Use with Password above, to allow
entry to "author" mode.
Cancel — Use to dismiss the access window.
1361
VERICUT Help
Author mode:
When a custom interface notebook is in "author" mode, pages and features can be added or
removed, text and labels can be edited and the size of the notebook can be changed. Use the
F7 key on the keyboard to switch between "user" and "author" modes. When in "author" mode
the notebook changes as shown in the illustration below.
1362
VERICUT Help
Notice that "(284x554)" has been added to the end of the menu bar. This number represents
the current size of the notebook in pixels. While you are in "author" mode you can change the
size of the notebook. Click on one of the corners or edges and drag to change the notebook size
like any other window. The size of the notebook that is set in "author" mode is what the user
will have to work with. The size of the notebook is fixed for the user. The position of the
notebook can be changed by the user but not the size. See Sizing the Custom Interface
Notebook below, for more information on determining the appropriate size for the notebook.
Notice also that a row of icons has been added to the sides of the notebook. The icons on the
right are used to add or remove pages and save the notebook. The icons on the left are used to
edit the text on notebook help pages. They remain grayed out and inactive until help pages are
added to the notebook.
Finally, the following options have been added to the File menu:
User File — Enables you to specify the default .usr file that is associated with the custom
interface notebook.
Protect — This item enables the author to prevent the user from entering "author" mode
without entering a password. Selecting Protect displays the Protection window which
enables you to specify whether or not to use password protection for the notebook while in
"user" mode and to specify a password.
Password — Enter a password in the text

field that will allow entry to "author"
mode.
Lock — Use to turn on password
protection for "author" mode.
Unlock — Use to turn off password
protection for "author" mode.
Cancel — Use to exit the Protection
window without making changes.
To add password protection for entering "author" mode:

1. Type a password in the text field
2. Select the Lock button.
3. Save the notebook using the Save all changes icon.
The next time that the notebook is opened, if the user uses the F7 key to enter "author" mode,
they will be prompted to enter the password before being allowed into "author" mode.
1363
VERICUT Help
Use the Unlock button while in "author" mode to remove an existing password protection.
Allow Close — This item enables the author to prevent the user from exiting the custom
VERICUT interface and returning to the standard VERICUT interface. This item toggles "on" and
"off".
If Allow Close is toggled "on" (indicated by a checkmark), the Close Book option will appear in
the File menu when in "user" mode allowing the user to exit the custom VERICUT user interface
and return to the standard VERICUT user interface.
If Allow Close is toggled "off" (indicated by no checkmark), the Close Book option will not
appear in the File menu when in "user" mode preventing the user from exiting the custom
VERICUT user interface and returning to the standard VERICUT user interface.
Adding pages to the notebook:

Before you can add features or help text to the notebook you need to add pages. Add any
combination of feature pages and help pages. Keep in mind that two pages are displayed at
once. It makes a lot of sense to have alternate feature pages and help pages. One advantage of
this user interface style is that it can lead the user through a specific sequence of steps.
Use the icons illustrated below to add pages to or remove pages from the notebook.
NOTE: If you do not see the icons below on the right side of the notepad, you are not in
"author" mode. Use the F7 key on the keyboard to switch to "author" mode.
Remove Upper Page
Insert Upper Page
Help Page Insert Lower Page
Feature Page Append Page
Remove Lower Page
Save all changes
Remove upper page — Use to remove the displayed upper page from the notebook.
Insert upper page — Use to insert a page into the displayed upper position of the notebook.
Select HTML or Form from the pop-up menu to specify the type of page to create.
HTML — Use to create a help page.
1364
VERICUT Help
Hint: You can tell a help page by its white background.

Form — Use to create a feature page.
Hint: You can tell a feature page by its gray background.
Insert lower page — Use to insert a page into the displayed lower position of the notebook.
Select HTML or Form (described above) from the pop-up menu to specify the type of page to
create.
Append page — Use to add a page to the end of the notebook. Select HTML or Form (described
above) from the pop-up menu to specify the type of page to create.
Remove lower page — Use to remove the displayed lower page from the notebook.
Save all changes — Use to save all changes made to the notebook. This includes notebook size
changes, pages added or removed, and page content added or edited.
NOTE: There is no "undo" capability in "author" mode so saving often is highly recommended.
Once you have added some pages, use the following to move around in the notebook.
Click on one of the "dog-eared" corners in the upper page (or use the Page Up key on the
keyboard) to turn back one page in the notebook.
Click on the one of the "dog-eared" corners in the lower page (or use the Page Down key on
the keyboard) to turn forward one page in the notebook.
Use the Ctrl and Home keys on the keyboard at the same time to move directly to the first
page of the book.
Use the Ctrl and End keys on the keyboard at the same time to move directly to the last
page of the book.
Now that you have created the notebook, it's time to decide on the size of the notebook.
1365
VERICUT Help
Sizing the Custom Interface Notebook

A customized interface notebook retains the size set while in "author" mode and cannot be
changed by user. This is because information on one page does not reposition to the next page
if the size of the notebook is reduced, nor are scroll bars used if a page contains more
information than will fit. To do so would be contrary to the idea of a simplified user interface.
You need to decide on the size of the notebook, which in turn determines the size of its pages,
before you start adding content. The size of the notebook can be changed later, but if you make
it smaller you may be spending a lot of time cutting and pasting between pages.
To help determine the appropriate size for the notebook, try to answer the following questions:
1. What is the resolution of my target user's screen?
2. How large does the VERICUT main window need to be?
3. How much space to the left or right of the VERICUT main window remains for the
notebook? Positioning the notebook on either of the main window is clearly preferable.
If the answer to this last one is "Not enough!", is it reasonable to overlay the notebook
on top of the VERICUT main window?
As a starting point, you might try allocating 3/8ths of the screen's width for the notebook. You
can adjust the notebook size by dragging its edges or corners as you would any other window.
The numbers on the right side of the notebook's menu bar will continuously update as you re-
size the notebook. If your target screen resolution is 1280 x 1024, and you have decided to
allocate 3/8ths of the width to the notepad, you could manipulate the window until you see
(480 x 990), leaving some space for the Windows taskbar. If your target user has a Windows
based platform, you do not want to use screen's full height or the notebook will be partially
hidden behind the Windows taskbar.
Use the Save all changes icon located on the right side of the notebook to save the
notebook with its size and position.
Now that you have established the size of the notebook, and thus the size of its pages, you can
add features to the pages.
1366
VERICUT Help
Creating Custom Interface Feature Pages
Now that you have created and sized the notebook, it is time to add features to the feature
pages. The user interacts with features in the notebook to enter numbers, select files, make
choices from a limited set of options and see results. As the author of a custom user interface
notebook it is your task to arrange a collection of features so the user can specify all the
parameters needed to get his or her job done. The way that you lay out the features within the
notebook, and use help pages, enables you to lead the user through a logical sequence of
actions to accomplish the required task.
If your notebook does not yet contain feature pages, or you need additional ones, use the
procedure described in Adding Pages to the Notebook to add them.
Feature Page Layout:
A "feature" page is easily distinguished from a "help" page by its gray background. Features can
only be added to "feature" pages. They cannot be added to "help" pages. In order to add
features to the page you must be in "author" mode.
1367
VERICUT Help
Within a page, features are laid out in two columns. The left column will only be as wide as the
widest feature that it contains. All features placed in the right column will expand to fill the
remaining width. Use blank spaces within features in the left column to control sizing of the two
columns. Adding blank spaces to the longest feature in the left column will increase the width
of the left column, thereby decreasing the width of the right column. Add or remove blank
spaces to the longest feature in the left column until the desired column balance is achieved.
Typically the left column will contain labels explaining the purpose of the corresponding feature
in the right column, although you are not restricted to this convention. The first feature that
you place in a form will always go to the left column.
What Features Are Available?

The following feature types are available for use in any combination on the feature pages of
your notebook.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Labels the purpose of adjacent features.
Text Fields are used to enable the user to input

character information to, or receive results from
VERICUT.
Numeric Fields are used to input one or more
numeric values. Can also be used to input numeric
data requiring calculations like "3+31/64".
File Selection Boxes are used to input file names
or browse for the file using the icon.
Choice Lists are used to present a limited set of

options in a drop-down list
Check Boxes are used for options requiring only a

simple on/off condition.
Radio Buttons are used as an alternate method of
presenting a limited set of options. There can only
be one set of radio buttons used on each feature
page. Only one of the radio buttons will be active
at a time. When one is selected, all others in the
set become deactivated.
1368
VERICUT Help
Buttons are used to trigger actions like file

conversion or display a secondary window.
MDI Buttons are used to input machine control
functions.
MDI Numeric Fields are used to input numeric
data to machine control functions.
Adding Features:
While in "author" mode (use F7 key on your keyboard if necessary if
necessary), move the cursor to an unoccupied area of the page and
click the right mouse button. You will see a pop-up menu like the one
shown on the left, enabling you to select one of the various feature
types described above. As each feature is added to the page you will
notice that initially they contain question marks "???" for text. Type
over the "???" with the desired text. You can edit the text of an existing
feature by clicking in it and making the changes.
Remember that features on the page are positioned in just two
columns. The first feature is added in the left column. Initially it appears
in the center of the page. As soon as you add another feature to the
right of it, it repositions the first one from the center to the left edge of
the page.
Continue adding the desired features to the page, or until the page is
full. At that point, add another feature page and continue. Note that
you can insert a feature between two existing rows by carefully
positioning the cursor between them.
You may have noticed that the pop-up menu of feature types has another
choice, Paste, that we have not discussed yet. If you right-click on one of the
features that you have already put on the page, you will see the pop-up menu
shown on the left. Select either the Cut or Copy options, then right-click on an
empty area of the page. The feature type pop-up menu discussed above will
display. Selecting the Paste option enables you to move or copy the feature. This
is also the way that you can move or copy features to another page if necessary.
Delete enables you to remove an existing feature from the page.
Connecting the Features to VERICUT:

To this point the features that you have added to your notebook may look great but they are
not yet functional. They need to be connected to the parameters and functions of VERICUT so
1369
VERICUT Help
that they produce the desired result when put to use by the user. These connections to
VERICUT are accomplished by using the Details option that appears when you right-click on a
feature. This is the same pop-up menu that contained the Cut and Copy options discussed
above.
The interaction that follows is dependent on the feature type, although some feature types
require similar interaction. Each of the topics listed below is described in detail on the following
sections.
Labels and Text Fields
Numeric Fields
File Selection
Choice Lists and Radio Buttons
Check Boxes
Buttons
MDI Buttons and Numeric Fields
Once you have finished adding functional feature pages to the notebook, it's time to add some
help pages.
1370
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Labels and Text Fields

While in "author" mode, right-clicking on either a label or a text field on a feature page and
selecting Details, displays essentially the same window. The only difference is that the one for
label features has a set of radio buttons that enable you to adjust its alignment.
The tree that dominates these windows is identical. It is organized to reflect VERICUT's menu
structure. Each "leaf" in the tree represents a text parameter. When selecting between using a
label or a text field, keep in mind that a user can only read a label, but can edit the content of a
text field. Most label features in a notebook will not need to be associated with a VERICUT
parameter. They will simply be used to describe other features on the feature page.
To connect a feature to a parameter, simply expand the tree until you find the parameter you
are looking for, select it and click OK. You can also use these windows to check on an existing
association, in which case you would use the Cancel button afterwards.
Label Feature Window
Label features can be used to display the text output of

certain VERICUT parameters. The label feature window
to the left illustrates how a label can be used for this
purpose. The Label Feature window to the left
illustrates how a Label feature can be associated with
the operating system's print command for use by
VERICUT's View Capture function.
1371
VERICUT Help
Text Feature Window
It is also possible to associate a text field feature with

such a parameter, but it is probably not a good idea to
do so unless the user will need to copy and paste the
text to another application.
The Text Feature window to the left illustrates how a

Text Field feature can be associated with the operating
system's print command for use by VERICUT's View
Capture function.
1372
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Label/Text Field Parameter List
Custom Interface - Numeric Fields
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on a numeric field on a feature page and selecting
Details, displays the window illustrated below. The title of the window is the current text from
the numeric field. Note that you can also specify the maximum number of decimal places used
to display the parameter. For an integer, such as the number of cuts between automatically
saved View Capture images, use zero decimal places.
The tree that dominates the window is organized to reflect VERICUT's menu structure. Each leaf
in the tree corresponds to a numeric parameter that appears in one or more of VERICUTS's
standard user interface windows. Each of them can be placed on a feature page independently,
though some will almost always appear in sets. A good example is the direction of the light that
illuminates each view, represented by an (I, J, K) vector. The three parameters that control the
location of a stock model relative to the stock component's datum are another, but they can be
combined with three choice lists to provide some extra functionality that is not currently
available in the standard VERICUT user interface.
are looking for, select it and click OK. You can also use these windows to check existing
associations, in which case you would use the Cancel button afterwards.
1373
VERICUT Help
Numeric Field Feature Window
Defining the three dimensions of a stock block

is another good example.
In the numeric field feature window displayed
on the left, a numeric field feature is associated
with the Length (X) dimension of a stock model
block. When combined on the feature page
with numeric fields associated with the Width
(Y) and Height (Z) values, the user can quickly
and easily define a stock block
1374
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Numeric Field Parameter List
1375
VERICUT Help
1376
VERICUT Help
1377
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - File Selection
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on a file selection feature on a feature page and selecting
the feature, in this case the file's path and name.
The tree that dominates the window is organized to reflect VERICUT's menu structure. Each
"leaf" in the tree represents an input or output file.
To connect a file selection feature to a file type, simply expand the tree until you find the file
type you are looking for and select it. To connect a widget to a file type, simply expand the tree
until you find the one you are looking for and select it.
You can also supply a prompt which will be used in the file selection window when the user
clicks on the browse icon to the right of the feature. If the file type has one or more
commonly used extensions, you can specify them as a filter for this window also. In this case we
have just used "*.olb" to narrow the choices to OptiPath libraries, but for toolpaths you could
use a compound filter, such as "*.tp;*.apt;*.cls". The user can always override the filter.
When you are satisfied with the properties of the file selection feature, click on the OK button.
You can also use these windows to check existing associations, in which case you would use the
Cancel button afterwards.
1378
VERICUT Help
File Selection Feature Window
In the example window on the left, a file

selection feature is being associated with the
OptiPath Optimized File.
1379
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - File Selection Parameter List
1380
VERICUT Help
1381
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Choice Lists and Radio Buttons
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on either a choice list or radio button on a feature page
and selecting Details, displays essentially the same window. The only difference is that the one
for choice list features has a table of choices at the bottom of the window and the one for a
radio button feature has a single drop-down list. The title of the window is either the text of the
current choice in the choice list or the caption of the radio button.
The tree that dominates these windows is identical. It is organized to reflect VERICUT's menu
structure. Each "leaf" in the tree represents a set of choices for a single parameter.
are looking for and select it. Select an option from those available in the Choice pull-down for
each Item, and then click OK. The interaction is slightly different for choice lists and radio
buttons and described in more detail below. You can also use these windows to check on an
existing association, in which case you would use the Cancel button afterwards.
1382
VERICUT Help
For a choice list feature, selecting a

parameter in the tree, causes the
Choice column of the table at the
bottom of the window to be filled
with the set of options that are
appropriate for the selected
Choice List Feature Window parameter. Each cell of the Choice
column is itself a choice list
containing the set of options that are
appropriate for the selected
parameter.
The text that will appear to the user
in the choice list appears in the Item
column of the table. Double-click on
the item to edit the text. You can also
edit the text for each item in the
choice list from the feature page
while in "author" mode.
To associate each item with a
particular option:
1. Click on an item in the Item
column so that it becomes
highlighted.
2. Click on the corresponding
row in the Choice column
to expand the pull-down of
available options.
3. Click on the option in the pull-
down to associate it with the
item.
4. When you have finished
associating the items with
options, click on the OK
button.
You can provide the user with a more
limited set of options than is
available in the standard VERICUT
user interface by simply including
fewer items in the Item column.
The items that you include can be in
any order. To change the order of
items, use the small blank buttons on
the left edge of the table to drag
1383
VERICUT Help
rows to different positions.
Radio Button Feature Window
For radio buttons, selecting a parameter in the tree,

causes the Choice pull-down at the bottom of the
window to be filled with the set of options that are
appropriate for the selected parameter. Keep in mind
that there can only be one set of radio buttons on each
feature page so when picking a parameter for one
radio button, you are actually picking it for all the
others on the page. The same is true if you change the
parameter associated with a radio button. It will
change for all the other radio buttons on the page also.
In either case you will need to associate a particular
option for each individual radio button.
To associate an option with a radio button, simply click
on the Choice pull-down to expand it and click on the
desired option. Click OK.
The text for radio buttons can only be edited on the
feature page while in "author" mode.
As with choice lists, you do not need to include a radio
button for all of the available options. Include fewer
radio buttons on the feature page to simplify the
interaction for the user.
Most of the parameters in the tree correspond to functionality that is available in VERICUT's
standard user interface. The exceptions are the three parameters located under Model >
Relative Location. These parameters control the location of a stock block model relative to the
stock component's datum and when combined on a feature page with certain other features
provide some extra functionality for automating the placement of a stock block that is not
currently available in the standard VERICUT user interface. See Example – Automatic Stock
Block Placement, below, for additional information.
1384
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Choice List/Radio Button Parameter List
1385
VERICUT Help
1386
VERICUT Help
1387
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Check Boxes
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on a checkbox feature on a feature page and selecting
Details, displays the window illustrated below. The title of the window is the current text
associated with the check box.
"leaf" in the tree represents an on/off parameter available in the standard VERICUT user
interface.
To connect a feature to a parameter, simply expand the tree until you find the on/off
parameter you are looking for, select it and click OK. You can also use these windows to check
existing associations, in which case you would use the Cancel button afterwards.
Check Box Feature Window
In the example window on the left a check box

feature is being associated with the on/off flag
that determines whether an APT output file is
generated corresponding to the processed G-
Code NC program.
1388
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Check Box Parameter List
1389
VERICUT Help
1390
VERICUT Help
1391
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Buttons
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on a button feature on a feature page and selecting
the button.
"leaf" in the tree represents an action available in the standard VERICUT user interface.
To connect a feature to a parameter, expand the tree until you find the parameter you are
looking for, select it and click OK. You can also use these windows to check existing
associations, in which case you would use the Cancel button afterwards.
A button can contain an icon in addition to, or instead of, the caption. An icon is derived from a
GIF or JPEG file which you select while in this dialog. An icon's height is limited to 16 pixels. If
you select a larger icon, it will be shrunk to fit within the button's height, but its aspect ratio is
maintained. The GIF or JPEG file will be copied to the book's folder if necessary, so that the
entire book can be handled as a unit. Use the Icon field, at the bottom of the Button Feature
window, to enter or select the image file to use.
Button Feature Window
In the example window on the left a button feature is

being associated with a request to browse VERICUT's
help files. When the user presses the button, VERICUT
Help will display.
1392
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - Button Parameter List
1393
VERICUT Help
1394
VERICUT Help
1395
VERICUT Help
Custom Interface - MDI Buttons and Numeric Fields
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on an MDI button feature on a feature page and
selecting Details, displays the window illustrated below. The title of the window is the current
text from the MDI button.
In the SubSystem field, enter the index number

of the subsystem (not the subsystem name) that
the MDI Action command is to be applied to.
In the MDI Action field, enter the command(s)
to be executed when the MDI button is pressed
MDI Button Feature Window by the user, and then click OK.
You can also use the window to check what
command(s) are currently associated with the
MDI button, in which case you would use Cancel
afterwards.
A default MDI button will contain the icon ,
in addition to the caption. But you can provide
another icon from a GIF or JPEG file which you
select while in this dialog. An icon's height is
limited to 16 pixels. If you select a larger icon, it
will be shrunk to fit within the button's height,
but its aspect ratio is maintained. The GIF or
JPEG file will be copied to the book's folder if
necessary, so that the entire book can be
handled as a unit.
While in "author" mode, right-clicking on an MDI numeric feature on a feature page and
selecting Details, displays the window illustrated below. The title of the window is the current
MDI command combined with the value from the MDI numeric field.
1396
VERICUT Help
MDI Numeric Feature Window

In the SubSystem field, enter the index
number of the subsystem (not the
subsystem name) that the MDI Action
command is to be applied to.
In the MDI Action field, enter the command
to be executed when the value in the MDI
numeric feature field is changed or when
the MDI icon is pressed, and then click
OK.
Use the Decimal Places field to specify the
maximum number of decimal places to
display. For an integer, use zero decimal
places.
Once you have entered the desired MDI
Action command and specified decimal
places, click OK.
You can also use the window to check what
command and decimal place value is
currently associated with the MDI numeric
feature, in which case you would use Cancel
afterwards.
As with an MDI button, you can change the
icon used with an MDI numeric field by
specifying an appropriate GIF or JPEG file.
1397
VERICUT Help
Example - Automatic Stock Block Placement
The following example shows how you can use a custom user interface to automate the
placement of a stock block at the machine origin. This cannot be accomplished using the
standard VERICUT user interface.
The upper three numeric field features are connected
to the X, Y and Z parameters respectively, located
under Model > Block in the numeric field "Details"
tree representing the length, width and height of a
stock block. When the user changes one of the
values, all models in the stock component are
replaced by a single block with the specified
dimensions.
The lower three numeric field features are connected
to the X, Y, and Z parameters respectively, located
under Model > Relative Location in the same tree.
When the user changes one of these values, the
origin of the block (the X min, Y min, Z min corner) is
positioned at the specified offsets.
The three choice lists in the lower left corner are
connected to the parameters located under Model >
Relative Location in the choice list "Details" tree.
These features are unique to a custom interface and
do not correspond to any of the features in the
standard VERICUT user interface. They can be used to
locate any of the block's corners, mid-edges or mid-
faces to the specified location. As shown in the
sample at the left, the center of the bottom face of
the block is designated as the block's origin.
If a dimension of the block is changed, the position of
the block remains unchanged. For example if block
width is increased to 3, it would grow by 1/2 a unit in
the +Y and -Y directions, thereby keeping the center
of the bottom face position unchanged.
If you decide to use one or more of these choice lists, it is possible to limit the options available
to the user. Each list can contain up to four choices but not all choices need to be included in
the list. For example, the list for the Z axis has options for "Z", "Z Low", "Z Mean" and "Z High".
You may decide that "Z Mean" makes no sense in your application and could omit that choice
from appearing the list.
1398
VERICUT Help
However, you should never omit the "X", "Y" or "Z" choices from the choice lists. These are
needed to position the block by specifying values directly in one of the numeric entry fields
because none of the predetermined positions is appropriate. For example, if the block is 1.5
units high and the user enters a Z location of -0.5, the choice list should not display "Z Low", "Z
Mean" or "Z High". Instead it should be able to display just "Z".
You can of course alter the text of the choices, so instead of using "Z Low" and "Z High", you
could display "Z Minimum" and "Z Maximum", or "Bottom Face" and "Top Face" or any other
suitable text.
NOTE: The three parameters for automating the location of a stock block are not applicable to
other types of primitives, such as cylinders, cones, polygon files or IGES files.
1399
VERICUT Help
Creating Custom Interface Help Pages
Now that you have created and sized the notebook and added some features to the feature
pages, it is time to add some help pages to assist the user in using the custom user interface to
accomplish their job. Use help pages in the notebook to instruct the user on how to use the
features or guide them through a sequence of actions to accomplish the required task.
A "help" page is easily distinguished from a "feature" page by the white background. Only text
and illustrations can be added to "help" pages. In order to add, remove or modify text or add,
remove or replace illustrations to a help page you must be in "author" mode (F7 key).
If your notebook does not yet contain any help pages, or you need additional ones, use the
procedure described in Adding Pages to the Notebook to add them.
Help Page Layout:
Each help page is created blank. Click on the help page and begin to type your instructions. Use
the column of icons located on the right side of the notebook (when in "author" mode) to
position, place emphasis on portions of text or add "style" to your help page. Use the bottom
icon in the column to add illustrations to your help page. Each of the icons is described in more
detail below.
The first four icons are used to control the appearance of the text. They can be used in two
ways. As you type you can change the current "mode" by clicking on one of the icons.
Subsequent text will exhibit the change until you click the same icon again to revert to regular
characters. Or you can highlight an existing portion of the text and update its appearance by
clicking on one or more of the icons. A double click will highlight a word. A triple click will
highlight a line. You can also apply multiple style types to your text as illustrated here using
bold, italics and underline on the same text.
Bold
Italics
Underline
Text Color
Align Left
Center
Align Right
Add Image
Insert Hyperlink
1400
VERICUT Help
Bold — Use to make selected text bold.

Italics — Use to make the selected text in italics.
Underline — Use to underline the selected text.
Text Color — Displays a color pallet enabling you specify a color for text. Pick one of the colored
squares to proceed. The darker colors show up best on the white background of a help page.
The next three icons are used to control the position of the text displayed on the page.
Align Left — Use to align the selected text to the left side of the page. This is the default.
Center — Use to center the selected text on the page.
Align Right — Use to align the selected text to the right side of the page.
Add Image — Use to add illustrations to your help page. The images used for illustrations can
be in GIF or JPEG format. When you select an image file it is copied to the notebook folder so
that all elements of the notebook are kept together. Each image will be centered in the page
and will be at its stored size. If you need to adjust the size of an illustration, do so with an image
editing software before using on your help page.
Insert Hyperlink — Use to create a hyperlink between the highlighted text and an HTML file.
Highlight the desired text, select the Insert Hyperlink icon, then use the file selection box that
displays to specify the file to create the hyperlink to.
1401
VERICUT Help
Sample Help Page:
The figure above illustrates a simple example of how you can use a help page to instruct the
user on how to use the features contained on the feature page below.
Now that you have a complete custom VERICUT interface notebook, it's time to do some
testing.
1402
VERICUT Help
Testing the Custom Interface
While a notebook is in "author" mode, (size displayed adjacent to the menu items and columns
of icons displayed on both sides) any changes to the content of features are not communicated
to VERICUT. To test that all features are connected to the correct parameters and function as
intended, the notebook needs to be in "user" mode. Toggle between these modes with the F7
key on the keyboard
Unlike many of VERICUT's windows, the notebook window does not use the concept of an
Apply or OK button to invoke sets of changes. When the user changes the content of a feature
on a notebook's feature page, that change is sent to VERICUT immediately. For many
parameters, a change in value does not cause any immediate response. For example, changing
the number of cuts to be processed when the "Play" button is hit has no effect until the
toolpath is processed.
On the other hand, some feature changes will cause an immediate response from VERICUT. For
example, using a file selection feature associated with the user file will cause VERICUT to
retrieve the selected file immediately. Similarly, if you have numeric fields associated with the
dimensions of a block, changing one of the values will cause VERICUT to immediately apply the
change. With experience you will learn which parameters will prepare for a future response and
which ones will result in an immediate response from VERICUT.
As you test the notebook try to view it as the targeted user will. Is the purpose of each feature
clear? Would some different wording in the labels make more sense, or perhaps some extra
labels? Could an illustration on a help page replace a bunch of words? Do the views presented
by the notebook's default user file display the process effectively or could they be improved?
Above all, is it simpler to use and save time for the user?
If you decide that refinements are needed in the default user file, closing the notebook while in
"author" mode causes VERICUT's standard user interface to be displayed so that you can make
those changes.
When you are satisfied with the notebook's behavior, it is time to make your custom VERICUT
user interface available for use.
1403
VERICUT Help
Making the Custom Interface Available for Use

Notebook folder and file descriptions:
All of the files that define a notebook are stored in a single folder, the name of the folder being
the name of the notebook. Some or all of the following file types may be present:
 HTML files for the help pages.
Their names will be of the form "Pagexxx.html", where "xxx" is the page number.
 GIF and JPEG files referenced by the HTML pages.
 XML files for the notebook and its feature pages.
Their names will be of the form "Pagexxx.xml", where "xxx" is the page number.
 "Page000.xml" which contains information pertinent to the whole notepad.
Notably absent from the above list is the default user file for the notebook and any files
referenced by it. It may be beneficial to store the default user file and any associated files in the
notebook folder to simplify data management. That way, if a notebook's folder location is
changed, all of the files associated with it move with it.
Making the notebook available:

Deploying a customized notebook to a target user involves making the folder available. This can
be done by establishing a network mapping to the folder, or by copying the folder to the user's
machine. If the default user file and the files which it needs are not in the same folder, you may
find that the relocated notebook is unable to access the default user file. If this is the case, on
the target machine use the F7 key to briefly get into "author" mode again, switch to the
required user file and re-save the notepad. The user file that is displayed at the time you save
becomes the notebook's default.
You can also launch VERICUT each time with a custom user interface instead the standard user
interface by using the file customizer.bat to start the VERICUT session. This file can be found in
the \cgtech6x\windows\commands\ folder. The customizer .bat file needs to be edited as
follows to specify which custom interface notebook to use at startup.
In the customizer.bat file locate the "start" command, shown below, at the end of the file.
%start_cmd% "%CGTECH_JRE%\bin\javaw" -Xms16m -Xmx64m -Xss4m -
classpath"%CGTECH_CLASSES%;%CGTECH_CLASSES%\CGTech.jar" VeriBook
%argstr%
Make sure that the next to the last parameters is VeriBook (not Vericut) indicating that
VERICUT should be started with a custom user interface instead of the standard user interface.
Replace the last parameter "argstr" with the path to the desired custom interface notebook
folder.
Now simply use customizer.bat to start the VERICUT session with the specified notebook
instead of with the standard VERICUT user interface.
1404
VERICUT Help
Using a VERICUT Custom User Interface
The following user interface is applicable to any "custom" interface created with VERICUT
Customizer.
The user interface consists of two main parts, the "notebook" and the VERICUT main window.
1405
VERICUT Help
The Notebook
The notebook consists of a menu bar and two different types of pages. Click on the upper page
corners to page back in the notebook. Click on the lower page corners to page forward in the
notebook.
Menu Bar
File:
Open — Displays the Select book's folder window allowing you to open another custom
interface notebook for editing or create a new notebook.
Recent — Displays a list of recently opened files. To open a file in the list, select the desired file.
Close Book — Closes the VERICUT custom interface and displays the standard VERICUT
interface.
Exit VERICUT — Ends the VERICUT session.
Layout:
BookWest — Positions the notebook on the left side of the VERICUT main window.
BookEast — Positions the notebook on the right side of the VERICUT main window.
BookOver — Overlays the notebook on top of the VERICUT main window. Left click on
the notebook's header and drag to any position.
1406
VERICUT Help
Help:
On VERICUT — Starts VERICUT Help.

About VERICUT — Opens a window that displays information about the current VERICUT
session.
Help Pages
Help pages contain instructions, explanations and pictures to assist you in providing the
necessary information to VERICUT. Help pages are easily recognized by the white background.
Feature Pages
Feature pages contain features (buttons, text fields, choice lists, etc.) that enable you to pass
necessary information to VERICUT for processing. Each of the features on a "feature" page is
described on the previous "help" page. Feature pages are easily recognized by the gray
background.
Some features display another window enabling you to provide additional information to
VERICUT. Use the F1 key to display more information about the displayed window.
1407
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Main Window

The VERICUT main window is composed of six distinct areas, each with different user
interaction. The window header displays the VERICUT version and the current session units
(inch or millimeter). This window can be resized and/or moved like most other windows, via
dragging the window header, sides or corners.
1408
VERICUT Help
Toolbar
VERICUT Customizer's Toolbar provides quick and easy access to the view manipulation
functions/features.
To see what is associated with a Toolbar icon, simply position the cursor over the icon and a tip
appears.
Dynamic viewing options

These options use mouse actions to dynamically orient the object in view. Mouse actions are
different, depending on the active option-see the table below for details. Dynamic viewing
options:
Icon: Name: Action:
Dynamic X Rotation Horizontal rotation- drag

mouse up/down in direction to
rotate
Dynamic Y Rotation Vertical rotation- drag mouse

left/right in direction to rotate
Dynamic Z Rotation Screen plane rotation- drag

mouse left to rotate CCLW,
right for to rotate CLW
Dynamic XY Rotation Horizontal/vertical combined

rotation- drag mouse
up/down/left/right in direction
to rotate
Dynamic Pan Pan/translate- drag mouse in

the direction pan
Dynamic Zoom Zoom/magnify- drag mouse up

to zoom in, down to zoom out
1409
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: The following keys provide instant access from the keyboard to dynamic viewing
options (press and hold keys while dragging): Dynamic Zoom — <Ctrl>, Dynamic Pan — <Shift>,
Dynamic XY — <Ctrl> + <Shift>. Mouse actions are the same as above.
Static viewing buttons

These buttons use various mouse actions to zoom, fit, and reverse the object in view. See the
table below for details.
Icon: Name: Action:
Zoom to Box (standard mode) Left-click and move mouse to

trap area to zoom (press <Esc>
to interrupt rubberbanding)
Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms in/out approx. 20%

each time clicked
Fit Fits object in active view
Refine Display Refines the display to improve

image quality
Last Refine Display Restores the last refined

display
Reverse Reverses viewing direction, as

if you stood behind the object
To learn more about interacting with VERICUT through the main window components, review
the following topics under Interacting with VERICUT, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
1410
VERICUT Help
Create Report
Locations:
File menu > Create Report, in the main VERICUT window.
File > Create Report, in the Inspection Sequence window. File > Create Report, in the Tool
Manager window.
The Create Report option opens the Save VERICUT Report window enabling you to specify the
/path/filename for the report file to be created. If "User-Defined" information has not been
previously defined, (either using the User-Defined Tag Values window or during a previous use
of Create Report) VERICUT will then prompt you for any unspecified User-Defined Tag values,
then generate the report using the "current" report template. Choose one of the following
report formats:
Text — Use this option to create a report in text format.
HTML — Use this option to create a report in HTML format.
PDF — Use this option to create a report in PDF format. (PDF report generation based in
part on iText (www.lowagie.com/iText).
See Introduction to VERICUT Reports, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
report template files supplied with VERICUT.
1411
VERICUT Help
Print View
Location:
File menu > Print View
Toolbar shortcut:
The Print View option opens the Page Setup window enabling you to print images of VERICUT
view ports. Each view port is automatically fit to the printable area and printed on a separate
page. All view ports are printed. Features on this window are standard print window features
that enable you to access printer settings, specify number of copies, etc. Consult your printer
documentation for more information.
1412
VERICUT Help
Images
Record Movie
Location:
File menu > Images > Record Movie
Toolbar short cut:
The Record Movie option opens a window enabling you to record images as an AVI file. Images
in all view ports are recorded. Images can be recorded interactively in VERICUT, or via batch
processing. After recording is stopped, you can view the file via the File menu > Images >
Playback AVI Movie function.
See the AVI Image Record window topics below for additional information.
NOTES:
1. The size of the graphics area directly affects the display size of the recorded Image file.
Make the VERICUT window larger to record larger images. Note that for some CODECS,
there is a limitation on the image size that can be recorded.
2. Recording animations captures all changes in the graphics area. Recorded tool paths
with lots of small motions can generate large Image files sizes. Consider using the
Animation Slider, located at the bottom of the VERICUT main window to reduce Image
file size.
3. AVI record is not intended for use with cascaded views.
1413
VERICUT Help
AVI Image Record window
Location:
File menu > Images > Record Movie
Toolbar short cut:
The following features are available when recording images in an AVI file.
1414
VERICUT Help
Output Format group:

This feature defines the /path/filename for the recorded file.
Filename — Name of the file to receive recorded images. Enter the \path\filename in the
File Name text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Record Image File file
selection window to specify the \path\filename.
Recording Screen Area group:

These features control the screen area to record.
Start Left / Start Top — Identifies the start point (top-left location) of the screen area to
record.
Width / Height — Width and height (in pixels) of the screen area to record, as measured
from the top-left start point.
Select Region — Uses a rubber-banding box to indicate region to record. Left-click to define
the start point of the region, then move the mouse to trap the area to record. Press <Esc>
to interrupt rubber-banding.
Select All — Records all views.
AVI Frame Rates group:

These features set the rate at which to record image frames. Frame rate controls the speed at
which the AVI file plays back.
Playback Rate — Number of frames to record per second. Increasing the recording frame
rate causes the AVI file to play back faster.
Pauses group:
These features control the AVI recording process, and insert delay into the AVI file.
Pause / Continue — Pauses (or continues) AVI file recording. VERICUT motions simulated
after pausing are not recorded.
Insert Delay — Inserts the specified seconds of delay.
Select a CODEC — Select the desired CODEC from the pull-down list. Use the CGTech
environment variable, CGTECH_CODEC_FILTER, to remove invalid CODECs from the list.
See Environment Variables, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
1415
VERICUT Help
Record — Starts recording animation images based on current window settings, VERICUT
window size, shape, and layout. Recording must be stopped before the Image file can be
viewed.
Stop — Stops recording. The AVI file can be viewed via File menu > Images > Playback AVI
Movie.
Snapshot — Records a single frame image.
Close — Closes the Image Record window.
1416
VERICUT Help
Playback AVI Movie
Location:
File menu > Images > Playback AVI Movie
Toolbar short cut:
The Playback AVI Movie option opens an "AVI Player" window enabling you to play back an AVI
files recorded by the File menu > Images > Record Movie function. Assuming your system has
an AVI player installed, the AVI images are played in a separate "image player" window enabling
simultaneous access to the VERICUT main window and its functions. The size and view layout of
the image player window is as recorded.
1417
VERICUT Help
View Capture (View Capture window)
Location:
File menu > Images > View Capture
File menu > AutoSave > View Capture tab: Properties
Toolbar short cut:

The View Capture option opens a window enabling you to capture VERICUT images and format
them for printing or importing into desktop publishing applications. View Capture can also
output printer-formatted files that you can move to other computers or printing devices.
Images can be captured and output interactively or automatically (via AutoSave), or via batch
processing. When configuring this window for future use or batch processing, press OK (instead
of Output) to save the window configuration without outputting a View Capture image file.
Hint: Avoid having to re-configure this window by creating a master Project file containing the
modified View Capture values.
Attributes tab — Features on this tab are used to configure the attributes for formatting
captured VERICUT images.
1418
VERICUT Help
Postscript Settings tab — Features on this tab provide information about centering and
annotating PostScript format images on the printed page.
Render tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify the output size of "rendered" images.
OK — Saves the View Capture window settings and closes it without outputting an image file.
Output — Outputs the current VERICUT image to the specified file. File format is determined by
the View Capture window configuration.
NOTE: Output is not applicable when setting up File menu > AutoSave > View Capture tab:
Properties.
Cancel — Closes the View Capture window without saving setting changes or outputting an
image file.
1419
VERICUT Help
View Capture window, Attributes tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Attributes tab enable you to configure the attributes for formatting
captured VERICUT images. The features available on the Attributes tab will be slightly different
depending on whether it is accessed as shown above or accessed using the Properties button
on the AutoSave window: View Capture tab.
1420
VERICUT Help
View Capture window: Attributes tab when View Capture window: Attributes tab when
accessed as shown above. accessed using the AutoSave window: View
Capture tab, Properties button.
Type — Type of format in which to capture VERICUT images. Printer-ready and electronic
formats are available. Options:
 PostScript — Postscript format.
 EPSF — Encapsulated PostScript File.
 TIFF — Tag Image Format File.
 JPEG — JPEG compressed format. (JPEG image support based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.)
 PNG — PNG (Portable Network Graphics) format.
Method — Method of coloring the captured image. Options:
 Standard — black and white only
 Grayscale — black and white with shading
 RGB Color — Red-Green-Blue values for each pixel
 Palette Color — Red-Green-Blue color tables
 CMYK Color — Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black color tables
1421
VERICUT Help
Shading By — Method that is to be used for shading black and white images.
Options:
 Intensity — Shade by light intensity only, for example: the brightest yellow color is the
same shade of gray as the brightest blue color.
 Color — Shade by color differences and light intensity.
Orientation — Controls image orientation on the printed page: Landscape or Portrait.
Output File — Use to specify the name of the file to receive image data when the Output
button is pressed. Enter the \path\filename in the Output File text field or click on click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Save File selection window to specify the \path\filename.
NOTE: When images are output via File menu > AutoSave, the file names specified on the
AutoSave, View Capture tab are used instead.
Add output file to report — When toggled "On", and Output is pressed, the output JPEG
images are available for use in "standard" VERICUT reports.
NOTE: Add output file to report is not available when setting up File menu > AutoSave > View
Capture tab: Properties.
Render — Use to toggle the Render feature on and off. When Render is toggled "on" and the
Output button is pressed, the active view will be rendered and a JPEG file will be output with
the name specified in the Output File field. Pressing the "Stop" button during rendering will
stop the process.
By default, the width and height of the active view is used for the size of the rendered image.
Use Specify image size on the Render tab to specify a different width and/or height for the
rendered image.
 Currently, JPEG is the only supported output.
 Method, Shading By and Orientation are not applicable to Render.
 AUTO-DIFF models, Travel Axis, design components/models and Temp Stock
components are not supported by the Render feature.
NOTE: Generating a "rendered" image can take considerably longer than generating a
standard View Capture image.
1422
VERICUT Help
Standard View Capture image Rendered image
To View Capture window
1423
VERICUT Help
View Capture window, Postscript Settings tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Postscript Settings tab enable you to specify information related to
centering and annotating PostScript format images on the printed page.
Center / Margins options — Controls image placement on the printed page. Options:
 Center — Center image in the middle of the page.
 Margins — Place image according to specified margin dimensions (see below).
Left / Right / Top / Bottom — Margin dimensions, as measured from the corresponding edges
of the paper.
Paper Size — Size of paper to print.
Annotation — When active, includes annotated text with the image. Annotation includes the
current date, tool path file name, tool path record number being processed, and user specified
text.
1424
VERICUT Help
Tip: If you want to add a note that uses special characters add an "escape" backslash character
("\") before each special character.
Example:
To enter this annotated text => Part Number (1234) ((due date 12/01/00))
Type this in the Annotation field => Part Number $1234$ $\(due date 12\/01\/00$\)
1425
VERICUT Help
View Capture window, Render tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Render tab enable you to specify the output size, whether or not to use
shadows, and light source location for "rendered" images.
Specify image size — Toggle "On" to use the Width and Height values specified below for
creating an image using Render. By default, the width and height of the active view is used for
the size of the rendered image.
Width — Use to specify the width for a rendered image.
Height — Use to specify a height for a rendered image.
Shadows — Toggles Shadows On/Off.
Light Location — Use to specify one nine fixed light locations. Choose from: Top Left, Top, Top
Right, Left, Center, Right, Bottom Left, Bottom, and Bottom Right.
View Angle — This field enables you to define the view angle. Valid range is from 1 to 80
degrees.
1426
VERICUT Help
Recent Files
Location:
File menu > Recent Files
The Recent Files option provides a list of recently opened Project files or User files. Select the
desired file from the pull-down list.
The list contents are stored in the VERICUT Preferences file.
1427
VERICUT Help
Exit
Location:
File menu > Exit
The Exit option enables you to exit (quit) the VERICUT program. Any files that were opened
during the VERICUT session, such as the Log file, Image file, etc. are automatically closed.
You can also exit VERICUT by clicking "X" at the top right corner of the VERICUT main window.
NOTE: Session information is not automatically saved by VERICUT upon exiting. It is the
responsibility of the user to decide if session information should be saved before exiting.
1428
VERICUT Help
Edit menu
1429
VERICUT Help
Text File
Location:
Edit menu > Text File
The Text File option opens a text editor window enabling you to open any ASCII text file and
start editing. The following is a general description of the features available for searching for
and editing text and tool path files throughout VERICUT. The features available in a particular
window may vary depending on the purpose of the window that they appear in.
1430
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar:
menu contains groups of related functions. Click with the left mouse button on any menu name
to display the list of functions available in that menu. Click on the function in the menu you
want to use. The name of the current file is also displayed in this area.
File:

Edit:
1431
VERICUT Help
Icon Bar:

search for.
Close — Closes the window.
1432
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Right-click in the Text File Edit window to display the following menu:
These features provide the same functionality as those available under Edit in the menu bar.
1433
VERICUT Help
Editing an ASCII Text File
VERICUT provides a fast and easy way to edit any ASCII text file. All standard text editing
features are supported, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc.
To edit an ASCII text file:

1. In the VERICUT main Menu Bar, click Edit menu > Text File.
In the text editor window that displays, select File menu > Open in the text editor menu bar to
display the Open file selection window.
In the file selection window, specify the /path/filename of the text file that you want to edit
and then select Open. The contents of the text file will be displayed in the text editor window.
Edit the file as desired.
When finished editing the file, select File menu > Save in the text editor window menu bar to
save the changes in the existing text file or select File menu > Save As in the text editor window
menu bar to display the Save As file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename
of a new text file where you want the modified text saved.
Select File menu > Exit in the text editor window menu bar, or click on the (Close) icon in
the text editor window toolbar to close the text editor window.
See Text File, also in the Edit menu section of VERCUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help
or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
1434
VERICUT Help
NC Program
The NC Program option displays a list of all NC programs and subroutines in the project file.
Choosing one of the NC program files/subroutines opens a text editor window with the selected
NC program file/subroutine file loaded and ready for editing. Standard text editing features are
provided, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc.
See NC Program Editor, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1435
VERICUT Help
Colors (Color window)
Location:
Edit menu > Colors
Toolbar short cut:
The Colors option opens the Color window enabling you to define the colors seen in VERICUT.
Colors are changeable at any time. The effect of changing colors is immediate.
Assign tab — Features on this tab are used to assign Error, Reset Cut and Background colors.
Cut Colors tab — Features on this tab assign colors to machine cuts made in the workpiece.
Define tab — Features on this tab define colors seen in VERICUT, and control light brightness.
1436
VERICUT Help
OK — Saves tab settings and closes the VERICUT Color window.

Apply — Saves tab settings and leaves the VERICUT Color window open.
Cancel — Closes the VERICUT Color window without saving tab settings.
1437
VERICUT Help
Color window, Assign tab
The features on the Assign tab are used to assign Error, Reset Cut and Background colors.
Error — Color for highlighting unsafe machining conditions (default: "Red"). The "error color"
will help you identify the following potentially dangerous situations:
Material removed while cutting too fast (known as a "fast feed" error)
Cuts in clamps, fixtures, bolts, and other hardware holding the workpiece
Material removed by non-cutting portions of the tool, such as: tool holders, extensions, etc.
Gouges in a design model (via AUTO-DIFF)
Floor, Ceiling, Wall — Colors of the floor, ceiling and walls displayed in a machine view when
Background is set to Walls in the View menu > Attributes window. A sample machine is shown
below with the floor, ceiling and walls in the background. The tile effect on the floor is created
by alternating the Floor and Ceiling colors.
1438
VERICUT Help
Shaded Background — Use to specify the color that will be displayed when the view
Background attribute is set to Shaded.
To Color window
1439
VERICUT Help
Color window, Cut Colors tab
The features on the Cut Colors tab enable you to assign colors to the machine cuts made in the
workpiece. The items displayed on this tab will vary depending on the Color Method selected.
Color Method
Method of determining colors used to shade machined cuts. Options are:
Cut Color Table — Cut color is determined by the Cut Sequence/Color list defined in the Cut
Color Table.
Cut Seq. / Color list — List of colors used for material cut with a safe cutting feed rate
(less than the Fast Feed threshold). The cut color list associates colors with cut
sequences in the NC program file. A new cut sequence is assumed when a tool with a
different shape is loaded for cutting. All portions of the cutting tool shape are
considered for differences. When the number of cut sequences exceeds the number of
1440
VERICUT Help
cut colors defined in the table, Recycle Cut Color determines the cut color for the
remaining tools (see below).
Double-click on the cut sequence number in the table to edit it. Double-click on a color
in the table and select from the pull-down color list to change a color. Add or remove
colors from the pull-down list using the Shade Colors list feature on the Color window,
Define tab.
Add — Use to add Cut Sequences/Colors to the list.
Delete — Use to delete Cut Sequences/Colors from the list.
Recycle Cut Color — When selected, recycles colors in the cut color list when the tool
path contains more tools than cut colors defined. For example, assume that 4 cut colors
are defined. When tool 5 is encountered VERICUT recycles cut color 1, tool 6 uses cut
color 2, and so on. When this option cleared, the last defined cut color is used for cut
sequences that follow the last defined cut sequence color. Using the example above,
tool 4, 5 and 6 would receive the cut color defined for cut sequence 4.
Tool Color — Cut color is determined by the tool color property stored in a VERICUT Tool
Library.
1441
VERICUT Help
Feed Range Color — Cut color is determined by the feed rate programmed in the NC program
file.
Feed Range / Color list — List of colors used for material cut within a specified feed rate
range. The cut color list associates colors with feed rates in the NC program file. Using
the sample table shown above, cuts using a feed rate between 0 and 25 will be
displayed Aquamarine. Cuts using a feed rate between 25 and 49 will be displayed Light
Steel, and so on.
Double-click on the Feed Range number in the table to edit it. Double-click on a color in
the table and select from the pull-down color list to change a color. Add or remove
colors from the pull-down list using the Shade Colors list feature on the Color window,
Define tab.
Add — Use to add Feed Ranges/Colors to the list.

Delete — Use to delete Feed Ranges/Colors from the list.
1442
VERICUT Help
NC Program File Color — Cut color is determined by the Cut Sequence/Color list defined in the
Cut Color Table method described above except that the Cut Sequence changes as the NC
program file changes instead of when the tool changes. If a Project file only uses one NC
program file, then all cuts will be the same color.
To Color window
1443
VERICUT Help
Color window, Define tab
The features on the Define tab enable you to define the colors seen in VERICUT, and control
light brightness.
Shade Color list — List of colors that can be used to shade solid objects seen in VERICUT, such
as: models, cutting tools, and machined cuts (maximum 128 colors). The number of shade
colors also affects shade quality. The color band at the bottom of the window displays the
shade variations of the selected color in the list, as impacted by the total number of defined
colors. Once defined, assign the colors to solid objects using the features on the Assign tab and
the Cut Colors tab.
Add — Use to add colors to the Shade Color list.
Delete — Use to delete colors from the Shade Color list.
Red-Green-Blue slidebars — Control the amount of red, green, and blue color components
mixed to define a color. The exact value is shown in the field to the right of each slidebar
(0=none to 255=maximum).
Color List — Opens a window of pre-mixed colors selectable for background, foreground, and
shade colors. Click on the desired color.
1444
VERICUT Help
RGB Pick List window
1445
VERICUT Help
Brightness — Controls the amount of light for shading solid objects. Options are:
High
Normal
1446
VERICUT Help
Low
Flat Colors group:

Background — Select this option to change the color of the graphics area background when
View menu > Attributes: Background is set to "Flat". You can also change the background to
display a shaded color, or machine views can display ceiling, floor, and walls.
Foreground — Select this option to change the color of items drawn on top of the VERICUT
display, for example: coordinate system axes, lines indicating the bounding region of selected
models/components, etc.
The Background and Foreground colors should be different, or foreground-colored items may
"blend in" with the background.
To Color window
1447
VERICUT Help
View Menu
1448
VERICUT Help
Introduction to VERICUT Views
One of the most powerful advantages of VERICUT's user interface is flexibility in viewing the
simulation. The simulation can be viewed from any distance or direction, in as many views as
required to gain good visibility of the machining process. Just a click away, you can change the
quantity and layout of view ports, each capable of showing machining on the workpiece, the NC
machine, or a "combined" view where machining takes place on the machine.
Orienting views
Objects can be quickly oriented in standard drawing views, dynamically manipulated, and
sectioned to "virtually see" every aspect of machining. VERICUT provides tools to rotate, zoom,
pan, and reverse models in any view. Use the View menu > Orient function or the
corresponding Toolbar options to change the view angle or distance. Each view in the VERICUT
window is independently controlled.
The "View coordinate system"

View rotations are performed about X, Y, or Z axes of a right-hand Cartesian "view coordinate
system". The "view coordinate system" is oriented such that the Y-axis is parallel the left edge
of the computer screen, the X-axis is parallel to the bottom edge and the Z-axis points out of
the screen towards you. By default, the origin of the of the "view coordinate system" is the
center of the view in the plane of the screen.
1449
VERICUT Help
View attributes
View attributes add to visualization power by enabling you to:
 Change what is seen in a view: workpiece machining, machine motions without
machining, or machining a workpiece on a machine.
 Show machines in shaded or wireframe display.
 Control light direction.
 Change the background, including ability to add walls and a floor in a view of an NC
machine.
Each view has its own individually controlled attributes.
See View Orient window and View Attributes window, also in the View menu section of
Help.
Also see Configure Coordinate System menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
1450
VERICUT Help
Layout (view)
Location:
View menu > Layout
The options in the Layout menu control how many views of the VERICUT model are seen, and
how they are arranged. All views are contained within the VERICUT main window. The size and
orientation of the model in each view is individually controlled. View port size and layout are
saved in the project file.
One view is considered by VERICUT to be the "active view". A view is made active by clicking in
it, and is designated by a colored window header. Many VERICUT functions are effective only in
the active view, including most viewing functions.
Standard — Sets views of the VERICUT model to one of the standard view layout choices. By
default standard view layouts are tiled, but you can change this using other functions in the
Layout menu, or via standard window management features, such as dragging, resizing, etc.
Single View Layout
Two View Layout (Horizontal)
Two View Layout (Vertical)
Three View Layout (Vertical)
Three view Layout (Horizontal)
Four View Layout
NOTE: If you currently have a Single View Layout and change to a Two View Layout (either
Horizontal or Vertical) VERICUT will add the view with the type as defined below:
 If the single view is a Workpiece View, the added view will be a Machine/Cut Stock view.
 If the single view is a Machine view or a Machine/Cut Stock view, the added view is a
Workpiece view.
If the default view is not the view type that you want, right mouse click in the added view and
select View Type > desired view type (Workpiece, Machine, Machine/Cut Stock, or Profile) from
the right mouse button shortcut menu.
1451
VERICUT Help
Tip: You can also use the corresponding view layout icons in the Toolbar.
See Changing the View Layout, under Using View Layout Features, also in the View menu
Simulation Help for information additional information.
Add View — Adds a view. You can add as many views as desired. What is seen in a view
(workpiece, machine, etc.) is determined by the view attributes (ref. View Attributes window,
also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Tip: You can also right mouse click in a view and select Add a View > desired view type
(Workpiece, Machine, Machine/Cut Stock, or Profile) from the right mouse button shortcut
menu.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the attributes or orientation of a view by right-clicking in the
view, and selecting from the displayed menu. See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button
Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
Delete View — Deletes a view. You can also delete a view via clicking "X" at the top right corner
of the view window.
See Adding or Deleting Views in the VERICUT View Layout, under Using View Layout Features,
also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information additional information.
Cascade — Cascades views in an overlapping arrangement. Note that cascaded view layouts are
not saved by VERICUT.
1452
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. The Cascade view feature is not available in VERICUT when Hardware Graphics
Acceleration (OpenGL) is active in any of the views.
2. The Cascade view feature is not available in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation or
VERICUT Composites Simulation since Hardware Graphics Acceleration (OpenGL) is
always active.
Tile Horizontally — Tiles views in a horizontal arrangement.
Tile Vertically — Tiles views in a vertical arrangement. Examples follow.
1453
VERICUT Help
See Cascading or Tiling Views, under Using View Layout Features, also in the View menu
Simulation Help for information additional information.
View to Back — Moves the "active" view to the back. This function can also be accessed using
the right mouse button in the active view or by using the (View To Back) icon in the
Toolbar.
View to Front — Moves the selected view to the front. Selecting "View to Front" displays a list
of all available views allowing you to select the desired view to be moved to the front even if it
is obscured by other views in the graphics area.
Always in Front — Makes the active view remain "always in front" until it is specifically moved
to the back or until another view is specified as "always in front". This function can also be
accessed using the right mouse button in the active view or by using the (Always in Front)
icon in the Toolbar.
.
See Using View Layout Features for information on using the available view layout features.
1454
VERICUT Help
Using View Layout Features

The options in the Layout menu control how many views of the VERICUT model are seen, and
how they are arranged. All views are contained within the VERICUT main window. The size and
orientation of the model in each view is individually controlled. View port size and layout are
saved in the project file.
Changing the View Layout

Use the procedure described below to change the view layout in VERICUT.
1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, click View menu > Layout > Standard.
Choose the option that provides the desired view quantity and layout from the pull-down list.
Single View Layout

Two View Layout (Horizontal)
Two View Layout (Vertical)
Three View Layout (Vertical)
Three view Layout (Horizontal)
Four View Layout
Tip: You can also use the corresponding view layout icons in the Toolbar.
With the view layout set, additional views can be added, or views can be deleted from the
current layout using other functions in View menu > Layout pull-down.
Drag or resize any of the view ports in the VERICUT main window as desired via dragging the
view port window header, sides or corners. View port size and layout are saved in the project
file.
See View Menu > Layout, also in the in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
1455
VERICUT Help
Adding or Deleting Views in the VERICUT View Layout
Use the procedure described below to add, or delete, a view from the VERICUT view layout.
To add a new view:

1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, select View menu > Layout > Add View.
A new view is added. Reposition, or resize, views via dragging the view window header,
sides, or corners.
To delete a view:
1. Click in the view that you want to delete so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. In the VERICUT main menu bar, select View menu > Layout > Delete View. The view is
removed.
Shortcut: You can also delete a view via clicking "X" at the top right corner of the view
window.
See View Menu > Layout, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1456
VERICUT Help
Cascading or Tiling Views
Use the procedure described below to arrange views in a cascaded, or tiled, layout. Example
arrangements are shown below.
Cascaded
Tiled Horizontally
Tiled Vertically
After any of these operations, you can reposition, or resize, any of the views via dragging the
view window header, sides or corners.
1457
VERICUT Help
To cascade views:
1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, select View menu > Layout > Cascade.
The view ports are arranged in a cascaded (overlapping) arrangement as shown in the
picture above.
NOTES:
1. The Cascade view feature is not available in VERICUT when Hardware Graphics
Acceleration (OpenGL) is active in any of the views.
2. The Cascade view feature is not available in VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation or
VERICUT Composites Simulation since Hardware Graphics Acceleration (OpenGL) is
always active.
To tile views horizontally:

1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, select View menu > Layout > Tile Horizontally.
The view ports are arranged in a horizontal tiled arrangement as shown in the picture
above.
To tile views vertically:

1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, select View menu > Layout > Tile Vertically, depending
on the desired orientation.
The view ports are arranged in a vertical tiled arrangement as shown in the picture
above.
See View Menu > Layout, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1458
VERICUT Help
Orient
The Orient option opens the View Orient window enabling you to orient the view, including:
rotate, zoom, pan, reverse, etc.
View Orient window
Locations:
View menu > Orient
The Orient option opens the View Orient window enabling you to orient the view, including:
rotate, zoom, pan, reverse, etc. You can view machining from any angle or distance, and change
the view at any time during the simulation. Views of the workpiece, NC machine are oriented in
the same manner, as described by the sections that follow. In general, click in a view to make it
active, then change view orientation as required. View rotations are described with respect to
the "view coordinate system".
1459
VERICUT Help
Dynamic Viewing Options:
These options use mouse actions to dynamically orient the object in view. Mouse actions are
different, depending on the active option-see the table below for details. Dynamic viewing
options are also available on the VERICUT Toolbar.
Toolbar Icon: Name: Action:
Dynamic X Rotation Horizontal rotation- drag mouse up/down in

direction to rotate
Dynamic Y Rotation Vertical rotation- drag mouse left/right in direction

to rotate
Dynamic Z Rotation Screen plane rotation- drag mouse left to rotate

CCLW, right for to rotate CLW
Dynamic XY Rotation Horizontal/vertical combined rotation- drag mouse

up/down/left/right in direction to rotate
Dynamic Pan Pan/translate- drag mouse in the direction pan
Dynamic Zoom Zoom/magnify- drag mouse up to zoom in, down to

zoom out
Shortcuts:
1. Use the following mouse features to manipulate the view with a single mouse button.
Dynamic Rotate — Left mouse button, drag.
Dynamic Pan — Right mouse button, drag.
Dynamic Rotation — Rotate the thumbwheel toward you to make the displayed
image larger, away from you to make the displayed image smaller.
See Dynamic Zoom, Pan and Rotate in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help
1460
VERICUT Help
The following keys provide instant access from the keyboard to dynamic viewing options (press
and hold keys while dragging):
Dynamic Zoom — <Ctrl>, drag
Dynamic Pan — <Shift>, drag
Dynamic XY — <Ctrl> + <Shift>, drag
Mouse actions are the same as described above.
Standard drawing view buttons- XY, YX, YZ, ZY, ZX, XZ, V-ISO, H-ISO — Orients the object in
the selected standard drawing view and automatically fits the object in the view.
Rotation Options:
Angles — Absolute rotation about the view coordinate system X Y Z axes, respectively. The
three values are separated by spaces.
Increment — Degrees of incremental rotation to apply when a rotation button is pressed (see
below).
Rotation buttons (X+/X-, Y+/Y-, Z+/Z-) — axis and direction in which to apply incremental
rotation specified by the Increment value.
Set Spin Center — Specify a point to be used as the center of rotation during dynamic rotations.
Click in the Spin Center text field so that it becomes active, then either enter XYZ values
(separated by spaces) in the field and click on the Apply button or click on a position on an
object (not the background) in the view to specify the Spin Center point. The values are applied
to the "active" view. If a workpiece view is the active view, the coordinates are relative to the
origin of the workpiece coordinate system. If the "active" view is a machine view, the
coordinates are relative to the origin of the machine coordinate system.
Press to display the Spin Center marker and activate the point for the active view. To
de-activate Spin Center point, press the button again. You can specify a different rotation point
for each view. When you close the View Orient window, the Spin Center markers will no longer
be displayed but the activated Spin Centers will remain active. When you use one of the
dynamic rotation features described above in a view with an active Spin Center, the Spin Center
point will be used as the center of rotation instead of the view coordinate system origin.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the spin center location by right-clicking on the position on
an object (not on the background) in the view where you want the spin center located, and
then left-click on Spin Center in the menu that displays. The spin center will be located at your
pick point.
1461
VERICUT Help
See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started section of
Help for more information.
Orient on Feature — Resets the view, normal to the feature selected in the graphics area. The
modified view is centered on the position of the selection vector. Click on the Orient on Feature
button so that it becomes activated (highlighted in the Mouse Pick Highlight Color set in
the File menu > Preferences window). Click on a feature in the Graphics window.
Snap to Orthogonal View — Snaps the current view to the closest orthogonal view. Orient the
view so that it is close to the orthogonal view that you want and then click on the Snap to
Orthogonal View button and the view will re-orient to the exact orthogonal view.
Shortcut: You can also use the Snap to Orthogonal View icon in the toolbar or right click
in the view and select Snap to Orthogonal View from the menu that displays to snap the
current view to an orthogonal view.
Zoom creates new View — When toggled on, creates a new view for the zoomed area instead
of modifying the current view. Also changes the icon in the toolbar to the Zoom (create new
view mode) icon.
Shortcut: You can quickly toggle between the two Zoom modes (standard or create new view)
by right-clicking on the Zoom to Box icon or the Zoom Box in New View icon in the
VERICUT toolbar.
Static Viewing Options:
These buttons use various mouse actions to zoom, fit, and reverse the object in view. See the
table below for details. Static viewing options are also available on the VERICUT Toolbar.
1462
VERICUT Help
Button name: Toolbar Icon: Action:
Left-click and move mouse to

Zoom (standard mode) trap area to zoom (press <Esc>
(Zoom to Box) to interrupt rubber-banding)
Similar to Zoom (standard

mode) described above except
a new view is created to
Zoom ( with Zoom creates display the zoomed area.
new View toggled On)
(right click on Zoom to NOTE: This feature not
Box) available in VERICUT
Composite Simulation.
Pan Click in the view then drag the

cursor the distance and
None
direction that you want the
objects in the view to move.
Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms in/out approx. 20%

each time clicked
Fit Fits object in active view

(left click)
Fit All Fits objects in all views

(right click)
Refine Refines the display to improve

(Refine Display) image quality.
Reverse Reverses viewing direction, as

if you stood behind the object
(Reverse) (see also: "reverse" VERICUT
command record)
1463
VERICUT Help
none Restores the last refined

display.
(Last Refine Display) NOTE: This feature not
available in VERICUT
Composite Simulation.
Shortcuts:
1. You can quickly fit, reverse, or orient the model in one of the defined views by right-
clicking in the view and then selecting Fit, Reverse, or Select View from the menu that
displays.
See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started
Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
2. Use the thumb wheel on the mouse to Zoom to Box. Click on the thumb wheel and drag
the mouse to define the box to zoom to. The zoom takes place when you release the
thumb wheel.
See Dynamic Zoom, Pan and Rotate in the Getting Started section VERICUT Help,
Reset — Resets the view to the last orientation accepted by pressing Apply, or as it was when
the Orient window was opened.
Apply — Use the Apply button to accept the current window settings and leave the View Orient
window open for additional work.
Close — Use to close the View Orient window.
See Using the View Orient window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
using the features in the View Orient window.
1464
VERICUT Help
Using the View Orient window
Rotate a View
You can rotate views of the workpiece or NC machine to provide optimum viewing. View
rotations are described with respect to the "view coordinate system". If a Spin Center point is
active for a workpiece or machine view, it will be used as the center of rotation for dynamic
rotations instead of the view coordinate system origin. VERICUT offers several methods of view
rotation, as described below.
View orientation does not change the orientation of the model in physical space, only the way
that it is displayed in a VERICUT view. To change the orientation of the model in physical space,
use the Configure Model menu features, in the Project Tree.
See Configure Model menu, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
To dynamically rotate a view:

1. Click in the view that you want to rotate so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. Use one of the following methods to rotate the objects in a view:
 You can rotate specifically about the view coordinate system X, Y, or Z axis using
the dynamic rotation icons in the View menu > Orient

window (ref. View Orient window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help) in the VERICUT Toolbar (ref. View Toolbar window, also in the View menu
 Press and hold the <Ctrl> + <Shift> keys while left-clicking and dragging the mouse
in the direction to rotate.
The model rotates in the direction you drag. Note that the speed of rotation varies
with the complexity of the model.
To rotate a view by angle values (degrees):

2. In the VERICUT main menu bar click on View menu > Orient to display the View Orient
window.
1465
VERICUT Help
3. In the View Orient window, use one if the following methods to rotate the objects in a
view:
To enter view coordinate system X Y Z angles: enter the values for X rotation, Y rotation
and Z rotation (separated by spaces) in the Angles text field and then press Apply.
For example, "0 0 0" specifies no rotation, or XY "plan" view. "-30 0 0" rotates 30
degrees in the negative direction about the view coordinate system X-axis.
To rotate incrementally by degrees: enter the number of degrees to rotate for each
increment in the Increment text field, and then press the desired rotation axis/direction
button: X+, X-, Y+, etc.
After a short delay, the view of the model is rotated. Repeat pressing the axis/direction
buttons to rotate additional increments.
To rotate a model 180 degrees (reverse) in a view:

window.
3. In the View Orient window, click on the Reverse button.
4. You can also click on the (Reverse) icon In the VERICUT Toolbar.
After a short delay, the view of the model is reversed.
To snap the current view to the closest orthogonal view:

2. Orient the current view so that it is close to the orthogonal view that you want.
window.
4. Click on the Snap to Orthogonal View button and the view will re-orient to the exact
orthogonal view.
You can also use the Snap to Orthogonal View icon in the VERICUT toolbar or
right click in the view and select Snap to Orthogonal View from the menu that displays
to snap the current view to an orthogonal view.
1466
VERICUT Help
Tips:
1. If object display appears coarse, use the (Refine Display) icon in the VERICUT
Toolbar, or the Refine button in the View menu > Orient window, to improve image
quality.
2. If you create a custom view and expect to use it frequently, use View menu >
Select/Store to display the View Select/Store window (ref. Select/Store View window,
also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) and use it to store the view in a list where it
can be quickly retrieved at any time.
3. While manipulating views it may be helpful to display coordinate systems associated
with models and NC programs. To do this, click View menu > View Axes to display the
View Axes window (ref. View Axes window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT
Help), and select the axes and coordinate systems that you wish to display.
See View Orient window and View Toolbar window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) for
1467
VERICUT Help
Changing a View Rotation Point
You can change the center of rotation that will be used for a view during dynamic rotations to
provide optimum viewing. By default, dynamic view rotations revolve around the "view
coordinate system" origin. Use the procedure described below to change the pint about which
a view rotates. If a Spin Center point is active for a workpiece or machine view, it will be used as
the center of rotation for dynamic rotations instead of the view coordinate system origin.
VERICUT offers several methods of view rotation, as described below.
NOTE: View orientation does not change the orientation of the model in physical space, only
the way that it is displayed in a VERICUT view. To change the orientation of the model in
physical space, use the Configure Model menu features, in the Project Tree. See Configure
Model menu, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help
or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
To change a view rotation point:

2. In the VERICUT main menu bar, click on View menu > Orient to display the View Orient
window.
3. In the View Orient window, click on the Set Spin Center text field to make it active
(becomes highlighted).
4. Enter the XYZ values to be used as the Spin Center point in the Set Spin Center text field,
or click on the position on an object (not the background) in the view where you want
the center of rotation, and then click Apply.
5. Press the (Spin Center) icon to display the Spin Center marker and activate
the point for the active view. To de-activate the Spin Center marker, press the button
again.
You can specify a different rotation point for each view using the above procedure. When you
close the View Orient window, the Spin Center markers will no longer be displayed but the
activated Spin Centers will remain active.
When you use one of the dynamic rotation options on the Toolbar, or in
the View menu > Orient window, in a view with an active Spin Center, the Spin Center point
will be used as the center of rotation instead of the view coordinate system origin.
1468
VERICUT Help
Zoom a View
You can magnify (zoom in) or reduce (zoom out) the view of a workpiece or NC machine.
VERICUT offers several methods of zooming, as described below.
To dynamically zoom:
1. Click in the view that you want to "zoom" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. Use one of the following methods to zoom in/out on objects in a view:
 In the View Orient window (File menu > Orient in the VERICUT main menu bar) click
on the (Dynamic Zoom) icon and then left click in the view and drag the mouse
up to zoom in (magnify), or down to zoom out (reduce). Click on the Dynamic Zoom
icon again to quit the zooming action.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Dynamic Zoom) icon and then left click in
the view and drag the mouse up to zoom in (magnify), or down to zoom out
(reduce). Click on the Dynamic Zoom icon again to quit the zooming action.
 You can also press and hold the <Ctrl> key on your keyboard while left-clicking and
dragging the mouse up to zoom in (magnify), down to zoom out (reduce).
To zoom by "rubber banding" a target area (static zoom):

2. Use one of the following methods to zoom in on objects in a view:
 In the View Orient window (File menu > Orient in the VERICUT main menu bar), click
on the Zoom button to zoom in on the objects in the "active" view and display the
results in the "active" view. If you want to zoom in on objects in the "active" view
but display the results in a new view, toggle Zoom creates new View "on" (checked)
before clicking on the Zoom button. Now proceed with step 3.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Zoom to Box) icon, or the (Zoom
Box in New View) icon. Only one of the two icons will appear in the Toolbar. Right
click on the icon to toggle between the two icons (modes). Now proceed with step 3.
3. Left click in the view to anchor a corner of the zoom box.
4. Drag the mouse to stretch the box around the area to zoom.
5. When the target area is surrounded, left click again to indicate the opposite corner of
the box.
VERICUT will zoom in on the area enclosed by the box.
1469
VERICUT Help
6. To cancel the operation while rubber banding a zoom box press the <Esc> key on your
keyboard.
To zoom in or out by steps (approx. 20% each step):

2. Use one of the following methods to zoom in, or zoom out, by steps:
on the Zoom In button to zoom in on the objects in the "active" view. Each time that
you click on the Zoom In button, the objects in the view will be magnified by about
20%.
 Click on the Zoom Out button to zoom out on the objects in the "active" view. Each
time that you click on the Zoom Out button, the size of the objects in the view will
be decreased by about 20%.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Zoom In) icon to zoom out on the objects
in the "active" view. Each time that you click on the Zoom In icon, the size of the
objects in the view will be magnified by about 20%.
 Click on the (ZoomOut) icon to zoom out on the objects in the "active" view.
Each time that you click on the Zoom Out icon, the size of the objects in the view will
be decreased by about 20%.
Tips:
1. If object display appears coarse, use (Refine Display) in the VERICUT Toolbar, or
the Refine button in the View menu > Orient window, to improve image quality.
with models and tool paths. To do this, click View menu > Axes to display the View Axes
window, and select the axes you wish to display.
1470
VERICUT Help
Panning (shifting) a View
You can pan (shift) views to see different portions of the workpiece or NC machine. VERICUT
offers several methods of panning, as described below.
To dynamically pan:
1. Click in the view that you want to "pan" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. Use one of the following methods to pan the objects in a view:
on the (Dynamic Pan) icon and then drag the mouse in the direction that you
want to pan.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Dynamic Pan) icon and then drag the
mouse in the direction that you want to pan.
 Press and hold the <Shift> key on your keyboard while left-clicking and dragging the
mouse in the direction that you want to pan.
To pan by picking "from" and "to" positions (static pan):

1. Click in the view that you want to "pan" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. In the View Orient window (File menu > Orient in the VERICUT main menu bar), click on
the Pan button.
3. Click on a position in the view to indicate the pan "from" point.
4. Move the mouse and click again to indicate the pan "to" point.
5. The objects in the view will shift from the "from" point position to the "to" point
position.
To cancel the operation while positioning for the move "to" point, press the <Esc> key on
your keyboard.
Tips:
quality.
1471
VERICUT Help
1472
VERICUT Help
Fitting Models in a View
A "Fit" operation resizes the workpiece, Form, and/or NC machine so the entire model can be
seen in the view.
To fit a model in a single view:
1. Click in the view that you want to "fit" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
on the Fit button to fit the selected view.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, left-click on the (Fit) icon to fit the selected view.
To fit all views:

1. Click in the view that you want to "fit" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
on the Fit All button to fit the selected view.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, right click on the (Fit) icon to fit all views.
Tips:
quality.
1473
VERICUT Help
Reverse a View
You can reverse views of the workpiece and NC machine at any time. The affect is as if you
walked behind the computer screen and viewed the model from the opposite side.
Reversing the view does not change the orientation of the model in physical space, only the
way that it is displayed in a VERICUT view. To change the orientation of the model in physical
space, use the Configure Model menu features, in the Project Tree.
See Configure Model menu, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for complete
information.
To reverse a view:
1. Click in the view that you want to "reverse" in so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. Use one of the following methods to reverse the display of the objects in a view:
on the Reverse button to reverse the objects in the selected view.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, left-click on the (Reverse) icon to reverse the display
of the objects in the selected view.
After a short delay, the view of the model is reversed.
Tips:
1. If object display appears coarse, use the Refine button in the View Orient window (View
menu > Orient window), or the (Refine Display) icon in the VERICUT Toolbar, to
improve image quality.
1474
VERICUT Help
Attributes (View Attributes window)

Location:
View menu > Attributes
The Attributes option opens the View Attributes window enabling you to control the attributes
of a view, such as: what is seen in a view, light source, shading, etc. In general, click in a view to
make it active, then change attributes as required. Each view has its own view attributes.
General tab — The features on the General tab enable you to control the display characteristics
of a view.
OpenGL Settings tab — The features on the OpenGL Settings tab enable you to control the
display characteristics of an Accelerated (OpenGL) view. This tab is only available when
Accelerated (OpenGL) is toggled "On".
OK — Applies the changes and closes the View Attributes window.

Apply — Applies the changes and leaves the View Attributes window open.
Cancel — Closes the View Attributes window without applying changes.
1475
VERICUT Help
View Attributes Window, General tab
Location:
The features on the General tab enable you to control the display characteristics of a view. The
features available will vary slightly depending on the view type. The picture below shows the
General tab for Machine, Machine/Cut Stock and Profile views. For Workpiece Views, the
Attach Component feature will be replaced by Display Stocks.
View Type — Use to specify the type of view to be displayed. The View Type determines what is
seen in a view.
Options are:
Workpiece — Displays the stock workpiece and machining that occurs on it. This view
supports full inspection capabilities on the machined part, including X-Caliper
measurements and AUTO-DIFF model comparisons.
Machine — Displays a 3-D NC machine, when defined. The uncut stock can be seen,
however, material removal does not occur in this view type.
Machine/Cut Stock — Same as above, except material removal does occur. (Does not
support machined part inspection-use a Workpiece view type for this activity.)
1476
VERICUT Help
Profile — Displays a 2-D profile view of a turned workpiece in a G-Code NC program

simulation, as if it were spinning and sectioned along the turning axis. The profile is created
when cutting begins.
NOTE: Ensure a Spindle component is defined in the machine and turned on by codes in
the G-Code NC program file.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the View Type by right-clicking in the view, and selecting
from the displayed menu. See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more information.
See Changing the View Type under Using the View Attributes window, also in the View menu
Draw Mode — Controls how machine components are displayed.
Toolbar short cuts for Draw Shaded , Draw Lines , and Draw Mixed draw
modes.
Options:
Shade — Shaded solids.
1477
VERICUT Help
Lines — Wireframe.
Hidden — Wireframe with back-facing lines hidden.
Mixed — shade, lines or hidden, as defined by the component's Mixed Mode attribute (Ref.
Mixed Mode in the Configure Component menu: Component tab section of the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help for additional information)
Shortcut: You can quickly change the Draw Mode by right-clicking in the view, and selecting
from the displayed menu. See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the
Getting Started with section of VERICUT Help for more information.
See Changing How a Machine is Displayed under Using the View Attributes window, also in the
View menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
1478
VERICUT Help
Light — I J K vector direction in which the light source points. The three values are separated by
spaces, as described in the view coordinate system. A second light source shines on the
opposite side of the model.
See Changing the Direction of the Light Source under Using the View Attributes window, also
in the View menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Background Style — Controls the background seen in a view. Colors for backgrounds are
defined via the Edit menu > Colors function.
Options:
Flat — Monochromatic.
Shaded — Light-to-dark shading.
Walls — Walls, floor, and ceiling-machine views only.
Sample backgrounds:
Shaded
Walls Flat
1479
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: You can quickly change the Background Style by right-clicking in the view, and
selecting from the displayed menu. See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut
Menus, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more information.
See Changing the View Background under Using the View Attributes window, also in the View
menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Attach Component — Attaches the view point and line of sight for a Machine view to the
selected component. For a Machine view, the view is attached to the machine's Base
component by default, thus the machine base appears stationary while its axes move. For a
Profile view, the view is attached to the Stock component by default.
Whatever component is selected as the attach component becomes stationary in the
simulation, while all other objects are simulated as moving relative to that component.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the component the view is attached to by right-clicking in
the view, and selecting Attach Component in the menu that displays. See the Graphics Area
Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more
information.
Display Stocks — For a Workpiece view, the Attach Component feature is replaced by the
Display Stocks feature. The Display Stocks choice list will contain the names of each individual
Stock component as well as an "All Stocks" option. The "All Stocks" option will only be displayed
if all stock components have a common non-moving parent component. This common non-
moving parent component is the component that the Workpiece view is attached to and the
component's name will display in the view name.
Shortcut: You can quickly change the Display Stocks setting by right-clicking in the view, and
then selecting Display Stocks in the menu that displays. See the Graphics Area Right Mouse
Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for more information.
Translucent Cut Stock — Controls when the stock model is displayed as translucent (can be
seen through).
Translucent can only be applied to an active workpiece view. Once the attribute is set, more
than one workpiece view can be displayed "translucent". It is only valid with a "refined
display".
All VERICUT functions can be used with a translucent view. However, when the model is
rotated, sectioned, or zoomed, the resulting view is a solid. Use Refine Display to re-display the
translucent view. Almost any model feature can be seen using combinations of Translucency,
Reverse, Section, and Zoom.
NOTE: Translucent cutters may intermittently disappear while cutting a translucent model.
Display the tool as a solid to eliminate this "flashing" affect.
1480
VERICUT Help
Toolbar short cut:

Options are:
Off — Translucency is off and the workpiece is displayed as a solid (can not be seen
through).
Normal — Use to make material in front of a machined surface to become translucent.
When a machined surface is not present behind material, the material is displayed in solid.
Extended — Similar to Normal, except when a machined surface is not present behind
material, the material is still displayed with translucency.
Translucent "Off" Translucent "Normal" Translucent "Extended"
Shortcut: You can quickly change the Translucent setting by using the toolbar short cut:
Use the left mouse button on the icon to toggle Translucent "On" or "Off". When the
Translucent icon is toggled "On", use the right mouse button on the icon to quickly toggle
between Translucent "Normal" and Translucent "Extended" modes. The change is
immediately applied to the "active" workpiece view.
Accelerated (OpenGL) — Toggles Hardware Graphics Acceleration "On" and "Off".
Shortcut: You can also right-click in the graphics area and use Accelerated (OpenGL) in the
displayed menu to toggle Hardware Graphics Acceleration "On" and "Off". See the Graphics
Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for
more information.
To View Attributes window
1481
VERICUT Help
View Attributes window, OpenGL Settings tab, Display

Options
Location:
The features on the OpenGL Settings tab, Display Options tab enable you to control the display
characteristics of an OpenGL Workpiece, Machine, or Machine/Cut Stock View. The features on
this tab are only available when Accelerated (OpenGL) is toggled "On".
Perspective View — When Perspective View is toggled "On", a perspective view is displayed in
Machine and Machine/Cut Stock views.
Field of View Angle — This feature is only available when Perspective View is toggled "On". It
enables you to control the Field of View Angle of the perspective view. Move the slider to the
left to decrease the view angle and to the right to increase it.
1482
VERICUT Help
Clipping Plane — This feature is only available when Perspective View is toggled "On". It
enables you to control the position of the "clipping plane" in the perspective view. Move the
slider to the left to move the "clipping plane" closer to the plane of the screen. Move it to the
right to move the "clipping plane" further into the view (away from the plane of screen). All
objects between the "clipping plane" and the plane of the screen are blanked from the display.
For example, this feature could be used to blank parts of the machine (like doors) to better
view the part on the machine.
Translucency — This feature enables you to control the translucency characteristic of selected
components. For example, this feature could be used to make certain parts of the machine (like
doors, or enclosures) to better view the part on the machine.
Before the Translucency slider will affect the display, the following conditions must be met:
1. The component(s) must have the Mixed Mode attribute must be set to Translucent.
(Ref. Mixed Mode in the Configure Component menu: Component tab section of the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information)
2. Draw Mode must be set to Mixed (refer to View Attributes window: General tab above).
The Translucency slider can now be used to vary the translucency of the selected components.
The following examples have the machine enclosure component set for using the Translucency
slider.
Example of Translucency slider all the way to the right (Less)
1483
VERICUT Help
Example of Translucency slider at the midpoint
Example of Translucency slider all the way to the left (More)
Cut Stock Display — This feature enables you to control the way that the Cut Stock is displayed
(and therefore the processing speed). Moving the slider to the left will display a "sharper"
image of the Cut Stock but will result in longer processing times. Moving the slider to the right
results in a Cut Stock display with a less sharp image, but processing time will be faster. This
feature is only available when the View Type is either Workpiece, or Machine/Cut Stock. The
Cut Stock Display slider is inactive when Coarse Cut Stock Image (described below) is toggled
"On".
1484
VERICUT Help
Coarse Cut Stock Image — This feature is only available when the View Type is either
Workpiece, or Machine/Cut Stock. When toggled "On" (checkmark displayed), the cut stock
image in the Machine/Cut Stock view is displayed as an approximate "block" image (also called
the "lego" display). This image is only updated at the end of each setup, so that the subsequent
setup has an approximate image of the cut stock. The "lego" image moves from setup-to-setup
the same as a normal cut stock image.
When toggled "On" in a Workpiece view, the cut stock image is displayed as an approximate
"block" image during OpenGL motions (rotate, zoom, pan, etc.). The cut stock display during
these actions is in the same state of cutting as the cut stock display in the Machine/Cut Stock
view.
When OK, or Apply, is pressed in the View Attributes window, the cut stock image changes
depending on the change in the check-box state, and the Cut Stock Display slider becomes
inactive. The check-box state is saved in the project setup's view attributes. The Coarse Cut
Stock Image feature can be toggled On/Off at any time.
Turning this feature "On" has no effect on the content of the cut stock model, collision
checking, or project processing. This is a graphics display change only, for performance reasons.
VERICUT features that query the cut stock via graphical picks in a Workpiece, or Machine/Cut
Stock, view (such as X-caliper, Modeling, etc.) continue to work, regardless of the image.
To OpenGL Settings tab
1485
VERICUT Help
View Attributes window, OpenGL Settings tab, Floor/Wall

Textures tab
Location:
The features on the OpenGL Settings tab, Floor/Wall Textures tab enable you to specify custom
texture files to be used for floor, ceiling and walls of an OpenGL Machine view. These custom
textures are only visible in the VERICUT Graphics Area in Machine Views, when Accelerated
(OpenGL) is toggled "On" and Background Style is set to "Walls".
Floor — Enter the \path\file name in the text field of the JPEG file containing the texture to be
used for the floor, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Texture JPEG File selection
window to specify the file.
Ceiling — Enter the \path\file name in the text field of the JPEG file containing the texture to be
used for the ceiling, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Texture JPEG File selection
window to specify the file.
1486
VERICUT Help
Left/Right Walls — Enter the \path\file name in the text field of the JPEG file containing the
texture to be used for the left and right walls, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Texture JPEG File selection window to specify the file.
Front/Back Walls — Enter the \path\file name in the text field of the JPEG file containing the
texture to be used for the front and back walls, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Texture JPEG File selection window to specify the file.
NOTES:
The following information is related to how VERICUT uses the Floor, Ceiling, and Wall JPGs
specified above.
1. All images (floor, ceiling, and walls) use a 1:1 aspect ratio.
2. VERICUT cuts given JPEG file images to a rectangle with sizes which are powers of two.
For instance, image 1500x760 will be cut to 1024x512. Image 760x760 will be cut to
512x512.
3. Floor/ceiling/walls sizes are calculated based on the machine size in corresponding
direction which is extended by some open space around the machine which is also
calculated based on the overall machine size.
Sample "standard" OpenGL Machine view:
1487
VERICUT Help
Sample "custom" OpenGL Machine view:
The custom texture files specified using the View Attributes window: Floor/Walls Texture tab,
only apply to the current setup and the specified texture files are stored with the setup in the
project file. All OpenGL Machine views in the setup use the same texture files.
Texture files for drawing floor, ceiling, and walls in an OpenGL Machine view can also be
specified using the following Environment Variables as in V6.0:
CGTECH_FLOOR_IMAGE
CGTECH_CEILING_IMAGE
CGTECH_X_WALL_IMAGE
CGTECH_Y_WALL_IMAGE
When texture files are specified using Environment Variables, they apply to all OpenGL Machine
views with Background Style=Walls, not specific to a particular setup. For more information on
these and all VERICUT environment variables, see Environment Variables in the Getting Started
Simulation Help.
The custom texture files specified using the View Attributes window: Floor/Walls Texture tab
will over-ride one set using one if the Environment Variables. If a custom texture file is not
specified with either of these methods, standard VERICUT images will be used.
1488
VERICUT Help
Consider the following example:
1. No Floor texture file is specified on the View Attributes window: Floor/Walls Texture
tab.
2. VERICUT will then use any texture file specified using the CGTECH_FLOOR_IMAGE
environment variable.
3. If the environment variable has not been specified, VERICUT will use the default chess-
board image will be used for the floor.
The same hierarchy is true for the ceiling and the walls.
To OpenGL Settings tab
1489
VERICUT Help
Using the View Attributes window
Changing the View Type
VERICUT enables you to see machining in a variety of ways. Each view is capable of displaying
the workpiece being machined, the NC machine, or a "combined" view of the workpiece being
cut on the NC machine.
To change the view type to display a workpiece, machine, or combined view:

1. Click in the view that you want to change the view type so that it becomes the "active"
view.
2. Use one of the following methods to change the type of view:
 In the View Attributes window (File menu > Attributes in the VERICUT main menu
bar), select the desired view type (Workpiece, Machine, Machine/Cut Stock, or
Profile) from the View Type pull-down list.
 Right click in the view and select View Type > type (Workpiece, Machine,
Machine/Cut Stock, or Profile) from the menu that displays.
 In the VERICUT Toolbar, click on the (Workpiece View) icon, the
(Machine/Cut Stock View) icon, or the (Accelerated Machine/Cut Stock View)

icon to quickly change the "active" view to corresponding view type.
Right click on the (Machine/Cut Stock View) icon or the (Accelerated

Machine/Cut Stock View) icon to switch between the two modes.
NOTE: A 3-D machine must be defined for it to be seen in a Machine or Machine/Cut Stock
view.
See View Attributes window and View Toolbar window, also in the View menu section of
Help) for additional information.
Also see Graphics Area Right Mouse Button (RMB) Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started
Simulation Help for additional information on the features available when you right click in a
view.
1490
VERICUT Help
Changing How a Machine is Displayed
VERICUT can display a 3-D machine in many ways: shaded solids, wireframe, hidden lines, etc.
How the machine is displayed has no effect on the accuracy of the simulation or collision
checking. However, the way that it is displayed can affect performance. The effect varies,
depending on your hardware configuration, and complexity of the machine/workpiece.
To change how the machine is displayed:

1. Click in the Machine, or Machine/Cut Stock view containing the machine display that is
to be changed so that it becomes the "active" view.
2. In the VERICUT main menu bar, click on View menu > Attributes to display the View
Attributes window.
3. In the View Attributes window, choose the desired Draw Mode for the machine from
the pull-down list. Choose:
Shade — shaded solids
Lines — wireframe
Hidden — wireframe with back-facing lines hidden
Mixed — shade, lines, or hidden-as defined by each component
4. Press Apply to apply the change and leave the View Attributes window open for
additional work, or OK to apply the change and close the View Attribute window.
Tips:
1. Click on (Draw Shaded) in the Toolbar, to quickly change the selected Machine, or
Machine/Cut Stock, view to be displayed as a shaded solid.
2. Click on (Draw Lines) in the Toolbar, to quickly change the selected Machine, or
Machine/Cut Stock, view to be displayed as a wireframe.
3. Click on (Draw Mixed) in the Toolbar, to quickly change the selected Machine, or
Machine/Cut Stock, view to be displayed as defined by each component.
See View Attributes window and View Toolbar window, also in the View menu section of in the
1491
VERICUT Help
Changing the Direction of the Light Source
When model features cannot be seen well due to poor lighting, there are two options:
 Change the light brightness (via Brightness feature on the Color window: Define tab
(Edit menu > Colors), or
 Change the light source direction.
Light source I J K vector values are described with respect to the "view coordinate system"- see
"About VERICUT Views", above for details. Changing the light source direction has no effect on
simulation speed or accuracy.
To change the light source direction:

1. Click in the view that you want to change the light source so that it becomes the "active"
view.
Attributes window.
3. In the View Attributes window, enter I J K vector values (separated by spaces) in the
Light (IJK) text field that defines the view coordinate system vector direction in which to
point the light.
4. Press Apply to apply the change and leave the View Attributes window open for
additional work or OK to apply the change and close the View Attribute window.
The light source is updated and model shaded accordingly. A second source is automatically
defined to light the opposite side of the model.
View Attributes window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information on
View Attribute window features.
Also see Color window, in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on defining
colors used in VERICUT.
1492
VERICUT Help
Changing the View Background
VERICUT offers several background types for views. The choice of background has no effect on
simulation speed or accuracy, but can make the simulation appear more attractive or realistic.
To change the background in a view:
Choose one of the following methods to change the view background:
Use the View Attributes menu
1. Click in the view that you want to change the background style so that it becomes the
"active" view.
Attributes window.
3. In the View Attributes window, select the desired background style from Background
Style pull-down list.
Use a view right mouse button menu

1. Right click in the view that you want to change the background style.
2. In the menu that displays, select Background Style > style (Flat, Shaded, or Walls). The
styles available will vary depending on the View Type. This feature is not available for
Profile Views.
Tips:
1. For walls to display correctly, ensure that Floor/Wall Orient feature in the Machine
Settings window (Configuration menu > Machine Settings) is set correctly for your
machine. (Ref. Machine Settings window in the Configure menu section of VERICUT
Help)
2. Colors for backgrounds are defined in the Color window: Define tab (Edit menu >
Colors). See Color window, in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
See View Attributes window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information on View Attribute window features.
1493
VERICUT Help
Section
The Section option opens the Section window which has features that enable you to define
section planes through a VERICUT model in a Workpiece view. See Section window in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for complete information.
1494
VERICUT Help
Select/Store (Select/Store View window)
Location:
View menu > Select/Store
The Select/Store option opens the Select/Store View window enabling you to store, modify and
apply custom views. Defined views are shown in the "View List". Each custom view is stored
with the View Type and orientation of the view that was active at the time it was stored. There
is no limit to the number of views you can store.
VERICUT Shortcut: You can quickly reverse the orientation, or change the view to one of the
standard or stored custom views by right-clicking on the view in the VERICUT graphics window,
then selecting the desired view name using Select View option in the displayed menu.
View List — List of defined views.
Shortcut: Right-click in the View List to display the following menu:
These features provide the same functionality as described below.
1495
VERICUT Help
Activate — Applies the View Type and orientation of the stored view highlighted in the View
List to the active view in the VERICUT graphics window.
Modify — Modifies the View Type and orientation of the highlighted view in the View List to
match those of the active view in the VERICUT graphics window.
Reset — Resets the active view in the VERICUT graphics area to the View Type and orientation
that it had when the Select/Store View window was opened.
Add — Adds a new view, after the highlighted view, to the View List. The new view will have
the same View Type and orientation as the active view in the VERICUT graphics window. Double
click on the view name to rename the view. Hit <enter> when you are through editing.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted view from the View List.
Delete All — Deletes all views from the View List.
Close — Closes the Select /Store View window.
VERICUT Shortcut: You can quickly Add, Delete, or Activate views in the View List by right-
clicking on a view and selecting desired action from the displayed menu.
See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started with section
of VERICUT Help for more information.
See Using the Select/Store View window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help,
1496
VERICUT Help
Using the Select/Store View window
Defining custom views enables you to quickly reorient a view in the VERICUT graphics area to
see specific areas of the part during the machining verification process. Custom views can be
stored, named and applied from a "View List". Each custom view is stored with both View Type
and orientation. There is no limit to the number of views you can store.
Use the procedures defined below to store, use, modify and delete custom views using the
features in the Select/Store View window.
To store a custom view:

1. Orient the model to create the view that you want to store. If necessary refer to View
Orient window and Using the View Orient window, also in the View menu section of
VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help.
2. With the custom view as the "active" view in the graphics area, click on View menu >
Select/Store in the VERICUT main menu bar to display the Select/Store View window.
3. In the Select/Store View window, if this is the first view being added to the list, simply
press Add. If other views are already in the list, the new view will be added at the end of
the list.
If other views are already in the list and you want the new view in a specific position in
the list, select the existing view that you want the new view added after so that it
becomes highlighted and then press Add. VERICUT adds the new view after the
highlighted view in the list.
The new view stores the View Type and orientation of the view displayed in the active
view in the graphics area.
4. Double click on the default name of the newly created view (to enter edit mode) and
enter a unique name. Press the <Enter> key on your keyboard to save the name. You
can also rename any view in the View List using this same method.
To apply (activate) a stored view:

1. Click on the view in the graphics area that you want to change to one of the stored
custom views so that it is the "active" view.
2. In the VERICUT main menu bar, click on View menu > Select/Store to display the
Select/Store View menu.
1497
VERICUT Help
3. In the Select/Store View window, select the view from the view list that you want to
apply to the "active" view in the graphics area.
4. Press Activate.
VERICUT updates the "active view" in the graphics area to the view type and orientation
stored in the highlighted view in the view list.
NOTE: You can restore the view to its original orientation by pressing Restore in the
Select/Store View window.
To modify a custom view:

1. Orient the view in the graphics area to the type and orientation that you want to replace
in an existing stored view. If necessary refer to View Orient window and Using the View
Orient window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
2. In the VERICUT main menu bar click on View menu > Select/Store to display the
Select/Store View window.
3. In the Select/Store View window, select the view in the list that you want to modify so
4. Press Modify.
5. VERICUT updates the view currently stored with the one displayed in the active view in
the graphics area.
6. If desired, rename the view using the method described above in step 4 of "To store a
custom view".
To delete a custom view:

1. In the VERICUT main menu bar, click on View menu > Select/Store to display the
Select/Store View menu.
2. In the Select/Store View window, select the view in the View List to be deleted.
3. Press Delete to delete the selected view, or Delete All to delete all defined views.
See Select/Store View window, also in the View menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information.
1498
VERICUT Help
View Axes (View Axes window)
Location:
View menu > View Axes
The View Axes option opens the View Axes window enabling you to control when various axes
and coordinate systems are displayed. Axes are created by VERICUT and are stored in the
Preferences file. Coordinate Systems (CSYS) are user defined and are stored in the "setup".
Once displayed, axes and coordinate system symbols remain displayed until toggled "Off" in the
View Axes window. Solid lines indicate that an axis is parallel or pointing out of the screen.
Dashed lines indicate that an axis is pointing into the screen.
1499
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: You can also change the axes and coordinate systems displayed by right-clicking in
the view, and selecting from the Display Axes list in the menu that displays.
See the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the Getting Started with section
of VERICUT Help for more information.
AXES
Axes are drawn in the Foreground color by default. The (Color Pallet) icons enable you to
specify a "global" display color for each type of axis described below.
The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color for the axis. To change the color
for the axis, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the associated axis. The color
pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the View Axes
window will update to reflect the selected color.
Component — When selected, displays XYZComponent axes that representing the coordinate
system of a component. Each component has its own local coordinate system.
Model — When selected, displays XYZModel axes that represent the coordinate system of a
model. Each model has its own local coordinate system.
Machine Origin — When selected, displays XYZMachine Origin axes that represent the
coordinate system in which an NC machine is defined.
Workpiece Origin — When selected, displays XYZWorkpiece Origin axes that represent the
coordinate system to which Stock, Fixture, and Design components are connected.
 In a simulation where a machine IS NOT defined, such as when processing APT-CLS NC
program files, the workpiece coordinate origin is the origin of the non-moving "Base"
component to which Stock, Fixture, and Design components are connected.
1500
VERICUT Help
 In a simulation where a machine IS defined, such as when processing G-Code NC

program files, the workpiece coordinate origin is the origin the machine component
responsible for carrying the Stock, Fixture, and Design components.
Tool Tip Zero — When toggled "On", displays the XYZToolTip axes that represent where the
tool tip (the VERICUT control point) of the "active" tool would be located, relative to the
"active" stock, if all linear axes were positioned at zero. The display is based on the actual
Machine/Control configuration and therefore may be displayed as a right hand axis, a left hand
axis or possibly even a non-orthogonal axis. If no tool has been loaded, VERICUT assumes a zero
length tool.
The following should be considered when using this feature:
 Tool Tip Zero is only applicable when processing G-Code Data.
 The Tool Tip Zero display is based on the "active" tool. If the machine being used has
more than one tool component, the correct tool component must be set as active
before valid results can be achieved.
 The Tool Tip Zero display is based on the "active" stock. If more than one stock
component on the machine, the correct stock component must be set as active before
valid results can be achieved.
 The Tool Tip Zero display shows where the tool tip is and therefore may not be
particularly useful when programming a 5-axis machine in "gage-length" mode.
Spindle Direction — When toggled "On", a graphic is displayed indicating direction that the
spindle is turning.
Mill Example Lathe Example
1501
VERICUT Help
The Spindle Direction indicator can also be turned On/Off by right-clicking in the graphics
window and selecting Display Axes > Spindle Direction from the pop-up menu that displays.
Note that only the center arrow displays until the spindle is turned on in the NC program.
Driven Point Zero — When toggled "On", displays the "driven point" (identified by the
symbol) and the XYZDriven Point Zero axes.
The "driven point" is only displayed in the Machine View. Depending on the machine
configuration, more than one Driven Point Zero axis may be displayed in the View Axes window
as shown in the picture above.
The initial "driven point" position is determined based on the following:
 If the macro PivotOffsetCompName has been called, the initial driven point is the origin
of this component, otherwise
 If there are no rotary/turret components attached to the "active" tool component, the
initial driven point is the origin of the "active" tool component.
 If there are 1, or more, rotary/turret components attached to the "active" tool
component, the initial driven point is the origin of the highest level rotary/turret
component.
The following offsets are then applied to the initial "driven point" (adjusted as needed for
RTCP):
 Gage Offset
 Tool Nose Compensation Offset
 Tool Length Compensation Offset
 Turret Offset
 Gage Pivot Offset
 Pivot Offset (RTCP)
 3D Tool Length Comp Offset (Fanuc)
The Driven Point Zero axes represent where the driven point of the "active" tool would be
located, relative to the "active" stock, if all linear axes were positioned at zero. The display is
based on the actual Machine/Control configuration and therefore may be displayed as a right
hand axis, a left hand axis or possibly even a non-orthogonal axis. The Driven Point Zero axes
are displayed in Workpiece, Machine and Machine/Cut Stock views.
The following should be considered when using this feature:
 Driven Point Zero is only applicable when processing G-Code Data.
 The Driven Point Zero display is based on the "active" tool. If the machine being used
has more than one tool component, the correct tool component must be set as active
before valid results can be achieved.
1502
VERICUT Help
 The Driven Point Zero display is based on the "active" stock. If more than one stock
component on the machine, the correct stock component must be set as active before
valid results can be achieved.
 Some machine configurations do not conform to initial "driven point" rules described
above and therefore will not produce useful results. An example of this would be Maho-
Phillips machines using a two position head. The initial driven point could not be
calculated correctly resulting in invalid results.
 Dual turret machines typically will not have the active tool defined for both turrets,
therefore the initial driven point can not be calculated correctly resulting in invalid
results.
Set Axes — When selected, all "axes" are toggled "On" and will be displayed.
Clear Axes — When selected, all "axes" are toggled "Off" and will not be displayed.
NOTE:
1. Axes display status is stored in the Preferences file. Axes that are displayed when you
exit a VERICUT session are displayed the next time you run VERICUT.
Display Active Coord. Sys. — When toggled "On", a coordinate system with the name of the
active coordinate system will display in the VERICUT Graphics area as shown below. Only the
"active" coordinate system will display with the marker at its origin as shown.
1503
VERICUT Help
COORDINATE SYSTEMS (CSYS)

Coordinate System Table — The Coordinate System Table displays all coordinate systems
defined for the "current setup". Each CSYS in the table has a checkbox that toggles "On" and
"Off", indicating whether it is displayed or not. By default, CSYS are drawn in the Foreground
color. The color of a CSYS can be changed using the associated (Color Pallet) icon. The
Color pallet icon is described above in the Axes section.
Set CSYS — When selected, all "coordinate systems" are toggled "On" and will be displayed.
Clear CSYS — When selected, all "coordinate systems" are toggled "Off" and will not be
displayed.
NOTE: Coordinate System display status is stored in the "setup".
1504
VERICUT Help
Toolbar (View Toolbar window)
Location:
View menu > Toolbar
The Toolbar option opens the View Toolbar window enabling you to control when the Toolbar
is displayed and the icons that it contains. Toolbar icons provide quick and easy access to the
most commonly used VERICUT functions/features. The Toolbar can be closed, opened, or
customized at any time. You choose which icons are displayed in the Toolbar and in what order.
1505
VERICUT Help
Tip: Use the F1 key for Help on the View Toolbar window.
Display Toolbar — When toggled on (checked), selecting OK displays all of the icons in the
Visible Icons list in the Toolbar in the VERICUT main window as shown in the picture below. By
default, all icons are visible and displayed in the Toolbar.
Available Icons — The Available Icons list contains all icons that are not currently displayed in
the toolbar. By default, all icons are visible and displayed in the Toolbar.
Use the following arrow buttons to move icons from one list to the other.
Use this arrow button to move one, or more, highlighted icons in the Available Icons list to
the Visible Icons list.
Use this arrow button to move one, or more, highlighted icons in the Visible Icons list to
the Available Icons list.
Use this icon to add a separator between icons, or groups of icons, in the Toolbar display
as shown in the picture below.
Use this icon to remove a separator to the Toolbar display.
TIP: You can also "drag" and "drop" one, or more, icons from the Available Icons list to the
Visible Icons list. Left-click on a single icon in the Available Icons list so that it becomes
highlighted, and then while keeping the mouse button depressed, drag the icon to the Visible
Icons list and release the mouse button. The position of the cursor, when you release the
mouse button, will determine where the icon is "dropped". You can drop it at a specific location
in the list or at the end of the list.
1506
VERICUT Help
You can also use the "drag" and "drop" procedure to move icons from the Visible Icon list to the
Available Icons list.
Use one of the procedures described below to select, and highlight, multiple icons to be
"dragged" and "dropped" from one list to the other.
Visible Icons — The Visible Icons list is used to specify which icons are to be displayed in the
Toolbar. Icons are added to the Toolbar in the order that they appear in the Visible Icons list.
Use the following arrow buttons to move icons up, or down in the list.
Click on this arrow button to move one, or more highlighted icons up one position in the
Visible Icons list.
Click on this arrow button to move one, or more highlighted icons down one position in
the Visible Icons list.
TIP: You can also "drag" and "drop" one, or more, icons from one position in the Visible Icons
list to another position in the Visible Icons list. Left-click on a single icon in the Visible Icons list
so that it becomes highlighted, and then while keeping the mouse button depressed, drag the
icon to the desired position in the Visible Icons list and release the mouse button. The position
of the cursor, when you release the mouse button, will determine where the icon is "dropped".
You can also use the above the "drag" and "drop" procedure to move icons from one position
to another in the Available Icons list.
Use one of the procedures described below to select, and highlight, multiple icons to be
"dragged" and "dropped" from one position in the list to another.
OK — Click OK, to accept your changes and close the View Toolbar window.
Cancel — Close the View Toolbar window without accepting changes.
Both the Available Icons list and the Visible Icons list enable you to select one, or more, icons at
the same time. To select multiple icons in these lists, try these techniques:
Select multiple icons in sequence — Click the first icon/name in the sequence so that it
becomes highlighted, then press and hold the <Shift> key while clicking the last icon/name in
the sequence. The first, last and all icons between will become highlighted and can then be
moved as a group.
Select additional individual icons — Click the first icon/name so that it becomes highlighted,
then press and hold the <Control> key while selecting each additional icon/name so that they
become highlighted. All of the highlighted icons can then be moved as a group.
With either method, selecting an icon/name a second time, while holding down the <Control>
key, un-selects the icon/name.
1507
VERICUT Help
The following icons are available for use in the Toolbar:
Toolbar Icons: Icon Name Icon Function
Displays the Open Project window.

Open Project See the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Save Project Saves the Project.
Save Project As Displays the Save Project As window.

(Right click on the icon to toggle
between modes.)
New Project Inch Opens a new inch project.
New Project Millimeter Opens a new millimeter project.

between modes.)
Open In-Process Displays the Open In-Process window.

See the File Menu section of VERICUT
Save In-Process Saves the In-Process file.
Save In-Process As Displays the Save In-Process As

window.
between modes.)
Save Project, Machine, and Provides the same functionality as File

Control Files menu > Save All
Open Review File Displays the Open VERICUT Review File

file selection window
1508
VERICUT Help
Save Review File Displays the Save VERICUT Review File

file selection window.
Working Directory Displays the Working Directory window.
Edit NC Program Displays the current NC Program in the

NC Program Editor window.
Custom Interface Displays the Select Book’s Folder

window.
File Summary Displays the File Summary window.

(Copy files)
Open Machine Displays the Open Machine file

selection window.
Open Control Displays the Open Control file selection

window.
Tools Displays the Tool Manager window.
Output Displays the Settings window: Output

Files tab.
Setup Plan Displays the Select View window.

See Setup Plan in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help for additional
information
Project Tree Displays the Project Tree window.
APT Settings Displays the APT Settings window.
No Animation Turns off the display tool motion and

material removal during processing for
faster processing.
1509
VERICUT Help
No Machine Simulation Turns off the display of machine motion

during processing for faster processing.
AutoSave Displays the AutoSave window.
AUTO-DIFF Displays the AUTO-DIFF window.
X-Caliper Displays the X-Caliper window.
NC Program Review Starts NC Program Review mode.
Inspection Displays the Inspection window.
Comparator Displays the Comparator window.
Perform Syntax Check Starts the Perform Syntax Check

feature.
NC Program Preview Starts NC Program Preview mode.
Save Machine Saves the Machine file.
Save Machine As Opens the Save Machine File window.

between modes.)
Save Control Saves the Control File
Save Control As Opens the Save Control File window.

between modes.)
1510
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings Displays the Machine Settings window.
Word Format Displays the Word Format window.
G-Code Processing Displays the G-Code Processing

window.
Control Settings Displays the Control Settings window.
Control Advanced Options Displays the Advanced Control Options

window.
G-Code Advanced Settings Displays the G-Code Advanced Settings

window.
G-Code Output Options Displays the Output Options window
Workpiece View Changes the “active” view to a

Workpiece View.
See View Attributes window, General
tab for additional information.
1511
VERICUT Help
Machine/Cut Stock View Changes the “active” view to a

Machine/Cut Stock View.
Changes the "active" view to a

Accelerated Machine/Cut Stock Machine/Cut Stock View with OpenGL
View turned on.
between modes.)
See View Attributes window for
Draw Shaded Displays machine components as

shaded solids.
Draw Lines Displays machine components as

wireframe.
Draw Mixed Displays machine components as a

combination of shaded solid and wire
frame.
Section Displays the Section window.
1512
VERICUT Help
Translucent Left click to turn Translucent On/Off.
Translucent Extended When turned "on", right click to toggle

between Normal and Extended
Translucent modes.
The change is immediately applied to
the "active" workpiece view.
Color Displays the Color window.
Zoom to Box Activates Zoom to Box. Move the

mouse in the graphics area to trap the
area to zoom.
Zoom to Box in New View

Activates Zoom to Box in New View.
Similar to Zoom to Box except creates a
new view for the zoomed area.
between modes.)
See View Orient window for additional
information.
Zoom In Zooms in approximately 20% each time

clicked.
information.
Zoom Out Zooms out approximately 20% each

time clicked.
information.
1513
VERICUT Help
Fit Left click to fit the “active” view.

Fit All Right click to fit all views.
information.
Refines the display to improve image

Refine Display
quality.
information.
Restores the last refined display.

Last Refine Display
Refines the display to improve image

Reverse
quality.

information.
Activates the Snap to Orthogonal View

Snap to Orthogonal View
feature which snaps the current view to
the closest orthogonal view.
View NC Program Displays the NC Program panel.
Status Displays the Status window.
Graphs Displays the Graphs window.
Machine Offsets Displays the G-Code Debug window:

Machine Offsets tab.
1514
VERICUT Help
Call Stack Displays the G-Code Debug window:

Call Stack tab.
SubSystem Motion Displays the G-Code Debug window:

SubSystem Motion tab.
Siemens 840D System Frames Displays the G-Code Debug window:

Siemens 840D System Frames tab.
Cutcom Sketch Displays the G-Code Debug window:

Cutcom Sketch tab.
View G-Code Report Displays a G-Code Report file.
View Control Report Displays a Control Report file.
VERICUT Log Displays the VERICUT Log window.
Clear Log File and Logger Clears both the VERICUT Log File and
the Message Area (Logger).
OptiPath Displays the OptiPath Control window.
OptiPath Compare Files Displays the Compare NC Programs

window.
OptiPath Savings Calculator Displays the OptiPath Savings Calculator

window.
Interactive OptiPath Displays the Interactive OptiPath panel.
1515
VERICUT Help
FastMill Toggles FastMill On/Off.
Load All Stocks Load All Stocks causes VERICUT to load

new stock models for Stock
components having models defined,
but a cut stock model does not exist.
Delete Detached Stock Displays the Delete Detached Stock

window.
MDI Displays the MDI window.
Image Record Displays the Image Record window.
Image Playback Starts either the Playback VERICUT

Movie window or the Playback AVI
AVI Playback
Movie window.
The icon mode is set automatically
based on the Output Format setting in
the Image Record window.
View Capture Displays the View Capture window.
Print View Displays the Page Setup window.
Toggles Dynamic X Rotation On/Off.

Dynamic X Rotation
See NOTE below.
information.
1516
VERICUT Help
Toggles Dynamic Z Rotation On/Off.

Dynamic Y Rotation
See NOTE below.

information.
Toggles Dynamic Z Rotation On/Off.
Dynamic Z Rotation
See NOTE below.

information.
Dynamic XY Rotation Toggles Dynamic XY Rotation On/Off.

See NOTE below.
information.
Dynamic Pan Toggles Dynamic Pan On/Off.

See NOTE below.
information.
Dynamic Zoom Toggles Dynamic Zoom On/Off.

See NOTE below.
information.
NOTE: All of the dynamic action icons (Dynamic X Rotation, Dynamic Y Rotation, Dynamic Z
Rotation, Dynamic XY Rotation, Dynamic Pan, and Dynamic Zoom), described above, are
automatically de-activated when changing to X-Caliper or NC Program Review.
1517
VERICUT Help
Single View Layout Creates a single view layout in the

graphics area.
See Layout (view) for additional
information.
Two View Layout (Horizontal) Creates a horizontal two view layout in

the graphics area.
information.
Two View Layout (Vertical) Creates a vertical two view layout in the
graphics area.
information.
Three View Layout (Vertical) Creates a vertical three view layout in

the graphics area.
information.
Three View Layout (Horizontal) Creates a horizontal three view layout

in the graphics area.
information.
Four View Layout Creates a four view layout in the

graphics area.
information.
View To Back Moves the "active" view to the back.
1518
VERICUT Help
View Always in Front Makes the active view remain "always

in front" until it is specifically moved to
the back or until another view is
specified as "always in front".
G-Code Variables Displays the Variables window.
Close Closes the Toolbar.
1519
VERICUT Help
Resolution
Location:
View menu > Resolution
The Resolution option enables you to control the quality of cut model display. Increasing
resolution displays a more accurate representation of the cut model, and requires more
computer resources and processing time to display and manipulate the model. A coarse display
resolution is automatically used when dynamically manipulating the model, such as rotation,
zooming, etc. When the dynamic action is finished, the display is upgraded to the previous
resolution.
Options:
Manual — A display resolution which allows most models to be manipulated with acceptable
performance and display quality.
Auto — Automatically sets display resolution based on viewing distance from the model.
Resolution automatically increases when you zoom closer to see details on the model, and
decreases as you zoom out.
1520
VERICUT Help
Color Theme Feature
This feature enables you to select a “favorite” color for the display of the VERICUT Main
window and dialogs.
NOTE: This feature is only available when Look & Feel (View menu > Look & Feel) is set to
Windows.
In the VERICUT main menu bar:
1521
VERICUT Help
Sample Results
VERICUT Main Window
1522
VERICUT Help
Sample Dialog
1523
VERICUT Help
Look & Feel
Location:
View menu > Look & Feel
The Look & Feel option enables you to change the appearance of VERICUT's user interface. All
windows are affected. The look and feel of VERICUT can be changed at any time.
To change the user interface look and feel:

1. Select View menu > Look and Feel.
2. Choose the feature, from the pull-down list, that provides the desired appearance.
1524
VERICUT Help
Appearance Choices:
Metal —
1525
VERICUT Help
Motif —
1526
VERICUT Help
Nimbus —
1527
VERICUT Help
Windows —
1528
VERICUT Help
Windows Classic —
1529
VERICUT Help
Text Larger — Use to make the text in VERICUT menus, message logger, windows, etc.
larger. Each time you click on "Text Larger", the text gets incrementally larger to a maximum
font size of "14 point".
1530
VERICUT Help
Text Smaller — Use to make the text in VERICUT menus, message logger, windows, etc.
smaller. Each time you click on "Text Smaller", the text gets incrementally smaller to a
minimum font size of "6 point ".
1531
VERICUT Help
The icons used throughout VERICUT are available in three different sizes. The following features
enable you to select the icon size used in VERICUT. A checkmark next to the feature indicates
the current selection.
Icon Small — Use this feature to indicate that the small size icon set is to be used throughout
VERICUT. A sample of the small size icon set is shown below.
Icon Medium — Use this feature to indicate that the medium size icon set is to be used
throughout VERICUT. A sample of the medium size icon set is shown below.
Icon Large — Use this feature to indicate that the large size icon is set to be used throughout
VERICUT. A sample of the large size icon set is shown below.
1532
VERICUT Help
Dynamic Controls
Location:
View menu > Dynamic Controls
The Dynamic Controls option enables you to use the same mouse actions while in
VERICUT, that are required to perform dynamic pan, zoom or rotate in each of the supported
CAD systems. This parameter is saved in the Preferences file.
CATIA — Use the CATIA mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
EdgeCAM — Use EdgeCAM mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
GibbsCAM — Use GibbsCam mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
hyperMILL— Use the hyperMILL mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
NX — Use Siemens NX mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
Power MILL — Use the Power Mill mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and
rotate.
Pro/E — Use the Pro/Engineer mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
Top Solid — Use the Top Solid mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and rotate.
VERICUT — Use the VERICUT standard mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom and
rotate. See Dynamic Zoom, Pan and Rotate in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for
Wildfire — Use the Pro/Engineer Wildfire mouse action conventions for dynamic pan, zoom
and rotate.
Reverse Mouse Wheel — Toggle On/Off to reverse the action of mouse wheel motion.
1533
VERICUT Help
The following table summarizes how each dynamic feature was implemented for each CAD
system.
CAD System Pan Zoom Rotate
Hold middle mouse Hold middle mouse Hold middle mouse

button, drag the button, click left or button, hold left or
mouse. right mouse button, right mouse button,
CATIA
drag the mouse: Up and drag the mouse.
for larger, down for
smaller
Hold the mouse Rotate the mouse Hold the right mouse
wheel down and wheel: Toward you button down and
EdgeCAM
drag the mouse. zooms out, away drag the mouse.
from you zooms in
Hold Ctrl key, the Rotate the mouse Hold down the
left mouse button, wheel to Zoom In / middle mouse
and drag the Zoom Out. button and drag the
GibbsCam mouse. mouse.
Left mouse button,
and drag the mouse
to Zoom – trap
region.
Hold Ctrl key, the Hold down Shift key, Hold down the right
right mouse button, the right mouse mouse button and
hyperMILL
and drag the button, and drag the drag the mouse.
mouse. mouse.
Hold Shift key, Hold Ctrl key, middle Hold down the
middle mouse mouse button, and middle mouse
button, and drag drag the mouse (or button and drag the
NX the mouse (or, left & middle mouse mouse.
middle & right button, and drag the
mouse button, and mouse).
drag the mouse).
Hold down Shift Rotate the mouse Hold the mouse

key, the middle wheel: Toward you wheel down and
PowerMILL
mouse button, and zooms out, away drag the mouse.
drag the mouse. from you zooms in.
1534
VERICUT Help
Hold Ctrl key, right Hold Ctrl key, left Hold Ctrl key, middle
mouse button, and mouse button, and mouse button, and
drag the mouse. drag the mouse: drag the mouse.
Pro/E
Down or left for
larger, up or right for
smaller.
Hold middle mouse Rotate the mouse Hold Ctrl key, the
Top Solid button, drag the wheel to Zoom In / left mouse button,
mouse. Zoom Out. and drag the mouse.
Right mouse Rotate the Left mouse button,

button, drag (or, thumbwheel: and drag the mouse
hold Shift key, any Toward you for (or, hold Shift & Ctrl
mouse button, and larger, away for keys, any mouse
VERICUT drag the mouse) smaller button, and drag the
(or, hold Ctrl key, mouse)
any mouse button,
drag: Up for larger,
down for smaller)
Hold down Shift Hold down Ctrl key, Hold down the
key, the middle the middle mouse middle mouse
Wildfire
mouse button, and button, and drag the button and drag the
drag the mouse. mouse vertically. mouse.
To change the dynamic controls behavior:

1. Select View menu > Dynamic Controls.
2. Choose the CAD System, from the pull-down list, that you want VERICUT to emulate.
1535
VERICUT Help
Logger View Options
Location:
View menu > Logger View Options
Use the Logger View Options to specify what information that you want displayed in the logger,
when you want to clear the Logger, or copy a Logger message to paste into another document.
When these features are set before the simulation, only the selected type of information will be
written to the Logger. These features can also be used after the simulation to add or remove
information from the Logger.
Error — When toggled "On" (check displayed), error messages will be written out to the Logger.
Warning — When toggled "On" (check displayed), warning messages will be written out to the
Logger.
Info — When toggled "On" (check displayed), informational messages will be written out to the
Logger.
Clear on Reset — When toggled "On" (check displayed), the contents of the Logger will be
cleared whenever you do a Reset.
Clear — Selecting this feature will immediately clear the Logger. Using this feature only clears
the Logger window, not the VERICUT Log file.
Copy Ctrl + C — Use this feature to copy the highlighted message(s) so that it can be pasted into
another document.
Pick a number of individual messages for copying by holding the Ctrl key down while picking.
Pick a range of consecutive messages by selecting the first message in the range, and then hold
the Shift key down while selecting the last message in the desired range. All of the messages
between two messages that you selected will become highlighted.
1536
VERICUT Help
Info Menu
1537
VERICUT Help
NC Program (NC Program panel)

Location:
Info menu > NC Program
Toolbar short cut:
The NC Program option opens the NC Program panel displaying the NC program file being
simulated. In this panel, you can scroll through the entire file to see all the records, search for
text forward and backward, print, and more. An arrow pointer indicates the current NC
Program record that is being processed. The panel is updated when a new NC program file is
processed, such as when multiple NC program files are to be simulated.
The NC Program panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT
NOTE: When the NC Program panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so that it
1538
VERICUT Help
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the NC Program
panel.
(Close) — Closes the Program panel. This icon is only displayed when the NC Program
Tip:
You can edit the NC program file using the Edit menu > NC Program function in VERICUT.
The NC Program panel will display as shown below for most types of NC programs. The blue
arrow indicates the NC block that is being read and processed.
1539
VERICUT Help
The NC Program panel will display as shown below for NC programs where Cutter
Compensation is active and "look ahead" is required. In this case the yellow arrow indicates
the block that is actually being processed and the blue arrow indicates the NC block that is
being read as a result of "look ahead" mode.
The NC Program panel will display with a separate area for each channel for sync'd programs as
shown below. You have the option of displaying these areas either vertically or horizontally as
shown in the pictures below.
1540
VERICUT Help
Tiled Vertical
Tiled Horizontal
1541
VERICUT Help
Processing status of the current record:
(Processing Current Record) — The current record for the particular subsystem is still
being processed. In the Tiled Vertical NC Program panel above, subsystem 1 is still
processing the current record. This feature corresponds to Processing Current Record
processing status used in the Call Stack panel.
(Finished Current Record) — The current record for the particular subsystem has finished
processing and is ready to go on to the next record. In the Tiled Horizontal NC Program
panel above, subsystem 2 is finished processing the current record. This feature
corresponds to the Finished Current Record processing status used in the Call Stack panel.
(Sync) — The current record for the particular subsystem is a Sync code as shown for
subsystem 1 in the Tiled Horizontal NC Program panel above. The subsystem will remain
in a “wait” state until the corresponding Sync code is encountered in the other
subsystem(s). This feature corresponds to the Sync processing status used in the Call
Stack panel.
Menu Bar
The menus located across the top of the NC Program panel provides easy access to major NC
Program functions. Each menu contains groups of related functions. Click with the left mouse
button on any menu name in the menu bar to display the list of functions available in that
menu group. Click on the function in the menu you want to use. The name of the current NC
program file is also displayed in this area.
File menu
1542
VERICUT Help
Save As — Save the current NC program file under a different name.

Print — Displays a window enabling you to specify print characteristics and print the NC
program.
Mode — Use the features in this list to specify the "mode" that you want VERICUT to be in.
NC Program — Standard VERICUT mode.
NC Program Review — Puts VERICUT in NC Program Review mode. See NC Program
Review, in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
NC Program Preview — Puts VERICUT in NC Program Review mode and displays the tool
trace represented by the NC program and the design model. This feature can be used
without processing the NC Program first, as required by NC Program Review. See NC
Program Preview, in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Exit — Closes the NC Program panel.
Edit menu
Insert From MDI — Enables you to insert NC blocks from the NC Blocks List, in the MDI
window, into the NC program displayed in the NC Program panel.
Selected Lines — Use to insert one, or more, highlighted blocks in the MDI window, NC
Blocks List, after the selected block in the NC Program panel.
All Lines — Use to insert all blocks in the MDI window, NC Blocks List, after the selected
block in the NC Program panel.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted text in the NC program listing and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted text in the NC program listing to the paste buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer at the location of the cursor in the NC
program listing.
Restore — Use to remove all edits from the NC program listing restoring it to its pre-edited
state.
1543
VERICUT Help
Utilities menu
Calculator — Opens the Calculator window enabling you to do mathematical calculations

and conversions inside VERICUT.
Colors — Opens the NC Program Color window enabling you specify colors for specific
features (comments, variable, macros, etc.) in the NC Program listing.
Block Renumber — Opens the Block Renumber window enabling you to renumber one, or
more blocks, in the NC program and specify format characteristics to be used for block
numbering. The formats specified must conform to the characteristics defined in the
current control file.
Check Syntax — Displays the Check Syntax window enabling you to check the displayed NC
program for syntax errors.
NOTE: The Utilities features are only available for G-Code NC programs.
Icon Bar
The items in the Icon Bar enable you to enter or exit NC Program Review or NC Program
Preview mode, search for specific items in the NC program listing, print the NC program listing.
Moving the cursor over the icon will display the name of the option.
NC Program Review — Use this icon to switch between standard VERICUT mode and NC
Program Review mode (ref .NC Program Review, in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more
information).
NC Program Preview — Use this icon to put VERICUT in NC Program Review mode and
displays the tool trace represented by the NC program and the design model. This feature can
1544
VERICUT Help
be used without processing the NC Program first, as required by NC Program Review. See NC
Program Preview, in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT Help for more information.
NOTE: The NC Program Preview feature is not available in the VERICUT Composite
Simulation, or the VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation, NC Program panels.
NC Program Syntax Check — Displays the Check Syntax window enabling you to check
the displayed NC program for syntax errors.
Search — Displays the search tools window as shown in the panel below.
Tip: You can also use the Ctrl + “F” key to display the search tools window.
Line Number or Search Text — Use this text field to enter a line number or a string of text
to search for.
Goto Line Number — Moves the cursor in the NC program listing to the line number
specified in the Line Number or Search Text field.
Search Forward — Searches forward in the NC program listing for the text string
1545
VERICUT Help
Replace One — Replace one occurrence of text string in the Line Number or Search
Text field (or the highlighted text in the NC program listing) with the text string in the
Replacement Text field.
Replace All — Replace all occurrences of the text string in the Line Number or Search
Text field with the text string in the Replacement Text field.
Close — Closes the display of the search tools window.
Tip: You can also click on the (Search) icon again to remove the display of the search
tools window.
Undo Highlighted Changes — Use this feature to undo changes made to the NC program.
Highlight the change and then click on the icon to "undo" the change.
Print — Prints the NC program listing.
Tile Vertical — Use to specify that multi-channel NC program listings display tiled
vertically. See the "Tiled Vertical" picture above. The icon toggles between Tile Vertical and Tile
Horizontal, described below.
Tile Horizontal — Use to specify that multi-channel NC program listings display tiled
horizontally. See the "Tiled Horizontal" picture above. The icon toggles between Tile Horizontal
and Tile Vertical, described above.
1546
VERICUT Help
Stop At (Break Point) Options

Stop At options, also called Breakpoint options, provide ways to specify conditions for stopping
NC program processing. The options provided in the NC Program are only a couple of ways to
specify Stop At (Breakpoint) locations in VERICUT.
See Start At/ Stop At window, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help for complete information on specifying starting and stopping
conditions for processing NC programs.
When Line Number type Stop At condition records are added in the Start At / Stop At window,
markers are displayed at those lines in the NC Program panel as shown in the picture below.
When Line Number type Stop At condition records (Breakpoints) are added in the Start At /
Stop At window that are inactive (not checked), markers are displayed at those lines in the
NC Program panel as shown in the picture below.
1547
VERICUT Help
You also have the ability to add, activate, de-activate or remove Line Number type Stop At
condition records (Breakpoints). Each of the features in each of the menus is described below.
If you right click on a line with an active Line Number marker , the following menu will
display.
1548
VERICUT Help
If you right click on a line with an inactive Line Number marker , the following menu will
display.
If you right click on a line without a Line Number marker, or on any blank area in the NC
Program panel, the following menu will display.
If you highlight text and the right click on that line, the following menu will display.
1549
VERICUT Help
Cut, Copy, Paste and Restore provide the same functionality as those available under Edit in
the menu bar.
Add to Variable Tracking — Adds the highlighted variable to the Tracking Variables section of
the Variables window (Project menu > Variables).
Stop at this text — The Stop at this text feature enables you to select text in the NC program
record and have the Stop At feature in the Start-Stop Options window automatically add a new
Text “stop at” (Breakpoint) record for the selected text. Use of this feature does the following in
the Start-Stop Options window:
1. Creates a new “stop at” Text record.
2. Sets the Active / Inactive checkbox to “active” (checked).
3. Sets “text field ” in the Text record to the text highlighted in the NC program.
NOTES:
1. Adding a Text “stop at” (Breakpoint) record will not display a marker in the NC
program.
2. The added Text “stop at” (Breakpoint) record can only be removed in the Start At / Stop
At Options window.
Example:
1. In the NC Program panel, highlight the text where you want NC program Processing to
stop.
2. Right click in the NC Program panel and select the Stop at this text option from the
menu that displays.
1550
VERICUT Help
The Text “stop at” (Breakpoint) record like the following picture will be added to the Start At /
Stop At Options window.
Add Breakpoint — The Add Breakpoint feature enables you to select a record in the NC
program record and have the Stop At feature in the Start-Stop Options window automatically
add a new Line Number “stop at” (Breakpoint) record at the selected line number. Use of this
feature does the following in the Start At / Stop At Options window:
1. Creates a new “stop at” Line Number record.
2. Sets the Active / Inactive checkbox to “active” (checked).
3. Sets “Line Number” in the Line Number record the line number of the record where the
cursor was when right click was made to display the menu.
4. Sets the NC program file name in the Line Number record to the current NC program.
5. Adds a Stop At (Breakpoint) marker to the current line in the NC program.
Example:
1. In the NC Program panel, select the line where you want NC program Processing to stop.
2. Right click in the NC Program panel and select the Add Breakpoint option from the
menu that displays.
1551
VERICUT Help
The Line Number “stop at” (Breakpoint) record like the following picture will be added to the
Start At / Stop At Options window.
Remove Breakpoint — Removes the Line Number “stop at” (Breakpoint) record for the
selected line in the NC program from the Start At / Stop At Options window.
Example:
1. In the NC Program panel, select the line with the Stop At (Breakpoint) marker that
you want to remove.
2. Right click in the NC Program panel and select the Remove Breakpoint option from the
menu that displays.
The Stop At (Breakpoint) marker in the NC Program panel is removed and the Line Number
“stop at” (Breakpoint) record in the Start At / Stop At Options window is removed just like using
the (Remove Breakpoint) button in the record itself.
1552
VERICUT Help
Disable Breakpoint — Sets the Active / Inactive checkbox for the Line Number “stop at”
(Breakpoint) record for the selected line in the NC program to “inactive” (not checked) in the
Start At / Stop At Options window.
Example:
1. In the NC Program panel, select the line that has the “active” Line Number “stop at”
(Breakpoint) record that you want to be “inactive”.
2. Right click in the NC Program panel and select the Disable Breakpoint option from the
menu that displays.
The Active / Inactive checkbox for the Line Number “stop at” (Breakpoint) record in the Start At
/ Stop At Options window will be toggled off as shown below.
The active Line Number marker in the NC Program window on that line will change an
inactive Line Number marker .
1553
VERICUT Help
Enable Breakpoint — Sets the Active / Inactive checkbox for the Line Number “stop at”
(Breakpoint) record for the selected line in the NC program to “active” (checked) in the Start At
/ Stop At Options window.
Example:
1. In the NC Program panel, select the line that has the “inactive” Line Number “stop at”
(Breakpoint) record that you want to be active.
2. Right click in the NC Program panel and select the Enable Breakpoint option from the
menu that displays.
The Active / Inactive checkbox for the Line Number “stop at” (Breakpoint) record in the Start
At / Stop At Options window will be toggled on as shown below.
The inactive Line Number marker in the NC Program window on that line will change an
active Line Number marker .
1554
VERICUT Help
Tool Tip Capabilities

The Tool Tip capabilities within the NC Program panel enable you to determine the values of
variables and expressions by highlighting the variable or expression and then holdiing the
cursor over the highlighted characters. VERICUT will display a tip showing the value of the
highlighted variable or expresssion as shown in the picture below. This example is evaluating
the expression SIN(45)*45*(1+COS(30).
The Tool Tip capability can handle just about any variable or expression that is valid for the
current current control file. This includes both number and text variables. For arrays or frames,
VERICUT will tell you what you have (Array of Numbers, Frame, …), but not the corresponding
values.
The following are examples of what is supported by this capability:
$P_GG_STACK[$P_STACK,9] (a particular value within a frame)

$P_PROG[0] (a specific string within an array of strings)
#2 < 270. (evaluation of an expression : 0 or 1)

#4 (simple variable tag value)
NOTE: The new logic goes through the standard parser for the loaded control. This is a subset
of the processing that is done when parsing the line. Caution must be used when highlighting
variables and expressions because it could actually cause an action.
For example: If you highlight a variable tag variable that is not defined yet, VERICUT will create
it, and might give you the following message in the logger:
“Warning: nc_variable 103 not defined”
If you highlight something within a comment that is not valid within the language of the control
file, you will get the corresponding parsing error messages written to the logger.
1555
VERICUT Help
The following table shows some examples of highlighted characters and what will be returned
in the tip from VERICUT.
Highlighted Characters Returned Tip
M30 30
G#2 The value of variable 2 (assuming # is a variable tag)
$P_GG[13] = 1 The value of $P_GG[13]
$P_GG[13] = 1 “Array of Numbers”
$P_GG[13] = 1 1
0 if $P_GG[13] does not equal 1, otherwise returns
IF( $P_GG[13]==1 )
1
0 if $P_GG[13] does not equal 1, otherwise returns
IF( $P_GG[13]==1 )
1
IF($MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC) The value of $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
The highlight is invalid. It is not a value or an
IF( $P_GG[13]==1 )
expression. Results are unpredictable.
The highlight is invalid. It is not a value or an
IF($MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC)
expression. Results are unpredictable.
1556
VERICUT Help
Calculator window
The Calculator window is accessed from the NC Program panel by selecting Calculator, in the
Utilities menu.
The features in the Calculator window enable you to do mathematical calculations and
conversions from inside VERICUT. Simply enter the value in the text field, and then click on the
desired function button.
You can also use the Calculator window to determine the current value of a variable. Enter
#variable, where variable is the variable name, in the text field and VERICUT will return the
current value of "variable".
Functions
sin — Returns the sin of the angle specified. Enter the angle, in degrees, in the text field.
asin — Returns the arc sine of the value entered in the text field. The specified value must be in
the range of -1.0 to 1.0. The returned value is in degrees, and is in the range of -90.0 to 90.0.
sinh — Returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle. Enter the angle, in degrees, in the text
field.
exp — Returns the natural logarithm "e" raised to the specified power specified in the text
field.
cos — Returns the cosine of the specified angle. Returns the hyperbolic tangent of the given
angle specified in degrees.
1557
VERICUT Help
acos — Returns the arc cosine of the value entered in the text field. The specified value must be
in the range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in degrees, and is in the range of 0.0 to 180.0.
cosh — Returns the hyperbolic cosine of the specified angle. Enter the angle, in degrees, in the
text field.
ln — Returns the natural logarithm of the value entered in the text field.
tan — Returns the tangent of the specified angle. Enter the angle, in degrees, in the text field.
atan — Returns the arc tangent of the value entered in the text field. The specified value must
be in the range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in degrees, and is in the range of -90.0 to 90.0.
tanh — Returns the hyperbolic tangent of the specified angle. Enter the angle, in degrees, in
the text field.
log — Returns the base 10 logarithm of the value entered in the text field. The specified value
must be positive otherwise zero is returned.
1/x — The inverse key replaces the variable x with the value entered in the text field and
returns the answer in the format of a decimal point fraction.
x^2 — Returns the square of the value entered in the text field.
sqrt — Returns the square root of the value entered in the text field.
n! — Returns the factorial value (n! = 1· 2· 3· · · (n − 2)(n − 1)n ) of the number entered in the
text field.
Radian To Degree — Returns the "degree" equivalent of the "radian" angle value entered in the
text field.
Degree To Radian — Returns the "radian" equivalent of the "degree" angle value entered in the
text field.
MM To Inch — Returns the "inch" equivalent of the "millimeter" value entered in the text field.
Inch To MM — Returns the "millimeter" equivalent of the "inch" value entered in the text field.
Close — Closes the Calculator window.
Back to NC Program panel
1558
VERICUT Help
NC Program Colors window
The NC Program Colors window is accessed from the NC Program panel by selecting Colors, in
the Utilities menu.
The NC Program Colors window enables you to specify colors for specific features (comments,
variable, macros, etc.) in the NC Program listing in the NC Program (Info) window. VERICUT uses
the definitions in the Word Format table, for the current control file, to determine what words
go into each of the NC program feature categories. The following are the Word Format settings
that VERICUT uses.
Comments: Anything that falls between "Begin Comment" and "End Comment"
Variables: Type "Special", Sub Type "Variable Name" or "Variable Tag"
Macros: Type "Macro" with "Word" related Subtype
Operators: Type "Math" or Type "Condition" with a math related Subtype, or
Type "Special" with SubType "Separator", or Type "Special" with
SubType "Begin/End Type II"
Function: Type "Function", or Type "Type II"
Specials: Type "Special" with SubType = "Skip", "End of block",
"Begin/End Data", "Console Message", "Ignore", "Sin84D_*",
and "Num VAR Define"
Conditionals: Type "Conditional"
1559
VERICUT Help
(Color Pallet)— The Color Pallet icon next to each NC program feature, enables you to
specify a color for that particular NC program feature.
The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color of the NC program feature. To
change the color for the NC program feature, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to display the
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the NC program feature. The
color pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the NC
Programs Color window will update to reflect the selected color.
When you have finished with color selection, use the OK button, described below, to apply the
colors to the NC program listing in the NC Program (Info) window.
Reset — Use the Reset button next to each NC program feature to return the color for the
particular feature back to its default color.
OK — Applies the color settings to the to the NC program text displayed in the NC Program
(Info) window and closes the NC Program Colors window.
Apply — Applies the color settings to the to the NC program text displayed in the NC Program
(Info) window and leaves the NC Program Colors window.
Reset All — Use the Reset All button to return the color for all NC program features back to its
default color.
Cancel — Ignores your color setting changes and closes the NC Program Colors window.
1560
VERICUT Help
Block Renumber window

The Block Renumber window is accessed from the NC Program panel by selecting Block
Renumber, in the Utilities menu.
Renumber Settings
Use the Renumber Settings options to specify where to start, and stop, renumbering.
From Line — Use this feature to specify the line in the NC program to begin the
renumbering.
First Line — When toggled "On" renumbering will begin at the first line in the NC program.
To Line — Use this feature to specify the line in the NC program to stop the renumbering.
Last Line — When toggled "On" renumbering will stop at the last line in the NC program.
1561
VERICUT Help
Renumber Lines Without Block Numbers Only — When toggled "On", only blocks within
the specified range that do not currently have block numbers will be renumbered.
Skip Lines Starting with String — Enables you to specify a string of characters, that when
found at the start of the block, will cause VERICUT to skip the block during the renumbering
process.
Skip Line Containing String — Enables you to specify a string of characters, that when found
anywhere within the block, will cause VERICUT to skip the block during the renumbering
process.
Block Format
Use the Block Format options to specify the format, and number sequence, to use for block
numbers. The formats specified must conform to the characteristics defined in the current
control file.
Start With — Use this feature to specify the starting number to use for the renumbering
sequence.
Interval — Use this feature to specify the increment between numbers to be used for the
renumbering sequence.
Precede Lines With String — Use this feature to specify a character, or string of characters,
to be used before the block number.
Number Of Spaces After Block Numbers — Use to specify the number of blank spaces to be
used between the block number and the next item in the block.
Insert Leading Zeros For Numbers — When toggled "On" leading zeros will be used in the
block number.
Remove Block Numbers — Removes all block numbers from the NC program file. Block
numbers are identified by the characteristics defined in the current control file.
OK — Applies the new block numbers, as specified, to the NC program file and closes the Block
Renumber window.
Apply — Applies the new block numbers, as specified, to the NC program file and leaves the
Block Renumber window open.
Cancel — Closes the Block Renumber window without changing the NC program file.
1562
VERICUT Help
Check Syntax window
The Check Syntax window is accessed from the NC Program panel, or from the NC Program
Review panel: NC Program listing area, by selecting Check Syntax, in the Utilities menu, or
using (NC Program Syntax Check) in the icon bar in either of the windows.
The features in this window enable you to check the NC program displayed in the NC Program
(Info) window for syntax errors.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable to APT NC programs.
Check Syntax Error List

Line — This column contains the line in the NC Program listing that contains the syntax error.
Click on the Line column header to sort The Syntax Error list by line number.
Text — This column contains the text of the block in the NC program listing that contains the
syntax error.
Error — This column contains a description of the kind of syntax error found. Click on the Error
column header to sort The Syntax Error list by error type.
File — This column contains the NC program or subroutine file name that syntax error is found
in.
1563
VERICUT Help
Tip: Clicking on any syntax error in the Check Syntax error list moves the cursor to the
corresponding block in the NC program displayed in the NC Program panel.
Clear — Clears all errors from the Check Syntax error list.
Settings — Displays the Word Format window: Syntax Check tab enabling you to view the
current syntax checking settings and modify them if necessary. See Word Format window:
Syntax Check tab, in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Units — Use to specify which word format string to check against in the Word Format table.
The default is the unit value specified in the current control. Select either, Inch, or Millimeter.
Check Next — Starting at the current cursor location, VERICUT searches the NC Program for the
next syntax error and adds it to the Check Syntax error list.
Check To End — Starting at the current cursor location, VERICUT searches to the end of NC
Program and adds each syntax error that it finds to the Check Syntax error list.
Check Active — VERICUT checks the NC program currently displayed in the NC Program panel
and adds each syntax error that it finds to the Check Syntax error list.
Check All — VERICUT checks all NC program and subroutine files referenced by the current
setup and adds each syntax error that it finds to the Check Syntax error list.
Close — Closes the Check Syntax window.
1564
VERICUT Help
Status (Status panel)

Location:
Info menu > Status
Toolbar short cut:
The Status option opens the Status panel that provides status information about the
simulation, and what would be occurring on the NC machine. Status information includes: NC
Program record being processed, machine and tool tip locations, information about the cutting
tool, machining conditions, errors and warnings detected by VERICUT. The Status panel can be
left open for monitoring, minimized, closed and opened at any time. Information displayed is
configurable, and is updated after each NC program record is processed. You can re-configure
the window at any time.
1565
VERICUT Help
The Status panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT main
window if you choose. See Dockable Panels in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for
NOTE: When the Status panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so that it
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Status panel.
(Close) — Closes the Status panel. This icon is only displayed when the Status panel is
not docked.
1566
VERICUT Help
Icon Bar
The items in the Icon Bar enable you to specify the SubSystem that you want the information in
the Status panel to apply to, specify which groups that you want displayed in the Status panel,
specify whether you want the Status panel displayed vertically or horizontally, and specify the
color that you want the data displayed in.. Holding the cursor over the icon will display a short
description of what the icon is used for.
(SubSystem) — When a machine with more than one subsystem is in use, use this
feature to specify which subsystem that you want the information in the Status panel to apply
to. Select the Subsystem from the pull-down list.
(Set Group Visibility) — Click on this icon to display the menu shown below which enables
you to specify which information groups you want displayed in the Status panel.
Click in the box next to each information group’s name to toggle between display (checked) and
do not display (unchecked). Use the Set All feature to set all information groups to display
(checked). Use the Clear All feature to set all information groups to do not display (unchecked).
You can select any combination of groups to be displayed in the Status panel. You can change
the order of the information groups by clicking in an information group displayed in the Status
panel and dragging it to the desired location.
(Tile Groups Horizontally/Vertically) — This icon toggles between Horizontally and

Vertically enabling you to specify whether you want to display the Status panel in a vertical
orientation or in a horizontal orientation.
1567
VERICUT Help
Click on the (Horizontally) icon to display the Status panel in a horizontal orientation as
Notice that 2 sliders is are added to the Icon Bar as shown in the picture below.
The first slider enables you to adjust the width of the Program column so that you can see the
complete records.
The second slider enables you to adjust the width of the Tool column so that you can see the
complete records.
Both sliders are only available when the Status window is in a Horizontal orientation.
1568
VERICUT Help
Click on the (Vertically) icon to display the Status panel in a vertical orientation as shown
in the picture below.
(Set Value Text Color) — Use the (Set Value Text Color) icon display a color pallet
enabling you to specify the color that you want the information in the Status panel to be
displayed in.
1569
VERICUT Help
The right side of the (Set Value Text Color) icon shows the current color being used for
the information in the Status panel. To change the color for the information, click on the
(Set Value Text Color) icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the information in the
Status panel. The color pallet will close and the right side of the (Set Value Text Color)
icon in the Status panel icon bar will update to reflect the selected color.
1570
VERICUT Help
Information Groups
Program Group
The following information is available for display in the Program Group:

SubSystem — When a machine with more than one subsystem is in use, this option controls
which subsystem status to show.
NC Program — The name of the current NC program file.
NC Program Rec. # — The line number of the current NC program record.
NC Program Record — Current NC Program record being processed. Both the record text and
sequential line number in the file are shown.
Right-click in a Program Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window
that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Program Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Program Group.
The absence of a next to a feature indicates that the feature is not to be displayed in the
Program Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Program Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Program Group.
1571
VERICUT Help
Basic Group
The following information is available for display in the Basic Group:

Errors — Displays the number of errors detected by VERICUT during processing. A blank field
indicates that no errors were detected. Consult the Log file for details about the errors.
Warnings — Similar to Errors above, except that the number of warnings detected is displayed.
Spindle — Current programmed spindle speed. A blank field indicates no records that control
spindle speed that have been processed.
Machines with multiple spindles will have multiple Spindle entries in the Status window.
The name used for a particular Spindle in the Project Tree will be shown in parentheses as
shown in the examples below:
Spindle (Tool_Spindle)
Spindle (Spindle)
Spindle (Spindle2)
Feedrate — Current programmed feed rate. A blank field indicates no records that control feed
rate that have been processed.
Coolant — Current programmed coolant condition. A blank field indicates no records that
control coolant that have been processed.
Motion Type — Rapid / Linear / CW / CCW / Thread / Nurbs / Poly
Abs/Inc — Absolute / Incremental
Motion Plane — XY / YZ / ZX
Units — Inch / Metric
Spindle Mode — CSS / RPM
1572
VERICUT Help
Right-click in a Basic Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window that
enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Basic Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Basic Group.
Basic Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Basic Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Basic Group.
Locations Group
The following information is available for display in the Locations Group:

Machine — Current locations of machine axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, A2, B2, C2) resulting
from processing the current G-Code NC program record. Only the axes that exist for the
selected subsystem will be shown.
1573
VERICUT Help
The name used for a particular Machine axis in the Project Tree will be shown in parentheses as
Machine X (X)
Machine A (toolorient)
Machine W (Sub-spindle)
Machine C2 (sub-caxis)
Local — The display will be similar to the Machine Axes (only showing the axes that exist for the
selected subsystem). The contents of the "Local Axes" fields will represent the current axis (X, Y,
Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, A2, B2, C2) locations in the local coordinate system. Typically, this will
correspond to the values entered in the NC program file (except when specifying machine
coordinates, or incremental values).
The name used for a particular Machine axis in the Project Tree will be shown in parentheses as
Local W (Sub-spindle)
Local C2 (sub-caxis)
Tool Tip — Current X Y Z tool tip location and I J K tool axis orientation with respect to the
active NC program coordinate system.
Right-click in a Locations Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window
that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Locations Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Locations Group.
Locations Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Locations Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Locations Group.
1574
VERICUT Help
Time & Distance Group
The following information is available for display in the Time & Distance Group:
Time — Time anticipated to machine the part (as simulated by VERICUT). To calculate
anticipated machining time, VERICUT records time for tool motions based on specified cutting
feed rates and rapid rates. Time is expressed in hours:minutes:seconds (to the 1/10 of a
second).
Distance — The tool movement distance, in inches or millimeters, depending on the VERICUT
session configuration.
Time % — Percentage of time in feed rate mode. This value can be helpful when judging tool
path efficiency. For example, a high value suggests an efficient tool path, since a value less than
100 percent means that the tool is moving at rapid feed and is probably not removing material.
Air Time % — The percent of time spent cutting air.
Distance % — Percentage of tool movement distance in feed rate mode. Similar to the Time
versus Time% relationship described above, this value can also be helpful when judging tool
path efficiency.
Right-click in a Time & Distance Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following
window that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Time & Distance
Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Time & Distance
Group.
Time & Distance Group.
1575
VERICUT Help
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Time & Distance Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Time & Distance Group.
Tool Group
The following information is available for display in the Tool Group:

Sequence — Sequential number of the last tool change event.
Number — Tool number in use (if specified). Examples follow.
NC program type: Sample tool chg record: Status window "Number":
G-Code data T10M6 10
APT CUTTER/... none
APT PPRINT/VERICUT-TC... none
APT LOADTL/1 1
UG CLS LOAD/TOOL,4,... 4
Geometry — Cutter shape geometry. The method used to define the cutter shape is shown in
square brackets "[ ]" followed by the description. "PROFILE" indicates a profile type of cutter
definition.
ID — ID of a tool retrieved from a VERICUT Tool Library file, if any. A blank field indicates the
current tool did not come from a tool library or that the specified tool did not exist in the Tool
Library.
1576
VERICUT Help
If the ID differs from the Number field value described above, the specified tool shown in the
Number field could not be found in the Tool Library.
Description — Description of a tool retrieved from a VERICUT Tool Library file. A blank field
indicates a description for this tool was not defined in the library, or the tool did not come from
a tool library.
Change Record — The last tool change record processed. Both the record text and sequential
line number in the file are shown.
Change Rec. # — The line number of the last tool change record.
Right-click in a Tool Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window that
enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Tool Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Tool Group.
Tool Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Tool Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Tool Group.
OptiPath Group
1577
VERICUT Help
The following information is available for display in the OptiPath Group:

Spindle Speed — Optimized spindle speed, as calculated by OptiPath.
Machines with multiple spindles will have multiple OptiPath Spindle Speed entries in the Status
window.
The name used for a particular Spindle in the Project Tree will be shown in parentheses as
OptiPath Spindle Speed (Tool_Spindle)
OptiPath Spindle Speed (Spindle)
OptiPath Spindle Speed (Spindle2)
Feed — Optimized feed rate, as calculated by OptiPath
Time — Time anticipated to machine the part with an optimized tool path file. This field is only
updated when the current tool path if being optimized by OptiPath. To estimate machining
time saved by OptiPath, compare this value against the Time field value.
NOTE: OP Time DOES NOT consider feedrates output as a result of Acceleration/Deceleration
optimization adjustments.
The following features are in effect when OptiPath Mode is set to On, Prompt While Cutting or
Learn From NC Program. They report maximum volume removal rate and chip thickness for
each cut calculated by OptiPath for the programmed feedrate.
Volume Removal Rate— Volume Removal Rate is calculated for any Optimization Method and
for any tool valid for OptiPath. See the Cutting Conditions Note below.
Chip Thickness — Chip Thickness is calculated only if the Optimization Method for the current
tool is either Chip Thickness, or Chip Thickness and Volume Removal Rate. Chip Thickness is
not calculated when OptiPath optimizes by any other method. When OptiPath Mode is set to
Learn From NC Program, Chip Thickness is calculated only for tools, which have a convex
profile. See the Cutting Conditions Note below.
OPTIPATH NOTE: The Record Cutting Conditions feature on Settings window: Project
Settings tab (Project menu > Settings) must be toggled "on" (checked) for the values of the
following features to be displayed in the Status panel when OptiPath is not active. This feature
is only valid for jobs that could normally be optimized using OptiPath.
OptiPath Volume Removal
OptiPath Chip Thickness
Tool Cutting Time — Displays the amount of time that the current tool has been removing
material. See the Tool Notes below.
Tool Cutting Distance — Displays the distance that the current tool has moved while removing
material. See the Tool Notes below.
1578
VERICUT Help
Tool Volume Removed — Displays the volume of material that the current tool has removed.
See the Tool Notes below.
TOOL NOTES:
1. The Check Cutting Limits feature on the Project Tree Configure Setup menu, Motion tab
must be toggled on (checked) for the values of the following features to be displayed in
the Status window.
Tool Cutting Time
Tool Cutting Distance
Tool Volume Removal
2. Each Load Tool in the NC program resets these values (even if the same tool from Tool
Manager is loaded again and again).
Right-click in an OptiPath Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window
that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the OptiPath Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the OptiPath Group.
OptiPath Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the OptiPath Group.
Use Clear All remove the from all features in the OptiPath Group.
1579
VERICUT Help
Cutting Conditions Group
The following information is available for display in the Cutting Conditions Group:
Axial Depth — Displays the current depth of the cut. See the Cutting Conditions Note below.
Radial Width — Displays the current width of the cut. See the Cutting Conditions Note below.
Contact Area — Displays the area of the tool that is in contact with the material. See the
Cutting Conditions Note below.
Surface Speed — Displays the current surface speed. See the Cutting Conditions Note below.
CUTTING CONDITIONS NOTE: The Record Cutting Conditions feature on the Settings
window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Setting) must be toggled "on" (checked) for the
values of the following features to be displayed in the Status panel when OptiPath is not active.
This feature is only valid for jobs that could normally be optimized using OptiPath.
Axial Depth
Radial Width
Contact Area
Surface Speed
Right-click in a Cutting Conditions Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following
window that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Cutting Conditions
Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Cutting Conditions
Group.
Cutting Conditions Group.
1580
VERICUT Help
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Cutting Conditions Group.
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Cutting Conditions Group.
Others Group
The following information is available for display in the Others Group:

Cutter Comp — This feature displays the current cutter compensation status. ON / ON-COMP
/OFF
See Notes about Cutter Compensation in the Notes about Special Topics section of the CGTech
Help Library for additional information about each Cutter Compensation status.
Cycle — Off / Drill / Face / Deep / Tap /Bore / Mill / Thru / Bore Orient / Bore Drag
Interpolation — None / Polar / Cylindrical
Cutter Comp Value — The current cutter compensation value.
Polar Coordinates — Display the status of polar coordinate input (ON/OFF).
Right-click in an Others Group displayed in the Status panel to display the following window
that enables you specify the features that you want displayed in the Others Group.
A next to a feature indicates that the feature is to be displayed in the Others Group.
Others Group.
Use Set All to select all features for display in the Others Group.
1581
VERICUT Help
Use Clear All to remove the from all features in the Others Group.
Tips:
1. Status is recorded by the File menu > Images > Record function, and can be seen in the
Status panel when playing back the Image file.
You can send status information to a text file. To accomplish this, set the CGTECH_STATUS
environment variable to the name of the file before or when VERICUT is executed.
1582
VERICUT Help
Graphs (Graphs window)
Location:
Info menu > Graphs
Toolbar short cut:
The Graphs option displays the Graphs window which enables you to view a Tool Use graph
showing information related to tool use and/or the Cutting Conditions graph showing selected
cutting conditions. Both the Tool Use graph and the Cutting Conditions graph are refreshed
after each setup.
1583
VERICUT Help
Common Features:
Time Interval — Use to specify the time interval represented by the Tool Use graph display.
Use the Time Interval text field to specify the time interval represented by the Tool Use graph.
— Use to reduce the displayed time interval by a factor of 1/2.
— Use to increase the displayed time interval by a factor of 2.
Configure — Displays the Graphs window in configuration mode enabling you to specify
graph display characteristics and features. Click on the icon to enter configuration mode. Click
the icon again to return to the normal display mode.
Close — Closes the Graphs window.
Tool Use Graph:

When toggled "On", the Tool Use graph is displayed which shows the machining time, in
minutes, spent by each simulated tool. The text displayed to the left of the graph line(s) is the
sub-system ID. Each tool that cuts the part is shown in the graph with its cut color. Tool changes
are indicated by a spike in the graph line. Positioning the mouse cursor on or above a graph line
displays data about that tool.
A 4-axis turned part has 2 graph lines; one for each turret. Machines with additional heads/sub-
systems will have a graph line displayed for each. A gap in a graph line indicates idle time spent
waiting for a turret/sub-system to synchronize. Positioning the mouse cursor above a gap in the
graph displays the amount of idle time.
Tool Use graph features:
1584
VERICUT Help
Sample Tool Use graphs:
Tool Use graph from a milling NC Program:
Tool Use graph from 4-axis merged turning NC Program:
Cutting Conditions Graph:

When toggled "On", the Cutting Conditions graph is displayed which shows changes in the
selected cutting condition features. The picture below shows the Cutting Conditions graph
display for vericut.vcproject Setup 1, with the Feed Per Minute and Spindle Speed features
toggled "On".
1585
VERICUT Help
Cutting Condition graph features:

Select any of the following "cutting condition" features to be displayed in the Cutting
Conditions graph. Each feature can be toggled On/Off at any time and the graph will be
immediately updated.
Depth — The depth of cut.
Width — The width of cut.
Volume Removal Rate — Volume removal rate based on programmed values.
Chip Thickness — Chip thickness based on programmed values.
Feed Per Minute — Feed per minute based on programmed values.
Feed Per Tooth — Feed per tooth based on programmed values.
Feed Per Revolution — Feed per revolution based on programmed values.
Spindle Speed — Spindle speed.
Surface Speed — Surface speed.
Contact Area — The area of the tool that is in contact with the material.
OP Volume Removal Rate — Optimized volume removal rate, as calculated by OptiPath.
OP Chip Thickness — Optimized chip thickness, as calculated by OptiPath.
OP Feed Per Minute — Optimized feed per minute, as calculated by OptiPath.
Op Feed Per Tooth — Optimized feed per tooth, as calculated by OptiPath.
OP Feed Per Revolution — Optimized feed per revolution, as calculated by OptiPath.
Show Tool Change — Use to show tool changes in the Cutting Conditions graph. Tool changes
are represented by a vertical line, in the cut color, at the point of the tool change.
1586
VERICUT Help
Graphs window, configuration mode
The Graphs window, in configuration mode, enables you to specify graph display characteristics
and the features to be graphed. Many of the features are identical to the ones in the Graphs
window and are described there. The Time Interval is expressed in minutes. The text to the left
of each graph is the Sub-system ID. The Cutting Condition settings are stored in your
Preferences file. See Preferences File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for
Tool Use — When toggled "On" (check mark displayed), displays the Tool Use graph which
shows the machining time spent by each simulated tool. Each tool that cuts the part is shown in
the graph with its cut color. Click in the box to the left of Tool Use to toggle the graph On/Off.
1587
VERICUT Help
Cutting Conditions — When toggled "On" (check mark displayed), displays the Cutting
Conditions graph which shows changes in the selected cutting condition features. Click in the
box to the left of Cutting Conditions to toggle the graph On/Off. Select any of "cutting
condition" features to be displayed in the Cutting Conditions graph from the list below the
graph area. Each cutting condition feature has the following settings:
Cutting Condition feature — The picture above shows the “Feed Per Minute” cutting
condition feature. “Feed Per Minute” is toggled “on” (checked) indicating that it should be
displayed in the Cutting Conditions graph.
(Color Pallet)— The Color Pallet icon enables you to specify the color for the particular
cutting condition feature to be displayed in the graph.
The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color for the cutting condition
feature. To change the color for the cutting condition feature, click on the (Color Pallet)
icon to display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the cutting condition
feature. The color pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon
in the Graphs window, Configuration window will update to reflect the selected color.
right corner of the color pallet window.
Min/Max — Use the Min and Max text fields to specify the upper and lower range to be
displayed in the Cutting Conditions graph for a particular cutting condition feature. See the
Sample Cutting Conditions graph picture below.
1588
VERICUT Help
Show Tool Change — Toggle “on” (checked) to display tool changes in the Cutting Conditions
graph. Tool changes are represented by a vertical line, in the cut color, at the point of the tool
change (see the picture below).
Set All — Select all available cutting condition features to be displayed in the Cutting
Conditions graph.
Clear All — Clear (toggle “off”) all selected cutting condition features.
Sample Cutting Conditions graph:
1589
VERICUT Help
Machine Offsets, Machine Offsets panel
Location:
Info menu > Machine Offsets
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Machine Offsets panel enable you to view the values that are set for each
machine offset and determine whether a particular machine offset is currently active.
1590
VERICUT Help
The Machine Offsets panel enables you to view the values that are set for each machine offset
and determine whether a particular machine offset is currently active. If you "Single Step"
through the NC program, the displayed values update at the end of each motion. When you are
using "Play to End", the displayed values are updated each time you "Stop" processing or when
processing stops at the end of the NC program. The Machine Offsets panel is intended for
debugging purposes only. The window displays current values set for each offset and whether
the offset is currently active. You cannot modify the values directly in the Machine Offsets
panel. The values must be edited in the table or macro in which they were originally set.
The offsets are grouped into 4 categories: Work& Shift, Tool, Other, and Total Offsets, as
shown in the Category column in the window above. Each Category can consist of a number of
different machine offsets and are displayed in the Offsets column. The remaining columns
indicate the offset values that are set/applied for each machine axis. Each particular offset will
only displayed if it contains non-zero values. If all offsets within a Category are zero, then the
Category will not be displayed. The exception to this rule is the Total Offsets Category which
will always be displayed.
This panel also contains a series of flags associated with offsets and transformations.
The Machine Offsets panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill
NOTE: When the Machine Offsets panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so
that it becomes the "active" panel before using F1 to get help specific to the panel. Otherwise
F1 will go to the CGTech Help Library.
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Machine Offsets
panel.
(Close) — Closes the Machine Offsets panel. This icon is only displayed when the
Machine Offsets panel is not docked.
SubSystem — All values displayed in the Machine Offsets panel are specific to a particular
subsystem. If the machine configuration has more than one subsystem, use this feature to
select the desired subsystem.
1591
VERICUT Help
Offset Categories
Work & Shift:

These offsets are in a separate category because the DynamicWorkOffsets feature applies to
these offsets.
Base Work Offset — Base Work Offset is affected by the following macros:
SetBaseWorkOffset
CancelWorkOffsets
EnableWorkShiftOffsets
DisableWorkShiftOffsets
CancelAllWorkOffsets
BaseWorkOffsetValues
For information about these, and all, VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros section, in the
NOTE: This offset is automatically applied during reset.
Work Offset — Work Offset is affected by the following macros:

WorkCoord
AdditionalWorkCoord
SetBaseWorkOffset
CancelWorkOffsets
CancelWorkOffsets
CancelAllWorkOffset
1592
VERICUT Help
NOTE: This can also be set from the Configuration menu > Control Settings: Offsets tab.
Secondary Work Offset — Secondary Work Offset is affected by the following macros:
SecondaryWorkCoord
SecondaryRefWorkCoord
Shift 1 — Shift 1 is affected by the following macros:

ChangeWorkCoord
AbsoluteShift, IncrementalShift
CancelShiftOffsets
CancelAllWorkOffsets
SiemensShiftOffsetA
SiemensL137COffset
SiemensL137CoffsetCancel

AbsoluteShiftNum
OkumaCopyStart
OkumaCopyEnd
OkumaShiftRotate
OkumaCancelShiftRotate
SiemensShiftOffsetB

NumLengthCompX
NumLengthCompY
NumLengthCompZ
1593
VERICUT Help
Total — The combined total of all of the above offsets.

Adjusted Total — The resulting total after the corresponding rotations have been applied.
Tool:
In many cases, an offset will be applied to the machine based on the tool offset and the
orientation of the tool. The tool offset can actually be composed of several pieces; some of
which are mutually exclusive.
Gage Offset — This value is typically calculated from the tls file. It is the "Gage Offset" minus
the "Ctrl Pt". You can override the value from the tls file with an entry in the Gage Offset Table.
This value is typically set with a tool change. Its value can also be updated with a call to the
ToolOffsetUpdate macro
Tool Length Offset — This value is typically only used if the Programming Method is set to Tool
Length Compensation. This value can, however, be used in all 3 Programming Methods. The
value will be set based on the corresponding entry in the Tool Length Compensation table. If no
entry exists, and the Programming Method is set to Tool Length Compensation, this value will
be set to the Z value of the Input Program Zero + the Z value of the Gage Offset. Tool Length
Offset is affected by the following ToolLengthComp... macros:
ToolLengthCompUpdate
ToolLengthCompPos
ToolLengthCompNeg
ToolLengthCompOff
ToolLengthCompValue ToolLengthCompToolnum
SiemensPlaneSelectionArg
Tool Nose Comp — Tool Nose Comp is affected by the following ToolNoseComp... macros:
ToolNoseCompApply
ToolNoseCompCancel
ToolNoseCompToolNum
ToolNoseCompValue
1594
VERICUT Help
Turret Offset — The turret offset is defined to be the XYZ distance from the active tool to the
center of its corresponding Turret. This offset can be turned on and off. When turned on, this
offset will be set with calls to either TurretActivateTool or TurretToolChange macros. It can
also be reset to zero if the current gage offset is set to zero and the apply turret offset flag is set
accordingly. This flag is set with the ApplyTurretOffset macro.
GagePivotOffset — This offset is used as an alternative approach to RTCP (Dynamic Tool

Offsets). RTCP has been based on the concept of the spindle face being the driven point when
there is no tool in the spindle. When a tool is loaded, and then rotated, both the gage offset
and the pivot offset needs to be adjusted. When driving the center of the pivot, and then
adjusting for the gage and pivot offset, the calculation is different. This offset is used for this
latter approach. Its functionality is currently limited. The capability is turned on with the
ApplyGagePivotOffset macro, and its value is updated whenever the tool offsets are updated.
This capability is mutually exclusive with RTCP.
Current RTCP Pivot Offset — The pivot offset can set be set in the RTCP Pivot Offset Table. If
the corresponding entry does not exist, it will be auto-calculated based on the active tool
component and the position of the corresponding parent rotary components. The application
of this offset can be turned on, or off, using the ApplyPivotOffset macro. When applied, it will
be adjusted based on the orientation of the tool. It assumes that in its initial state, no offsets
are to be applied. The initial state is set at start of processing, and can be updated with a call to
the SetPivotOffset macro.
Applied Total — This is the sum of the Tool offsets, which are currently being applied.
NOTE: Not all of the offsets listed will be applied. For example: Gage Offset values might be
specified, but may not be applied because the Programming Method is set to Gage Length.
Adjusted Total — This value takes the applied total, possibly adjusts it based on the orientation
of the tool, and then applies it to the corresponding axis. See the following macros:
XToolOffsetCompName
YToolOffsetCompName
ZToolOffsetCompName
1595
VERICUT Help
Other:
Dynamic 3D Tool Offset — See Tool3dOffset in the VERICUT Macros section in the CGTech Help
Library.
3D Tool Length Comp — The Tool Length Offset as describe above, is an offset, which applies
only to Z. There is special handling of this value within the software, and has therefore not been
grouped with the Tool offsets. This offset can be applied to any axis. See
FanucToolLengthComp and ToolLengthCompOff in the VERICUT Macros section, in the CGTech
Help Library.
Input Program Zero — This offset is typically set in the Input Program Zero (Special Z) table.
The values are automatically activated during initialization, and can be updated with calls to
UpdateIPZ and AutoUpdateIPZ macros. When the Programming Method is set to Tool Length
Compensation, the Z value of the IPZ will not be applied. In this programming method, the Z
value might later be used in the calculation of the Tool Length Offset.
Input Machine Zero — This offset is set in the Machine Zero table and is automatically
activated during initialization. Typically, this offset is not used.
Miscellaneous — Other offsets that might be applied – intentionally not defined.
Total — Sum of the above offsets.
Total Offsets:
Sum of all offsets being applied.
NOTE: This does not include rotation planes.
Active Translations/Rotations:
The following features become highlighted and checked when the particular
translation/rotation is active. Gage Offset and Gage Pivot Offset are shown in their "active"
states in the picture below.
1596
VERICUT Help
Gage Offset — The Gage Offset is the offset from the driven point of the tool (typically the tool
tip) to the Gage Point of the tool (the point where the tool connects to the Tool Component).
Default: The default is based on the Programming Method. The default is On if the
Programming Method is Tool Tip, and is Off if the Programming Method is anything
else.
The Gage Offset feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls to the
following macros:
ApplyGageOffset (Status = Obsolete)
TurnOnOffGageOffset
Gage Pivot Offset — The Gage Pivot Offset is the offset from the tool component to the Pivot
point of the machine (typically the parent rotary component).
Default: Off.
The Gage Pivot Offset feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls
to the following macros:
ApplyGagePivotOffset (Status = Obsolete)
ApplyGagePivotOffsetCurrent (Status = Obsolete)
TurnOnOffGagePivotOffset
2D Rotations — 2D Rotations are defined within the active plane (XY, YZ or ZX).
Default: Off
The 2D Rotations feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls to the
following macros:
RotateXYZ
RotateCancel
RotateOrigin
RotateMacro
1597
VERICUT Help
Mirroring — The Mirroring feature is active if the data is to be mirrored about any axis.
Default: Off
The Mirroring feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls to the
following macros:
MirrorX
MirrorY
MirrorZ
MirrorA
MirrorB
MirrorC
MirrorA2
MirrorB2
MirrorC2
MirrorXValue
MirrorYValue
MirrorZValue
MirrorAValue
MirrorBValue
MirrorCValue
MirrorA2Value
MirrorB2Value
MirrorC2Value
MirrorCancel
MirrorXCancel
MirrorYCancel
MirrorZCancel
MirrorACancel
MirrorBCancel
MirrorCCancel
MirrorA2Cancel
MirrorB2Cancel
MirrorC2Cancel
1598
VERICUT Help
3D Rotation Planes — VERICUT supports multiple matrix transformations of the input data,
including: 3D Rotation Planes, Working Planes, Virtual Y (used with slant bed lathes), and RPCP.
This feature is active if 3D Rotation Planes are currently being applied.
Default: Off
The 3D Rotation Planes feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls
to the following macros:
FanucRotationPlaneLocal2
RotationPlane
RotationPlane2
RotationPlaneEnable2
RotationPlaneLocal
RotationPlaneCancel
RotationPlaneCancel2
RotationPlaneCancelReset
FidiaRotate
FidiaRotate2
FidiaRotateCancel
FidiaRotateCancel2
NumPlane
Siemens_P_PFRAME
SiemensSystemFramesCancel
SiemensSystemFramesRestore
SiemensTOFRAME
SiemensTOROTOF
WorkingPlane2Abc
Working Planes — VERICUT supports multiple matrix transformations of the input data,
including: 3D Rotation Planes, Working Planes, Virtual Y (used with slant bed lathes), and RPCP.
This feature is active if Working Planes are currently being applied.
Default: Off
The Working Planes feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls to
the following macros:
WorkingPlane
WorkingPlaneCancel
1599
VERICUT Help
RTCP/RPCP/DWO:
This section displays the state (active/inactive) and the state (active/inactive) of the modes
associated with Rotary Tool Control Point (RTCP), Rotary Part Control Point (RPCP), and
DynamicWorkOffsets (DWO). For each of these features, three different modes are available.
In the picture above, RTCP (RTCP – XYZ Position) and RPCP (RPCP –XYZ Position Updated:) and
their associated modes are all grayed out indicating that RTCP and RPCP are not turned on (not
checked). Notice that even though the mode Continuously is active (checked) for both of these
features, they will not be acted on because the main features have not been turned on.
I the picture above, DWO (DWO – XYZ Position Updated:), the main feature, is turned On
(checked) and mode Only as XYZ is Specified is active (checked). The other two modes are
grayed out because they are inactive (not checked).
In general:
1. If RTCP is turned off, RTCP – XYZ Position Updated: and the 3 mode fields are all grayed
out.
2. If RPCP is turned off, RPCP – XYZ Position Updated: and the 3 mode fields are all grayed
out.
3. If DWO is turned off, RTCP – XYZ Position Updated: and the 3 mode fields and the 5
DWO Types, described below, are all grayed out.
4. If the main feature is turned off, the associated modes will not be acted on.
Each of the main features and their associated modes are described below.
RTCP – XYZ Position Updated: — Rotary Tool Control Point (RTCP) determines whether the
Tool related offsets should automatically be updated when the tool rotates.
Default: The default is set using the Rotary Tool Control Point feature on the Configuration
menu > Control Settings: Rotary tab.
1600
VERICUT Help
The RTCP – XYZ Position Updated: feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked),
with calls to the following macros:
RtcpOn
RtcpOff
RotaryControlPointOnOff
For information about these, and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros section, in the
The following RTCP modes are available for use.

Default: The default is set using the RTCP Mode feature on the Configuration
menu > Control Settings: Rotary tab.
Continuously — The machine’s axes will be continually updated as the tool rotates in order to
keep the tool tip on path. This means that if only an A rotation is programmed (assume A is a
rotary on the Tool Side), then all axes will move in order to keep the tool tip motionless as the
tool rotates.
At End Point — The final end point is calculated, and the machine is sent directly to this
location. The end result is: if only an A rotation is programmed (assume A is a rotary on the
Tool Side), then the tool tip will move as the tool rotates, but it will end up in its original
location.
Only as XYZ is Specified — If XYZ is specified on the block with the rotary move, then this mode
is the same as “At End Point”. If XYZ is not specified on the block with the rotary move, then
only the rotary will move. As each axis is specified, the corresponding offset will then be
applied.
The RTCP mode is specified with calls to the RtcpMode macro.
For information about RtcpMode and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros section, in
RPCP – XYZ Position Updated: — Rotary Part Control Point (RPCP) determines if the coordinate
system should rotate automatically as the part rotates.
Default: Off
The RPCP – XYZ Position Updated: feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked),
with calls to the following macros:
RpcpOn
RpcpOff
RotaryControlPointOnOff
1601
VERICUT Help
For information about these, and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros section, in the
The following RPCP modes are available for use.

Continuously — The machine’s axes will be continually updated as the part rotates in order to
keep the tool tip on path. This means that if only an A rotation is programmed (assume A is a
rotary on the Part Side), then all axes will move in order to keep the tool tip motionless (relative
to the part) as the part rotates.
Part Side), then the tool tip will move (relative to the part) as the part rotates, but it will end up
in its original location (relative to the part)
only the rotary will move. As each axis is specified, the corresponding axis will be updated.
The RPCP mode is specified with calls to the RpcpMode macro.
For information about RpcpMode and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros section, in
(DWO – XYZ Position Updated: — Dynamic Work Offset (DWO) determines if the part side
offsets should rotate automatically as the part rotates.
Default: Off
The DWO – XYZ Position Updated: feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked),
with calls to the DynamicWorkOffsets macro.
For information about DynamicWorkOffsets and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros
section, in the CGTech Help Library.
The following DWO modes are available for use.

Continuously — The corresponding Dynamic Work Offsets will be continually updated as the
part rotates in order to keep the tool tip on path.
location.
only the rotary will move. As each axis is specified, the corresponding offset will be applied.
The DWO mode is specified with calls to the DynamicWorkOffsetsMode macro.
1602
VERICUT Help
For information about DynamicWorkOffsetsMode, and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT
Macros section, in the CGTech Help Library.
1603
VERICUT Help
DWO Types:
When Dynamic Work Offsets is turned on, part side offsets are updated as the part rotates.
The specific types of offsets that will be updated are configurable. The following features
correspond to each of the offsets types that can be configured to work with DWO.
DWO Base — DWO Base feature indicates whether or not the Base Work Offset should be
updated as the part rotates (based on the Dynamic Work Offset (DWO) settings described
above).
Default: On
The DWO Base feature is turned On (checked), and Off (not checked), with calls to the
DynamicWorkOffsetsTypes macro.
For information about DynamicWorkOffsetsTypes, and all, VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT
DWO Work — DWO Work feature indicates whether or not the Work Offset should be updated
as the part rotates (based on the Dynamic Work Offset (DWO) settings described above).
Default: On
DWO Secondary — DWO Secondary feature indicates whether or not the Secondary Work
Offset should be updated as the part rotates (based on the Dynamic Work Offset (DWO)
settings described above).
Default: On
DWO Shift — DWO Shift feature indicates whether or not the Shift Offsets should be updated
as the part rotates (based on the Dynamic Work Offset (DWO) settings described above).
Default: On
1604
VERICUT Help
DWO Program Zero — DWO Program Zero feature indicates whether of not the Program Zero
Offset should be updated as the part rotates (based on the Dynamic Work Offset (DWO)
settings described above).
Default: On
Rotation Plane Matrix/Working Plane Matrix:

Rotation Plane Matrix — The Rotation Plane Matrix represents the cumulative effect of all
translations and rotations currently applied to the rotation plane. Its twelve parameters reveal
the geometric attributes of the local (transformed) coordinate system (CSYS) relative to the
machine origin. When active, the rotation plane matrix parameters are displayed in the matrix
table format shown below.
This representation only includes translations and rotations resulting from using the
RotationPlane... macros or the WorkingPlane2Abc macro.
The matrix values do not include the effect of using the Rpcp... macros or the VirtualXAxis /
VirtualYAxis macros.
Working Plane Matrix — The Working Plane Matrix represents the cumulative effect of all
translations and rotations currently applied to the working plane. Its twelve parameters reveal
the geometric attributes of the local (transformed) coordinate system (CSYS) relative to the
machine origin. When active, the working plane matrix parameters are displayed in the matrix
table format shown below.
This representation only includes translations and rotations resulting from using the
WorkingPlane macro.
The matrix values do not include the effect of using the Rpcp... macros or the VirtualXAxis /
VirtualYAxis macros.
1605
VERICUT Help
I J K D
X I1 J1 K1 D1
Y I2 J2 K2 D2
Z I3 J3 K3 D3
1606
VERICUT Help
Call Stack, Call Stack panel
Location:
Info menu > Call Stack
Toolbar short cut:
The Call Stack panel enables you to track information like subroutine calls and which subsystem
is currently active. The picture below shows the current status of three subsystems.
The Call Stack panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT
NOTE: When the Call Stack panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so that it
1607
VERICUT Help
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Call Stack panel.
(Close) — Closes the Call Stack panel. This icon is only displayed when the Call Stack
The following information is displayed for each subsystem:

The status of the record currently being processed:
Processing Current Record — The current record for the particular subsystem is still
being processed. In the above Call Stack panel, subsystem 1 is still processing the
current record. This feature corresponds to the (Processing Current Record) marker
used in the NC Program panel.
Finished Current Record — The current record for the particular subsystem has finished
processing and is ready to go on to the next record. In the above Call Stack panel,
subsystem 2 has finished processing the current record. This feature corresponds to the
(Finished Current Record) marker used in the NC Program panel.
Sync — The current record for the particular subsystem is a Sync code. The subsystem
will remain in a “wait” state until the correspoding Sync code is encountered in the
other subsystem(s). This feature corresponds to the (Sync) marker used in the NC
Program panel.
End Of File — The end of the NC program file for the particular subsystem has been
reached.
Active Tool — Displays the name of the active tool component.
Active Stock — Displays the name of the active stock component.
NOTE: The active stock defaults to the first stock in the component tree. If multiple
stocks exist, the active stock needs to be specified.
Also see: ActivateToolSubsystem, and SetActiveStockName, in the VERICUT Macros
Each record displays the following information:

Depth — Shows the depth, or level of subroutine calls. For example, in the picture above,
Subsystem "2" shows 3 levels of subroutine calls. Depth 1 represents the main program,
Depth 2 represents a subroutine (2001) which was called from the main program, and
Depth 3 represents a subroutine (110) called from the Depth 2 subroutine.
VERICUT supports up to 25 levels of nested subroutine calls.
Subroutine — Shows either the name of the main program, or subroutine, represented by
the record.
NC Program Record — Shows the text of NC program record calling the subroutine.
1608
VERICUT Help
Line Number — Shows the number of the line in the file represented by the record.
File Name — Shows the name of the file that the NC program, or subroutine, record is in.
Tip:
The records in the Call Stack panel are linked to the NC Program (Info) panel. Clicking on the
"calling" record in the Call Stack panel will highlight the corresponding block in the NC Program
(info) panel. Clicking on a subroutine record in the Call Stack panel, highlights the first line in
the subroutine in the NC Program (Info) panel.
1609
VERICUT Help
SubSystem Motion, SubSystem Motion panel
Location:
Info menu > SubSystem Motion
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the SubSystem Motion panel are intended to assist you in debugging problems
associated with the configuration of complex machines. In this context, “complex machines”
means a multi-channel machine, or a machine which, at times, drive components other than
their default components. This is a read only window. The information contained in the
SubSystem Motion panel is updated as each block is processed.
1610
VERICUT Help
The Subsystem Motion panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
NOTE: When the Subsystem Motion panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Subsystem
Motion panel.
(Close) — Closes the Subsystem Motion panel. This icon is only displayed when the
Subsystem Motion panel is not docked.
The panel is divided into 3 sections:

Synchronized SubSystems
Active SubSystems and Motion Axes
Machine Motion Axes and Components
Each of these sections is described in detail in the sections that follow.
Synchronized SubSystems (Channels)
The Synchronized SubSystems (Channels) section of the window is only applicable if the current
machine is a multi-channel machine. This section displays the different channels that are
defined (referenced by a generic SubSystem Number), the SubSystem ID (or control) that they
are associated with, and the current Status of this SubSystem. This section also displays the
Active Stock component and the Active Tool.
All of this information can be found elsewhere in VERICUT, but is repeated here because it
forms the foundation from which other information will be built. The relationship between the
Channel and the Subsystem is defined on the Control Settings window: Sync tab (Configuration
menu > Control Settings).
1611
VERICUT Help
The status of each SubSystem is also shown in both the Call Stack panel (Info menu > Call
Stack), and in the NC Program panel (Info menu > NC Program).
The following Status conditions may be displayed:
Finished Current Record — This channel is waiting for more input.
Processing Current Record — This channel has data, and waiting for the other channels to
get data before proceeding.
Waiting — This channel is sitting at a Sync Code, waiting on the other channels.
End Of File — This channel has reached the end of the file.
Active SubSystems and Motion Axes
Subsystems within VERICUT are used to define inputs for separate controls, and are also used
to define an additional 12 axes. For a multi-channel machine, only those controls defined in the
channel section will be referenced in the Active SubSystems and Motion Axes section of the
window. For a single channel machine, only the active control will be displayed in the Active
SubSystems and Motion Axes section of the window. Each of the columns in the Active
SubSystems and Motion Axes section of the Subsystem Motion panel are described below.
SubSystem ID — This column displays the SubSystem IDs that are being driven by each of
the channels defined above in the Synchronized SubSystems (Channels) section of the
window. Typically, these SubSystem IDs will match the SubSystem IDs listed in the
Synchronized SubSystems (Channels) section of the window.
If the ChangeSubsystemID macro has been called, then the SubSystem ID that is being
driven in the Active SubSystems and Motion Axes section of the window may be different
then the SubSystem ID defined in the Synchronized SubSystems (Channels) section of the
window.
Motion Axis — This column displays all of the axes that exist for each SubSystem ID and
whether the axes are currently active, or inactive. Axes that are currently inactive are
marked as “InActive” as shown in the picture below. Axes that do not exist for a specific
SubSystem ID are not displayed.
1612
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Common mistakes include having multiple channels drive the same component,
and incorrectly thinking that an axis is either active, or inactive, at a specific time for a
specific channel, when in reality it is not the case.
Mapped to Axis — A common feature that exists on many machine/control configurations
is to map one axis to drive another axis, for example the X-axis now drives the U-axis. One
way to implement this within VERICUT is to use the macro: SetAxisRegisterName. The
Mapped to Axis column shows when this feature has been set for a specific axis on a
specific channel. When it has, the register name will be shown.
The picture below shows that the X-axis has been mapped to the U-axis register for the
Upper Turret.
NOTE: The register name for a motion component is shown in its Component Type. For
example: a Component Type of “Z Linear” is a linear component type being driven by the Z
register.
Link to Component — A common feature that exists on many machine/control
configurations is to link one axis to drive another axis, for example the Z-axis now drives the
W-axis. One way to implement this within VERICUT is to use the macro: SetAxisCompLink.
The Linked to Component column shows when this feature has been set for a specific axis
on a specific channel. If it has, the component name, and the Link formula will be shown.
The picture below shows that the Z-axis has been linked to the W component with a link
formula of (2* $) for the Upper Turret.
1613
VERICUT Help
Moving Components — A component driven by a given axis can change based on the
SubSystem ID, the Axis Mapping, the Link, the Couple Axis, and changes to the component
tree. This column shows which component(s) are ultimately being driven by each axis. In
this column, if the same component name is displayed more than once, then this is
probably a problem and the cell will be highlighted red as shown in the picture below.
Both the Upper and Lower Turrets are driving the common C-axis. This should have been
inactivated during the Start of Processing event for both channels.
Machine Motion Axes and Components
The Machine Motion Axes and Components section of the Subsystem Motion panel shows all of
a machine’s motion components and various attributes and values for each component. The
information in this section provides a low level picture of the machine. This information is not
related to any control, and is only looking at the settings on the machine. The order of the
components shown in the table is identical to the order in which they appear in the Machine
branch of the Project Tree. Each of the columns in the Machine Motion Axes and Components
section of the Subsystem Motion panel are described below.
Component Name — This column displays the name of the machine component.
1614
VERICUT Help
Subsystem ID — This column displays the SubSystem ID of the subsystem (up to 12 axes)
associated with the machine component.
NOTE: This is a machine setting that is set using Project Tree, Configure Component menu:
Component tab (for all motion components) and displayed in the Machine branch of the Project
Tree. This value does not change.
Motion Axis — This column displays the Register associated with this machine component. For
example: a Component Type of “Z Linear” is a linear component type being driven by the Z
register.
NOTE: This is a machine setting that is based on the Component Type set in the Project Tree,
Configure Component menu: Component tab (for all motion components) and displayed in the
Machine branch of the Project Tree. This value does not change.
Coupled — If a slave component is being coupled to a master axis, then the slave axis
component name will be shown here for the corresponding master component.
One way to implement this within VERICUT is to use the macro: CoupleAxisOn. The Coupled
column shows when this feature has been set for a specific axis on a specific channel. When it
has, the name of the slave component will be shown.
The picture below shows that the W-axis has been coupled to the Z2-axis Upper Turret.
NOTE: When coupling has been established, it only applies to the machine, and not specific to
any control.
Offset — The Offset column represents the actual “offset” value stored for the machine
component.
Value — The Value column represents actual value stored for the machine component.
Position — The Position column represents the actual position of the machine component (the
sum of the value in the Offset column and the value in the Value column).
1615
VERICUT Help
840D System Frames, 840D System Frames panel
Location:
Info menu > 840D System Frames
Toolbar short cut:
The 840D System Frames panel has features to assist you in debugging Siemens 840D Frames.
The 840D System Frames panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
1616
VERICUT Help
NOTE: When the 840D System Frames panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel
so that it becomes the "active" panel before using F1 to get help specific to the panel.
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the 840D System
Frames panel.
(Close) — Closes the 840D System Frames panel. This icon is only displayed when the
840D System Frames panel is not docked.
Subsystem — all values displayed in the 840D System Frames panel are specific to a particular
subsystem. If the machine configuration has more than one subsystem, use this feature to
select the desired subsystem.
System Frames — the System Frames table shows the Frames that are available and which
Frames are currently active. Active Frames are indicated indicated by a check mark.
Frame Matrix — displays the matrix associated with the specified Frame. The name of the
currently specified Frame is shown in the Frame Matrix text field. The Frame is specified by
selecting the Frame Name in the Subsystem Frames table
1617
VERICUT Help
Cutcom Sketch (Cutcom Sketch window)

Location:
Info menu > Cutcom Sketch
Toolbar short cut:
The Cutcom Sketch window is a Cutter Compensation debugging tool that enables you to
visually analyze:
The uncompensated tool path
The compensated tool path
The following simple example will show the features of the Cutcom Sketch window.
G41 X1 D1
X3
G40 X4
Cutter Compensation looks at the entire motion from compensation on (G41) to compensation
off (G40) and displays the information in the Cutcom Sketch window.
It is important to know that the sketch shows the true results both in the standard one-step
look-ahead mode and in the full look-contour mode of cutter compensation.
The data file on which this visual tool is based is constantly updated during the cutter
compensation mode; therefore it cannot be used before the cutter compensation mode ends.
From the File menu the current sketch can be saved (under a different name) and later viewed
in the Cutcom Sketch window. The file “cutcom_debug.swp” will be overwritten by the latest
cutter compensated motion fragment.
1618
VERICUT Help
The blue line represents the uncompensated tool path, and is always displayed.
Toggle on (checked) Cutcom to display the uncompensated tool path (blue) and the actual
compensated tool path (magenta) as shown in the picture below.
The pull-down list in the lower-right corner is used to list and highlight “bad”, or ill-defined, arcs
(those with a non-positive radius, or those with a distance from an endpoint to the center
different from radius). Note that “bad” arcs cannot be displayed as circular arcs by the sketcher,
and are shown as linear segments.
1619
VERICUT Help
File Summary window
Location:
Info menu > File Summary
Toolbar short cut:
The File Summary option opens the File Summary window that provides a summary of files
with their creation dates, and environment directories, currently being used by VERICUT. All
standard text viewing features are supported, such as: search forward/backward, go to line
number, print, etc.
File Summary window:
1620
VERICUT Help
Copy selected files to — Use to specify where you want files copied to.
Directory — Select the folder from the pull-down list to copy selected files to.
Zip File — Select Zip File to copy selected files to a zip file.
Copy — Use to specify where you want the files copied to.
If the Copy selected files to feature is set to Directory, the Copy Files To selection box is
displayed enabling you to specify the folder that you want the files copied to.
If the Copy selected files to feature is set to Zip File, the Zip selected files to file selection
box is displayed enabling you to specify the \path\filename of the zip file that you want the
files copied to.
1621
VERICUT Help
Print — The Print option opens a window enabling you to print the File summary window.
Features on the window are standard print window features that enable you to access printer
settings, specify number of copies, etc. Consult your printer documentation for more
information.
Search Text — Use this text field to enter a string of text to search for.
Search Text field.
Search Text field.
Close — Closes the File Summary window.
Files — The files column displays the directories and files currently being used in a tree type
hierarchy similar to the Project Tree (ref. to the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
information).
Environmental Directories — Displays the \path\ to the VERICUT directories (Samples,
Library, Training and Help) and the \path\ to the Working Directory currently being used.
Project Files — Displays the files that apply to the whole project.
Setup: x — Displays the files associated with each setup.
Check Boxes — Click on the check boxes to select or deselect the files you want copied.
File Name — Displays the /path/filename if the file being used for the corresponding entity in
the File Tree.
Size — Displays the size of the file being used.
Type — Displays the type of file (Control, Machine, Tool Library, etc.).
Date Modified — Displays the date and time that the file was last modified.
Units — Displays the units being used in the file.{\VCS}
1622
VERICUT Help
G-Code Report
Location: Info menu > G-Code Report
Toolbar short cut:
The G-Code Report option enables you to create a G-Code Report file containing information
about how the current NC control configuration will interpret a G-Code NC program file.
Reported information includes: machine codes present in the NC Program and macros (actions)
they will call, variables used (if any), cutting tools used, subroutines defined and referenced,
and more.
Click here to see a sample G-Code Report file.
1623
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar:
menu contains groups of related functions. Left-click on any menu name in the menu bar to
display the list of functions available in that menu. Click on the function in the menu you want
to use. The name of the current file is also displayed in this area.
File menu:

Edit menu:
1624
VERICUT Help
Icon Bar:

search for.
1625
VERICUT Help
These features provide the same functionality as those described under Edit in the menu bar.
1626
VERICUT Help
Control Report
Location:
Info menu > Control Report
Toolbar short cut:
The Control Report option enables you to create a Control Report file containing information
about how the current NC control configuration will interpret machine codes. Reported
information includes all the G-Codes the control is configured to handle and macros (actions)
they will call, subroutines, and other supported control features.
Click here to see a sample Control Report file.
1627
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar:
menu contains groups of related functions. Left-click on any menu name in the Menu Bar to
display the list of functions associated with that menu. Click on the function in the menu you
want to use. The name of the current file is also displayed in this area.
File:

Edit:
1628
VERICUT Help
Icon Bar:

search for.
1629
VERICUT Help
These features provide the same functionality as those described under Edit in the menu bar.
1630
VERICUT Help
Creating G-Code or Control Report Files

A G-Code Report file contains information about how the current NC control configuration will
interpret a G-Code NC program file. Reported information includes: machine codes present in
the tool path and macros (actions) they will call, variables used (if any), cutting tools used,
subroutines defined and referenced, and more.
A Control Report file is similar to the G-Code report, but contains more detailed information
about all machine codes and features supported by the NC control.
To generate a report of G-Codes in an NC program file and what the control will
do with them:
1. Assuming the desired G-Code NC program and Control files are loaded, click Info menu
> G-Code Report.
2. Select, or enter a /path/filename for the report file, and click OK.
3. The report is generated and displayed for review.
To generate a report of all machine codes a control is configured to handle:
1. Assuming the desired Control file is loaded, click Info menu > Control Report.
2. Select, or enter a /path/filename for the report file, and click OK.
3. The report is generated and displayed for review.
For additional information on G-Code and Control Report files, see:

G-Code Report and Control Report, also in the Info Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Settings window: G-Code Outputs tab in the Project Menu section of VERICUT Help.
G-Code Report File and Control Report File, under VERICUT File Descriptions, in the Getting
VERICUT Log (VERICUT Log window)

The VERICUT Log option opens the VERICUT Log window enabling you to view the contents of
the VERICUT Log File (ref. Log File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT
1631
VERICUT Help
Composite Simulation Help). See VERICUT Log window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
1632
VERICUT Help
Clear Log File and Logger
Location:
Info menu > Clear Log File and Logger
Toolbar shortcut:
The Clear Log File and Logger option enables you to clear both the Message area, also known
as the "message logger", and the VERICUT Log file.
1633
VERICUT Help
Project Menu
1634
VERICUT Help
Project Tree (Project Tree panel)
Location:
Project menu > Project Tree
Toolbar short cut:
The Project Tree option displays the VERICUT Project Tree panel. The features on the Project
Tree provide the tools required for the day to day use of VERICUT for setting up jobs for
verification and simulation. The Project Tree features are described in detail in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help and VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help.
1635
VERICUT Help
Settings (Settings window)
Location:
Project menu > Settings
The Settings option displays the Settings window. The features on the Settings window enable
you to:
 set properties for the verification session, such as: cut mode, resolution and tolerance
values that affect cut model display, accuracy, and motion simulation.
 setup, create, or view VERICUT's many output files.
 configure the settings required to support processing of G-Code NC program files.
 specify "Machine Locations" to store work offsets and machine locations specific to the
current NC program file(s) and "Tool Offsets" to store tool-related offset and cutter
compensation data. Control which levels of block skipping are recognized, and specify
the block skip character. Select which Sync Sub-system is to be used. Configure VERICUT
for wire EDM simulations.
 configure the settings required to support the processing of APT-CLS NC program files.
 configure VERICUT to automatically save In Process files, View Capture image files (such
as JPEG, PS, EPSF, or TIFF files), or VERICUT Solid (.vct) files.
1636
VERICUT Help
Project Settings tab — The features on the Project Settings tab enable you to set properties for
the
verification session, such as: cut mode, resolution and tolerance values that affect cut model
display, accuracy, and motion simulation.
Output Files tab —The features on the Output Files tab enable you to setup, create, or view
VERICUT's many output files.
G-Code Outputs tab —The features on the G-Code Outputs tab enable you to configure the
settings required to support processing of G-Code NC program files.
1637
VERICUT Help
G-Code Advanced tab — The features on the G-Code Advanced tab enable you to specify
"Machine Locations" to store work offsets and machine locations specific to the current NC
program file(s) and "Tool Offsets" to store tool-related offset and cutter compensation data.
Control which levels of block skipping are recognized, and specify the block skip character.
Select which Sync Sub-system is to be used. Configure VERICUT for wire EDM simulations.
Apt Settings tab — The features on the APT Settings window enable you to configure the
settings required to support the processing of APT-CLS NC program files.
Auto Save tab — The features on the Auto Save tab enable you to configure VERICUT to
automatically save In Process files, View Capture image files (such as JPEG, PS, EPSF, or TIFF
files), or VERICUT Solid (.vct) files. Saving is based on user specified events or when VERICUT
detects errors during NC program processing. Auto-saving is especially useful to save data
during batch processing.
OK — Saves the tab settings and closes the Settings window.

Apply — Saves the current tab settings and leaves the Settings window open.
Cancel — Closes the Settings window without saving changes.
1638
VERICUT Help
Settings window, Project Settings tab

The features on the Settings window, Project Settings tab enable you to set properties for the
verification session, such as: cut mode, resolution and tolerance values that affect cut model
display, accuracy, and motion simulation. It also enables you to activate, or inactivate, NC
Program Review and to add notes to the project file.
1639
VERICUT Help
General
The features in the General section of the Project Settings tab establish general properties for
the VERICUT simulation session.
Default Machining Type — Sets the machining mode for VERICUT.
Options:
Mill — A spinning tool removes material when in contact with Stock/Fixture.
Turn — A Spindle spins the Stock/Fixture assembly and a stationary tool (not spinning)
removes material when in contact with Stock/Fixture.
Wire EDM — An electrically charged wire removes material when in contact with
Stock/Fixture.
The machining type can be changed during the simulation using a VERICUT-MODAL record
(APT or G-Code NC programs) or via the VC_ModeMilling / VC_ModeTurning NC control
macros (G-Code NC programs only).
Stock Consistency Check — When toggled "on"(checked), VERICUT checks the consistency of
stock models, including: check for "watertight" solid- repair improperly trimmed surfaces
(overlaps and gaps), and reconstruct insignificant missing surfaces. This option is highly
recommended for stock models creating from importing IGES data, and other model files where
portions of the stock model disappear, or gaps/seams appear in the model when cutting is
started.
Model Export Cut Mode — When toggled "on"(checked), causes VERICUT to cut with a more
accurate internal cutter representation for better results when using modules like Model Export
or OptiPath. Only toggle "on" when the additional accuracy is required as it can have an impact
on processing speed.
Enable NC Program Review — When toggled "on" (checked), the icons and menu options that
provide access to NC Program Review are activated and the data needed by NC Program
Review is stored in memory. When toggled "off" (not checked), the icons and menu options
that provide access to NC Program Review are inactivated (grayed out). With NC Program
Review toggled "off" the amount of memory that VERICUT uses is greatly reduced since it does
not need to store the data that is needed by NC Program Review.
Replace Material When Stepping Back — When toggled "on" (checked), removed material will
be replaced as you step back through the NC program. This feature can be turned on at any
point in the simulation but VERICUT will not start to store the information required to replace
material while stepping back until Replace Material When Stepping Back is toggled "on". Cuts
made prior to turning this feature on will not replace material while stepping back. VERICUT will
store up to 1000 cut records that remove material.
1640
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Replace Material When Stepping Back and FastMill mode (ref, FastMill, on the
Motion window, in the Project menu section, also in the VERICUT Help section) are mutually
exclusive.
When Replace Material When Stepping Back is toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT will turn
FastMill "off" Conversely, if FastMill is toggled "on", VERICUT will turn Replace Material When
Stepping Back "off. VERICUT will display a pop-up notification when these situations occur.
Animate Machine When Stepping Back — When toggled "on" (checked), the machine will
animate as you step back through the tool path. This feature can be turned on at any point in
the simulation but VERICUT will not start to store the information required to animate the
machine while stepping back until Animate Machine When Stepping Back is toggled "on".
Machine motions made prior to turning this feature on will not animate while stepping back.
VERICUT will store up to 1000 cut records that cause machine motion.
Record Cutting Conditions — When toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT saves cutting conditions
for each NC block in a temporary file and displays cutting condition values in the Status window
without OptiPath turned on. This feature is only valid for jobs that could normally be optimized
using OptiPath.
The Record Cutting Conditions feature must be turned on before VERICUT will begin to save
the cutting conditions for each block to a temporary file. When the Record Cutting Conditions
feature is toggled "off" the cutting conditions data accumulated to the current point are
removed from the temporary file.
See Status window, in the Info menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Tolerance
The features in the Tolerance section of the Project Settings tab enable you to set tolerances
for the simulation. The tolerance values control the accuracy of the cut stock model, simulated
circular motion and other interpolated motions, whether or not certain errors get written to
the error log, and the accuracy of cylinders, cones and other revolved models and tool
assemblies for collision checking.
Interpolation Tolerance — This value is used to interpolate intermediate positions during
NURBS, circular, and helical motions. This tolerance is also used by the Detect 4-Axis Rotary
Motion APT setting to determine if sequential GOTO locations can be performed as a single 4-
axis motion- ref. Project menu > Processing Options > APT Settings: Rotary tab.
Rotary Motion Tolerance — The Rotary Motion Tolerance value is used with the max
tessellation angle to calculate intermediate tool positions resulting from processing rotary
motion. Decreasing this value increases the number of intermediate points calculated and
enables VERICUT to do a better job of collision detection. Tightening up this tolerance value will
not significantly affect performance. This tolerance value also applies to rapid rotary motions.
1641
VERICUT Help
NOTE: The Rotary Motion Tolerance is designed to keep the tool tip within tolerance when
breaking up a rotary move. The max tessellation angle (specified using the
MaxTesselationAngle macro) is a better setting to use with collision detection. The number of
intermediate points will be based on the maximum of these two calculation methods.
Minimum Error Volume — This value sets a threshold for the minimum volume of material that
must be removed by a fast feed motion or holder collision in order for an error to be reported.
If the volume removed by an error motion is less than this value then no error is reported in the
log file or logger for the motion and the error count is not incremented.
However, any volume of material removed by a fast feed motion or holder is always shaded in
the error color (typically red), regardless of the volume. Thus small volume errors may be
shaded red but will not be reported in the log file or logger if the volume is less than Minimum
Error Volume value.
The Minimum Error Volume value is in cubic units (inch or millimeter).
Examples
1. If a value of 0.0005 cubic inches is entered for Minimum Error Volume, then the
potential length of a side of the cube representing the volume is 0.0793 inch (the cube
root of 0.0005 cubic in. is 0.0793 in.).
2. If a value of 0.008 cubic mm is entered for Minimum Error Volume, then the potential
length of a side of the cube representing the volume is .2 mm (the cube root of .008
cubic mm. is .2 mm.).
Use this setting to filter very small fast feed and holder collisions from VERICUT's error reports.
The default value "0" causes VERICUT to report all fast feed and holder/stock collision errors.
Model Tolerance — This value is used when displaying revolved models such as cylinders,
cones, and revolved profiles. It is also used when displaying the revolved image of a turning
stock model created from an IGES profile. The accuracy of cylindrical tool assemblies, displayed
in a machine view, is also affected by this value.
This value has a small effect on collision checking accuracy for revolved models used to
represent machine components or fixtures.
This value is also used for the chordal deviation tolerance when a STEP model file is converted
into triangles as it is being loaded into VERICUT.
Cutting Resolution — This value sets the accuracy of VERICUT's cut stock model. Increasing the
Cutting Resolution value increases the speed of the simulation and various other operations,
and uses less memory, but reduces the accuracy of the cut stock model. Decreasing the value
improves accuracy of the cut stock model, but reduces speed and increases the memory
required by the cut stock model.
The Cutting Resolution affects the accuracy and speed of AUTO-DIFF, Model Export, and
OptiPath. A smaller Cutting Resolution value produces more accurate results but takes longer
to process. VERICUT's ability to detect small holder collisions and fast feed errors are also
1642
VERICUT Help
affected. The speed of dynamic rotate/pan/zoom operations and the time required to create
the refined image in the workpiece view are also affected.
VERICUT applies the Cutting Resolution value directly, creating the cut stock model at the
specified accuracy. The tool path files are not scanned to detect the cutters used. The value
represents the size of the smallest cut feature VERICUT can detect.
NOTE: It is very important to understand that the value represents the size of a cut's volume
measured in any direction. Thus, cuts that are larger than the Cutting Resolution value in at
least one direction will be detected by VERICUT.
For example, a .001" axial depth cut by a .25" ball end mill produces a volume with the
following shape:
As a general practice, setting Cut Tolerance to one-fourth (1/4) the size of a cut volume's span
will detect the cut. Thus in this case, to detect a .001" deep cut by a .25" ball end-mill, set Cut
Tolerance to .007" or smaller. However, results can vary depending on the shape of the cut
volume.
NOTE: This feature is only available when the first setup in a project is active. For subsequent
setups, this feature is grayed out.
The Cutting Resolution Graph, shown in the picture below, provides a graphical way to
determine an appropriate Cut Tolerance value.
1643
VERICUT Help
You can set the Cut Tolerance value either by dragging the diamond marker on the graph or by
entering a value in the Cut Tolerance text field.
The green zone in the graph defines the workable region for the cut tolerance of the current
project. The top of green is a constant. It’s cut tolerance = 0.025 for an inch project file or
0.635 for a millimeter project file. This defines the maximum cut tolerance you need for
relatively reasonable accuracy for material removal. The bottom of the green zone is the
turning point of the shape of the curve that indicates that a cut tolerance value smaller than
that will result in significant increases in the amount of resources (time and memory) required.
The value at the bottom if the green section is a percentage of the available of memory. For a
computer with 11G memory, it is about 2G of memory.
Although the shape of the curve is almost constant (does not change), its green zone area can
change dramatically based on stock size. The followings are three different graphs illustrating
small, medium, large size of stocks:
Small Size Stock Medium Size Stock Medium Size Stock
The purpose of the graph is to give your a guide line to which cut tolerance region (green zone)
you should work with. Cut tolerance values in the red zone should be avoided and cut
tolerances values in yellow zone indicate that the cut tolerance values will not provde enough
accuracy. The graph should not be interpreted as an exact relationship between cut stock and
performance.
The Base Cut Tolerance on, Tool Size option in previous releases has been removed. For pre-
V7.4 projects that use the cut tolerance based on tool size option, the tool based tolerance is
converted to a stock based tolerance. The conversion happens either the first time you open
1644
VERICUT Help
the Settings window, or the first time the Play or Step button is used. The project will be
marked as changed and you will be prompted to save the project when you exist.
Project Notes
The features in the Project Notes section of the Project Settings tab enable you to add Message
Notes and Comment Notes to the header of a Project file.
Message Notes are saved in the header of the project file and are displayed in the VERICUT
message area (Logger) when the project file is loaded.
Comment Notes are saved in the header of the project file but do not display in the VERICUT
Logger.
There is a limit of 255 characters per line, but there is no limit to the number of lines that can
be added.
Any Message/Comment Notes that currently exist in the control file are displayed in the
appropriate text field as shown below. Any note can be edited and re-saved in the project file.
Existing Message/Comment Notes in the Project file:
In the Project file, each line of the note is added to the header in quotes, and is preceded by
either the keyword MESSAGE (for message notes), or COMMENT (for comment notes) as shown
below.
How the above message looks in the Project file:
CGTech Machine
Version-7.4
MESSAGE "This is the 1st Message Note added to the project file and it will appear in the logger."
MESSAGE "This is the 2nd Message Note added to the project file and it will appear in the logger."
COMMENT "This is the 1st Comment Note added to the project file and it will not appear in the logger."
1645
VERICUT Help
UNITS MILLIMETER
MACHINE "" {
PRIORITY_TYPE SINGLE
Adding /editing notes:

Add a note by typing the desired text, or edit the text of existing notes in the appropriate text
field. When finished, press OK, or Apply, depending on whether or not you want to leave the
Machine Settings window open. Then save the project file using the File menu > Save Project
(or Save As) feature in the menu bar, or use the (Save Project) or (Save Project As)
icon in the tool bar.
Click with the right mouse button on the icon to toggle between (Save Project) and
(Save Project As) modes.
To Settings window
1646
VERICUT Help
Settings window, Output Files tab

The features on the Settings window, Output Files tab enable you to specify, View, and adjust
settings for VERICUT output files (Log file, Movie file and OptiPath file).
TIP: You can also access the Settings window, Output Files tab by selecting Project menu >
Output.
1647
VERICUT Help
Log File
Use to specify the name of the VERICUT Log file. Enter the \path\filename in the Log File text
field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window that displays
to specify the \path\filename.
View — Opens a window containing the VERICUT Log file. This file contains session information,
such as error, warning and informational messages about the verification session. Standard text
editing features are provided, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc. For more information on
using the editing features, see Text File under Edit menu.
Movie
Use to specify the name of the Image/AVI output file. Enter the \path\filename in the Movie
text field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window that
displays to specify the \path\filename.
View — Opens a "VERICUT Player" window (or "AVI Player" window) to load and play back an
Image file (or AVI file). The type of "player" window that opens depends on the Output Format
setting in the Record Movie window.
Settings — Displays the Image Record window.
OptiPath
Use to specify the name of the Optimized file. Enter the \path\filename in the OptiPath text
field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window that displays
to specify the \path\filename.
View — Opens a window containing the optimized NC program file. Standard text editing
features are provided, such as: copy/cut, paste, search, etc. For more information on using the
editing features, see Text File under Edit menu.
Settings — Displays the OptiPath Control window.
To Settings window
1648
VERICUT Help
Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab
The features on the G-Code Outputs tab enable you to configure the settings required to
support processing of G-Code NC program files.
TIP: You can also access the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab by selecting Project menu >
G-Code Outputs.
G-Code Output Files
1649
VERICUT Help
The features on theG-Code Output Files section of the G-Code Outputs tab enable you to
configure the settings required to support processing of G-Code NC program files.
Control Report — Use to specify a name for the Control Report to be created. Enter the \
path\filename in the Control Report text field, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Save File file selection window that displays to specify the \path\filename. This file contains
information about how the current NC control configuration will interpret various codes.
View — Opens the Control Report window containing the Control Report file. In this
window, you can view, edit, or reset the Control Report file contents.
APT Output File — Name of the file to receive ASCII APT NC program records resulting when
the Create APT Output File feature is active (see below). Enter the /path/filename of the file in
the APT Output File text field or click on the (Browse) icon to display the Select Output File
file selection window and use it to specify the /path/filename. If left blank the file will not be
created.
View — Opens the APT Output File window displaying the APT Output file containing the
ASCII APT NC program records created when the Create APT Output File feature is active
(see below).
G-Code Log File — Name of the file to receive error, warning and informational messages about
G-Code processing. Enter the /path/filename of the file in the G-Code Log File text field or click
on the (Browse) icon to display the Select Log File file selection window and use it to
specify the /path/filename. If left blank the file will not be created.
View — Opens the G-Code Log window displaying the G-Code Log file. This file contains
information, such as error, warning and informational messages about G-Code processing.
Create APT Output File — When active, converts the G-Code NC Program data into ASCII APT
NC Program records. Converted data is stored in the specified APT Output file (see above).
For information about APT NC program records and formats, see "Supported APT-CLS records".
Messages
The features on the Messages section of the G-Code Outputs tab enable you to set the
destination and format of messages output during a simulation.
Messages can be sent to the destinations listed below:

 to Nowhere (not available for Send Error Messages, Send Warning Messages or Send
Output Messages)
 to G-Code Log (not available for Send Output Messages)
1650
VERICUT Help
 to APT Output
 to APT Output and G-Code Log
 to Logger (not available for Send Output Messages)
 to G-Code Log and Logger (not available for Send Output Messages)
 to APT Output and Logger
 to APT Output, G-Code Log and Logger
NOTE: Not all destination choices are available for all message types.
Send Errors — Destination of messages about errors-potentially severe problems that will most
likely produce incorrect results on the machine tool.
Send Warnings — Destination of messages about possible problems. Scrutinize warnings to
decide if they will actually impact the machining process.
Send Info — Destination of messages providing information about files used, the time and date
that the process started, etc.
Send Debug — Destination of debug messages providing additional information related to
internal calculations, conditions, and variable values. The types of debug messages which
appear are controlled via the features in the Debug section of the G-Code Outputs tab.
Send Control Settings — Destination of messages showing the control settings in effect when
the tool path file was processed.
Send Input Block — Destination of messages showing the input NC program file records
processed.
Send Apt — Destination of messages showing the converted NC program records resulting from
reverse-postprocessing. When Create APT Output File is active on the Settings window: G-
Code Outputs tab, output messages are sent to the APT Output File specified on the same
window. By default, these records are in ASCII APT format.
However, using the C Macro Extension – Application Programming Interface, or CME–API (ref.
CME-API Help in the VERICUT Development Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library), other
output file formats are obtainable.
Output Filenames Format — Controls how names of files used by VERICUT are shown.
Options:
Filename Only
Full Path Names — includes full folder path.
Output Block Sequence Numbers — Controls when block sequence numbers are included with
APT output records resulting from conversion. The sequence numbers appear in columns 73-80,
and are useful for general reference or debugging purposes.
1651
VERICUT Help
Options:
Yes — output block sequence numbers
No — do not output block sequence numbers
Display Word or Function Errors — Use to specify whether to display Word, or Function, errors.
Options:
Yes — output Word or Function errors
No — do not output Word or Function errors
Display Duplicate Variable Definition Errors — Use to specify whether to display duplicate
variable definition errors.
Options:
Yes — output duplicate variable definition errors
No — do not output duplicate variable definition errors
Debug
The features on the Debug section of the G-Code Outputs tab enable you to select what debug
messages to send to output. Debug messages can provide additional information that may be
helpful debugging development of files used to simulate G-Code NC programs and simulate
machine tool motions. Set each Debug Message to either Yes (send to output) or No (don't
send to output). The output destination for debug messages is controlled by the "Send Debug
Messages" in the Messages section of the G-Code Outputs tab.
Debug Macro Arguments — When toggled on (checked), outputs the macro name, the word,
the text string value, and the numeric value for the macro being called.
Debug Variables — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages about changes to
variable values. See also: Project menu > Variables (Variables window).
Debug Substitution — When to set to "Yes", outputs debug messages related to string
substitutions (ref. Configuration menu > Adv. Options: Substitute tab).
Debug Control Subs — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages associated with
Control Subroutines.
Debug Active Components — When toggled on (checked), the Active Subsystem, Active Tool
Component name, and Active Stock Component name will be printed on each block. Also, the
Active Spindle Component name will be printed whenever it is used or set.
Debug Timing — When toggled on (checked), time related debug messages [Delta time (time
for this block), Total time, and Time Attributes (information used to calculate Delta time)] are
output for each block.
There are also 2 debugging statements to assist in debugging sync logic. These messages are:
1652
VERICUT Help
Debug: Time associated with new Motion/Dwell = 0.09

Debug: Time remaining for motion on Channel 0 = 0.09
Example:
Looking at the start of the millturn_merge_vtl_4ax_gl.vcproject from samples:
On block N25, we have a retract, a tool change, and then a motion
The first motion takes .09 minutes, and the second motion takes .045 minutes
On block O50, we have a retract, a tool change, and then a motion
The first motion takes .05 minutes, and the second motion takes .037 minutes
At the end of block O50, we have .003 minutes left on the first motion from block N25, and
.045 minutes left from the second motion.
The total time processed up to this point is .087.
The resulting debugging statements are included:
Input Channel: 1
N25 G0G95G96X-7.5Z.1F.0122S550T4D4M6
Debug: Time Attributes: RAPID
Debug: Total time = 0
Input Channel: 2
O40 G0G95G96U7.5W.1F0.012S550T1D1M3M6M41
Debug: Total time = 0.087
Debug Offsets — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages about offset value
changes, including: coordinate system offsets/shifts, compensation values in use, etc.
Debug Loop Logic — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages about values
calculated by looping or branching logic.
Debug Cutter Compensation — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages about
CDC tool offset positions.
1653
VERICUT Help
Debug Drill Cycles — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages about drilling
cycles.
Debug Turning Cycles — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages associated with
turning cycles, for example the distance from the turning axis to the tool control point and
calculations related to the use of constant surface speed.
Debug OptiPath — When toggled on (checked), a descriptive message will be printed whenever
machine simulation determines a block is non-optimizable.
Debug Tilted Working Plane — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages
associated with tilted working planes.
Debug Control API — When toggled on (checked), debug messages related to the API Interface
for the Heidenhain iTNC Controller are output.
Debug Wire EDM — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages associated with wire
EDM machining.
Debug Tool Chain — When toggled on (checked), outputs debug messages associated with Tool
Chain operation.
To Settings window
{|VCUT}
1654
VERICUT Help
Control Report window

The Control Report window enables you to view, edit, or reset the contents of a Control Report
file.
The Menu Bar and Tool Bar provide standard text editing features such as: copy/cut, paste,
search, etc. Moving the cursor over the icon will display name of the option. For more
information on using the editing features, see Text File in the Edit menu section of VERICUT
Help.
1655
VERICUT Help
APT Output window

The APT Output window enables you to view, edit, or reset the contents of an APT Output file.
The Menu Bar and Tool Bar provide standard text editing features such as: copy/cut, paste,
search, etc. Moving the cursor over the icon will display name of the option. For more
information on using the editing features, see Text File in the Edit menu section of VERICUT
Help.
1656
VERICUT Help
G-Code Log File window

The G-Code Log File contains information, such as error, warning and informational messages
about G-Code processing.
The items in the Icon Bar enable you to search for specific items in the file listing, print the file,
or exit the window. Moving the cursor over the icon will display name of the option. Each
feature (from left to right) is described below.
(Go To Line Number) — Moves the cursor in the G-Code Log File listing to the line number
specified in the text field.
1657
VERICUT Help
(Search Forward) — Use to search forward in the G-Code Log File listing for the text string
specified in the text field.
(Search Backward) — Use to search backward in the G-Code Log File listing for the text
string specified in the text field.
(Go To Definition) — The Go To Definition feature enables you to quickly and easily see
how G-Code commands (G43, M6, etc) and variables have been defined while the G-Code Log
window.
Example 1:
In the G-Code Log file, assume there is an entry like the following:
P1 (G 10)
WorkCoordIndex “1” 1
TableIndex “1” 1
If you highlight the “P1 (G10)”, and click on the (Go To Definition) icon, the G-Code
Processing window will display and the corresponding entry in the Word/Address section of the
window will be highlighted.
Example 2:
In the G-Code Log file, assume there is an entry like the following:
N10000 $MN_ORIENTATION_NAME_TAB[1]="YH"
If you highlight “$MN_ORIENTATION_NAME_TAB[1]”, and click on the (Go To Definition)

icon, the Search for window: Variable tab will display with the highlighted variable entered.
Click on one of the Search icons and the Variables window will open with the corresponding
variable highlighted.
Tip: Click with the right mouse button in the G-Code Log file listing to display the following
option that you can use as an alternative to the Go To Definition icon.
Print — Use to print the the G-Code Log File.
Close — Closes the G-Code Log File window.
1658
VERICUT Help
Settings window, G-Code Advanced tab

The features on the G-Code Advanced tab enable you to specify "Machine Locations" to store
work offsets and machine locations specific to the current NC program file(s) and "Tool Offsets"
to store tool-related offset and cutter compensation data, control which levels of block skipping
are recognized, and specify the block skip character. Select which Sync Sub-system is to be
used.
TIP: You can also access the Settings window, G-Code Advanced tab by selecting Project menu
> G-Code Advanced Settings.
1659
VERICUT Help
Overrides
The features in the Overrides section of the G-Code Advanced tab are used to specify "Machine
Locations" tables used to store work offsets and machine locations specific to the current NC
program file(s) and "Tool Offsets" tables used to store tool-related offset and compensation
data specific to the current NC program file(s).
NOTE: The values set in a Machine Locations table created here are stored in the Project file
and are used to override the corresponding Machine Locations table values stored in the
Machine file.
Overrides Tables list — The Overrides Table list, on the left side of the Overrides section, shows
a list of tables that are currently defined. The Overrides Tables list will contain both “Machine
Locations” tables and "Tool Offsets" tables.
The Configure “table” menu on the right side of the Overrides section will vary slightly
depending on whether a Machine Locations related object or a Tool Offsets related object is
highlighted in the Overrides Tables list. The following section describes the features that are
common to all Configure “table” menus. The only exception is that the Turret Rotations table
type replaces the Register feature with a Tool Index feature which is described in the Machine
Locations Tables section below.
Features specific to a particular table type are describes below in the Machine Locations Tables
and Tool Offsets Tables sections.
1660
VERICUT Help
Configure “table“ menu features

Location Name/Tool Offsets — This feature is used to identify the type of table to be added, or
modified if the table already exists. If Machine Locations or Tool Offsets is highlighted in the
Overrides Tables list, choose one the table types from the pull-down list. If an existing table is
highlighted, the table type will automatically be displayed in this field.
defined.
Register — Use to specify the Register number that will be used by VERICUT to access the
corresponding table data. The Register number may correspond to an offset register number,
or an integer value, as required by a particular table.
SubRegister — Use of this feature enables you to access multiple sub-values for the same tool
from tool related tables. For example, groove tools often have multiple "driven" points, which
then correspond to multiple gage offsets, and possibly multiple Cutter Comp values, Tool Nose
Comp values, and Tool Length Comp values. SubRegister is only active when Tool Offsets or an
existing Tool Offset table is highlighted.
Add — The Add feature will behave slightly differently depending on whether it is used with
Machine Location or Tool Offsets highlighted, or if an existing Machine Location or Tool Offsets
table is highlighted.
When Add is used with Machine Location or Tool Offsets highlighted, a new table, of the
specified type, is added to the Override Tables list with a default table record highlighted. If a
Machine Location table of the same type already exists, an error message is output.
When Add is used with an existing table record highlighted in the Overrides Tables list, a new
default table record is added to the highlighted table.
In both of the above cases, an additional text field is added to the bottom of the Configure
“table” menu, as shown in the picture below, enabling you to specify values for the new table
record.
The text field will be slightly different depending on the type of table that the record is being
added to. These differences are described below in the Machine Locations Tables and Tool
Offsets Tables sections. If an identical offset table record already exists for the table, an error
message is output.
Machine Locations table and Tool Offset table record values are stored in the Project file.
1661
VERICUT Help
Machine Locations Tables

Clicking on Machine Locations, or an existing Machine Location table, in the Override Tables list
will display the Configure Machine Locations menu on the right side of the Overrides section as
When Machine Locations is highlighted, the Configure Machine Locations menu enables you to
add Machine Location tables to the Override Tables list. When an existing Machine Location
table is highlighted, the Configure Machine Locations menu enables you to add another
Machine Location table record to the highlighted table.
Location Name — The following Machine Locations table types can be added, or modified,
with the features in the Overrides section of the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab. When
adding a new table, select the table type from the pull-down list. If you are modifying an
existing table, the table type will automatically be selected.
Initial Machine Location — The Initial Machine Location table is used to specify where machine
axes are initially located.
Machine Reference Location — The Machine Reference Location table is used to specify the
reference location of machine axes.
Tool Change Location — The Tool Change Location table is used specify the location of machine
axes when changing tools.
Tool Change Retraction — The Tool Change Retraction table is used to specify which machine
axes retract when changing tools.
Turret Rotations — The Turret Rotations table is used to store the turret rotation angles of
multiple Tool components connected to a Turret component on a lathe machine.
See Machine Locations Tables in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech Help Library, for
detailed information on specific Machine Locations table types and information on all VERICUT
tables.
1662
VERICUT Help
Use the remaining features to describe the table record to be added. These features are
common to all table types and are described in detail in the Configure “table” menu features
section above. The only exception is that the Turret Rotations table type replaces the Register
feature with a Tool Index feature which is described below.
Use the Add button, described in the Configure “table” menu features section above, to add
the new table/record, or additional table record, to the Overrides Tables list and display the
text field that enables you to specify the table record values.
The following describes the specific text field associated with each Machine Locations table
type.
For the following table types:
Initial Machine Location
Machine Reference Location
Tool Change Location
Values (XYZABCUVWABC) — The Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field is activated enabling you
to enter one to twelve numeric values as required by the specific table. Multiple value entries
require spaces between the values.
VERICUT supports two ways to input values into the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field, each
uses a different syntax:
1. Traditional format: The values are entered in the order specified (XYZABCUVWABC) and are
2. WORD/VALUE format: (X10 C45)
WORD/VALUE format.
1663
VERICUT Help
6. If all values are zero, you can leave the field blank. In this case, the display will be X0
Y0 Z0.
For table type:

Tool Change Retraction
to enter one to twelve numeric values as required by the Tool Change Retraction table.
Multiple value entries require spaces between the values.
Values (XYZABCUVWACB): Xval Yval Zval Aval Bval Cval Uval Vval Wval
For each machine axis (Xval-Wval):
A value of 0 is entered for no retract, or when the axis does not exist in the machine
configuration. Zero is assumed for axes not having a specified value.
A value of 1 is entered when the axis is to be moved first.
A value of 2 is entered when the axis is to be moved secondarily.
Examples:
 Values (XYZABCUVWACB): 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 - specifies that the XYZAB axes are to be
retracted to their tool change location while the CUVW axes (if they exist) are not to be
retracted
 Values (XYZABCUVWACB): 1 1 1 1 1 - as above, except CUVW are not specified and are
assumed not to be retracted
 Values (XYZABCUVWACB): 0 0 1 - specifies that only the Z axis is to be retracted
 Values (XYZABCUVWACB): 0 2 1 – specifies that the X axis does not move, the Y axis
moves secondarily (after Z moves), the Z axis moves first.
1664
VERICUT Help
For table type:

Turret Rotations
Tool Index — Identifies the turret index number corresponding to the Tool component's Tool
Index number. (Ref. Tool Index in the Configure Component menu, Component Type Tool
section, in the Project Tree section of VERICUTComposite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and
Angle — The Angle text field is activated enabling you to enter values representing the A, B,
and C axis orientations. Multiple value entries require spaces between the values.
1665
VERICUT Help
Tool Offsets Tables

Clicking on Tool Offsets, or an existing Tool Offset table, in the Override Tables list will display
the Configure Tool Offsets menu on the right side if the Overrides section as shown in the
picture below.
When Tool Offsets is highlighted, the Configure Tool Offsets menu enables you to add Tool
Offset tables to the Override Tables list. When an existing Tool Offset table is highlighted, the
Configure Tool Offsets menu enables you to add another Tool Offset table record to the Tool
Offset table.
The following Tool Offsets tables can be added or modified with the features in the Overrides
section of the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab.
Cutter Compensation — The Cutter Compensation table is used to store cutter diameter
compensation, or "CDC" offset values used when simulating cutter diameter compensation.
Gage Offset — The Gage Offset table is used to store tool gage offset, or "gage length" values
that set the adjustment needed to drive the tool in Tool Tip, and Tool Length Compensation,
programming methods.
Probe Offset — The Probe Offset table is used to store probe tool offset values. The table is
used to adjust tool motions during simulation of part probing.
Tool Length Compensation — The Tool Length Compensation table is used to store tool length
compensation offset values (e.g. G43 Hn).
Tool Nose Compensation — The Tool Nose Compensation table is used to store the tool nose
compensation offset values used with Fanuc style "imaginary tool nose programming" for
turning (e.g. G41-42 Dn).
See Tool Offsets Tables in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech Help Library, for
detailed information on specific Tool Offsets table types and information on all VERICUT tables.
Use the remaining features to describe the table record to be added. These features are
common to all table types and are described in detail in the “Configure table” menu features
section above.
1666
VERICUT Help
Use the Add button, described in the “Configure table” menu features section above, to add
the new table/table record, or additional table record, to the Overrides Tables list and display
the text field that enables you to specify the table record values.
The following describes the specific text field associated with each Tool Offsets table type.

Cutter Compensation
Tool Length Compensation
Value — The Value text field is activated enabling you to enter the cutter compensation, or tool
length compensation, offset values.

Gage Offset
Tool Nose Compensation
1667
VERICUT Help
Gage Offset
Values (XYZ) — The Values (XYZ) text field is activated enabling you to enter values
representing the gage offset.
Milling example:
Values (XYZ): 0 0 Zval
where the gage length "Zval" is a positive value measured from the tool's control point to the
gage line.
Turning example:
Values (XYZ): Xval 0 Zval
where the gage offset values Xval and Zval are measured from the tool's control point to the
machine zero.
Tool Nose Compensation

Values (XYZ) — The Values (XYZ) text field is activated enabling you to enter values
representing the tool nose compensation offset.
Values (XYZ): Xval 0 Zval
Tool nose compensation offset values are measured from the tool nose center to the imaginary
driven point. For example, the offset values for a turning insert having .060 radius would be: "-
.06 0 -.06".
For the following table type:

Probe Offset
Values (XYZ-X-Y-Z) — The Values (XYZ-X-Y-Z) text field is activated enabling you to enter values
representing the probe offset.
Values (XYZ-X-Y-Z): posXval posYval posZval negXval negYval negZval
1668
VERICUT Help
where each of the offset values ( posXval - negZval) specify the distance from the probe driven
point to the touch surface in each axis direction. Zero is assumed for axes not having a specified
probe offset value.
See the Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech Help Library, for additional information on
the above Machine Locations and Tool Offsets table types as well as information on all VERICUT
tables.
Block Skip
The features in the Block Skip section of the G-Code Advanced tab control which levels of block
skipping are recognized, and specify the block skip character.
Block Skip Character — Character which causes the block to be skipped. This character must be
the first character in the data block for skipping to occur.
Apply Switch Value — Controls when block skip switch values are referenced by VERICUT.
Options:
Immediate — Reference switch settings when VERICUT is reset, upon loading a new Project
file, and any time tool path processing is started.
On Reset — Reference switch settings only when VERICUT is reset, or upon loading a new
Project file.
Switch 1-9 — When active, processing is skipped for blocks beginning with the designated block
skip switch. For example, "Switch 2" corresponds to blocks beginning with "/2", "Switch 3"
corresponds to blocks with "/3", and so on.
Sync
The features in the Sync section of the G-Code Advanced tab enable you to select which Sync
Sub-system is to be used. This setting is only applicable if Sync Method on the Control Settings
window, Sync tab is set to something other then None. The features on the Control Settings
window, Sync tab are used to set up the sync environment.
The features on this tab are intended to be used as a debugging tool enabling you to easily turn
off one or more synchronized subsystems rather then running them all at the same time.
1669
VERICUT Help
VERICUT still runs through the "Sync" logic but a subsystem that is turned off, behaves like it is
in a permanent "Wait" state.
Use — The checkbox in this field enables you to toggle a particular Sync Subsystem on, or off.
When toggled "Off", VERICUT runs through the "Sync" logic but behaves like it is in a
permanent "Wait" state.
Input Channel — This field shows what is driving each channel. The information displayed here
will be different depending on the Sync Method being used. The above picture illustrates a
Fanuc control where each channel is driven by a separate NC program.
Sync Subsystem IDs — This field shows the ID of the sync subsystem that the record represents.
WireEDM
The features in the WireEDM section of the G-Code Advanced tab enable you to configure
VERICUT for Wire EDM simulations.
Wire Diameter — Use to specify the effective cutting diameter of the wire.
Work Table to XY Plane — Distance from the top of the work table (Machine Z zero) to the XY
reference plane, as measured along the machine Z-axis. This value is usually zero, but can be a
positive or negative value. The XY reference plane is the Z-axis height at which the tool path file
X and Y values are driven.
1670
VERICUT Help
XY Plane to UV Plane — Distance from the XY reference plane to the UV reference plane, as
measured along the machine Z-axis. This value must be a positive value. This setting is only
used when the tool path file contains U and V-axis values to control the wire angle. The UV
reference plane is the Z-axis height at which the tool path file U and V values are driven.
To Settings window
1671
VERICUT Help
Settings window, APT Settings tab
The features on the Settings window, APT Settings tab enable you to configure the settings
required to support the processing of APT-CLS NC program files.
TIP: You can also access the Settings window, APT Settings tab by selecting Project menu >
APT Settings.
1672
VERICUT Help
Motion
The features in the Motion section of the APT Settings tab provide important settings for APT-
CLS NC program simulation, such as: how circle and rapid motions are simulated, default tool
path units, and more.
Default NC Program Units — Default unit measurement system for NC program files that do
not contain a "UNITS" record. If the NC program file units differ from the session units, values in
the NC program are converted appropriately while being processed.
MULTAX — When selected, interprets six parameter GOTO records as GOTO/x,y,z,i,j,k where
i,j,k is tool axis orientation (superseded by MULTAX/OFF). Clearing this checkbox interprets
these records as GOTO/x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2 - two point locations (superseded by MULTAX/ON).
Max Tool Axis Angle — The maximum angle (in degrees), measured along a multi-axis motion
used to display intermediate tool positions. A value of "0" (default) does not display
intermediate positions on multi-axis motions. The cut model is unaffected by this feature.
Tool Axis Reset Angle — Minimum angle (in degrees) which is considered a positioning move.
Multi-axis motions having angles equal to or greater than the reset angle do not remove
material. Instead, the tool display is turned off through the multi-axis motion, then turned on
after the multi-axis destination is reached. Cutting resumes at the new tool position.
Closed Circle Tolerance — The Closed Circle Tolerance value is used by VERICUT to determine
whether a circular motion should go around the whole circle, or just around a small arc of the
circle.
A value of zero in this field causes VERICUT to check whether a circle is meant to be a complete
loop using the same method it has used for many years.
A non-zero value causes VERICUT to use a new method for determining whether a circle is
meant to be a complete loop. VERICUT compares the specified Closed Circle Tolerance value
with the distance between a circle's start, and end, points. If the distance is less than the
specified tolerance, VERICUT assumes that the tool must move round the whole circle. If the
distance is greater than the specified tolerance, then VERICUT moves the tool around a small
arc of the circle.
Process Circles — When selected, processes CIRCLE records to simulate the arc motion. Clear
this checkbox to ignore "CIRCLE" records, such as necessary when CIRCLE records are
accompanied by their representative chordal GOTO points.
NOTE: Simulating circle motions increases performance dramatically over processing chordal
GOTO points.
Reverse Circles — When selected, reverses CIRCLE record motions. Clear this checkbox to
simulate circle motions in the direction programmed. (Circle IJK values determine circle
direction.)
1673
VERICUT Help
Detect Chordal GOTOs — When this option and Process Circles are selected, the chordal GOTO
points which follow CIRCLE records motions are processed to simulate an arc, or circle motion.
Clear this checkbox to process the GOTOs as linear tool positions.
Reset Tool Change — When selected, resets the tool display following a tool change. This
action turns off the tool display until after the tool is changed and the following motion is
processed. The new tool appears at the end of the motion following the tool change. This
option is recommended when simulating tool paths for NC machines that automatically retract
the tool during a tool change. Clear this checkbox to have VERICUT change the tool at its
current location when a tool change command is encountered.
Process NX or CATIA Matrix — When selected, processes these tool path matrix records to
transform the tool path to its base coordinate system: CATIA0 or MSYS. Clear this checkbox to
ignore tool path matrix records. This feature is useful to automatically orient tool paths to
models imported from the same CAD/CAM system.
Ignore unrecognized Major words — When toggled on, VERICUT ignores unrecognized APT
major words and no warning messages are output to the VERICUT main window message area,
or in the Log file.
Default CLEARP — Distance to retract along the tool axis when a RETRCT record is encountered
prior to establishing the retract plane. The default CLEARP condition is "off" until a CLEARP
record defining a clearance plane is encountered.
RAPID Motion — Controls how to simulate rapid positioning motions. Options:
Linear — Move in a straight line.
Square — Move with "squared off" motion, where Z motions are processed independently
from X and Y.
GOHOME Motion — Controls how the tool is returned to the home position when a GOHOME
record is processed. Options:
1674
VERICUT Help
FROM — Move in a straight line to the home position.

Retract — Move with squared off motion, where the tool is first retracted the distance
specified by the GOHOME R Dist value, then moved to the home position.
GOHOME R Dist — When simulating GOHOME record motions via the "Retract" option (see
above), this value specifies the distance to retract before going to the home position.
Rotary
The features in the Rotary section of the APT Settings tab enable you to control the rotary
motions simulated for APT-CLS NC programs. Note that while machines often rotate the
workpiece, in a VERICUT Workpiece view the workpiece is fixed and the tool is seen rotating
about the workpiece. Both rotary cut paths are identical.
"ROTATE/BAXIS,ATANGL,90" as seen on a machine with a "B" rotary table and simulated by

VERICUT in a Workpiece view:
ROTATE, ROTABL, ROTHED — These features control when and how to simulate motion caused
by the corresponding ROTATE, ROTABL, or ROTHED records, respectively. "BAXIS" is the default
rotation axis when not specified. The rotary pivot point is defined by the Rotation Center.
When absolute or incremental rotation is not specified, the Angle Value determines how to
apply the rotary value.
Options:
Ignore — Ignores the rotary command. (Default)
Rotate — Rotates while cutting. Tool path motions that follow are expected to have the
rotation applied.
1675
VERICUT Help
Rotate/Apply — Similar to Rotate, except also applies the rotated coordinate system to
subsequent tool path motions. Tool path motions that follow are NOT expected to have the
rotation applied.
Position — Rotates without cutting, also known as "positioning". The tool disappears from its
initial position, and then appears at the rotated position. Tool path motions that follow are
expected to have the rotation applied.
Position/Apply — Similar to Position, except also applies the rotated coordinate system to
subsequent tool path motions. Tool path motions that follow are NOT expected to have the
rotation applied.
Rotation Center — Center of rotation for rotary motions simulated via the ROTATE, ROTABL, or
ROTHED features (see above).
Philosophy — Describes what is being commanded to rotate for rotary motions simulated via
the ROTATE, ROTABL, or ROTHED features (see above): Table (default), or Tool. Changing the
rotation philosophy has the effect of reversing rotation direction. Note that ROTHED angle
values are always assumed to use a rotating Table philosophy.
Angle Value — Controls how angle values are applied for rotary motions simulated via the
ROTATE, ROTABL, or ROTHED features (see above) when the commands do not specify
"ATANGL" or "INCR".
Options:
Relative — Incremental angle values.
Absolute — Absolute angle locations. (Default)
Note that ROTHED angle values are always assumed to be Absolute.
Direction — Direction of rotation for simulating for rotary motions simulated via the ROTATE,
ROTABL, or ROTHED features (see above).
Options:
Shortest — Direction which travels the shortest distance. (Default)
CW — Always use clockwise motion.
CCW — Always use counterclockwise motion.
Linear — Refers to angles on a linear axis "wrapped" around the rotary component. Rotary
values specify absolute locations along the linear-rotary axis, while the sign (+ / -) controls
which end of the linear axis is used.
Detect 4-Axis Rotary Motion — When selected, simulates an arc cut for multi-axis motions that
fit within an arc path. Clear this checkbox to simulate each multi-axis motion independently-
recommended when simulating 5-axis contouring-type motions. The Interpolation Tolerance
value is used to determine which motions are simulated in the 4-axis cut.
1676
VERICUT Help
Turning
The features on the Turning tab enable you to control lathe turning motions simulated for APT-
CLS NC program files.
GOTO Format — Use to specify how turning GOTO record values are to be displayed in a
Workpiece view. In this view, VERICUT simulates turning motion in the ZX plane, where Z is the
spindle-axis, and X is the cross-slide-axis. This feature acts like a post-processor for turning tool
position data.
Example 1- Assume you have a turning tool path programmed in GOTO/x,y format. By default,
GOTO Format "#zval, #xval" displays the first GOTO value as Z-axis motion, and the second
value as X-axis motion.
Example 2- Assume you have a turning tool path that was reversed post-processed from G-
Code data such that GOTO records are in GOTO/x,0,z format (center value is "zero"). For
VERICUT to process this correctly, set GOTO Format= #xval, #yval, #zval.
Cycles
The features in the Cycles section of the APT Settings tab enable you to change how VERICUT
simulates the APT, or CLS, CYCLE records when simulating NC program canned cycles, also
known as "fixed tool axis cycles". The Drill Cycle feature controls when and how these records
are simulated.
Cycle Set — Controls which cycle definition set(s) are considered by VERICUT when processing
APT tool paths. If you add a new cycle set, for a different flavor of APT or a different post-
1677
VERICUT Help
processor, you can give it any name you wish and it will appear in this list. "ALL" considers all
cycle sets defined for use.
Cycle Definitions — Opens the Cycles window enabling you to maintain cycle and modals
definitions used to interpret "CYCLE" records. This feature is especially useful if simulated cycle
motions are not displayed as expected. When VERICUT cannot find definitions to interpret a
CYCLE record, an error similar to "Invalid CYCLE record" error is issued. In these cases, cycle
definitions must be modified to interpret the cycle data.
See Configuring for APT-CLS Cycle Simulation, also in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
To Settings window
1678
VERICUT Help
Supported APT-CLS NC Program Records
APT NC program records typically contain a major vocabulary word followed by a slash ("/"),
then a combination of data and/or minor vocabulary words. APT records can be preceded by
leading spaces or tabs. Spaces can appear anywhere in the record. APT record data typically
ends prior to column 72. However, a "$" at the end of a record continues onto the following
line.
The APT NC program records processed by VERICUT are listed below in alphabetical order. See
the appropriate section for details. Records not listed are typically ignored by VERICUT. They
are recognized by VERICUT but are always ignored and are not affected by the "Ignore" switch.
No error or warning messages are output when they are encountered. The following list of APT
major words falls into this category:
ARCSLP, ATANGL, AUTOPS, AUXFUN, CALL, CANON, CCW, CLAMP, COPY,
COUPLE, CHECK, CHUCK, CUT, CL, CLPRNT, CW, CYLINDER, CYLNDR, DELAY,
DELETE, DISPLY, DNTCUT, DRAFT, DRESS, END-OF-PATH, FIXOFF, GO, HEADER,
IF, IFRO, INDEX, INSERT, INTOL, ISN, JUMPTO, LEADER, LETTER, LIBRY, LINTOL,
MACHIN, MCHTOL, MDEND, MDWRIT, MOVETO, OFSTNO, OPSKIP, ORIGIN,
OUTTOL, PAINT, PARTNO, PICKUP, PITCH, PLABEL, PLOT, POSMAP, POSTN,
PPFUN, PPLOT, PPTOL, PREFUN, PROBE, PROGRM, PSIS, RAPD0, RAPD1, READ,
REDEF, RESET, REMARK, REWIND, SAVEL, SCALE, SELCTL, SELECT, SETSIDE,
SEQNO, SLOWDN, SUB, SUBSTART, THICK, THREAD, TIME, TLCHG, TLONPS,
TMARK, TM, TOLER, TOLTBL, TOOLNO, TRACUT, VERIFY, ZOFF.
The following APT NC program records are processed by VERICUT:
ARC record
The ARC record causes circular motion. The format of this record is similar to CIRCLE record,
except specifies the arc end point via an additional set of X, Y, Z values.
1679
VERICUT Help
CATIA0 record
The CATIA0 record specifies a CATIA-style twelve parameter tool path transformation matrix.
VERICUT processes this record when Process Matrix, on the APT Settings window: Motion tab,
is active.
Example:
$$*CATIA0
$$*AXS2
$$ .00000 .00000 1.00000 -6.59040
$$ .99360 .11299 .00000 -16.50458
$$ -.11299 .99360 .00000 -3.32025
CHGTOOL record
The CHGTOOL record specifies the tool number to be changed into the spindle, same as LOADTL
record. This record is not processed by default, however, you can use Tool Change By, in the NC
Program panel, to process this record and retrieve cutting tool descriptions from a VERICUT
tool library.
Format:
CHGTOOL/n[,any text]
CIRCLE record
The CIRCLE record causes circular motion. The GOTO point preceding the CIRCLE record defines
the start of the circular motion. The GOTO following the CIRCLE defines the circular motion end.
Helical motion is generated when the end point measured along the tool axis differs from the
start point. This record is processed when Process Circles, on the APT Settings window: Motion
tab, is active.
Formats:
CIRCLE/x,y,z,i,j,k,r[,n,n,n,n] - where "x,y,z" defines the circle center point, "i,j,k" is the axis
orientation. "r" is the circle radius, but is not used since the radius is computed from the start,
end and center points. The vector defines the positive Z-axis of counter-clockwise motion
following the right-hand rule. In the 11 parameter format, VERICUT only uses the first 7
parameters.
Examples:
CIRCLE/1,2,3,0,0,1,5 - CCW circle motion about point 1,2,3, radius of 5
CIRCLE/1,2,3,0,0,-1,5 - as above, except CW arc motion
1680
VERICUT Help
CLEARP record
The CLEARP record defines a clearance plane used by subsequent RETRCT records. See also:
Default CLEARP on the APT Settings window: Motion tab.
Formats:
CLEARP/OFF
CLEARP/value
CLEARP/XYPLAN(YZPLAN or ZXPLAN),value - establish a clearance plane parallel to the part
coordinate XY, YZ, or ZX plane, respectively at "value" distance from the part coordinate system
origin. Only one plane may be active at one time. If no plane option is specified, XYPLAN is
assumed.
CLEARP/PERPTO,value - establishes a clearance plane perpendicular to the tool axis at "value"
distance from the part coordinate system origin. Clearance plane distance is measured in the
direction of the tool axis. Changing the tool axis vector changes the clearance plane.
CLRPLN record
The CLRPLN record defines a clearance plane, the same as the CLEARP record.
CLRSRF record
The CLRSRF record defines a clearance plane, the same as the CLEARP record.
CNTRL record
The CNTRL record defines a control point for use with a NURBS record.
Formats:
CNTRL/x,y,z[,i,j,k][,WEIGHT,w] - where "x,y,x" are the control points (or poles) for tool position,
optional "i,j,k" values control the tool axis, and optional "w" specifies the weights.
1681
VERICUT Help
CONT record
The CONT record is a GOTO continuation record, similar to the GOTO record.
Formats:
CONT/x,y,z
x,y,z
:
CONT/x,y,z,i,j,k
x,y,z,i,j,k
:
COOLNT record
The COOLNT record controls coolant usage. Text following the slash is displayed in the Status
window as the current coolant condition.
Formats:
COOLNT/any text
COOLNT/ON[,any text]
COOLNT/OFF
CSYS record
The CSYS record specifies a Pro/Manufacturing-style twelve parameter tool path
transformation matrix. VERICUT processes this record when conditions are suitable. A more
detailed explanation follows. The "$$->FEATNO" record resets back to the identity matrix, and
"$$->END" ends TRANS/ROTATE/CSYS actions.
Example:
$$-> CSYS / 1.0000000000, 0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, $
0.0000000000, 1.0000000000, 0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, $
0.0000000000, 0.0000000000, 1.0000000000, 0.0000000000
ProManufacturing APT has combinations of options that determine how ROTATE, TRANS, and
CSYS are applied. For VERICUT to determine how to apply these transformations, all records are
processed concurrently. The table below describes cases where ROTATE, TRANS, and CSYS are
processed. VERICUT ignores these records for cases that are not described in the table.
1682
VERICUT Help
"ROTATE" "TRANS" record "$$->TRANS" Action

record present present present
No No No Ignore CSYS and TRANS
No No Yes Apply TRANS
No Yes No Apply CSYS
Yes No Yes Add TRANS to CSYS, then apply CSYS
Yes Yes No Apply CSYS
CUTCOM record
The CUTCOM record supports cutter compensation for Pro/Manufacturing CL data. If VERICUT
encounters:
$$-> CUTCOM_GEOMETRY_TYPE / OUTPUT_ON_PROFILE
Then sees a CUTCOM/LEFT, or CUTCOM/RIGHT, it reads ahead to the CUTCOM/OFF. The profile
is then offset to the left or right by the cutter radius and VERICUT re-reads the APT, making
adjustments as required. The algorithm used is not intended to match any particular
postprocessor or controller.
If OptiPath is being used, the OUTPUT_ON_PROFILE gets replaced by OUTPUT_ON_CENTER in

the generated file, and the subsequent GOTOs refer to the cutter centerline.
CUTTER record
The CUTTER record describes the shape of the cutting tool.
This record is processed by default, however, you can use Tool Change By, in the NC Program
panel, to ignore these and process other records in the NC program file to retrieve cutting tool
descriptions from a VERICUT tool library.
Formats:
CUTTER/d,r,e,f,a,b,h
CUTTER/d,r,h
CUTTER/d,r (requires Min. Cutter Height > 0)
1683
VERICUT Help
CUTTER/d (requires Min. Cutter Height > 0)

CUTTER/XCUT(SHANK or HOLDER),...profile description
The table below and figures that follow describe how the values "d" through "h" are
interpreted, based on if the cutter is used for milling or turning.
Value Milling Cutter Turning Cutter
d diameter nose diameter
r corner radius not used
e dist. from tool centerline to corner radius not used

center
f dist. from tool tip to corner radius center not used
a base angle tool angle- degrees from spindle axis
b side angle side angle- degrees from tool centerline to

its side
h height height- measured from tool tip along its

centerline
Generic 7 Parameter Mill Cutter Definition: CUTTER/d,r,e,f,a,b,h
1684
VERICUT Help
Generic 4 Parameter Turn Cutter Definition: CUTTER/d,0,0,0,a,b,h (or CUTTER/d,,,,a,b,h)
CYCLE record
The CYCLE record describes a canned tool axis cycle motion (e.g. drilling, reaming, boring, etc.)
that is to be repeated at subsequent motion locations. The Drill Cycle feature, in the Motion
window, controls when and how these records are simulated.
Formats:
CYCLE/<parameters> - where "<parameters>" provide information about how the canned
motion is to be applied.
If canned cycle motions are not displayed as expected ensure that Drill Cycle is not set to
Ignore. If cycle simulation is still not correct, use Cycle Def on the APT Settings window: Cycles
tab to configure how VERICUT interprets canned cycle commands.
CYLNDR record
The CYLNDR record causes circular motion, same as CIRCLE record.
END record
Ends the tool path transformation matrix caused by a combination of CSYS, ROTATE and TRANS
records. VERICUT processes this record when conditions are suitable. See the "CSYS record" for
details.
FEATNO record
Resets the tool path transformation matrix caused by a combination of CSYS, ROTATE and
TRANS records back to the identity matrix. VERICUT processes this record when conditions are
suitable. See the "CSYS record" for details.
1685
VERICUT Help
FEDRAT record
This record sets the feed rate, or speed at which the tool moves. Text following the slash is
displayed in the Status window as the current feedrate condition.
By default, a zero feedrate is used until a FEDRAT record is processed. The active feed rate
value is used until another FEDRAT record is encountered. A RAPID motion overrides the active
FEDRAT for that motion only.
Formats:
FEDRAT/value[,IPM] also: IPR, MMPM, MMPR - where “value” represents feedrate in the
current mode. The feedrate value and mode, if specified, are displayed in the Status window
Feedrate field.
FROM record
This record establishes where the tool is starting from. There is typically one record of this type
per NC program file and it usually precedes any other motion record in the file. If a FROM
record is not encountered, then the first GOTO point location is assumed to be the "from"
position.
Formats:
FROM/x,y,z[,i,j,k] - where "x,y,z" is the starting point and "i,j,k" represents the starting tool axis
vector. If no ijk information is found, then a tool axis of 0,0,1 is assumed.
GODLTA record
The GODLTA designates incremental cutter movement relative to the current cutter location.
Formats:
GODLTA/x,y,z - specifies the incremental distance along each axis to move the tool from its
current location. For example, if the tool is currently at 4, 5, 6 in xyz when GODLTA/1,2,3 is
processed, the tool moves to x=5 (4+1), y=7 (5+2), and z=9 (6+3).
GODLTA/value - moves the cutter along the tool axis the specified amount.
If there is a transformation active, such as by a previous rotary motion command or a stock
transformation, then the GODLTA values are transformed accordingly.
GOFWD record
The GOFWD record designates forward cutter movement relative to the current cutter location.
VERICUT considers this record only when processing motion generated by GOFWD used with
CIRCLE or CYLNDR records. Numerous formats are recognized, many of which also consider the
INDIRV record to determine the "forward" motion direction.
1686
VERICUT Help
GOHOME record
The GOHOME record specifies that the cutter return to the home position. The home position is
assumed to be the location specified by the last FROM record processed. If a FROM record has
not been processed, then 0, 0, 0 is used.
Formats:
GOHOME - move all axes to the home position. The GOHOME Motion feature, on the APT
Settings window: Motion tab, controls if the cutter is moved in a straight line, or is retracted
prior to going home.
GOHOME/XAXIS(YAXIS or ZAXIS) - treated as GOTO statements with the specified AXIS element
set to the FROM value for that axis. The other two elements are set to the current tool path
position values.
GOTO record
Designates a position where the tool is moved to.
Formats:
GOTO/x,y,z[,i,j,k] - where "x,y,z" represent the ending location of the tool motion and optional
"i,j,k" values control the tool axis in multi-axis movements. "0,0,1" tool axis orientation is
assumed. "GOTO/" text is optional after the first GOTO motion,
for example:
GOTO/x,y,z[,i,j,k]
x,y,z[,i,j,k]
:
HEAD record
Found in NC programs for mill-turn and 4-axis lathe machines, the "HEAD" record specifies
which machining head is in use.
Formats:
HEAD/1- head 1 active
HEAD/2- head 2 active
HEAD/BOTH- head 1 active
HEAD/OFF- head 1 active
1687
VERICUT Help
When head 2 is active the tool is changed via a "LOADTL" or "TURRET" record, VERICUT adds
the characters "2_" to the beginning of the tool ID specified by the LOADTL/TURRET record to
enable retrieving tools defined for use by head 2.
Example 1:
HEAD/1
TURRET/1
Looks for ID "1" in the Tool Library (interpreted as tool 1 for use by head 1).
Example 2:
HEAD/2
TURRET/1
Looks for ID "2_1" in the Tool Library (interpreted as tool 1 for use by head 2).
INDIRV record
Use the INDIRV record to specify vector coefficients describing the "forward" motion direction.
VERICUT considers this record only when processing motion generated by a GOFWD record
used with CIRCLE or CYLNDR records.
Format:
INDIRV/i,j,k
KNOT record
The KNOT record defines a knot parameter for use with a NURBS record.
Format:
KNOT/t1,...,t(n-p+2) - where "t1" - "t(n-p+2)" are the knot parameters.
LOAD/TOOL record
The LOAD/TOOL record specifies the tool number to be changed into the spindle, same as
LOADTL record. This record is not processed by default, however, you can use Tool Change By,
in the NC Program panel, to process this record and retrieve cutting tool descriptions from a
VERICUT tool library.
Format:
LOAD/TOOL,n[,any text]
1688
VERICUT Help
See also HEAD record for information about how the Pro/MFG APT "HEAD" record affects how
this record is used to retrieve tool from a VERICUT tool library.
LOAD/WIRE record
For wire EDM machining- causes the wire to be loaded-sets cutting mode in VERICUT for wire
EDM machining. See also UNLOAD/WIRE record.
LOADTL record
The LOADTL record specifies the tool number, or pocket number, of the tool to be loaded into
the spindle. Optionally, this record may also specify tool length or other aspects about the tool;
however, VERICUT ignores all parameters following the tool number.
This record is not processed by default, however, you can use Tool Change By, in the NC
Program panel, to process this record and retrieve cutting tool descriptions from a VERICUT
tool library.
Format:
LOADTL/n[,any text] - where "n" is the index number of the tool (number or alpha-numeric).
Leading zeros in the tool ID are also ignored, for example "LOADTL/01" is interpreted as
"LOADTL/1". Any text following the "/" or number data after tool ID is ignored, for example
"LOADTL/2,LENGTH,6.500" is interpreted as "LOADTL/2".
this record is used to retrieve tools from a VERICUT tool library.
MODE record
Identifies the machining to be performed: mill or turn.
Formats:
MODE/MILL(TURN)
MOVARC record
The MOVARC record causes circular motion, the same as the CIRCLE record.
MSYS record
The MSYS record specifies an NX-style nine parameter tool path transformation matrix.
VERICUT processes this record when Process Matrix, on the APT Settings window: Motion tab,
is active.
1689
VERICUT Help
MULTAX record
The MULTAX record specifies that subsequent GOTO motions are multi-axis motions. The multi-
axis condition is modal. When multi-axis mode is on it remains on until another MULTAX record
turns it off.
Formats:
MULTAX/ON
MULTAX/OFF
NURBS record
The NURBS record defines a NURBS B-spline motion command. NURBS motion commands also
utilize the CNTRL record and KNOT record as part of the B-spline definition.
Format:
NURBS/[p]- where "p" indicates the B-spline order. The "NURBS" record typically spans multiple
lines and includes a number of other record types, such as "KNOT", "CNTRL", etc.
Example:
NURBS/
KNOT/1.0000000
CNTRL/61.2424,93.2577,-31.6260
:
CNTRL/59.8775,93.2224,-31.6263
PPRINT record (general purpose)

Comment record that typically has no affect on tool motion. "PPRINT" resides in columns 1-6.
Text following "PPRINT" is typically ignored by VERICUT; however, some PPRINT records can
perform VERICUT actions.
PPRINT/ATP CBOX record
The PPRINT/ATP record defines a stock block via min/max corner points. This record is
processed by VERICUT when a stock model is loaded and the model is not yet cut. A new stock
block is defined and fit into all displayed views.
Format:
PPRINT/ATP CBOX xmin,ymin,zmin,xmax,ymax,zmax
Example:
PPRINT/ATP CBOX -1,-2,-1,5,7,2 -defines a 6 x 9 x 3 block positioned X= -1, Y= -2, Z= -1
1690
VERICUT Help
PPRINT TOOL AXIS record

The PPRINT TOOL AXIS record specifies that a new tool axis orientation is to be applied to
subsequent tool positions. The specified tool axis is modal and remains in effect until another
tool axis orientation is specified.
Example:
PPRINT TOOL AXIS= XAX=-1.0000 YAX=.0000 ZAX=.0000
PPRINT/VERICUT record
(or PPRINTVERICUT) Sets a VERICUT user value, or performs a VERICUT command or action.
PPRINT/VERICUT text must be between columns 1-72. PPRINT data can span multiple PPRINT
records via ending each PPRINT to be continued in a dollar sign. The next line must be a
PPRINT/VERICUT record with the same keyword as the previous line. Words in PPRINT data
cannot be split by the dollar sign. Examples are provided in the sections that follow.
RAPID record
The RAPID record overrides the current feed rate and causes a machine tool to move as fast as
possible. When the RAPID record is processed by VERICUT, the motion following the RAPID
record moves the tool using the Fast Feed setting in the Motion window.
For example, assume the file below is processed while Fast Feed=100.
RAPID
GOTO/1,2,3
FEDRAT/20
GOTO/2,3,4
RAPID
GOTO/3,4,5
GOTO/4,5,6
The motions are simulated by VERICUT as follows:
feedrate from the current tool location to 1,2,3: 100
feedrate from 1,2,3 to 2,3,4: 20
In both examples below, motion from 1, 2, 3 to 4, 5, 6 uses a feed rate of "20":
1691
VERICUT Help
Example 1:
FROM/1,2,3
RAPID
FEDRAT/20
GOTO/4,5,6
In example 1, a FEDRAT record immediately follows the RAPID record before a motion is
encountered. Under this condition, the FEDRAT value overrides a RAPID record.
Example 2:
RAPID
FROM/1,2,3
FEDRAT/20
GOTO/4,5,6
In example 2, a FROM record is not considered to be a motion record. Therefore, the RAPID
record has no affect.
RETRCT record
The RETRACT record retracts the cutter along the tool axis to a specified clearance plane, or by
a specified amount.
Formats:
RETRCT- retract the tool along the tool axis until it reaches the clearance plane defined by the
previous CLEARP or CLRSRF record
RETRCT/value- retract along the tool axis the specified amount
RETRCT/ON- retract to the Z level prior to a cycle record.
Example:
GOTO/1,2,3
RETRCT/ON
CYCLE/DRILL,1.0,3,IPM,.1 $$ Retracts to Z=3 between cycle positions.
ROTABL record
The ROTABL record specifies a table rotation. Unless otherwise specified, rotation about the Y-
axis is assumed. This record is processed when the ROTABL setting, on the APT Settings
window: Rotary tab is active. Otherwise, ROTABL is ignored.
1692
VERICUT Help
Formats:
ROTABL/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),value
ROTABL/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),ATANGL,value
ROTABL/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),INCR,value
ROTABL/ATANGL,value
ROTABL/INCR,value
ROTATE record
Similar to the ROTABL record, this record specifies a table rotation. ROTATE is handled
differently, depending on the active setting of NC Program Type, in the NC Program panel.
1. Non-ProManufacturing NC program types - when the ROTATE setting, on the APT Settings
window: Rotary tab, is active the rotary action is simulated by VERICUT. Otherwise,
ROTATE is ignored.
2. Pro/MFG APT NC program types- ROTATE is considered along with TRAN and CSYS when
determining if the tool path is to be transformed. See "CSYS record" for details. The "$$-
>FEATNO" record resets back to the identity matrix, and "$$->END" ends
TRANS/ROTATE/CSYS actions.
Formats:
ROTATE/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),value
ROTATE/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),ATANGL,value
ROTATE/AAXIS(BAXIS or CAXIS),INCR,value
ROTATE/ATANGL,value
ROTATE/INCR,value
ROTHED record
The ROTHED record specifies a head rotation. This record is processed when the ROTHED
setting, on the APT Settings window: Rotary tab, is active. Otherwise, ROTHED is ignored.
Formats:
ROTHED/ATANGL,value
ROTHED/value
1693
VERICUT Help
SET/MODE record
This record specifies the machining to be performed: mill or turn.
Formats:
SET/MODE,MILL
SET/MODE,TURN
SPINDL record
The SPINDL record specifies spindle rotation speed (RPM); direction and gear ranges may also
be specified. Text following the slash is displayed in the Status window as the current spindle
condition.
Formats:
SPINDL
SPINDL/rpm[,any text]
SPINDL/[any text,]rpm
SPNDL record
Specifies spindle rotation speed (RPM), same as SPINDL record.
STOP record
The STOP record stops the NC machine at its current location. This record commonly indicates
an operator function follows, such as: changing the tool, changing the part-fixture setup, etc.
SURFACE record
The SURFACE record causes circular motion, the same as the CIRCLE record.
TLAXIS record
The TLAXIS record specifies a new tool axis orientation. The new orientation is modal and is
applied to following GOTO points that do not have I, J, K values. VERICUT processes this record
when NC Program Type, in the NC Program panel, is set to CATIA APT.
1694
VERICUT Help
Example:
TLAXIS/ .000000, 1.000000, .000000
TRANS record
The TRANS record specifies a three parameter tool path translation. VERICUT processes this
record when NC Program Type, in the NC Program panel, is set to Pro/MFG APT and conditions
are suitable. The presence of ROTATE and TRANS records affect when VERICUT processes a
TRANS record. See the "CSYS record" for details.
Format:
TRANS / dx, dy, dz
where "dx, dy, dz" are the distances in X, Y, and Z to translate the tool positions that follow. The
"$$->FEATNO" record resets back to the identity matrix, and "$$->END" ends
TRANS/ROTATE/CSYS actions.
TURRET record
Similar to the LOADTL record, this record often appears in NC programs for turning operations
to specify the tool number to be changed into location for cutting. This record is not processed
by default, however, you can use Tool Change By, in the NC Program panel, to process this
record and retrieve cutting tool descriptions from a VERICUT tool library.
The number following "TURRET" is often a composite of two numbers: a tool number and offset
number. However, VERICUT simply interprets the entire number as a tool number. For example,
while "TURRET/0101" may indicate tool 01 is used with offset 01), VERICUT interprets this to
mean tool 0101 (or 101) is to be used from the VERICUT tool library.
Formats:
TURRET/n[,any text]
TURRET/FACE,n[,any text]
this record is used to retrieve tools from a VERICUT tool library.
UNITS record
Sets the unit measurement system of the data in the NC program file: inches or millimeters.
Formats:
UNITS/INCHES
UNITS/MM
1695
VERICUT Help
UNLOAD/WIRE record
For wire EDM machining- causes the wire to be unloaded-sets non-cutting mode in VERICUT for
wire EDM machining. See also LOAD/WIRE record.
VECTOR record
Designates a position where the tool is moved to, same as GOTO record.
1696
VERICUT Help
Configuring for APT-CLS Cycle Simulation
By default, VERICUT simulates the motions of popular canned cycles, also known as "fixed tool
axis cycles", as described by the APT or CLS CYCLE record. If needed, VERICUT also enables you
to add more, and change, how existing cycles are interpreted. To do so, it must have access to
cycle definitions, which are retained in the Project file. The cycle definitions for one flavor of
APT are referred to as a cycle definition set, or more simply, a cycle set.
You can adjust the definitions of the distributed cycles, add definitions to the sets, or provide
different sets of your own using features located on the Project menu > Processing Options >
APT Settings: Cycles tab.
The three parts of a cycle definition

So what does a cycle definition look like? Let's examine an example from the default Project
files:
CYCLE/BORE,#fedto,#fedupm,MMPM,#rapto
MODALS:retract_mode=fedrat
USEWITH:VERICUT,CADRA,CV
A cycle definition can have three parts, the CYCLE statement, optional MODALS and USEWITH
lines. This example is a member of three sets, for VERICUT, CADRA and CV flavors of APT, but
more typically there would be just one flavor in the USEWITH line.
This document will explore each of the three parts of a cycle definition in detail.
Cycle template
A cycle template appears similar to the CYCLE record to simulate. Numeric values in the
statement that are relevant to the anticipated motion are replaced by mnemonics in the
template. The major and minor words can simply be reproduced. For example, the following
CYCLE record:
CYCLE/DRILL,40,200,MMPM,5
can be represented by the following cycle template:
CYCLE/DRILL,#fedto,#fedupm,MMPM,#rapto
Note that mnemonics all start with a "#" character to denote a numeric value. There are a
limited number of valid mnemonics, with predefined and rigid interpretations. A description of
each mnemonic is provided under the heading "Mnemonics for cycle templates" later in this
section.
1697
VERICUT Help
A cycle statement may contain numeric values which are not covered by any of the mnemonics,
and which do not affect simulated cycle motion, for example- dwell time. Such values can be
represented in the template by a "#" character without a mnemonic. Think of them as
placeholders for the values. For example:
CYCLE/REAM,60,5,1,1,5,200,10,ON
can be represented by:
CYCLE/REAM,#fedto,#rapto,#,#,#rtrcto,#fedupm,#,A
The placeholders enable VERICUT to extract numeric values that affect the motion, in this case
represented by #fedto, #rapto, #rtrcto and #fedupm, and ignore values that are not significant
for simulating cycle motions.
In the above example, note that the minor word "ON" is not replicated in the template of this
example. A similar ream CYCLE record could have the minor word "OFF". Rather than having
two templates that only differ by the last minor word, we can use a placeholder for a word and
cover the variations with a single template. "#" is a placeholder for a numeric value. You can
use "A" or any word as a placeholder for a minor word that is not significant for simulating cycle
motions.
But, there are two situations in which minor words must be replicated in the template.
1. If a minor word precedes the first numeric value, it must appear in the template explicitly.
So in the prior example, "REAM" is replicated.
2. If a minor word is paired with a mnemonic, it must appear in the template.
For example:
CYCLE/BORE,FEDTO,60,MMPM,200,RAPTO,5
should be represented by:
CYCLE/BORE,FEDTO,#fedto,MMPM,#fedupm,RAPTO,#rapto
because each minor word after "BORE" is paired with a corresponding mnemonic. This enables
VERICUT to process cycle statements with the same minor words in a different order, without
requiring extra templates. Thus:
CYCLE/BORE,FEDTO,60,RAPTO,5,MMPM,200
would be covered by the same template as the prior example. Usually word/value pairs are in
that order, but a feed rate and its units can be reversed. To phrase the rules for minor words
another way, it is safest to replicate all minor words in the cycle template unless there are
alternatives to a word. If there are alternatives and they precede all values, or are paired with a
mnemonic, then it is necessary to enumerate the alternatives in several templates.
1698
VERICUT Help
Minor word synomyms

Minor words for the units of feed rate are interchangeable, or "synonyms". Thus if you process
APT files with imperial units and other APT files with metric units, you do not need multiple
templates such as:
CYCLE/BORE,FEDTO,#fedto,IPM,#fedupm,RAPTO,#rapto
CYCLE/BORE,FEDTO,#fedto,MMPM,#fedupm,RAPTO,#rapto
Either of these templates will suffice for either unit.
Within cycle templates the following minor words are synonyms:
IPM — inches per minute
MMPM — millimeters per minute
FPM — feet per minute
IPR — inches per revolution
MMPR — millimeters per revolution
FPR — feet per revolution
TPI — threads per inch
TPMM — threads per millimeter
Adding a minus sign to a mnemonic

Normally mnemonics consist of the character "#" and a word. But there can be a "-" sign
between the "#" and the word if the corresponding value in a cycle statement is to be negated.
This will handle the case that some post-processors expect a positive fedto ("feed to") value,
while others expect a negative value for this action. By default, VERICUT assumes a positive
fedto value will move toward or into the workpiece. While the "-" sign can be applied to any
mnemonic, it is only likely to be used with fedto or fedlist.
Mnemonics for cycle templates

Following is an explanation of each mnemonic, in alphabetic order:
cskdia — Countersink diameter. Typically this mnemonic appears with another, tlangl and
perhaps a third, holdia. If no tool angle is provided, a value of 118 degrees is used. If a hole
diameter is provided then an initial rapid motion can be adjusted to place the tool partially
within the hole prior to cutting. It doesn't make much sense to have a fedto distance with a
countersink diameter. If one is provided, it will be ignored.
fedto — Feed depth from the cycle's datum (typically a GOTO point). Use "#fedto" if a positive
value implies motion into the material. Use "#-fedto" if a negative value implies motion into the
material.
1699
VERICUT Help
fedlist — A list of increasing feed depths. A single mnemonic of this type represents any
number of values in the cycle statement. For example if you have a statement like:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,10,20,25,MMPM,100
the template could be:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,#fedlist,MMPM,#fedupm
and it would handle statements with any number of depths between the minor words "DEPTH"
and "MMPM" (or one of its synonyms). Use "#fedlist" if a positive value implies motion into the
material. Use "#-fedlist" if a negative value implies motion into the material.
fedupm — Feed rate in units determined by the associated minor word in the cycle statement
(if any).
holdia — Hole diameter. Only meaningful if a cskdia is also present.
rapto — Rapid clearance distance above the cycle's datum. The tool moves at Rapid to this
clearance location prior to executing the cycle motion. If a retract distance (rtrcto) is not
provided, this value will also serve as the retract clearance distance.
rtrcto — Retract distance above the cycle's datum. If the cycle involves multiple retract
motions, such as a pecking operation, all the retract motions may or may not be to this height,
but the last one always will be.
step — An incremental depth by which each successive feed in a pecking operation will
increase. It is possible to have more than one step within a cycle statement if the increments
are not equal. For example:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,70,STEP,30,STEP,15,MMPM,100
would be handled as expected by:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,#fedto,STEP,#step,MMPM,#fedupm
In this example the first feed would be to 30mm, then 45mm and 60mm, and finally to 70mm.
It is not necessary to place "STEP" or "#step" in the template more than once, and any number
of "STEP,value" pairs could appear in the cycle statement.
steplist — A list of incremental depths for each successive feed. This differs from the prior
example in that the values are not separated by repetitive minor words. For example:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,70,STEP,20,15,10,MMPM,100
would be represented by:
CYCLE/DEEP,DEPTH,#fedto,STEP,#steplist,MMPM,#fedupm
In this case successive feeds would be to 20mm, 35mm, 45mm, 55mm, 65mm and 70mm.
steprap — Distance above the prior depth that the tool will move to before the next deeper
feed. If the cycle retracts completely between successive feeds, the tool moves at Rapid and in
the downward direction after each Retract. If the cycle only partially retracts between feeds,
then this motion is in the upward direction and may or may not be rapid.
1700
VERICUT Help
tlangl — The included angle of the tool tip for countersink operations. Only meaningful if a
cskdia is also present.
Modal specification
Each cycle definition can specify a number of modal values to control details of the cycle
motion. All modals have default values, and it is not necessary to define the settings of those
that take these default conditions. If all of a definition's modals take the defaults, the "MODAL"
line can be omitted.
Following is an explanation of each modal and its default value, in alphabetic order:
auto_mode — (default OFF) Controls whether the automatic retract plane should be used.
When set to "ON", any value corresponding to the rtrcto mnemonic will be ignored and the
final retract of the cycle will be to the automatic retract plane. Cycle statements may differ by
only "AUTO" as a minor word. Rather than requiring two similar cycle templates, VERICUT will
turn this modal "ON" if a cycle statement contains "AUTO". It is thus only necessary to include
this modal in the "MODAL" line of a cycle definition, if some other feature of the cycle
statement is the trigger.
cycle_op — (default ON) Controls whether cycle statements that match a definition are to be
expanded at all. An alternative to "cycle_op=OFF" would be to toss out the entire definition,
but then the VERICUT log would report unrecognized cycles. Use this modal if you wish emulate
some cycles but not others.
deep_retract — (default ON) Controls whether the tool should retract completely between
successive feeds. When turned "ON" the tool will retract to the height specified by the rtrcto
mnemonic (or rapto if there is no rtrcto) between feeds. If "deep_retract=OFF", then between
feeds the tool will retract incrementally by the distance corresponding to the steprap
mnemonic, or simply dwell if there is no such value. This modal has no meaning if there is only
one feed depth.
rapto — (default 0) Can be used to provide a "rapid to" distance when none is present in the
toolpath's CYCLE statement.
retract_mode — (default RAPID) Controls the feed rate used for all retract motions in the cycle.
With the default setting, all retracts will be rapid. Other options are "retract_mode=FEDRAT"
and "retract_mode=NONE". "FEDRAT" would be used when the retract motion should be at the
same speed as the feed, such as in a ream or tap cycle. "NONE" would be used to suppress
retract motion completely, as in a milling cycle.
rtrcto — (default 0) Can be used to provide a retract distance when none is present in the
toolpath's CYCLE statement.
thru_mode — (default OFF) Controls the feed rate of successive feeds. When this modal is
"ON", the first feed is at the feed rate, the second is rapid, the third is at the feed rate, etc. This
can be used when the tool is passing through several webs, and it can be moved quickly
through the air between the webs. This modal has no meaning if there is only one feed depth.
1701
VERICUT Help
Applicability (USEWITH)
The USEWITH line of a cycle definition can list the names of one or more flavors of APT. All of
the unique flavors present in a user file are presented in a choice box on the Project menu >
Processing Options > APT Settings: Cycles tab. When you select one of the flavors in the choice
box, VERICUT will only consider corresponding cycle definitions when processing your APT NC
programs.
If you add a new cycle set, for a different flavor of APT or a different post-processor, you can
give it any name you wish, provided the name does not contain spaces or other APT delimiter.
So your cycle definitions may each end with:
USEWITH:MYPOST
An alternative would be to delete all the cycle definitions in the project file and insert yours,
omitting the USEWITH line for each. Then the choice box would just offer "All", however, only
your definitions would be present.
Cycle definition sets

In alphabetic order, the sets of cycle definitions provided in the default project files simulate
the following flavors of APT-CLS canned cycles:
All
ACL
CADRA
CATIA
CONVERTED — generated by VERICUT via reverse post-processing from G-Code
CV — ComputerVision
GEN4AX — a post used with NCL
NCL — combines GEN4AX and POSTWORKS sets
POSTWORKS — a post used with NCL
PTC — Pro/Manufacturing
NX — NX CLS
VERICUT
1702
VERICUT Help
Settings window, Auto Save tab

The features on the Settings window, Auto Save tab enable you to configure VERICUT to
automatically save In Process files, View Capture image files (such as PostSript, EPSF, TIFF, JPEG
or PNG files), or VERICUT Solid (.vct) files. Saving is based on user specified events or when
VERICUT detects errors during NC program processing. Auto-saving is especially useful to save
data during batch processing.
TIP: You can also access the Settings window, Auto Save tab by selecting File menu >
AutoSave.
1703
VERICUT Help
By default, unique file names are maintained based on the following naming convention:
"Basefilename + seq# + setup# + file# + line# + tool#"
For example: test1S1F1L350T3.vct
test = basefilename
1704
VERICUT Help
1 = sequence #1 (First file automatically saved. The next file automatically saved will be seq.
2, and so on)
S1 = setup #1
F1 = File (NC program) #1 for this setup.
L350 = Line #350 caused file to be saved.
T3 = Tool #3 was in use when file was automatically saved.
When multiple stock components are defined, the naming convention is altered slightly to
include an "M" identifier for .vct files saved after the first one. For example, when two stock
components were defined, the following models were automatically saved at end of file:
test1S1F1L350T3.vct <= NO "M" identifier for the first model automatically saved for the
first cut stock.
test2S1M1F1L350T3.vct <= "M1" added for the second model automatically saved for the
second cut stock
You also have the option of turning off one, or more of the individual fields, described above,
for the automatically generated output filenames.
If you want to turn off specific fields, you can do so by specifying which fields you want included
in the name, by using the following format when you specify the “base file name” for the file to
be auto-saved:
name[IMSFLT].ext
I: Turns on the unique Index value
M: Turns on the Model number (This option is only applicable for auto-saving VERICUT
Solid files when there are multiple stock components)
S: Turns on the Setup number
F: Turns on the File number
L: Turns on the Line number
T: Turns on the Tool number
NOTE: Using name[IMSFLT].ext (all options) is identical to the default naming convention with
multiple stock components.
The following rules apply when customizing the output file name:
 The field descriptions described for the output file name still apply.
 The letters only specify which fields to include in the output file name.
 The order of the fields is fixed and must not be changed.
 The letters can be lower or upper case.
 The square brackets must come after the name and before the file extension.
 The brackets and file extension are optional.
The above feature applies to:

Auto Save In Process File
Auto Error In Process File
1705
VERICUT Help
Auto Save View Capture File

Auto Error View Capture File
Auto Save VERICUT Solid File
Auto Error VERICUT Solid File
The SaveVcSolid macro
EXAMPLES:
File Name Input File Name Output

name.vct name1S1F1L15T43.vct
name[] name.vct
name[T] nameT43.vct
name[IT].vct name1T43.vct
In Process
The features in the In Process section of the Auto Save tab enable you to control the automatic
saving of In Process files, or "IP files".
Auto Save options — These options control when VERICUT automatically saves IP files. Click on
the box to the left of the event to toggle On/Off. Each selected event causes a file to be saved
when that event occurs.
Options:
Cutter Change — Save an IP file when the cutter has been changed.
Text — Save an IP file when a specified text string is encountered in the NC program. Enter
the text string in the Text text field.
# of Cuts — Save an IP file after a specified number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts in the
# of Cuts text field.
File End — Save file at the end of NC program processing. Choose either End of each File
(end of each NC program file), or End of each Setup, or End (end of the program) from the
pull-down list.
In Process File — Use to specify the base name for IP files saved. Enter the \path\filename
in the In Process File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file
selection window to specify the \path\filename. The naming convention used for saved IP
files is as described above under AutoSave window.
1706
VERICUT Help
Auto Error options

Use these options to specify whether or not VERICUT automatically saves VERICUT Solid files
when an error is detected.
Options:
On — When toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT automatically saves an IP file for every error
that is detected.
Save Until — When active (checked), this feature enables you to specify the maximum
number of IP files that you want automatically saved due to errors during a specified event.
The Save Until feature is only available when the Auto Error On feature is toggled "on"
(checked). When the Save Until feature is toggled "on" (checked), the associated fields
become available.
Enter the maximum number of IP files that you want created in the text field or use the
"up"/"down" arrows to increase or decrease the number shown in the text field to the
desired number.
Select the event that the number specified above is to apply to from the pull-down list.
Choose from the following events:
Beginning — VERICUT will output the specified number of IP files for the entire
simulation.
Start of Setup — VERICUT will output the specified number of IP files for each setup.
Start of File — VERICUT will output the specified number of IP files for each NC program
file.
Tool Change — VERICUT will output the specified number of IP files for each tool
change.
In Process File — Use to specify the base name for IP files saved. Enter the \path\filename in
the In Process File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file
selection window to specify the \path\filename. The naming convention used for saved IP files
is as described above under AutoSave window.
View Capture
The features on the View Capture tab enable you to control the automatic saving of View
Capture image files (PostSript, EPSF, TIFF, JPEG or PNG).
Print Command — When toggled "Off", sends graphical data to the specified View Capture
image file. When toggled "On", executes the print command that sends raw graphical image
data to the printer.
By default, the "prshade" command executes the "prshade" command file containing operating
system commands typically used to print images on your computer. If printing fails, correct the
1707
VERICUT Help
entry in the Print Command field, or use an ASCII text editor (NOT a word processor) to edit the
"prshade" command file to have the proper print command for your computer/printer.
Properties — Opens the View Capture window to access settings for file formatting and
printing.
Auto Save options

These options control when VERICUT automatically saves View Capture image files. Click on the
box to the left of the event to toggle On/Off. Each selected event causes a file to be saved when
that event occurs.
Options:
Cutter Change — Save a View Capture image file when the cutter has been changed. This
feature can also be used to capture images of electrodes used for Die Sinking Simulation
when they are changed during the burn process.
Text — Save a View Capture image file when a specified text string is encountered in the NC
program. Enter the text string in the Text text field.
# of Cuts — Save a View Capture Image file after a specified number of cuts. Enter the
number of cuts in the # of Cuts text field.
File End — Save a View Capture image file at the end of NC program processing. Choose
either End of each File (end of each NC program file), or End of each Setup, or End (end of
the program) from the pull-down list.
View Capture File — Use to specify the base name for View Capture image files saved as a
result of Auto Save options described above, when the Print Command checkbox is toggled
"Off". Enter the \path\file name in the View Capture File text field or click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window to specify the \path\file name.
The naming convention used for saved View Capture image files is as described above under
AutoSave window.
Auto Error options

These options control when VERICUT automatically saves View Capture image files due to
errors.
Options:
On — When toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT automatically saves a View Capture image file
for every error that is detected.
number of View Capture image files that you want automatically saved due to errors during
a specified event.
1708
VERICUT Help
become available.
Enter the maximum number of View Capture image files that you want created in the text
field or use the "up"/"down" arrows to increase or decrease the number shown in the text
field to the desired number.
Beginning — VERICUT will output the specified number of View Capture image files for
the entire simulation.
Start of Setup — VERICUT will output the specified number of View Capture image files
for each setup.
Start of File — VERICUT will output the specified number of View Capture image files for
each NC program file.
Tool Change — VERICUT will output the specified number of View Capture image files
for each tool change.
View Capture File — Use to specify the base name for View Capture image files
automatically saved as a result of errors detected when AutoError On is toggled "On", and
the Print Command checkbox is toggled "Off". Enter the \path\file name in the View
Capture File text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection
window to specify the \path\file name. The naming convention used for saved View Capture
image files is as described above under AutoSave window.
VERICUT Solid
The features in the VERICUT Solid section of the Auto Save tab enable you to control the
automatic saving of VERICUT Solid (vct.) files.
Auto Save options
Use these options to specify the events when VERICUT should automatically save VERICUT Solid
files. Click on the box to the left of the event to toggle On/Off. Each selected event causes a file
to be saved when that event occurs.
Options:
Cutter Change — Save a VERICUT Solid file when the cutter has been changed.
Text — Save a VERICUT Solid file when a specified text string is encountered in the NC
program. Enter the text string in the Text text field.
# of Cuts — Save a VERICUT Solid file after a specified number of cuts. Enter the number of
cuts in the # of Cuts text field.
1709
VERICUT Help
File End — Save a VERICUT Solid file at the end of tool path processing. Choose either End
of each File (end of each NC program file), or End of each Setup, or End (end of the
program) from the pull-down list.
VERICUT Solid File — Use to specify the base name for VERICUT Solid files saved due to
Auto Save options. Enter the \path\file name in the VERICUT Solid File text field or click on
the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window to specify the file. The
naming convention used for saved VERICUT Solid files is as described above under AutoSave
window.
Auto Error options

Use these options to specify whether or not VERICUT automatically saves VERICUT Solid files
when an error is detected.
Options:
On — When toggled "on" (checked), VERICUT automatically saves a VERICUT Solid file for
every error that is detected.
number of VERICUT Solid files that you want automatically saved due to errors during a
specified event.
become available.
Enter the maximum number of VERICUT Solid files that you want created in the text field or
use the "up"/"down" arrows to increase or decrease the number shown in the text field to
the desired number.
Beginning — VERICUT will output the specified number of VERICUT Solid files for the
entire simulation.
Start of Setup — VERICUT will output the specified number of VERICUT Solid files for
each setup.
Start of File — VERICUT will output the specified number of VERICUT Solid files for each
NC program file.
Tool Change — VERICUT will output the specified number of VERICUT Solid files for each
tool change.
VERICUT Solid File — Use to specify the base name for VERICUT Solid files saved when
AutoError is active. Enter the \path\file name in the VERICUT Solid File text field or click on
the (Browse) icon and use the Save File file selection window to specify the file. The
1710
VERICUT Help
naming convention used for saved VERICUT Solid files is as described above under AutoSave
window.
Report
The features in the Report section of the Auto Save tab enable you to automatically save a
VERICUT report at the end of processing, automatically view the report at the end of the
simulation, and specify the format for the report.
Create report at the end — When toggled on (checked), VERICUT will automatically create a
VERICUT report at the end of processing.
View report at the end — When toggled on (checked), VERICUT will automatically display the
VERICUT report created at the end of processing so that you can view it.
Format — Use this feature to specify the format that you want VERICUT to use for the report.
Choose one of the following formats.
Text — Creates and displays the VERICUT Report in Text format.
HTML — Creates and displays the VERICUT Report window in HTML format.
PDF — Creates and displays the VERICUT Report in PDF format.
File — Enter the \path\filename where you want the VERICUT report created, or use the
(Browse) icon to display the Save VERICUT Report file selection window and use it to specify the
\path\filename.
For more information on creating and using custom report templates, see Report Template
window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help.
To Settings window
1711
VERICUT Help
Setup
Current Setup
Location:
Project menu > Setup > Current Setup
The Current Setup option displays a pull-right menu showing a list of available Setups. A check
mark is displayed next to the current setup (See Setup 3 in the picture below). Picking a setup in
the list makes it the current one. Inactive setups are displayed in red text (See Setup 2 in the
picture below).
1712
VERICUT Help
Add New Setup
Location:
Project menu > Setup > Add New Setup
The Add New Setup option enables you to append a new setup after the current setup. All
settings from the current setup are copied to the new setup. Once the new setup is added, it
becomes the current setup.
Example:
Before using Add New

Setup, Setup 2 is the
“current” setup.
After using Add Current

Setup, Setup 3 is added
and becomes the
“current” Setup.
1713
VERICUT Help
Delete Current Setup
Location:
Project menu > Setup > Delete Current Setup
The Delete Current Setup option enables you to delete the current setup and make the next
setup in the list the current setup (Example 1). If the setup at the end of the list is deleted, then
the previous setup becomes the current setup (Example 2). There must always be at least one
setup in a project. Therefore the last remaining setup cannot be deleted.
Example 1:
Before using Delete

Current Setup, Setup: 2 is
the "current" setup.
1714
VERICUT Help
After using Delete Current

Setup, Setup:2 is deleted
and Setup:3 (the next in
the list) becomes the
"current setup.
Example 2:
Before using Delete

Current Setup, Setup: 4
(the last in the list) is the
"current" setup.
1715
VERICUT Help
After using Delete Current

Setup, Setup:4 is deleted
and Setup:3 (the previous
in the list) becomes the
"current setup.
1716
VERICUT Help
Import Setup (Import Setup window)
Location:
Project menu > Setup > Delete Current Setup
The Import Setup option opens the Import Setup window which has features that enable you
to copy a setup from either a pre-V6.0 user file or from a V6.0 (and later) project file and
append it after the current setup. See Import Setup window in the Project Tree section of
VERICUT Help and VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
1717
VERICUT Help
Stock
Load Stocks
Location:
Project menu > Stock > Load Stocks
Toolbar short cut:
After cutting, selecting the Load Stocks option causes VERICUT to load new stock models for
Stock components having models defined, but a cut stock model does not exist. This capability
is used when simulating a series of parts being machined through multiple machining stages.
This type of manufacturing is often referred to as "staged machining".
In general, the following actions take place in staged machining:

1. Simulate the first stage cutting operation. (Creates a "Cut Stock" workpiece that appears
as in the Component Tree window)
2. Move (e.g. cut and paste) the cut stock to a different Stock component defined to
represent the next cutting stage.
3. Select Load Stocks to load a new uncut stock model in the first cutting stage.
4. Continue cutting-typically cutting the first and second stages, but may cut all stages
even though workpieces have not yet been placed in subsequent cutting stages.
5. Repeat actions as required to cut a workpiece through all cutting stages required to
complete the final part configuration.
1718
VERICUT Help
Delete Detached Stock (Delete Detached Stock window)
VERICUT Users:
Location:
Project menu > Stock > Delete Detached Stock
Toolbar short cut:
The Delete Detached Stock option opens the Delete Detached Stock window enabling you to
delete or keep pieces of material. This feature is typically used to delete pieces of excess stock
that have been cut free from the workpiece. However, pieces of other models can also be
deleted.
Items are selected for Delete/Keep in the Workpiece View. Any number of items can be
selected. Selected items are immediately highlighted with the Error color. Once you click Delete
(or Keep) the items are removed from all views. However, the selected items are not actually
deleted until you click OK.
NOTE: Once model pieces are deleted, model pieces cannot be restored.
that the Delete Detached Stock window is the window that picks in the VERICUT graphics area
are to be applied to. When toggled “on”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick Highlight Color
specified in the File menu > Preferences window.
1719
VERICUT Help
Update While Simulating — When toggled "On", VERICUT checks during the simulation for
detached material based on the stock's relationship to all parent fixture models. The Stock must
be a Child of a Fixture component. See the picture below.
If the detached stock does not intersect, or is not tangent to, a parent fixture model, then the
piece is considered "unattached" and is automatically deleted. This logic applies to both milling
and turning operations.
For turning mode (when the stock is spinning), VERICUT checks at the end of each block. For
milling mode (when the tool is spinning), VERICUT checks at each tool change, at the end of
each file, whenever VERICUT is stopped (except for "single step"), at Clamp/Unclamp events,
and whenever the CheckForLooseMaterial macro is called. See the example in the next section.
Tab Removal — Use this feature to remove tabs left on the machined part (used for holding the
part during the machining process) from a VERICUT cut model. VERICUT will project the cutter
used to cut the selected machined surface, through the bottom of the part, removing the tab
area. More than one position on the machined surface may need to be selected to remove the
entire tab area.
Before Using Tab Removal After Using Tab Removal
OK — Use this feature to permanently delete the items selected for Delete/Keep, or activate
Update while Simulating and close the Delete Material window.
1720
VERICUT Help
Delete — After selecting the items to be deleted (they will be highlighted), click Delete to
remove selected items from all views. Click OK, described above, to permanently delete the
items.
You can also use Delete to delete the un-displayed portion of a sectioned view. Without
selecting any items, click on Delete. You will be prompted with the message "The cut stock is
sectioned. Delete the sectioned (invisible) material?" Yes/No". A "Yes" response permanently
deletes all un-displayed (invisible) sectioned material. A "No" response does not. Using the
Keep in this manner will produce the same results.
Keep — After selecting the items to keep (they will be highlighted), click Keep to remove all un-
selected items (not highlighted) from all views. Click OK, described above, to permanently
delete the items.
Unselect — Use this feature any time while selecting items for Delete/Keep to un-select all
selected items (they will no longer be highlighted). This feature becomes inactive once you click
on Delete/Keep.
Cancel — Use to un-select all items, cancel any Delete/Keep action, and close the Delete
Material window.
1721
VERICUT Help
Delete Detached Stock - Update While Simulating Example
Update While Simulating Toggled "Off":

Notice that when Update While Simulating is toggled "Off", the pieces of excess stock that
have been cut free from the workpiece remain displayed, as shown in the pictures below.
1722
VERICUT Help
Update While Simulating Toggled "On":

Notice that when Update While Simulating is toggled "On", most of the pieces of excess stock
that have been cut free from the workpiece have been automatically deleted, as shown in the
picture below. The reason that they were not all automatically deleted is because of slight
differences in the holding fixtures. In setups 2 and 3, the remaining excess stock pieces are at
least partially in contact with the fixture so they were not automatically deleted.
1723
VERICUT Help
Advanced Settings (Advanced G-Code Settings window)

Location:
Project menu > G-Code Advanced Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The Advanced Settings option opens the Settings window: G-Code Advanced tab which has
features that enable you to configure the settings required for processing G-Code NC program
files.
See Settings window, G-Code Advanced tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
1724
VERICUT Help
Variables (Variables window)

Location:
Project menu > Variables
Toolbar short cut:
The Variables option opens the Variables window which has features that enable you to
initialize, maintain, and monitor G-Code variables. See Variables window in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help and VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help for complete information.
1725
VERICUT Help
G-Code Outputs
Location:
Project menu > G-Code Outputs
Toolbar short cut:
The G-Code Outputs option opens the Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab which has
features that enable you to configure the settings required to support the processing of G-Code
NC program files.
See Settings window, G-Code Outputs tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
1726
VERICUT Help
APT Settings
Location:
Project menu > APT Settings
Project menu > Settings window: APT Settings tab
Project Tree > Setup Branch Right Mouse Shortcut Menu > APT Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The APT Settings option opens the Settings window, APT Settings tab enabling you to configure
the settings required to support the processing of APT-CLS NC program files.
See Settings window, APT Settings tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
1727
VERICUT Help
Output Files
Location:
Project menu > Output Files
Toolbar short cut:
The Output Files option opens the Settings Window, Output Files tab enabling you to setup,
create, or view VERICUT's many output files.
See Settings window, Output Files tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help for
1728
VERICUT Help
Report
Report Template > Edit (Report Template window)

Location:
Project menu > Report > Report Template > Edit
The Report Template > Edit option opens the Report Template window enabling you to define
a new, or modify an existing, report template. See Report Template window in the Project Tree
1729
VERICUT Help
User-Defined Tag Values (User-Defined Tags window)

Location:
Project menu > Report > User-Defined Tag Values
The User-Defined Tag Values option opens the User-Defined Tags window enabling you to
assign job specific information to "generic" User-Defined Tags prior to creating a VERICUT
report. See User-Defined Tag Values window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete
information.
1730
VERICUT Help
Setup Plan
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The Setup Plan features enable you to create a setup plan image, including notes and
dimensions, which can be included in a VERICUT report. See Setup Plan in the Project Tree
1731
VERICUT Help
MDI (MDI window)

Location:
Project menu > MDI
Toolbar short cut:
The MDI option opens the MDI window which has features that enable you to manually enter
and process blocks of G-Code data. The MDI or "Manual Data Input" function provides a quick
and easy way of verifying that the machine/control combination responds to G-Code data
commands as expected. See MDI window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation for complete information.
1732
VERICUT Help
Active Coordinate System

Location:
Project menu > Active Coordinate System
The Active Coordinate System option displays a pull-down list of available coordinate systems
enabling you to select the “active” CSYS. See Active Coordinate System in the Project Tree
1733
VERICUT Help
Configuration Menu
1734
VERICUT Help
Machine
Open
Location:
Configuration menu > Machine > Open
Project Tree > Machine branch > Right mouse button menu > Open
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Open Machine icon
Toolbar short cut:
The Open option opens the Open Machine window which has features that enable you to open
(load) a Machine file. Machine files contain data that describes NC machine construction,
kinematics, and other properties. See Open Machine window in the Project Tree section of
VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
1735
VERICUT Help
Save
Location:
Configuration menu > Machine > Save
Project Tree > Machine branch > Right mouse button menu > Save
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Save Machine icon
Toolbar short cut:
Click with the right mouse button on the icon to toggle between (Save Machine) and
(Save Machine As) modes.
The Save option saves (updates) an existing Machine file (ref. Machine File in the Getting
Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help) with the current NC machine settings. VERICUT will save the machine
file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its present folder. Otherwise, the Save
Machine File window will display enabling you to specify a location to save where you have
write permissions.
1736
VERICUT Help
Save As
Location:
Configuration menu > Machine > Save As
Project Tree > Machine branch > Right mouse button menu > Save As
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Save Machine As icon
Toolbar short cut:

The Save As option opens the Save Machine File window enabling you to save a machine file
(ref. Machine File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). Machine files contain data that
describes NC machine construction, kinematics, and other properties. See Save Machine File
window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
1737
VERICUT Help
New
Location:
Configuration menu > Machine > New
Project Tree > Machine branch > Right mouse button menu > New
The New feature enables you to remove all Machine components that are defined in the
machine file. VERICUT will keep all components defined in the project file and attach them to
the "Base" component.
When accessed from the Project Tree, this feature is only displayed in the right mouse button
menu when the Show Machine Components is toggled "On". See The Project Tree topic, in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Project Tree before using "New"
1738
VERICUT Help
Project Tree after using "New"
1739
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings (Machine Settings window)

Location:
Configuration menu > Machine Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The Machine Settings option opens the Machine Settings window enabling you to configure
settings for an NC machine, such as: collision checking, travel limits, axis priority (for rapid
motion), location tables, and when machine motions are simulated.
Machine Simulation On — When toggled "On", simulates machine tool motions when a 3-D
machine is displayed in a machine view.
Shortcut: You can quickly toggle Machine Simulation On, "On" or "Off" by clicking on the No
Machine Simulation icon in the toolbar.
Floor/Wall Orient Up — Use to specify which way is "up" (towards the ceiling) for a machine
when a machine view displays walls in the background. (Ref. View menu > Attributes:
1740
VERICUT Help
Background). The up direction is relative to the machine origin. Select the appropriate axis
direction from the pull-down list.
Initialization File — Use this feature to specify the Machine Initialization File to be used. A
Machine Initalization File is a text, or subroutine, file used to initialize variables used by the NC
machine. The Machine Initialization File is processed at the same time as the "Start of
Processing" event.
Click on the (Add Machine Initialization File) icon to display the Machine Initialization Files
file selection window and use it to specify the \path\filename of the Machine Initialization File
to be used.
Use the (Clear Machine Initialization File) to clear the Initialization File text field.
Use the (Edit Machine Initialization File) to open the specified Machine Initialization File in
a text editor window (ref. Text File in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help for information on
See Variables window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on
monitoring and tracking Machine Variables.
See Initialization File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional information
on Initialization Files.
Collision Detect tab — Features on this tab control when collisions between machine
components are detected, which components are protected, and tolerances used for detecting
collisions.
Locations tab — Features on this tab are used to specify important machine locations and detail
tool change motion.
Travel Limits tab — Features on this tab define how far each machine axis can go, and control
when travel limit errors are detected.
Axis Priority tab — Features on this tab control how machine axes move in rapid positioning
mode (e.g. G0).
Subroutines tab — The features on this tab enable you specify machine related subroutines.
Machine Notes tab — Features on this tab are used to enter "message notes" and "comment
notes" in the current machine file.
OK — Applies the changes and closes the Machine Settings window.

Apply — Applies the changes and leaves the Machine Settings window open.
Cancel — Closes the Machine Settings window without applying changes.
1741
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Collision Detect tab
Location:
Configuration menu > Machine Settings > Collision Detect tab
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Collision Detect tab control when collisions between machine components
are detected, which components are protected, and tolerances used for detecting collisions.
Colliding components are highlighted using the red Error color, and errors are issued to the Log
file identifying collision causing block(s) and machine components.
1742
VERICUT Help
Machine Collision Detection — When toggled "On", detects collisions between specified
components.
Ignore Collision between Cutter and Stock — Controls when collisions between the cutter and
the Stock component are ignored. This feature is useful when collision detection is desired
between the stock and shank or holder portions of the tool assembly in the machine view, but
not with the cutter.
Options are:
No — (default) Does not ignore cutter-stock collisions. All collisions are reported.
All Tools — Ignores cutter-stock collisions for all tools, even inactive tools in multi-tool
machines.
Active Tool — Ignores cutter-stock collisions for the active tool. However, collisions
between stock and inactive tools are detected.
Default Near Miss — Specifies the default collision tolerance applied to all collision cases when
Set All is pressed (see below).
Set All — Sets the default collision tolerance for all collision cases to the Default Near Miss
value. You can edit the supplied tolerance for individual cases.
Component/Component collision list

Lists the component-to-component collision cases that are checked when collision detection is
turned on.
NOTES:
1. Records displayed in pink are created, and modified, using the Machine Settings
window: Collision Detect tab (Configuration menu > Machine Settings > Collision Detect
tab) and saved in the machine file.
The Machine Settings window: Collision Detect tab and the Collision and Travel Limits
window: Collision Detect tab (Project Tree: Collision branch right mouse button menu >
Open) are linked so that whenever additions, or changes, are made in the Machine
Settings window: Collision Detect tab they are also updated in the Collision and Travel
Limits window: Collision Detect tab.
Pink records cannot be modified in the Collision and Travel Limits window: Collision
Detect tab.
2. Records displayed in white are part of the setup and can be created, or modified, in the
Machine Settings window: Collision Detect tab or in the Collision and Travel Limits
window: Collision Detect tab and are saved with the setup in the project file.
1743
VERICUT Help
These two windows are linked so that whenever additions, or changes, are made to
white records in one window they are updated in both windows when you select Apply
or OK.
Component1/Component 2 — These features are used to specify the component-to-

component collision cases to check. Clicking on a component field in a record displays a
pull-down list of components to choose from.
NOTE: Do not configure for collision detection between components that move (slide or
rotate) against each other, such as connected motion axes. In these cases, errors may occur
each time the components move.
Sub-Components — Toggle On/Off to include Sub-Components of
Component1/Component2 during collision checking.
Near Miss — Use to specify a value that controls how close the components are permitted
to be before reporting a collision. Enter a positive value to be alerted if components come
near each other within the specified clearance, zero to indicate components may not touch,
or a negative value if components are expected to collide by the specified value.
Ignore — Then toggled “on” (checked), VERICUT will ignore the specific collision record
during collision checking. Ignore, when toggled “on”, only remains active for the current
session. It is not saved in the project file.
Add — Adds a new collision case record to the list.

Delete — Deletes the selected collision case record from the list.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Component/Component collision list to display the
following menu.
These provide the same functionality described above.
To Machine Settings window
1744
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Locations tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Locations tab enable you to specify Machine Tables to store important
machine locations and work offsets. Machine Tables are used to specify "standard" data values
specific to a particular machine and are stored in the Machine file.
The Tables list, at the top of the Locations tab, shows a list of tables that are currently defined.
The Tables list will contain both "Machine Locations" tables used to store important machine
locations and "G-Code Offsets" tables used to store work offsets.
The Configure “table” menu at the bottom of the Locations tab will display differently
depending on whether a Machine Locations related object or a G-Code Offsets related object is
highlighted in the Tables list. These differences are described below in the Machine Locations
Tables and G-Code Offsets Tables sections.
Machine Locations table and G-Code Offsets table information is stored in the Machine file.
1745
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Tables list to display the following menu.
Use it to delete a highlighted Machine Location table from the Tables list. Highlighting either
the Machine Location table or Machine Location table record will delete both the Machine
Location table and Machine Location table record.
1746
VERICUT Help
Machine Locations Tables
Clicking on Machine Locations in the Tables list will display the Configure Machine Locations
menu at the bottom of the Locations tab as shown in the picture below.
The Configure Machine Locations menu enables you to add Machine Location tables to the
Tables list
Clicking on an existing Machine Location table in the Tables list will display the Configure
Machine Locations Table menu at the bottom of the Locations tab as shown in the picture
below.
When an existing Machine Locations table is highlighted, the Configure Machine Locations
Table menu enables you to add another Machine Location table record to the highlighted table.
1747
VERICUT Help
Clicking on an existing Machine Location table record the Tables list will display the Configure
Machine Locations Table Record menu at the bottom of the Locations tab as shown in the
picture below.
When an existing Machine Locations table record is highlighted, the Configure Machine
Locations Table Record menu enables you to specify the values associated with the highlighted
record.
1748
VERICUT Help
Configure Machine Locations menu

The features on the Configure Machine Locations menu enable you to add a new Machine
Locations Table to the Tables list. Machine Location tables are use to store important machine
location information. All of the following features are also available on the Configure Machine
Locations Table menu and are described in detail in the next section.
1749
VERICUT Help
Configure Machine Locations Table menu
Location Name — The following Machine Locations table types can be added, or modified,
with the features on the Machine Settings window: Locations tab. When adding a new table,
select the table type from the pull-down list. If you are modifying an existing table, the table
type will automatically be selected.
Initial Machine Location — The Initial Machine Location table is used to specify where
machine axes are initially located.
Machine Reference Location — The Machine Reference Location table is used to specify
the reference location of machine axes.
Tool Change Location — The Tool Change Location table is used specify the location of
machine axes when changing tools
Tool Change Retraction — The Tool Change Retraction table is used to specify which
machine axes retract when changing tools.
Turret Rotations — The Turret Rotations table is used to store the turret rotation angles of
multiple Tool components connected to a Turret component on a lathe machine.
See Machine Locations Tables in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech Help Library, for
detailed information on specific Machine Locations table types and information on all VERICUT
tables.
Use the remaining features to describe the table record to be added.

defined. Select from the pull-down list of subsystems defined for the current machine.
1750
VERICUT Help
SubRegister — This feature is not active for Machine Locations tables.
Add — The Add feature will behave slightly differently depending on whether it is used with
Machine Location highlighted, or if an existing Machine Location table is highlighted.
When Add is used with Machine Location highlighted, a new table, of the specified type, is
added to the Tables list with a default table record highlighted. If a Machine Location table of
the same type already exists, an error message is output.
When Add is used with an existing table record highlighted in the Tables list, a new default
table record is added to the highlighted table.
In both of the above cases, an additional text field is added to the bottom of the Configure
“table” menu enabling you to specify values for the new table record. The text field will display
differently depending on the type of table that the record is being added to. These differences
are described below in the Configure Machine Locations Table Record menu section. If an
identical Machine Location table record already exists for the table, an error message is output.
Machine Locations table record values are stored in the Machine file.
1751
VERICUT Help
Configure Machine Locations Table Record menu

The features on the Configure Machine Location Table Record menu enable you to specify
values for Machine Location table records. This menu displays when a Machine Locations table
record is selected in the Tables list or when a Machine Locations table is highlighted in the
Table list and Add is pressed.
Features Location Name, Subsystem ID, Register, and SubRegister are described above in the
Configure Machine Locations Table menu section.
The Select From/To Locations features and the option to select 2 points are not available for
Machine Locations tables.
The following section describes the specific text field values associated with each Machine
Locations table type.
1752
VERICUT Help

Initial Machine Location
Machine Reference Location
Tool Change Location
Tool Change Retraction
to enter one to twelve numeric values as required by the specific table. Multiple value entries
require spaces between the values.
VERICUT supports two ways to input values into the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field, each
uses a different syntax:
1. Traditional format: The values are entered in the order specified (XYZABCUVWABC) and
are separated by spaces.
2. WORD/VALUE format: (X10 C45)
WORD/VALUE format.
6. If all values are zero, you can leave the field blank. In this case, the display will
be X0 Y0 Z0.
1753
VERICUT Help
For table type:

Turret Rotations
Tool Index — Identifies the turret index number that corresponds to the Tool component's Tool
Index number (Ref. Tool Index, in the Configure Component menu, Component Type: Tool
section, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help).
Angle — The Angle text field is activated enabling you to enter values representing the A, B,
and C axis orientations. Multiple value entries require spaces between the values.
1754
VERICUT Help
G-Code Offsets Tables

Configure G-Code Offsets menu
The features on the Configure G-Code Offset menu enable you to add a new G-Code Offsets
table to the Tables list. G-Code Offsets tables are use to store work offsets. All of the following
features are also available on the Configure G-Code Table menu and are described in detail in
the next section.
1755
VERICUT Help
Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu

The features on the Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu enable you to add a new G-Code
Offsets table record to the offset table highlighted in the Project Tree. G-Code Offset tables are
use to store work offsets specific to the NC program file(s) in the current setup. All of the
following features are also available on the Configure G-Code Offsets menu for adding new G-
Code Offset tables to the Project Tree.
Offset Name — Use to identify the type of offset table to be added, or modified, if it already
exists. Choose one of the following offset table types from the pull-down list.
Base Work Offset — The Base Work Offset table is used to specify the location from which
work offsets are based.
Machine Zero — The Machine Zero table, formerly Input Machine Zero table, is no longer
used. It is retained for legacy purposes only.
Work Offsets — The Work Offsets table is used to store the work coordinate system offset
(fixture offset) values.
Program Zero — The Program Zero table is used to specify the programmed zero location of
a G-Code NC program file taking Tool Length Compensation into consideration.
Input Program Zero (Special Z) — The Input Program Zero (Special Z) table is used to specify
the programmed zero location of a G-Code NC program file.
RTCP Pivot Offset — The RTCP Pivot Offset table is used to specify the offset between the
Tool component origin and the tilting head pivot point.
RPCP Pivot Offset — The RPCP Pivot Offset table is used to specify the offset between the
Stock component origin and the rotary table pivot point.
1756
VERICUT Help
See G-Code Offsets Tables in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech Help Library, for
detailed information on specific G-Code Offset table types and information on all VERICUT
tables.
defined.
SubRegister — This feature is only available for Work Offsets tables. It is used for controls, like
Yasnac, that support the sub-register feature.
Add — The Add feature will behave slightly differently depending on whether it is used in the
Configure G-Code Offsets menu (G-Code Offsets highlighted in the Tables list) or in the
Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu (G-Code Table highlighted in the Tables list).
When Add is used in the Configure G-Code Offsets menu, a new offset table is added to the
Project Tree with a default table record highlighted. The Configure G-Code Table Record menu
is automatically displayed enabling you to specify values for the record. If the offset table of the
same type already exists, an error message is output.
When Add is used in the Configure G-Code Table menu, a new default offset table record is
added to the highlighted G-Code Table the Tables list. The new default table record is
highlighted and the Configure G-Code Table Record menu is automatically displayed enabling
you to specify values for the record. If an identical offset table record already exists, an error
message is output.
1757
VERICUT Help
Configure G-Code Offset Table Record menu

The features on the Configure G-Code Offset Table Record menu enable you to specify values
for G-Code Offset table records.
Features Offset Name, Subsystem ID, Register, and SubRegister are described above in the
Configure G-Code Offsets Table menu section.
VERICUT provides two ways to enter table values. You can Select From/To Locations to create a
“relational” offset that will automatically be updated if the machine configuration or the
location of the CSYS origin changes. You can also use Enter Offset (or select 2 points) to specify
the offset directly by selecting two points, or entering axis values. This method does not
automatically update. The Select From/To Locations and Enter Offset (or select 2 points)
methods are mutually exclusive.
1758
VERICUT Help
Select From/To Locations — Enables you to specify table values based on a "relational" offset
between a "from" point and a "to" point. The "from" and "to" points are designated by
specifying a particular component or CSYS. VERICUT will use the origin of the component/CSYS
as the point. You can also specify an offset from the specified component/CSYS origin point.
Once this relationship has been established, you can change the machine configuration or the
location of the CSYS origin and the table values will updated automatically during the initial
Single Step or during Play to End.
For example: After Input Program Zero has been defined to be the offset from the Tool
Component to the "Program Zero" CSYS, you can change the machine configuration, or change
the location of "Program Zero" CSYS, and the Input Program Zero offset values will be updated
automatically during the initial Single Step or during Play to End.
NOTE: The offsets are calculated based on where the corresponding origin points are located
when all linear axes are driven to machine zero (zero with no offsets in place).
When Select From/To Locations is toggled "on" (dot displayed), the following features become
activated.
From
Feature — Use to specify whether the “from” point is associated with a component origin
or a coordinate system origin. Select Component Origin or CSYS Origin from the pull-down
list.
Name — Use to specify the name of the component or CSYS whose origin is to be used to
define the “from” point. Select the Component or CSYS name from the pull-down list.
Adjust From Location — Enables you to specify an offset from the specified “from” point.
To
Feature — Use to specify whether the "to" point is associated with a component origin or a
coordinate system origin. Select Component Origin or CSYS Origin from the pull-down list.
Name — Use to specify the name of the component or CSYS whose origin is to be used to
define the “to” point. Select the Component or CSYS name from the pull-down list.
Adjust To Location — Enables you to specify an offset from the specified “to” point.
Calculate Relative to Location — This feature enables you to have a relational offset
recalculated in the machine position where the offset will be used. The new position is
immediately calculated and stored and therefore is not dependent on the machine position
when the offset is activated.
TIP: See tombstone_work_offsets_single_part.vcproject and
tombstone_work_offsets_multiple_parts.vcproject in the /samples/ folder of your VERICUT
installation for examples of using this feature.
1759
VERICUT Help
Additional Offset — Use this text field to specify an additional offset value.
When Select From/To Locations is toggled "On", the From/To Feature/Name lists and the
Offset text fields become activated. Use the From/To Feature lists to specify whether the point
is associated with a Component or a CSYS (coordinate system). Use the From/To Name lists to
specify a specific component or coordinate system.
NOTE: Only the coordinate systems that have been defined with reference to a machine
component (i.e., visible in a Machine or Machine/Cut Stock view when Coordinate System axis
is toggled "on") will appear in the CSYS/Names lists. See the discussion for Project menu >
Coordinate Systems for more information on VERICUT Coordinate Systems.
Use the Adjust From Location / Adjust To Location text fields to enter 3 values, separated by
spaces, representing the X, Y, and Z offset from the specified origin point. You can also click on
the "select" button, , then pick a point in the graphics display area. You can pick the point
in either a workpiece or machine view. VERICUT will calculate the Adjust From Location /
Adjust To Location value between the selected point and the designated Component
Origin/Name origin point. Offset is only active when Feature is set to Component Origin.
Enter Offset (or select 2 points) — when toggled "On", the Values (XYZABCUVWABC) text field
is activated enabling you to enter one to twelve numeric values as required by the specific
table. Multiple value entries require spaces between the values.
The following section describes the specific text field values associated with each Machine
Locations table type.

Base Work Offset table
Work Offsets table
Program Zero table
Input Program Zero (Special Z) table
1760
VERICUT Help

RTCP Pivot Offset table
RPCP Pivot Offset table
You can also click on the "select" button, then pick two points in the graphics display area.
You can pick the points in either a Workpiece or Machine view. VERICUT will calculate the
Offset value between the selected points.
In the sample window shown above, the current table is the Work Offsets table. The current
table entry is register "54", and contains the values "-17 -8 -16.5". The table is applicable to
subsystem "1" of the machine.
VERICUT supports two ways to input values into these tables from the G-Code Table Record
menu. Both use the Values text field, but use a different syntax):
1761
VERICUT Help
Traditional format: values are entered in the order specified (XYZABCUVWABC) and are
WORD/VALUE format: (X10 C45)
WORD/VALUE format.
If all values are zero, you can leave the field blank. In this case, the display will be X0 Y0 Z0.
1762
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Travel Limits tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Travel Limits tab enable you to define travel limits for each machine axis,
and control when, and under what conditions, travel limit checking is done and errors
reported.
Overtravel errors cause the violating machine component to "light up" in the Overtravel Color
and errors are output to the Log file identifying the problem component.
1763
VERICUT Help
Log Error for Over Travel — When active, turns on overtravel detection (travel limit checking).
Components that move beyond specified limits are highlighted in the Overtravel Color and
errors are issued to the Log file identifying error causing block(s) and machine components.
Allow Motion Beyond Limit — When toggled "On", axes are allowed to freely travel beyond
defined limits. When toggled "Off", an axis is never allowed to travel beyond the defined limit.
Overtravel Color — Use to specify the color in which components that move past their
specified limits are shaded. Available shade colors are defined on the Edit menu > Colors:
Define tab.
Travel Limit Record Table

List of travel limit records in which each record consist of a group number, motion component
(and its axis limits), travel limit condition and an ignore switch.
Group — Enables travel limit records to be grouped together. The default group ID is 0. You
can change the group ID by clicking on the Group field of the highlighted record to put it in edit
mode, and then enter the desired group number. A specific group of travel limit records is
activated by using the TravelLimitsGroup macro. For information on the TravelLimitsGroup
macro, and all VERICUT macros, see VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library.
Component — Use to specify a motion component for travel limit checking. Click on the
Component field of the highlighted record to put it in edit mode. Select the desired motion
component from drop down list. The list contains of all motion components in the machine;
linear, rotary or turret.
Minimum / Maximum — Use to specify the minimum, and maximum, travel limits for the
motion axis selected in the list. Click on the Minimum/Maximum field of a highlighted record to
put it in edit mode. Enter the desired axis limit.
The next three columns in the Travel Limit Record Table are used to specify conditions when
the travel limit record is used. The condition can be set to "OFF" indicating no special condition
for this record or set to a motion component on the machine.
When a motion component is specified, then the travel limit record is used if the axis of the
conditional component is within the conditional minimum and maximum limit values.
Component (C) — Use to specify a condition when the travel limit record is used. Set to "OFF"
indicating no special condition for this record, or specify a conditional motion component on
the machine. Click on the Component (C) field of the highlighted record to put it in edit mode.
Select the conditional motion component from drop down list. The list contains of all motion
components in the machine; linear, rotary or turret.
1764
VERICUT Help
Minimum (C) / Maximum (C) — Use to specify the minimum, and maximum, travel limits for
the conditional motion component (Component (C)). Click on the Minimum (C) / Maximum (C)
field of a highlighted record to put it in edit mode. Enter the desired axis limit.
Ignore — When toggled "On", over travel checking is ignored for the corresponding axis.
Add Group — Use this feature to add a group of travel limit records. The number of travel limit
records added will be equal to the number of motion components in the machine. The group
number assigned will be the next available ascending group number in the list of travel limits.
Insert — Use this feature to add a travel limit record.
Delete — Use this feature to delete the selected travel limit record(s).
OK or Apply must be used to apply changes. If you use Cancel and have made changes but have
not used OK or Apply, you will be queried whether or not you want to apply the changes before
leaving.
1765
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Axis Priority tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Axis Priority tab enable you to control how machine axes move in rapid
positioning mode (e.g. G0). By default, machine axes are interpolated with equal priority to
arrive at their destinations at the same time. You can change the priority to simulate non-
interpolated rapid motion such as "dog leg" or "squared off" movement.
Each axis can have an unlimited number of priorities, each designated by a Group number. By
default, each axis has a priority group designated as “0” which may not be deleted. All other
groups can be added or deleted.
The priority group can be change at anytime during the simulation using the AxisPriorityGroup
macro. For information on AxisPriorityGroup, and all VERICUT macros, see the VERICUT Macros
section in the CGTech Help Library.
Group — The displayed value designates Axis Priority group currently being displayed. Click on
the icon to display the list of Axis Priority groups that have been defined. Select the desired
Axis Priority group from the pull-down list to change the group that is displayed.
Add — Use to add a new Axis Priority group.
Delete — Use to delete the currently displayed Axis Priority group.
1766
VERICUT Help
The Axis Priority list is a list of all applicable machine motion axes and the corresponding
priorities for each.
Register — A list of all applicable machine motion axes.
Priority (+) — Use to specify the priority to be used when moving the specified motion axis in
rapid when the tool is moving in the positive Z direction. A value of "1" moves that axis first. A
"2" moves the axis with secondary priority (after those with priority "1"), and so on. Axes having
the same priority move together.
Interpolated (+) — The checkbox settings in this column are used when the tool is moving in
the positive Z direction. When toggled “on” (checked), axes that move together are
interpolated such that they arrive at their destination at the same time. Clear this checkbox to
have axes move based on their defined Rapid Rate (ref. Configure Component Menu >
Component Type: All Motion Axes, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
Priority (-) — Use to specify the priority to be used when moving the specified motion axis in
rapid when the tool is moving in the negative Z direction. A value of "1" moves that axis first. A
"2" moves the axis with secondary priority (after those with priority "1"), and so on. Axes having
the same priority move together.
Interpolated (-) — The checkbox settings in this column are used when the tool is moving in the
negative Z direction. When toggled “on” (checked), axes that move together are interpolated
such that they arrive at their destination at the same time. Clear this checkbox to have axes
move based on their defined Rapid Rate (ref. Configure Component Menu > Component Type:
All Motion Axes, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation
Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help).
1767
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Subroutines tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Subroutines tab enable you to specify the names of external files
containing subroutines accessible by the NC machine.
File Names list — List of external files containing subs accessible to VERICUT.
Shortcut: Right-click in the File Names list area to display a pop-up window with the following
features:
Add — Opens the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to add
external subroutine files to the File Names list.
Replace — Opens the Machine Subroutine Files selection box enabling you to replace the
highlighted subroutine file in the File Names list with another.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted subroutine file from the File Names list.
1768
VERICUT Help
Edit — Displays the of the highlighted subroutine file in a text editing window. Standard text
using the editing features see Edit menu > Text File.
Add — Opens the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to add external
subroutine files to the File Names list. (Same as Add in the pop-up window described above)
Replace — Opens the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to replace
the highlighted subroutine file in the File Names list with another. (Same as Replace in the pop-
up window described above)
Delete — Deletes the highlighted subroutine file from the File Names list. (same as Delete in
the pop-up window described above)
Delete All — Deletes all subroutines files from the File Names list.
1769
VERICUT Help
Using the Machine Subroutine Files File Selection Window
1. Select the (Folder) tab if the folder tree is not already displayed.
2. Select the folder in the folder tree on the left side of the window containing the
machine subroutine file(s) that you want to open. Use the (Up One Level) icon,
located above the folder tree, to quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
Finally you can select the (Favorite) tab to display your “Favorite” folder tree.
See Favorites panel in the File menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on
creating a Favorites folder.
See Using the “Favorites” VERICUT File Selection Window in the Getting Started section
of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help for information on using the “Favorites” file selection window.
The (Add a Favorite) icon is used to Opens the Add a Favorite window enabling
you to add a “favorite” folder or “favorite” file to your Favorites panel. A ”favorite” is a
link to a folder of files or a link to an individual file.
1770
VERICUT Help
highlighted.
5. The right side of the file selection window shows the machine subroutine files that are
currently associated with the current Setup. Use the to add the machine subroutine
files highlighted in the center section of the file selection window to the Current
Machine Subroutine Files list.
Use the to remove highlighted machine subroutine files from the Current Machine
Subroutine Files list.
The files are added to the File Names list in the Machine Settings window: Subroutines
tab in the order that they appear in the Current Machine Subroutine Files list. To change
the order of the files in the Current Machine Subroutine Files list, click on the square
button to the left of the file name and drag it to the desired position in the list.
6. Click on the OK at the bottom of the window to add all of the files in the Current
Machine Subroutine Files list to the File Names list in the Machine Settings window:
Subroutines tab and close the file selection window.
without making any machine subroutine file changes.
Also see Add, Modify, or Delete Machine Subroutine Files, also in the Configuration Menu
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
1771
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Machine Subroutine Files

Machine Subroutine Files are external files containing subroutines accessible by the NC
machine.
To add a machine subroutine file to the machine file:

1. To add a machine subroutine file, in the Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab click on
the Add button to display the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window.
You can also right-click in the File Names list area and select Add from the menu that
displays, to display the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window.
2. In the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window that displays, select the machine
subroutine file(s) to be added, then click OK. If needed, refer to Using the Machine
Subroutine Files File Selection Window, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
The new machine subroutine file name(s) are added to the File Names list on the Machine
Settings window: Subroutines tab.
Make sure that you save the machine file to update the machine subroutines referenced by
the machine file.
To replace a machine subroutine file in the File Names list with a different file:
1. To replace a machine subroutine file with another, in the Machine Settings window:
Subroutines tab, click on the machine subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be
replaced so that it becomes highlighted and then select Replace to display the Machine
Subroutine Files file selection window.
You can also click on the machine subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be replaced
so that it becomes highlighted and then right-click in the File names list area and select
Replace in the menu that displays to display the Machine Subroutine Files file selection
window.
2. In the Machine Subroutine Files file selection window that displays, type, or select the
/path/filename of the replacement NC program file, and then click OK. If needed, refer to
Using the Machine Subroutine Files File Selection Window, also in the Configuration Menu
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
The replacement machine subroutine file name is added to the File Names list on the
Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab.
the machine file.
1772
VERICUT Help
To delete a machine subroutine file from the File Names list:

1. To delete a machine subroutine file in the Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab, click
on the machine subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be deleted so that it becomes
highlighted and then select Delete to delete the file from the File Names list .
You can also click on the machine subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be deleted
so that it becomes highlighted and then right-click in the File Names list area and select
Delete in the menu that displays to delete the file from the File Names list .
To delete all machine subroutines from the Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab File
Names list, click on the Delete All button. All machine subroutine files are are removed
from the File Names list.
from your computer.
the machine file.
To edit a machine subroutine from within VERICUT:

1. To edit a machine subroutine, in the Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab right-click
on the machine subroutine in the File Names list that is to be edited and then select Edit
from the menu that displays.
2. The contents of the machine subroutine file will display in a text editor window. (see Text
File in the Edit menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about the text editor window).
Edit the contents of the machine subroutine file as necessary. When finished editing, select
File menu > Save (or Save As) in the text editor main menu to save your changes.
Control Subroutines, in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for information about
"control"subroutines.
Also see Configure NC Subroutines Branch menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, for
information about "NC subroutine" files.
1773
VERICUT Help
Machine Settings window, Machine Notes tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Machine Notes tab enable you to add Message Notes and Comment Notes
to the machine file.
Message Notes are saved in the header of the machine file and are displayed in the VERICUT
message area (Logger) when the machine file is loaded.
Comment Notes are saved in the header of the machine file but do not display in the VERICUT
Logger.
be added.
Any Message/Comment Notes that currently exist in the machine file are displayed in the
appropriate text field as shown below. Any note can be edited and re-saved in the machine file.
1774
VERICUT Help
Existing Message/Comment Notes in the machine file:
In the machine file, each line of the note is added to the header in quotes, and is preceded by
either the keyword MESSAGE (for message notes), or COMMENT (for comment notes) as shown
below.
How the above messages look in the machine file:
CGTech Machine
Version-7.3
MESSAGE "This is the 1st Message Note added to the machine file and it will appear in the logger."
MESSAGE "This is the 2nd Message Note added to the machine file and it will appear in the logger."
COMMENT "This is the 1st Comment Note added to the machine file and it will not appear in the logger."
UNITS MILLIMETER
MACHINE "" {
PRIORITY_TYPE SINGLE

Machine Settings window open. Then save the machine file using the Configuration menu >
Machine > Save (or Save As) feature in the menu bar, or use the (Save Machine) or
(Save Machine As) icon in the tool bar.
1775
VERICUT Help
NOTE: Machine files containing notes can not be used in pre-V6.2 versions of VERICUT.
1776
VERICUT Help
Building NC Controls
About Building NC Controls
In general, the Configuration menu > Control menu features (Word Format, G-Code Processing,
Control Settings, and Adv. Options), located in the lower portion of the Configuration menu
pull-down, are used to define how the NC control on a machine processes machine code data,
also known as "G-Code" data.
As delivered from CGTech, VERICUT supports processing M and G-Code data in EIA Std RS-274
format, as well as some conversational formats. However, using VERICUT's powerful user
interface or the C Macro Extension – Application Programming Interface, or CME–API (ref.
CME-API in the VERICUT Development Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library), you can add
support for non-standard codes and formats.
All control-related information is saved in a Control file where it can be coupled with other
machines having the same, or similar, NC control characteristics.
The following sections provide a general overview of the control building process, and describe
key terms you will find throughout related documentation.
Defining G-Code words and special characters:

The G-Code words and special characters interpreted by the NC control are defined in VERICUT
using the Word Format window features. Use features on this window to describe the general
functionality of the character or word. In the case of words that are expected to be paired with
addresses later, such as: G0 - "G" with "0", M3 - "M" with "3", "X" with any number, etc.,
features on this window set the type and format of the expected values.
See Word Format window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional
information.
Grouping words with addresses to perform actions:

Words and a range of addresses are paired, or "grouped" using the G-Code Processing window
features. Each group can then be configured to perform one or more actions via configuring
them to call CGTech supplied or custom macros. For example to simulate "M0" stopping the NC
machine, you would define the group as having the "M" word with "0" for the range of
addresses that perform this action, then configure the group to call the "StopProgram" macro.
1777
VERICUT Help
"Conditional" checks can be made to check for conditions that alter how the word/address is
interpreted, such as other codes in the block, current variable values, machine states, etc. For
example, "X" with a value is typically assumed to be X-axis motion. However, with "G4" also in
the block, the control may need to interpret the "X" word/value as "dwell time".
Groups that perform similar actions are arranged in a class, formerly known as a "supergroup".
Classes assist VERICUT with determining the timing of when actions are performed, as
described by sections that follow.
As delivered from CGTech, macros are provided to simulate most common machine and control
actions. Macro actions can be altered, or new macros created using the C Macro Extension –
Application Programming Interface, or CME–API (ref. CME-API in the VERICUT Development
Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library) to generate a custom CME file for the control.
When called by a word/address group, macros are passed the following pieces of information:
1. The G-Code word is passed as a character string (e.g. "G", "M", "X", "GOTO")
2. The value associated with the G-Code word is passed as a numeric value (e.g. 1, 30,
12.345, 1234)
3. The value associated with the G-Code word is also passed as a character string (e.g.
"01", "30", "12.345", "1234")
Two of the above three items can be over-ridden before being passed via the features:
Override Value (overrides #2 above) and Override Text (overrides #3 above). Additionally, the
"value passed as a value" can be modified via the Override Value text field using a
mathematical expression. When doing so, the current value is represented using a dollar sign
("$"). For example, Override Value: $*2, multiplies the current value by 2, then passes modified
value to the macro. Not all macros honor the override value or text.
See G-Code Processing window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
Also see VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library for more information.
Controlling the timing of simulated actions:

The timing of simulated actions is controlled by the following:
1. The listed order of word/address classes controls the timing of when corresponding
actions are performed.
2. For all actions associated with groups in a given class, the order in which they appear in
the G-Code data block controls the timing of when the actions are simulated.
1778
VERICUT Help
Example of block processing by VERICUT:

Consider the sample G-Code Processing window below and G-Code data block:
"N20G1X1.0Y2.0F100.0".
The following is an overview of what VERICUT does with the information in this block:
1. The block is parsed based upon control word definitions. Assuming G, X, Y, and F words are
defined, our block is broken up into the following pieces, or "tokens": N20, G1, X1.0, Y2.0,
F100.0
2. VERICUT checks to see if any of the block tokens can be interpreted by groups in the first
class, "Specials". The "N20" token is interpreted via the "N *" group (highlighted in the
figure above). Since "N" with any value is configured to call the "Sequence" macro, this code
is understood as a block sequence code.
Tokens remaining to be processed: G1, X1.0, Y2.0, and F100.0
3. The next class checked is "States" which contains information about machine states, such
as: motion modes (rapid, linear, circular, NURBS), active plane for machining, unit
1779
VERICUT Help
measurement system, dimension mode, etc. The "G1" token is interpreted, and calls the
"MotionLinear" macro to set the linear motion state.
Tokens remaining to be processed: X1.0, Y2.0, and F100.0
4. Next, "Cycles" checked to see if there are any codes related to canned cycle processing.
Since none of the remaining tokens deal with cycles, nothing occurs with this class.
Tokens remaining to be processed: X1.0, Y2.0, and F100.0
5. In the "Registers" class, all the remaining codes are interpreted. Since there is more than
one group accessed in this class, macros are called and actions occur according to listed
order of the tokens in the block:
"X1.0" calls the "XAxisMotion" macro to set "1.0" for the X-axis.
Similarly, "Y2.0" calls "YAxisMotion" macro to set "2.0" for Y-axis location.
"F100.0" calls the "FeedRate" macro to set "100.0" as the motion feed rate.
Tokens remaining to be processed: NONE!
6. With all block tokens processed, VERICUT simulates the actions related to the macros
called- the machine X and Y axes move from their current location to X=1, Y=2 with a feed
rate of 100.
While the above presents a fairly good overview of what occurs during block processing, it is
important to note that the above scenario is simplified. There are many more things to consider
in a detailed view, such as: control settings that alter how actions are performed, processing
events that can trigger actions (similar to the groups discussed above), control subroutines,
possible use of text string substitutions, and more.
Control settings:
Features in the Control Settings window provide an easy way to set the typical operation mode
of the NC control. Control settings are primarily used to establish default conditions for the
control. However, these functions also extend your ability to detail how VERICUT interprets
specific types of machine codes, such as: circles, cycles, rotary motions, and more.
See Control Settings window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help for
Advanced control options:
1780
VERICUT Help
The features in the Advanced Control Options window provide even more NC control
capabilities, such as: specify subroutines available in the NC control, perform actions at key
processing events (e.g. start of tool path processing, start processing a block, etc.), substitute
text strings, and more. Most users do not need these advance features, but when you need
them, they are there waiting for you.
See Advanced Control Options window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help
"Starter" Control files:

A "starter" set of Control files are included in the library files installed with VERICUT and
VERICUT Composite Simulation ("library" folder in your VERICUT installation) and can be used
as is, or quickly modified to match the exact requirements of your NC machine control.
See the "Library Control Files" topic, in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help.
Also see the Machine and Control Configuration training sessions, in the Training Sessions
section in the CGTech Help Library for more information about building NC Controls.
1781
VERICUT Help
About Simulating Subroutines
Subroutines, or "subs" for short, can exist within a G-Code NC program file or reside in separate
files. VERICUT supports processing subs in either location. This section discusses mainly
subroutines that reside in external files.
Types of subroutines
VERICUT recognizes two types of external subroutines, "control" subroutines and "job"
subroutines. Subroutines are handled differently, depending on the subroutine type. Each of
these types is described below.
Control subroutines — The concept of a "control" subroutine is a subroutine that would
typically reside in the NC control. These subroutines are typically not accessible to NC
programmers and do not change from job to job. They are well defined, and thoroughly
debugged pieces of software. You are typically not interested in stepping through these
subroutines. For example: A G81 drill cycle. Here, you don't want to step through the logic of a
G81 drill cycle every time it is called, you just want the drill cycle to be executed.
Within VERICUT, any subroutines listed in the Advanced Control Options: Subroutines tab File
Names list are "control" subroutines and will behave in this manner. When you single step, the
entire subroutine will be executed, and the display within the NC Program panel will not jump
into the subroutine.
At times, you might want to step into a control subroutine. VERICUT now supports an easy
mechanism to do this. If you right-click on the (Step/Subroutine Options) button, 3 new
buttons will display. (Step Into Subroutine), (Step Over Subroutine), and
(Step to End of Subroutine). The "Step Into Subroutine" button will allow you to step into
control subroutines. The "Step to End of Subroutine” button is a convenient way to step to the
end of the current subroutine.
TIP: Position the cursor over the buttons and a tip appears to remind you of each button’s
function.
NOTE: The cursor within NC Program panel displays that last record that was executed.
Therefore if you want to step into a control subroutine, you must position yourself on the line
prior to the call to the control subroutine, and then press the "Step Into Subroutine" button.
Use the (Control Advanced Options) icon in the Toolbar, or Configuration menu > Adv.
Options in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the Advanced Control Options window, then click
1782
VERICUT Help
on the Subroutines tab to review, or modify, the list of "control subroutine" file names that
VERICUT can access.
Job subroutines — Job subroutines are user written subroutines that may exist after the end of
the main program, or in a separate file. When you hit the (Step/Subroutine Options)
button, you want to step into these subroutines.
Processing within a job subroutine is user controlled, just like the main NC program file. Each
record in the subroutine is processed individually, enabling you to "single step" through each
record before the return to the calling program. The subroutine call and all other job subroutine
records can be seen in the Info menu > NC Program panel (ref. NC Program panel in the Info
menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help), and may appear in VERICUT's Log files.
Job subroutines are displayed in the Project Tree, NC Subroutines branch. See NC Subroutines
Branch and Configure NC Subroutines menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
NOTE: You should never list a file as both a NC Program and a NC Subroutine.
Processing subroutines
VERICUT can access subroutines and execute the commands they contain when configured to
do so. For subroutines to be processed correctly, VERICUT must be set up to "scan the NC
program" for branch locations. Make sure that the Scan NC Program Files feature, on the
Project Tree, Configure Setup menu: G-Code tab, is toggled "on" (checked).
When a subroutine call is encountered, VERICUT searches the following locations (in the order
listed) to find a matching branch location:
1. Search the remainder of the current NC program file.
2. If not found, search external subroutines in files listed in the Project Tree, NC
Subroutines branch. See NC Subroutines Branch and Configure NC Subroutines menu in
the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or
3. If not found, search external subroutines in files listed on the Configuration menu >
Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab.
4. If still not found, search external subroutines in files listed on the Configuration menu >
Adv. Options: Subroutines tab.
VERICUT will branch to the first location found to match that specified in the call. If a matching
branch location is not found in the main program or any of the subs, an error message is issued.
1783
VERICUT Help
One subroutine can call another, known as "nesting" subroutines. Up to 25 levels of calling subs
are supported.
Hint: Debug messages can be output about calls made to subs during processing via the Debug
Loop Logic feature in the Debud section of the Settings window: G-Code Outputs tab (Project
menu > Settings > G-Code Outputs tab).
See Settings window: G-Code Outputs tab, in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more
information.
Subroutine development tools

Two subroutine development tools are available to assist in creating "custom" MCD subroutines
that can be used with "master" control files, to provide "specialized" functionality, while
minimizing the need for many "customized" control files.
CGTECH_MACRO
CGTECH_MACRO "macroname" "text value" value
CGTECH_MACRO is a special keyword which is recognized by VERICUT while parsing an NC
Program file. This keyword is used to call a macro directly without going through the Word
Format or Words/Address logic. Currently, this functionality does not support the "Scan" or
"After Motion" options. It is also not supported for CMS macros.
The CGTECH_MACRO keyword does not appear in either the Word Format, or the
Word/Address, window. For simplicity sake, it always expects 3 arguments: The macroname,
the text value that will be passed to the macro, and the numeric value. The first 2 arguments,
macroname and text value, must be enclosed in double quotes. Value can be entered either as
a number or as an expression. Each of the arguments is separated by a blank space as shown
above.
The CGTECH_MACRO keyword can be combined with macros IfCheck and GotoJump to
produce a control independent IF statement. In this case the value must be a logical expression
using a logical operator (<, <=, >, >=, ==, or <>).
In the following example, the "GotoJump" will jump to block 3000 if the value of variable 3 is
less than or equal to 25.
CGTECH_MACRO "IfCheck" "" #3 <= 25
CGTECH_MACRO "GotoJump" "" 3000
1784
VERICUT Help
In the following example an indirect variable is used. Assuming that #3 = +5, the "GotoJump"
will jump to block 3000 if the value of variable 780 is less than or equal to 25.
CGTECH_MACRO "IfCheck" "" #(((#3 - 1) * 20) + 700) <= 25
CGTECH_MACRO "GotoJump" "" 3000
CGTECH_VAR REAL
CGTECH_VAR REAL reala, realb, realc, ...
CGTECH_VAR is a special keyword which is recognized by Machsim while parsing an MCD file.
This keyword provides the ability to define "local" variables in a "custom" MCD subroutine.
These variables will be local to the subroutine, and will go away when the subroutine returns to
the calling program. The corresponding "word" will be added to the Word list. This word will be
removed at reset, and will not be written to the control file. The syntax of the line following the
CGTECH_VAR keyword is identical to the Sinumeric 840D DEF format.
Currently VERICUT only supports local variables with the CGTECH_VAR keyword. The support of
global variables could possibly be added as an enhancement in the future.
See Example: Using CGTECH_MACRO and CGTECH_VAR REAL in the section that follows.
See the following sections of VERICUT Help for additional information:

Machine Settings window: Subroutines tab and Advanced Control Options window:
Subroutines tab also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
NC Program panel in the Info menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composites
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Settings window: G-Code Oputputs tab in the Project menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composites Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
Also see the VERICUT Macros section in the CGTech Help Library for more information about
VERICUT macros.
1785
VERICUT Help
Example - Using CGTECH_MACRO and CGTECH_VAR_Real
Example 1:
This example shows an un-modified DEF 19 subroutine.
CGT_LBL CGT_SUB19
;CYCL 19 Sub
reala = 0.0
realb = 0.0
realc = 0.0
cosa=COS(wina)
sina=SIN(wina)
cosb=COS(winb)
sinb=SIN(winb)
cosc=COS(winc)
sinc=SIN(winc)
; Create a matrix for an A B C rotation
mat13= sina*sinc + cosa*sinb*cosc
mat23= (-1)*sina*cosc + cosa*sinb*sinc
mat33= cosa*cosb
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 1) GOTO 100 ; Table B 45 + Table C
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 2) GOTO 200 ; Head B 45 + Table C
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 3) GOTO 300 ; Table A + Table C, -30 to 45 travel limits
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 4) GOTO 400 ; Head A + Table C
GOTO 900
N100 ; *********************************** Table B 45 + Table C
hg = (mat33-0.5)/0.5
realb = ACOS(hg)
whc = ATAN(mat23/mat13)
rxb = COS45*SIN(realb)
ryb = -0.5+0.5*COS(realb)
1786
VERICUT Help
realc = ATAN(ryb/rxb)-whc
realc = (-1)*realc
ROTPLANE X=-45
ROTINCPLANE Y=(-1)*realb
ROTINCPLANE X=45
ROTINCPLANE Z=(-1)*realc
ROTINCPLANE Z=winc
ROTINCPLANE Y=winb
ROTINCPLANE X=wina
GOTO 900
N200 ; *********************************** Head B 45 + Table C
hg = (mat33-0.5)/0.5
realb = ACOS(hg)
realc = (-1)*ATAN(ryb/rxb)-whc
realc = (-1)*realc
ROTPLANE Z=(-1)*realc
ROTINCPLANE Z=winc
ROTINCPLANE Y=winb
ROTINCPLANE X=wina
GOTO 900
N300 ; *********************************** Table A + Table C, -30 to 45 travel limits
reala = ACOS(mat33)
ryb = (-1)*mat23
realc = ATAN(mat13/ryb)
; 2 solutions, match to closest input angle. For now, just check sign of A
IF (wina GE 0) GOTO 320
reala = (-1) * reala
IF (realc GT 0) GOTO 310
1787
VERICUT Help
realc = realc + 180

GOTO 320
N310 realc = realc - 180
; Check within limits
N320 IF (reala GT -30) GOTO 350
IF (reala LT -45) GOTO 350
realc = realc + 180
GOTO 350
N350
ROTPLANE X=(-1)*reala
ROTINCPLANE Z=(-1)*realc
ROTINCPLANE Z=winc
ROTINCPLANE Y=winb
ROTINCPLANE X=wina
GOTO 900
N400 ; *********************************** Head A + Table C
reala = wina
realc = winc
ROTPLANE X=wina
GOTO 900
N900 ; *********************************** Final processing of all machines
Q120= reala
Q121= realb
Q122= realc
wina=0
winb=0
winc=0
LBL 0
1788
VERICUT Help
Example 2:
This example shows the same DEF 19 subroutine using the CGTECH_VAR REAL keyword. Rather
then defining 20 variable words in the Words list, only the 4 global variables are pre-defined.
The remaining variables are defined as local variables using the CGTECH_VAR REAL keyword.
The CGTECH_MACRO keyword is also used to remove the need for the ROTPLANE and the
ROTINCPLANE words. These words were used to call the RotationPlane2, RotationPlaneLocal2,
and the RotationPlaneAngle1 macros.
CGT_LBL CGT_SUB19
;CYCL 19 Sub
CGTECH_VAR REAL reala, realb, realc
CGTECH_VAR REAL cosa, sina, cosb, sinb, cosc, sinc
CGTECH_VAR REAL mat13, mat23, mat33
CGTECH_VAR REAL hg, whc, rxb, ryb
reala = 0.0
realb = 0.0
realc = 0.0
cosa=COS(wina)
sina=SIN(wina)
cosb=COS(winb)
sinb=SIN(winb)
cosc=COS(winc)
sinc=SIN(winc)
; Create a matrix for an A B C rotation
mat13= sina*sinc + cosa*sinb*cosc
mat23= (-1)*sina*cosc + cosa*sinb*sinc
mat33= cosa*cosb
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 1) GOTO 100 ; Table B 45 + Table C
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 2) GOTO 200 ; Head B 45 + Table C
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 3) GOTO 300 ; Table A + Table C, -30 to 45 travel limits
IF(MACH_TYPE EQ 4) GOTO 400 ; Head A + Table C
GOTO 900
N100 ; *********************************** Table B 45 + Table C
1789
VERICUT Help
hg = (mat33-0.5)/0.5
realb = ACOS(hg)
realc = ATAN(ryb/rxb)-whc
realc = (-1)*realc
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "X" -45
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlane2" "" 0
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "Y" (-1)*realb
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneLocal2" "" 0
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "X" 45
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "Z" (-1)*realc
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "Z" winc
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "Y" winc
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "X" winc
GOTO 900
N200 ; *********************************** Head B 45 + Table C
hg = (mat33-0.5)/0.5
realb = ACOS(hg)
realc = (-1)*ATAN(ryb/rxb)-whc
realc = (-1)*realc
1790
VERICUT Help

GOTO 900
N300 ; *********************************** Table A + Table C, -30 to 45 travel limits
reala = ACOS(mat33)
ryb = (-1)*mat23
realc = ATAN(mat13/ryb)
; 2 solutions, match to closest input angle. For now, just check sign of A
IF (wina GE 0) GOTO 320
realc = realc + 180
GOTO 320
; Check within limits
N320 IF (reala GT -30) GOTO 350
IF (reala LT -45) GOTO 350
realc = realc + 180
GOTO 350
N350
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "X" (-1)*reala
1791
VERICUT Help

GOTO 900
N400 ; *********************************** Head A + Table C
reala = wina
realc = winc
CGTECH_MACRO "RotationPlaneAngle1" "X" wina
GOTO 900
N900 ; *********************************** Final processing of all machines
Q120= reala
Q121= realb
Q122= realc
wina=0
winb=0
winc=0
LBL 0
1792
VERICUT Help
Moving Tool Philosophy
VERICUT uses a "moving tool philosophy" to describe motion directions, and reflect how the
machine maintains the tool-to-workpiece relationship. This philosophy is used regardless of
whether the Tool or Stock component is actually moving. Examples follow.
Consider a standard 3-axis vertical milling machine where the Z-axis moves the tool up/down,
and the X or Y-axis moves the workpiece.
Example 1
Z+ command causes the Z-axis to carry the tool in the Z+ direction relative to the workpiece.
Therefore, using the "moving tool philosophy" describes positive motion direction as "Z+".
Example 2
X+ command causes the X-axis to carry the workpiece in the X- direction relative to the tool.
In this case, the tool is considered to move in the X+ direction relative to the
workpiece.Therefore, using the "moving tool philosophy" describes positive motion
direction as "X+", even though the workpiece is moving in the X- direction.
1793
VERICUT Help
Control
Open (Open Control window)

Location:
Configuration menu > Control > Open
Project Tree > Control branch > Right mouse button menu > Open
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Open Control icon
Toolbar short cut:
The Open option opens the Open Control window which has features that enable you to open
(load) a Control file. Control files contain data that describes how the NC control processes
machine code data. See Open Control window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for
1794
VERICUT Help
Save
Locations:
Configuration menu > Control > Save
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Save Control icon
Toolbar short cut:
Click with the right mouse button on the icon to toggle between (Save Control) and
(Save Control As) modes.
The Save option saves (updates) an existing Control file with the current NC control settings.
VERICUT will save the control file if you have sufficient permissions to save the file in its present
folder. Otherwise, the Save Control File window will display enabling you to specify a location to
save where you have write permissions.
1795
VERICUT Help
Save As
Locations:
Configuration menu > Control > Save As
Project Tree > Configure CNC Machine menu > Save Control As icon
Toolbar short cut:
The Save As option opens the Save Control File window enabling you to save a Control file (ref.
Control File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help). Control files contain data that describes how the NC control processes machine code
data.
See Save Control File window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for complete information.
1796
VERICUT Help
Word Format (Word Format window)
Location:
Configuration menu > Word Format
Toolbar short cut:
The Word Format option opens the Word Format window enabling you to specify how the NC
control interprets G-Code words and special characters, to specify syntax checking rules (error
conditions) for checking your NC program file for valid syntax.
To learn more about how VERICUT processes G-Code data, see "About Building NC Controls", in
the Building NC Controls section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help,
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
1797
VERICUT Help
making changes to the control configuration.
Word Format tab — List of machine code or "G-Code" data words and characters that are
interpreted by the control, arranged in alphabetical order. The list provides a summary of word
types, sub-types, inch and metric formats, and multipliers and composite formats.
Syntax Check tab — The features on this tab enable you to turn On/Off VERICUT defined
syntax checking rules (error conditions) and to define custom syntax checking error conditions
for checking the statements in your NC program file for valid syntax.
OK — Saves additions/modifications and dismisses the Word Format window.

Apply — Saves additions/modifications and leaves the Word Format window open.
Cancel — Closes the Word Format window without saving any additions/modifications.
1798
VERICUT Help
Word Format window, Word Format tab
The features on the Word Format tab enable you to specify how the NC control interprets G-
Code words and special characters. Once words are defined, they can be "grouped" with
address values via the Configuration menu > G-Code Processing function to perform specific
actions by calling CGTech supplied or custom macros. Undefined words cause errors when
processed, and are not acted on by VERICUT.
Words and special characters and their settings are stored in the control file.
Each column in the Word Table represents a specific feature that enables you to define how the
NC control interprets specific G-Code words or special characters.
Name — Identifies the word or special character. Each word name must be unique.
Type — Specifies the type of control function performed by the word. Options:
Logical — Evaluates a logical expression. See "Logical Sub-type" below for more detailed
classifications.
Special — Accesses special NC control functions. See "Special Sub-type" below for more
detailed classifications.
1799
VERICUT Help
Math — Performs a mathematical operation. See "Math Sub-type" below for more detailed
classifications.
Function — Calls the control function specified in the Function Name field.
Type II — Specifies that the word is a three character mnemonic representing a Type II data
command, e.g. "AXO", "CLS", etc.
Macro — Word will be paired with a value, then configured via the Configuration menu>
Word/Address function to call one or more action macros.
Conditional — Similar to the Functions word type, except performs multiple functions,
depending on the condition of word use. Conditional words are typically supported by
special routines written by CGTech or other developers to evaluate word use.
Sub Type — Sub-types further differentiate word functions. Available sub-types are dependent
on the word Type.
Logical Sub Type — Options for evaluating logical expressions:
Equal
Not Equal
Greater than
Greater Than or Equal
Less Than
Less Than or Equal
AND
OR
VERICUT also supports the following bitwise operators:
Bitwise AND: If both of the corresponding bits are on, then the resulting bit is on.
Bitwise OR: If either of the corresponding bits are on, then the resulting bit is on.
Bitwise XOR: If either, but not both, of the corresponding bits are on, then the resulting
bit is on.
Simple examples:
9 AND 8 = 8
9 OR 8 = 9
9 XOR 8 = 1
7 AND 8 = 0
7 OR 8 = 15
7 XOR 8 = 15
These operators follow the standard rules of precedence.
1800
VERICUT Help
NOTE: For a compound equation, it is always best to use parenthesis, or brackets, to

insure the order in which the equation will processed. Not all controls follow the standard
rules of precedence.
Special Sub Type — Options for performing special control functions. Click on the record
"Sub Type" field and select from the list of available options in the pull-down menu.
Skip — If the Skip character is the first token in a block, then the entire rest of the block
is skipped/ignored. If the Skip character is anywhere else in a block, then it is treated as
"Ignore".
Begin Data / End Data — Denotes the beginning (or ending) of G-Code data to be
processed by the control. If a Begin Data special word is defined with out specifying an
End Data word, the Begin Data word is used for both.
Begin Comment — Denotes the beginning of a comment record.
Multiline Comment — Denotes the beginning of a comment record for comments
intended to continue for more than one block. In other words the end of block is not
interpreted as the end of comment. The end of comment can be specified in the block
where comment begins or in any of following blocks at any position in the block. The
End Comment word must be defined to correctly process multi-line comments. It is
equivalent to C/C++ comments using "/*……*/" sequence, but not "//".
End Comment — Denotes the ending of a comment record.
Begin Type II / End Type II — Denotes the beginning (or ending) of a Type II format
record.
Separator — Character used to separate data that is acted on differently by the control,
for example a list of arguments or values.
Variable Tag — Character which identifies the number that follows as a variable register
number, e.g. "#". Example- "#100" indicates variable register number "100" is being
referenced.
Variable Name — Alpha-numeric word that identifies a variable which does not have an
associated variable register number, e.g. "PPX" (type II variable format).
End of Block — Denotes the end of the G-Code data block.
Console Message — Identifies the block as a message displayed on the machine
operator's console.
Quoted Text — Identifies the start/end delimiters for a quoted text string. The default
character for delimiting a quoted text string is the double quote ("). If a different
character(s) is used as a delimiter, it must be defined as a SPECIAL type word with a sub-
type of Quoted Text. Quoted text is valid in Alpha-Numeric and List-Alpha-Numeric
Word Value types.
1801
VERICUT Help
Ignore — Ignores specific words in the tool path file.

Sin840D CASE — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to process
the remainder of the block.
See "Notes about the Siemens 840D CASE and REPEAT commands" in the Notes about
Special Topics section, in the CGTech Help Library.
Sin840D DEF — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to process
See "Notes about the Siemens 840D DEF command" in the Notes about Special Topics
Sin840D REPEAT — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to
process the remainder of the block.
See "Notes about the Siemens 840D CASE and REPEAT commands" in the Notes about
Special Topics section, in the CGTech Help Library.
Sin840D DEFINE — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to
process the remainder of the block. It will parse the remainder of the line, and establish
a temporary substitution entry.
The format is: DEFINE str AS … The "str" will be used as the "Input Text", and
everything that follows the AS will be used as the "Output Text".
This substitution will be removed with the next reset, and will not be saved in the
control file. Similar to variables, entries which are created in this manner will be marked
with an "*" in the table on the Advanced Control Options window: Substitute tab.
An additional type of the DEFINE AS command is also available. It differs from the above
description in the following ways.
 It is not case sensitive.
 It replaces whole word.
 The command can be followed by a comment.
Entries which are created using this type of DEFINE AS command will be marked with an
"**" in the table on the Advanced Control Options window: Substitute tab.
You can use both types of DEFINE AS command in the table on the Advanced Control
Options window: Substitute tab.
Usually all DEFINE commands are specified in initialization files (.def).
Sin840D SET — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to process
1802
VERICUT Help
Sin840D REP — When this word is found, a special 840D parser will be used to process
Text Argument — Used when defining Siemens 840D Frame access modifiers TR
(translate value), FI (fine value), RT (rotate value), SC (scale factor) and MI (mirror flag).
NUM VAR Define — When this word is found, a special parser will be used to process
remainder of the statement up to the closing word ENDV. This includes the creation and
initialization of the numerical variables, and the creation of the corresponding words (of
type "Special" and sub-type "Variable Name"). Word ENDV is part of the NUM VAR
Command but it doesn’t have to be specified in Word Format table. The VAR command
can contain several blocks but is processed as a single block.
The following defines the basic format of the VAR Command:
VAR
[name] = value [name]….
[name] [name]….
…
ENDV
where:
name – Variable name enclosed in brackets according to NUM syntax.
value – assigned initial value (or expression) to the variable when present after "="
character. If the initial value is in the form of an expression, it only can use
previously defined and initialized variables.
Rules for using:

1. Brackets are part of the variable name
2. No spaces or other delimiters are required between name and/or value (if used
they are ignored).
3. Spaces can be used as a part of name (example [NBR AUBE]) inside brackets.
4. Variable can be initialized immediately when defined or later (variable [INCR] in
example below).
1803
VERICUT Help
Example:
VAR
[ORI]
[NBR_AUBE]=19
[RET_BLOC][NB_AU_US][INCR][POSIT_D][NBR_FOIS]
[INCR]=360/[NBR_AUBE]
[AUBE_NUM] [TOOL_VIE][NB_AA_US][CHG_1][CHG_2]
ENDV
NOTE: Numerical arrays are not supported.
Heidenhain IF — Use to process a Heidenhain Mill Plus G29 Conditional Jump command.
Consider the following example:
N112 G29 I1 E100 N=12 E100=(ABS(E99-10.)<0.1) - This should then jump to N12 if
the condition is true.
N113 ( TOOL DIAMETER NOT IN TOLERANCE! )
N114 M0
N115 ( ===END OF BLOCKS TOOL DIAMETER CHECKING=== )
N12 G0 X100.000 Y75.000 Z210.000 B0.000 C0.000
After setting G29 to Special Sub Type "Heidenhain IF" in the Word Format window,
VERICUT will read the condition first and then process the IF Check as shown below.
E100=[ABS[E99-10.]<0.1]
N112 G29 E100 I1 N=12
Fanuc SETVN — Use to configure the control to enable a variable to have an alias to
support the Fanuc "SETVN" command. After setting the word SETVN to Special Sub Type
"Fanuc SETVN" in the Word Format window and saving the control file, VERICUT will
read the Fanuc "SETVN" command and create an alias for each variable in the
command. Consider the following example:
SETVN510[TOOL_NO,HEAD_NO,C_ANGLE,CL_Y,DE_AUX,…]
The SETVN command above results in VERICUT creating aliases: TOOL_NO for the
variable #510, HEAD_NO for #511, C_ANGLE for #512, etc.
In the Variables window (ref. Variables window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
Help), the aliases that are created are displayed by adding the alias after the variable
1804
VERICUT Help
name. For example, "510 (alias "TOOL_NO")" is added for the variable #510. See the
sample Variables window below.
Local Variable — An Alpha-numeric word that identifies a variable which is used and
associated with the subsystem and program or subroutine where it was defined or
referenced. The scope of Local Variable can be modified using the
SetLocalVarAccessType macro (ref. SetLocalVarAccessType, in the VERICUT Macros
section, in the CGTech Help Library).
Okuma CALL — When this word is found, a special Okuma parser is used to process the
remainder of the block. See "Notes about Okuma Subroutine Parameters", in the Notes
about Special Topics section, in the CGTech Help Library, for additional information.
By using the "Okuma CALL" word type, and setting the Control Type to "OKUMA OSP"
on Control Settings: General tab, should eliminate "Error: The Word xxxx is not defined"
error messages for Okuma when the word begins with N or O (provided that N and O
are defined in the control).
See Notes about Okuma Parsing Enhancements, in the Notes about Special Topics
section. in the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
1805
VERICUT Help
EXECSTRING — Use to support the Siemens Sin840D EXECSTRING command. In the

Sin840D control this command works as a function with a single string parameter. The
parameter can be any expression which evaluates into string value.
Heid DEF — Use to support Heidenhain's DEF word. If the number following the DEF is
an integer, then the remainder of the line will be ignored.
For example:
CYCLE DEF 19.0 WORKING PLANE
In the block above, "WORKING PLANE" will be ignored because 19.0 is an integer
value.
CYCLE DEF 19.1 A0 B90

In the block above, A0 B90 will be processed because 19.1 is not an integer value.
Math Sub Type — Options for performing math operations. Click on the record "Sub Type"
field and select from the list of available options in the pull-down menu.
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Power
The word POWER is used for raising a number to a power. Define POWER as Type =
Math, Sub Type = Power when the syntax is of the form:
#1 = 3 POWER 2
(meaning 3 raised to the second power, more commonly written as: 3 ^ 2)
If the syntax is of the form:

#1 = POWER(3,2)
(meaning that the first argument is to be raised by the power of the second
argument)
Define POWER as Type = Function, Sub Type = pow
Left Precedence
Right Precedence
Assignment
1806
VERICUT Help
Mod
The Mod mathematical operator divides the first number (value1) by the second
number (value2), then assigns the remainder to the specified word, where word can
be either a variable or a machine component.
When defined as a Math operator (similar to * / + -), the expected syntax is:
word = value1 Mod value2
word is set to the remainder when value1 is divided by value2.
For example:
word = 10 Mod 20 = 10
word = 10 Mod 3 = 1
word = 10.1 Mod 3 = 1.1
word = 12 Mod 3 = 0
word = 7 Mod 0 = 7
NOTE: Mod can also be used as a function. See Mod in the Functions – Listed
alphabetically section, also in VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
Div
The Div mathematical operator divides the first number (value1) by the second
number (value2), truncates the results, and assigns the results to the specified word,
where word can be either a variable or a machine component.
The expected syntax is:
Word = value1 DIV value2
For example:
Word = 10 DIV 3 = 3
Word = -8 DIV 3 = -2
#1 = 12 DIV 3 = 4
Concatenate String
This operator is used to concatenate two string variables.
Example:
VarA, VarB, and VarC are all defined in the Variables window as "Text" variables
VarA, VarB, and VarC are all defined in the Word Format window as
Type=Special, Sub Type=Variable Name
1807
VERICUT Help
<< is defined in the Word Format window as Type=Math,

Sub Type=Concatenate String
VarA = "ABC"
VarB = "DEF"
VarC = VarA << VarB
VarC = ABCDEF
Link Frame
Use to configure the control to use the Siemens Frame link operator ":". The Frame
link operator is used to combine the settings of 2, or more, functions or Frames in
one Frame setup.
See Notes about Siemens 840D DEF Command, in the Notes about Special Topics
section in the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
Function Sub Type — The control function that is called when the word is processed. Click
on in the record "Sub Type" field and select from the list of available options in the pull-
down menu. See Functions – Listed Alphabetically below.
You can also enter the name of a "custom" mathematical function, created with the CGTech
Macro Language (CML), in the Sub Type text field as these will not appear in the pull-down
list.
NOTE: The only time a value should ever be typed in is if it is a CMS function.
Type II Sub Type — Describes syntax expected in a "Type II" command. Enter one or more
of the descriptors listed below in the "Sub Type" text field to describe the expected syntax.
Descriptors used in combinations are separated by commas.
WV — word/value pair, e.g. "X1"
T — text string
V — numeric value
EXAMPLES:
1. Configuration for set axis offsets command "(AXO,X1,Y2,Z3)":
Name=AXO
Type= Type II
Sub Type = WV,WV,WV
2. Configuration for call subroutine command "(CLS,SUB1)":
1808
VERICUT Help
Name=CLSType= Type II
Sub Type= T,V,V,V,V,V
NOTE: The "V" descriptors shown in the example above, allow passing variables to
the subroutine, although none are being passed in the above call example.
Macro Sub Type — Specifies how the control interprets values, or "addresses" that follow
the word. Click on the record "Sub Type" field and select from the list of available options in
the pull-down menu.
Numeric — Interprets word values as numbers. The system reads the numeric
characters following the macro word until a non-numeric character is found, for
example: alphabet, symbol, or separator. The non-numeric character indicates the
beginning of a new word.
Alphabet — Interprets word values as alphabet characters. The system reads the
alphabet characters following the macro word until a non-alphabetic character is found,
for example: number, symbol, or separator.
Alpha-Numeric — Interprets word values as an alpha-numeric text string. The system
reads the characters following the macro word until a symbol or separator character is
found.
If a "Word" is defined to have an alpha-numeric value, then the text that follows is
assumed to be the corresponding value.
1. If the text value corresponds to an existing variable, then the value passed will
be the contents of the corresponding variable.
2. If the text value corresponds to a variable tag followed by a numeric value, then
the value passed will be the contents of the corresponding variable.
3. Array variables are not supported.
4. Expressions other then variables are not supported.
5. Alpha numeric characters include: A-Z, 0-9, ‘_” and sometimes ‘-“.
6. The above enhancement does not apply to block like the following, since an
alpha-numeric string does not follow the word
a. Word = NAME
b. Word [NAME]
See details on what is passed to a macro given various situations.
1809
VERICUT Help
Also see: Notes about String Capabilities in VERICUT, in the Notes about Special Topics
Composite-Numeric — Separates word values into pieces which can be individually

acted on. The system uses the Composite Format to "parse" the numeric characters
following the word until a non-numeric character is found, for example: alphabet,
symbol, or separator. See Composite Format for examples. Each separated piece of a
composite-numeric word/value is available for calling macros via the Configuration
menu > Word/Address function, and can be graphically selected from a word pick list.
List-Numeric — Separates an argument list following the word into pieces which can be
individually acted on. This option is useful in a situation like acting on "n" values
differently in the sample codes: TEXT(n,n,n,n,...) or TEXT n,n,n,n,... Parens may be
present but are not required, and commas separate the arguments. Up to 32 arguments
can be listed. Each argument must be numeric, or a math expression which equates to a
numeric value. Similar to Composite-Numeric value types, each separated piece of a list-
numeric word/value is available for calling macros. However, these pieces do not appear
in the word pick list. Specify the pieces via listing the word followed by a space and the
sequential number of the argument in the list. Following the above example, you could
use the Configuration menu > Word/Address function to associate macros with "TEXT
1" (corresponds to the first "n" parameter value, "TEXT 2" (second "n" parameter), and
so on.
List-Alpha-Numeric — Same as above description for List-Numeric with one addition.
The value may be a quoted-text string. In this case the quoted-text is not analyzed, and
is just passed as text to an associated Word/Address macro.
Alpha-Numeric + Arguments — This subtype is used to support subroutines with
arguments for the Siemens 840D PROC command. The text argument associated with
this subtype value will include an alpha-numeric string, and optionally, a string
beginning with a "(" and ending with a ")".
See "Notes about the Siemens 840D PROC command" in the Notes about Special Topics
Text String — Interprets word values as a text string. The system reads all the characters
following the macro word until the end of the line even if there is a defined word in it.
None — The word does not have an associated value. The first character after the word
indicates the beginning of a new word.
1810
VERICUT Help
EXAMPLES:
1. Assume the word "PGM" is defined as a Macro word type. The table below shows
how Sub Type can affect the interpretation of the values paired with "PGM".
Sample data block Sub Type= Sub Type= Sub Type= Sub Type=
Numeric Alphabet Alpha-Numeric None
PGM123ABC 123 none 123ABC none
PGMABC123 none ABC ABC123 none
2. Consider interpreting the following block of data: "TEST(10,20,30)"

In Word Format, add word "TEST" as follows:
Name=TEST
Type=Macro
Sub Type=List-Numeric
In Word/Address, add group to act on first argument in TEST list "10":
Word=TEST 1
Range=*
Macroname=<desired macro> (group is passed a value of "10")
and then add groups to act on second & third arguments in TEST list "20" and
"30":
Word=TEST 2
Range=*
Macroname=<desired macro> (passed value: "20")
Word=TEST 3
Range=*
Macroname=<desired macro> (passed value: "30")
Conditional Sub Type — The conditional control function that is called when the word is
processed. Click on in the record "Sub Type" field and select from the list of available
options in the pull-down menu. See Conditionals – Listed Alphabetically below. You can also
enter the name of a "custom" conditional function, created with the CGTech Macro
Language (CML), in the Sub Type text field as these will not appear in the pull-down list.
NOTE: The only time a value should ever be typed in is if it is a CMS conditional.
1811
VERICUT Help
Inch Method — Specifies how to interpret inch address values. This feature is significant only
for values that do not contain a decimal point. Values with a decimal are always interpreted via
the "Decimal" method. See NOTE below.
Options:
Decimal — Interprets values as floating point decimals.
Leading or Decimal — Interprets values without a decimal as having leading zeros.
Depending on the active unit system (inch or metric), values are interpreted as described by
the corresponding "Format" (see below).
Trailing or Decimal — Similar to Leading or Decimal, except interprets values as having
trailing zeros.
Inch Format — Specifies the number of digits before and after the decimal point when
interpreting Inch Method, "leading", or "trailing" zero values. Data entry format is: a.b where
"a" specifies the number of digits before, and "b" specifies the number of digits after the
decimal point. See NOTE below.
Metric Method — Specifies how to interpret metric address values. This feature is significant
only for values that do not contain a decimal point. Values with a decimal are always
interpreted via the "Decimal" method. See Inch Method, above, for list of options. See NOTE
below.
Metric Format — Specifies the number of digits before and after the decimal point when
interpreting Metric Method, "leading", or "trailing" zero values. Data entry format is: a.b where
"a" specifies the number of digits before, and "b" specifies the number of digits after the
decimal point. See NOTE below.
Multiply / Multiplier — When Multiply is set to "Yes", the word value is multiplied by the
amount specified in the Multiplier field. (Note that a multiplier of "1" has no affect on the word
value.)
NOTE: Only available when Type = Macro or Type = Conditional)
Composite Format — Specifies how to break up, or "parse" Composite-Numeric value types.
Enter one or more numbers separated by spaces to specify the quantity of parsed number
values and the significant places of each. An asterisk "*" can be used as a wild card entry. Each
parsed value appears in the word pick list of the Configuration menu > Word/Address function
to perform individual actions.
1812
VERICUT Help
EXAMPLE:
Parsing "T" word/values:
Sample data Composite Parsed values

block Format
T0203 22 T=203, T1=02, T2=03
T102 12 T=102, T1=1, T2=02
T0304 or T304 *2 T=304, T1=03, T2=04
T10001 *2 T=10001, T1=100, T2=01
T102 111 T=102, T1=1, T2=0, T3=2
T12345678 2*2 T=12345678, T1=12, T2=3456,

T3=78
T102.3 * 2.1 T=102.3, T1=1, T2=02, T3=3
T102.3 2.1 T=102.3, T1=10, T2=3
T12345678.321 2 2.2 T=12345678.321, T1=12,

T2=34, T3=32
Add — Adds a record to the Word Table enabling you to add words or special characters to the
control configuration.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted word record from the control configuration.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Component/Component collision list to display the
following menu.
1813
VERICUT Help
These provide the same functionality as Add and Delete described above.
Also see Add, Modify, or Delete Words the Control Interprets, in the Using the Word Format
window section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
To Word Format window
1814
VERICUT Help
Word Format window, Syntax Check tab
The features on the Syntax Check tab enable you to turn On/Off VERICUT defined syntax
checking rules (error conditions), and to define custom syntax checking error conditions for
checking the statements in your G-Code NC program file for valid syntax. The syntax rules and
settings are stored in the control file.
The actual syntax checking of an NC program file is started in the NC Program panel. See NC
Program, in the Info menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
1815
VERICUT Help
VERICUT Defined Syntax Errors
The following error conditions are provided with VERICUT. Simply toggle On (checkmark
displayed) the syntax error conditions that you want checked.
More than one decimal point in an address — Outputs an error when more than one decimal
point is found in an address.
Missing word before an address — Outputs an error when a necessary word is missing before
an address.
Unbalanced number of Parentheses or brackets — Outputs an error when the statement
contains more "opening" characters (i.e. (, or [ ) than "closing" characters (i.e. ), or ]).
Invalid comments — Outputs an error when invalid comment statements are found, for
example, a comment in the middle of a block.
Missing THEN or GOTO in IF statement — Outputs an error when an IF statement is missing a
THEN, or GOTO, statement.
Missing parentheses or brackets in If or While statement — Outputs an error when an IF, or
While, statement is missing necessary parentheses, or bracket, characters.
Missing parentheses or brackets in function — Outputs an error when necessary parentheses,
or bracket, characters are missing in a Function (or Conditional).
1816
VERICUT Help
Missing parentheses or brackets in word address — Outputs an error when necessary

parentheses, or brackets, characters are missing in a word address.
Word Format — Outputs an error for the numerical address of a word if the one of the
following coditions exist.
1. If the address has a decimal point and the total number of digits before/after the
decimal point exceeds the leading/trailing limit set in “Inch Format” or “Metric Format”.
2. If the address has no decimal point and the word format is “Decimal”, and the total
number of digits exceeds the leading limit set in in “Inch Format” or “Metric Format”.
3. If the address has no decimal point and the word format is “Leading Decimal” or
“Trailing Decimal”, and the total number of digits exceeds the sum of leading and
trailing limit set in in “Inch Format” or “Metric Format”
Unbalanced Parentheses on a single line — Outputs an error when a single line contains more
"opening" parentheses characters ( ( ) than "closing" parentheses characters ( ) ).
Lower case letters (comments excluded) — Outputs an error if lower case letters are detected
in a block. Comments are excluded in this che ck.
Lower case Letters — Outputs an error if lower case letters are detected in a block. Comments
are included in this check.
Missing decimal points in word address (leading or trailing format) — Outputs an error if
incorrect characters are found before or after a mathematical operator, i.e. “+”, “-“, “*”, “/”
and etc.
Incorrect characters before or after a mathematical operator — Outputs an error if brackets
are missing in mathematical expression of a word address.
For example:
X#101+#102 <-BAD
X[#101+#102] <- GOOD
User Defined Syntax Errors
User Defined Syntax Error Record Table
1817
VERICUT Help
Each record in the table contains the following features:
Check box — Each record has a checkbox enabling you to toggle the record On/Off.
Type — You can define the following two types of User Defined syntax errors
Condition — Enables you to specific conditions that will be considered an error.
A, B, C, D, E — Each of these fields represent a word, or group of words, used with the
Condition fields to define the error condition. Each field is a text field that uses a space
to separate words. The "space" is interpret as an "OR" condition.
For example, "G30 G31" is interpret as "G30 or G31"
The tilda character, "~", is used to define a range of numbers/values.
For example, "G30~33" is interpret as "G30 or G31 or G32 or G33".
It can be used to check for mutual exclusive groups.
For example: "G30~39" AND "G30~39" means you can only have a G3* code in the
same line, otherwise it's an error.
It can also be used to check the limits.
For example "X-6~5" will find all X values between -6 to 5.
Condition — Use each of the Condition fields to specify the condition between the
words, or groups of words, in the adjacent columns (i.e, "A" NOT "B"), that together
define the error condition. Select the desired condition from the pull-down list. Choose
"blank", (interpret as an "OR" condition), AND, or NOT.
For example, "G30 G31" AND "G90" means if there is a "G30" or a "G31" and there is
a "G90" on the same line, it's an error.
Word Format — Enables you to check the numeric format of a word's address.
A — Use this column to specify the word, or words, used with the Condition field to
define the error condition. Use a space to separate the words in this field.
Condition — Use this field to specify the error condition for the word, or words
specified in column A that define the error condition. Select the desired condition from
the pull-down list. Choose Decimal or Integer.
For example, "M N" Decimal means Word M and Word N must followed by an
integer, otherwise it's an error.
Add — Adds a User Defined Syntax Error record, after the highlighted record, to the table.
1818
VERICUT Help
Delete — Deletes the highlighted User Defined Syntax Error record from the table.
Select All — Toggles On all, both VERICUT defined and User Defined syntax error conditions.
Clear All — Toggles Off all, both VERICUT defined and User Defined, syntax error conditions.
See Add, Modify, or Delete Error Conditions for Syntax Checking, also in the Configuration
menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for additional information.
To Word Format window
1819
VERICUT Help
Conditionals - listed alphabetically
The meaning of many words are conditional depending on the context of the block in which
they are found.
For example:
An "=" can indicate an assignment, as in #5 = 3 but an "=" can also indicate a logical equal,
as in: IF (#5 = 3) GOTO …
Conditional functions, referenced via the Configuration > Word Format table, are used in these
cases to define the type of Word based on context of the current block. Typically, the
conditional function sets the Word Type and Sub Type for the current word, for the current
block. In a few cases, it might also change the Word itself.
For example:
The OkumaCondNWord conditional function will either keep the Word as "N", or change the
Word to be "N_LABEL", "N_GOTO_LABEL", or "N_GOTO_SEQ". In these cases, these other
words must also be defined in the Word Format table.
Conditionals
AbCondEqual
This conditional determines whether the "=" should be interpreted as an assignment or as a
logical operator. If the "=" is part of an IF or GTO Type II command, it will be defined as a logical
operator. Otherwise, it will be determined as an assignment operator.
AbCondLeftParen
This conditional looks at the next two characters to determine if it is a known "TYPE II"
command. If the following 2 characters are: AB, AP, AT, CC, CL, CN, CS, CY, FA, KB, MD, MI, MT,
NS, QU, RN, TA, TB, TC, TS, TT, or ZT, then the left paren is interpreted as the beginning of a
type II command. Otherwise it is interpreted as a comment.
AbCondRightParen
If a comment is currently being processed, then the right paren is interpreted as an "END
COMMENT" special control word. Otherwise it is interpreted as an "END TYPEII" word.
1820
VERICUT Help
AtanCondDivide
AtanCondDivide(block_str)
If the "/" symbol is part of an ATAN argument and is not imbedded within brackets ([ ]), then
this function returns the type SEPARATOR. Otherwise this function returns the type DIVIDE.
CinciCondEqual
If G10 exists in the block, ignore the current word. If G11 exists in the block, interpret the
current word as a logical EQUAL. Otherwise, interpret the current word as an assignment.
CinciCondLeftBracket
If the previous character was "T", ignore the current word. Otherwise, interpret the current
word as a LEFT PRECEDENCE. Requires values to be initialized using the CinciBlockInit macro.
CinciCondLeftParen
This conditional returns "Begin Type II", if a Type II command follows. Otherwise returns "Left
Precedence". Requires values to be initialized using the CinciBlockInit macro.
CinciCondRightBracket
The current word will be either ignored or interpreted as a RIGHT PRECEDENCE depending on
how the matching CinciCondLeftBracket was interpreted. Requires values to be initialized using
the CinciBlockInit macro.
CinciCondRightParen
This conditional returns "End Type II", if it is currently processing a Type II command. Otherwise
it returns "Right Precedence". Requires values to be initialized using the CinciBlockInit macro.
CinciCondTWord
If the current word was preceded by a "[", interpret the current word as a VARIABLE TAG.
Otherwise, interpret the current word as a MACRO.
1821
VERICUT Help
CinciCondVWord
This conditional returns "Assignment", if a G10 is contained in the block. Otherwise it returns
"Command".
ConstCondEXPWord
This conditional word type is used to differentiate between a word specifying a variable or a
real number in scientific format/notation. In the Siemens 840D language a number can be
defined in scientific format using decimal exponent: 0.123EX-5. In this case the EX is not a word.
To process this input correctly, define the word EX in Word Format Table as a Conditional with
subtype ConstCondEXPWord.
NOTE: If the EX word is used in a context which doesn't represent valid scientific notation, it is
processed as a variable name.
CycleCondPWord
This conditional sets P_1 (default) or P_2 after checking the context of the block containing the
P-word. P_2 is set when the block contains a G76 and either X, Y, U or W words.
CycleCondQWord
This conditional sets Q_1 (default) or Q_2 after checking the context of the block containing the
Q-word. Q_2 is set when the block contains a G76 and either X, Y, U or W words.
CycleCondRWord
This conditional sets R_1 (default) or R_2 after checking the context of the block containing the
R-word. R_2 is set when the block contains a G74, G75, G76 and either X, Z, U or W words.
CycleCondUWord
This conditional sets U_1 (default) or U_2 after checking the context of the block containing the
U-word. U_2 is set when the block contains a G71, G72, G73 and either P or Q words.
CycleCondWWord
This conditional sets W_1 (default) or W_2 after checking the context of the block containing
the W-word. W_2 is set when the block contains a G71, G72, G73 and either P or Q words.
1822
VERICUT Help
FadalCondAsteriskWord
FadalCondAsteriskWord(block_str)
If the Asterisk Word comes after a "#" character, then this function returns the type MULTIPLY.
Otherwise this function returns the type COMMENT.
FadalCondEqualWord
FadalCondEqualWord(block_str)
If the Equal Word comes after the string "IF", then this function returns the type EQ .
Otherwise, this function returns the type ASSIGNMENT.
FadalCondLParenWord
FadalCondLParenWord(block_str)
If the Left Parenthesis Word comes after a "#" character, then this function returns the type
LPAREN. Otherwise this function returns the type COMMENT.
FadalCondNWord
FadalCondNWord(block_str)
If the N Word comes after a "#" character, then this function returns the type IGNORE.
Otherwise this function returns the type COMMAND.
FadalCondRParenWord
FadalCondRParenWord(block_str)
If the Right Parenthesis Word comes after a "#" character, then this function returns the type
RPAREN. Otherwise this function returns the type END_COMMENT.
FadalCondRWord
FadalCondRWord(block_str)
If the R Word comes after a “G” character, then this function returns the type COMMAND.
Otherwise this function returns the type VARIABLE_TAG.
1823
VERICUT Help
GeminiCondEqual
This conditional determines whether the "=" should be interpreted as an assignment or as a
logical operator. If the "=" is part of an IFT, it will be defined as a logical operator. Otherwise, it
will be determined as an assignment operator.
GLCondPWord
GLCondPWord(block_str)
If the P word is part of a PDO command, in CYCLE mode, or if the next non-space character on
the block is a "=", then this functions returns the type COMMAND. Otherwise this function
returns the type VARIABLE_TAG.
GLCondPWord2
GLCondPWord2(block_str)
The P word can either be part of a COMMAND, or a VARIABLE_TAG. If P is part of a "LET" TYPE II
command or if P is part of a VALUE argument of a TYPE II command, or is preceded by =, +, -, *,
/, [, or (, then the P will be interpreted as a VARIABLE TAG. If an integer value does not follow
the P, then the P will be interpreted as a COMMAND. If the integer number is followed by a =,
+, -, *, /, ], or ), then the P will be interpreted as a VARIABLE TAG. Otherwise the P will be
interpreted as a COMMAND. This conditional function is an alternative to GLCondPWord. You
can use which ever function produces the correct results for you.
HeidCondDivide
 Conditional function which determines how a "/" character is to be interpreted.
 If a "REP" precedes the "/" on the line, then it will be interpreted BEGIN COMMENT.
 If a "CYCL DEF 14.1" precedes the "/" on the line, it is recognized as a list separator used
between contour subroutines.
 Otherwise it will be interpreted as DIVIDE.
HeidCondLblWord
On a Heidenhain control, the LBL word can either be followed by a quoted string, or by a
number, or by an expression which equates to a number. If the next (non space) character is a
1824
VERICUT Help
double quote, then this conditional function will change the word to be LBL_STRING, and the
word type to be Macro. Otherwise, this function will change the word to be LBL_VALUE, and
the word type to be Macro. These 2 new words must be defined in the control. The Word Sub
Type will be picked up from the corresponding entry in the table.
HeidCondLeftParen
This conditional is designed for Heidenhain MillPlus controls, where standard comments are
preceded by a semicolon, but it is also permissible to use (comment) at the end of a block. It is
used to determine when the "(" word is used as a left precedence for mathematical expression,
and when it is used as a start of comment character.
HeidCondLessThan
This conditional is designed for Heidenhain controls where the LT word is used as logical
operator "less than" for "IF" statements and the APPR/DEP function uses LT as a option for line
tangential.
When an "LT" word is specified as Type: Conditional with SubType: HeidCondLessThan, it will be
considered to be logical operator "less than", when used with an "IF" statement. It will be
considered to be a MACRO, if used with an "APPR/DEP’ statement.
HeidCondMultiply
This conditional is designed for the Heidenhain 530i control where the End Of Block (EOB)
character is "*". It is used to determine when the "*" word is used as a mathematical multiply
operator, and when it is used as an EOB character. If the "*" is only followed by white space
characters (blank space, tab, etc.), it is interpret as an EOB character.
HeidCondRightParen
This conditional is designed for Heidenhain MillPlus controls, where standard comments are
preceded by a semicolon, but it is also permissible to use (comment) at the end of a block. It is
used to determine when the ")" word is used as a right precedence for mathematical
expressions, and when it is used as an end of comment character.
HeidCondQWord
If the Q word comes after a D0 or a D1 string and prior to a P0 string, then this conditional
function returns the type COMMAND. Otherwise this conditional function returns the type
VARIABLE TAG
1825
VERICUT Help
KtCondLeftParen
KtCondRightParen
KtCondLeftParen(), KtCondRightParen()
These conditionals support the "(" and ")" words when used as mathematical precedence and
as Begin Type 2 data.
NumCondAWord
NumCondAWord(block_str)
If the non-white space character immediately preceding the A Word is a "=", "<" , ">", "+", "-",
"*", "/", "&", or "!", it is interpret as type FUNCTION, and sets the word to mathematical
function ATAN. Otherwise the word is interpreted as a COMMAND (or MACRO).
NumCondCWord
NumCondCWord(block_str)
If the non-white space character immediately preceding the C Word is a "=", "<" , ">", "+", "-",
function COS. Otherwise the word is interpreted as a COMMAND (or MACRO).
NumCondDollarSignWord
NumCondDollarSignWord(block_str)
If the Dollar Sign Word comes after an "=", and the previous non-space character is a '+', '-', '*',
'/', '=', '<', '>, or a '[', then this function returns the type FUNCTION, and sets the word to
NUM_INPUT. Otherwise this function returns the type CONSOLE_MSG.
NumCondEqualWord
NumCondEqualWord(block_str)
If the Equal Word comes after the string "G79", "UNTIL", or "WHILE", or if the Equal Word
comes after the string "IF" and before the word "THEN", then this function returns the type EQ.
Otherwise, this function returns the type ASSIGNMENT.
1826
VERICUT Help
NumCondEWord
NumCondEWord(block_str)
If the E Word comes after a number, or if it begins the block, then this function returns the type
VARIABLE_TAG. Otherwise this function returns the type FUNCTIONS, and sets the word to
E_FUNC.
NumCondRWord
NumCondRWord(block_str)
If the non-white space character immediately preceding the R Word is a "=", "<" , ">", "+", "-",
function SQRT. Otherwise the word is interpreted as a COMMAND (or MACRO).
NumCondSWord
NumCondSWord(block_str)
If the non-white space character immediately preceding the S Word is a "=", "<" , ">", "+", "-",
function SIN. Otherwise the word is interpreted as a COMMAND (or MACRO).
NumCondTWord
NumCondTWord(block_str)
If the non-white space character immediately preceding the T Word is a "=", "<" , ">", "+", "-",
"*", "/", "&", or "!", it is interpret as type FUNCTION, and sets the word to FIX. Otherwise the
word is interpreted as a COMMAND (or MACRO).
OkumaCondNWord
OkumaCondNWord(block_str)
This function internally redefines the "N" word during parsing depending upon how it is being
used:
 If the next non-space character is numeric and the string "IF" or "GOTO" existed
previously on the line, then this routine returns the type CONDITIONAL, and sets the
word to N_GOTO_LABEL.
1827
VERICUT Help
 If the next non-space character is numeric and the string "IF" or "GOTO" does not
previously exist on the line, then this routine returns the type CONDITIONAL, and sets
the word to N_LABEL.
 If the next non-space character is not numeric, and the string "IF" or "GOTO" existed
previously on the line, then this routine returns the type CONDITIONAL, and sets the
word to N_GOTO_SEQ.
For this functionality to work, the following words must be defined in the Configuration menu >
Word Format window:
 Name=N, Type=Conditional, Function Name=OkumaCondNWord
 Name=N_GOTO_LABEL, Type=Macro, Value Type=Alpha-Numeric
 Name=N_GOTO_SEQ, Type=Macro, Value Type=Numeric, Inch Method/Metric
Method=Decimal
 Name=N_LABEL, Type=Macro, Value Type=Alpha-Numeric
Then, the Configuration menu > Word/Address function must also be configured to process
the above-listed words, for example in the "Specials" class:
 Word=N Range=*, Condition=* *, Macroname=Sequence, Scan=Yes, After=No
 Word=N_GOTO_LABEL Range=*, Condition=* *, Macroname=LabelName & GotoLabel,
Scan=No, After=No
 Word=N_GOTO_SEQ Range=*, Condition=* *, Macroname=GotoJump, Scan=No,
After=No
 Word=N_LABEL Range=*, Condition=* *, Macroname=LabelMacro, Scan=Yes, After=No
OliCondLeftParent
OliCondLeftParent(block_str)
If the Left Parenthesis Word comes after a "=" character, then this function returns the type
LPAREN. Otherwise this function returns the type BEGIN_TYPEII.
OliCondRightParent
OliCondRightParent(block_str)
If the Right Parenthesis Word comes after a BEGIN_TYPEII word, then this function returns the
type END_TYPEII. Otherwise this function returns the type RPAREN.
1828
VERICUT Help
OsaiCondEqualWord
OsaiCondEqualWord(block_str)
If the Equal Word comes after the string "GTO", "IF", "EPB" or "WOS" then this function returns
the type EQ. Otherwise, this function returns the type ASSIGNMENT.
PlasmaCondLParenWord
This conditional determines whether or not ‘(‘ starts a comment. If the ‘(‘ is nested within angle
brackets ‘<’ and ‘>’ then it will be interpreted as “Left Precedence”, otherwise it will be
interpreted as “Begin Comment”.
PlasmaCondRParenWord
This conditional determines whether or not ‘)‘ ends a comment. If the ‘)‘ is nested within angle
brackets ‘<’ and ‘>’ then it will be interpreted as “Right Precedence”, otherwise it will be
interpreted as “End Comment”.
QuoteCondBINWord
This conditional word type is used to differentiate between a word specifying a quoted string or
an integer number in binary format. In the Siemens 840D language a number can be defined in
binary format in single quotes ‘B1011101’. In this case it is not a string but a number 93. To
process this input correctly, define the word ‘B in the Word Format Table as a Conditional with
subtype QuoteCondBINWord.
NOTE: If the content of a quoted string is not a valid binary number it is processed as a quoted
string.
QuoteCondHEXWord
integer number in hexadecimal format. In the Siemens 840D language a number can be defined
in hexadecimal format in single quotes ‘HABDF101’. In this case it is not a string but the number
180220161. To process this input correctly, define the word ‘H in the Word Format Table as
Conditional with subtype QuoteCondHEXWord.
1829
VERICUT Help
NOTE: If content of quoted string is not a valid hexadecimal number it is processed as a

quoted string.
QuoteCondOCTWord
integer number in octal format. In some NC languages a number can be defined in octal format
in single quotes ‘O17721’. In this case it is not string but the number 8145. To process this input
correctly, define word ‘O in Word Format Table as a Conditional with subtype
QuoteCondOCTWord.
NOTE: If content of quoted string is not a valid octal number it is processed as a quoted string.
Siemens3RCond
Siemens3RCond(block_str)
This conditional is the same as SiemensRCond(block_str), except that it also looks to see if the
@ command had finish prior to this point in the block. It does this by looking backwards from
the current point, and checking to see if a non-operator, non-R, non-digit character exists
between the current point and the @ command. When the R word is used as a command, it
typically calls the VariableArgument macro. This sets up the addition arguments that are then
processed by the specific Siemens macro.
Siemens840DRCond
This conditional determines whether the "R" should be interpreted as a variable tag, or as a
macro call. This conditional will consider that "R" is a macro call if, and only if, there is a (G 81-
89, 183, 184) on the same block and there is no other word in front of it. For example, G81 X R5
will have R be determined as a variable tag, since there is a word X in front of it.
This conditional will work as desired in all but one exception. If there is a variable name that
ends with an alphabet character before the R, then the R will be considered as a variable tag,
even if it was intended to be a macro call. If you want to have this condition used as a macro
call, put a parenthesis, ( ), around the variable name; and this will resolve the problem.
SiemensAXISCond
SiemensAXISCond(block_str)
This conditional supports AXIS constants in logical expressions when an IF statement is
processed. All axes used in the NC program and referred to in logical expressions should be
1830
VERICUT Help
defined in Word/Format table using the SiemensAXISCond conditional function and format
specifically for the particular axis.
SiemensCALLCond
This conditional Sub Type can be used to correctly parse the Siemens 840D CALL statement. In
one case CALL is followed by a subroutine name which requires the use of Sub Type Alpha-
Numeric. Another case is with “CALL BLOCK label1 TO label2” where CALL requires Sub Type
None. This conditional function solves this ambiguity automatically.
SiemensCondLParenWord
SiemensCondLParenWord()
If MCALL is on the line, the word type is set to Left Precedence, otherwise it is set to Begin
Comment.
SiemensCondRParenWord
SiemensCondRParenWord()
If MCALL is on the line, the word type is set to Right Precedence, otherwise it is set to End
Comment.
SiemensGCond
This conditional word type is used to differentiate between a G-Code command and a G[n]
numeric variable array. Siemens 840D programming can use G as an integer array associated
with all G-Code groups. This feature allows indirect programming of G-Code and testing the
current value of a specific G group in an NC program. Note that to support indirect
programming like G[8] = 2, the G[8] variable in G-Code Processing should contain the same
macros as corresponding G-Code (G54 in this case).
For more information about G groups and programming see the Siemens 840D Programming
Manual Fundamentals.
1831
VERICUT Help
SiemensRCond
SiemensRCond(block_str)
If the R Word comes after a "@" character, then this function returns the type COMMAND.
Otherwise this function returns the type VARIABLE_TAG.
SiemensTOCondWord
This conditional Sub Type can be used to correctly parse two different Siemens 840D
statements where word TO is used. One case is in the CALL BLOCK statement where the word
TO is followed by a label. The other case is the FOR loop statement where the word TO is
followed by a number or expression.
TosnucCondVWord
If the current word is within square brackets ( "[" and "]" ), interpret the current word as a
VARIABLE TAG. Otherwise, interpret the current word as a MACRO.
1832
VERICUT Help
Functions - listed alphabetically

The functions which can be referenced via Configuration menu > Word Format are listed below
in alphabetical order. Functions are typically passed a single numerical value, and return a
numerical value.
Functions
abs
abs(value)
This function returns the absolute value of the specified value.
AbsCeil
This function rounds the specified value to the next higher absolute integer value. For example:
2.3 would be rounded to 3, and -2.3 would be rounded to -3.
AbsoluteDimension
This new functions will handle formats like: X=AC[2] Y=IC[3] Z=AC[2] I=AC[1] J=AC[2] where "["
and "]" are the left and right precedence words. In the above format, AC and IC should be
defined as words which then call the function.
If the primary word is X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,or W then:

AbsoluteDimension will cause the specified value to be interpreted as absolute, and if
the control is currently in incremental mode, it will convert it.
If the primary word is I,J, or K then:
AbsoluteDimension will use the absolute mode, the "Circle Center Mode" settings, and
the "Incremental Circle Center Method" settings to determine how to convert the value.
If the primary word is anything other then the above, no conversion will be executed, and
the incoming value will be returned.
Also see: IncrementalDimension
acos_d
acos_d(value)
This function returns the arc cosine of the specified value. The specified value must be in the
range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in degrees, and is in the range of 0.0 to 180.0.
1833
VERICUT Help
acos_r
acos_r(value)
This function returns the arc cosine of the specified value. The specified value must be in the
range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in radians, and is in the range of 0 to pi.
asin_d
asin_d(value)
This function returns the arc sine of the specified value. The specified value must be in the
range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in degrees, and is in the range of -90.0 to 90.0.
asin_d270to90
asin_d270to90(value)
range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in degrees, and is in the range of 270.0 to 90.0.
asin_r
asin_r(value)
range of -1.0 to 1.0. The return value is in radians, and is in the range of -pi/2 to pi/2.
atan2_d
atan2_d(yvalue, xvalue)
This function returns the arc tangent of yvalue/xvalue. The return value is in degrees, and is in
the range of -180.0 to 180.0. If yvalue and xvalue are both zero, the return value will be zero. If
only one argument is passed, it will be treated like an atan_d.
atan2_d0to360
atan2_d0to360(yvalue, xvalue)
This function returns the arc tangent of yvalue, xvalue. The return value is in degrees, and is in
the range of 0.0 to 360.0. If yvalue and xvalue are both zero, the return value will be zero. If
1834
VERICUT Help
only one argument is passed, an atan will be executed, and the resulting value will be converted
into an angle between 0.0 and 360.
atan2_r
atan2_r(yvalue, xvalue)
This function returns the arc tangent of yvalue, xvalue. The return value is in radians, and is in
the range of -pi to pi. If yvalue and xvalue are both zero, the return value will be zero. If only
one argument is passed, it will be treated like an atan_r.
atan_d
atan_d(value)
This function returns the arc tangent of the specified value. The return value is in degrees, and
is in the range of -90.0 to 90.0.
atan_r
atan_r(value)
This function returns the arc tangent of the specified value. The return value is in radians, and is
in the range of -pi/2 to pi/2.
ceil
ceil(value)
This function returns the least integral value greater than or equal to the specified value.
cosh_d
cosh_d(angle)
This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle specified in degrees.
cosh_r
cosh_r(angle)
This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle specified in radians.
1835
VERICUT Help
cos_d
cos_d(angle)
This function returns the cosine of the given angle specified in degrees.
cos_r
cos_r(angle)
This function returns the cosine of the given angle specified in radians.
DFix
DFix(value)
This function truncates the decimal portion of "value" to the number of decimal places
specified by DfixPrecisionIndex macro.
Examples:
Assuming that DfixPrecisionIndex = 3,
If the DFix "value" = 1.5672 results in 1.567
If the DFix "value" = 1.5678 results in 1.567
The value is always truncated.
DFup
DFup(value)
This function takes the decimal portion of "value", and considers the below the specified
number of decimal places, specified by DfupPrecisionIndex macro, to be a whole number and
increases the final digit by 1.
Examples:
Assuming that DfupPrecisionIndex = 3,
If the DFup "value" = 1.5672 then the resulting value would be 1.568
If the DFup "value" = -1.5678 then the resulting value would be -1.568 (the function uses an
"absolute value" for the calculation)
1836
VERICUT Help
DRound
DRound(value)
This function rounds up decimal portion of "value" to the number of decimal places specified
by DroundPrecisionIndex macro.
Examples:
Assuming that DroundPrecisionIndex = 3,
If the DRound "value" = 1.5672 then the resulting value would be 1.567
If the DRound "value" = 1.5678 then the resulting value would be is 1.568
If the DRound "value" = 1.5675 then the resulting value would be 1.568
If the DRound "value" = -1.5678 then the resulting value would be -1.568 (the function uses
an "absolute value" for the rounding calculation)
exp
exp(power)
This function returns the natural logarithm "e" raised to the specified power.
floor
floor(value)
This function returns the greatest integral value less than or equal to the specified value.
Fractional
Fractional(value)
This function returns the fractional portion of the specified value.
get_current_N_seqno
get_current_N_seqno()
This function returns value of the current N word. If the N word was not specified on the
current line, the value of the last specified N word is returned.
1837
VERICUT Help
IncrementalDimension
This function will handle formats like: X=AC[2] Y=IC[3] Z=AC[2] I=AC[1] J=AC[2] where "[" and
"]" are the left and right precedence words. In the above format, AC and IC should be defined
as words which then call the function.
If the primary word is X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,or W then:

IncrementalDimension will cause the specified value to be interpreted as incremental,
and if the control is currently in absolute mode, it will convert it.
If the primary word is I,J, or K then:
IncrementalDimension will use the incremental mode, the "Circle Center Mode"
settings, and the "Incremental Circle Center Method" settings to determine how to
convert the value.
If the primary word is anything other then the above, no conversion will be executed, and
the incoming value will be returned.
Also see: AbsoluteDimension
IncrementalValue
This function is an alternate way of handling the Siemens IC command. Traditionally, function
IncrementalDimension was used. This function sets a flag stating that the value is incremental.
It causes any Override Value to be ignored for this value.
In the Word Address table, the Conditional State “ABS_INC” has been enhanced to support
either Incremental mode, or a value set with the IncrementalValue function. A few specific
macros have been enhanced to look to see if this new incremental flag is set. These macros
include:
XAxisMotion
YAxisMotion
ZAxisMotion
AAxisMotion
BAxisMotion
CAxisMotion
UAxisMotion
VAxisMotion
WAxisMotion
A2AxisMotion
B2AxisMotion
C2AxisMotion
CircleCenterX
CircleCenterY
CircleCenterZ
1838
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. The IncrementalDimensionMode feature is supported within XAxisMotion.
2. Mirroring is not supported with the CircleCenter… macros when used with this function.
3. “After Motion” is not supported with this function.
INDEX
Result = INT
Parameter 1 = STRING
Parameters 2 to 3 = CHAR
This function implements the Siemens 840D function INDEX. It is used to find the character (2nd
parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The result gives the place at which the character
was first found. The search is from left to right. The 1st character in the string has the index 0.
Also see: RINDEX
INTERSEC
INTERSEC (Table_name1[index1], Table_name2[index2], Intersection_point, Machining_type)
This function implements the Siemens 840D function INTERSEC. It is used to determine the
point of intersection of two contour elements generated by the CONTPRON command.
Parameter "Table_name" is used to specify a two dimensional array row where "index" is an
integer expression defining the row index where contour element data is stored. Parameter
"Intersection_point" is a real array variable, with the minimum size of 2, where intersection
point will be returned.
Parameter "Machining_type" is an integer parameter specifying machining type. This

parameter is ignored in the current implementation.
The function returns a 1 if the point of intersection is found, or 0 if it is not found. The current
logic supports contour linear and circular elements.
For more details see Siemens Programming Manual, 06/2009, paragraph 15.4, page 815,
Determine point of intersection between two contour elements (INTERSEC).
1839
VERICUT Help
IntTrunc
IntTrunc(value)
This function returns the integer portion of the specified value.
IntTruncAdj
This function is identical to IntTrunc, except that it automatically adjusts for computer round
off errors. The following are the results you can expect:
#1 = TRUNC[4.1] (ANSWER: 4)
#2 = TRUNC[-4.1] (ANSWER: -4)
#3 = TRUNC[4.1 - 0.1] (ANSWER: 3)
#4 = TRUNC[-4.1 + 0.1] (ANSWER: -3)
#5 = TRUNC_ADJ[4.1] (ANSWER: 4)
#6 = TRUNC_ADJ[-4.1] (ANSWER: -4)
#7 = TRUNC_ADJ[4.1 - 0.1] (ANSWER: 4)
#8 = TRUNC_ADJ[-4.1 + 0.1] (ANSWER: -4)
ISAXIS
ISAXIS(integer)
This function checks whether the integer parameter refers to an existing machine geometric
axis. Valid parameter values are 1, 2 and 3 (X, Y and Z). Function returns TRUE (1) if the
specified axis exists. The result of inquiry is not based on machine kinematics but rather on
control configuration. Axis X exists if the corresponding system variable $P_AXN1 is defined as
an axis and is set. Similarly, parameter values 2 and 3, refer to the $P_AXN2 and $P_AXN3
variables.
ISFILE
ISFILE (string)
It is used to check if the specified string refers to an existing file in the system. If file is found the
function returns a 1 (TRUE), otherwise the function returns 0 (FALSE). The function checks the
current Working Directory, project folder and library trying to find the specified file. The default
file extension is MPF. The string argument can contain the file path if necessary.
1840
VERICUT Help
ISNUMBER
ISNUMBER(string)
This function checks whether the string parameter is the valid representation of a real number.
It returns a value 1 if the string represents a number, or a value of 0 if not.
See also function NUMBER.
ISVAR
ISVAR(string)
This function checks whether the input string parameter is a valid variable name. The variable
name must be declared but does not necessarily have to be initialized. This function supports
the Siemens 840D ISVAR function.
ln
ln(value)
This function returns the natural logarithm of the specified value. The specified value must be
positive otherwise zero is returned.
log
log(value)
This function returns the base 10 logarithm of the specified value. The specified value must be
positive otherwise zero is returned.
MAX
The MAX function returns the maximum of 2 values
For example:
#1 = 5
#2 = 3
#3 = MAX[#1, #2] ;#3 = 5
#3 = MAX[#1, 9] ;#3 = 9
1841
VERICUT Help
MIN
The MIN function returns the minimum of 2 values
For example:
#1 = 5
#2 = 3
#3 = MIN[#1, #2] ;#3 = 3
#3 = MIN[#1, 9] ;#3 = 5
MINDEX
(str1, str2)
This is a string processing function used in Siemens 840D programs. It returns the index of the
first occurrence of any character of str2 found in string str1. The returned index value is
counted from 1. A return value of 0 indicates that no character in str2 is present in str1. For
more details see the Siemens 840D Programming Manual.
Mod
The Mod function divides the first argument (value1) by the second argument (value2), and
then assigns the remainder to the specified word, where word can be either a variable or a
machine component.
When defined as a Function, the expected syntax is:
word = Mod[value1,value2]
word is set to the remainder when value1 is divided by value2.
For example:
word = Mod[10, 20] = 10
word = Mod[10,3] = 1
word = Mod[10.1,3] = 1.1
word = Mod[12,3] = 0
word = Mod[7,0] = 7
NOTE: Mod can also be used as a mathematical operator. See Mod in the Word Format
window: Word Format tab section, also in VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help,
1842
VERICUT Help
NOT
NOT value
It is used to check if an argument (value) is equal to 0 and returns 1 (TRUE), otherwise returns 0
(FALSE).
NumAtan
NumAtan(value)
Similar to atan2_d(yvalue, xvalue), except the return value is in thousandths of a degree.
NUMBER
NUMBER(string)
This function converts the input string into a real number and returns its value. The string must
represent a valid real number. Scientific notification with an exponent is supported. It returns a
value of 0 if the string does not represent a valid real number.
See also function ISNUMBER.
NumEFunc
NumEFunc(value)
If the variable is being assigned to a COMMAND word, a "NUM" specific factor is applied to the
value of the variable.
NumInput
NumInput()
This function causes the program to prompt the user for input. If the first character of input is
a-z or A-Z, a value of 1-26 is returned. If the user enters a numeric value, the value entered will
be returned.
Example:
#1 = NUM_INPUT
Then define NUM_INPUT to be a word of Type “Function” and Sub Type “NumInput” which
calls the function NumInput.
OperatorTextInput
OperatorTextInput(“Prompt Message”)
1843
VERICUT Help
This function causes the program to pop up a window, and prompt the user for input. This pop
up window will contain the specified “Prompt Message”. The user input will then be returned.
The input will be interpreted as text. This function can be used as follows:
NAME = TEXT_INPUT(“Enter your name”)
Where Name is a variable of type Text.

TEXT_INPUT is a Word of type Function, which calls OperatorTextInput
OperatorValueInput
OperatorValueInput(“Prompt Message”)
This function causes the program to pop up a window, and prompt the user for input. This pop
up window will contain the specified “Prompt Message”. The user input will then be returned.
The input will be interpreted as numeric. This function can be used as follows:
#1 = VALUE_INPUT(“Enter the X value”)
Where #1 is a variable of type Number (actually in this case, # is a Variable Tag, and variable 1 is
of type Number)
VALUE_INPUT is a Word of type Function, which calls OperatorValueInput
pow
The word POWER is used for raising a number to a power.
Define POWER as Type = Function, Sub Type = pow when the syntax is of the form:
#1 = POWER(3,2)
(meaning that the first argument is to be raised by the power of the second argument)
If the syntax is of the form:

#1 = 3 POWER 2
(meaning 3 raised to the second power, more commonly written as: 3 ^ 2)
Define POWER as Type = Math, Sub Type = Power
RINDEX
Result =INT
Parameter 1 = STRING
Parameters 2 to 3 = CHAR
1844
VERICUT Help
This function implements the Siemens 840D function RINDEX. It is used to find the character
(2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The result gives the place at which the
character was first found. The search is from right to left. The 1st character in the string has the
index 0.
Also see: INDEX
Round
Round(value)
This function returns the integral value closest to the specified value.
SiemensACN
SiemensACN(value)
This function is used to set the rotary component, or spindle, at an angle specified by value. The
new position is achieved by rotating component in a negative direction (CW) from current
position.
NOTE: This function is based on the Siemens 840D command ACN.
SiemensACP
SiemensACP(value)
This function is used to set rotary component, or spindle, at an angle specified by value.
The new position is achieved by rotating the component in a positive direction (CCW) from
current position.
NOTE: This function is based on the Siemens 840D command ACP.
SiemensAxName
This function is passed the name of an AXIS (a string value), and returns the AXIS value.
SiemensAxString
This function is passed an AXIS value, and returns the AXIS name (a string value).
1845
VERICUT Help
SiemensCFINE
This function is used to configure the control to use the Siemens Frame setting function CFINE.
Function CFINE is used to set fine values of translation for specified axes in Frame.
See Notes about Siemens 840D DEF Command, in the Notes about Special Topics section in the
CGTech Help Library for additional information.
SiemensCMIRROR
This function is used to configure the control to use the Siemens Frame setting function
CMIRROR. Function CMIRROR is used to set a mirrored (reverse) orientation for specified axes
in Frame.
Siemens CROT
This function is used to configure the control to use the Siemens Frame setting function CROT.
Function CROT is used to set rotation angle values around specified axes in Frame.
SiemensCSCALE
This function is used to configure the control to use the Siemens Frame setting function CSALE.
Function CSCALE is used to set scale values of specified axes in Frame.
SiemensCTRANS
CTRANS. Function CTRANS is used to set translation values for specified axes in Frame.
1846
VERICUT Help
SiemensDC
SiemensDC(value)
This function is used to set the rotary component, or spindle, at an angle specified by value. The
new position is achieved by rotating the component the shortest distance from current
position.
NOTE: This function is based on the Siemens 840D command DC.
SiemensMEAFRAME
MEAFRAME. Function MEAFRAME is used to create Frame based on difference between the
actual measured location of 3 points on the machine and the assumed theoretical location of
the three points.
Sign
This function is used to support the Heidenhain 530 SGN command which is used to check the
algebraic sign of a number.
Example:
Q12 = SGN Q50
If result for Q12 = 1, then Q50 >= 0
If result for Q12 = –1, then Q50 < 0
sinh_d
sinh_d(value)
This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle specified in degrees.
1847
VERICUT Help
sinh_r
sinh_r(value)
This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle specified in radians.
sin_d
sin_d(value)
This function returns the cosine of the given angle specified in degrees.
sin_r
sin_r(value)
This function returns the cosine of the given angle specified in radians.
Sqr
sqr(value)
This function returns the square of the specified value. This function can be used with the word
list to process statements like: #1 = SQR(#2 + #3)
sqrt
sqrt(value)
This function returns the square root of the specified value.
STRLEN
STRLEN(string)
This function checks whether the string parameter is a valid string and then returns the number
of characters in the string. If the string is invalid or empty, the function returns 0. This function
corresponds to the Siemens 840D control function STRLEN.
1848
VERICUT Help
SUBSTR
SUBSTR(string, index(, count))
This function extracts a substring from ‘string". The parameter, "index", specifies the index of
the first character of "string" where the substring begins.
The optional parameter, "count", specifies the number of characters in the substring. By default
all remaining characters are copied to the substring. Index is counted from 0 (the first character
of "string" is referenced by 0). This function corresponds to the Siemens 840D control function
SUBSTR.
tanh_d
tanh_d(angle)
This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the given angle specified in degrees.
tanh_r
tanh_r(angle)
This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the given angle specified in radians.
tan_d
tan_d(angle)
This function returns the tangent of the given angle specified in degrees.
tan_r
tan_r(angle)
This function returns the tangent of the given angle specified in radians.
1849
VERICUT Help
ToolIDToIndex
ToolIDToIndex(string)
This function returns the tool index into the Tool Manager list of tools for the given tool ID
string. Specifically, it searches the tool list for the first matching cutter tool id, and returns the
corresponding index. The index starts from 1 for the first tool. If no list exists, or if no matching
entry can be found, the function will return zero. This function supports alpha numeric tool IDs
(any string used as tool id). Note that the returned index will be different if the Tool Manager
tool list is sorted using different criteria.
ToolnumToPocket
This function returns the pocket number for given the tool number. Specifically, it searches the
tool list for the first matching cutter tool id, and returns the corresponding pocket number. If
no list exists, or if the list is not based on pocket numbers, or if no matching entry can be found,
the function will return the tool number. This function supports alpha numeric tool IDs (any
string used as tool id).
TOUPPER
TOUPPER(string)
This function converts all characters of the input "string" to upper case characters and returns a
new string. If the "string" parameter refers to a variable name, the content of this variable is
not modified. This function corresponds to the Siemens 840D control function TOUPPER.
1850
VERICUT Help
Using the Word Format window
1851
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Words the Control Interprets
Word definitions provide the basis for VERICUT to interpret G-Code characters and word
addresses. When defined, word/address pairs can then be "grouped" via the G-Code Processing
window features to perform specific actions by calling CGTech supplied or custom macros.
Undefined words cause errors when processed, and are not acted on by VERICUT. Word
definitions are saved in a Control file.
To learn more about how VERICUT processes G-Code data, see "About Building NC Controls",
also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help,
NOTES:
1. Start your control configuration by choosing a control from CGTech library that is as close as
possible to the control you are configuring. (See the "Library Control Files" topic, in the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help.) That way,
most words will be already defined for you. Often, all that is left to do is to modify a few
words to match your specific control functions.
2. Always reset VERICUT (press on (Reset Model) in the VERICUT main window) after
To add a word or special character to the control configuration:
1. Click on (Word Format) in the Toolbar, Configuration menu > Word Format in the
VERICUT menu bar, to display the Word Format window.
2. Click on the Word Format tab.
The features on the Word Format tab enable you to specify how the NC control interprets
G-Code words and special characters. Undefined words cause errors when processed, and
are not acted on by VERICUT.
See Word Format window: Word Format tab, also in the Configuration menu section of
Simulation Help for more information.
3. On the Word Format tab, click Add.
A word record will be added to the Word table.
4. Click in the Name field and enter the word "name" exactly as it appears in the NC program
file.
1852
VERICUT Help
5. Click in the Type field, and then choose the word "type" from the pull-down menu that
describes the word's general function. Once the word "type" is selected, the required
supporting feature columns will become active.
6. Configure the rest of the word record as required to support interpreting the new word.
7. Click on OK to accept your addition and close the Word Format window, or Apply to accept
your addition and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
8. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 to add additional word records to the Word table.
9. When finished, save the Control file by clicking on Configuration menu > Control > Save (or
Save As) in the VERICUT menu bar, or by clicking on the (Save Control) or (Save
Control As) icons in the Toolbar, to save the settings as part of the NC control configuration.
To modify how a word or special character is interpreted:
3. In the Word Format tab Word table, select the record field to be modified. The word record
will become highlighted.
4. Modify the record fields as required.
5. Click OK to accept your modification and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your modification and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 to modify additional records.
1853
VERICUT Help
To delete a word or special character from the control configuration:
3. In the Word Format tab Words table, select the record field to be deleted. The word record
will become highlighted.
4. Click on Delete. The highlighted record is removed from the Word table.
5. Click OK to accept your deletion and close the Word Format window, or Apply to accept
your deletion and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and, 5 to delete additional records.
1854
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Error Conditions for Syntax Checking

Use the procedures defined below toturn On/Off VERICUT defined syntax checking rules and
define custom syntax checking error conditions for use during Syntax Checking. The syntax rules
and settings are stored in the control file.
NOTES:
1. The Syntax Checking feature ia not applicable to APT NC programs.
2. Always reset VERICUT (press on (Reset Model) in the VERICUT main window) after
3. The actual syntax checking of an NC program file is started in the NC Program panel. See NC
Program panel, in the Info menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation
Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
To turn on/off VERICUT defined syntax error conditions:
2. Click on the Syntax Check tab.
checking the statements in your G-Code NC program file for valid syntax. The syntax rules
See Word Format window: Syntax Check tab, also in the Configuration menu section of
3. On the Syntax Check tab, a list of VERICUT defined error conditions is shown at the top of
the window.
Toggle "On" (checked) the error conditions that you want included during Syntax Checking.
Toggle "Off" (no check) the error conditions that you do not want to check for during Syntax
Checking.
4. Click on OK to accept your selections and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your selections and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
1855
VERICUT Help
To add user defined syntax error records:
3. In the Syntax Check tab, click on the Add button to add a new record to the User Defined
Syntax Error table.
4. Modify the record fields as required to define the error condition that you want to check
for.
5. Click OK to accept your added record and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your added record and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 to add additional records.
7. When finished, save the Control file by clicking on (Save Control) in the Toolbar, or
click on Configuration menu > Control > Save (or Save As) in the VERICUT menu bar, to save
the settings as part of the NC control configuration.
To modify user defined syntax error records:
1856
VERICUT Help
3. In the Syntax Check tab, User Defined Synatax Errors: table, click on the record that you
want to modify so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Modify the record fields as required.
5. Click OK to accept your modified record and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your modified record and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 to modify additional records.
To delete user defined syntax error records:
3. In the Syntax Check tab, User Defined Synatax Errors: table, click on the record that you
want to delete so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Click on the Delete button to remove the user defined syntax error record from the table.
5. Click OK to accept your deleted record and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your deleted record and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
1857
VERICUT Help
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 to delete additional records.

To turn on/off user defined syntax error conditions:
3. On the Syntax Check tab, User Defined Syntax Error: table:
Toggle "On" (checked) the user defined error conditions that you want included during
Syntax Checking.
Toggle "Off" (no check) the user defined error conditions that you do not want to check for
during Syntax Checking.
4. Click on OK to accept your selections and close the Word Format window, or Apply to
accept your selections and leave the Word Format window open for additional work.
1858
VERICUT Help
Shortcuts:
1. Click on the Select All button to toggle on (check) all error conditions in both the
VERICUT defined list and the User Defined Syntax Error table.
2. Click on the Clear All button to toggle off (un-check) all error conditions in both the
VERICUT defined list and the User Defined Syntax Error table.
1859
VERICUT Help
G-Code Processing (G-Code Processing window)

Location:
Configuration menu > G-Code Processing
Toolbar short cut:
The G-Code Processing option opens the G-Code Processing window. The G-Code Processing
window tree structure consists of two distinct areas as shown in the sample G-Code Processing
window below, the Events section and the Word/Address section.
The G-Code Processing window consists of a "Menu Bar" and a "tree" structure representing
the configuration of a particular NC control.
1860
VERICUT Help
Menu Bar
File menu
Open — Opens a window enabling you to open (load) a control file. Provides the same
function as Configuration menu > Control > Open.
Save — Saves (updates) an existing Control file with the current NC control settings.
Provides the same function as Configuration menu > Control > Save.
Save As — Opens a window enabling you to save the current control file under a different
name or path. Provides the same function as Configuration menu > Control > Save As.
Exit — Closes the G-Code Processing window without saving the control file. You can also
use the shortcut Ctrl+E.
Edit menu
Add/Modify — The action associated with the Add/Modify option is dependent on the item
that is highlighted in the G-Code Processing window tree structure.
If the highlighted item is in the Events section of the tree structure, selecting Add/Modify
will display the Add/Modify Events window enabling you to add, or modify, event-based
macro calls.
If the highlighted item is in the Word/Address section of the tree structure, selecting
Add/Modify will display the Add/Modify Word/Address window enabling you to add, or
modify, groups within the control configuration.
1861
VERICUT Help
Cut — Enables you to "cut" the highlighted object in the control configuration "tree"
structure and puts it in the paste buffer. You can also use the shortcut Ctrl+X.
Copy — Enables you to "copy" the highlighted object in the control configuration “tree”
structure and puts it in the paste buffer. You can also use the shortcut Ctrl+C.
Paste — Enables you to "paste" the contents of the paste buffer after highlighted object in
the control configuration “tree” structure. You can also use the shortcut Ctrl+V.
NOTE: When you "Cut", "Copy", or "Paste" an object in the "tree", all objects below it in
that particular "branch" (children) are cut, copied, or pasted with it.
Delete — Enables you to "delete" the highlighted object in the control configuration “tree”
structure.
Utilities menu
Search — Opens the Search for window enabling you to find the groups in a control
configuration that are associated with a specific word/address value, call specific macros or
variables, or are associated with a specific machine state. You can also use the shortcut
Ctrl+F.
Validate — Displays the Validate toolbar at the top of the G-Code processing window
enabling you to validate the control configuration.
1862
VERICUT Help
Validate Toolbar
(Validate) — Starts the validation process. VERICUT searches through the control
checking for errors or conflicts within the Word/Address groups. If an error\conflict is
detected, the validation process stops and the entity that has the problem is highlighted
and a message is output to the message log area. If no errors/conflicts are found, the
validation process continues until the end of the control configuration is reached.
(Next) — Use to continue the validation process after an error/conflict is identified.
(Previous) — Use to go back to the previous error/conflict.
(Close) — Stops the validation process and closes the Word/Address Validate window.
1863
VERICUT Help
Control Configuration "Tree" Structure

The control configuration of a particular NC control is displayed as a "tree" structure. The
control configuration “tree” structure consists of two distinct areas; the Events section and the
Word/Address section.
Events Section
The Events section of the tree structure enables you to specify the macros called and/or
variables set based on key events that occur during NC program file processing. The Events
section of the tree structure displays the event configurations of a particular NC control. When
you expand an "event" object, the macro calls associated with that particular event are
displayed.
The following Events are available:
Reset
Start of Processing
End of Processing
Start of Block Processing
End of Block Processing
Start of Type II Command
End of Type II Command
Each of these events is described below in the Add/Modify Events window section.
The display of event objects in the control configuration “tree” structure will be different
depending on whether you are using a single channel or multi-channel (aka “sync”) control as
Single channel event Multi-channel ("sync") event
1864
VERICUT Help
Notice in the single channel event example above, the Start of Processing event has one
macros branch. Now look at the multi-channel ("sync") event example above. Notice that the
Start of Processing event has a Global branch, a SubSystem: 1 branch, a SubSystem: 2 branch, a
SubSystem: Tailstock branch, a SubSystem: Gripper, and a SubSystem: Door branch. Also notice
that each of these branches has their own macros branch.
The macros specified in the Global branch can be referenced from anywhere within the NC
program. The macros specified in a SubSystem branch are specific to the subsystem and can
only be referenced for use with the subsystem. In the case where the same macro is used in
more than one subsystem but with different values, the macro will have to be defined in both
SubSystem branches.
Shortcut: "Right-click" in the Events section of the G-Code Processing window to display a
shortcut menu.
Right-clicking on a macro displays a menu with the following features:
Add/Modify, and Paste — These features provide the same functionality described above
under Edit menu in the Menu Bar section above.
Contract All Children — Use to contract (remove the display) all "children" of the highlighted
object.
Expand All Children — Use to expand (display) all "children" of the highlighted object.
See Add, Modify, or Delete Event-Driven Macros or Variables, in the Using the G-Code
Processing window section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for additional
information.
Word/Address Section
The Word/Address section of the tree structure enables you to "group" G-Code words
previously defined in the Word Format window (Configuration menu > Word Format) with a
range of address values, and associate them with action macros to simulate an action in the
control, or on the machine.
1865
VERICUT Help
For simplicity, we'll call each of these address/value associations a "group". Each group can be
configured to call one or more action macros. This functionality allows you to virtually "wire" a
custom NC control based on machine code information present in the NC program file.
Groups with similar functions are arranged into a "class". The listed order of classes in the
Word/Address window helps determine the timing of when corresponding actions occur.
When you expand a "class" object, the "Word/Range" branch shows the word/address of the
groups within the class. Expand a "Word/Range" object and the "Condition" branch shows
conditions defined for the selected group. Finally, expanding a "Condition" object, displays the
"Macro name" branch which shows the macros associated with the selected condition in the
group.
To summarize, expand a "class" to display the "groups" associated with it. Expand a "group" to
display the different "conditions" associated with it. Similarly, expand a "condition" to display
the macros/variables associated with the condition.
Change the order of class, group, condition and macro objects in the control configuration by
"left clicking" on an object and "dragging" it to the desired position. When you reposition an
object, all of the objects below it in the branch (children) are also repositioned.
Example
The illustration above shows an expanded "group" from the Word/Address section of the
control configuration "tree".
 The top level object, "Variables", represents a "class".
 The second level object (or branch), "Variable: 3000 *", represents "Word/Variable and
Range", in this case Variable and Range.
 The third level object (branch), "**", represents a "conditional Word/State/Variable and
conditional Range/Value ".
 The lowest level objects (branches), "AlarmSignal" and "StopUnconditional", represent
Macro Names with associated data.
 Each lower level (or branch) is considered to be "a child or children" of the next higher
level.
1866
VERICUT Help
Shortcut:
"Right click" in the Word/Address section of the G-Code Processing window to display a
shortcut menu with the following features:
If the a variable, macro, or macro supporting data is highlighted, right clicking in the
Word/Address section of the G-Code Processing window will display the following shortcut
menu:
Add/Modify, Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete — These features provide the same functionality
described above under Edit menu in the Menu Bar section above.
Contract All Children — Use to contract (remove the display) all "children" of the highlighted
object.
Expand All Children — Use to expand (display) all "children" of the highlighted object.
NOTES:
1. Always reset VERICUT (press (Reset Model) on the VERICUT main window) after
2. Use the Debug Macro Arguments feature on the Settings window: G-Code Outputs tab
(Project menu > Settings > G-Code outputs tab), to output the macro name, the word, the
text string value, and the numeric value for each macro as it is called.
1867
VERICUT Help
1868
VERICUT Help
Add/Modify Events window
The Add/Modify Events window is opened by right-clicking in the Events section of the G-Code
Processing window tree structure and then selecting Add/Modify in the menu that displays.
You can also highlight an item in the Events section of the G-Code Processing window tree
structure and then select Edit menu > Add/Modify in the G-Code Processing window menu bar.
The features in this window enable you to add, or modify, event-based macro calls.
1869
VERICUT Help
Event — Enables you to select the event that you want to add to or modify. Select the event
from the pull-down list. Choose from the following events:
Reset — The Reset event occurs before the NC program file is scanned.
Start of Processing — The Start of Processing event occurs after the NC program file has
been scanned, but before the NC program file is processed.
NOTE: The ConversionInit macro must always be the first macro listed for this event.
End of Processing — The End of Processing event occurs after the NC program file has been
processed.
NOTE: The ConversionFinish macro must always be the last macro listed for this event.
Start of Block Processing — The Start of Block Processing event occurs at the start of
processing each G-Code data block.
NOTE: The BlockInit macro must always be the first macro listed for this event.
End of Block Processing — The End of Block Processing event occurs at the end of
processing each G-Code data block.
NOTE: The BlockFinish macro must always be the last macro listed for this event.
Start of Type II Command — The Start of Type II Command event occurs at the start of
processing a Type II data command.
End of Type II Command — The Start of Type II Command event occurs at the end of
processing a Type II data command.
Show Macros — Enables you to specify the macros that you want displayed in the Macroname
list based on a macro's scope. Choose one of the following from the pull-down list.
All — Displays "all" macros in the Macroname list.
SubSystem — Display only macros with a "SubSystem" scope in the Macroname list.
Global — Use to display only macros with a "Global" scope in the Macroname list.
Macroname List
You can the select a macro name from the list, or type a macro name in the Macroname text
field below the list. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering capability to
help you find macros. As you enter text characters in the Macroname text field, the list of
macros is automatically filtered to show only those that match the specified text.
To get information about any macro in the list, select the macro from the list so that it is
displayed in the Macroname text field and then press F1 key on your keyboard to display the
documentation for the selected macro.
1870
VERICUT Help
Use the (Clear Text) icon on the right side of the Macroname text field to clear the text
field.
Apply to SubSystem — This feature enables you to specify which subsystem that the macro
specified in the Macroname list is to be applied to. This feature is inactive when the selected
macro is defined as "Global". Choose the subsystem from the pull-down list. The list contains all
subsystems defined in the current control.
Override Value — Use the Override Value field to specify a value to be passed to the macro
specified in the Macroname text field. If the Override Value field is left blank, the address value
accompanying the word is passed.
Mathematical expressions, and variables understood by the control, are supported. Enter "$" to
specify using the address value accompanying the word. Enter "#", followed immediately by the
variable name/number, followed by a space, to specify a variable value. Multiple variables can
be added, separated by a blank space. If the override expression does not contain either of
these characters, it is evaluated immediately and only the value is retained. If the expression
can not be evaluated immediately, the full expression is retained in the control configuration
and evaluated separately for each block that activates the group.
Examples of using Override Value: (given that the variable, #2 = 3)
Text entered in Sample G-

What is retained in Resulting value when
Override Value Code data
control configuration processed
field block
SIN(30) .5 X5 .5 (constant value- not

affected by G-Code
data)
SIN(30) .5 X10 .5 (see note above)
$*10 $*10 X5 50
($+#2)*10 ($+#2)*10 X5 80
Override Text — Similar to Override Value, except that it enables you to specify text to pass to
the macro. Only certain macros are designed to accept override text values.
1871
VERICUT Help
To get information about a specific macro in the list, select the macro from the list so that it is
You can also consult the "Macros - listed alphabetically" section of VERICUT Macros in the
Expression(s) can be used in macro override text. If the override text contains the sequence
"{expression}" the expression text inside the curly-braces is evaluated and replaced with the
calculated value.
For example, if the MessageMacro is used with the following override text:
"The spindle speed is {#speed} rpm"
The variable "#speed" is evaluated and if set to 500, the resulting message would be:
"The spindle speed is 500 rpm"
The syntax for the expression(s) is the same as defined for override values.
Add — Select when adding a new macro to the event.

Modify — Select when modifying an existing macro for the event.
Close — Closes the Add/Modify Events window.
See Add, Modify, or Delete Event-Driven Macros, in the Using the G-Code Processing window
section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1872
VERICUT Help
Add/Modify Word/Address window
The Add/Modify Word/Address window is opened by right-clicking in the Word/Address

section of the G-Code Processing window tree structure and then selecting Add/Modify in the
menu that displays. You can also highlight an item in the Word/Address section of the G-Code
Processing window tree structure and then select Edit menu > Add/Modify in the G-Code
Processing window menu bar.
1873
VERICUT Help
The features on the Add/Modify Word/Address window enable you to maintain

groups/conditions in the control configuration. VERICUT will attempt to add a new group after
the group selected in the list. A new group condition is added after the selected condition, and
so on. However, if the word and range of an added group matches that of a previously defined
group, the new group is automatically added as a condition to the previously defined group.
This occurs even when the previously defined group resides in a different class.
Class Name — Enables you to add a new "class" or rename an existing "class".
See Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Classes, in the Using the G-Code Processing window
Word / Variable — Enables you to specify the type of group being defined.
Word Options:
Word — These features define a group whose actions are performed when a G-Code
having a corresponding word and address value is processed. Enter the group word in
the text field. The word must be previously defined in the the Word Format window.
You can type the word character(s) in the Word text field, or click on the Pick button to
display the Pick Word window and then use it to select the word from the list of defined
words that displays. The list contains all words defined in the Word Format window for
the “current” control file.
1874
VERICUT Help
Select the desired word so that it becomes highlighted and then press OK. Use Cancel to
close the Pick Word window without selecting a word.
Range — Use the Range text field to specify a value, or range of values, that will cause
the specified action to be processed. The Range value commonly specifies a single
address. However, you can also specify multiple range values (separated by spaces or
commas), inclusive ranges, or use "*" as a wildcard to denote "all values". The following
shows all valid Range value entries and their meanings:
Range Entry Meaning
* Any value
value A specific value like 7, or 9
7,9 A series of numbers
5-9 Integer values between 5 and 9 inclusive

(5, 6, 7, 8, and 9)
5.0-9.0 All numbers between 5.0 and 9.0
#2 A variable. The variable must be prefixed with a #
$ The current value associated with the word.

NOTE: This really only make sense with a "Conditional
Value"
<n Less than n, where n is a value, a variable (designated

with the #), or a $
<=n Less than or equal to n, where n is a value, a variable

(designated with the #), or a $
>n Greater than n, where n is a value, a variable

>=n Greater than or equal to n, where n is a value, a variable

=n Equal to n, where n is a value, a variable (designated

with the #), or a $
#3-$ A range of values specified using a variable and a $
1875
VERICUT Help
NONE Supports processing words without values differently

from the same words with values. For example, you can
configure N010X to be handled differently from
N010X0.
NOTE: Typically, Range values are integers. If you need to specify a group of NC codes,
some of which contain decimal values (for example, G45, G45.1 G46) define the group
Range as a series (45 45.1 46), rather than as an "inclusive" Range (45-46). Inclusive
Ranges of real values may be defined by including a decimal point with the value. For
example, the Range (45.0-46.0) will select all values between 45 and 46.
The following are typical examples of how Word and Range can be used to specify G-
Codes acted on for a specific group "L".
Group Word Range G-Codes acted on by the group
L 2 L2
L 15 L1, L5
L 1 5-10 L1, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10
L NONE L ("L" without a numeric value)
L * Ln (where "n" is any value)
Description — Use the Description text field to enter a description that will display in the G-
Code Processing window with the Word/Range group that you are defining. See the example
below.
Creating a Word/Range group with a description as shown in the Add/Modify Word/Address
window below,
1876
VERICUT Help
will be displayed in the G-Code Processing window as shown below.
Variable Options:
Variable — Use to define a group whose actions are performed when a specified
variable is set to a corresponding value, or range of values. Enter the group variable
name in the Variable text field.
Range — Use the Range text field to specify a value, or range of values, that will cause
the specified action to be processed. Variable ranges are specified in the same manner
as described above for Word ranges.
Description — Use the Description text field to enter a description that will display in
the G-Code Processing window with the Variable/Range group that you are defining. See
the example below.
1877
VERICUT Help
Creating a Variable/Range group with a description as shown in the Add/Modify Word/Address

window below.
Conditions — Use to specify one or more conditions, which if met, causes the group to perform
different action(s).
Operator — Choose and or not from the pull-down list.
Type — Use to specify the type of condition.
Word — When Type is set to Word, the Condition is based on another word and
address value range appearing in the G-Code data block. This is the most common
condition type. Select the desired Condition from the pull-down list, and then enter the
1878
VERICUT Help
Conditional Value(s). Conditional Values are specified in the same manner as described
above for Word ranges. See the example on the following page.
For example: G 81 not (X *) and not (Y *) and not (Z *) calls ErrorMacro
Creating conditions as shown in the Add/Modify Word/Address window below,
1879
VERICUT Help
State — When Type is set to State, the Condition is based on a machine state. Choose the
desired Condition from the pull-down list, and then choose a value from the Conditional
Value pull-down list. Notice that only values that are valid for the selected Condition appear
in the Conditional Value list.
1880
VERICUT Help
1881
VERICUT Help
Tip: See Notes about Cutter Compensation Updates in V7.0.2 in the Notes about Special
Topics section of the CGTech Help Library for information about State/Condition:
CUTTER_COMP.
Variable — When Type is set to Variable, the Condition is based on when a variable is set to
a corresponding Conditional Value. In the Condition column enter the variable name, and
then enter the Conditional Value(s). Conditional Values are specified in the same manner as
described above for Word ranges.
1882
VERICUT Help
1883
VERICUT Help
Add — Use to add a condition to the conditions list. The new condition will be added after the
highlighted condition in the list.
NOTE: It is never necessary to have the list in any specific order since all items in the list must
be TRUE for the corresponding macro to be executed. As a personal preference, you might
want to read the list in a specific order. To this end, the new condition is always added after the
highlighted condition in the list. You can also change the position of a condition in the list by
clicking on the button, on the left side of each row, and drag the condition to the desired
position in the list.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted condition from the conditions list.
Macroname / Variable — Use to specify whether a group calls a macro, or sets a variable.
Macroname —
You can the select a macro name from the list, or type a macro name in the Macroname text
field below the list. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering capability to
help you find macros. As you enter text characters in the Macroname text field, the list of
macros is automatically filtered to show only those that match the specified text.
Use the (Clear Text) icon on the right side of the Macroname text field to clear the text
field.
1884
VERICUT Help
Variable —
Use the Variable Name, and Variable Description text fields to specify, and describe, the
variable to be set. Use the Override Value text field, described below, to specify the
variable value.
Process After Motion — When active, performs the group action after motion commands in
the data block have been processed. The default condition is to perform the group action
according to the rules of normal G-Code data processing.
Override Value — This feature acts differently, depending on if Macroname, or Variable, is
selected:
When the Macroname feature is selected, use the Override Value text field to specify a
value to be passed to the macro specified in the Macroname text field. If the Override
Value text field is left blank, the address value accompanying the word is passed.
When the Variable feature is selected, use the Override Value text field to specify a value
to be assigned to the variable specified in the Variable Number field.
Mathematical expressions and variables, understood by the control, are supported. Enter
"$" to specify using the address value accompanying the word. Enter "#", followed
immediately by the variable name/number, followed by a space, to specify a variable value.
Multiple variables can be added, separated by a blank space. If the override expression does
not contain either of these characters, it is evaluated immediately and only the value is
retained. If the expression can not be evaluated immediately, the full expression is retained
in the control configuration and evaluated separately for each block that activates the
group.
1885
VERICUT Help
If the Override Value is set to "#0", then the variable will be set to "empty" (vacant, null,
non-initialized, …)
Examples of using Override Value: (given that the variable, #2 = 3)
Text entered in Sample G-

What is retained in Resulting value when
Override Value Code data
control configuration processed
field block
SIN(30) .5 X5 .5 (constant value- not

affected by G-Code
data)
SIN(30) .5 X10 .5 (see note above)
$*10 $*10 X5 50
($+#2)*10 ($+#2)*10 X5 80
Override Text — Similar to Override Value, except that it is used to specify text to be passed to
the macro. Enter the text in the Override Text text field. Only certain macros are designed to
accept text values.
To get information about a specific macro in the list, select the macro from the list so that it is
Consult the "Macros - listed alphabetically" in the VERICUT Macros section, in the CGTech Help
Library, for more information.
Expression(s) can be used in macro override text. If the override text contains the sequence
"{expression}" , the expression text inside the curly-braces is evaluated, and then replaced with
the calculated value.
The syntax for the expression(s) is the same as defined above for Override Values.
Examples:
1. If the MessageMacro is used with the following override text:
Override Text = "The spindle speed is {#speed} rpm"
The variable "#speed" is evaluated and if set to 500, the resulting message would be:
"The spindle speed is 500 rpm"
1886
VERICUT Help
2. $$ within {} enables you to include the incoming text string. For example:
Override Text = Operation Name: {$$}
3. Text variables are also supported. For example: if the variable "NAME" was set to the
operation name, you could have:
Override Text = Operation Name: {#NAME}
If the contents within {} has either a "$$" or a text variable, then the expression will be
evaluated as a text string. When dealing with text, it is recommended that you have only have 1
item within the {}. For example, if the variable "DATE" contained "May 2007", you could have:
Override Text = Operation Name: {$$}, {#DATE}. This syntax is preferable to: Override Text
= Operation Name: {$$ : #DATE}
The output would be: Operation Name: 1-TOP0-FOAM-LICKA, May 2007
Override Word Format — When toggled "on", the word format specified with the macro will be
used rather than the default word format. Use the Set button, described below, to display the
Override Word Format window, and then use its features to define the word format for the
specific macro.
For example, this feature would enable you to define a P with a G71 to be decimal, and a P with
a G76 to be Trailing 3.4.
NOTE: This feature does not support expressions. For example, you could not use this
feature with: X=54000 + 30000
Set — Used in conjunction with Override Word Format, described above. Displays the Override
Word Format window enabling you to specify a word format for a specific macro.
Add — Select when adding a new group or condition.

Modify — Select when modifying an existing group or condition.
Close — Close the Add/Modify Word/Address window.
See Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Groups, in the Using the G-Code Processing window
1887
VERICUT Help
Override Word Format window
Used in conjunction with the Override Word Format feature, on the Add/Modify Word/Address
window, to specify a word format to be used with a specific macro rather than use the default
word format specified in the Word Format window.
Use the Set button, on the Add/Modify Word/Address window, to display the Override Word
Format window.
Inch Method / Metric Method — Specifies how to interpret inch (or metric) address values.
This feature is significant only for values that do not contain a decimal point. Values with a
decimal are always interpreted via the "Decimal" method.
Options:
Decimal — This option interprets values as floating point decimals.
Leading or Decimal — Interprets values without a decimal as having leading zeros.
Depending on the active unit system (inch or metric), values are interpreted as
described by the corresponding "Format" (see below).
Trailing or Decimal — Similar to Leading or Decimal, except that values are interpreted
as having trailing zeros.
Inch Format / Metric Format — Specifies the number of digits before and after the decimal
point when interpreting leading or trailing zero values. Data entry format is: a.b where "a"
specifies the number of digits before, and "b" specifies the number of digits after the
decimal point.
OK — Applies the settings and closes the Override Word Format window.
Cancel — Closes the Override Word Format window without accepting the settings.
1888
VERICUT Help
Search for window
The Search for window is opened using Utilities menu > Search on the G-Code Processing
window menu bar. The features on this window enable you to find all occurrences in a control
configuration that are associated with a specific word/address value, call specific macros or
variables, are associated with a specific machine state, or a specific Override Value, or Override
Text, value.
Words/Range tab — the features on the Words/Range tab enable you to find all occurrences in
the G-Code Processing window based on a specific Word/Range combination.
Macroname tab — the features on the Macroname tab enable you to find all occurrences in the
G-Code Processing window that call a specific macro.
1889
VERICUT Help
Variable tab — the features on the Variable tab enable you to find all occurrences in the G-Code
Processing window of a specific variable.
State tab — the features on the State tab enable you to find all occurrences in the G-Code
Processing window associated with a specific machine state.
Override Value and Text tab — the features on the Override Value and Text tab enable you to
find all occurrences in the G-Code Processing window associated with a specific machine state.
The following icons are common to all Search Word window tabs:
(Clear Text) — Use this icon to clear the text from the text field that it is associated with.
(Search First) — After configuring the tab with the desired search criteria, use this icon to
find the first occurrence in the control configuration that matches the search criteria.
(Search Next) — Use this icon to find the next occurrence in the control configuration that
matches the search criteria. Repeat using this icon to find additional occurrences.
(Search Previous) — Use this icon to find the previous occurrence in the control
configuration that matches the search criteria.
(Close) — Use this icon to close the Search Word window.
1890
VERICUT Help
Search Word window, Words/Range tab

The features on the Words/Range tab enable you to find all occurrences in the control
configuration displayed in the Word/Address window based on a specific Word/Range
combination. For example, when the Word is "G" and the Range is "4", the group record G4 and
the condition (G4) are both found.
Specify the specific G-Code Word/Range combination to be searched for in the control
configuration. Start by selecting the word from the list, or by typing the word in the Word text
field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering capability to help you find
the desired word. As you enter text characters in the Word text field, the list of words is
automatically filtered to show those that match the entered text. Next enter the range value in
the Range text field. For example, to find a G0 command, enter a G in the Word text field and
the 0 in the Range text field.
1891
VERICUT Help
After configuring the window to find the desired Word/Range combination, use the
(Search First), (Search Next), and (Search Previous) icons at the bottom of the
window to find the first, next, or previous occurrence of the Word/Range combination in the
control configuration. See the example in the Using the Search Word Window section, also in
the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
To the Search Word window
1892
VERICUT Help
Search Word window, Macroname tab

The features on the Macroname tab enable you to find all occurrences in the control
configuration displayed in the Word/Address window that call a specific macro.
Specify the macro to be searched for by selecting from the list or by typing the macro name in
the text field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering capability to help
you find macros. As you enter text characters in the Macroname text field, the list of macros is
automatically filtered to show those that match the entered text.
After configuring the window to search for the desired macro, use the (Search First),
(Search Next), and (Search Previous) icons at the bottom of the window to find the first,
next, or previous occurrence of the macro in the control. See the example in the Using the
Search Word Window section, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help,
1893
VERICUT Help
1894
VERICUT Help
Search for window, Variable tab

Location: Configuration menu > G-Code Processing: Utilities menu > Search: Variable tab
Toolbar short cut:
Search Variables window, Variable tab

Location: Project menu > Variables: Utilities menu > Search: Variable tab
Toolbar short cut:
Accessed by selecting Utilities menu > Search in the G-Code Processing window, the Search for
window: Variable tab enables you to search for all occurrences of a particular variable.
This functionality is very similar to the Search Variables window accessed from the Variables
window, Utilities menu > Search option. The differences are described below.
Accessed from the G-Code Processing window
1895
VERICUT Help
Accessed from the Variables window
Specify the variable to be searched for by selecting from the Variable list or by typing the
variable name in the text field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the automatic filtering
capability to help you find variables. As you enter text characters in the text field, the list of
variables is automatically filtered to show only those variables that match the entered text
string.
(Clear Text) — Use this icon to clear the text from the text field.
After selecting the variable to search for, use the icons at the bottom of the window to find
the First, Next, or Previous occurrence of the variable in either the G-Code Processing
window (when using the Search Word window) or the Variables window (when using the
Search Variables window).
(Search First) — After specifying the variable to search for, use this icon to find the first
occurrence of the variable.
1896
VERICUT Help
(Search Next) — Use this icon to find the next occurrence of the specified variable. Repeat
using this icon to find additional occurrences.
(Search Previous) — Use this icon to find the previous occurrence of the specified variable.
(Close) — Use this icon to close the Search Word / Search Variable window.
When using the Search Word window:

When VERICUT has found the last occurrence of the specified variable in the G-Code Processing
window, pressing (Search Next) again will cause VERICUT to search for the specified
variable in the Variables window (ref. Variables window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help). If
one or more occurrences of the specified variable is found in the Variables window, VERICUT
will automatically open the Variables window and highlight the specified variable. Use the
(Search Next) icon to find additional occurrences of the specified variable in the Variable
window.
When using the Search Variable window:

When VERICUT has found the last occurrence of the specified variable in the Variable window,
pressing (Search Next) again will cause VERICUT to search for the specified variable in the
G-Code Processing window (ref. G-Code Processing window also in the Configuration menu
section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Help). If one or more occurrences of the specified variable are found in the G-Code
Processing window, VERICUT will automatically open the G-Code Processing window and
highlight the specified variable. Use the (Search Next) icon to find additional occurrences of
the specified variable in the G-Code Processing window.
See the To Search all occurrences of a specific variable example in the Using the Search Word
Window section, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
See the example in the Using the Search Variables window section, in the Project Tree section
of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation
1897
VERICUT Help
Search Word window, State tab

The features on the State tab enable you to find all occurrences in the control configuration
displayed in the in the Word/Address window associated with a specific machine state.
Specify the machine state to be searched for by selecting from the Condition list or by typing
the machine state in the text field. Text entered is not case sensitive.
After configuring the window to find the desired macro, use the (Search First), (Search
Next), and (Search Previous) icons at the bottom of the window to find the first, next, or
previous occurrence of the machine state in the control configuration.
When finished, use the (Close) icon to close the Search Word window.
1898
VERICUT Help
See the example in the Using the Search Word Window section, also in the Configuration Menu
1899
VERICUT Help
Search Word window, Override Value and Text tab

The Override Value and Text tab enables you to find all occurrences in the control configuration
displayed in the in the G-Code Processing window associated with a specific Override Value
and/or Override Text value.
Override Value — Specify the value to be searched for by typing the value in the Override
Value text field. The value entered is not case sensitive. In this context Override Value is
understood to be an override expression. That is, Override Values that are just numbers, like
"1", will be ignored.
Override Text — Specify the text to be searched for by typing the text in the Override Text text
field. The text entered is not case sensitive.
1900
VERICUT Help
After specifying the value or text to be searched, use the (Search First), (Search Next),
and (Search Previous) icons at the bottom of the window to find the first, next, or previous
occurrence of the value/text in the control configuration.
If only one of the text fields is filled in, then that is what will be searched for. If both text fields
are filled in, then the Search Word utility will search to match the contents of both text fields. If
both text fields are empty, no searching will take place.
When finished, use the (Close) icon to close the Search Word window.
See the example in the Using the Search Word Window section, also in the Configuration Menu
1901
VERICUT Help
Using the Search Word Window
To find a group associated with specific G-Code word/range value:
1. Click on (G-Code Processing) in the Toolbar, or select Configuration menu > G-

Code Processing in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the G-Code Processing window.
2. In the G-Code Processing window menu bar, select Utilities menu > Search to display
the Search Word window.
3. In the Search Word window, click the Words/Range tab.
4. From the Word list, select the word that you want to find in the control configuration.
You can also type the word in the Word text field.
5. Enter the Range value in the Range text field.
For example, if you want to find G0, enter the G in the Word text field and the 0 in the
Range text field.
6. Press (Search First). VERICUT will find and highlight the first occurrence in the G-
Code Processing window containing the specified Word/Range value.
Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence in the G-Code Processing window
containing the specified Word/Range value.
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence in the G-Code Processing
window containing the specified Word/Range value.
7. Press the (Clear Text) icons to clear the Word and Range text fields, then repeat
steps 4, 5, and 6 to do another search or press the (Close) icon to close the Search
Word window.
To Search a specific macro in a control configuration:

3. In the Search Word window, click the Macroname tab.
4. In the Macroname list, select the name of the macro that you want to find in the control
configuration. You can also type the name of the macro in the Macroname text field.
5. Press (Search First). VERICUT will find and highlight the first occurrence of the
specified macro in the G-Code Processing window.
1902
VERICUT Help
Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence of the specified macro in the G-
Code Processing window.
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence of the specified macro in
the G-Code Processing window.
6. Press the (Clear Text) icon to clear the Macroname text field, then repeat steps 4
and 5 to do another search or press the (Close) icon to close the Search Word
window.
To Search all occurrences of a specific variable:

3. In the Search Word window, click on the Variable tab.
4. On the Variable tab, select the name of the variable that you want to find from the
Variables list. You can also type the name of the variable in the Variable text field.
Tip: Use the automatic filtering capability to help you find variables. As you enter text
characters in the text field, the list of variables is automatically filtered to show only
those variables that match the entered text string.
specified variable in the G-Code Processing window Variables List.
6. Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence of the specified variable in the G-
Code Processing window.
Continue pressing (Search Next) to find all occurrences of the specified variable in
When VERICUT has found the last occurrence of the specified variable in the G-Code-
Processing window, pressing (Search Next) again will cause VERICUT to search for
the specified variable in the Variables window (ref. Variables window in the Project
Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help). If one or more occurrences of the specified variable are
found in the Variables window, VERICUT will automatically open the Variables window
and highlight the specified variable.
1903
VERICUT Help
Continue pressing (Search Next) to find additional occurrences of the specified

variable in the Variables window.
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence of the specified variable.
7. When finished with your search, press the (Clear Text) icon to clear the Variable
text field, and then repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to do another search or press the (Close)
icon to close the Search Word window.
To Search a machine state in a control configuration:

3. In the Search Word window, click the State tab.
4. In the Condition list, select the machine state that you want to find in the control
configuration. You can also type the machine state in the Condition text field.
specified machine state in the G-Code Processing window.
Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence of the specified machine state in
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence of the specified machine
state in the G-Code Processing window.
6. Press the (Clear Text) icon to clear the Condition text field, then repeat steps 4 and
5 to do another search or press the (Close) icon to close the Search Word window.
To Search an Override Text value in a control configuration:

3. In the Search Word window, click the Override Text tab.
4. In the Search for: text field, enter the Override Text value that you want to find in the
control configuration.
1904
VERICUT Help
specified Override Text value in the G-Code Processing window.
Press (Search Next), to find the next occurrence of the specified Override Text value
in the G-Code Processing window.
Press (Search Previous) to find the previous occurrence of the specified Override
Text value in the G-Code Processing window.
6. Press the (Clear Text) icon to clear the Search for: text field, then repeat steps 4
and 5 to do another search or press the (Close) icon to close the Search Word
window.
See G-Code Processing window and Search Word window, also in the Configuration Menu
1905
VERICUT Help
Using the G-Code Processing window
1906
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Event-Driven Macros
Similar to calling macros via words/addresses, you can also call macros based on key events
that occur during NC program file processing. Event driven macro calls are configured in a
similar fashion to those described for word/address groups on the Add/Modify Word/Address
window.
To learn more about how VERICUT processes G-Code data, see "About Building NC Controls"
NOTES:
1. Always reset VERICUT (press on (Reset Model) the VERICUT main window) after
2. Use the Debug Macro Arguments feature in the Debug section of the Settings window: G-
Code Outputs tab (Project menu > Settings > G-Code Outputs tab) to see the macro
name, the word, the text string value, and the numeric value for the macro being called.
more information.
3. IMPORTANT! The macro events listed below are required for G-Code processing and
should NOT be disturbed:
EVENT MACRO
Start of Processing => ConversionInit
End of Processing => ConversionFinish
Start of Block Processing => BlockInit
End of Block Processing => BlockFinish
1907
VERICUT Help
To add a new event-driven macro to the control configuration:
1. Click on (G-Code Processing) in the Toolbar, Configuration menu > G-Code Processing
in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the G-Code Processing window.
2. In the Events section of the G-Code Processing window, click on the + sign to the left of the
event, that you want to add the new macro to, so that it expands.
3. Click on the + sign to the left of the Global, or SubSystem, label that you want to add the
new macro to, so that it expands.
4. Select the existing macro that you want to add the new macro after so that it becomes
highlighted.
5. Right-click in the Events section of the G-Code Processing window and then select
Add/Modify in the menu that displays to display the Add/Modify Events window. You can
also select Edit menu > Add/Modify in the G-Code Processing window menu bar to display
the Add/Modify Events window.
6. Use the features in the Add/Modify Events window to configure the event macro:
Specify the macro to be called by selecting from the Macroname list or by typing the
macro name in the Macroname text field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the
automatic filtering capability to help you find macros. As you enter text characters in the
Macroname text field, the list of macros is automatically filtered to show those that
match the entered text.
To get information about any macro, select the macro from the list so that it is displayed
in the Macroname text field and then press F1 on your keyboard to display the
Use the (Clear Text) icon on the right side of the Macroname text field to clear the
text field.
Use the Override Value and Override Text fields, as needed, to supply supporting data
for the selected macro.
See the VERICUT Macros section, in the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
7. Click on Add to add the macro to the event in the G-Code Processing window.
8. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 6, to add additional macros, or click on Close to close the
Add/Modify Events window.
1908
VERICUT Help
To modify an existing event-driven macro in the control configuration:
event, that you want to modify so that it expands.
3. Click on the + sign to the left of the Global, or SubSystem, label that you want to modify so
that it expands.
4. Select the existing macro that you want to modify so that so that it becomes highlighted.
5. Right-click in the Events section of the G-Code Processing window and then select
Add/Modify in the menu that displays to display the Add/Modify Events window. You can
also select Edit menu > Add/Modify in the G-Code Processing window menu bar to display
the Add/Modify Events window.
6. In the Add/Modify Events window, enter the necessary changes.
7. Click on Modify to update the entry in the G-Code Processing window.
8. Repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 to modify additional macros or click on Close to close the
Add/Modify Events window.
To delete an event-driven macro from the control configuration:
event, that you want to modify so that it expands.
3. Click on the + sign to the left of the Global, or SubSystem, label that you want to modify so
that it expands.
4. Select the existing macro that you want to delete so that so that it becomes highlighted.
5. In the G-Code Processing menu bar, select Edit menu > Cut (or click the right mouse button
on the highlighted macro and select Cut). You can also use the Delete key on your
keyboard.
6. The macro and all data associated with it is removed.
See G-Code Processing window, and Add/Modify Events window., also in the Configuration
menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
1909
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Classes
Groups with similar functions are arranged into a "class". The listed order of classes in the G-
Code Processing window helps to determine the timing of when corresponding actions occur.
Class, group, condition, and macro order is changed via dragging them with the right mouse
button.
NOTE: Always reset VERICUT (press on (Reset Model) the VERICUT main window) after
To add a new class to the control configuration:
1. Click on (G-Code Processing) in the Toolbar, or Configuration menu > G-Code

Processing in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the G-Code Processing window.
2. In the G-Code Processing window, select the class (Specials, States, Cycles, etc.) to add the
new class after so that it becomes highlighted.
3. In the G-Code Processing window menu bar, select Edit menu > Add/Modify (or click the
right mouse button on the highlighted class and select Add/Modify) to display the
Add/Modify Word/Address window.
4. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, enter a unique name in the Class Name text
field.
5. Enter the information to create a valid Word/Address record. See To add a new group to
the control configuration, in the Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Groups topic, also
in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for more information.
6. Press Add. The new class is added after the class you initially selected.
7. Press Close to return to the G-Code Processing window.
1910
VERICUT Help
To rename an existing class in the control configuration:

2. In the G-Code Processing window, select the class (Specials, States, Cycles, etc.) that you
want to rename so that it becomes highlighted.
right mouse button on the highlighted class and select Add/Modify) to display the
Add/Modify Word/Address window.
4. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, edit name in the Class Name text field.
5. Press Modify.
6. Press Close to return to the G-Code Processing window.
To delete a class and its groups from the control configuration:

2. In the G-Code Processing window, select the class (Specials, States, Cycles, etc.) that you
want to Delete so that it becomes highlighted.
3. In the G-Code Processing window menu bar, select Edit menu > Cut (or click the right
mouse button on the highlighted class and select Cut). You can also use the Delete key on
your keyboard.
The class and all groups associated with it are removed.
To change the position of a class and its groups within the control configuration:

2. In the G-Code Processing window, left-click on the class (Specials, States, Cycles, etc.) to be
repositioned and drag it to the desired location.
See G-Code Processing window and Add/Modify Word/Address window, also in the
Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT
1911
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Word/Address Groups
Groups can call one or more action macros to perform various actions, or set variables. This
functionality allows you to virtually "wire" a custom NC control based on machine code data to
be processed. Class, group, condition, and macro order is changed via dragging them with the
left mouse button.
NOTES:
1. Always reset VERICUT (press on (Reset Model) the VERICUT main window) after
2. Use the Debug Macro Arguments feature in the Debug section of the Settings window
window: G-Code Outputs tab (Project menu > Settings > G-Code Outputs tab) to see the
macro name, the word, the text string value, and the numeric value for the macro being
called.
more information.
To add a new group to the control configuration:

2. In the G-Code Processing window, click on the + sign to the left of the class (Specials, States,
Cycles, etc.) that you want to add the new group to so that it expands.
3. Select the existing group to add the new group after so that it becomes highlighted.
right mouse button on the highlighted class and select Add/Modify from the menu that
displays) to display the Add/Modify Word/Address window.
5. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, specify how to activate the group:
To act based on a word/value:
Select Word, then enter the word name in the Word text field and the one, or more,
values (e.g. perform an action when M10 is encountered) in the Range text field.
1912
VERICUT Help
To act based on a variable value:

Select Variable, then enter the variable name in the Variable text field, and one, or
more values (e.g. perform an action when #100=1) in the Range text field.
6. Specify if one, or more, conditions are to be checked for:
In the Conditions section of the window, click on Add to add a condition record to the table.
In the conditional record that is added follow one of the following sequences depending on
what you are basing the condition on.
To check for another word/value in the block:
Select and, or not, from the Operator pull-down list.
Select Word from the Type pull-down list.
Select the word that the condition is based on from the Condition pull-down list.
Enter the value(s) of the word that the condition is based on in the Conditional
Value text field.
To check a machine state:

Select State from the Type pull-down list.
Select the machine state that the condition is based on from the Condition pull-
down list.
Select the value of the machine state that the condition is based on from the
Conditional Value pull-down list. Only values appropriate for the specified machine
state will appear in the list.
To check another variable value:

Select Variable from the Type pull-down list.
Specify the variable name that the condition is based on in the Condition text field.
Specify the value(s) of the machine state that the condition is based on in the
Conditional Value text field.
Repeat the above steps to add additional conditions.
1913
VERICUT Help
7. Configure the group action:

To call a macro:
Select Macroname
Specify the macro to be called by selecting from the Macroname list or by typing the
macro name in the Macroname text field. Text entered is not case sensitive. Use the
automatic filtering capability to help you find macros. As you enter text characters in the
Macroname text field, the list of macros is automatically filtered to show those that
match the entered text.
displayed in the Macroname text field and then press F1 key on your keyboard to
display the documentation for the selected macro.
Use the Override Value and Override Text fields, as needed, to supply supporting data
for the selected macro.
See the VERICUT Macros section, in the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
To set a variable:
Select Variable.
Enter the variable name in the Variable Name text field.
Enter a description in the Variable Description text field.
Enter the value for the variable in the Override Value text field.
The remaining window features are seldom used. For descriptions, see Add/Modify
Word/Address window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT
Composite Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
8. Press Add at the bottom of the Add/Modify Word/Address window. The new group is
added after the highlighted group you initially selected.
To modify an existing group in the control configuration:

Cycles, etc.) containing the group that you want to modify to so that it expands.
3. Select the group to modify so that it becomes highlighted.
1914
VERICUT Help
right mouse button on the highlighted class and select Add/Modify from the menu that
displays) to display the Add/Modify Word/Address window.
5. In the Add/Modify Word/Address window, modify window values as required.
6. Press Modify.
To delete a group from the control configuration:
Cycles, etc.) containing the group that you want to delete so that it expands.
3. Select the group to delete so that it becomes highlighted.
4. In the G-Code Processing menu bar, select Edit menu> Cut (or click the right mouse button
on the highlighted group and select Cut). You can also use the Delete key on your keyboard.
The group and all data associated with it is removed.
See G-Code Processing window, and Add/Modify Word/Address window, also in the
1915
VERICUT Help
Control Variables (Control Variables window)
Location:
Configuration menu > Control Variables
The Control Variables option opens the Control Variables window enabling you to add/remove
variables to/from the control. These variables will be defined and/or initialized when the
Control file is loaded.
Menu Bar:
1916
VERICUT Help
File menu:
Exit — Use to close the Variables window.
Edit menu:
Add Variable — Opens the Variable Add window enabling you specify the characteristics of
a new variable and add it to the variable list. See Variable Add window in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for complete information.
Delete Variable — Deletes the highlighted variable from the variable list.
Delete All — Deletes all variables in the Contol Variables window Variables List.
Variables List:
The Variables List, located in the lower portion of the Variables window, displays all variables
initialized and encountered during NC program processing. Notice in the picture below that
some of the text is red. This indicates that the variable value changed while processing the
current block.
NOTE: Control Variables created using a Control Initialization File will not appear in the
Control Variables window Variables List. See Initialization File in the Getting Started section of
VERICUT Help or VERCUT Composite Simulation Help for information on initialization files.
1917
VERICUT Help
Name — The Name column displays a tree structure showing a list of all control variables, and a
branch for Global control variables, as well as branches for the control variables associated with
each SubSystem. The tree is constantly updated as the NC program is processed.
Notice that each variable has an image associated with it indicating that it is a control
variable.
Description — Description of the variable. This field enables you to enter a description for the
Control Variable.
Axis, Axis Array, Integer, or Integer Array); also indicates the type of data that can be assigned
to the variable. See Variable Add window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for more detailed descriptions of these variable types.
If you try to access a non-existing variable (a variable that does not show up in the variables
window), VERICUT outputs an error message saying; "un-initialized variable, defaulting to zero".
Add — Opens the Variable Add window enabling you specify the characteristics of a new
control variable and add it to the variables list. See Variable Add window in the Project Tree
section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for complete information.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted variable from the variable list.
Delete All — Deletes all variables in the variable list.
1918
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Right-click in the Variables List to display the following menu:
NOTES:
1. Features Add, Delete, and Delete All provide the same functionality as described above
and also under Edit menu.
2. Feature Variable modify opens the Variable Modify window enabling you to modify the
characteristics of array variables. This feature is only active when an array variable is
highlighted. See Variable Modify window in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or
VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for complete information.
1919
VERICUT Help
Control Settings (Control Settings window)
Location:
Configuration menu > Control Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The Control Settings option opens the Control Settings window enabling you to configure how
the machine control will process machine code data.
1920
VERICUT Help
General tab — Features on this tab are used to configure general guidelines for how the control
processes machine code data and number equations.
Motion tab — Features on this tab are used to configure default NC control motion states, and
the precision used when outputting calculated values.
Circles tab — Features on this tab are used to configure how the circle center data (e.g. I J K) is
interpreted.
Cycles tab — Features on this tab are used to configure how fixed tool axis, or "canned" cycle
motion blocks are interpreted, e.g. G8n.
Tooling tab — The features on this tab are used to configure default tooling conditions and tool
change activity.
Rotary tab — Features on this tab are used to configure how rotary motion commands are
interpreted, e.g. A, B, C.
Wire EDM tab — Features on this tab are used to configure wire EDM machining settings.
Cutter Compensation tab — Features on this tab are used to configure how the programmed
tool path is compensated when cutter diameter compensation, or "CDC" is used, e.g. G41-42.
Offsets tab — Features on this tab are used to configure an initial work offset, or “fixture
offset”, to be in effect at the start of tool path processing.
Subroutines tab — Features on this tab are used to configure how subroutine names are
referenced by the NC control.
OptiPath & Curve Fit tab — Features on this tab are used to configure settings referenced when
G-Code tool path files are optimized by OptiPath.
Sync tab — Features on this tab configure VERICUT for simulating machining with synchronized
subsystems.
Control Notes tab — Features on this tab are used to enter "message notes" and "comment
notes" in the current control file.
Turning tab — Features on this tab configure VERICUT for lathe turning simulations.
OK — Applies the changes and closes the Control Settings window.

Apply — Applies the changes and leaves the Control Settings window open.
Cancel — Closes the Control Settings window without applying changes.
the Building NC Controls section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help.
1921
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, General tab
Locations:
Optimize menu > Optimize Control > G-Code Output Options tab
Toolbar short cut:

The features on the General tab enable you to configure general guidelines for how the control
processes machine code data and number equations.
NOTE: The picture below shows the VERICUT Verification Control Settings window tabs.The
OptiPath & Curve Fit, Turning, Wire EDM and Tooling tabs are not available in the VERICUT
Composite Simulation Control Settings window. The OptiPath & Curve Fit and Wire EDM tabs
are not available in the VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Control Settings window.
Control Type — Sets the type of NC control being used. Choosing the proper option establishes
a mode of operation consistent with how the control processes NC data. Options are:
Generic — Fanuc and most other controls using standard controller functions.
NUM — French-made control. This option affects how G-Code data is interpreted, for
example: how variables are initialized and processed, and how to interpret parameters to
macros that shift the location of the tool path.
1922
VERICUT Help
Heidenhain Conversational — Heidenhain Conversational control. This option causes

VERICUT to recognize the "L" word as an optimizable word. Also, the "L" word is included
with any cuts added during optimization.
Siemens — Siemens 840D control. Special logic is added in the "filter" logic for the
processing of NURBS.
Toshiba — Toshiba control. Special logic is added in the "filter" logic for the processing of
NURBS.
Heidenhain ISO — Heidenhain ISO control. If a block is marked as non-optimizable, and the
block contains a I, J, or K (circle record), then the Feedrate is not restored (similar to going
into RAPID mode). A series of OptiPath output formatting decisions are based on this
control type.
K&T — Kearney & Trecker control. Special handling is added for TYPE II processing. If a
TYPE II argument is defined to be a V (Value), but an "=" character is found within this
argument, then the argument is internally processed as a WV argument.
Okuma OSP — Use for Okuma controls to invoke special logic to handle toe following
situations:
1. CALL OSUB1 ( a call to a subroutine)
2. OSUB1 (the declarations of a subroutine
3. IF (expression) NLABEL1 (a branch to a label)
4. NLABEL1 (the declaration of a label)
These situations previously often resulted in “Error: The Word xxxx is not defined” error
messages.
See Notes about Okuma Parsing Enhancements, in the Notes about Special Topics section.
in the CGTech Help Library for additional information.
Calculation Tolerance — Tolerance for rounding mathematical evaluations, such as
determining if two calculated values are equal to, greater than, or lesser than each other.
NOTE: The Calculation Tolerance should be adjusted to eliminate "invalid circle" errors
caused by circle calculations that produce differences larger than the tolerance value when
processing G-Code data.
Order of Math Operations — Order in which math operations are performed. Options are:
Rules of Precedence — Follow the basic rules of math precedence:
1. Perform exponential (power).
2. Perform multiplication and division operations.
3. Perform addition and subtraction operations, example: 5 + 5.3 * 3 * sin(30)= 12.95
Enclosing math operations in parenthesis causes them to be performed before those
not enclosed in parenthesis. The same rules of precedence are applied to math
operations enclosed in parenthesis.
1923
VERICUT Help
Left to Right — Use left to right sequence, example: 5 + 5.3 * 3 * sin(30)= 15.45
Default Word — Word assumed by VERICUT for NC data blocks beginning with numbers, such
as NC data for some Heidenhain controls. For example, for VERICUT to interpret blocks like
"50G01X5", set Default Word to "N". VERICUT then interprets the block without error as
"N50G01X5".
See Configuring "General" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window
Initialization File — Use this feature to specify the Control Initialization File to be used. A
Control Initialization File is a text, or subroutine, file used to initialize variables used in the
machine control. The Control Initialization File is processed at the same time as the "Start of
Processing" event.
Click on the (Add Control Initialization File) icon to display the Control Initialization Files
file selection window and use it to specify the \path\filename of the Control Initialization File to
be used.
Use the (Clear Control Initialization File) to clear the Initialization File text field.
Use the (Edit Control Initialization File) to open the specified Control Initialization File in a
NOTE: The Initialization File feature is not available in VERICUT Composites Simulation.
See Variables window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help, or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information on monitoring
and tracking Control Variables.
See Initialization File in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for additional information on Initialization Files.
See Control Variables window, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help for
information on adding Variables to a control configuration.
To Control Settings window
1924
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Motion tab
Location: Configuration menu > Control Settings
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Motion tab enable you to configure default NC control motion states, and
specify the precision used when outputting calculated values. These settings are in affect when
the control and machine are initially powered on.
NOTE: The picture below shows the VERICUT Verification Control Settings window tabs. The
1925
VERICUT Help
Default Motion Type — Default motion type for the control.

Options are:
Rapid
Linear
Default Plane Selection — Default motion plane, or "cutting plane" for the control. Options
are:
XY
ZX
YZ
Default Control Units — Default measurement units for the control.

Options are:
Project Units (the units specified in the .VcProject file)
Inch
Metric
Default Command Mode — Default command mode, or "input dimension mode" for the
control.
Options are:
Absolute
Incremental
Default Feed Mode / Default Feedrate — Default feed rate mode and value for the control.
Feed mode options are:
Feed per Minute
Feed per Revolution
Output Initial Spindle Location — When active (Yes), causes the machine to move to its initial
spindle location at the beginning of NC program processing. Enter initial machine location
values in an Initial Machine Location table.
Rapid Motion Cancels Cycles — When active (Yes), rapid motions (e.g. G0) cancel canned cycles
(e.g. G81-89).
Linear Motion Cancels Cycles — When active (Yes), linear motions (e.g. G01) cancel canned
cycles (e.g. G81-89).
1926
VERICUT Help
CW Motion Cancels Cycles / CCW Motion Cancels Cycles — When active (Yes), clockwise (or
counterclockwise) circular interpolation motions (e.g. G02) cancel canned cycles (e.g. G81-89).
Output Rapid Motions as — Controls the format in which rapid motions are written to the APT
Output file during reverse post-processing.
Options are:
Feedrate — Outputs a "FEDRAT/n" command where the feed rate is calculated based on
the rapid priority of moving axes, and then output the tool tip location(s). When rapid
priority causes axes to move independently, multiple tool tip positions are output.
Rapid — Outputs the word "RAPID" followed by a single tool tip location.
Maximum Inverse Time Output Feedrate — Highest feedrate value which can result from
interpreting inverse time feed rate values (e.g. G93). The output feed rate is set to this rate
when in inverse time feed mode and the calculated feed rate is zero or greater then the
specified maximum.
Output Precision — Controls the accuracy used to interpret calculated values, such as: CDC
offset positions, mathematical operations, etc.
Options are:
Full Precision — Highest possible accuracy. Note that full precision output values can result
in higher accuracy than the NC control uses, which may result in differences between
simulated motion and the actual motion performed by the NC control.
Specified Precision — Use the accuracy specified via the Specified Output Precision feature
(see below).
Input Precision — Use the accuracy used in the input NC program file. For example, when
NC program file data is in 3.4 format, the precision used is also 3.4.
Specified Output Precision — When Output Precision= Specified Precision, this value reflects
the accuracy used by the NC control to perform the operations described above for Output
Precision.
See Configuring "Motion" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window
1927
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Circles tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Circles tab enable you to configure how the circle center data (e.g. IJK) is
interpreted. The Interpolation Tolerance determines the quantity of machine positions which
simulate arc and helical motions.
Circle Center Mode — Mode in which to interpret circle center data.

Options:
Absolute — Absolute center coordinates.
Incremental — Incremental distances. (See "Incremental Circle Center Method" below).
G Code Dependent — As described above, except depends on the active input dimension
mode: absolute or incremental.
1928
VERICUT Help
Incremental Circle Center Method — When interpreting incremental circle center values, this
feature controls how incremental circle center data is interpreted.
Options:
From Start to Center Point — Distance from circle start point to circle center.
From Center to Start Point — Distance from circle center to circle start point.
Unsigned — Unsigned, positive incremental distance between circle start point and circle
center). Unsigned incremental circle motion blocks are always positive in value, and do not
cut circles greater than 90 degrees.
Pitch Specified with IJK — This option determines if the CircleCenterX, and CircleCenterY, and
CircleCenterZ macros can be used to determine the pitch. Only the macro which corresponds to
the direction perpendicular to the current motion plane will be used for the pitch value. The
pitch is defined as depth per revolution. The default is "No". If set to "Yes", the delta depth
distance is divided by the pitch to determine the number of full loops. If set to "No", the
HelicalFullLoops macro should be called, and the pitch will be calculated based on the number
of full loops, the delta depth distance, and the starting and ending angles.
APT Output for Circular Motion — Controls the format in which circular motions are output
during conversion to an APT output file.
Options:
CIRCLE
CIRCLE and GOTO’s
GOTO’s
An APT Output file is created when the Create APT Output File (Ref. Process Options window:
G-Code Output Files tab in the VERICUT Project Tree section of VERICUT Help) is toggled on
(checked).
See Configuring "Circles" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window section,
1929
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Cycles tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Cycles tab enable you to configure how fixed tool axis, or "canned" cycle
motion blocks are interpreted, e.g. G8n.
Cycle Cancel causes Rapid Motion — When active (Yes), sets the rapid motion mode with a
cancel cycle command (e.g. G80).
Ignore Cycles during Rotary Motion — When active (Yes), canned cycles are ignored during
rotary motions. Set to No to allow processing of canned cycles during rotary motions. The use
of this modal becomes more important when the Output Intermediate Points feature on the
Control Settings window: Rotary tab, is active.
Cycle Execute — Controls when cycle motions are executed.
1930
VERICUT Help
Options:
On Motion — Execute cycle on cycle block and each following motion until cancelled.
(Default)
As Commanded — Cycle definition block is for setup only; execute cycle when commanded
by a specific word/address, such as G79 with some Phillips NC controls. Use of this feature
requires that the CyclesExecute macro is used in the NC control configuration for the codes
that command cycles to be executed.
See VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library for information on the CyclesExecute
macro, and all VERICUT macros.
See Configuring "Cycles" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window section,
1931
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Tooling tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Tooling tab enable you to configure default tooling conditions, and define
tool change activity.
OptiPath & Curve Fit and Wire EDM tabs are not available in the VERICUT Drill and Fastener
Simulation Control Settings window.
Initial Tool Component ID — Specifies the Tool Index Number of the tool component initially
active for tool changes.
Tool Number Method — Controls how to interpret tool number word/addresses (e.g. Tn).
Options are:
Select Only — Tool number only selects the tool. The tool is changed by a separate
command, e.g. M6)
1932
VERICUT Help
Select & Change — Tool number selects and changes the tool. A separate tool change
command is not used.
Tool Change Retract Method — Method of retracting for a tool change. Methods which retract
machine axes reference location values stored in a Tool Change Location table.
Options are:
No Retract — Change the tool at its current location.
Retract (Z-Axis only) — Retract the tool only along the Z-axis.
Retract All Axes — Retract all machine motion axes to their respective tool change
locations.
Retract Tool Side Axes — Similar to Retract All Axes, except applies only to motion axes
connected between the machine Base and Tool components.
Use Retraction Table — Refer to the Tool Change Retraction table (ref. Tool Change
Retraction table, in the Tables for Processing G-Codes section, in the CGTech Help Library)
to determine which machine axes to retract.
Tool Change Cancels Cycles — When active (Yes), cancels canned cycles with a tool change.
Tool Change Causes Rapid Motion — When active (Yes), sets the rapid motion mode with a
tool change.
See Configuring "Tooling" NC Control Settings in the Using the Control Settings window section,
also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener
1933
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Rotary tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Rotary tab enable you to configure how rotary motion commands are
interpreted, e.g. A, B, C. A "moving tool philosophy" is assumed when describing rotations.
1934
VERICUT Help
A-axis Rotary Type, B-axis Rotary Type, C-axis Rotary Type — The following settings control
how rotary commands are interpreted (e.g. ABC). Each axis is individually controlled. Options:
EIA (360 Absolute) — Refers to absolute angle positions. Absolute Rotary Direction
controls how rotation values determine the direction of rotation.
Linear — Refers to angles on a linear axis "wrapped" around the rotary component. In
absolute input dimension mode (e.g. G90), rotary values specify absolute locations along
the linear-rotary axis, while the sign (+ / -) controls which end of the linear axis is used. In
incremental input dimension mode (e.g. G91), rotary values specify degrees to rotate from
the current position, and the sign controls the direction of rotation: plus = CCW, minus =
CW.
1935
VERICUT Help
Example rotations of a B-axis linear-rotary component:
Current axis position Command Rotary motion Rotary destination

(moving tool
philosophy)
B0 G90B75 75 deg CCW B75
B0 G90B-75 75 deg CW B285 (B-75)
B35 G90B-75 110 deg CW B285 (B-75)
B150 G90B120 30 deg CW B120
B150 G90B-120 270 deg CW B240 (B-120)
N/A G91B75 75 deg CCW Current +75
N/A G91B-75 75 deg CW Current -75
A2-axis Rotary Type, B2-axis Rotary Type, C2-axis Rotary Type — The settings control how
rotary commands for secondary rotary axes are interpreted (e.g. A2, B2, C2). Each axis is
individually controlled. Options are same as described above for ABC rotary types.
Absolute Rotary Direction — Controls how rotation values determine the direction of rotation
for EIA (360 Absolute) rotary type components. Options and examples follow.
Positive -> CCW — Sign controls the direction of rotation: plus = CCW, minus = CW and the
absolute value of the rotation value specifies the rotary destination.
NOTE: You can configure the same behavior using Configuration menu >
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirPosCCW macro.
1936
VERICUT Help
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Positive -> CCW:
Current axis position Command Rotary motion Rotary destination

(moving tool philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B20 G90B-90 290 deg CW B90
B90 G90B60 330 deg CCW B60
Positive -> CW — Similar to Positive -> CCW, except the rotation directions are reversed.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirPosCW macro.
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Positive -> CW:
Current axis Command Rotary motion Rotary

position destination
(moving tool
philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B0 G90B380 340 deg CW B20
B20 G90B-90 70 deg CCW B90
B90 G90B60 30 deg CW B60
Always CCW — Rounds the rotation value to increments of 360, then subtracts 360 until
the subtracted value is between 0-360. The rounded value specifies the rotary destination.
The tool always rotates in a CCW direction about the rotary center point.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirCCW macro.
1937
VERICUT Help
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Always CCW:

(moving tool
philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B20 G90B-90 250 deg CCW B270
B270 G90B60 150 deg CCW B60
Always CW — Similar to Always CCW, except the rotation directions are reversed.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirCW macro.
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Always CW:

(moving tool
philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B0 G90B380 340 deg CW B20
B20 G90B-90 110 deg CW B270
B270 G90B60 210 deg CW B60
Shortest Distance — Uses the rotation value and its sign to specify the absolute rotary
position. For each rotary motion, the tool rotates the shortest distance about the rotary
center point to the rotary destination.
1938
VERICUT Help
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirShortestDist macro.
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Shortest Distance:

(moving tool
philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B20 G90B-90 110 deg CW B270
B270 G90B60 150 deg CCW B60
Linear — Rounds the rotation value to increments of 360, then subtracts 360 until the
subtracted value is between 0-360. The difference between the rounded value and the
current position is the rotary destination while the sign of the difference specifies the
rotation direction. A positive difference value rotates the tool in a CCW direction about the
rotary center point, a negative value rotates the tool in a CW direction.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirLinear macro.
Examples of rotary behavior with Absolute Rotary Direction=Linear:

(moving tool
philosophy)
NA G90B0 NA B0
B20 G90B-90 250 deg CCW B270
B270 G90B60 210 deg CW B60
1939
VERICUT Help
Shortest Distance – 180 CW — Uses the rotation value and its sign to specify the absolute
rotary position. For each rotary motion, the tool rotates the shortest distance about the
rotary center point to the rotary destination, except when the angle is exactly 180 degrees.
When the angle is exactly 180 degrees, the direction will always be set to clockwise.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirShortestDist180CW macro.
Shortest Distance – 180 CCW — Uses the rotation value and its sign to specify the absolute
rotary position. For each rotary motion, the tool rotates the shortest distance about the
rotary center point to the rotary destination, except when the angle is exactly 180 degrees.
When the angle is exactly 180 degrees, the direction will always be set to counterclockwise.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirShortestDist180CCW macro.
Positive -> CW ABSOLUTE — Similar to Positive -> CCW ABSOLUTE, but rotary directions
are reversed. This feature sets the direction for an EIA (360 Absolute) rotary table to be
clockwise when the angle is positive and counterclockwise when the angle is negative.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirPosCWAbsolute macro.
Positive -> CCW ABSOLUTE — Sets the direction for an EIA (360 Absolute) rotary table to be
counterclockwise when the angle is positive and clockwise when the angle is negative.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirPosCCWAbsolute macro.
Shortest Distance2 — This option behaves the same as Shortest Distance except when
moving from 180 to 0. In this case, it moves in the opposite direction.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirShortestDist2 macro.
Shortest Distance3 — This option behaves the same as Shortest Distance except that it
does not output a warning message if the axis moves to exactly 180 degrees.
Word/Address and associating the RotaryDirShortestDist3 macro.
See VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library for information about the macros named in the
above Notes, and all VERICUT macros.
1940
VERICUT Help
Rotary Tool Control Point — When active (Yes), with default settings, Rotary Tool Control
Point, or "RTCP" causes rotary motion about a specific control point-typically the tool tip. When
RTCP is not active (No), rotation occurs about the rotary component origins. This feature is
intended for use only with tilting head machines.
RTCP compensates for the gage offset (XYZ distance from tool tip to Tool component) and pivot
offset (XYZ distance from spindle face/centerline to tool side rotary components rotation/pivot
point) as tool side rotary components rotate.
Affect of using RTCP with an A-axis rotary component:
RTCP only applies to rotary components between a Tool component and the Base component
(tool side). Rotary components between a Stock component and the Base component (part
side) do not effect the orientation of the tool, and therefore do not affect the tool side offsets.
RPCP, or Rotary Part Control Point, is used with part side rotary components, where the part is
moved relative to the tool tip. RPCP actually rotates the workpiece coordinate system as the
part side rotary components rotate. RPCP should only be used when programming in the part
coordinate system. See the "RpcpOn, RpcpOff" macros, in the VERICUT Macros section, or the
"RPCP Pivot Offset table" in the Tables for Processing G-Codes section, for more information.
Both can be found in the CGTech Help Library.
NOTES:
1. The default state for RTCP is set on the Rotary Settings panel. The RTCP state can be
modified via the RotaryControlPointOnOff or RtcpOn, RtcpOff macros.
2. See also: "RTCP Pivot Offset table" or "RPCP Pivot Offset table" for possible additional
configuration for correct RTCP simulation.
1941
VERICUT Help
RTCP Mode — This feature is only active if RTCP is turned on. This field is used to specify the
default mode setting, which can then be overridden by using the RtcpMode macro. Choose one
of the following:
Continuous — The machines axes will be continually updated as the tool rotates in order to
keep the tool tip on path. This means that if only an A rotation is programmed (assume A is
a rotary on the Tool Side), then all axes will move in order to keep the tool tip motionless as
the tool rotates.
Tool Side), then the tool tip will move as the tool rotates, but it will end up in its original
location.
Only as XYZ is Specified — If XYZ is specified on the block with the rotary move, than this
mode is the same as “At End Point”. If XYZ is not specified on the block with the rotary
move, than only the rotary will move. As each axis is specified, the corresponding offset
will then be applied.
RTCP Uses — Use this feature to specify which type of pivot offset compensation to use. There
are two Pivot Offset compensation types: RTCP and Gage.
RTCP specifies the programmed/driven point is assumed to be the spindle face/centerline
with no tool loaded. The RTCP Pivot Offset table can be used with this type to override the
automatic calculation. The centerline of rotation for multiple tool side rotary components
must intersect.
Gage specifies the programmed/driven point is assumed to be the rotation/pivot point of
the tool side rotary component, closest to the Base component. The PivotOffsetCompName
macro can be used with this type to override where the XYZ pivot offset distance will be
measured to. The centerline of rotation, for multiple tool side rotary components, does not
have to intersect. The macros TurnOnOffGageOffset and TurnOnOffGagePivotOffset can
be used to turn on and off the gage offset and the pivot offset, thereby driving either the
spindle face or the tool tip. If Programming Method is set to Tool Tip, the gage offset is
always active. RTCP must be active for this setting to have an affect.
Choose one of the following:

Default Pivot Offset — Use the RTCP Pivot Offset compensation type. The
ApplyGagePivotOffset macro can be used to switch to the Gage Pivot Offset compensation
type.
Gage Pivot Offset — Use the Gage Pivot Offset compensation type. This option should be
used for all new jobs.
NOTE: The Gage Pivot Offset might currently be turned off, or may be set to (0,0,0).
1942
VERICUT Help
RTCP Pivot Offset — Use the RTCP Pivot Offset compensation type.
NOTE: The RTCP Pivot Offset might currently be turned off, or may be set to (0,0,0).
Only Gage Offset — Do not compensate for XYZ pivot offset. Compensate only for the XYZ
gage offset.
TECH NOTES:
Traditionally, Rotary Tool Control Point (RTCP) referred to a state in which the tool would rotate
about the tool tip when a tool-side rotary was rotated.
Today this feature has a more generic definition. Rotary Tool Control Point refers to a state in
which the tool side offsets are automatically updated when a tool-side rotary is rotated. This
means that even though Rotary Tool Control Point is active, the results might not be as
described above for the following reasons:
1. The traditional definition assumed that the offsets are adjusted continually as the rotary
axis is rotated. This is not always the case. In the above diagram, an "A90" command is
being executed. If the offsets are not updated continuously, the tool tip position will not
stay fixed, but will "wander", and then end up in its original position. The RTCP Contour
flag allows for configuration of either type.
2. The traditional definition assumed that the offsets would be applied immediately to all
axes even though the corresponding linear axes were not specified on the block. This is
not always the case. If the offsets are only applied when the corresponding linear axes
are specified, then in the above case (A90), even though RTCP was active, the machine
would behave as illustrated on the left. Then when XYZ is specified (with the original
coordinates), then the updated offsets would be applied, and the tool tip would return
to its original position. The RTCP With Motion flag allows for configuration of either
type.
Some controls only adjust some of the 4 tool side offsets. If this is true, then the tool tip will not
return to the original position.
See Configuring "Rotary" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window section,
1943
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Wire EDM tab

Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Wire EDM tab enable you to configure wire EDM machining settings.
Maximum Wire Angle — Maximum angle the wire can tilt in any direction from vertical
alignment. If the wire is tilted beyond this angle, an error message is issued.
Initial Voltage — When active (On), indicates voltage to the wire is on at the start of tool path
processing.
UV Relative to XY — When active (Yes), U and V tool path values are relative to the current X
and Y axis positions.
XY Also Moves UV — When active (Yes), X and Y tool path values also cause the corresponding
U and V axis to move. In typical wire EDM machine construction, the U and V axes are
connected such that they are slaved off the X and Y axes. In other words, whenever the X and Y
axes move, by default the corresponding U and V axes also move. The XY Also Moves UV
setting is intended to work with machines built such that the U and V axes are separate from
the X and Y axes.
Work Table to XY Output Plane — Distance from the top of the work table (machine Z zero) to
the XY output plane (output Z values). The XY output plane is the Z-axis level at which X and Y
values are assumed to be driven. This value is measured along the machine Z-axis, and is usually
zero.
See Configuring "Wire EDM" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window
section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
1944
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Cutter Compensation tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Cutter Compensation tab enables you to configure how the programmed
tool path is compensated when cutter diameter compensation, or "CDC" is used, e.g. G41-42.
Enter CDC offset values into a Cutter Compensation table. To apply CDC offsets to the
programmed tool path, ensure Process Cutter Comp. is active.
CDC ON/OFF Method — Controls how the offset condition is established when CDC is turned
on, and how the offset is cancelled when CDC is turned off.
Options:
Ramp ON/OFF — Establish the offset condition with a "ramp-on" motion after CDC is
turned on. When CDC is turned off, the offset is cancelled with a "ramp-off" motion on the
next tool move.
1945
VERICUT Help
Immediate — Immediately establishes the offset condition when CDC is turned on, and
assumes the offset has been established by a prior data block (e.g. G43-44 as interpreted by
the Phillips CNC controls). When CDC is turned off, the offset is cancelled without a tool
move.
CDC Ramp ON/OFF with — Specifies the motion types which establish/cancel the CDC offset.
Options:
Active Plane Motion — Use to turn CDC on with a motion in the active cutting plane.
Any Motion — Use to turn CDC on with any motion, including motion along the tool axis.
See Configuring "Cutter Compensation" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings
window section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
1946
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Offsets tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Offsets tab enable you to configure an initial work offset, or "fixture
offset", to be in effect at the start of NC program processing.
Initial Work Offset — When active (Yes), sets the initial work offset specified by the Initial
Work Index (see below).
Initial Work Index — The index or offset register value containing the initial work offset. The
offset remains effective until a different work offset (e.g. G54-59) is processed, or until
cancelled. Enter the corresponding offset values into a Work Offsets table (ref. Work Offsets
table, in the Tables for Processing G-Codes section, in the CGTech Help Library).
See Configuring "Offsets" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window section,
1947
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Subroutines tab

Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Subroutines tab enable you to configure how subroutine names are
Type of Subroutine Names — Controls how names of subroutines are referenced. Options are:
Numeric — Use the numeric value; leading zeros are ignored. For example, "O0010" is
interpreted the same as "O10".
Text — Use the text string value. For example, "O0010" is not interpreted the same as the
name "O10".
See Configuring "Subroutines" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window
1948
VERICUT Help
Also see About Simulating Subroutines, in the Building NC Controls section, also in the
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for general information about simulating subroutines.
1949
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, OptiPath & Curve Fit tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the OptiPath & Curve Fit tab enable you to configure settings referenced when
G-Code NC program files are optimized by OptiPath.
The settings are used to control block sequencing and word/value spacing in the optimized
output tool path file. Note that by default, optimized blocks receive the same sequence
number, if any, that appears on the original block processed. This typically results in multiple
blocks having the same sequence number.
Auto Sequence Numbering — When active (Yes), the Auto Sequence Numbering feature re-
sequences optimized NC program records in ascending order. The Sequence Increment Value
(see below) is used for the beginning sequence number, and as the increment value for
subsequent sequence numbers. Both optimized and non-optimized blocks with sequence
numbers are re-sequenced. Sequence numbers are not added to un-optimized blocks without a
sequence number.
NOTE: If the general control setting Default Word="N", then "N" does not appear in the
sequence number. The result is a sequence number without a word, for example: "50G01X5",
such as required by Heidenhain controls.
Add Sequence Number to Added Blocks — When active (Yes), adds sequence numbers to
blocks added during optimization via the Add More Cuts (ref. Add More Cuts, on the OptiPath
window: Settings tab, in the VERICUT Project Tree section of VERICUT Help) OptiPath setting.
1950
VERICUT Help
Sequence Increment Value — Initial value and increment value for re-sequencing optimized G-
Code NC program records.
Word Value Spacing — When active (Yes), OptiPath includes a space between word/value pairs
in the optimized NC program file. Un-optimized records do not receive spacing. When this
feature is not used, optimized NC program records are not spaced.
1951
VERICUT Help
Add/Date/Time Stamp to Optimized File. — When active (Yes), OptiPath will add a date and
time stamp to the optimized file,
See Configuring "OptiPath & Curve Fit" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings
window section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help for additional
information.
1952
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Sync tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Sync tab enable you to set up VERICUT for simulating machining with
synchronized subsystems.
The term "sync" refers to the idea of synchronizing multiple programs (or channels) at once. A
program could be defined by a separate input file, or by sections of a single input file. Each of
these programs drives a subsystem. The sync logic will obtain motions for all subsystems being
1953
VERICUT Help
synced, and then execute the motion. For example: If the upper system has a motion that will
take 3 seconds, and the lower subsystem has a motion that will take .5 seconds. The lower
subsystem motion and 1/6th of the upper subsystem motion will be executed. Then, the next
motion will then be retrieved for the lower subsystem, and the process continues. The Info
menu > NC Program panel shows which blocks are being processed by the programs.
NOTE: The actual synchronization of the programs based on WAIT or SYNC codes are
controlled by the G-Code Processing table.
Sync Method — The Sync Method turns on/off the Sync logic, and specifies the method that
will be used to determine which data applies to which subsystem.
Options include:
None — (Default) Turns off Sync logic. Normal processing occurs.
G&L - N/O Block — An "N" sequence numbers mark commands for the first subsystem, "O"
sequence numbers marks commands for the second subsystem, and "B" sequence
numbers marks commands for both subsystems.
Okuma - G13/G14 — The input program is divided into sections. Each section begins with
either a G13 or a G14. The G13 sections will drive the first subsystem, and the G14 sections
will drive the second subsystem.
Fanuc - Multiple NC Programs — Independent NC program files are specified for each
synced subsystem. The order of the subsystems specified must match the order of the NC
program files in the NC Program list.
INDEX - Channel 1/Channel 2 — A single NC program file contains two subroutines, one for
each head. A word/value, for example "M30", toggles between "channels" that control each
head. These channels will then drive the corresponding subsystems. See the
IndexCallMainSub macro in the "Macros - listed alphabetically" section for more
information.
Gildemeister - $1/$2 — Blocks starting with $1 will be processed by the first subsystem, and
blocks starting with $2 will be processed by the second subsystem. Blocks not beginning
with either a $1 or a $2 will be processed by both subsystems.
Mazak - G109L1/G109L2 — The input program is divided into sections. Each section begins
with either a G109L1 or a G109L2. The G109L1 sections will drive the first subsystem, and
the G109L2 sections will drive the second subsystem.
Allen-Bradley - Primary/Secondary — This sync type has the following attributes:
1. A block can contain commands for both subsystems (controls).
2. Each control is processed independently.
3. The next block is not processed until both controls are done with the previous block.
1954
VERICUT Help
4. Although the split up of the Info NC Program panel is not necessary (or possibly
desirable) for this sync type, it is still done for consistency with the way we handle
sync motion.
5. When "stepping", both the upper and lower NC Program panels (controls) will
process 1 block.
6. The MDI window will ignore the subsystem specified, and will process the line as
stated by sending it to both controls.
Citizen - $1/$2/$3 — The input program is divided into sections. Each section begins with a
$1, a $2, or a $3. The $1 sections will drive the first subsystem, the $2 sections will drive the
second subsystem, and the $3 sections will drive the third subsystem.
Generic – User Defined — This sync method uses a single NC program file but can have any
number of input channels. The Input Channel field is an editable field enabling you to
specify the text string used in the NC program file to identify each input channel. The Sync
SubSystem IDs field has a pull-down list of defined subsystems. See the sample Control
Settings window below.
1955
VERICUT Help
Upon Reset, the NC Program panel you will show both channels using the same NC
program. Also notice that initially, Line 1 of both channels display the Input Channel
identifier for channel 1 as shown in the picture below.
When the simulation gets to the first axis motion, Channel 2 will jump to the Input Channel
identifier for channel 2.
You also need to adjust the work offsets for each channel.
Pilot 4290 - $1/$2/$3 — $1 drives the first subsystem, $2 drives the second subsystem, and
#3 drives the third subsystem. Three subsystems are supported with the Pilot 4290 sync
type.
The input program is divided into multiple sections. Each section begins with a
ZUORDNUNG statement. For example, the statement ZUORDNUNG $1$3 specifies that the
following program section is to be read by subsystem 1 and subsystem 3.
If a $1, $2, or $3 is present at the beginning of a line, this will override the ZUORDNUMG
statement and only the specified subsystem will read this line.
Sin840D - INIT, START, WAITE — This sync method is used for the standard Siemens
Sin840D Sync mechanism for handling Sync jobs. The job starts as a single channel job. The
key codes are INIT, START, and WAITE
INIT: defines the subroutine that the second channel should process
START: starts the second channel
WAITE: tells the first head to wait here until the second channel reaches the end of file.
1956
VERICUT Help
When the second channel reaches the EOF, the job returns to a single channel job.
Currently, this sync type only supports 2 channels. With this sync type, the status of the
second channel is initialized to EOF.
The macro, Siemens840DSyncBegin is used to pass in the program that the second channel
should run.
When called from the first channel, it will activate (change the status) of the second
channel, and set its starting location to be the current line.
When called from the second channel, it will strip off the “_SPF” suffix, the Path name, and
the “_N_” prefix and then call this subroutine. When the second channel is done with this
program, it will mark its status as EOF, thereby deactivating himself.
The macro, Siemens840DSyncEnd, causes the first channel to wait until the second channel
reaches EOF.
See VERICUT Macros in the CGTech Help Library for information on these, and all, VERICUT
macros.
Sync Table
Each record in the Sync Table represent the information related to a particular "sync'd"
subsystem.
Index — This field is used to identify the sync record.
Input Channel — This field defines what is driving each channel. The information displayed here
will be different depending on the Sync Method being used.
Sync SubSystem IDs — This field defines the SubSystem that will be driven by the specified
Input Channel. Select the subsystem ID from the pull-down list.
The number of records in the Sync Table must match the Sync Method defined above. For
example the Citizen must have 3 Sync records, and the Okuma must have 2. The Fanuc style
could have any number of Sync records.
NOTE: A machine might define a separate subsystem for a head changer, a pallet changer,
… These are not Sync SubSystems. The Sync SubSystems corresponds to the primary
SubSystem that is being driven by each of the Sync'd channels.
Add — Use to add a record to the Sync Table after the highlighted SubSystem ID.
Delete — Use to delete the highlighted record from the Sync Table.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Sync Subsystems IDs Table to display the following menu.
1957
VERICUT Help
These provide the same functionality as Add and Delete described above.
Tip: Once you have set up the sync environment using the features in this tab, you can use the
features on the G-Code Advanced Settings window (ref. G-Code Advanced Settings window:
Sync tab, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help, or
VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help) to turn off one or more subsystems to assist in
debugging Sync related problems.
See Configuring "Sync" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window section,
1958
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Control Notes tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Control Notes tab enable you to add Message Notes and Comment Notes
to the control file.
Message Notes are saved in the header of the control file and are displayed in the VERICUT
message area (Logger) when the control file is loaded.
Comment Notes are saved in the header of the control file but do not display in the VERICUT
Logger.
1959
VERICUT Help
be added.
Any Message/Comment Notes that currently exist in the control file are displayed in the
appropriate text field as shown below. Any note can be edited and re-saved in the control file.
Existing Message/Comment Notes in the control file:
In the control file, each line of note is added to the header in quotes, and is preceded by either
the keyword MESSAGE (for message notes), or COMMENT (for comment notes) as shown
below.
How the above messages look in the control file:
CGTech Control
Version-7.3
MESSAGE "This is the 1st Message Note added to the control file and it will appear in the logger."
MESSAGE "This is the 2nd Message Note added to the control file and it will appear in the logger."
COMMENT "This is the 1st Comment Note added to the control file and it will not appear in the logger."
UNITS INCH
CSS_MAX_RPM 1000
SYNC_METHOD G13G14
1960
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window open.
Save the Control file by clicking on (Save Control) or (Save Control As) in the
Toolbar, or click on Configuration menu > Control > Save (or Save As) in the VERICUT menu
bar, to save the settings as part of the "current" NC control configuration.
NOTE: Control files containing notes can not be used in pre-V6.2 versions of VERICUT.
See Adding "Control Notes" to the NC Control, in the Using the Control Settings window
1961
VERICUT Help
Control Settings window, Turning tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Turning tab enable you to configure VERICUT for lathe turning simulations.
CSS Maximum RPM — When constant surface speed, or "CSS" is controlling spindle speed, this
value specifies the fastest RPM to turn the workpiece.
RPM Changes with RAPID and CSS — When toggled on (checked) and CSS is controlling spindle
speed, rapid motions (e.g. G0) can affect spindle speed, as well as linear and circular motions
(e.g. G1-3). Clear this checkbox to have only linear and circular motions affect RPM.
See Configuring "Turning" NC Control Settings, in the Using the Control Settings window
section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help and VERICUT Drill and Fastener
1962
VERICUT Help
Using the Control Settings window
1963
VERICUT Help
Configuring "General" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure desctibed below to configure general guidelines for how the control
processes machine codes and number equations.
To configure general settings in the NC control file:
1. Click on (Control Settings) in the Toolbar, or click on Configuration menu > Control
Settings in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the Control Settings window.
2. Click on the General tab.
The features on the General tab enable you to configure general guidelines for how the
control processes machine code data and number equations.
See Control Settings window: General tab, in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
3. Set Control Type: choose Generic for Fanuc and most other controls. Other options are:
NUM (French-made control), or Heidenhain Conversational, Siemens, Toshiba, Heidenhain
ISO, K&T, or Okuma OSP.
4. Set the Calculation Tolerance for evaluating mathematical evaluations.
5. Choose the Order of Math Operations (normally Rules of Precedence).
6. If NC data blocks begin a number instead of a letter (example "50G01X5"), specify a Default
Word so VERICUT interprets the number as a sequence numbers, for example "N".
7. Press Apply to accept the settings and leave the Control Settings window open for
additional work, or OK to accept the settings and close the Control Settings window.
8. Save the Control file by clicking on (Save Control) or (Save Control As) in the
1964
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Motion" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to configure settings in affect when the control and
machine are initially powered on, such as: default NC control motion states, and the precision
used when outputting calculated values.
To configure default motion and output precision settings in the control:
2. Click on the Motion tab.
The features on the Motion tab enable you to configure default NC control motion states,
and specify the precision used when outputting calculated values. These settings are in
affect when the control and machine are initially powered on.
See Control Settings window: Motion tab also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
3. Configure the "Default" options applicable to the control: default motion type, plane
selection, etc.
4. To start the machine at a location other than machine zero, ensure Output Initial Spindle
Location is active (Yes). Then enter the initial spindle location values into an Initial Machine
Location table.
See Machine Settings window: Locations tab also in the Configuration menu section of
Help and G-Code Advanced Settings window: Overrides tab in the Project Tree section of
Help and for additional information about creating tables.
For table-specific information, such as data entry formats and how they affect VERICUT,
refer to the Initial Machine Location table section, in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the
5. If applicable, set appropriate motion types to cancel canned cycles: rapid, linear, CW, etc.
6. Configure Output Rapid Motions as and Maximum Inverse Time Output Feedrate as
required to process rapid motions.
7. Set the Output Precision for interpreting calculated values, such as: CDC offset positions,
mathematical operations, etc.
8. If required, enter a value for Specified Output Precision that matches what then NC control
uses for these calculations.
1965
VERICUT Help
1966
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Circles" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to configure settings for interpreting circle center (e.g. IJK)
and helical motion data.
To configure circle/helical motion settings in the control:
2. Click on the Circles tab.
The features on the Circles tab enable you to configure how the circle center data (e.g. IJK)
is interpreted. The Interpolation Tolerance determines the quantity of machine positions
which simulate arc and helical motions.
See Control Settings window: Circles tab also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
more information.
3. Configure the features on the Circles tab as required.
1967
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Cycles" NC Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure settings for interpreting tool axis, or "canned"
cycle motion blocks (e.g. G8n...).
To configure canned cycle settings in the control:
2. Click on the Cycles tab.
The features on the Cycles tab enable you to configure how fixed tool axis, or "canned"
cycle motion blocks are interpreted, e.g. G8n.
See Control Settings window: Cycles tab also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
3. Configure the features on the Cycles tab as required.
1968
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Tooling" NC Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure settings for default tooling conditions and tool
change activity.
To configure tooling and tool change settings in the control:
2. Click on the Tooling tab.
The features on the Tooling tab enable you to configure default tooling conditions, and
define tool change activity.
See Control Settings window: Tooling tab also in the Configuration menu section of
3. Configure the features on the Tooling tab as required.
For preselect tooling, choose Tool Number Method = Select Only.
5. If Tool Change Retract Method was set to retract any machine axes, enter the
corresponding location values into a Tool Change Location table.
If Tool Change Retract Method was set to Use Retraction Table, configure the Tool Change
Retraction table with "1s" for axes to retract, and "0s" for axes that do not move during a
tool change.
VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help and G-Code Advanced Settings
window: Overrides tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help or VERICUT Drill and
Fastener Simulation Help for additional information about creating tables.
refer to the Tool Change Retraction table section of Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the
1969
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Rotary" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to configure settings for rotary motion commands (e.g.
ABC).
To configure rotary settings in the control:
2. Click on the Rotary tab.
The features on the Rotary tab enable you to configure how rotary motion commands are
interpreted, e.g. A, B, C. A "moving tool philosophy" is assumed when describing rotations.
See Control Settings window: Rotary tab also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT
3. Configure the features on the Rotary tab as required.
5. Save the Control file by clicking on (Save Control) in the Toolbar, or click on
Configuration menu > Control > Save (or Save As) in the VERICUT menu bar, to save the
settings as part of the NC control configuration.
1970
VERICUT Help
Configure "Wire EDM" Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure settings for wire EDM machining.
To configure wire EDM settings in the control:
2. Click on the Wire EDM tab.
The features on the Wire EDM tab enable you to configure wire EDM machining settings.
See Control Settings window: Wire EDM tab also in theConfiguration menu section of
3. Configure the features on the Wire EDM tab as required.
1971
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Cutter Compensation" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to configure how the programmed tool path is
compensated when cutter diameter compensation, or "CDC" is used (e.g. G41-42). When CDC is
active, the programmed NC program is simulated just as it will be compensated by the NC
control.
To configure the control to simulate cutter compensation:
2. Click on the Cutter Compensation tab.
The features on the Cutter Compensation tab enables you to configure how the
programmed tool path is compensated when cutter diameter compensation, or "CDC" is
used, e.g. G41-42. Enter CDC offset values into a Cutter Compensation table. To apply CDC
offsets to the programmed tool path, ensure Process Cutter Comp. is active.
See Control Settings window: Cutter Compensation tab also in the Configuration menu
Simulation Help for additional information.)
3. Configure the features on the Cutter Compensation tab as required.
additional work, or OK to accept the settings and close the Control Settings window..
5. Enter corresponding offset values into a Cutter Compensation table.
refer to the Cutter Compensation table section, in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the
6. To activate CDC for simulation: ensure that the Process Cutter Comp. feature on the
Project Tree, Configure Setup menu: G-Code tab is turned "On".
1972
VERICUT Help
See Configure Setup menu: G-Code tab in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
Also see Notes about Cutter Compensation Updates inV7.0.2, in Notes about Special
Topics, in the CGTech Help Library.
1973
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Offsets" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to configure an initial work offset, or "fixture offset", to be
in effect at the start of tool path processing.
To configure an initial work offset:
2. Click on the Offsets tab.
The features on the Offsets tab enable you to configure an initial work offset, or "fixture
offset", to be in effect at the start of NC program processing.
See Control Settings window: Offsets tab, also in the Configuration menu section of
Help.
3. Ensure that the Initial Work Offset feature is set to "Yes", and then enter the Initial Work
Index (e.g. 54-59) containing the initial offset to apply.
5. Enter corresponding offset values into a Work Offsets table.
refer to the Work Offsets table section, in Tables for Processing G-Codes, in the CGTech
Help Library.
1974
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Subroutines" NC Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure how subroutine names are referenced by the
control.
To configure how subroutine names are referenced by the control:
2. Click on the Subroutines tab.
The features on the Subroutines tab enable you to configure how subroutine names are
See Control Settings window: Subroutines tab, also in the Configuration menu section of
Also see About Simulating Subroutines, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
more general information.
3. Choose the Type of Subroutine Names which corresponds to how the control references
subroutine names:
Numeric — use numeric value (example: "O0010" is interpreted the same as "O10"), or Text
— use text string value (example: "O0010" is not the same as the name "O10").
Tip: K&T Gemini controls — try the Text type of subroutine names for this control.
1975
VERICUT Help
Configuring "OptiPath & Curve Fit" NC Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure settings for controlling block sequencing and
word/value spacing in the optimized NC program file that is output.
To re-sequence or add spaces to optimized G-Code NC program records:
2. Click on the OptiPath & Curve Fit tab.
The features on the OptiPath & Curve Fit tab enable you to configure settings referenced
when G-Code NC program files are optimized by OptiPath.
number, if any, that appears on the original block processed. This typically results in
multiple blocks having the same sequence number.
See Control Settings window: OptiPath & Curve Fit tab, also in the Configuration Menu
3. To re-sequence optimized NC program records:
Set the Auto Sequence Numbering feature to "Yes".
Set the Add Sequence Number to Added Blocks feature to "Yes" if to want sequence
numbers added to any additional blocks added by OptiPath.
Enter the Sequence Increment Value which defines the starting sequence number and
the increment to be used for subsequent sequence numbers.
4. To add a space between word/address pairs, set the Word Value Spacing feature to "Yes".
1976
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Sync" NC Control Settings
Use the procedure described below to set up VERICUT for simulating machining with
To configure "Sync" settings in the control:
2. Click on the Sync tab.
The features on the Sync tab enable you to set up VERICUT for simulating machining with
See Control Settings window: Sync tab, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
3. Select the Sync Method from the pull-down list to turn on the Sync logic, and specify the
method to be used to determine which data applies to which subsystem.
4. Press the Add button to add a record to the Sync Table.
The record added to the Sync Table will contain default values specific to the selected Sync
Method.
5. Select the Sync Subsystem ID from the pull-down list for the associated Input Channel as
required by your particular machine configuration.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the number of records in the Sync Table match the the number
required by the Sync Method selected in step 3.
1977
VERICUT Help
Adding "Control Notes" to the NC Control
Use the procedure described below to add notes to the NC Control.
To add notes in the control:
2. Click on the Control Notes tab.
The features on the Control Notes tab enable you to add Message Notes and Comment
Notes to the control file.
Message Notes are saved in the header of the control file and are displayed in the VERICUT
message area (Logger) when the control file is loaded.
Comment Notes are saved in the header of the control file but do not display in the
VERICUT Logger.
See Control Settings window: Control Notes tab also in the Configuration menu section of
3. Add a note by typing the desired text, or edit the text of existing notes, in the appropriate
text field.
4. Press Apply to accept the note and leave the Control Settings window open for additional
work, or OK to accept the note and close the Control Settings window.
1978
VERICUT Help
Configuring "Turning" NC Control Settings

Use the procedure described below to configure settings for turming operations.
To configure turning settings in the control:
2. Click on the Turning tab.
The features on the Turning tab enable you to configure VERICUT for lathe turning
simulations.
See Control Settings window: Turning tab, also in the Configuration menu section of
3. Configure the features on the Turning tab as required.
1979
VERICUT Help
Adv. Options (Advanced Control Options window)
Location:
Configuration menu > Adv. Options
Toolbar short cut:
The Adv. Options option opens the Advanced Control Options window enabling you to
configure advanced NC control options, such as: specify subroutines available in the NC control,
perform actions at key processing events (e.g. start of tool path processing, start processing a
block, etc.), substitute text strings, and more.
Subroutines tab — The features on this tab specify names of external files containing
subroutines accessible by the NC control.
Substitute tab — The features on this tab maintain text strings that are substituted when
specific text in the tool path file is encountered.
OptiPath Substitute tab — The features on this tab maintain text strings that are substituted
when tool path files are optimized by OptiPath and written to the Optimized file.
CME/API tab — Features on this tab enable you to specify a custom CME file containing custom
macros that assist the NC control with processing machine code data.
1980
VERICUT Help
OK — Saves additions/modifications and dismisses the Advanced Control Options window.

Apply — Saves additions/modifications and leaves the Advanced Control Options window
open.
Cancel — Closes the Advanced Control Options window without saving any
additions/modifications.
the Building NC Controls section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help.
1981
VERICUT Help
Advanced Control Options, Subroutines tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Subroutines tab enable you to specify the names of external files
containing subroutines accessible by the NC control.
File Names list — List of external files containing subs accessible to VERICUT.
Shortcut: Right-click in the File Names list area to display a pop-up window with the following
features:
Add — Opens the Control Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to add
external subroutine files to the File Names list.
1982
VERICUT Help
Replace — Opens the Control Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to replace
the highlighted subroutine file in the File Names list with another.
Delete — Deletes the highlighted subroutine file from the File Names list.
Edit — Displays the of the highlighted subroutine file in a text editing window. Standard text
using the editing features see Edit menu > Text File.
Add — Opens the Control Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to add external
subroutine files to the File Names list. (Same as Add in the pop-up window described above).
Replace — Opens the Control Subroutine Files file selection window enabling you to replace the
highlighted subroutine file in the File Names list with another. (Same as Replace in the pop-up
window described above).
Delete — Deletes the highlighted subroutine file from the File Names list. (same as Delete in
the pop-up window described above)
Delete All — Deletes all subroutines files from the File Names list.
See Using the Control Subroutine Files File Selection Window, also in the Configuration Menu
See Add, Modify, or Delete Control Subroutines, in the Using the Advanced Control Options
Also see About Simulating Subroutines, in the Building NC Controls section, also in the
Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT
Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for general information about simulating subroutines.
To Advanced Control Options window
1983
VERICUT Help
Using the Control Subroutine Files File Selection Window
1. Select the folder in the folder tree on the left side of the window containing the control
subroutine file(s) that you want to open. Use the (Up One Level) icon, located
above the folder tree, to quickly move up one level in the folder tree structure.
highlighted.
4. The right side of the file selection window shows the control subroutine files that are
currently associated with the current Setup. Use the (Add Selected Files to the
Current Control Subroutines List) to add the control subroutine files highlighted in the
center section of the file selection window to the Current Control Subroutine Files list.
Use the (Add Selected Files to the Current Control Subroutines List) to remove
highlighted control subroutine files from the Current Control Subroutine Files list.
The files are added to the File Names list in the Advanced Control Options window:
Subroutines tab in the order that they appear in the Current Control Subroutine Files
1984
VERICUT Help
list. To change the order of the files in the Current Control Subroutine Files list, click on
the square button to the left of the file name and drag it to the desired position in the
list.
5. Click on the OK at the bottom of the window to add all of the files in the Current Control
Subroutine Files list to the File Names list in the Advanced Control Optons window:
Subroutines tab and close the file selection window.
without making any control subroutine file changes.
Also see Add, Modify, or Delete Control Subroutine Files, also in the Configuration Menu
1985
VERICUT Help
Advanced Control Options, Substitute tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the Substitute tab enable you to maintain text strings that are substituted
when specific text in the NC program file is encountered. Using substitutions lets you alter how
VERICUT "sees" data in a block without editing the G-Code NC program file. Substitutions occur
at the beginning of processing each G-Code data block, prior to parsing block words and values
into "tokens". Substitutions in the list are applied in listed order.
Substitution (Input/Output Text) list — Lists text string substitutions that will occur when
specified input text is encountered.
Input Text / Output Text — Specifies an input text string to substitute, and the output text that
VERICUT will use in its place.
NOTE: Substitution input/output text is case sensitive.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the Substitution (Input/Output Text) list to display a menu
containing the following options.
These provide the same functionality described below.
1986
VERICUT Help
Add — Adds a new substitution record, after the highlighted record, to the list.
Delete — Deletes the selected substitution record from the list.
See Add, Modify, or Delete Text Substitutions, in the Using the Advanced Control Options
Advanced Control Options, OptiPath Substitute tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on the OptiPath Substitute tab enable you to maintain text strings that are
substituted when NC program files are optimized by OptiPath and written to the Optimized file.
Using substitutions lets you to alter what VERICUT writes to optimized G-Code NC program
file(s). Substitutions occur at the end of processing each G-Code data block, prior to outputting
to the optimized NC program file.
1987
VERICUT Help
OptiPath Substitution (Input/Output Text) list — Lists text string substitutions that will occur
when specified input text is encountered.
Input Text / Output Text — Specifies an input text string to substitute, and the output text that
VERICUT will use in its place.
NOTE: Substitution input/output text is case sensitive.
Shortcut: You can right-click in the OptiPath Substitution (Input/Output Text) list to display a
menu containing the following options.
These provide the same functionality described below.
Add — Adds a new OptiPath substitution record, after the highlighted record, to the list.
Delete — Deletes the selected OptiPath substitution record from the list.
See Add, Modify, or Delete OptiPath Substitutions, in the Using the Advanced Control Options
section, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
1988
VERICUT Help
Advanced Control Options, CME/API tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:

Features on the CME/API tab enable you to specify a custom CME file, or CGTech Macro
Executable file containing custom macros that assist the NC control with processing machine
code data. This file can also supply "control settings" that allow you to further customize how
machine code data is interpreted, and provide access to custom data tables for storing job, tool,
and machine related data.
A custom CME file is typically created by CGTech or other services organization using the C
Macro Extension – Application Programming Interface, or CME–API (ref. CME-API in the
VERICUT Development Tools section, in the CGTech Help Library). In this manner, you can
customize VERICUT's ability to simulate machine code data according to site-specific needs.
CME/API File — Enter the path/filename of the custom CME file to be used or click on the
(Browse) icon to display the Open CME File, file sekection window and use it to specify the
path/filename of the custom CME file to be used. Features on this window are standard file
selection window features that enable you to navigate through directories, filter files, and type
or select file names.
1989
VERICUT Help
Using the Advanced Control Options window
1990
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Control Subroutine Files
Control Subroutine Files are external files containing subroutines accessible by the NC contol
file (.ctl)
To add a control subroutine file to the control file:

1. To add a control subroutine file, in the Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines tab
click on the Add button to display the Control Subroutine Files file selection window.
You can also right-click in the File Names list area and select Add from the menu that
displays, to display the Control Subroutine Files file selection window.
2. In the Control Subroutine Files file selection window that displays, select the control
subroutine file(s) to be added, then click OK. If needed, refer to Using the Control
Subroutine Files File Selection Window, also in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help.
The new control subroutine file name(s) are added to the File Names list on the Advanced
Control Options window: Subroutines tab.
Make sure that you save the control file to update the control subroutines referenced by
the control file.
To replace a control subroutine file in the File Names list with a different file:
1. To replace a control subroutine file with another, in the Advanced Control Options window:
Subroutines tab, click on the control subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be
replaced so that it becomes highlighted and then select Replace to display the Control
Subroutine Files file selection window.
You can also click on the control subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be replaced
so that it becomes highlighted and then right-click in the File names list area and select
Replace in the menu that displays to display the Control Subroutine Files file selection
window.
2. In the Control Subroutine Files file selection window that displays, type, or select the
/path/filename of the replacement NC program file, and then click OK. If needed, refer to
Using the Control Subroutine Files File Selection Window, also in the Configuration Menu
Simulation Help.
The replacement control subroutine file name is added to the File Names list on the
Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines tab.
1991
VERICUT Help
the control file.
To delete a control subroutine file from the File Names list:

1. To delete a control subroutine file in the Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines
tab, click on the control subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be deleted so that it
becomes highlighted and then select Delete to delete the file from the File Names list .
You can also click on the control subroutine file in the File Names list that is to be deleted so
that it becomes highlighted and then right-click in the File Names list area and select Delete
in the menu that displays to delete the file from the File Names list .
To delete all control subroutines from the Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines
tab File Names list, click on the Delete All button. All control subroutine files are are
removed from the File Names list..
from your computer.
the control file.
To edit a control subroutine from within VERICUT:

1. To edit a control subroutine, in the Advanced Control Options window: Subroutines tab
right-click on the control subroutine in the File Names list that is to be edited and then
select Edit from the menu that displays.
2. The contents of the control subroutine file will display in a text editor window. (see Text File
in the Edit menu section for information about the text editor window). Edit the contents of
the control subroutine file as necessary. When finished editing, select File menu > Save (or
Save As) in the text editor main menu to save your changes.
Subroutines, also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite
Simulation Help or VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help for information about
"machine"subroutines.
Also see Configure NC Subroutines Branch menu in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help,
information about "NC subroutine" files.
1992
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete Text Substitutions
Using substitutions lets you to alter how VERICUT "sees" data in a block without editing the G-
Code NC program file. Substitutions occur at the beginning of processing each G-Code data
block, prior to parsing block words and values into "tokens". Substitutions in the list are applied
in listed order.
also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help, VERICUT Composite Simulation Help or
To add a text substitution to the control configuration:
1. Click on (Control Advanced Options) in the Toolbar, Configuration menu > Adv.
Options in the VERICUT menu bar, to display the Advanced Control Options window.
2. Click the Substitute tab.
3. On the Substitute tab, select the existing substitution record, to add the new substitution
record after, so that it become highlighted.
4. Press Add to add the new substitution record.
5. Click on the Input Text field and enter the text that is to be replaced.
6. Click on the Output Text field and enter the substitute text.
7. Press OK to accept your addition and close the Advanced Control Options window, or Apply
to accept your addition and leave the Advanced Control Options window open for
additional work.
When VERICUT encounters the Input Text string during processing, it will substitute it with the
Output Text string.
To modify an existing substitution in the control configuration:
3. On the Substitute tab, select the existing substitution record to be modified, so that it
become highlighted.
4. Modify the Input Text / Output Text as required.
1993
VERICUT Help
5. Press OK to accept your changes and close the Advanced Control Options window, or Apply
to accept your changes and leave the Advanced Control Options window open for additional
work.
To delete a substitution from the control configuration:
3. On the Substitute tab, select the existing substitution record to be deleted, so that it
become highlighted.
4. Press Delete to remove the record from the list.
work.
See Advanced Control Options window: Substitute tab, also in the Configuration menu section
Help for more information.
1994
VERICUT Help
Add, Modify, or Delete OptiPath Substitutions
Using OptiPath substitutions enable you to maintain text strings that are substituted when NC
program files are optimized by OptiPath and written to the Optimized file. Using substitutions
lets you to alter what VERICUT writes to optimized G-Code NC program file(s). Substitutions
occur at the end of processing each G-Code data block, prior to outputting to the optimized NC
program file.
also in the Configuration menu section of VERICUT Help.
To add an OptiPath substitution to the control configuration:
2. Click the OptiPath Substitute tab.
3. On the OptiPath Substitute tab, select the existing substitution record that you want to add
the new substitution record after so that it becomse highlighted.
4. Press Add to add the new substitution record.
5. Click on the Input Text field and enter the text that is to be replaced.
6. Click on the Output Text field and enter the substitute text.
7. Press OK to accept your addition and close the Advanced Control Options window, or Apply
to accept your addition and leave the Advanced Control Options window open for
additional work.
When VERICUT encounters the Input Text string during processing, it will substitute it with the
Output Text string.
To modify an existing OptiPath substitution in the control configuration:
2. Click the OptiPath Substitute tab.
3. On the OptiPath Substitute tab, select the existing OptiPath substitution record to be
modified, so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Modify the Input Text or Output Text as required.
1995
VERICUT Help
work.
To delete a substitution from the control configuration:
2. OptiPath Substitute tab.
3. On the Substitute tab, select the existing substitution record to be deleted, so that it
becomes highlighted.
4. Press Delete to remove the record from the list.
work.
See Advanced Control Options window: OptiPath Substitute tab, also in the Configuration menu
section of VERICUT Help for more information.
1996
VERICUT Help
Analysis Menu
1997
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper (X-Caliper panel)
VERICUT Users:
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper
Toolbar short cut:
The X-Caliper option opens the X-Caliper panel enabling you to take measurements, and obtain
historical and mathematical information about VERICUT models. The appearance of the panel
will vary depending on the X-Caliper feature being used. X-Caliper shows what is being
measured on the model area by highlighting the "measure from" point (+) and the "measure
to" point (o). Results from X-Caliper operations are displayed in the X-Caliper panel.
Measurements are described relative to the active coordinate system.
1998
VERICUT Help
The X-Caliper panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the VERICUT
NOTE: When the X-Caliper panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so that it
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the X-Caliper panel.
(Close) — Closes the X-Caliper panel. This icon is only displayed when the X-Caliper
NOTE: Machined features can only be measured in a workpiece view.
Toolbar — The features in the X-Caliper Toolbar are common to all options except as noted
below.
(Mouse active to enable mouse tracking and picks, inactive to disable.) — Use this
icon to designate that the NC Program Review panel is the panel that picks in the VERICUT
graphics area are to be applied to. When “Active”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse
Pick Highlight Color specified in the File menu > Preferences window. When “Inactive”, the
icon is displayed.
or Set X-Caliper Units — Toggle the icon between inch, and metric, to specify
the units that you want X-Caliper data displayed in.
Measure — Computes measurements based on the current X-Caliper panel

configuration. This feature is useful to have X-Caliper calculate measurements based on
data keyed in, or edited data. This feature is only active for Distance/Angle, Stock Thickness,
Air Distance and Closest Point options.
Display Tool/Stock Collisions — Use to specifically highlight collisions between the

tool holder and the stock model in the graphics area. Use the Feature/History option to
obtain information about the collision (NC Program file, Record number, Tool ID, etc.). This
feature is only active when holder/stock collisions occurred while cutting the part.
1999
VERICUT Help
Disable Holder/Stock Collisions Disable Holder/Stock Collisions

toggled "Off" toggled "On"
Notice that when toggled "Off", all collisions Notice that when toggled "On", only
(holder/stock, cutter/fixture, etc.) are holder/stock collisions are displayed.
displayed. Including the collision areas that were cut
away by subsequent cuts.
Clear X-Caliper Report — Clears the results from the X-Caliper panel.
Print — Displays a Page Setup window enabling you to format the page, specify the
printer, and print.
Save X-Caliper Report — Saves the results from the X-Caliper panel to a file. Use the
file selection window that displays to specify the /path/filename for the file to be created.
Options — Select the desired X-Caliper option from the pull-down list. The following options
are available:
Feature/History — When a cut on the model is selected, this option displays the
geometric description of the cut feature, and corresponding tool path history.
Distance Angle — Use to measure the distance and/or angle between any combination
of two points, planes, conic axes, model or component origins, or edges formed by
intersecting planes or cylinders.
2000
VERICUT Help
Thickness — Use to measure solid stock material.

Air Distance — Use to measure the air gap between two solid surfaces.
Closest Point — Use to measure the shortest distance from an XYZ point location to the
closest point on the model surface.
Scallop — Use to measure the height of a scallop formed by parallel intersecting
cylinders, typically cut by cutter corner radius.
Volume — Use to display the following volume values calculated for a selected stock
workpiece: cut stock volume (cubic units), original stock model volume (cubic units), and
volume of material removed from the original stock model.
Stock/Design Distance — Use to measure the distance between the cut stock and design
models.
Highlight Same Planes — Use to display all "cut" features that lie in the same plane.
Hole Depth — Use to measure the depth of a hole, or the depth of a chamfer.
X-Caliper window — This is where the results from X-Caliper operations are displayed.
Tip: You can select any part of a line in the X-Caliper results table so that it becomes
highlighted, and then hold down the Ctrl key and click the C key (referred to as Ctrl-C) to
copy the highlighted text or value to the clipboard. The selected text or value can then be
pasted elsewhere.
Active Coordinate System — Displays the name of the active coordinate system.
2001
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Feature/History

Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Feature/History option
Toolbar shortcut:
When a feature on the model is selected, the Feature/History option is used to display related
cut feature (mathematical description) and NC program history. The historical data includes: NC
program file name, record number, and NC program record text responsible for cutting the
feature. This function is useful to spot-check machined features, and determine the source of
an error cut identified in red by VERICUT.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Feature/History option:
Refer to X-Caliper (X-Caliper panel), above, for information on the Toolbar features.
2002
VERICUT Help
Color — The Color option enables you to view the entire cut that created the selected feature.
To activate the Color option, select one of the colors from the pull-down list. When you select a
feature in the graphics area, VERICUT highlights the "history" (aka the cut) that created the
feature with the selected color. To turn off the Color option, select "Off" from the pull-down
list.
The following are geometric features identified by VERICUT, listed alphabetically:

AUTO-DIFF model — (X, Y, Z value and surface normal) an uncut surface on a model
displayed after an auto-difference Solid method comparison.
Circle — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector and radius) a surface cut by a circular motion.
Cone — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector and side angle) a hole bottom cut by an angle tip drill,
corner cut by a tapered endmill, or chamfer cut by a turning operation.
Cylinder — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector and radius) an inside corner cut by 2 linear
motions having an interior angle less then 180 degree, fillet cut by a bull or ball endmill
moving perpendicular to the tool axis, or diameter cut by a turning operation.
Ellipse — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector, major and minor focal distances) a ramping or
plunging surface cut by the bottom of an endmill with a flat, or partially flat, bottom.
Elliptical Solid of Revolution — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector, tool, and NC program record)
generated on the outward portion of a canted circle sweep.
Fixture model — (X, Y, Z value and surface normal) generated on an uncut surface on a
fixture model.
Helical Surface — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector, major radius, length of travel, number of
rotations, NC program file, line number and NC program record, feed rate, and tool) a
surface cut by a helical motion.
Holder Collision Area — (X, Y, Z value and surface normal) a holder/stock collision area
cut stock model. Data also includes NC program file, record number and tool ID.
Plane — (X,Y,Z value and surface normal) a flat machined surface. Cylinders or circles
cut using linear motions can also return this identity.
2003
VERICUT Help
Ruled surface — (X,Y,Z value and surface normal) a surface cut by a multi-axis motion.
Sphere — (X, Y, Z center and radius) a surface cut by the end of a ball endmill.
Stock model — (X, Y, Z value and surface normal) an uncut surface on a stock model.
Torus — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector, major and minor radius) a fillet in a corner cut by a
bull endmill, or fillet left on a diameter by the radius of the cutter during a turning
operation.
Torus sweep — (X, Y, Z center, axis vector and major radius) This feature is typical of an
angled (ramping or plunging) surface cut by a bull endmill.
To X-Caliper panel
2004
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Distance/Angle

Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Distance/Angle option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Distance/Angle option is used to measure the distance and/or angle between any
combination of two points, planes, conic axes, model or component origins, or edges formed by
intersecting planes or cylinders. In general, select the "From" feature, then select the "To"
feature. X-Caliper shows what is being measured on the model by highlighting the "measure
from" point (+) and the "measure to" point (o) as well as a line representing the distance (or
vectors representing the angle) between them.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Distance/Angle option:
2005
VERICUT Help

From / To groups — Each group includes the Feature, Location and Direction used to specify
what to measure from and what to measure to. Use the From / To arrows , to control
which fields are filled in by screen pick data. You can select features on the VERICUT model, or
enter number values (separated by blank spaces) directly into the fields. After selecting the
From feature, VERICUT automatically transfers control to the To group. After selecting the To
feature the X-Caliper panel displays the measurement data.
Feature — Controls the types of features to measure between. Select the Feature type
Feature descriptions:
Point — The X, Y, Z of the pick point or entered point coordinates.
Plane — A flat, unbounded surface. If a curved surface is selected, data retrieved
represents a plane tangent to the selected model surface at the pick point.
Axis — Centerline of a cylinder or conic.
Edge — Edge formed by two intersecting planes or parallel cylinders. Special cases
follow.
Plane/Cylinder edge — Only a cylinder with an axis parallel to the plane can produce
an edge. Tangent conditions produce 1 edge. Intersecting conditions produce 2
possible edges, thus the one closest to the cylinder pick-point is used.
Cylinder/Cylinder edge — Only cylinders with parallel axes can produce an edge.
Tangent conditions produce 1 edge. Intersecting conditions produce 2 edges, thus
the one closest to the last cylinder pick-point is used.
Vertex — Enables you to easily select one of the six key points associated with the
triangles representing the faces of a model. For each triangle, the points consist of the
three vertices and the midpoint of each of the triangle's three sides. VERICUT selects the
point closest to your mouse pick. If the mouse pick is over the cut stock, Vertex works in
the same way as the Point feature described above.
2006
VERICUT Help
Vertex is a useful tool for measuring the trace of tool/fixture collisions on uncut fixtures.
Model Origin — Origin of a selected model. Use the View menu > View Axes function to
see model origin axes.
Component Origin — Origin of a selected component. Use the View menu > View Axes
function to see component origin axes.
CSYS Origin — Origin of the selected coordinate system axis. Use the View menu > View
Axes function to display the coordinate systems that are available.
CSYS Axis — The X, Y, or Z axis of the selected coordinate system. Use the View menu >
View Axes function to display the coordinate systems that are available.
Circle Center — Use this feature to specify a circle center point to be used as a From or
To feature.
1. Choose Circle Center from the pull-down list, and then click the arrow to
enable selecting geometry in the graphics area.
Follow the prompts in the temporary message area at the bottom of the logger to
define the circle center point.
The circle center point will display in the graphics area and the coordinates of the
center point will display in the Location text field in the X-Caliper panel.
Direction — Represents IJK of the normal vector at the location of the screen pick.
Data from the screen pick fills the Location and Direction data fields in the active From or To
group.
Measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the From / To
values input and the measured distance and/or angle.
If needed, you can manually edit the data in the “From” Location and “To” Location fields, and
then click on the (Measure) to obtain a measurement.
To X-Caliper panel
2007
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Thickness
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Thickness option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Thickness option is used to measure solid stock material.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Thickness option:

Direction — Represents IJK of the measurement direction vector into material.
2008
VERICUT Help
Data from the screen pick fills the Location and Direction data fields.
Measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the Location
and Direction values input, the XYZ point where the direction vector exits the material and the
measured thickness between the Location and Exit points.
If needed, you can manually edit the data in the Location and Direction fields, and then click on
(Measure) icon to obtain a measurement.
To X-Caliper panel
2009
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Air Distance
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Air Distance option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Air Distance option is used to measure air gap between two solid surfaces.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Air Distance option:

Direction — Represents IJK of the measurement direction vector away from solid material.
2010
VERICUT Help
Measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the Location
and Direction vector values input, the XYZ point where the direction vector re-enters solid
material and the measured air distance between the Location and Entry points.
If needed, you can manually edit the data in the Location and Direction fields, and then click on
the (Measure) to obtain a measurement.
To X-Caliper panel
2011
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Closest Point
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Closest Point option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Closest Point option is used to measure the shortest distance from an XYZ point location to
the closest point on the model surface.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Closest Point option:
2012
VERICUT Help
Location — Represents the XYZ coordinates of the point to measure from. XYZ values must be
manually entered in the Location text filed. The Closest Point, "From" Location cannot be
specified by selecting the location graphically.
Click on the (Measure) icon to find the closest point on the model surface to the specified
Location.
Measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the From
Location, the XYZ coordinates of the closest point on the model, and the measured distance
between the "from" point and the "closest" point on the model.
To X-Caliper panel
2013
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Scallop
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Scallop option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Scallop option is used to measure the height of a scallop formed by two parallel
intersecting cylinders. Select the two parallel and intersecting cylinders on the VERICUT model
that form the scallop. X-Caliper identifies the cylinders being measured by displaying
intersecting circles on the model.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Scallop option:
2014
VERICUT Help
Cylinder 1 / Cylinder 2 — Used to define the cylinders to measure from and to. Use the choice
arrow to control which cylinder is being picked. Select parallel cylinders on the VERICUT
model. After selecting Cylinder 1, VERICUT displays a circle representing the cylinder in the
graphics area and automatically transfers control to Cylinder 2. After selecting Cylinder 2,
measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel.
Data output includes Center point, Axis vector and Radius values for each cylinder and the
Scallop Height measurement.
To X-Caliper panel
2015
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Volume

Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Volume option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Volume option calculates and displays the following volume values for a selected stock
workpiece: current cut stock volume, original stock model volume, and volume of material
removed from the original stock model. All volumes are in cubic units.
In addition to the total volume of the selected model, if model consists of several disjoint
pieces, the volume of a selected contiguous piece of material can also be analyzed. In this case,
a bounding box is drawn around the selected piece to indicate what is being calculated. If the
model is only one piece, no bounding box is drawn.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Volume option:
2016
VERICUT Help
Calculated volumes are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the Current Stock
Volume, Original Volume and Removed Volume.
To X-Caliper panel
2017
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Stock/Design Distance
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Stock/Design Distance option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Stock/Design Distance option enables you to measure the distance between the cut stock
and the design model.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Stock/Design Distance option:
Stock — Use to specify how you want to display the stock model(s) in the Workpiece and/or
Profile views. Options are provided to enable you to display the model(s) as Solid, Translucent /
Lines, or to turn the display Off.
2018
VERICUT Help
Design — Similar to Stock, above, except that it applies to design model(s).

From Stock to Design / From Design to Stock — Use to specify the "From" and "To"
components for the measurement.
Location — Represents the XYZ coordinates of the point to measure from on the "From"
component.
Direction — Represents IJK of the measurement direction vector toward the "To" component.
Pick a location on the "From" component in the Workpiece or Profile view. X-caliper then
measures the distance, normal to the pick location, to the nearest point on the "To"
component. You can also enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the Location data field, separated
by blank spaces, of the desired measurement point on the "From" component.
the data in these fields, and then press Measure to obtain a measurement.
Measurement results are displayed in the X-Caliper panel. Data output includes the
measurement method, Location and Direction values related to the "From" component, the
XYZ point of contact on the "To" component, and the measured Distance between the
Location and the point of contact on the "To" component.
To X-Caliper panel
2019
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder option enables you to select a plane and have VERICUT
highlight all "cut" features that lie in the same plane. It also enables you to select a cylinder and
VERICUT highlight all cylinders that have the same radius within the specified tolerance.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder option:
2020
VERICUT Help
Color — Use to select the color to highlight the “same” planes/cylinders. Select the desired
color from the pull-down color list.
Location — When selecting a plane, Location represents the XYZ coordinates of the screen pick.
When selecting a cylinder, Location represents the XYZ coordinates of the cylinder’s center.
Direction — When selecting a plane, Direction represents the IJK values of the plane's normal
vector at the location of the screen pick.
When selecting a cylinder, Direction represents the IJK values of the cylinder’s axis.
Z Tolerance — When selecting a plane, use this field to specify a tolerance value for
determining "same" planes. All planes, within +/- the tolerance value, along the normal vector
will be highlighted using the specified color.
When selecting a cylinder, use this field to specify a tolerance value for determining "same"
cylinders. All cylinders, within +/- the specified tolerance value, will be highlighted using the
specified color.
Sample Graphics display after using the X-Caliper panel, Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder option
on a plane:
2021
VERICUT Help
Sample Graphics display after using the X-Caliper panel, Highlight Same Plane/Cylinder option
on a cylinder:
To X-Caliper panel
2022
VERICUT Help
X-Caliper panel, Hole Depth
Location:
Analysis menu > X-Caliper: Hole Depth option
Toolbar shortcut:
The Hole Depth option enables you to measure the depth of a hole, or the depth of a chamfer.
Sample X-Caliper panel, Hole Depth option:
Hole Top — This is the feature that defines the top of the hole (generally a plane).
2023
VERICUT Help
VERICUT uses data from the screen pick to fill in the "feature type" and the Location data field.
Hole Bottom — This is the feature that defines the bottom of the hole.
VERICUT uses data from the screen pick to fill in the "feature type" and the Location data field.
Feature — Use to specify the feature that you want to measure.
Using Hole Depth
Refer to the picture of the hole cross section above for the following example.
To measure the depth of the hole:

1. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Hole Top, and then pick the feature
representing the top of the hole. In this case it is a plane represented by 1 in the picture.
2. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Hole Bottom, and then pick the feature
representing the bottom of the hole. In this case it is a cone represented by 2 in the
picture.
3. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Feature, and then pick the feature that
you want to measure. In this case it is a cylinder represented by 3 in the picture.
X-Caliper will return the information shown in the X-Caliper panel shown above. X-
Caliper will calculate the depth from the intersection of the plane and the cylinder to
the intersection of the cone and the cylinder.
2024
VERICUT Help
Refer to the picture above for the following example.
To measure the depth of the top chamfer/countersink:
1. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Hole Top, and then pick the feature
representing the top of the chamfer. In this case it is a plane represented by 1 in the
picture.
2. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Hole Bottom, and then pick the feature
representing the bottom of the chamfer. In this case it is a cylinder represented by 2 in
the picture.
3. In the X-Caliper panel, click on the next to Feature, and then pick the feature that
you want to measure. In this case it is a cone represented by 3 in the picture.
X-Caliper will return the information shown in the X-Caliper panel below. X-Caliper will
calculate the depth from the intersection of the plane and the cone to the intersection
of the cone and the cylinder.
2025
VERICUT Help
4. To determine the angle of a chamfer/countersink, open the X-Caliper: Feature/History

panel.
5. In the Feature/History panel, pick the cone represented by 3 in the picture.
X-Caliper will return the information shown in the X-Caliper panel below. The angle
value shown represents 1/2 of the included angle.
2026
VERICUT Help
To X-Caliper panel
2027
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF (AUTO-DIFF window)

Location:
Analysis menu > AUTO-DIFF
Toolbar short cut:
The AUTO-DIFF option opens the AUTO-DIFF window enabling you to compare design model
data against the VERICUT simulated cut model. Using AUTO-DIFF, a licensed option, clearly
identifies discrepancies between the cut model the intended design model. Errors are identified
before actual machine time is wasted machining an incorrect part. You can use AUTO-DIFF
interactively, in batch mode, or automatically via "VERICUT-COMMAND" records in the tool
path file. After using AUTO-DIFF to identify gouges and excess material, use other VERICUT
functions such as X-Caliper and Zoom (ref. View menu > Orient) to measure and help determine
the source of the errors.
2028
VERICUT Help
Settings tab — Features on this tab control the AUTO-DIFF comparison, and what you see as a
result.
Options tab — Features on this tab are used to set processing and reporting options.
Compare By Region tab — Features on this tab enable you to select a region to perform AUTO-
DIFF on.
Compare Status Light — The compare status light enables you to determine at a glance the
status of your AUTO-DIFF Compare. The color of the light, and label displayed, will change
depending on the status as described below.
Result Indicator — displays when the AUTO-DIFF "compare" has not finished running,
or that the "compare" has been "restored".
No Differences — displays when the AUTO-DIFF "compare" has finished running and
no gouges/excesses were detected.
Error Detected, Check Report — displays when the AUTO-DIFF "compare" has finished
running and gouges/excesses were detected.
Apply — Applies the current AUTO-DIFF window settings.

Compare — Compares the design model(s) specified by the AUTO-DIFF window settings. AUTO-
DIFF automatically builds the report after the comparison has been done.
TIP: If you are only interested in the graphical AUTO-DIFF results, toggle "on" the Disable
Report feature, on the Options tab, to prevent AUTO-DIFF from automatically building the
report.
Restore — Restores the VERICUT model as it was before performing the AUTO-DIFF operation.
Report — Opens the AUTO-DIFF Report window containing an AUTO-DIFF Report file that
identifies information related to errors detected by AUTO-DIFF.
Close — Closes the AUTO-DIFF window without applying window changes.
2029
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF Report window

Accessed by selecting Report in the AUTO-DIFF window, the AUTO-DIFF Report window
provides information related to errors detected by AUTO-DIFF.
2030
VERICUT Help
File menu
Save As —
Text File — Save the AUTO-DIFF report as a text file.
CSV File— Save the AUTO-DIFF report in CSV (Comma Separated Value) file format that can
be opened as a spreadsheet. When saving the report in CSV format, only the lower "table"
portion of the report is saved. The information in the top of the AUTO-DIFF Report window
is not saved.
Print — Opens a window enabling you so print the AUTO-DIFF report.

Exit — Closes the AUTO-DIFF report window.
(Go To Line Number) — Searches the AUTO-DIFF Report table for the specified Record
number. Enter the desired Record number in the text field.
(Search Forward) — Searches forward through the AUTO-DIFF Report table for the
specified text string. Enter the desired text string in the text field.
(Search Backward) — Searches backward through the AUTO-DIFF Report table for the
specified text string. Enter the desired text string in the text field.
Each record in the AUTO-DIFF Report table provides the following information:
 The record number in the NC program listing responsible for the error
 The amount of the deviation from the design model.
 The ID of the tool being used at the time of the error.
 The name if the NC program being used.
 The NC record that was being processed at the time the error occurred.
Selecting an error record in the table highlights the location of the error on the model displayed
in the VERICUT graphics area. Select any column heading in the table to sort the report by the
entries in that column.
To AUTO-DIFF window
2031
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF window, Settings tab

Location:
Toolbar short cut:
Features on this tab control the AUTO-DIFF comparison, and what you see as a result. You can
compare four types of design data with AUTO-DIFF: solid models, surface data, inspection
points and profiles. The Comparison Method controls which type of design data is compared,
while Comparison Type determines the error condition checked for. Comparison Tolerance
features set the inspection tolerances and the display colors used for identified gouge/excess
errors. The appearance of the Comparison Tolerance portion of the Settings tab will vary
depending on the Comparison Method Setting.
2032
VERICUT Help
Stock Component — This option is used to specify which Stock component is to be used for the
comparison. Select the desired Stock component from the pull-down list.
Design Component — This option is used to specify which Design component is to be used in
the comparison regardless of its Visibility status. Select the desired Design component from the
pull-down list.
Stock Display — When selected, displays the stock model in the AUTO-DIFF view. Options are
provided to display these models as Solid, Translucent, or Lines. The available options will vary
depending on the Comparison Method that is selected.
Design Display — Similar to Stock Display above, except applies to design model(s).
Comparison Method — Controls the method of comparing design model data against the
VERICUT model. The comparison method also re-configures the Settings tab to reflect the
tolerances and other data required to compare the data as requested. All methods generate an
AUTO-DIFF model that can be analyzed or saved as an In Process file. Regardless of the method
chosen, the design model must first be loaded prior to comparison (ref. Modeling window:
Model tab). Design models can be loaded at any time.
Options:
Solid — Compare a solid design model by subtracting solid models from each other.
Solid models must be "watertight"-in other words, completely enclosed surfaces.
You can check solid design model integrity by loading it as a stock model, then select
Analysis menu > X-Caliper panel: Volume tab to analyze the volume of the stock model.
After checking the volume, the following problems indicate the design model needs
repair, or is suitable only for the Surface comparison method:
 small holes or gaps appear in the model
 model falls apart-is partially displayed
 model disappears completely
2033
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF "Solid" method example
Surface — Compare a surface, set of surfaces, or skin of a solid design model or VERICUT
Solid by overlaying the surface on the cut model. VERICUT only compares where the
design surface and cut model overlap. Surface comparison provides multiple colors and
tolerances that produce a "rainbow" affect to show the extent of errors.
NOTE: VERICUT Solids can only be used for Standard (not FastMill) cutting mode.
AUTO-DIFF "Surface" method example
Point — Compare a set of design inspection points by overlaying the points on the cut
model. VERICUT searches from each point for an intersection with the model surface.
Surface normal vectors control the direction in which to search. Only points associated
with errors are seen in the results. Points associated with gouges have the Error color-
typically Red, while points associated with excess material have the 5th defined color in
the Shade Color list (typically Magenta).
2034
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF "Point" method example
Profile— Enables you to compare the turning profile of the cut stock with profile of a
design model.
When Comparison Method is set to Profile, up to four profiles (Gouge, Excess, Stock,
and Design) may be displayed in the "Profile" view. Each can be displayed in one of two
modes: Solid or Lines. The display mode for Stock and Design profiles is specified using
the Design Display / Stock Display features. The display mode for Gouge and Excess is
specified using the Draw Mode option in the View Attributes window for the currently
active "Profile" view.
When display mode is set to "Solid", Stock and Design profiles are displayed the
"component" color unless the "model" color is different than the "component" color. In
this case, Stock and Design profiles are displayed the color of the 1st model. Gouge and
Excess profiles are displayed in the color selected with the Comparison Tolerance
"color" feature.
When display mode is set to "Lines", the same color scheme described above is used for
"uncut" sections of the profile. "Cut" sections of the profile are displayed in the "cut"
color.
X-Caliper can be used to analyze any of the profiles (Gouge, Excess, Design, and Stock
profiles) currently displayed in a "Profile" view. Saving an In-Process file (IP file) stores
all four profile types.
2035
VERICUT Help
Any valid VERICUT model type can be used as a design model for an AUTO-DIFF Profile
comparison. The design profile which is compared to stock profile is a Boolean union of
the individual profiles of all Design Component models associated with specified Stock.
If a design model is a Cone, Cylinder, SOR, or IGES Profile, and its Z-axis is aligned with
the turning axis, its profile is built directly from its definition profile and is "exact". In all
other cases, the profile is built by spinning the model about the turning axis (as is
common with other turning applications) and is an approximation. The smaller the Cut
Tolerance that is used, the better the approximation. If the "design component" consists
of multiple models, the individual model profiles are merged into one design profile.
AUTO-DIFF "Profile" method example
Comparison Type — Controls the error type(s) checked for by the AUTO-DIFF operation.
Options:
Gouge
Excess
Both
2036
VERICUT Help
Comparison Tolerance Features

Comparison Tolerance features are used to specify the tolerances and colors used by AUTO-
DIFF. The degree to which VERICUT can detect discrepancies is also affected by Cutting
Resolution. For best results set Cutting Resolution smaller than the smallest tolerances used by
AUTO-DIFF.
Comparison Tolerance features displayed will vary depending the on the Comparison Method
and Comparison Type settings.
Solid comparison tolerances
Gouge — Tolerance used when checking for gouges during a Solid comparison. Gouges
detected by AUTO-DIFF are shaded in the associated gouge color.
Excess — Similar to Gouge above, except applies when checking for excess material.
NOTE: "Solid" Gouge/Excess tolerance/color values are independent of "Profile" Gouge/Excess
tolerance/color values and are stored as separate values in .VcProject file.
2037
VERICUT Help
Surface comparison tolerances
Gouge Range/Color list — Range of tolerances used when checking for gouges during a Surface
comparison. Multiple tolerance values can be specified, in addition to the "Gouge Check
Distance" (in this case, 0.75000) used to limit checking, and the Range value of 0.00000 which
represents surfaces cut exact with no deviation from the design model. If more than six
tolerance values are specified, a scroll bar will be added to the table. Use the Add and Delete
buttons to add/remove tolerance values. The table row containing the Range value of 0.00000
cannot be deleted, and the 0.00000 value cannot be modified.
Gouges detected by AUTO-DIFF are shaded in the gouge color(s) associated with the depth of
the gouge. Each pair of tolerance values represents a range of gouge depths to which a gouge
color is associated. The gouge color used for each range is the color assigned to the lower
tolerance value in the range. For example, in the gouge table shown above, all gouges with
depths in the range between 0.04500 and 0.06000, will be displayed Light Steel Blue.
The color associated with the "Gouge Check Distance" can be different for the Gouge and
Excess tables, but the color associated with the Range value of 0.00000 is forced to be the same
for both tables.
Excess Range/Color list — Similar to Gouge Range/Color list above, except applies when
checking for excess material.
2038
VERICUT Help
Sample “Surface” comparison Tolerance /Colors
Minimum Excess — This feature enables you to specify a value and color to be used to
represent an offset from the design surface. The Minimum Excess value is applied to the design
surface in all directions. During the compare, any Excess value less than the Minimum Excess
value is considered to be a gouge and displayed the Minimum Excess color. Excess material is
measured from the Minimum Excess to the Range value (see the picture below).
2039
VERICUT Help
NOTE: The amount of gouge and excess reported is with respect to the offset design, not the
original design. In other words, zero deviation is where the cut stock excess with respect to the
original design exactly equals to the given "Minimum Excess" value. This also is where the
Excess color table range starts from.
While in this mode, AUTO_DIFF > Report shows both gouges and excesses with respect to the
condition described above. If a cut produces both a gouge and an excess, AUTO-DIFF reports
the gouge (no matter what the value of the excess). This is different from the Report behavior
when "Comparison Type" = "Both" where the biggest deviation would be reported.
Point comparison tolerances
Gouge Tolerance — Tolerance used when checking for gouges during a Point comparison.
Gouges detected by AUTO-DIFF are shaded in the gouge color specified for a Solid comparison.
Excess Tolerance — Similar to Gouge above, except applies when checking for excess material
conditions.
2040
VERICUT Help
Gouge Check Distance — Maximum distance to check for the cut model surface in the gouge
direction. Distance is measured from the inspection point along direction of the normal vector
used with the inspection point.
Excess Check Distance — Similar to Gouge Check Distance above, except applies when
checking for excess material.
Default Normal (IJK) — Default normal vector in which to check during a Point comparison
when vector data is not present in the Design Points file (ref. Design Points File in the Getting
Started section of VERICUT Help). Enter three values separated by spaces, for example "0 0 1".
Normal Direction — Indicates if surface normal vectors associated with design points are
pointing outward (Out) or inward (In) relative to the design model.
Profile comparison tolerances
The Profile comparison tolerances are applied "exactly", without tessellating the stock and/or
design profiles. An arc offset by the tolerance value, will also be an arc and will be recognized
by X-Caliper as such. The Profile Gouge/Excess tolerance values are independent of the Solid
Gouge/Excess tolerance values described above, and are stored as separate values in .VcProject
file.
Gouge — Tolerance used when checking for gouges during a Profile comparison. Gouges
detected by AUTO-DIFF are shaded in the associated gouge color.
Excess — Similar to Gouge above, except applies when checking for excess material.
NOTE: "Profile" Gouge/Excess tolerance/color values are independent of "Solid"
Gouge/Excess tolerance/color values and are stored as separate values in .VcProject file.
To AUTO-DIFF window
2041
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF window, Options tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on this tab are used to set processing and reporting options.
Design Consistency Check—When selected during a "Solid" comparison, checks consistency of

solid design models, including: check for "watertight" solid- repair improperly trimmed surfaces
2042
VERICUT Help
(overlaps and gaps), and reconstruct insignificant missing surfaces. This option is highly
recommended for design models creating from importing IGES data, and other model files
which produce unsatisfactory results from the comparison.
When selected during a "Profile" comparison, Design Consistency Check is applicable when
building a profile from an STL, VERICUT Polygon, or VERICUT Solid design model.
While checking design model consistency can take a while, it provides the best insurance for
reliable AUTO-DIFF results. If you've used the model in VERICUT before and know the quality is
good enough, you can save time by clearing this checkbox. AUTO-DIFF will take less time, but
results may not be reliable if the solid is not water-tight.
Keep Design Solid — When selected, keeps the solid design model created by AUTO-DIFF so it
can be used in additional comparisons. This action can reduce AUTO-DIFF time if multiple
comparisons are made, but will require additional computer resources to keep the design solid.
The design solid is kept until the VERICUT model is reset, a design model is removed or deleted,
or the checkbox is cleared and Apply is pressed. Saving an IP file also contains the kept design
solid. Clear this checkbox to have AUTO-DIFF create a new design solid for each comparison.
Disable Report — Enables you to turn off the AUTO-DIFF Report feature to reduce AUTO-DIFF
processing time. To generate the report, the processor must search through all cut records and
lists the maximum error for each bad cut record. This can take a significant amount of time for
large NC program files. When is toggled "on", you will still see the AUTO-DIFF results in the
graphic area. Disable Report is only active when Comparison Method is set to Solid, Surface or
Profile.
Report Uncut Differences — When selected, differences between the design and uncut stock
are added to the AUTO-DIFF report.
Show Point Vectors — Displays the measurement vector associated with each point for the
"Point" Comparison Method. The Vector is drawn whether AUTO-DIFF compare is active or not.
Save AUTO-DIFF Model — Use to save gouge or excess data as a VERICUT solid model file (.vct).
Selecting Save AUTO-DIFF Model displays a dialog enabling you to specify a folder path and
filename for the model file. If both gouge and excess models are present, two files will be
created ( gouge_filename.vct and excess_filename.vct, where filename is the filename you
entered in the Save AUTO-DIFF Model dialog.
This option is only available for use if all of the following are true (otherwise it is grayed out):
1. Standard Cut Mode is active (not FastMill).
2. Constant Gouge Check is turned off.
3. AUTO_DIFF Comparison Method is set to Solid or Profile.
4. AUTO-DIFF Compare has been processed.
To AUTO-DIFF window
2043
VERICUT Help
AUTO-DIFF window, Compare By Region tab
Location:
Toolbar short cut:
The features on this tab enable you to select a region to perform AUTO-DIFF on. Compare By
Region is created for very large parts that would require too much memory for AUTO-DIFF to
process the entire part. Optionally, cut stock can be internally re-cut within the region with a
better Cut Tolerance before doing AUTO-DIFF. The Compare By Region tab is not available
when Comparison Method is set to "Profile".
2044
VERICUT Help
On — When selected, activates the Compare by Region feature. When toggled "on", AUTO-DIFF
comparison only processes the cut stock and design volumes within the specified "region".
Apply Regions Over Entire Stock — The check box, Apply Regions Over Entire Stock, does the
following:
 Calculates a region that can achieve the specified Comparison Tolerance within the
computer’s physical memory.
 Re-processes that region of the cut stock at a tolerance that ensures the Comparison
Tolerance can be achieved.
 Does the specified AUTO-DIFF comparison for the region.
 Repositions the region and does AUTO-DIFF multiple times over the entire cut stock.
During AUTO-DIFF processing, the Region Box is displayed at each position over the cut stock.
When Compare is pressed and this box is checked, a notice dialogue is displayed with the text,
“Processing may take several minutes depending on tolerance, size of the cut stock, memory
and processor speed. Press the stop button in the main window to cancel AUTO-DIFF.”, OK.
When the Apply Regions Over Entire Stock feature is active, the Region Size features are
disabled.
Improve Cut Stock Tolerance — When selected, the Cut Stock is re-evaluated at a new
tolerance based on the specified minimum AUTO-DIFF tolerance. Having this box checked
affects the results from both the Fit to Memory and the Apply Regions Over Entire Stock
features. Typically the Comparison Tolerance is smaller than the Cut Tolerance, so processing
will take longer when Improve Cut Stock Tolerance is active.
Region Size features
Drag Region — When toggled “on” (highlighted yellow), enables you to resize or move the
“region box”. When active the cursor displays as a box.
Grab a corner of the "region box" with the cursor and drag it to re-size the "region box". The
new corner location is automatically projected onto the cut stock in 3 dimensional space.
2045
VERICUT Help
Grab the mid-point of one of the "region box" edges to re-size the "region box" by dragging a
face.
Click with the mouse pointer in the point representing the center of the "region box" and drag
around the Cut Stock to reposition the "region box" without resizing it.
Minimum XYZ — Use to enter the minimum X, Y, and Z values (relative to the workpiece
coordinate system), separated by spaces. These values represent the X, Y, Z coordinates of first
corner point of the "region box".
Maximum XYZ — Use to enter the maximum X, Y, and Z values (relative to the workpiece
coordinate system), separated by spaces. These values represent the X, Y, Z coordinates of the
diagonal corner point of the "region box".
Maximize to Stock — Use to size the "region box" to the maximum extent of the union of the
stock and design volumes.
Fit to Box — Use to drag a 2 dimensional rectangle (similar to a "zoom" box) over the cut stock.
The rectangle is projected into 3 dimensional space to define the "region box".
Fit to Memory — Use to automatically size the "region box" based on the available memory for
AUTO-DIFF. A short delay occurs while memory is analyzed.
To AUTO-DIFF window
2046
VERICUT Help
Comparator (Comparator window)
VERICUT Users:
Location:
Analysis menu > Comparator
Toolbar short cut:
The Comparator option opens the Optical Comparator window enabling you to overlay a polar
or rectangular grid over a workpiece or machine view to emulate an optical comparator chart.
Use this feature to measure distance and angular relationships of features on your part like you
would with optical comparator.
2047
VERICUT Help
Comparator Grid Example
The grid can be displayed in any view but only in one view at a time. The grid is always
displayed in the "active" view. The grid is always displayed parallel to the screen and its center
(0,0) position is related to the origin of either the Attach Component for a Workpiece view and
the Machine Origin for a Machine view.
The grid will be displayed as long as the Optical Comparator window is open. Closing the Optical
Comparator window removes the grid from the display.
(Full Polar) — Displays a full polar grid .
(Polar Grid With Linear Quadrant) — Displays a polar grid with one linear grid
quadrant.
(Half Polar / Half Linear) — Displays a grid that is half polar and half linear.
(Linear Grid With Polar Quadrant) — Displays a linear grid with one polar quadrant.
(Full Linear) — Displays a full linear grid.
(Color Pallet)— The Color Pallet icon enables you to specify a color for the optical
comparator grid.
2048
VERICUT Help
The right side of the Color Pallet icon shows the current color for the optical comparator grid.
To change the color for the optical comparator grid, click on the (Color Pallet) icon to
display the color pallet window shown below.
Click on a color in the color pallet window, to specify the color for the optical comparator grid.
The color pallet window will close and the right side of the (Color Pallet) icon in the
Comparator window will update to reflect the selected color.
Use the following options to specify the size and position of the grid as well as define the
spacing between major and minor grid lines. Units are the same as the workpiece or machine
depending on the type of view that is "active".
Radius — Specify the radius of the grid that you want to display.
Center X — Specify the horizontal position of the center of the grid. Enter a value in the text
field. A negative number moves the center of the grid the specified number of units to the left
of the coordinate system origin. A positive number moves the grid to the right.
You can also move the horizontal position of the grid center by selecting one of the arrow
buttons. Selecting either the < or > button moves the center of the grid to the left or right of its
current position by the value specified for Minor Linear Spacing. Selecting either the <
< or >> button moves the center of the grid to the left, or right, of its current position by the
value specified for Major Linear Spacing.
Center Y — Specify the vertical position of the center of the grid. Enter a value in the text field.
A negative number moves the center of the grid the specified number of units down from the
coordinate system origin. A positive number moves the grid up.
You can also move the vertical position of the grid center by selecting one of the arrow buttons.
Selecting either the < or > button moves the center of the grid down, or up, from its current
position by the value specified for Minor Linear Spacing. Selecting either the < < or >> button
moves the center of the grid down, or up, from its current position by the value specified for
Major Linear Spacing.
2049
VERICUT Help
CCW Rotation — Use to rotate the grid about its center point. Enter an angle value in the text
field. A positive number rotates the grid the specified number of degrees in a counterclockwise
direction from its default (zero) position. A negative number rotates the grid the specified
number of degrees in a clockwise direction from its default (zero) position.
You can also rotate the grid about its center by selecting one of the arrow buttons. Selecting
either the < or > button rotates the grid clockwise or counterclockwise from its current position
by the value specified for Minor Angular Spacing. Selecting either the << or >> button rotates
the grid clockwise, or counterclockwise, from its current position by the value specified for
Major Angular Spacing.
Major Angular Spacing — Specify the number of degrees between the "major" grid lines of a
polar grid.
Minor Angular Spacing — Specify the number of degrees between the "minor" grid lines of a
polar grid.
Major Linear Spacing — Specify the distance between "major" grid lines of a linear grid.
Minor Linear Spacing — Specify the distance between "minor." grid lines of a linear grid.
Magnification — Use this option to quickly change the size of the grid by either a factor of 2, or
a factor of 10. Selecting either the < or > button reduces or enlarges the size of the grid by a
factor of 2. Selecting either the < < or >> button reduces or enlarges the size of the grid by a
factor of 10.
Snap to — Use this option to center the grid on a specific feature of the workpiece or machine.
Click on the text field so that it is highlighted. Select a feature in the graphics area and the grid
center will move to that location. You can also enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the
workpiece/machine coordinate system in the text field. Selecting the Snap to button (or
<Enter> on the keyboard) moves the grid to the specified location.
OK — Saves the current settings and dismisses the Optical Comparator window.
Apply — Applies all of the current settings to the displayed grid without dismissing the Optical
Comparator window. You can also use the <Enter> key after changing an individual setting to
immediately apply the change to the current grid display.
Cancel — Dismisses the Optical Comparator window without saving the settings.
2050
VERICUT Help
NC Program Review
Location:
Analysis > NC Program Review
Toolbar short cut:
The NC Program Review option enables you to quickly and easily view, replay and edit a
previously processed NC program (toolpath). NC Program Review can be accessed at any point
in the verification process; however, only information related to the "current" setup is available
for review. It does not interrupt the current verification status, so reset or rewind of the NC
program is not necessary.
NOTE: The following conditions must be met before a NC program can be viewed with NC
Program Review.
1. The NC program must be processed far enough in VERICUT so that a tool has been
loaded and at least one tool motion has been processed after the tool is loaded.
2. There must be a model attached to the first "Stock" type component in the Component
Tree.
3. The first "Stock" type component must be visible in a workpiece view.
2051
VERICUT Help
When you enter NC Program Review mode the VERICUT main window changes in the following
ways:
1. Some of the menus in the menu bar become grayed out and are no longer available.
These include the File, Project, Configuration, and OptiPath menus.
2. The icons in the Toolbar associated with the features in the menus listed above are also
not available. If selected the message "Action not allowed in the NC Program Review
panel" will display at the bottom of the Error Listing area.
3. The graphics display will change and lines representing the actual tool paths will be
displayed.
4. The NC Program Review, Error Listing area, will replace the VERICUT Logger.
5. Two additional icons, (Step Backward) and (Play Backward) are added to the
Simulation (VCR) Controls.
6. The NC Program Review panel will display. If the NC Program panel is already displayed,
it will be replaced by the NC Program Review panel.
Each of these changes is described in detail in the sections that follow.
The NC Program Review main window is composed of three distinct areas, each with different
user interaction. The window header displays the current NC program file. This window can be
moved and resized like most other windows, via dragging the window header, sides or corners.
In addition, the size of the NC Program Listing, Error Listing, and Graphics areas can be
changed within the main window by dragging the adjoining sides of each area.
NC Program Review enables you to quickly and easily associate the NC program record, the
motion resulting from it, and any errors that may be associated with it. The three areas of the
window are linked together so that if you select a NC program record in the listing, the tool
moves to the corresponding location in the graphics area. If you select a location in the graphics
area, the corresponding NC program record is highlighted in the NC program listing. If you
select an error in the error listing, the NC program record that caused the error becomes
highlighted in the NC program listing and the tool moves to the position where the error
occurred in the graphics area.
NC Program Listing — This area displays a listing of the NC program records. In this area you
can manually edit, add, or delete NC program records. Save the modified NC program file or
open another NC program file associated with the current project file. You can also set Start
and End markers to define the range of NC program records that you want to review. For more
information about this portion of the NC Program Review main window, see the NC Program
Listing Area section below.
2052
VERICUT Help
Error Listing — This area displays a list of the errors that VERICUT found while processing the
NC program. For more information about this portion of the NC Program Review main window,
see the Error Listing Area section below.
Graphics Area — This area displays a visual representation of the motion associated with the
records in the NC Program Listing. Here you can control how the tool is displayed, the method
and direction of the replayed NC program as well as the speed of the replay. For more
information about this portion of the NC Program Review main window, see the Graphics Area
section below.
2053
VERICUT Help
NC Program Review, NC Program Listing Area
The NC Program Review panel, or NC Program Listing panel, contains a listing of the NC
program records. Features in this panel enable you to edit, save, or print the NC program, and
define display characteristics, and ranges for replay of the NC program.
The NC Program Listing panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
NOTE: When the NC Program Listing panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel so
Listing panel.
(Close) — Closes the NC Program Listing panel. This icon is only displayed when the NC
Program Listing panel is not docked.
2054
VERICUT Help
Main Menu
The menu located across the top of the NC Program Listing panel provides easy access to major
NC Program Listing functions. Each menu contains groups of related functions. Left-click on any
of the menu names to display the list of functions available in that menu. Click on the function
in the pull-down menu that you want to use. The name of the current NC program file is also
displayed in this area.
(Mouse active to enable mouse tracking and picks, inactive to disable.) — Use this icon
to designate that the NC Program Review panel is the panel that picks in the VERICUT graphics
area are to be applied to. When “Active”, the icon is displayed in the Mouse Pick
Highlight Color specified in the File menu > Preferences window. When “Inactive”, the
icon is displayed.
File
Save As — Save the current NC program file under a different name.

Print — Displays a window enabling you to specify print characteristics and print the NC
program.
Mode — Use to specify the VERICUT Simulation mode that you want to work in. Choose one
of the following modes from the pull-down list:
NC Program
NC Program Review
NC Program Preview
Exit — Closes the NC Program Listing panel and returns to standard VERICUT mode.
2055
VERICUT Help
Edit
Insert from MDI — This feature is not applicable to NC Program Listing panel.
Cut — Cuts the highlighted text in the NC program listing and puts it in the paste buffer.
Copy — Copies the highlighted text in the NC program listing to the paste buffer.
Paste — Puts the contents of the paste buffer at the location of the cursor in the NC
program listing.
Restore — use to remove all edits from the NC program listing restoring it to its pre-edited
state.
Shortcut: You can also access the Edit menu features by clicking the right mouse button in the
NC Program listing area.
Utilities
Calculator — Opens the Calculator window enabling you to do mathematical calculations

and conversions inside VERICUT. See Calculator window in the Info Menu section of
Colors — Opens the NC Program Colors window enabling you specify colors for specific
features (comments, variable, macros, etc.) in the NC Program listing. See Colors window in
the Info Menu section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
2056
VERICUT Help
Block Renumber — Opens the Block Renumber window enabling you to renumber one, or
more blocks, in the NC program and specify format characteristics to be used for block
numbering. The formats specified must conform to the characteristics defined in the
current control file. See Block Renumber window in the Info Menu section of VERICUT Help
Remove Block Numbers — Removes all block numbers from the NC program file. Block
numbers are identified by the characteristics defined in the current control file.
Check Syntax — Displays the Check Syntax window enabling you to check the displayed NC
program for syntax errors. See Check Syntax window in the Info menu > Nc Program section
of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Settings
Set Start — Sets the "Start" marker, , to the position specified by the cursor in the NC
program listing or picking a location in the Graphics Area.
Set Current — Sets the "Current" marker, , to the position specified either by the cursor
in the NC program listing or picking a location in the Graphics Area.
Set End — Sets the "End" marker, , to the position specified by the cursor in the NC
program listing or picking a location in the Graphics Area.
Display to Box — Enables you to set "Start", "Current" and "End" markers by creating a box
around the area of interest in the graphics area. Click on Display to Box, then left click in the
Graphics Area and drag the cursor to create a box around the area of interest. The "Start"
marker will be set to the lowest record number contained within the boxed area and the
"Current" and "End" markers will be set to the highest record number contained within the
"boxed" area.
2057
VERICUT Help
Rapid Motion — Displays a color pallet enabling you to specify a color for "Rapid"
motions in the tool path display in the Graphics Area. “Cutting” portions of the tool path
display are represented by a solid line. “Non-cutting” portions of the tool path display are
represented by a dashed line.
Linear Motion — Displays a color pallet enabling you to specify a color for "linear"
motions in the tool path display in the Graphics Area. “Cutting” portions of the tool path
display are represented by a solid line. “Non-cutting” portions of the tool path display are
represented by a dashed line.
Circular Motion — Displays a color pallet enabling you to specify a color for circular and
helical motions in the tool path display in the Graphics Area. “Cutting” portions of the tool
path display are represented by a solid line. “Non-cutting” portions of the tool path display
are represented by a dashed line.
Goto Start — Moves the cursor in the NC program listing and positions the cutter in the
Graphics Area to the position indicated by the "Start" marker.
Goto Current — Moves the cursor in the NC program listing and positions the cutter in the
Graphics Area to the position indicated by the "Current" marker.
Goto End — Moves the cursor in the NC program listing and positions the cutter in the
Graphics Area to the position indicated by the "End" marker.
Shortcut: You can also access the Settings menu features by clicking the right mouse button in
either the NC Program listing, or in the Graphics Area.
Icon Bar
The items in the Icon Bar enable you access NC Program Preview or the Check Syntax window,
search for specific items in the NC program listing, print the NC program listing, or exit NC
Program Review. Moving the cursor over the icon will display the name of the option.
(NC Program Review) — Use this icon to switch between standard VERICUT mode and NC
Program Review mode (ref. NC Program Review, also in the Analysis menu section of VERICUT
Help for additional information).
2058
VERICUT Help
(NC Program Preview) — Use this icon to put VERICUT in NC Program Preview mode and
display a tool trace represented by the NC program and the design model. This feature can be
used without processing the NC Program first, as required by NC Program Review. See NC
Program Preview, also in the Analysis menu Section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
NC Program Syntax Check — Displays the Check Syntax window enabling you to check
the displayed NC program for syntax errors. See Check Syntax window in the Info Menu section
of VERICUT Help for additional Information.
Search — Displays the search tools window as shown in the panel below.
Tip: You can also use the Ctrl + “F” key to display the search tools window.
Line Number or Search Text — Use this text field to enter a line number or a string of text
to search for.
2059
VERICUT Help
Search Forward — Searches forward in the NC program listing for the text string
Replace One — Replace one occurrence of text string in the Line Number or Search
Text field (or the highlighted text in the NC program listing) with the text string in the
Replacement Text field.
Replace All — Replace all occurrences of the text string in the Line Number or Search
Text field with the text string in the Replacement Text field.
Close — Closes the display of the search tools window.
Tip: You can also click on the (Search) icon again to remove the display of the search
tools window.
(Undo Highlighted Changes) — Use this feature to undo changes made to the NC program
listing. Highlight the change and then click on the icon to "undo" the change.
(Print) — Prints the NC program listing.
(Tile Horizontally) — When running 'sync' jobs that run multiple NC programs
simultaneously, this feature enables you to tell VERICUT that you want to view the NC program
listings tiled horizontally as shown in the picture below.
2060
VERICUT Help
Multiple NC programs tiled horizontally
(Tile Vertically) — When running 'sync' jobs that run multiple NC programs
simultaneously, this feature enables you to tell VERICUT that you want to view the NC program
listings tiled vertically as shown in the picture below.
2061
VERICUT Help
Multiple NC programs tiled vertically
(Close) — Closes the NC Program Listing panel and returns to standard VERICUT mode.
This icon is only displayed when the NC Program Listing panel is docked.
(Close) — Closes the NC Program Listing panel and returns to standard VERICUT mode.
This icon is only displayed when the NC Program Listing Area panel is not docked.
2062
VERICUT Help
Other Features
Setup — enables you to specify the Setup that you want to review. Choose the desired setup
from the pull-down list. All of the setups contained in the current project file will be displayed in
the pull-down list.
NC Program — enables you to specify the NC program in the Setup selected above that you
want to review. Choose the desired NC program from the pull-down list. All of NC programs
contained in the selected Setup will be displayed in the pull-down list.
Line Display — enables you to specify whether or not to display the lines representing the
tool's path in the graphics area while in NC Program Review. Choose Off (do not display), or On
(display) from the pull-down list.
Tool Display — enables you to specify how the tool is to be displayed in the graphics area while
in NC Program Review. Choose Off (do not display tool), Solid, or Translucent from the pull-
down list.

The line number of the "current" NC program record and "current" NC program is displayed at
the top of the NC Program Listing area.
2063
VERICUT Help
Single NC program
Multiple NC programs (SYNC jobs)
2064
VERICUT Help
NC Program Editing
The NC program listing area allows you to edit the NC program with a full function text editor.
You can use the keyboard to add, change, or delete portions of the NC program listing. You can
also use the Cut, Copy and Paste functions found under Edit in the main menu.
You can easily see the modifications that you have made to the NC program listing. Added,
changed, and pasted text is displayed in blue and underlined. Cut and deleted text is displayed
in red with a "strike through" font. Once you save the modified NC program, the red and
deleted text is removed and the blue added, changed, and pasted text is returned to the
original font.
Start/Current/End Markers
The Start/Current/End markers can be found along the left side of the NC Program Listing area.
The Start marker is represented by the green triangle , the Current marker is represented by
the aquamarine arrow , and the End marker is represented by the red square . You can
easily identify each marker by moving the cursor over it.
The Start and End markers are used to define the range of NC program records that will be
replayed when using Play to End. The Current marker moves to the NC program record that is
currently being replayed.
Set these markers by either selecting an NC program record in the NC program listing or the
location in the graphics area where you want the marker placed. Then select the appropriate
option (Set Start, Set Current, Set End) from the menu displayed by the Settings menu in the
NC Program Review panel.
You can also set these markers by right-clicking an NC program record in the NC program listing
or the location in the graphics area where you want the marker placed. Then select the
appropriate option (Set Start, Set Current, Set End) from the menu that displays.
You can also click on the appropriate marker in the NC program listing and drag it to the desired
NC program record.
2065
VERICUT Help
Shortcut: Click the right mouse button in the NC Program Listing Area to display a menu with
the following features:
These features provide the same functionality described above in the Edit and Settings sections.
NOTES:
1. See the Edit section above for specific information on features Cut through Restore.
2. See the Settings section above for specific information on features Set Start through
Goto End.
To NC Program Review
2066
VERICUT Help
NC Program Review, Error Listing Area
The Error Listing area replaces the VERICUT Logger while in NC Program Review. It contains a
list of the errors that were found while processing the NC program in VERICUT.
Selecting an error in the Error Listing causes the line in the NC Program Listing associated with
the error to become highlighted. At the same, the tool display in the Graphics Area moves to
the position where the error occurred. This enables you to quickly and easily associate the error
with the position in the NC program and in the toolpath display.
Tip: Click with the right mouse button in the Error Listing Area to display the following menu.
Its features enable you to specify whether or not to display only Errors, only Warnings, or both
Errors and Warnings in the Error Listing Area. When toggled “on” (checked) the feature will be
displayed. When toggled “off”, the feature will not be displayed. Click on the feature in the
menu to toggle on/off.
2067
VERICUT Help
NC Program Review, Graphics Area
The graphics area displays the active views from the VERICUT main graphics area. Also, many of
the analysis, display and view manipulation tools in the VERICUT Verification main menu are
available for use while you are in the NC Program Review graphics area.
2068
VERICUT Help
Main menu and Toolbar icons
The available Menu bar items and Toolbar icons perform the same function as those found in
VERICUT.
Some of the menus in the Menu bar become grayed out and are not available while in NC
Program Review. These include the File, Project, Configuration, and OptiPath menus.
The icons in the Toolbar associated with the features in the menus listed above are also not
available. If selected the message "Action not allowed in the NC Program Review panel" will
display at the bottom of the Error Listing area.
The following table summarizes which icons are active, and which icons are inactive, when in
NC Program Review mode.
Active Icons Inactive Icons
Setup Plan Open Project
X-Caliper Save Project
NC Program Review Save Project As
Comparator New Project (Inch)
2069
VERICUT Help
Workpiece View New Project (Millimeter)
Machine Cut/Stock View Open In-Process
Accelerated Machine Cut/Stock

Save In-Process
View
Draw Shaded Save In-Process As
Save Project, Machine , and Control

Draw Lines
Files
Draw Mixed Open Review File
Section Save Review File
Translucent Working Directory
Translucent Extended Edit NC Program
Color Custom Interface
Zoom to Box File Summary (Copy Files)
Zoom Box in New View Open Machine
Zoom In Open Control
Zoom Out Tools
Fit / Fit All Output
Refine Display Project Tree
Last Refine Display APT Settings
2070
VERICUT Help
Reverse No Animation
Snap to Orthogonal View No Machine Simulation
View NC Program AutoSave
Status AUTO-DIFF
Graphs View G-Code Report
Machine Offsets Inspection
Call Stack Save Machine
SubSystemMotion Save Machine As
Siemens 840D System Frames Save Control
Cutcom Sketch Save Control As
View Control Report Machine Settings
VERICUT Log Word Format
Dynamic X Rotation G-Code Processing
Dynamic Y Rotation Control Settings
Dynamic Z Rotation Control Advanced Options
Dynamic XY Rotation G-Code Advanced Settings
Dynamic Pan Clear Logfile and Logger
2071
VERICUT Help
Dynamic Zoom OptiPath
Single View Layout OptiPath Compare Files
Two View Layout (Horizontal) OptiPath Savings Calculator
Two View Layout (Vertical) Interactive OptiPath
Three View Layout (Vertical) FastMill
Three View Layout (Horizontal) Load All Stocks
Four View Layout Delete Detached Stock
View to Back MDI
View Always in Front Image Record
G-Code Variables Image Playback
NC Program Preview View Capture
Close Print View
Perform Syntax Check
Tools
The Toolpath Display

As the NC program is replayed, a line representing the motion of the tool control point is
displayed in the graphics area. By default, the tool motion display is only visible in a Workpiece
view. You can also view the tool motion display on a Machine/Cut Stock view by turning on
2072
VERICUT Help
Animate Machine When Stepping Back feature on the Project menu > Settings > Project
Settings tab.
Motions that remove material are displayed as solid lines with a default color of the foreground
color. Motions that do not remove material are displayed as dashed lines with a default color of
magenta. The line representing the motion of the current NC program record is highlighted
with a default color of red. The tool image is displayed at the location of the current NC
program record.
The color of the lines can be changed using the Cut Line, Non-Cut Line and Circular Motion
options found in the menu that is displayed when using the right mouse button in the graphics
area or the NC Program listing area, or found under Settings in the NC Program Listing window.
Graphics Area Controls

Animation Speed Slider — Controls the speed of the toolpath replay. Move to the left to slow
down the replay of the toolpath. Move to the right to speed it up. See Animation Speed Slider
in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Status Lights — Only the Ready/Busy status light is active when in NC Program Review mode.
Progress Bar — The Progress Bar is inactive when in NC Program Review mode.
Simulation (VCR) Controls — The simulation controls, also known as VCR buttons, located at
the bottom-right corner of the graphics area control interactive tool path replay. Use these
controls to start and stop the replay of the toolpath. To see what action is associated with a
Simulation control icon, simply position the cursor over the icon and a tip appears.
2073
VERICUT Help
Icon Name Function
Play Forward Replays from the Current position to the End position.
Step Forward Replays the next NC program record ("single block").
Step Into
Subroutine
Step Over These actions are not allowed in the NC Program Review
Subroutine panel.
Step to End of
Subroutine
Pauses the replay during "Play" (after the current record

Pause
displays)
Replays the previous NC program record ("single block").

Step Backward
See notes below.
2074
VERICUT Help
Replays from the Current position to the Start position.

Play Backward
See notes below.
Sets the Current marker to the record with the Start

Rewind to Start marker and clears the toolpath display from the Graphics
area.
Sets the Start and Current markers to the first motion

Rewind to record in the NC program, sets the End marker to the last
Beginning NC program motion record, and clears the toolpath display
from the Graphics area.
NOTES:
1. You can see removed material replaced as you step back (Step Backward or Play
Backward) through the NC program by turning on Replace Material When Stepping
Back on the Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings). This
feature can be turned on at any point in the simulation but VERICUT will not start to
store the information required to replace material while stepping back until Replace
Material When Stepping Back is toggled "on". Cuts made prior to turning this feature
on will not replace material while stepping back. VERICUT will store up to 1000 cut
records that remove material. If you step back more than the 1000 stored cut records,
the message, "Material restored for the maximum 1000 steps back", will display in the
temporary message area at the bottom of the Error Listing Area.
Replace Material When Stepping Back (ref. Replace Material When Stepping Back, on
the Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings) and FastMill mode
(ref. FastMill, on the Project Tree Configure Setup menu:Motion tab) are mutually
exclusive.
When Replace Material When Stepping Back is toggled "On", VERICUT will turn FastMill
"Off" Conversely, if FastMill is toggled "On", VERICUT will turn Replace Material When
Stepping Back "Off. VERICUT will display a pop-up notification when these situations
occur.
2. You can see machine animation as you step back (Step Backward or Play Backward)
through the NC program by turning on Animate Machine When Stepping Back on the
Settings window: Project Settings tab (Project menu > Settings). This feature can be
turned on at any point in the simulation but VERICUT will not start to store the
information required to animate the machine while stepping back until Animate
2075
VERICUT Help
Machine When Stepping Back is toggled "on". Machine motions made prior to turning
this feature on will not animate while stepping back. VERICUT will store up to 1000 cut
records that cause machine motion.
3. Turning on Animate Machine When Stepping Back on also enables you to view the line
representing the motion of the tool control point in a Machine/Cut Stock view.
2076
VERICUT Help
Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus

Workpiece View
Right-click in the NC Program Review Main Window, Workpiece View to display a menu with
the following features:
2077
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. See Workpiece View in the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the
Getting Started with VERICUT section of VERICUT Help, for specific information on
features Add a View through Display Axes.
See Settings, in the NC Program Review, NC Program Listing area above, for specific
information on features Set Start through Goto End.
2. A check next to Accelerated (OpenGL), or any of the Display Axes features, indicates
that the feature is toggled "On".
3. A check next to any of the coordinate systems in the Active Coordinate System list
indicates the coordinate system is the “active” coordinate system.
2078
VERICUT Help
Machine View
Right-click in the NC Program Review Main Window, Machine View to display a menu with the
following features:
2079
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. See Machine View in the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the
2. A check next to Accelerated (OpenGL), or any of the Display Axes features, indicates
that the feature is toggled "On".
3. A check next to any of the coordinate systems in the Active Coordinate System list
indicates the coordinate system is the “active” coordinate system.
4. A check next to any of the Component Visibility features indicates that the feature is
"visible".
5. The Component Visibility, and Attach Component, feature lists will contain all
components in the current machine. This is especially useful when using an encrypted
machine as the Component Tree is not available. If the list of components gets too long
to display on your screen, VERICUT will automatically break up Component Visibility,
and Attach Component, into multiple menu item/feature lists.
6. The Select View feature list will contain all available standard and custom views.
2080
VERICUT Help
Profile View
Right-click in the NC Program Review Main Window, Profile View to display a menu with the
following features:
2081
VERICUT Help
NOTES:
1. See Profile View in the Graphics Area Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus, in the
2. A check next to any of the Display Axes features, indicates that the feature is toggled
"On".
2082
VERICUT Help
Inspection
The Inspection option opens the Inspection window which has features that enable you to
create or modify VERICUT Inspection reports and inspection programs. See VERICUT Inspection
in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for complete information.
2083
VERICUT Help
Die Sinking Simulation
The Die Sinking option opens the Die Sinking Simulation window which has features that enable
you to select electrodes and simulate the die sinking process. See Die Sinking Simulation in the
Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for complete information.
2084
VERICUT Help
Perform Syntax Check
Location:
Analysis menu > Perform Syntax Check
Toolbar short cut:
Perform Syntax Check causes VERICUT to check all NC program and NC Subroutine files
referenced by the “current” setup for syntax errors.
The features on the Word Format window: Syntax Check tab are used to turn On/Off VERICUT
defined syntax checking rules (error conditions), and to define custom syntax checking error
conditions for checking the statements in your G-Code NC program files for valid syntax.
See Word Format window: Syntax Check tab in the Configuration Menu section of VERICUT
Help, VERICUT Drill and Fastener Simulation Help, or VERICUT Composite Simulation Help for
Each syntax error that is found is written to the VERICUT Logger and a summary showing the
number syntax errors found is displayed directly below the Logger as shown in the picture
below.
2085
VERICUT Help
NC Program Preview
Location:
Analysis menu > NC Program Preview
Toolbar short cut:
NC Program Preview can also be accessed from the Info menu > NC Program panel, or from the
NC Program Review panel: NC Program listing panel, by using (NC Program Preview) icon
in either of these windows or in the Toolbar.
The NC Program Preview panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
NOTE: When the NC Program Preview panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel
2086
VERICUT Help
Preview panel.
(Close) — Closes the NC Program Preview panel. This icon is only displayed when the
NC ProgramPreview panel is not docked.
NC Program Preview puts VERICUT in NC Program Preview mode which is similar to NC Program
Review mode except that it displays a tool trace representing the NC toolpath and the design
model. NC Program Preview can be used without processing the NC program first, as required
by NC Program Review. All of the VERICUT features behave in the same way as described above
for NC Program Review.
2087
VERICUT Help
NOTE: The NC Program Preview feature responds to the "Stop at ..." settings in the Configure
Project menu: Start/Stop tab or set by clicking with the right mouse button on the (Play
Forward) VCR button in the VERICUT main window.
See Simulation (VCR) Controls in the Getting Started section of VERICUT Help or Configure
Project menu: Start/Stop tab, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, for additional
information on these settings.
Shortcut: NC Program Preview has the same right mouse button shortcut menus in the NC
Program Listing Area, and in the Graphics Area, that are described above for NC Program
Review.
2088
VERICUT Help
Optimize Menu
2089
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control (Optimize Control window)

Location:
Optimize menu > Optimize Control
Project menu > Settings window: Output Files tab, OptiPath section Settings button
Toolbar short cut:
The Optimize Control option opens the OptiPath Control window enabling you to control when
NC program files are optimized by OptiPath or Force, specify the file to receive the optimized
data, choose the type of stock material and NC machine involved in the cutting the workpiece.
Feed rates and spindle speeds can be monitored via the Status window. A summary of the
cutting conditions encountered during optimization and min/max optimized feed rates is
written to the Log and available for use when creating a report file showing an overview of the
results of the current VERICUT session.
NOTES:
1. See OptiPath window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for information on
how to create and maintain OptiPath records that describe how to optimize feed rates
and/or spindle speeds for various tools and cutting conditions.
2. Plunge cutting operations are not supported by OptiPath. OptiPath will ignore plunge
cuts during the optimization process.
2090
VERICUT Help
OptiPath Settings tab — Features on this tab enable you to control when and how NC programs
are optimized with OptiPath.
Force Settings tab — Features on this tab enable you to control when and how NC programs are
optimized with Force.
G-Code Output Options tab — Features on this tab enable you to configure how the machine
control will process machine code data, and configure settings referenced when G-Code NC
program files are optimized.
Learn Mode Options tab — Features on this tab enable you to control how and when OptiPath
records are written to the Tool Learn Library file during Learn From Toolpath processing.
APT Output Options tab — Features on this tab enable you to configure settings referenced
when APT NC programs are optimized.
OK — Applies the changes and closes the Optimize Control window.

Apply — Applies the changes and leaves the Optimize Control window open.
Cancel — Closes the Optimize Control window without applying changes.
2091
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, OptiPath Settings tab

The features on the OptiPath Settings tab enable you to control when and how NC programs
are optimized with OptiPath.
OptiPath Mode — Controls when and how tool paths are optimized. All OptiPath modes can be
used with both Standard and FastMill cut modes.
Options:
Off — Turns optimization off. Optimization is automatically turned off when the end of the
NC program file has been reached, or when the NC program is reset, or rewound.
On — Turns OptiPath on and writes optimized NC program data to the file specified with
the Optimized File feature. For optimization to occur, OptiPath records must be
"associated" with the cutting tools in the NC program file. There are two methods of doing
this:
1. Tool Library association method - associate the OptiPath tool Description and
number of Teeth with a tool in a Tool Library file, then choose the stock Material
and Machine in the OptiPath Control window.
2092
VERICUT Help
2. Tool List association method - choose the stock Material and Machine in the
OptiPath Control window, then build a tool list that associates OptiPath records with
cutting tools to be optimized in the NC program file.
With either method, tools without "cutting tool-to-OptiPath record" associations are not
optimized. If both methods are used, associations in the tool list override those stored with
tools in the Tool Library.
Prompt While Cutting — Turns OptiPath "On" and interactively prompts for optimization
data at each tool change by displaying the Optimization Settings window. Use the
Optimization Settings window features to enter data for optimizing the cuts performed by
the current tool. When you finish, VERICUT automatically stores the information in the Tool
Library file, and sets tool properties to point to the new OptiPath record. VERICUT restarts
the simulation, turns OptiPath on and uses this information to write optimized NC program
records to the specified Optimized File until the next tool change is encountered.
Learn From NC Program — Turns OptiPath "On" and automatically creates a new Tool
Library file for the "current" project file. The new Tool Library file is created in the file
specified by Tool Learn Library on the Learn Mode Options tab. The OptiPath records in the
Tool Library file that is created can then be manually fine-tuned using features in the
OptiPath window, and then used to optimize the NC program.
Learn From NC Program can be turned On / Off at any time during cut processing. Each
time Learn From NC Program is turned on, it creates a Tool Library file. The file contains
OptiPath settings for every tool loaded since cutting was started with Learn From NC
Program turned "On", including the tool that was cutting at time that Learn From NC
Program was turned "Off". These settings are based only on cutting conditions that
occurred between the time cutting was started with Learn From NC Program was turned
"On" and the time when cutting stops and Learn From NC Program turned "Off". To get
complete and accurate information for each tool, process the whole job through Learn
From NC Program. Turning Learn From NC Program On / Off during cutting can be used to
analyze cutting conditions for a specific group of cuts.
When Learn From NC Program mode is turned on, any tools with matching OP records are
skipped, not "learned". Any tools without OP records are "learned" and a new OP record is
created. The old and new records are combined in a new OP library file.
For each tool, OptiPath finds the maximum volume removal rate and chip thickness that
occurred during cutting and uses them for corresponding OptiPath settings for the tool. The
optimization mode is set to a combination of "Chip Thickness" and "Volume Removal" for
each tool. Axial Depth and Radial Width values are determined by the cut that produces
the highest volume removal rate. Default values are used for other settings unless they
have specifically been changed using Learn Mode Options tab.
Learn From NC Program only automatically creates an updated Tool Library file (.tls)
containing the "OP Description" and "# Teeth" values associated with the newly created
OptiPath records. It does not automatically optimize the tool path or produce the Optimized
File. Once Learn From NC Program creates the updated Tool Library file, you are prompted
2093
VERICUT Help
whether or not you want to optimize the NC program using the newly created Tool Library
file.
NOTE: Plunge cutting operations are not supported by OptiPath. Learn From NC Program
will ignore plunge cuts during the optimization process.
Interactive — Use to turn on Interactive OptiPath mode.
Interactive OptiPath enables you to interact with OptiPath to optimize a previously
simulated NC program. The purpose of the interaction is to:
 enables you to create optimization settings based on virtual iterations within
VERICUT
 enables you to create an optimized NC program once you are satisfied with the
results of your trial settings.
Optimized File — Use to specify the name of the modified (optimized) NC program file to
receive optimized NC program data. Enter the \path\filename in the Optimized File text field or
click on the (Browse) icon and use the Optimized NC Program File file selection window to
specify the \path\filename.
The format of this file, APT vs. G-Code, is the same as the tool path file being optimized. When
an APT NC program is optimized the programmed "FEDRAT" records are commented out using
"$$" and written to the modified path for reference. The Optimized File name must be different
from that of the original NC program file. OptiPath will not permit the original NC program file
to be overwritten.
When optimizing multiple NC program files an optimized NC program file is output for each NC
program file simulated. Each output file has an ascending sequence number appended to the
end of the base file name. For example: assume Optimized File="part.mco" is entered (without
the quotes). Optimizing 2 NC programs outputs the following files:
part001.mco => optimized NC program file created from NC program 1

part002.mco => optimized NC program file created from NC program 2
If a dot "." is the last character of the optimized tool path file name, then three digits are
appended to the file name as the extension. Continuing with the above example: assume
Optimized File="part." is entered. Optimizing the same 2 NC programs outputs the following
files:
part.001 => optimized NC program file created from NC program 1

part.002 => optimized NC program file created from NC program 2
2094
VERICUT Help
If an asterisk "*" is used in the optimized tool path file name, the original tool path file name is
used as the output file name in place of the asterisk. If characters follow the asterisk, the input
tool path file name extension is replaced with the characters following the asterisk. Examples
follow.
Original tool path file Optimized File name Output file name
dir1/filename.tp dir2/* dir2/filename.tp
dir1/filename.tp dir2/*.op dir2/filename.op
dir1/filename.tp dir2/*op dir2/filenameop
dir1/filename.tp dir2/*op.tp dir2/filenameop.tp
filename.tp *.op filename.op
Only a single asterisk is acted on in the optimized NC program file name, with one exception:
asterisk dot asterisk ("*.*"). This case behaves exactly like the single asterisk file name
described above. This is NOT a regular expression replacement; therefore any characters before
the asterisk are ignored and lost. When there is more than one asterisk, only the first one is
replaced. Examples follow
Original tool path file Optimized File name Output file name
dir1/filename.tp dir2/*.* dir2/filename.tp
dir1/filename.tp dir2/op* dir2/filename.tp
dir1/filename.tp dir2/op*.ext dir2/filename.ext
dir1/filename.tp dir2/*op.* dir2/filenameop.*
Material — Identifies the stock material being cut. The material name is changed via clicking
the arrow and selecting from a list of available materials, or clicking in the data field and typing
a new material name.
Machine — Identifies the NC machine being used to cut the workpiece. This feature functions
similar to Material described above.
2095
VERICUT Help
NOTE: For optimization to occur the Material and Machine names must match those of the
desired OptiPath records in the Tool Library file.
Override All Feedrates — Overrides the optimized feed rates calculated for all tools optimized.
100% uses the optimized feed rates as is, 50% cuts the feed rates in half, 200% doubles the feed
rates, and so on.
To Optimize Control window
2096
VERICUT Help
Optimization Settings window

The Optimization Settings window is displayed by VERICUT each time that a tool change is
encountered during simulation when OptiPath Mode, in the OptiPath Control window: Settings
tab, is set to Prompt While Cutting.
2097
VERICUT Help
The upper part of the Optimization Settings window provides information about the current
tool, material, and machine that VERICUT has extracted from Tool Manager, the machine file,
the OptiPath Control window, etc.
The tabs on the lower part of the Optimization Settings window are identical to those found on
the OptiPath window. See OptiPath window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for
Search Existing — Displays the Search OptiPath Record window enabling you to search Tool
Library files and OptiPath files for existing OptiPath records. See Search OptiPath Record
window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help for additional information.
Do not optimize this tool — Turns optimization off for the current tool.
OK — Accepts the current OptiPath settings. VERICUT automatically stores the information in
the Tool Library file, sets tool properties to point to the new OptiPath record, and restarts the
simulation with OptiPath turned on. VERICUT uses this information to write optimized NC
program records to the specified Optimized File, as the simulation continues, until another tool
change is encountered.
Cancel — Causes VERICUT to stop prompting for remaining tools but continues optimizing
where possible.
2098
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, Force Settings tab

The features on the Force Settings tab enable you to control when and how NC programs are
optimized with VERICUT Force.
Force Mode — Controls when and how NC programs are optimized.

Off — Turns optimization off. Optimization is automatically turned off when the end of the
NC program file has been reached, or when the NC program is reset, or rewound.
Analyze — Force calculations are done but no optimized NC program is generated. This
enables you to run Force and review the Force Charts that are generated to determine
appropriate values to use in the Feed Optimization section of the Tool Force Data tab in
Tool Manager.
Optimize — Force calculations are done and an optimized NC program is generated.
Material File Directory — The Material File Directory feature is used to specify the \path\ to
the folder where the Force Material file(s) are located. Enter the complete \path\ in the
Material File Directory text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Set Data
Directory file selection window to specify the \path\.
2099
VERICUT Help
Material — Select the material type from the pull-down list. The list will contain all materials
read in from the Material File Directory.
Override All Feedrates % — Overrides the optimized feed rates calculated for all tools
optimized. 100% uses the optimized feed rates as is, 50% cuts the feed rates in half, 200%
doubles the feed rates, and so on.
Output Directory — The Output Directory feature is used to specify the path to the folder
where all of the VERICUT Force output files will be written. Enter the complete \path\ to the
output folder in the Output Directory text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Set
Output Directory file selection window to specify the \path\.
Additional Output for Advanced Analysis — When the Additional Output for Advanced
Analysis feature is toggled on (checked) the following files will be output to the
/output/detailed folder.
feed_FM.xls
geometry_FM.xls
map.txt
optimization.xls
View Charts at Process End — When toggled on (checked), the View Force Charts window will
automatically be displayed at the end of processing.
View Force Charts — Displays the View Force Charts window enabling you to view the
following Force generated charts.
Force Chart
Power/Torque Chart
Chip Thickness Chart
Removal Rate Chart
See the View Force Charts window topic below, for additional information.
Optimized File — Use to specify the name of the modified (optimized) NC program file to
receive optimized NC program data. Enter the \path\filename in the Optimized File text field or
click on the (Browse) icon and use the Optimized NC Program File file selection window to
specify the \path\filename.
This feature ia only available when the Force Mode is set to Optimize.
See the Overview of Using VERICUT Force for Milling NC Programs topic below, for additional
information.
See Notes about VERICUT Force in Notes about Special Topics located in the CGTech Help
Library for additional information.
To Optmize Control window
2100
VERICUT Help
Overview of Using VERICUT Force for Milling NC Programs
The following overview describes how VERICUT Force is used with VERICUT to optimize an NC
program and obtain other machining information.
The following assumes that:
 you have installed VERICUT and that you have VERICUT running.
 you have created the project file to be optimized including Stock, NC program, Tool
Library with tools, etc.
 you have specified Cutter and Feed Optimization characteristics for the tools to be used
by the VERICUT Force NC program optimization tool using the Tool Manager window,
Tool Force Data tab
1. In the VERICUT main Menu bar, select File menu > Open to display the Open Project file
selection window. Use the file selection window to select the VERICUT project file that
you want to use.
2. In the VERICUT main Menu bar, select Optimize menu > Optimize Control to display the
Optimize Control window.
2101
VERICUT Help
3. In the Optimize Control window, click on the Force Settings tab.

4. Select the Force Mode feature that you want to use. Choose Analyze to do Force
calculations and create output data files but not generate an optimized NC program.
Choose Optimize to do Force calculations, create output data files, and generate an
optimized NC program.
5. The Material File Directory contains the Force Material file(s). Force Material files have
a “.vcfm” extension.
Enter the complete \path\ to the folder containing your Force Material files in the
Material File Directory text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Set Data
Directory file selection window to specify the \path\.
6. Select the material type from the Material pull-down list.
7. Use the Output Directory feature to specify the location of the folder where all of the
VERICUT Force output files will be written. Enter the complete \path\ to the Output
folder in the Output Directory text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Set Output Directory file selection window to specify the \path\.
8. If desired toggle on (checked) Additional Output for Advanced Analysis.
9. If desired toggle on (checked) View Charts at Process End to have Force Charts be
automatically displayed at the end of processing.
10. By default, the optimized NC Program file that is generated with the new feed rates will
have the same name as the input NC Program file name but with an “.opti” extension
and will be written to the Working directory.
If you want to use a different \path\filename, use the Optimized File feature to specify
the \path\filename of the file that is to receive optimized NC program data.
Enter the \path\filename in the Optimized File text field or click on the (Browse)
icon and use the Optimized NC Program File file selection window to specify the
\path\filename.
11. Click OK to save the current settings and close the Optimize Control window. Click Apply
to save the current settings and leave the Optimize Control window open. Click Cancel
to exit the Optimize Control window without saving the settings.
12. Click on the (Play) button in the lower right corner of the VERICUT window to start
the Optimization process.
13. At the end of processing, the OptiPath Savings Calculator window will display enabling
you to calculate the savings for the optimized part. You can modify the settings and then
calculate the savings or simply select Close to dismiss the window.
2102
VERICUT Help
If you prefer not to have the OptiPath Savings Calculator window display at the end of
processing, toggle the Show this dialog at end of optimization feature in the OptiPath
Savings Calculator window off (not checked).
If you had the View Charts at Process End feature toggled on, the View Force Charts
window will also display.
14. If you ran Force in Optimize mode, the following window will display enabling you to
load the optimized NC Program and run the simulation.
If you choose Yes, press the (Play) button to start the simulation.
If you choose No, the current simulation will end.
The following are the output files that get generated for a milling optimization:
_Force_distribution_FM.xls — This file contains the distribution of forces, power along
tool axis for each step in the NC program file.
_forces_FM.xls — This file contains output forces, power, torque and other information.
_Opt_forces_FM.xls — This file contains the optimized forces, and feed rates.
_FM_SAM_setup.dat — This file contains a summary of the settings used for the
current optimization.
fdist_FM_opt.xls — This file contains the optimized geometric and kinematics results.
Opt_feed_FM.xls — This file contains the optimization status, the programmed feedrate
and the optimized feedrate for all lines in the NC Program.
These files will be located in the Output Directory that you specified.
If you had the Additional Output for Advanced Analysis feature toggled on, the following files
will also be created in the “detailed” folder under the Output Directory that you specified.
feed_FM.xls
geometry_FM.xls
map.txt
optimization.xls
2103
VERICUT Help
View Force Charts window

Location:
Optimize menu > Optimize Control window > Force Settings tab
Optimize menu > View Force Charts
The View Force Charts window provides a graphical representation of the data generated by
Force. The data can be viewed in detail in the Force generated file _forces_FM.xls.
2104
VERICUT Help
Filename1 — The Filename 1 feature is used to specify the \path\filename of the Force file that
the charts are to be based on. Enter the complete \path\filename to the file in the Filename1
text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Set Data Directory file selection window
to specify the \path\filename. Toggle “on” (Checked) Filename1 to use the specified file for the
charts to be based on.
Filename 2 — The Filename2 feature is used to specify the \path\filename of the Force file that
the charts are to be based on. Enter the complete \path\filename to the file in the Filename2
text field or click on the (Browse) icon and use the Set Data Directory file selection window
to specify the \path\filename. Toggle “on” (Checked) Filename2 to use the specified file for the
charts to be based on.
When both Filename1 and Filename2 are toggled “on” (checked), the two charts will be
overlayed in the same chart. For example you can overlay the un-optimized results
(_forces_FM.xls) and the optimized results (_Opt_forces_FM.xls) as shown in the picture
below.
Sample Overlay Results
2105
VERICUT Help
Tool Change — The charting function allows you to run multiple tools so you can analyze all the
tools used in a single program pass. Use the Tool Change pull-down list to specify whether to
use All tools, or a specific single tool, be used for the chart.
Show multiple tools or isolate a specific tool
X Axis — The graph data along the X axis can be the cut number (the analysis segment number,
not the line number in the program) or time. Choose Cut Number or Time from the X Axis
pull-down list.
Display Units — Units can be displayed as either inch or metric. Choose Inch or Millimeter
from the Display Units pull-down list.
2106
VERICUT Help
Force Chart — This chart displays the Tangential Force (the force on the rake face), in Newtons,
along the vertical axis and the cut number along the horizontal axis
2107
VERICUT Help
Power/Torque Chart — This chart displays the Spindle Power in horsepower (HP) and Spindle
Torque in Newton Meters (Nm), along the vertical axis and the cut number along the horizontal
axis.
2108
VERICUT Help
Chip Thickness Chart — This chart displays the Maximum Chip Thickness in millimeters along
the vertical axis and the cut number along the horizontal axis.
2109
VERICUT Help
Removal Rate Chart — This chart displays the Material Removal Rate in millimeters3/minute
along the vertical axis and the cut number along the horizontal axis.
X Axis Zoom — The X Axis Zoom feature enables you zoom in or zoom out along the X Axis of
the chart.
2110
VERICUT Help
(X Axis Zoom In) — Use this icon to incrementally “zoom in” on the chart along the X
axis.
(X Axis Zoom Out) — Use this icon to incrementally zoom out on the chart along the X
axis.
(X Axis Fit) — Use this icon to “fit” the entire chart chart along the X axis into the
window.
2111
VERICUT Help
Slide Bar — Use the slide bar to move right and left along the X axis to view various areas
along the chart.
Tips:
1. Holding the cursor over a specific point along the chart will display a window with specific
information about that location as shown in the picture below. Currently, this feature is
only available for the baseline chart.
2. If the NC Program panel is displayed, you can click on a specific point along the chart and
the corresponding line in the NC program will become highlighted as shown in the picture
below.
2112
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, G-Code Output Options tab
The features on the G-Code Output Options tab enable you to configure how the machine
control will process machine code data and configure settings referenced when G-Code NC
program files are optimized by OptiPath. The G-Code Output Options tab is only available when
NC Program Type is set to G-Code Data.
OptiPath & Curve Fit tab — Features on this tab enable you to configure settings referenced
when G-Code NC program files are optimized by OptiPath.
General tab — Features on this tab enable you to configure general guidelines for how the
control processes machine code data and number equations.
2113
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, G-Code Output Options tab,

OptiPath & Curve Fit tab
The features on the G-Code Output Options tab: OptiPath & Curve Fit tab enable you to
configure settings referenced when G-Code tool path files are optimized by OptiPath.
number, if any, that appears on the original block processed. This typically results in multiple
blocks having the same sequence number. The features on this tab are the same as those found
on the Control Settings window: OptiPath & Curve Fit tab.
Auto Sequence Numbering — When active, OptiPath re-sequences optimized NC program
records in ascending order. The Sequence Increment Value (see below) is used for the
beginning sequence number, and as the increment value for subsequent sequence numbers.
Both optimized and non-optimized blocks with sequence numbers are re-sequenced. Sequence
numbers are not added to un-optimized blocks without a sequence number.
NOTE: If the general control setting Default Word="N", then "N" does not appear in the
sequence number. The result is a sequence number without a word, for example: "50G01X5",
such as required by Heidenhain controls.
2114
VERICUT Help
Add Sequence Number to Added Blocks — When active, adds sequence numbers to blocks
added during optimization via the Add More Cuts OptiPath setting.
Sequence Increment Value — Initial value and increment value for re-sequencing optimized G-
Code NC program records.
Word Value Spacing — When active, includes a space between word/value pairs in the
optimized NC program file. Un-optimized records do not receive spacing. When this feature is
not used, optimized NC program records are not spaced.
2115
VERICUT Help
Add Date/Time Stamp to Optimized File — When active, a Date/Time Stamp is added to the
optimized file.
To G-Code Output Options tab
2116
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, G-Code Output Options tab,

General tab
The features on the G-Code Output Options tab: General tab enable you to configure general
guidelines for how the control processes machine code data and number equations.
The features on this tab are the same as those found on the Control Settings window: General
tab.
Control Type — Sets the type of NC control being used. Choosing the proper option establishes
a mode of operation consistent with how the control processes NC data.
Options are:
Generic — Fanuc and most other controls using standard controller functions.
NUM — French-made control. This option affects how G-Code data is interpreted, for
example: how variables are initialized and processed, and how to interpret parameters to
macros that shift the location of the tool path.
2117
VERICUT Help
Heidenhain Conversational — Heidenhain Conversational control. This option causes

VERICUT to recognize the "L" word as an optimizable word. Also, the "L" word is included
with any cuts added during optimization.
Siemens — This feature activates special processing for Siemens controls.
Toshiba — This feature activates special processing for Toshiba controls.
Heidenhain ISO — This feature activates special processing for Heidenhain ISO controls.
K&T — This feature activates special processing for Kearney & Trecker controls.
Okuma OSP — This feature activates special processing for Okuma OSP controls.
Calculation Tolerance — Tolerance for rounding mathematical evaluations, such as
determining if two calculated values are equal to, greater than, or lesser than each other.
NOTE: The Calculation Tolerance should be adjusted to eliminate "invalid circle" errors
caused by circle calculations that produce differences larger than the tolerance value when
processing G-Code data.
Order of Math Operations — Order in which math operations are performed.
Options are:
Rules of Precedence — Follow the basic rules of math precedence:
1. Perform exponential (power).
2. Perform multiplication and division operations.
3. Perform addition and subtraction operations, example: 5 + 5.3 * 3 * sin(30)= 12.95
Enclosing math operations in parenthesis causes them to be performed before those
not enclosed in parenthesis. The same rules of precedence are applied to math
operations enclosed in parenthesis.
Left to Right — Use left to right sequence, example: 5 + 5.3 * 3 * sin(30)= 15.45
Default Word — Word assumed by VERICUT for NC data blocks beginning with numbers, such
as NC data for some Heidenhain controls. For example, for VERICUT to interpret blocks like
"50G01X5", set Default Word to "N". VERICUT then interprets the block without error as
"N50G01X5".
Initialization File — Use this feature to specify the OptiPath Initialization File to be used. Click
on the (Add Setup Initialization File) icon to display the Setup Initialization Files file
selection window and use it to specify the \path\filename of the Setup Initialization File to be
used.
Use the (Clear Setup Initialization File) to clear the Initialization File text field.
2118
VERICUT Help
Use the (Edit Setup Initialization File) to open the specified Setup Initialization File in a
To G-Code Output Options tab
2119
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, Learn Mode Options tab
The features on the Learn Mode Options tab enable you to control how and when OptiPath
records are written to the Tool Learn Library file during Learn From NC Program processing.
NOTE: Plunge cutting operations are not supported by OptiPath. Learn From NC Program will
ignored plunge cuts during processing.
The features on the Learn Mode Options tab enable you to override the default values for
Minimum Feedrate Change, Clean-up Feedrate, Minimum Cut Feedrate and Maximum Cut
Feedrate without going to the OptiPath Control window: Settings tab.
The Learn Mode Options tab is only active when OptiPath Mode, on the OptiPath Control
window: Settings tab, is set to Learn From Toolpath.
Tool Learn Library — Use to specify the Tool Library file that is to receive the "learned"
OptiPath records. Enter the \path\filename in the Tool Learn Library text field or click on the
(Browse) icon and use the Tool Learn Library file selection window to specify the
\path\filename.
2120
VERICUT Help
Append to Existing Tool Library — If toggled "On", Learn From NC Program appends OptiPath
records to the existing Tool Library file for the current project file. Otherwise the "Tool Library
to be created" window will display enabling you to specify the /path/filename for the new Tool
Library file to be created.
Update Optimization Settings for Existing Records — If toggled "On", existing OptiPath records
are updated with new volume, chip thickness, and spindle speed values.
NOTE: If Update Optimization Settings for Existing Records is toggled "On", and the same
tool is loaded multiple times in the NC program, the Tool Library file produced by Learn From
NC Program, will have only one record for the tool. The settings for the tool are based on the
"worst case" cut condition of all cuts made with the tool during the current NC program. If
toggled "Off", a record will be created for any optimizable tool that does not have a record. The
record will only be created for the first occurrence of a tool.
Reset and Optimize after Learning — If toggled "On", VERICUT automatically resets and
optimizes the NC program after the updated Tool Library file is created. Otherwise, you will be
prompted whether or not you want to optimize the NC program using the newly created Tool
Library file.
Minimum Feedrate Change — Specifies the minimum change from the current optimized feed
rate that will cause a new optimized feed rate to be output. This feature controls the quantity
of feed rates output to the optimized NC program file. A small value causes more optimized
feed rates to be output than when a larger value is entered.
Default — When selected, sets the default Minimum Feedrate Change = 1 IPM or 25
Clean-up Feedrate — Feed rate used when the tool is adjacent to, but not removing material.
This condition is commonly referred to as a "spring pass".
Default — When selected, sets the default clean-up feed rate as follows:
G-Code NC program = 50% of the Max Feed Velocity of the machine's X-axis.
Tip: Set the Clean-up Feedrate to be less than the Air Cut Feedrate, since actual cutting leaves
small amounts of material from tool deflection.
Minimum Cut Feedrate — Specifies the minimum optimized feed rates that can be output
Default option — When selected, sets the default minimum feed rate = 1 IPM or 25
Maximum Cut Feedrate — Specifies the maximum optimized feed rates that can be output
2121
VERICUT Help
Default — When selected, sets the default maximum feed rate as follows:
G-Code NC program = 45% of the Max Feed Velocity of the machine's X-axis.
Air Cut Feed Rate — This option is useful for reducing time of proven NC programs, without
Default — when selected, the air cut feed rate is determined as follows:
G-Code NC program = Max Feed Velocity of the machine's X-axis.
APT NC program = Fast Feed value.
2122
VERICUT Help
Optimize Control window, APT Output Options tab
The features on the APT Output Options tab enable you to configure settings referenced when
APT NC programs are optimized.
Output Number of Decimal Places — Use the text field to specify the number of decimal places
that are to be output when OptiPath adds records. The default value is 10.
2123
VERICUT Help
Compare Files (Compare NC Programs window)
Location:
OptiPath menu > Compare Files
Toolbar short cut:
The Compare Files option opens the Compare NC Program Files window enabling you to select
and compare the original NC program file and the optimized NC program file.
Toolpath Type — Select APT or G-Code Data.

Original NC Program — Enter the \path\file name in the Original NC Program text field of the
file containing the original NC program records, or click on the (Browse) icon and use the
Original NC program file selection window to specify the file.
Optimized NC Program — Enter the \path\filename in the Optimized NC Program text field of
the filecontaining the optimized NC program records, or click on the (Browse) icon and use
the Optimized NC Program file selection window to specify the \path\filename.
2124
VERICUT Help
Previous Difference — Use the icon to step back through the file to the previous
difference.
Next Difference — Use the icon to step forward through the file to the next difference.
Line Number or Search Text — Use to enter a line number or a string of text to search for.
Goto Line Number — Use the icon to move the cursor in the file listing to the line number
Search Forward — Use the icon to search forward in the file listing for the text string
Search Backward — Use the icon to search backward in the file listing for the text string
Compare — Starts the compare of the two specified NC program files.
Close — Closes the Compare NC Programs window.
Stop — Use the icon to stop the compare.
2125
VERICUT Help
Savings Calculator (OptiPath Savings Calculator window)

Location:
OptiPath menu > Savings Calculator
Toolbar short cut:
The Savings Calculator option opens the OptiPath Savings Calculator window enabling you to
enter shop specific information and use the information available from using OptiPath to
optimize the current part to calculate the both the part savings, and the workshop savings
associated with using OptiPath. User entered settings are stored in the Preferences File (ref.
Preferences File in the Getting Started with VERICUT section of VERICUT Help).
OptiPath data must be available before you can open the Savings Calculator window. Trying to
open the window before there is OptiPath data will result in the message, “No OptiPath records
found for any tool.”, being output below the Logger.
2126
VERICUT Help
Part Savings
Original Time (hh:mm) — VERICUT automatically populates the Original Time field using
the log file's Original Total Time: value as the default in the format Hours:Minutes. If the
Original Total Time: value does not exist, zero is used as the default. You have can modify
the value as appropriate. Once you modify the default, the value is stored in the
preferences file and will be used by VERICUT as the new default value.
Optimized Time (hh:mm) — VERICUT automatically populates the Optimized Time field
using the log file's Optimized Total Time: value as the default in the format Hours:Minutes.
If the Optimized Total Time: value does not exist, zero is used as the default. You can
modify the value as appropriate. Once you modify the default, the value is stored in the
preferences file will be used by VERICUT as the new default value.
Percent Time Savings (%) — VERICUT automatically populates the Percent Time Savings
field using the log file's Total Time Difference: value as the default. If the Total Time
Difference: value does not exist, zero is used as the default. You can modify the value as
appropriate. Once you modify the default, the value is stored in the preferences file will be
used by VERICUT as the new default value.
Number of Parts — Enter the number of parts to be made in this field.
Machine Hourly Rate ($/hour) — Enter the hourly rate of the machine to be used to cut the
parts in this field.
Time Saved On These Parts (hh:mm) — VERICUT displays the calculated time saved on
these parts in this field in the following format Hours:Minutes. The value is calculated as
follows:
Time Saved On These Parts = (Original Time – Optimized Time) * Number of Parts
Money Saved on These Parts ($) — VERICUT displays the calculated money saved on these
parts in this field. The value is calculated as follows:
Money Saved on These Parts = Time Saved On These Parts * Machine Hourly Rate
Calculate Savings for These Parts — Click on the Calculate Savings for These Parts button
to calculate Time Saved On These Parts and Money Saved on These Parts.
2127
VERICUT Help
Workshop Savings
Shop Hourly Rate ($/hour) — Enter your shop’s hourly rate in dollars per hour in this field.
Number of Machines — Enter the number of machines in your shop in this field.
Machining Hours per Shift (hours) — Enter the number of machining hours per shift in this
field.
Number of Shifts — Enter the number of shifts per day in this field.
Number of Work Days per Year — Enter the number of working days per year in this field.
Total Yearly Savings ($) — VERICUT displays your calculated yearly savings in this field. The
value is calculated as follows:
Total Yearly Savings = Shop Hourly Rate * Number of Machines * Machining Hours Per
Shift * Number of Shifts * Number of Work Days Per Year * Percent Time Savings
Calculate Yearly Workshop Savings — Click on the Calculate Yearly Workshop Savings
button to calculate Total Yearly Savings.
Show this dialog at end of optimization — When toggled “On” (checked) this dialog is
displayed at the end of OptiPath processing.
Close — Closes the OptiPath Savings Calculator window.
2128
VERICUT Help
Interactive (Interactive OptiPath panel)

Location:
OptiPath menu > Interactive
Toolbar short cut:
The Interactive option opens the Interactive OptiPath panel enabling you to interact with
OptiPath to optimize a previously simulated NC program. Opening the Interactive OptiPath
panel puts VERICUT in NC Program Review mode.
The Interactive OptiPath panel is one of the dockable panels enabling you to dock it inside the
NOTE: When the Interactive OptiPath panel is docked, make sure that you click in the panel
(Close) — Located at the end of the tab, this icon enables you to close the Interactive
OptiPath panel.
(Close) — Closes the Interactive OptiPath panel. This icon is only displayed when the
Interactive OptiPath panel is not docked.
2129
VERICUT Help
The Interactive OptiPath panel consists of five distinct areas. Each of the areas is described
below.
NC PROGRAM LISTING AREA

The NC Program Listing area contains a listing of the NC program records. Features in this area
enable you to edit, save, or print the NC program, and define display characteristics, and ranges
for replay of the NC program.
2130
VERICUT Help
(Search) — Use this icon to display a window with features that will enable you to search
for a specific line number or for a string of text in the NC program listing. You can click on the
(Search) icon again to close the search tool window.
Line Number or Search Text — Use this text field to enter a line number or a string of text to
search for.
Search Forward — Searches forward in the NC program listing for the text string specified
in the Line Number or Search Text field.
Close— Closes the search tool window.
2131
VERICUT Help
NC Program and Display Features
Setup — The Setup field displays the NC Program setup that the NC Program List records are
related to. The Setup field is grayed out because it cannot be changed.
NC Program — The NC Program field displays the NC program file name that the NC Program
List records are related to. The NC Program field is grayed out because it cannot be changed.
Line Display — The Line Display feature enables you to specify whether or not to display the
lines representing the tool's path in the graphics area while in NC Program Review. Choose Off
(do not display), or On (display) from the pull-down list.
Tool Display — The Tool Display feature enables you to specify how the tool is to be displayed
in the graphics area while in NC Program Review. Choose Off (do not display tool), Solid, or
Translucent from the pull-down list.
NC Program Listing
The NC program listing shows all of the records in the "current" NC program.
The line number of the "current" record and the name of the "current" NC program file are
shown above the NC program listing.
2132
VERICUT Help
Start/Current/End Markers
The Start/Current/End markers are found along the left side of the NC Program Listing area.
The Start and End markers are used to define the range of NC program records that will be
replayed using the "current" tool. The Current marker moves to the NC program record that is
currently being replayed.
The Start marker is represented by the green triangle and is automatically placed on the NC
program record containing the Tool Change command for the Tool that is currently highlighted
in the Tool List. The NC program record is displayed in blue text.
The Current marker is represented by the aquamarine arrow , is initially displayed at the
Start marker and moves during processing to indicate the NC program record that is currently
being replayed.
The End marker is represented by the red square , and is automatically placed at the last NC
program record before the next Tool Change.
You can easily identify each marker by moving the cursor over it.
NOTES:
1. You cannot move the Start and End markers beyond their automatic settings while in
Interactive OptiPath mode.
2. The Display to Box feature in the NC Program Listing area's,
TOOL LIST
The Tool List contains the tools associated with all tool change events in the current NC
Program. The tools are listed in the order they are simulated. The tools in the "Optimizable”
column are end mills (not drills or turning tools) that have "active" OptiPath records associated
with them.
If a tool was loaded multiple times during the NC program, there will be multiple entries for the
tool in the Tool List. This enables you to select the cutting sequence to be used for this tool
when setting the OptiPath data.
2133
VERICUT Help
OPTIPATH CUTTER SHAPE GRAPHIC

The cutter shape automatically displays for the tool in
the Tool List that the OptiPath record is associated
with. VERICUT refers to the cutter shape to calculate
material removal volume and other machining related
data via features on the OptiPath Manager Feed/Speed
tab.
Use the icons to display/not display the OptiPath
Cutter Shape Graphic.
TOOL DISPLAY AREA
The Tool Display Area displays the tool

assembly associated with the tool that is
currently highlighted in the Tool List.
Colors are used to differentiate between

the Cutter and the Holder components as
well as the cutting and non-cutting
portions of the Tool component.
2134
VERICUT Help
OPTIPATH DATA PANEL AREA
The OptiPath Data Panel Area, of the Interactive OptiPath panel, displays the current OptiPath
settings, under the "Setting" column, for the tool that is currently highlighted in the Tool List.
The "Simulated" column displays the actual values calculated using the optimization data stored
during the simulation with Interactive OptiPath mode turned on. Changing the OptiPath
Settings immediately updates the "Simulated" values highlighted in yellow.
The OptiPath features are the same as those found in the OptiPath window. See OptiPath
window, in the Project Tree section of VERICUT Help, for detailed information on each of the
OptiPath features as well as information on OptiPath in general.
The following features enable you to specify what you want to do when you are finished
interactively optimizing the current NC program.
Optimize this program with Continue or Close — When this feature is toggled "on" (checked)
the "current" NC program will be optimized using the new settings when you select either
Continue to Next Program or Close.
2135
VERICUT Help
Continue to Next Program — When Optimize this program with Continue or Close is toggled
"on" (checked), the current NC program will be optimized with the new settings and then the
next NC program in the setup will be displayed in the Interactive OptiPath panel.
When Optimize this program with Continue or Close is toggled "off" (not checked), the next NC
program in the setup will be displayed in the Interactive OptiPath panel without optimizing the
"current" NC program with the new settings.
Close — When Optimize this program with Continue or Close is toggled "on" (checked), the
current NC program will be optimized with the new settings and then the Interactive OptiPath
panel will be closed.
When Optimize this program with Continue or Close is toggled "off" (not checked), the
Interactive OptiPath panel will be closed without optimizing the "current" NC program with the
new settings.
Cancel — Cancels the current interactive optimization session and closes the Interactive
OptiPath panel.
2136
VERICUT Help
Using Interactive OptiPath
Introduction
Interactive OptiPath is a new optimization module based on user interaction to optimize from a
previously simulated project. The purpose of the interaction is to:
a) create optimization settings based on virtual iterations within VERICUT
b) create an optimized program once you are satisfied with the results of the trials.
The project file that is to be interactively optimized is assumed to have been simulated, is error-
free, and ready to be optimized.
First, OptiPath Mode, in the OptiPath Control window, needs to be set to Interactive. Next, the
project file is simulated. The OptiPath "OPTI" status light turns yellow, indicating that a
temporary file has been created and that optimization data is being saved to it. VERICUT also
displays the following message in the logger: "Saving data for interactive optimization in a
temporary file".
As with "standard" OptiPath, OptiPath Interactive mode is only in effect for the current setup.
OptiPath stops saving data and turns off save mode when one of the following occurs:
 When the end of the current Setup is reached.
 When OptiPath Mode, in the OptiPath Control window, is set to "Off".
The OptiPath "OPTI" status light turns dark green (off) when save mode is turned off. VERICUT
also displays the following message in the logger: "Optimization data saved in a temporary file,
size = xxx.xx MB".
OptiPath Interactive mode can be turned on/off at any point during the simulation. The
temporary file will only contain optimization data for the optimizable NC records which were
processed while OptiPath Interactive mode was turned "on".
The temporary file that was created is destroyed when one of the following happens:
 after using Model Reset
 when a new project is loaded
 when the VERICUT session is closed.
2137
VERICUT Help
Optimizing a Project File with Interactive OptiPath

The following procedure assumes that the project file that is to be interactively optimized has
been simulated, is error-free, and ready to be optimized. It is also assumed that the VERICUT
session has been started and that the project file that is to be optimized is loaded.
1. Use one of the following methods to open the OptiPath Control window.
 In the VERICUT main menu select OptiPath menu > Control
 In the VERICUT Toolbar click on the (OptiPath) icon

2. On the OptiPath Control window: Setting tab, do the following:
 Enter the /path/filename of the file that you want to receive the optimized NC
program, in the Optimized File text field or click on the (Browse) icon to display
the Optimized NC Program File file selection window and use it to specify the
/path/filename.
 Set OptiPath Mode to Interactive, and then select OK to accept the changes and
close the OptiPath Control window, or Apply to accept the changes and leave the
OptiPath Control window open.
 Notice that OptiPath "OPTI" status light turned yellow, indicating that a temporary
file has been created and that optimization data is being saved to it. Also notice that
the "Saving data for interactive optimization in a temporary file" message is
displayed in the logger.
3. Use the (Play/Start-Stop Options) VCR button to start the simulation. When the
simulation is finished, you will be prompted to "Open Interactive OptiPath?", select Yes.
This will open the Interactive OptiPath panel.
You can also open the Interactive OptiPath panel at any time during the Simulation while in
Interactive OptiPath mode. In the VERICUT main menu select OptiPath menu > Interactive
to display the Interactive OptiPath panel.
This enables you to stop the simulation, open the Interactive OptiPath panel and use it to
experiment with the settings to get the desired results, and then close the Interactive
OptiPath panel and continue the simulation in Interactive OptiPath mode.
If you try to open the Interactive OptiPath panel before any optimization data has been
saved to the temporary file, the Interactive OptiPath panel will not open and the following
message, "No optimization data saved for this job. Run OptiPath in Interactive mode first."
will be displayed in the Logger.
4. Use the features in the Interactive OptiPath panel to optimize the current NC program
tool by tool. Select the first tool that you want to optimize in the Tool List. Use the NC
Program Listing Area to navigate the NC program blocks associated with the "current"
2138
VERICUT Help
tool. As you step through the NC program, watch the optimization results for each block
in the Simulated column in the OptiPath Data Panel Area. If necessary, change
optimization settings and re-valuate the results as you step through the NC program.
5. Once you are satisfied with the optimization results for the "current" tool, select the
next optimizable tool in the Tool List and repeat the process described in Step 4.
6. When you are satisfied with the optimization results for all of the tools in the "current"
NC program, toggle "on" (checked) the Optimize this program with Continue or Close
feature.
If there are additional NC Programs in the "current" Setup, go to Step 7. If there are no
additional NC programs in the "current" Setup, go to Step 8.
7. If there are additional NC programs in the "current" setup, select Continue to Next
Program. VERICUT will write out the optimized NC program to the file specified in Step 2
and then load the next NC program into the Interactive OptiPath panel. Repeat Steps 4,
5, and 6 for the new NC program. Repeat the process until all NC programs have been
optimized.
8. If there are no additional NC programs in the "current" Setup, select Close. VERICUT will
write out the optimized NC program to the file specified in Step 2 and then close the
Interactive OptiPath panel.
9. Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for any additional Setups in the VERICUT project file.
2139
VERICUT Help
View Force Charts
The View Force Charts option displays the View Force Charts window enabling you to view the
following Force generated charts.
Force Chart
Power/Torque Chart
Chip Thickness Chart
Removal Rate Chart
See the View Force Charts window topic above, for additional information.
2140
VERICUT Help
Help Menu
2141
VERICUT Help
On VERICUT
Location:
Help menu > On VERICUT
The On VERICUT option opens the VERICUT Online Help.
2142
VERICUT Help
License
Location:
Help menu > License
The License option opens the License window showing the status of VERICUT licenses on your
license server.
License Server Hostname — The name of the license server that has the VERICUT Licenses.
Customer Name — The name of the company that purchased and is running the VERICUT
Software.
Customer ID — The company’s ID number. This is the number that you will be asked for when
you call for Technical Support.
2143
VERICUT Help
Server ID — The license server ID number.

Host ID — The physical address of the computer that is running VERICUT.
Feature — This column shows the VERICUT feature licenses that are available on your license
server.
Status — This column shows the expiration dated of the VERICUT feature license.
Total Available — This column shows the total number of VERICUT feature licenses that are
available on your license server.
Total in Use — This column shows the total number of VERICUT feature licenses that are
currently in use.
Current Session — This column shows the total number of VERICUT feature licenses that you
are using in your session.
Check In — This feature enables you to return any “optional” license that is being used by the
current session to the license server. VERICUT licenses that are in use by the current session are
highlighted and indicated by a Yes in the Current Session column as shown in the picture
above.
Optional licenses used by VERICUT that can be returned to the license server are:
Multi-Axis
OptiPath
AUTO-DIFF
Model Export
Machine Simulation
Probing
840D VNCK
NX Interface
CAD Model Interfaces
These are the only licenses that can be checked in. Once an optional license is returned to the
license server it may be checked out immediately by another user, including the same user who
just returned it.
Selecting the Check In button in the License window displays the License Check In window
shown below.
2144
VERICUT Help
The License Check In window will display all licenses that are being used by the current session
that are eligible to be checked in. Use the checkboxes next to the licenses to specify which
license, or licenses, that you want to check in then select OK. Use the Cancel button to close
the License Check In window without checking in any licenses.
Save — Opens a file selection window enabling you to save the contents of the License window
as a text file.
Close — Closes the License window.
2145
VERICUT Help
About VERICUT
Location:
Help menu > About VERICUT
The About VERICUT option opens the About window showing version and customer related
information.
2146

Vericut Help PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Vericut Help PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Back to CGTech Help Library

NC program verification process with VERICUT:

VERICUT Licenses and Options

Licensing for VERICUT

VERICUT with SpaceMouse

Other tips and tricks

Overview of Using VERICUT

Requirements for a simulation

Requirement NC Machine Tool VERICUT

Workpiece Metal, or other stock material Stock model

NC data NC program file(s) NC program file(s)

Cutting tools Cutting tools Descriptions of cutting tools

Holding fixtures Clamp/fixture hardware Clamp/fixture models

Designed part Not available until machined CAD-designed model, or other

Operator instructions Operator instructions Operator instructions

Basic Steps for Setting up a VERICUT Project

1. In the Project Tree, enter the settings for Setup 1.

2. Save the Project (File menu > Save As)

3. Play Setup 1 (Play/Start – Stop Options)

5. Add or Import Setup 2.

10. Play Setup 2 (Play/Start – Stop Options)

12. Save the final Project. (File menu > Save)

VERICUT Axes and Coordinate Systems

Machine axes — (XmchYmchZmch) represent VERICUT's "base" or "world" coordinate system.

COORDINATE SYSTEMS (CSYS)

A user-defined coordinate system is typically used to relocate an NC Program for proper

Using Mathematical Equations/Expressions in VERICUT

Equation / Expression Value as interpreted by VERICUT

sqrt(sqr(4.5) + sqr(2.3) + sqr(6.5)) 8.2334

1.256 ** 1.2 1.3145

ec ** (1.2 * log(1.256)) 1.3145

sqrt(sqr(3) + sqr(5) - c * cos(a)) 4

The following mathematical functions/features are available for use within

sqr or square Square

sqrt or root Square Root

abs Absolute Value

int or trunc Integer Part

frac Fractional Part

nint Nearest Integer

pi Ratio of circle circumference to diameter

sin Sine (argument in degrees)

cos Cosine (argument in degrees)

tan Tangent (argument in degrees)

asin Inverse Sine (result in degrees)

acos Inverse Cosine (result in degrees)

atan Inverse Tangent (result in degrees)

atan2(y:x) Inverse Tangent (result in degrees)

sinh Hyperbolic Sine

cosh Hyperbolic Cosine

tanh Hyperbolic Tangent

log Natural Logarithm

analog or exp Natural Anti-Logarithm

log10 Base 10 Logarithm

alog10 Base 10 Anti-Logarithm

Working with VERICUT Files

Introduction to Using VERICUT Files

Common VERICUT files

Configuring VERICUT to start with a custom Project file

By default, VERICUT starts with either the "vericut.VcProject" (inch sessions) or

Where VERICUT looks for referenced files

Summary of VERICUT File Types

Types of VERICUT files

VERICUT File Descriptions